LTC controller-books-M-2001D-IB PDF

Instruction Book
M‑2001D Digital
Tapchanger Control
CONTROLS
Digital Tapchanger
Control M-2001D
Digital Tapchanger Control for Transformers
and Regulators
• LTC transformer, substation regulator,
and line regulator control provides reliable
operation with expanded capabilities
• Adapter panels to retrofit popular industry
tapchanger controls
• USB 1.1 Communications Port for quick
field‑updatable programming
• Smart Reverse Power detection/operation with
VT configuration for source and load sides
• Demand metering/Data Logging with
Date/Time Stamp (Single/Three-Phase)
• Harmonic Analysis
• LDC with R & X or Z-compensation
• SCAMP (SCADA Controllable Auto/Manual
Pushbutton) Adapter Panel Auto/Manual Switch
State can be changed by a SCADA command
• Sequence of Events Recording
• SCADA HeartBeat
• Smart Flash SD Card
• Source PT Voltage Input
• CBEMA Monitoring
• VAr Bias for downstream coordination with capacitor controls

• Tap position knowledge by four KeepTrack™ methods
• Transformer paralleling by circulating current, Master/Follower (peer to peer)
circuitry, or ∆VAR® methods
• LCD display (rated –20 to +70 degrees Celsius) or Vacuum Fluorescent display
optionally available (rated –40 to +80 degrees Celsius)
• Optional Control Power Backup Input for Fiber Optic communication loop-through
• DNP3.0, MODBUS® and IEC 61850 Communications Protocols available
• Optional Ethernet RJ45 or Fiber Optic Ethernet
M‑2001D Digital Tapchanger Control
Features • Operations Counter

The M-2001D includes the following features and • Resettable Operations Counter
can be used for LTCs or regulators where SCADA
communications are desired. • Tap Position Record
• Adjustable Bandcenter • Auto/Off/Manual Switch Status via SCADA
• Adjustable Bandwidth • A or B Regulator Type Selection
• Adjustable VAr Bias • Control Voltage Input
• Line Drop Compensation, R, X and Z • Motor Power Input

Compensation with ±72 Volt range • Source Voltage Input
• Time Delay, Definite and Inverse • Line Current Input
• Intertap Time Delay • Raise Output
• Four Settings Profiles • Lower Output
• Selectable Outputs, Continuous or Pulsed • Motor Current Profiling
• Reverse Power Operation with eight control • Up to 30 unique 15 character User Access
selections including a distributed generation Codes (Level 1 or Level 2)
mode and Smart Reverse Power Operation
with two Auto Determination modes • 20 Character by 2 Row LCD or optional
Vacuum Fluorescent Display
• CT to VT Phasing Correction
• "Hot Buttons" provide quick access to
• Real-Time Metering of measured and setpoints, configuration and communications
calculated parameters (Single/Three-
Phase) • S-2001D TapTalk ® Communications
Software
• Demand Metering with selectable time
interval • Adapter Panel Auto/Manual Switch Manual
control outside of microprocessor
• Drag Hands Operation
• Front USB 1.1 Communications Port
• Adjustable Line Overcurrent Tapchange
Inhibit • External Inhibit of Auto Tapchange
• Voltage Limits • Circulating Current Input with Circulating
Current, optional ∆VAR ® Paralleling
• Tap Position Limits Methods, and optional Master/Follower
• Auto Runback (due to overvoltage) (peer to peer) Paralleling (requires Ethernet
and IEC 61850)
• Auto Runup (due to undervoltage)
• Front Panel LEDs for Out-of-Band Raise,
• Three independent Voltage Reduction Steps Out-of-Band Lower, Reverse Power Flow
• Smart Voltage Reduction Rev Pwr Detected, ALARM in effect,
Voltage Reduction V/RED in Effect, CPU
• Fast Voltage Recovery OK, Auto Operation Block MANUAL,
• Sequential and Non-Sequential Operation SCADA Control blocked LOCAL and Com1
TX and RX
• VT Ratio Correction
• Front-Panel Voltage Reduction 1 & 2 Inputs
• Self-Test Alarm Output Contacts as well as (Binary) inputs (3 Steps Total)
• User Programmable Alarm Contacts • Neutral Position Detect (Binary) and
Counter
• Tap Position Knowledge by:
– Contact KeepTrack™ • Counter Input (Binary) for Regulator
applications/Complete Sequence Input for
– Shaft Coupled KeepTrack™ Transformer applications
– Resistor Divider KeepTrack™
• Seal-in/Switch Status Input (Binary)
– Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™
• Motor Seal-In Block/Alarm
All brand or product names appearing in this document are the trademark or registered trademark of their respective holders.
–2–
Features (Cont.) Optional Features

• Non-Sequential/SCADA Block Input • Ethernet Port COM3 (10/100 BaseT) is
(Binary) available through a RJ45 jack or ST Fiber
• Seal-in Output (Cooper Applications) on the top of the control. This port supports
DNP over TCP/IP, MODBUS® over TCP/IP,
• COM1 (top), RS-485 and Fiber Optic Port and IEC 61850 over TCP/IP
(ST and V-pin connectors available with
62.5 and 200 micro fiber supported) • Local Wireless Bluetooth capability
• COM2 (top), RS-232 and optional • Vacuum Fluorescent Display (rated –40 to
Bluetooth® (user selectable if Bluetooth is +80 degrees Celsius)
installed) • Control Power Back-Up Input – input
• Communication Protocols include DNP3.0, (+12 Vdc) for backup of Fiber Optic
MODBUS® and IEC 61850 (IEC 61850 only communication loop-through
available with optional ethernet port) • IEC 61850 Communications
• Smart Flash SD Card Slot supporting SD • ∆VAR® Paralleling
and SDHC SD cards
• Master/Follower Paralleling (peer to peer)
• Smart Flash SD Card can be linked to one
or multiple controls providing a physical
security "Key" which provides Level 2 User Accessories
Access to the control when the SD Card is • M-2025B(D) Current Loop Interface Module
inserted for settings manipulation – Current-To-Voltage analog converter for
• Suppor ts Station and Feeder Level tap position sensors
DNP addressing in addition to individual • M-2026 AC-DC Control Power Backup
addressing for Smart Grid applications Supply
• One pushbutton access to user configurable • M-2027 Control Power Backup Supply–AC
Wakeup screen for manual data recording Only
with Smart Flash SD Card saving feature
• M-2948 Tap Position Sensor
• Power Quality which consists of:
– Sequence of Events Recorder (132
events)
– Data Logging
– Harmonic Analysis
– Oscillography
– CBEMA monitoring to detect sags and
swells and trigger data collection and
alarming functions
• TapPlot ® Oscillograph Data Analysis
Software
• Individual Tap Wear Alarm
• Run Through Neutral, Automatic reversing
switch swiping
• Remote Voltage Bias
–3–
Feature Information
Bandcenter: Adjustable from 100 V to 135 V in 0.1 V increments.
Bandwidth: Adjustable from 1 V to 10 V in 0.1 V increments.
Line Drop Compensation: R and X compensation. Adjustable from –72 V to +72 V in 1 V increments.
Z compensation available with adjustment of voltage raise from 0 V to +72 V, in increments of 1 V.
Time Delay: Definite; adjustable from 1 second to 360 seconds, in 1 second increments. Inverse; adjustable
from 1 second to 360 seconds, in 1 second increments.
InterTap Time Delay: Used to introduce time delay between tap operations when control is in sequential mode;
adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds in 1.0 second increments. Counter input required.
Selectable Outputs: Continuous or pulsed. Normally, an output (raise or lower) signal is maintained when
the voltage remains outside the band. A pulsed output length is programmable from 0.2 to 12 seconds, in
increments of 0.1 second.
Reverse Power Operation:
If Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™ is applicable, unit may be set to "Block", "Regulate Forward (Ignore)", "Regulate
Reverse", "Return to Neutral", "Regulate Reverse (Measured)" or "Distributed Generation." The Regulate
Reverse feature allows separate setpoints and regulation in the reverse direction without the installation of
source‑side VTs. Distributed Generation allows alternate LDC R and X values to be applied to the control when
reverse power is detected. If Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack is disabled, then " Regulate Reverse (Measured)",
"Ignore" and "Block" modes are available. Regulate Reverse (Measured) allows the control to switch it’s voltage
sensing input from a load side VT to a source side VT if one is available and operate in Reverse Power Mode
using that input.
Smart Reverse Power (Auto Determination)
For reverse power conditions requiring more than one reverse power mode depending on the cause of the
reverse power condition; either Distributed Generation mode or Regulate In Reverse/Regulate in Reverse
Measured. The M‑2001D provides two new reverse power modes, "Auto Determination" and "Auto Determination
Measured" which allow the control to intelligently choose which reverse power mode applies at the time reverse
power is sensed.
CT to VT Phasing Correction: Adjustable from 0° to +330° in 30° increments.
Load Overcurrent Tapchange Inhibit: Adjustable from 50 mA to 640 mA of line current for 200 mA CT or
0.2 A to 3.2 A for 1 A CT display and 1.2 A to 16.0 A for 5 A CT display. External auxiliary CT required for 1.0 A
and 5 A CT inputs.
Voltage Limits, Tap Position Limits, Runback and Runup: Overvoltage and Undervoltage limits are
independently adjustable from 95 V to 135 V in 0.1 V increments. Upper and lower tap position limits may be
set by user, with tap position knowledge active. An adjustable Runback deadband (above the overvoltage limit)
of 1 V to 4 V is available, which is used to set the runback limit. Additionally, an adjustable Runup deadband
(below the undervoltage limit) of 1 V to 4 V is available, which is used to set the runup limit.
Voltage Reduction: Three independent steps, each adjustable from 0% to 10% in 0.1% increments of the
bandcenter setpoint can be actuated from the dedicated front-panel pushbutton or through contact inputs.
Voltage Reduction can be disabled locally and remotely if desired.
Normalizing Voltage: A Normalizing Voltage Multiplier with a range of 0.80 to 1.20 is available to be applied to
Meter Out Voltage and displayed in real time as Normalizing Voltage. The purpose of the Normalizing Voltage
is to allow the user to overcome differences in the ratio of the PT that the Load Voltage input is using versus
the PT the end user or other metering methods are using.
Inhibit of Auto Tapchange: Blocks automatic tapchanger operation in response to external contact closure
or software setting.
Non‑Sequential/SCADA Block Operation: Non-sequential/SCADA Block blocks automatic tapchanger
operation in response to external contact closure or software setting. Non-sequential/SCADA Block input also
resets the time delay upon momentary external contact closure at the non-sequential input.
–4–
Paralleling Methods:
Circulating Current: The circulating current method is standard, and may be implemented using separate
balancing equipment such as the Beckwith Electric M‑0115A Parallel Balancing Module. Consult with factory
for use with existing external master‑follower circuitry.
∆VAR® (optional): When selected, the ∆VAR1 method may be implemented by using separate balancing
equipment such as the M‑0115A Balancing Module. The ∆VAR2 method does not require the use of the M‑0115A
Balancing Module and is only applicable when paralleling two transformers.
For all methods of paralleling except ∆VAR2, overcurrent protection, such as that provided by the M‑0127A
Overcurrent Relay, is recommended.
Master/Follower(Optional): The optional Master/Follower feature employs the GOOSE messaging of the
IEC 61850 protocol to provide peer to peer communications.
∆VAR3 (future): Paralleling achieved through communication using IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging.
VT Ratio Correction: VT correction from –15 V to +15 V in 0.1 V increments.

Self-Test Alarm Output Contacts: Alerts operator to loss of power or malfunction of control. When the control
is configured for SCAMP Pushbutton Auto/Manual Switch Type, this output is not available.
User-Programmable Alarm Contacts: Alerts operator to one or more of the following system conditions:
• Communication Block • Block Raise Limit • Block Lower Limit • Backup Fail (if purchased)
• Voltage Reduction • Reverse Power Flow • Line Current Limit • Individual Tap Wear
• Tap Block Raise • Tap Block Lower • LDC/LDZ • Op Count Signal
• Abnormal Tap • VAr Bias Lag • VAr Bias Lead • RTN Fail to Operate
• Tap Changer Failure
Tap Position Knowledge

Current Loop Method: The optional M‑2025D Current Loop Interface Module receives a signal from a position
transducer and provides an input to the M‑2001D through a six pin port.
Single‑Phase Regulators: In most applications, tap position information can be maintained by means of Motor
Direct Drive KeepTrack™ logic.
Transformers: The control includes two additional methods of Tap Position Knowledge, Contact KeepTrack™
"1R1L" and "1N". These methods utilize re-assigned voltage reduction VR1 and VR2 inputs as Raise and Lower
contact inputs respectively. These inputs cause the controls "KeepTrack™" tap position status to increment.
Operation Counter: A software counter increments by one count per either an open/close/open contact operation
(X1) or an open/close or close/open contact operation (X2), and is preset by the user. A Count Window mode
registers any activity as a valid input within the count window time setting. When a Cam Follower contact input
is wired into the Counter contact input of the M‑2001D, the operation counter will increment when the counter
input sees the cam follower open and then close.
Resettable Operation Counter: A second software counter, similar to the Operation Counter, which may be
reset by the user.
Tap Position Record: Provides a record of the number of times each tap position has been passed through.
The tap position record can be reset by the user.
Tap Wear Settings: Provides the capability to determine tap wear in a regulator's tap change mechanism.
Auto/Manual Switch Status: Provides the user with the Auto/Manual switch position status through the Comm
ports. When the M‑2001D is configured for a switch status input, the switch status is read using the seal-in input
on the control. When configured for Seal-in input, the switch status is read using the counter input.
A or B Regulator Type: Allows the user to select the type of regulator being used to provide a more accurate
source voltage calculation.
–5–
SCADA HeartBeat: The purpose of the SCADA HeartBeat feature is to have two sets of settings for the control
and switch between these two setting sets based on the presence or absence of SCADA communications
(utilizing the DNP or optional IEC 61850 protocol) to the control. The SCADA HeartBeat feature can be enabled
from TapTalk® Communications Software. There are four different types of SCADA HeartBeat modes that can
be selected:
• SCADA HeartBeat for transformer control applications (LTC)
• SCADA HeartBeat for regulator control applications (Regulator)
• Profile Switching – This mode allows the user to specify a different settings profile to operate by while
communication is active
• Profile Switching (GOOSE) – with the optional IEC 61850 protocol
SCADA Remote Manual Mode: The purpose of the SCADA HeartBeat Remote Manual Mode is to provide a
means for a SCADA system to place the unit in Remote Manual and perform Raise and Lower operations. As
long as a Remote Manual Timer setting in the control is refreshed by the SCADA system before it times out,
the control will stay in Remote Manual. If the timer times out, the control reverts to normal Automatic operation.
VAr Bias: This feature is intended but not restricted for use with distribution feeders which have switched capacitor
banks controlled by M-2501 series Autodaptive® Capacitor Controls. Use of VAr Bias allows the M‑2001D to
coordinate it’s operation with the M-2501 series Autodaptive Control devices on the distribution system in order
to minimize losses, smooth the voltage profile and optimize VAr flow.
Optional Bluetooth: The optional Bluetooth® (V2.0 +EDR Class 1 Type) provides wireless access to the
M‑2001D. With Bluetooth the user is able to configure the control, read status and metering values as well as
change setpoints. This option can be field installed. There are two modes of operation for the Bluetooth:
Mode 0 – The device is discoverable and connectable to any client station.
Mode 1 – The device is non-discoverable but it is connectable to any client station who knows the control
Bluetooth device address indicated under “Control BT Device” in the HMI.
Mode 1 – Has been added to meet CIP requirement. (CIP-0007-4 System Security Management) (R2.3)
Source Side PT Input: The Source Side PT Input feature provides for Reverse Power regulation with measured
source side voltage. This mode consists of energizing a contact relay when reverse power is sensed which will
switch the analog voltage input from the load side to the source side. Voltage regulation will then operate on
the new measured source side voltage instead of the traditional source side voltage.
SCAMP: (SCADA Controllable Auto/Manual Pushbutton) switch allows the Auto/Manual state on an adapter
panel to be changed by a SCADA command.
–6–
Monitoring/Metering
Real-Time Metering: The following single/three-phase measured and calculated values are available in real‑time:
• Primary Voltage • Meter Out Voltage • Source Voltage
• Tap Position • Primary Source Voltage • Compensating Voltage
• Drag Hands • Primary Current • Normalizing Voltage
• Raise/Lower Timer • Primary Watts • Load Current
• Intertap Timer • Primary VAr • Power Factor
• Operation Counter • Primary VA • Frequency
• Resettable Counter • Load Voltage • Circulating/∆VAr Current
• Neutral Counter
Present Demand: The Present Demand feature captures the maximum values during the specified time interval.
Time interval can be selected as 5, 10, 15, 30, or 60 minutes.
• Demand Load Voltage • Demand Primary Current
• Primary Watts • Primary VArs
• Primary VA
Demand History (Drag Hands Operation):

The following "drag-hand" values are stored with date and time stamping and are averaged over 32 seconds:
• Min Load Voltage
• Max Load Voltage
The following "drag-hand" values are stored with date and time stamping and are calculated over the demand
time interval (5, 10, 15, 30, or 60 minutes) as selected by the user:
• Max Primary Current (Amps) • Max Primary VArs (kVAr or MVAr)
• Max Primary Watts (kW, or MW) • Max Primary VA (kVA or MVA)
• Power Factor @ Max VA
Energy Metering:
The following measured values are retained in non-volatile memory. A real time clock is utilized to record a
date/time stamp for each quantity to indicate when the period of measurement was initiated.
• Watt Hours Forward (kWh) • Lagging VAr Hours (kVArh)
• Watt Hours Reverse (kWh) • Leading VAr Hours (kVArh)
–7–
Power Quality
Sequence of Events: The Sequence of Events recorder provides comprehensive data recording (of voltage,
current, frequency etc.) Sequence of Events data can be downloaded using the communications ports to a PC
running TapTalk® Communications Software. The unit can store up to 132 events in a first in/first out memory
scheme.
The Sequence of Events can be triggered by the status change of any of the following signals:
• Raise Contact • Lower Contact • Voltage Reduction 1
• Voltage Reduction 2 • Force Lower • Raise Tap Limit
• Lower Tap Limit • Low Band • High Band
• Low Voltage Limit • High Voltage Limit • Auto Inhibit
• Non-sequential • Reverse Power • Peak Motor Current
• Avg. Motor Current • Motor Current Duration • Voltage Harmonics
• Current Harmonics • CBEMA Event 1 • CBEMA Event 2
• CBEMA Event 3 • CBEMA Event 4 • VAr Bias Active
• Sealin Fail Alarm Active • Sealin Fail Low Blk Act • Sealin Fail Raise Blk Act
• Low Current Blk Active • Motor Seal-in Input • Neutral Input
• Counter Input • Op Count Signal • HMI Active
• Individual Tap Wear Alarm
Oscillograph Recorder: The Oscillograph Recorder provides comprehensive data recording (voltage, current,
and status input/output signals) for all monitored waveforms (at 16, 32 or 64 samples per cycle). Oscillograph data
can be downloaded using the communications ports to any personal computer running TapTalk Communications
Software. Once downloaded, the waveform data can be examined and printed using the TapPlot® Oscillograph
Data Analysis Software.
Harmonic Analysis: Provides the total harmonic distortion and the harmonic content of the load voltage and
current up to the 31st harmonic.
Data Logging: A built-in data logging recorder that continually records data in non-volatile memory. Data
Logging will continue indefinitely as long as the data interval is set to a non-zero value.
• Load Voltage • Compensated Voltage • Primary Watts
• Primary VA • Primary VAr • Load Current
• Power Factor • Line Frequency • Tap Position
• Source Voltage • Primary Current • Operation Counter
• Circulating/∆VAr Current • Meter Out Voltage
CBEMA: Monitoring to detect sags and swells, trigger data collection and alarming functions.
–8–
Inputs
Control Voltage Input: Nominal 120 Vac, 60 Hz (50 Hz optional); operates properly from 90 Vac to 140 Vac.
If set at 60 Hz, the operating system frequency is from 55 to 65 Hz; if set at 50 Hz, the operating system
frequency is from 45 to 55 Hz. The burden imposed on the input is 8 VA or less. The unit should be powered
from a voltage transformer connected at the controlled voltage bus. The unit will withstand twice the voltage
input for one second and four times the voltage input for one cycle.
Motor Power Input: Nominal 120 Vac to 240 Vac, at up to 6 A as required by the load, with no wiring changes
required.
Line Current Input: Line drop compensation is provided by a current transformer input with a 0.2 A full scale
rating. A Beckwith Electric model M‑0121 (5 A to 0.2 A) or M‑0169A (5 A or 8.66 A to 0.2 A) Auxiliary Current
Transformer is available when required. The burden imposed on the current source is 0.03 VA or less at 200 mA.
The input will withstand 400 mA for two hours and 4 A for 1 second.
Circulating Current Input: Parallel operation of regulators or transformers is accommodated by a current
transformer input with a 0.2 A full scale rating. The burden imposed on the current source is 0.03 VA or less at
200 mA. The input will withstand 400 mA for two hours and 4 A for 1 second.
Optional Control Power Backup Input: (Two pin Molex connector on the top of control): The optional Control
Power Backup Input feature sustains operation of the control in the event of a loss of AC input power to the control.
Raise and Lower commands are possible if the control’s motor power remains energized. See M-2026/M-2027
Companion Control Power Backup Supplies later in the specification.
Source Side PT Input: Nominal 120 Vac, 60 Hz (50 Hz optional). If set at 60 Hz, the operating system frequency
is from 55 to 65 Hz; if set at 50 Hz, the operating system frequency is from 45 to 55 Hz. The burden imposed
on the input is 8 VA or less. The unit should be powered from a voltage transformer connected at the controlled
voltage bus. The unit will withstand twice the voltage input for one second and four times the voltage input for
one cycle.
Binary Inputs
Voltage Reduction 1 & 2 Inputs: These inputs provide three levels of programmable voltage reduction which
can be manually invoked. The Voltage Reduction 2 Input can also be programmed as an auxiliary input with a
DNP status point affiliated with it.
Neutral Position Detect: The Neutral Position Detect Input detects the neutral tap position, which assists the
Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™ tap position function. This Neutral Position Detect Input also facilitates disabling
the paralleling mode ∆VAR®2 (KeepTrack™).
Counter Input/Switch Status Input: When Input Selection 1 configuration is set to Switch Status, the Counter
Input detects tap position changes and updates two counters, one pre-settable and one re-settable. Also, when
the Contact KeepTrack™ "1R1L" method is selected the Counter Input functions as a 1L tap connection input.
When Input Selection 1 configuration is set to Seal-In, the counter input is used as the Switch Status Input and
the Seal-In input will cause the counter to increment.
Seal-in/Switch Status Input: When the Input Selection 1 configuration is set to "seal-in input", this input
provides for detection of the seal-in state to operate the seal-in output and will also increment the counters.
When "Input Selection 1" is set to Switch Status Input, this input provides the means to read the Auto/Manual
switch position status using SCADA.
Non-Sequential/SCADA Block Input: When the Input Selection 2 configuration is set to "Nonseq Input", this
input provides the means to perform non-sequential operations. When Input Selection 2 is set to "SCADA Block
Input", this input provides a means to block all write operations to the control from SCADA.
–9–
Outputs
Raise Output: Capable of switching 6 A at 120 Vac to 240 Vac motor power.
Lower Output: Capable of switching 6 A at 120 Vac to 240 Vac motor power.
Seal-In Output: Connects to the B‑0553 motor seal-in printed circuit board subassembly.
Deadman Alarm Output: Capable of switching 6 A at 120 Vac or 100 mA at 120 Vdc.
Programmable Alarm Output: Capable of switching 6 A at 120 Vac or 100 mA at 120 Vdc.
Run Through Neutral

The control includes a Run Through Neutral feature that when enabled counts tapchanger operations and when
user settable settings are met, drives the tapchanger through the neutral position to swipe the reversing switch
to prevent contact buildup and coking.
Remote Voltage Bias

The Remote Voltage Bias feature is similar to Load Drop Compensation (LDC) in that it uses a remotely
monitored voltage obtained by the control (through either DNP 3.0, MODBUS, or IEC 61850 protocol) to bias
the Bandcenter of the control. A Remote Voltage Heartbeat Timer is utilized to initiate the Bandcenter Bias and
when it expires the control reverts back to the existing settings.
Front Panel Controls

Menu-driven access to all functions by way of seven navigational pushbuttons and a two-line alphanumeric display.
There are two programmable passwords available to provide various levels of access to the control functions.
The M‑2001D offers a 2-line by 20 character LCD display for enhanced viewing in direct sunlight. It also offers
a low-level LED backlight for reading in darker environments.
Smart Flash SD Card Slot

Allows the user to perform the following functions:
• Load Setpoints • Save Setpoints • Save Data Log • Save Sequence of Events
• Save Oscillograph Records • Clone Save • Clone Load • Load DNP Config
• Save DNP Config • Firmware Update • Save Metering Data • Save/Load IEC 61850 CID Files
• User Access Key Code • Save Wakeup Screen Parameters • Quick Capture
LED Indicators
Front panel LED indicators show the following control conditions: Out-of-Band RAISE, Out-of-Band LOWER,
Reverse Power Flow REV PWR detected, CPU OK, ALARM in effect, Voltage Reduction V/RED in effect,
Communications or Front Panel Auto Operation Block MANUAL, SCADA control blocked LOCAL and COM1
TX and RX.
Output Contacts
Alarm Contact Outputs (2): One normally open programmable alarm contact capable of switching 6 A at 120
Vac and one normally closed self-test alarm contact; capable of switching 6 A at 120 Vac.
Voltage Measurement Accuracy

Control accuracy is ±0.3 % when tested in accordance with the IEEE C57.15.9‑2009 standard over a temperature
range of –40° C to +85° C.
–10–
Communications
The communication ports provide access to all features, including metering, software updates, and programming
of all functions. This is accomplished using a modem or direct serial connection from any Windows™ based
computer running TapTalk® S-2001D Communications Software or SCADA communications software. COM1
(top) is available with RS‑485 or ST or V Pin Fiber Optics. COM2 is available with RS-232 standard or optional
Bluetooth®. COM3 is an optional RJ45 or Fiber Optic Ethernet Port. A USB front port is standard for local
communications with TapTalk and for software updates.
Protocols: The following standard protocols are included in COM1/COM2/COM3: DNP3.0, MODBUS®, and
IEC 61850 (when used with the optional ethernet port). The USB port uses MODBUS for local communications.
Communications Via Direct Connection: TapTalk supports direct communication (MODBUS protocol) with
a M-2001D using the applicable connector (USB cable) for the PC, or Fiber Optic communication using ST
standard or V-pin, or two-wire RS‑485.
Optional Ethernet Port: An optional Ethernet 10/100 Mpbs Port (COM3) is available through an RJ45 or Fiber
Optic Ethernet Port on the top of the control. This port supports DNP over TCP/IP, MODBUS over TCP/IP, and
IEC 61850 over TCP/IP. Also, SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) Protocol is available to synchronize the
control’s RTC clock with the network server.
Optional Bluetooth: The optional Bluetooth provides wireless access to the M-2001D. With Bluetooth the user
is able to configure the control, read status and metering values as well as change setpoints using TapTalk
Communication Software.
COM 1, RS-485, (2Wire),

Fiber Optic (ST) or (V-pin) Cable
Beckwith
M-2001D
Digital
Tapchanger
Control
USB Cable
To Transformer/Regulator
Printer WindowsTM based computer Running

TapTalk® Communications Software
Figure 1 Direct Connection
–11–
Communications Using Networking: The addressing capability of the M-2001D allows networking of multiple
Beckwith Electric Digital Tapchanger Controls. Each tapchanger control can be assigned a Communications
Address, Feeder Address or Substation Address ranging from 1 to 65519. Selected commands may be broadcast
to all controls on the network. Figures 2, 3 and 4 illustrate typical network configurations. Addresses 1 to 247
can be assigned to MODBUS® and 1 to 65519 for DNP3.0.
Application: Using a Windows™ based computer or wireless modem, the operator has real‑time, remote access
to all functions of the Digital Tapchanger Control. The control can act as the monitoring point for all voltage,
current, and related power quantities, thereby simplifying operation while avoiding transducers and multiple
Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) analog inputs. The protocols implement half‑duplex, two‑way communications. This
allows all functions, which would otherwise require the presence of an operator at the control, to be performed
remotely. Communication capabilities include:
• Interrogation and modification of setpoints
• Broadcast of commands, such as tapchange inhibit and voltage reduction (up to three steps) to
networked controls
• Recognition of alarm conditions, such as voltage extremes and excessive load
• Selective control of raise and lower tapchange operations
• Re-configuration of the control, such as a change to the demand integration time period or a selection
of different alarm parameters
• Unsolicited exception reporting multicast capability using UDP and TCP
• DNP file transfer of Data Logging, Oscillography and Sequence of Events records
Unit Identifier: A 2-row by 20-character alphanumeric sequence, set by the user, can be used for unit
identification.
Connect to computer
WindowsTM based computer Running

Straight DB25 TapTalk® Communications Software
Connection to Computer
RS-232 COM Port
ST Multi-mode 62/125 Optical Fiber
Dymec Model No. 5843 TX

DTE=On
Repeat=Off RX
Figure 2 Fiber Optic Connection Loop (optional V-pin connection available)
–12–
Connect to computer

Straight DB9 Connection TapTalk® Communications Software
to Computer RS-232
COM Port
120
Model No. 485 LP9TB A

B & B Electronics
RS-232/RS-485 B
Figure 3 RS‑485 Network Connection

TapTalk ® Communications Software
Network
CAT 5 Twisted Pair RJ-45
Hub or
Fiber Optic Through
ST Connectors
Figure 4 Ethernet Network Connection
–13–
Tests and Standards

M-2001D Digital Tapchanger Control complies with the following type tests and standards:
Voltage Withstand
Dielectric Withstand
IEC® 60255-5 1,500 Vac for 1 minute applied to each independent circuit to earth
1,500 Vac for 1 minute applied between each independent circuit
Impulse Voltage
IEC 60255-5 5,000 V pk, +/- polarity applied to each independent circuit to earth
5,000 V pk, +/- polarity applied between each independent circuit
1.2 by 50 µs, 500 ohms impedance, three surges at 1 every 5 seconds
IEC 60255-5 > 100 Megaohms
Electrical Environment
Electrostatic Discharge Test
IEC 60255-22-2 Class 4 (±8 kV)—point contact discharge
IEC 60255-22-2 Class 4 (±15kV)–air discharge
Fast Transient Disturbance Test

IEC 60255-22-4 Class A (±4 kV, 2.5 kHz, 5 kHz)
Surge Withstand Capability

ANSI/IEEE 2,500 V pk oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to earth
C37.90.1- 2,500 V pk oscillatory applied between each independent circuit
1989 5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied to each independent circuit to earth
5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied between each independent circuit
IEEE 2,500 V oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to earth

C37.90.1- 2,500 V oscillatory applied between each independent circuit
2002 4,000 V pk Fast Transient burst applied to each independent circuit to earth
4,000 V pk Fast Transient burst applied between each independent circuit
 NOTE: The signal is applied to the digital data circuits (RS-232, RS‑485, Ethernet communication port
coupling port) through capacitive coupling clamp.
Surge Immunity
IEC 60255-22-5 ±2,000 V pk
Radiated Field Immunity

IEEE C37.90.2 80 MHz - 1000 MHz @ 35 V/M
IEC 60255-22-3 80 MHz - 2700 MHz @ 10 V/M
Conducted Field Immunity

IEC 60255-22-6 150 kHz - 80 MHz @ 10 V emf
–14–
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature: Control operates from –40° C to +85° C with either the LCD or optional Vacuum Fluorescent Display
 NOTE: The LCD display’s functional temperature range is –20° C to +70° C. The optional vacuum fluorescent
display’s functional temperature range is –40° C to +80° C.
IEC 60068-2-1 Cold, –40° C

IEC 60068-2-2 Dry Heat, +85° C
IEC 60068-2-78 Damp Heat, +40° C @ 95% RH
IEC 60068-2-30 Damp Heat Condensation Cycle, 25° C, +55° C @ 95% RH
Mechanical Environment
Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1 Vibration response Class 1, 0.5 g
Vibration endurance Class 1, 1.0 g
Compliance
cULus-Listed per 508 – Industrial Control Equipment
– Industrial Control Equipment Certified for Canada CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 14-M91
cULus-Listed Component per 508A Table SA1.1 Industrial Control Panels
Recommended Storage Parameters

Temperature: 5° C to 40° C
Humidity: Maximum relative humidity 80% for temperatures up to 31° C, decreasing to 31° C linearly to 50%
relative humidity at 40° C.
Environment: Storage area to be free of dust, corrosive gases, flammable materials, dew, percolating water,
rain and solar radiation.
Periodic Surveillance During Storage: The M-2001D contains electrolytic capacitors. It is recommended that
power be applied to the control every three to five years for a period not less than one hour to help prevent the
electrolytic capacitors from drying out.
Physical
Size: 5 13/16" wide x 8 1/2" high x 3 1/8" deep (10.81 cm x 21.6 cm x 7.94 cm)
Mounting: Unit mounts directly to adapter or conversion front panels sized to replace popular industry tapchanger
controls.
Approximate Weight: 3 lbs, 11 oz (1.67 kg)
Approximate Shipping Weight: 6 lbs, 11 oz (3.03 kg)
Patent & Warranty

The M‑2001D Tapchanger Control is covered by U.S. Patent 5,581,173.
The M‑2001D Tapchanger Control, M-2026 AC-DC Control Power Backup Supply and M-2027 Control Power
Backup Supply-AC Only, M-2948 Tap Position Sensor, and M-2025B(D) Current Loop Interface Modules are
covered by a ten-year warranty from date of shipment.
Specification subject to change without notice.
–15–
M-2025B(D) Current Loop Interface Modules and M-2948 Tap Position Sensor
The M-2025B(D) Current Loop Interface Modules are current-to-voltage analog converters that can accept
inputs from M-2948 Beckwith Electric Tap Position Sensors (Table 1) or Incon 1250B Rotary Position Sensor.
Sensor Rotation Range Degrees/Tap Taps Neutrals Rotation/Slope

M-2948-91N 0 – 297° 9° ±16 1 Negative
M-2948-91P 0 – 297° 9° ±16 1 Positive
M-2948-92N 0 – 306° 9° ±16 2 Negative
M-2948-92P 0 – 306° 9° ±16 2 Positive
M-2948-93N 0 – 315° 9° ±16 3 Negative
M-2948-93P 0 – 315° 9° ±16 3 Positive
M-2948-11N 0 – 330° 10° ±16 1 Negative
M-2948-11P 0 – 330° 10° ±16 1 Positive
M-2948-12N 0 – 340° 10° ±16 2 Negative
M-2948-12P 0 – 340° 10° ±16 2 Positive
M-2948-13N 0 – 350° 10° ±16 3 Negative
M-2948-13P 0 – 350° 10° ±16 3 Positive
 NOTE: Tap Position Sensors are available with either a positive "P" or negative "N" slope. Negative slope
(clockwise rotation) causes a decrease in Tap Position. Positive slope (clockwise rotation) causes
an increase in Tap Position.
Table 1 M-2948 Model Application Information
The tap position sensors are rotary shaft encoders with built-in microprocessors that provide stepped output
signals in 9 or 10 degree increments. They have rotations of 297, 306, 315, 330, 340 and 350 degrees respectively
for 32 taps and up to three neutral positions. The electrical output of these sensors is a 4-20 mA current loop
that converts easily to a voltage signal at the input of the M-2025B(D) with the addition of a proper value shunt
resistor. For a 4-20 MA Current Loop, 150 ohms is required on the input of the M-2025B(D).
Configurations
Most LTC tapchangers have an output shaft on the tapchanger mechanism whose angular position is a
mechanical analog of the tapchanger tap position. In many cases, the total range of tap positions is represented
by less than one complete rotation of this position output shaft. The typical values of shaft movement on 32 tap
mechanisms are 9° or 10° of mechanical rotation per tap position.
Other angular rotation values are likely to be encountered. Contact Beckwith Electric for information on sensor
availability for specific requirements.
Application Notes
• The M-2948 Tap Position Sensor directly mounts in place of the Incon Tap Sensor Model 1292.
• The M-2948 Tap Position Sensor directly mechanically replaces the Selsyn-Type Position Sensor.
• The M-2948-91N Tap Position Sensor is for use with a Qualitrol Position Indicator, Model 081-002-01
or equivalent.
Incon Tap Position Monitor connected to an Incon 1250 Series Rotary Position Sensor
Both types of devices provide a 4-20 mA dc current loop output. The current loop develops a voltage across
a properly sized resistor on the input to the M-2025B(D). The resultant voltage signal is conditioned in
the M‑2025B(D) and routed to the M-2001 series Tapchanger Control where the voltage is converted to a
corresponding tap position number.
The tap position sensors are rotary shaft encoders with built-in microprocessors that provide stepped output
signals in 9 or 10 degree increments. They have rotations of 288 and 320 degrees respectively for 32 taps and
one neutral position. The electrical output of these sensors is a 4-20 mA current loop that converts easily to a
voltage signal at the input of the M-2025B(D) with the addition of a proper value shunt resistor. For a 4-20 MA
Current Loop, 150 ohms is required on the input of the M-2025B(D).
–16–
M-2001D
P1 1 2 3 4 5 6
J1 1 2 3 4 5 6
M-2025D
CURRENT LOOP
POWER
INTERFACE NEUTRAL CAL
BECKW I TH
CO. INC.
E L E C TRI C NEAR NEUTRAL CAL
M a d e i n U . S . A .
RX (-)
Current Loop
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Range Resistor
Black
Orange
Brown Unipolar
Yellow
Red
M-2948
Tap Sensor
Figure 5 Typical M-2025B(D) External Tap Position Interface with M-2948 Tap Position Sensor
–17–
M-2026/M-2027 Control Power Backup Supplies

If the optional Control Power Backup Input is purchased, the following accessories are available:
M-2026 AC-DC Control Power Backup Supply
The M-2026 Control Power Backup Supply will accept either an AC or DC input over the following ranges:
• 21 to 32 V • 42 to 60 V • 105 to 145 V
 NOTE: It must be ordered in the input range needed.
The M-2026 will output a regulated +12 Vdc (±0.5 V) output voltage. The unit incorporates a fused input, surge
protection, and reverse polarity protection. The M‑2026 is capable of up to a 1.5 Ampere output.
M-2027 Control Power Backup Supply-AC Only
The M-2027 will accept an AC (105 to 140 Vac, 50/60 Hz) input and output +12 Vdc (Nominal). The M‑2027 is
capable of loads up to 1.0 Ampere. The unit incorporates a fused input and surge protection.
The M‑2026 and M‑2027 units are housed in a non-weathertight enclosure and equipped with screw terminal
blocks for input and output connections.
Facility AC-DC Source
Facility AC Source
21 to 32 V, 42 to 60 V
105-140 Vac
or 105-145 V
M-2026 AC-DC M-2027 Control

Control Power Power Backup
Backup Supply Supply AC to
DC Only
+12 V
B-1021 Control Backup

Power Supply cable for use
with M-2026 or M-2027
Backup Power Supplies.

with Backup Power Supply
units other than M-2026 or
M-2027.
Figure 6 Typical M-2026/M-2027 Control Power Backup Supply Application
–18–
Figure 7 M-2001D Style Selection Chart
Bluetooth is the Registered Trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

TapPlot is the Registered Trademark of Beckwith Electric Co., Inc.
TapTalk is the Registered Trademark of Beckwith Electric Co., Inc.
∆VAR is the Registered Trademark of Beckwith Electric Co., Inc.
MODBUS is the Registered Trademark of Gould, Inc.
–19–
© 2008 Beckwith Electric Co. All Rights Reserved. 800-2001D-SP-05 10/13
Printed in U.S.A. (09.24.02)
WARNING
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, capable of causing death or serious
injury, are present on the external terminals and inside the equip-
ment. Use extreme caution and follow all safety rules when han-
dling, testing or adjusting the equipment. However, these internal
voltage levels are no greater than the voltages applied to the exter-
nal terminals.
DANGER! HIGH VOLTAGE
– This sign warns that the area is connected to a dangerous high voltage, and you
must never touch it.
PERSONNEL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The following general rules and other specific warnings throughout the manual must be followed during application,
test or repair of this equipment. Failure to do so will violate standards for safety in the design, manufacture, and intended
use of the product. Qualified personnel should be the only ones who operate and maintain this equipment. Beckwith
Electric Co., Inc. assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.
– This sign means that you should refer to the corresponding section of the operation
manual for important information before proceeding.
Always Ground the Equipment

To avoid possible shock hazard, the chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. When servicing
equipment in a test area, the Protective Earth Terminal must be attached to a separate ground securely
by use of a tool, since it is not grounded by external connectors.
Do NOT operate in an explosive environment

Do not operate this equipment in the presence of flammable or explosive gases or fumes. To do so would
risk a possible fire or explosion.
Keep away from live circuits

Operating personnel must not remove the cover or expose the printed circuit board while power is ap-
plied. In no case may components be replaced with power applied. In some instances, dangerous volt-
ages may exist even when power is disconnected. To avoid electrical shock, always disconnect power and
discharge circuits before working on the unit.
Exercise care during installation, operation, & maintenance procedures

The equipment described in this manual contains voltages high enough to cause serious injury or death.
Only qualified personnel should install, operate, test, and maintain this equipment. Be sure that all per-
sonnel safety procedures are carefully followed. Exercise due care when operating or servicing alone.
Do not modify equipment

Do not perform any unauthorized modifications on this instrument. Return of the unit to a Beckwith
Electric repair facility is preferred. If authorized modifications are to be attempted, be sure to follow
replacement procedures carefully to assure that safety features are maintained.
PRODUCT CAUTIONS
Before attempting any test, calibration, or maintenance procedure, personnel must be completely familiar
with the particular circuitry of this unit, and have an adequate understanding of field effect devices. If a
component is found to be defective, always follow replacement procedures carefully to that assure safety
features are maintained. Always replace components with those of equal or better quality as shown in the
Parts List of the Instruction Book.
Avoid static charge

This unit contains MOS circuitry, which can be damaged by improper test or rework procedures. Care
should be taken to avoid static charge on work surfaces and service personnel.
Use caution when measuring resistances

Any attempt to measure resistances between points on the printed circuit board, unless otherwise noted
in the Instruction Book, is likely to cause damage to the unit.
M-2001D Digital Tapchanger Control
WARNING
This equipment contains a certified transmitter found to comply with FCC Part 15.247 rules regarding frequency
hopping spread spectrum intentional radiators. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct
the interference at his own expense.
Only the antenna provided is authorized for use with the M‑2001D. If the antenna is lost or damaged, please
contact Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. to secure a replacement antenna.
This product generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency (RF). If it is not installed and used in accordance
with the operating instructions, it can cause harmful interference to communications. If this equipment causes
harmful interference to radio or television reception, the user should try and correct the interference by:
• Reorienting or relocating the receiving/transmitting antenna
• Increasing the separation between the equipment and the M‑2001D
• Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a different circuit from the M‑2001D
If these do not correct the interference, consult an experienced radio/television technician for assistance.
Correcting such interference is the responsibility of the user, not the manufacturer.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. may void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment. This
equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of at least 20 cm between the radiator
and person’s body (excluding extremities) and must not be located or operated with any other antenna or
transmitter.
This Page Left Intentionally Blank
M‑2001D Instruction Book
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Instruction Book
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Instruction Book Contents.................................................................................. 1–1
Chapter 1: Introduction....................................................................................... 1–1
Chapter 2: Operation.......................................................................................... 1–1
Chapter 3: TapTalk®............................................................................................ 1–1
Chapter 4: System Setup.................................................................................... 1–1
Chapter 5: Configuration..................................................................................... 1–1
Chapter 6: Setpoints........................................................................................... 1–1
Chapter 7: Installation......................................................................................... 1–1
Chapter 8: Testing............................................................................................... 1–1
Appendix A: Human Machine Interface (HMI).................................................... 1–1
Appendix B: Setpoint Configuration and Communication Record Forms .......... 1–2
Appendix C: DNP Configuration Editor............................................................... 1–2
Appendix D: IEC 61850 Configuration Editor..................................................... 1–2
Appendix E: Self-Test Error Codes..................................................................... 1–2
Appendix F: Index............................................................................................... 1–2
1.2 Adapter Panel/Surface Mounting Kit................................................................... 1–2
1.3 General Overview of M-2001D Tapchanger Control............................................ 1–2
1.4 Accessories........................................................................................................ 1–3
TapTalk S-2001D Communications Software...................................................... 1–3
Optional Communication Ports........................................................................... 1–3
M‑2025B(D) Current Loop Interface Modules..................................................... 1–3
Backup Relay...................................................................................................... 1–4
M‑2026 AC-DC Control Power Backup Supply................................................... 1–4
M‑2027 Control Power Backup Supply - AC Only................................................ 1–4
B-0920 Control Power Backup Harness............................................................. 1–4
M-2948 Tap Position Sensor............................................................................... 1–4
Figure 1‑1 Functional Diagram................................................................... 1–5
Figure 1‑2 Typical Adapter Panel Mounting................................................ 1–6
Chapter 2 Operation
2.0 Overview and Quick Index.................................................................................. 2–1
Message Screens and Access Codes................................................................ 2–1
2.1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators Overview................................................... 2–5
Display and Pushbuttons.................................................................................... 2–5
, ,  and  Pushbuttons........................................................................... 2–5
HMI Menu Structure........................................................................................... 2–5
ENT Pushbutton................................................................................................. 2–5
i
Chapter 2 Operation (Cont.'d)

EXIT Pushbutton................................................................................................ 2–5
Data Entry Screens............................................................................................ 2–5
Power Up Screens.............................................................................................. 2–6
Screen Blanking................................................................................................. 2–6
LCD Screen Contrast......................................................................................... 2–6
"C" Change Prompt............................................................................................ 2–6
"ENT" Prompt..................................................................................................... 2–6
 and  Prompt............................................................................................... 2–6
Volt Red Pushbutton (Voltage Reduction).......................................................... 2–6
Status Indicators................................................................................................. 2–6
Raise LED.......................................................................................................... 2–6
Lower LED.......................................................................................................... 2–6
Rev Pwr LED...................................................................................................... 2–6
OK LED.............................................................................................................. 2–6
Alarm LED.......................................................................................................... 2–6
V/Red LED.......................................................................................................... 2–6
Figure 2-1 M-2001D Front Panel................................................................. 2–7
Figure 2-2 Example of HMI Menu Structure................................................ 2–8
Manual LED........................................................................................................ 2–9
Local LED........................................................................................................... 2–9
COM1 TX/RX LEDS........................................................................................... 2–9
Smart Flash SD Card Slot.................................................................................. 2–9
2.2 Operation (HMI/TapTalk®)................................................................................... 2–9
Message Screens............................................................................................... 2–9
Default Message Screen.................................................................................... 2–9
Local Voltage Reduction Screen......................................................................... 2–9
Op Count Signal Alarm Screen.......................................................................... 2–9
Oscillograph Record Triggered Screen............................................................... 2–9
Figure 2-3 Oscillograph Message Dialog Screen........................................ 2–9
Wakeup Message Screens............................................................................... 2–10
Alarms.............................................................................................................. 2–10
Access Codes................................................................................................... 2–11
Access Levels................................................................................................... 2–11
Oscillograph Recorder...................................................................................... 2–11
Trigger Oscillograph Recorder.......................................................................... 2–11
Figure 2-4 Manual Oscillograph Trigger Confirmation Dialog Screen........ 2–11
Figure 2-5 Oscillograph Recorder Successfully Triggered Confirmation... 2–11
Retrieve Oscillograph Record (TapTalk)........................................................... 2–12
Figure 2-6 Retrieve Oscillograph Record Dialog Screen........................... 2–12
Figure 2-7 Retrieve Oscillograph Record (Save As) Dialog Screen.......... 2–12
Figure 2-8 Initialize Oscillograph Record Download Screen...................... 2–12
Figure 2-9 Retrieving Oscillograph Record Status Screen........................ 2–12
Figure 2-10 Oscillograph Data Records Were Retrieved Confirmation..... 2–12
ii

Clear Oscillograph Records (TapTalk®)............................................................. 2–13
Figure 2-11 Clear Oscillograph Record Confirmation Screen................... 2–13
Figure 2-12 Clear Oscillograph Record Confirmation Screen................... 2–13
Clear Oscillograph Records From The HMI...................................................... 2–13
Sequence of Events Recorder.......................................................................... 2–14
Trigger Sequence of Events Recorder (TapTalk).............................................. 2–14
Figure 2-13 Sequence of Events Trigger Confirmation Dialog Screen...... 2–14
Figure 2-14 Sequence of Events Recorder Successfully Triggered........... 2–14
Retrieve Sequence of Events Record (TapTalk)............................................... 2–15
Figure 2-15 Retrieve Sequence of Events Record (Save As) Screen....... 2–15
Figure 2-16 Initialize Sequence of Events Record Download Screen....... 2–15
Figure 2-17 Retrieving Sequence of Events Record Status Screen.......... 2–15
Figure 2-18 Sequence of Events Records Retrieved Successfully............ 2–15
View Sequence of Events From TapTalk........................................................... 2–16
Figure 2-19 View Sequence of Events Dialog Screen............................... 2–16
Clear Sequence of Events Records (TapTalk).................................................. 2–17
Figure 2-20 Clear Sequence of Events Record Confirmation Screen....... 2–17
Figure 2-21 Clear Status Screen............................................................... 2–17
Figure 2-22 Sequence of Events Records Cleared Successfully.............. 2–17
Data Logging.................................................................................................... 2–17
Retrieve Data Logging Data............................................................................. 2–17
Figure 2-23 Data Log Download Dialog Screen........................................ 2–17
Figure 2-24 Setpoints Successfully Written To Control Screen................. 2–18
Figure 2-25 Data Log Download (Save As) Dialog Screen........................ 2–18
Figure 2-26 Transferring Data Log Status Screen......................................... 2–18
Figure 2-27 Data Log Records Retrieved Successfully Screen................. 2–18
Clear Data Log Records From TapTalk............................................................. 2–19
Figure 2-28 Clear Data Log Record Confirmation Screen......................... 2–19
Figure 2-29 Clear Data Log Record Status Screen................................... 2–19
Figure 2-30 Data Log Records Cleared Successfully Screen................... 2–19
Clear Data Log Records From The HMI........................................................... 2–19
Active Setpoint Profile....................................................................................... 2–20
Set Active Setpoint Profile (TapTalk)................................................................. 2–20
Figure 2-31 Set Active Profile from TapTalk Information Bar..................... 2–20
Metering and Status......................................................................................... 2–21
Metering............................................................................................................ 2–21
Secondary........................................................................................................ 2–21
Primary ............................................................................................................ 2–21
Present Demand .............................................................................................. 2–21
Energy Metering............................................................................................... 2–21
Demand History................................................................................................ 2–22
Frequency......................................................................................................... 2–22
Figure 2-32 Secondary Quantity Metering and Primary Quantity
Calculations for Regulator Applications........................................................ 2–23
iii

Figure 2-33 Secondary Quantity Metering and Primary Quantity
Calculations for Transformer Applications.................................................... 2–23
Accessing Monitoring Screens (HMI)............................................................... 2–24
Monitor (From Control Front Panel).................................................................. 2–24
Accessing The Metering Screens (HMI)........................................................... 2–25
Accessing The Status Screens (HMI)............................................................... 2–25
Accessing The Tapchanger Status Screens (HMI).............................................. 2–26
Accessing The Alarm Status Screens (HMI).................................................... 2–27
Accessing The Input Status Screens (HMI)...................................................... 2–28
Accessing The Output Status Screens (HMI)................................................... 2–29
Accessing the Metering & Status Screen (TapTalk®)........................................ 2–29
Figure 2-34 Metering & Status Screen...................................................... 2–30
Figure 2-35 Meter Out Voltage Calculation................................................ 2–30
Primary Metering (Single or Three Phase)....................................................... 2–31
Voltage.............................................................................................................. 2–31
Source Voltage................................................................................................. 2–31
Current.............................................................................................................. 2–31
Watts................................................................................................................. 2–31
VAr.................................................................................................................... 2–31
VA..................................................................................................................... 2–31
Remote Voltage Bias........................................................................................ 2–31
Voltage.............................................................................................................. 2–31
Secondary Metering Status.............................................................................. 2–31
Load Voltage..................................................................................................... 2–31
Meter Out Voltage............................................................................................. 2–31
Source Voltage................................................................................................. 2–31
Compensated Voltage...................................................................................... 2–31
Normalizing Voltage.......................................................................................... 2–31
Load Current..................................................................................................... 2–31
Power Factor..................................................................................................... 2–31
Frequency......................................................................................................... 2–31
Circulating Current............................................................................................ 2–31
Tap Information................................................................................................. 2–32
Tap Position...................................................................................................... 2–32
Drag Hands...................................................................................................... 2–32
Timer (Raise/Lower)......................................................................................... 2–32
Intertap Timer................................................................................................... 2–32
Operation Counter............................................................................................ 2–32
Resettable Operations Counter........................................................................ 2–32
Neutral Counter................................................................................................ 2–32
RTN Status....................................................................................................... 2–32
Count To RTN Active........................................................................................ 2–32
RTN Success Counter...................................................................................... 2–32
Tapchanger Status............................................................................................ 2–33
iv

Operation Mode................................................................................................ 2–33
Block Status...................................................................................................... 2–33
Band Status...................................................................................................... 2–33
VAr Bias Effect.................................................................................................. 2–33
Power Direction................................................................................................ 2–33
Voltage Reduction............................................................................................ 2–33
HMI Active Mode.............................................................................................. 2–33
Input Status...................................................................................................... 2–34
Neutral Tap....................................................................................................... 2–34
Counter............................................................................................................. 2–34
Non-Sequential................................................................................................. 2–34
Motor Seal-In.................................................................................................... 2–34
Voltage Reduction 1......................................................................................... 2–34
Voltage Reduction 2......................................................................................... 2–34
SCADA Cutout.................................................................................................. 2–34
Aux Input Status............................................................................................... 2–34
Output Status.................................................................................................... 2–34
Raise................................................................................................................ 2–34
Lower................................................................................................................ 2–34
Programmable Alarm........................................................................................ 2–34
Motor Seal-In.................................................................................................... 2–34
Alarm Status..................................................................................................... 2–34
Comm Block..................................................................................................... 2–34
Block Raise (Tap).............................................................................................. 2–34
Block Lower (Tap)............................................................................................. 2–34
Block Raise (Voltage)....................................................................................... 2–34
Block Lower (Voltage)....................................................................................... 2–34
DVAr2 Load Current Limit................................................................................. 2–34
Mtr. Seal-In Failure............................................................................................ 2–34
Backup Pwr Failure........................................................................................... 2–34
Low Current Block............................................................................................ 2–35
Individual Tap Wear.......................................................................................... 2–35
Tap Changer Failure......................................................................................... 2–35
LDC/LDZ........................................................................................................... 2–35
Line Current Limit............................................................................................. 2–35
Reverse Power................................................................................................. 2–35
Abnormal Tap Position...................................................................................... 2–35
VAr Bias Lead or Lag........................................................................................ 2–35
Master/Follower Lockout................................................................................... 2–35
Master Lockout................................................................................................. 2–35
Follower Lockout............................................................................................... 2–36
RTN Fail to Operate.......................................................................................... 2–36
Op Count Signal............................................................................................... 2–36
v

CBEMA Events and Counter Status................................................................. 2–36
Demand and Energy Metering.......................................................................... 2–37
Accessing The Present Demand Screens (HMI).............................................. 2–37
Setting The Demand Interval (HMI).................................................................. 2–37
Accessing The Demand History Screens (HMI)............................................... 2–38
Resetting Individual Demand History Values (HMI).......................................... 2–38
Resetting ALL Demand History Parameter Values (HMI)................................. 2–39
Performing a Master Reset of ALL Demand History and Energy Metering
Parameter Values (HMI)................................................................................... 2–39
Accessing The Energy Metering Screens (HMI)............................................... 2–40
Resetting Individual Energy Metering Values (HMI)......................................... 2–41
Resetting ALL Energy Metering Parameter Values (HMI)................................ 2–41
Performing a Master Reset of ALL Energy Metering and Demand History
Parameter Values (HMI)................................................................................... 2–42
Accessing The Demand & Energy Metering Screen (TapTalk®)....................... 2–42
Demand History/Energy Metering.................................................................... 2–43
Figure 2-36 Demand & Energy Metering Screen...................................... 2–44
Real Time Voltage Plot..................................................................................... 2–45
Real Time Voltage Plot (TapTalk)...................................................................... 2–45
Figure 2-37 Real Time Voltage Chart........................................................ 2–45
Display All Metering.......................................................................................... 2–46
Figure 2-38 Display All Metering Screen................................................... 2–46
Motor Current Profile........................................................................................ 2–47
Accessing The Motor Current Screens (HMI)................................................... 2–47
Initializing Motor Current Values (HMI)............................................................. 2–48
Accessing Motor Current Profile Screen, Resetting Training Mode
and Peak Motor Current From TapTalk............................................................. 2–48
Figure 2-39 Motor Current Profile Dialog Screen...................................... 2–48
Figure 2-40 Motor Current Profile Training Mode Reset Confirmation....... 2–48
Figure 2-41 Motor Current Profile Reset Training Mode Screen................ 2–49
Figure 2-42 Peak Motor Current Profile Reset Confirmation Screen......... 2–49
Figure 2-43 Peak Motor Current Profile Reset Successfully Sent............. 2–49
Harmonic Analysis............................................................................................ 2–49
Accessing The Harmonics Screens (HMI)........................................................ 2–49
Accessing Voltage/Current Harmonics Screens (HMI)..................................... 2–50
Accessing Harmonic Analysis Screen From TapTalk........................................ 2–50
Figure 2-44 Harmonic Analysis Screen..................................................... 2–50
Tap Information................................................................................................. 2–51
Accessing The Tap Information Screens (HMI)................................................ 2–51
Calibrating Tap Position (HMI).......................................................................... 2–52
Drag Hands...................................................................................................... 2–52
Reset Drag Hands Values (HMI)...................................................................... 2–52
Reset Drag Hands Values (TapTalk)................................................................. 2–52
Resettable Operation Counter.......................................................................... 2–53
vi

Reset Operation Counter (HMI)........................................................................ 2–53
Reset Operation Counter (TapTalk).................................................................. 2–53
Tap Statistics.................................................................................................... 2–53
Viewing Specific Tap Statistics (HMI)................................................................ 2–53
Clearing Tap Statistics (HMI)............................................................................ 2–53
View Tap Statistics From TapTalk...................................................................... 2–54
Figure 2-45 Tap Statistics Screen.............................................................. 2–54
Smart Flash SD Card....................................................................................... 2–55
Accessing The Smart Flash SD Card Screens (HMI)....................................... 2–55
SD Card Quick Capture.................................................................................... 2–55
Quick Capture File Naming Convention........................................................... 2–55
Loading Setpoints from a Smart Flash SD Card.............................................. 2–57
Saving Setpoints to a Smart Flash SD Card.................................................... 2–58
Saving Data Log to a Smart Flash SD Card..................................................... 2–58
Saving Sequence of Events to a Smart Flash SD Card................................... 2–59
Saving Oscillograph Record to a Smart Flash SD Card................................... 2–60
Clone Save and Load....................................................................................... 2–61
Clone Save with "DNP Configuration" and "Multi-user Password" files............ 2–61
Clone Load with "DNP Configuration" and "Multi-user Password" files............ 2–61
Clone Save Without "DNP Configuration" and "Multi-user Password" files...... 2–61
Clone Save to a Smart Flash SD Card............................................................. 2–61
Clone Load from a Smart Flash SD Card......................................................... 2–62
Loading DNP Configuration from a Smart Flash SD Card............................... 2–63
Saving DNP Configuration to a Smart Flash
SD Card............................................................................................................ 2–64
Saving Metering Data to a Smart Flash SD Card.............................................. 2–64
Firmware Update from Smart Flash SD Card.................................................. 2–65
Smart Flash SD Card User Access Code........................................................ 2–66
Figure 2-46 SD Card Dialog Screen.......................................................... 2–66
Figure 2-47 SD Card Access Code Written Successfully Screen.............. 2–66
Figure 2-48 SD Card User Access Code Verification Screen.................... 2–66
Load IEC 61850 Configuration from a Smart Flash SD Card........................... 2–67
Save IEC 61850 Configuration to a Smart Flash SD Card................................ 2–67
Wakeup Screen Parameter Save to a Smart Flash SD Card........................... 2–68
Utility/Calibration............................................................................................... 2–68
Accessing Utility/Calibration Screens (HMI)..................................................... 2–68
Source Voltage................................................................................................. 2–69
Changing Source Voltage Input........................................................................ 2–69
Watchdog and Power Resets........................................................................... 2–70
Checksum Error................................................................................................ 2–70
Datalog Files..................................................................................................... 2–71
Converting Datalog Files to "*.CSV" Format..................................................... 2–71
About Screens.................................................................................................. 2–71
Accessing The About Screens (HMI)................................................................ 2–71
vii

Remote Control (TapTalk®)............................................................................... 2–72
Remote Tap Control.......................................................................................... 2–72
Remote Voltage Reduction............................................................................... 2–72
Block Auto Control via Communication............................................................ 2–72
SCAMP Control................................................................................................ 2–72
Remote Control/Miscellaneous......................................................................... 2–72
Figure 2-49 Remote Control Screen for Toggle or None
Auto/Manual Switch Type............................................................................. 2–73
Figure 2-50 Remote Control Screen for SCAMP
Auto/Manual Switch Type............................................................................. 2–73
Low Current Alarm/Block.................................................................................. 2–74
Clearing Low Current Alarm/Block From The HMI............................................ 2–74
Clearing Low Current Alarm/Block From TapTalk............................................. 2–75
Figure 2-51 Programmable Alarms Dialog Screen.................................... 2–75
Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block.................................................................... 2–76
Resetting Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block From The HMI............................ 2–76
Resetting Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block From TapTalk.............................. 2–77
Master/Follower Lockout Alarm........................................................................ 2–78
Clearing Master/Follower Lockout Alarm From The HMI.................................. 2–78
Clearing Master/Follower Lockout Alarm From TapTalk.................................... 2–79
Figure 2-52 Access Level Code Dialog Screen......................................... 2–79
Figure 2-53 Access Granted Successfully Confirmation Screen............... 2–79
Figure 2-54 Master/Follower Configuration Tool Dialog Screen................. 2–79
Send/Receive IEC 61850 Configuration File.................................................... 2–80
Figure 2-55 IEC Configuration File Uploaded Successfully Screen.......... 2–80
Figure 2-56 IEC Configuration File Transferring Status Screen................. 2–80
Figure 2-57 IEC Configuration File Downloaded Successfully Screen...... 2–80
Chapter 3 TapTalk®
3.0 Availability........................................................................................................... 3–2
3.1 Hardware Requirements..................................................................................... 3–2
Hardware Required for Direct USB (Serial) Communication.............................. 3–2
3.2 Installing TapTalk................................................................................................ 3–2
Starting TapTalk.................................................................................................. 3–2
Figure 3-1 TapTalk S-2001D Program-Item Icon......................................... 3–2
3.3 Communications Using Direct USB Connection................................................. 3–3
Direct Communication Using USB (Serial) Connection...................................... 3–3
Figure 3-2 USB Port Connection Dialog Screen.......................................... 3–3
Figure 3-3 Failed to Connect Error Screen.................................................. 3–4
Figure 3-4 Failed to complete Access Code Verification Error Screen........ 3–4
Figure 3-5 Successfully Connected Read Only Access Screen.................. 3–4
viii
Chapter 3 TapTalk® (Cont.'d)

3.4 RS-485 Communications.................................................................................... 3–4
Communication Using RS-485 Connection........................................................ 3–5
3.5 Fiber Optic Communications.............................................................................. 3–5
Communication Using Fiber Optic Connection................................................... 3–6
3.6 Ethernet Communications.................................................................................. 3–6
Communication Using Ethernet Connection....................................................... 3–6
Figure 3-6 Direct Connection....................................................................... 3–7
3.7 Bluetooth Communications................................................................................. 3–7
Optional Bluetooth.............................................................................................. 3–7
Communication Using Bluetooth Connection..................................................... 3–7
3.8 Communications with Multiple Controls ............................................................. 3–8
3.9 Cautions............................................................................................................. 3–8
Control and TapTalk Compatibility...................................................................... 3–8
Control Priority.................................................................................................... 3–8
Time and Date Stamping.................................................................................... 3–8
Figure 3-7 Fiber Optic Connection Loop...................................................... 3–9
Figure 3-8 RS‑485 Connection Tree............................................................ 3–9
Figure 3-9 Optional Ethernet Network Connection.................................... 3–10
Figure 3-10 Cellular Modem Network........................................................ 3–10
3.10 Overview of Operation...................................................................................... 3–11
Figure 3-11 TapTalk Main Screen Menu Selections................................... 3–11
Figure 3-12 TapTalk Main Screen Menu Selections (File Mode)............... 3–12
Figure 3-13 TapTalk Main Screen Menu Selections (Connected).............. 3–13
File.................................................................................................................... 3–14
File Not Open or Not Connected Mode............................................................ 3–14
File Open or Connected Mode......................................................................... 3–14
Connect and Communication........................................................................... 3–15
USB.................................................................................................................. 3–15
Com Port.......................................................................................................... 3–15
Figure 3-14 Serial Port Connection Dialog Screen.................................... 3–15
Modem.............................................................................................................. 3–15
TCP/IP.............................................................................................................. 3–15
Bluetooth.......................................................................................................... 3–15
Figure 3-15 Modem Connection Dialog Screen......................................... 3–16
Figure 3-16 TCP/IP Connection Dialog Screen......................................... 3–16
Figure 3-17 Bluetooth Connection Dialog Screen..................................... 3–16
Communication................................................................................................. 3–17
Disconnect........................................................................................................ 3–17
Figure 3-18 Disconnect Command Confirmation Screen.......................... 3–17
Open Terminal Window..................................................................................... 3–17
Communication/Setup...................................................................................... 3–17
ix

Communication/Setup/Comm Port................................................................... 3–17
Figure 3-19 Setup Comm Port Dialog Screen........................................... 3–17
Communication/Setup/RS-232 Comm Port...................................................... 3–17
Figure 3-20 Setup RS-232 Comm Port Dialog Screen.............................. 3–17
Communication/Setup/Ethernet........................................................................ 3–18
Figure 3-21 Ethernet Setup Dialog Screen................................................ 3–18
Communication/Setup/Change Address.......................................................... 3–18
Multiple Control Addressing.............................................................................. 3–18
Figure 3-22 Change Communication Address Dialog Screen................... 3–18
Figure 3-23 Change Address Warning Screen.......................................... 3–18
Change Address/Miscellaneous....................................................................... 3–18
Communication/Setup/Communication Access Security.................................. 3–19
Figure 3-24 Communication Access Security Dialog Screen.................... 3–19
Communication/Setup/HeartBeat Option......................................................... 3–19
Figure 3-25 HeartBeat Option Screen....................................................... 3–19
Communication/Setup/Bluetooth® Settings....................................................... 3–19
Figure 3-26 Bluetooth Information Dialog Screen...................................... 3–19
Communication/Options................................................................................... 3–19
Figure 3-27 Communication Options Dialog Screen................................. 3–19
Monitor.............................................................................................................. 3–20
Monitor/Metering & Status................................................................................ 3–20
Primary Status (Single or Three-Phase)........................................................... 3–20
Voltage.............................................................................................................. 3–20
Secondary Status............................................................................................. 3–21
Figure 3-28 Metering and Status Screen................................................... 3–21
Tap Information................................................................................................. 3–22
Resettable Operations Counter........................................................................ 3–22
Neutral Switch Counter..................................................................................... 3–22
RTN Status....................................................................................................... 3–22
Count Towards RTN.......................................................................................... 3–22
RTN Counter..................................................................................................... 3–22
Tapchanger Status............................................................................................ 3–22
Operation Mode (Auto)..................................................................................... 3–22
VAr Bias Effect.................................................................................................. 3–22
Alarm Status..................................................................................................... 3–23
Comm Block..................................................................................................... 3–23
Block Raise (Tap).............................................................................................. 3–23
Block Lower (Tap)............................................................................................. 3–23
Block Raise (Voltage)....................................................................................... 3–23
Block Lower (Voltage)....................................................................................... 3–23
Individual Tap Wear.......................................................................................... 3–23
Tap Changer Failure......................................................................................... 3–23
LDC/LDZ........................................................................................................... 3–23
x

Line Current Limit............................................................................................. 3–23
Reverse Power................................................................................................. 3–23
Abnormal Tap Position...................................................................................... 3–23
Master/Follower Lockout................................................................................... 3–24
RTN Fail............................................................................................................ 3–24
Op Count Signal............................................................................................... 3–24
Input Status...................................................................................................... 3–24
Output Status.................................................................................................... 3–24
CBEMA Events and Counter Status................................................................. 3–24
Aux Input Status............................................................................................... 3–24
Monitor/Motor Current Profile........................................................................... 3–25
Figure 3-29 Motor Current Profile Dialog Screen...................................... 3–25
Figure 3-30 Demand & Energy Metering Dialog........................................ 3–26
Monitor/Demand & Energy Metering................................................................ 3–27
Demand Interval............................................................................................... 3–27
Demand Present............................................................................................... 3–27
Demand History................................................................................................ 3–27
Energy Metering............................................................................................... 3–27
Miscellaneous................................................................................................... 3–27
Monitor/Tap Statistics....................................................................................... 3–28
Figure 3-31 Tap Statistics Screen.............................................................. 3–28
Monitor/Real Time Voltage Chart...................................................................... 3–29
Figure 3-32 Real Time Voltage Chart........................................................ 3–29
Monitor/Harmonic Analysis............................................................................... 3–30
Figure 3-33 Harmonic Analysis Dialog Screen.......................................... 3–30
Monitor/Master/Follower Alarm Messages....................................................... 3–31
Figure 3-34 Master/Follower Alarm Messages Screen.............................. 3–31
Monitor/Display All Metering............................................................................. 3–32
Figure 3-35 Display All Metering Screen................................................... 3–32
Monitor/Set Metering Colors............................................................................. 3–33
Figure 3-36 Set Metering Colors Screen................................................... 3–33
Toolbar Editor................................................................................................... 3–33
Figure 3-37 TapTalk Main Menu Screen with Toolbar Editor Active........... 3–33
Setup................................................................................................................ 3–34
Setup/Profile..................................................................................................... 3–34
Setup/Tapchanger Type.................................................................................... 3–34
Figure 3-38 Profile Names Dialog Screen................................................. 3–34
Figure 3-39 Tapchanger Type Dialog Screen............................................. 3–35
Setup/Setpoints................................................................................................ 3–36
Setpoints/General ............................................................................................ 3–36
Setpoints/Voltage Reduction............................................................................. 3–36
Setpoints/Limit and Runback............................................................................ 3–36
Setpoints/Forward Power.................................................................................. 3–36
xi

Setpoints/Reverse Power................................................................................. 3–36
Setpoints/Miscellaneous................................................................................... 3–37
Figure 3-40 Setpoints Dialog Screen......................................................... 3–37
Figure 3-41 Reverse Power Vendor Cross Reference Table...................... 3–38
Setup/Configuration.......................................................................................... 3–38
Configuration/Primary....................................................................................... 3–38
Figure 3-42 Configuration Dialog Screen.................................................. 3–39
Configuration/Raise/Lower Output Contacts.................................................... 3–40
Configuration/Motor Current Settings............................................................... 3–40
Configuration/Inputs and Switch....................................................................... 3–40
Configuration/Regulator.................................................................................... 3–40
Configuration/Paralleling................................................................................... 3–40
Paralleling Options for ∆VAR2 and ∆VAR2 (KeepTrack)................................... 3–40
Figure 3-43 DVAR2 and DVAR2 (KeepTrack) Configuration Screen.......... 3–40
Master/Follower Paralleling Configuration Settings.......................................... 3–41
Figure 3-44 Master/Follower Configuration Dialog Screen........................ 3–41
Configuration/Remote Voltage Bias.................................................................. 3–42
RVB Scale Factor............................................................................................. 3–42
RVB Heartbeat Timer....................................................................................... 3–42
Reverse RVB Scale Factor............................................................................... 3–42
Configuration/Run Through Neutral.................................................................. 3–42
Save Comm Block at Power Off........................................................................ 3–42
SCAMP Initialize on Power Up......................................................................... 3–42
Configuration/Fast Voltage Recovery................................................................ 3–42
Configuration/Voltage Reduction (VR).............................................................. 3–43
Configuration/Miscellaneous............................................................................ 3–43
Setup/Tap Settings........................................................................................... 3–44
Tap Settings/General........................................................................................ 3–44
Tap Settings/Tap Limits..................................................................................... 3–44
Highest Tap/Lowest Tap.................................................................................... 3–44
Tap Setting/Operation Counter......................................................................... 3–44
X Mode Delay................................................................................................... 3–44
Tap Settings/Motor Seal-in Failure Block.......................................................... 3–45
Tap Settings/Drag Hands.................................................................................. 3–45
Tap Settings/Tap Statistics................................................................................ 3–45
Tap Settings/Tap Calibration............................................................................. 3–45
Tap Settings/Miscellaneous.............................................................................. 3–45
Figure 3-45 Setup Tap Settings Dialog Screen.......................................... 3–46
Figure 3-46 Tap Settings Dialog Screen – Contact KeepTrack™ 1N......... 3–46
Setup/Alarms.................................................................................................... 3–47
Programmable Alarm Relay.............................................................................. 3–47
Alarms/Miscellaneous....................................................................................... 3–47
Figure 3-47 Programmable Alarms Dialog Screen.................................... 3–47
Setup/Wakeup Screens.................................................................................... 3–48
xii

Wakeup Screens/Miscellaneous....................................................................... 3–48
Figure 3-48 Setup Wakeup Screen Dialog Screen.................................... 3–48
Setup/Data Logging.......................................................................................... 3–49
Setup/Data Logging/Setup............................................................................... 3–49
Figure 3-49 Data Logging Setup Dialog Screen........................................ 3–49
Setup/Data Logging/Retrieve............................................................................ 3–50
Setup/Data Logging/Clear................................................................................ 3–50
Figure 3-50 Data Log Download Dialog Screen........................................ 3–50
Setup/Harmonics Setup.................................................................................... 3–51
Figure 3-51 Harmonics Setup Dialog Screen............................................ 3–51
Setup/Oscillograph/Setup................................................................................. 3–52
Table 3-1 Oscillograph Recorder Partitions and Cycles
for 16 Samples/Cycle................................................................................... 3–52
Figure 3-52 Oscillograph Setup Dialog Screen......................................... 3–53
Setup/Oscillograph/Front Panel Message........................................................ 3–54
Figure 3-53 Oscillograph Front Panel Message Dialog Screen................. 3–54
Setup/Oscillograph/Trigger............................................................................... 3–54
Figure 3-54 Oscillograph Trigger Dialog Screen........................................ 3–54
Setup/Oscillograph/Retrieve............................................................................. 3–54
Figure 3-55 Retrieve Oscillograph Record Dialog Screen......................... 3–54
Figure 3-56 Retrieve Oscillograph Record (Save As) Dialog Screen........ 3–54
Setup/Oscillograph/Clear.................................................................................. 3–54
Setup/Sequence of Events/Setup..................................................................... 3–55
Figure 3-57 Sequence of Events Trigger Logic and Element Selection..... 3–55
Figure 3-58 Sequence of Events Pickup/Dropout Edge Sensitive
OR Gate Setup Dialog Screen..................................................................... 3–56
Figure 3-59 Sequence of Events Pickup Level Sensitive
AND Gate Setup Dialog Screen................................................................... 3–56
Figure 3-60 Sequence of Events Dropout Level Sensitive
AND Gate Setup Dialog Screen................................................................... 3–56
Setup/Sequence of Events/Retrieve................................................................. 3–57
Figure 3-61 Retrieve Sequence of Events File Save As Dialog Screen.... 3–57
Setup/Sequence of Events/View...................................................................... 3–57
Setup/Sequence of Events/Clear...................................................................... 3–57
Figure 3-62 Clear Sequence of Events Record Dialog Screen................. 3–57
Figure 3-63 View Sequence of Events Record Dialog Screen.................. 3–58
Setup/CBEMA Events/Setup............................................................................ 3–59
Figure 3-64 CBEMA Setting Dialog Screen............................................... 3–59
Setup/Display All Settings Command............................................................... 3–60
Figure 3-65 All Setpoints Dialog Screen.................................................... 3–60
Utility................................................................................................................. 3–61
Utility/Remote Control....................................................................................... 3–61
Block Auto Control via Communication............................................................ 3–61
Restoring Automatic Operation (Local)............................................................. 3–61
xiii

SCAMP Control................................................................................................ 3–61
Figure 3-66 Remote Control Screens........................................................ 3–62
Utility/Control Information................................................................................. 3–63
Figure 3-67 Control Information Screen.................................................... 3–63
Control Information/Miscellaneous................................................................... 3–63
Utility/Change User Access Code.................................................................... 3–63
Figure 3-68 Change User Access Code Dialog Screen............................ 3–63
Utility/Set Date & Time...................................................................................... 3–64
Figure 3-69 Set Date/Time Warning Dialog Screen................................... 3–64
Figure 3-70 Set Control Date/Time Dialog Screen.................................... 3–64
Figure 3-71 Reset Demand and Energy Warning Dialog Screen.............. 3–64
Utility/ Device Discovery................................................................................... 3–65
Figure 3-72 Device Discovery Dialog Screen............................................ 3–65
Utility/Multi Level Access Code......................................................................... 3–65
Figure 3-73 Multi Level Access Code Dialog Screen................................. 3–65
Utility/SD Card Access Code............................................................................ 3–66
Figure 3-74 SD Card Access Code
Dialog Screen............................................................................................... 3–66
Utility/IEC 61850............................................................................................... 3–66
Figure 3-75 IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Dialog Screen...................... 3–66
Utility/DNP........................................................................................................ 3–67
Utility/DNP/DNP Configuration Editor............................................................... 3–67
Figure 3-76 M-2001D DNP Configuration Editor Dialog Screen................ 3–68
Utility/DNP/Source Address Validation............................................................. 3–69
Figure 3-77 Source Address Validation Dialog Screen.............................. 3–69
Figure 3-78 Confirm Writing to the Device Dialog Screen......................... 3–69
Utility/DNP/Send DNP Configuration File......................................................... 3–69
Figure 3-79 Authentication Key Generated Dialog Screen........................ 3–69
Figure 3-80 DNP Open File Dialog Screen................................................ 3–69
Figure 3-81 Send Status Screen............................................................... 3–69
Figure 3-82 DNP Upload Complete Screen............................................... 3–70
Utility/DNP/Receive DNP Configuration File..................................................... 3–70
Figure 3-83 Save As File Dialog Screen.................................................... 3–70
Figure 3-84 Download Complete Dialog Screen....................................... 3–70
Utility/DNP/DNP File Identifier.......................................................................... 3–70
Figure 3-85 DNP File Information Dialog Screen...................................... 3–70
Utility/DNP/UDP Port Settings.......................................................................... 3–70
Figure 3-86 UDP Settings Dialog Screen.................................................. 3–70
Utility/ Master/Follower Configuration............................................................... 3–71
Figure 3-87 Master/Follower Configuration Menu...................................... 3–71
Utility/Send Firmware Update........................................................................... 3–72
Figure 3-88 Open File Dialog Screen........................................................ 3–72
Figure 3-89 Firmware Upload Screen....................................................... 3–72
Figure 3-90 File Transfer Confirmation Screen.......................................... 3–72
xiv

Utility/Convert Datalog File to CSV Format...................................................... 3–73
Utility/Convert Binary Soe File to .SOE Format................................................ 3–73
Windows........................................................................................................... 3–73
Figure 3-91 Convert Binary File to SOE Format Dialog Screen................ 3–73
Help.................................................................................................................. 3–73
Help/Contents................................................................................................... 3–73
Help/About S-2001D......................................................................................... 3–73
Figure 3-92 About TapTalk......................................................................... 3–73
3.11 TapPlot® Analysis Software............................................................................... 3–74
Starting TapPlot................................................................................................ 3–74
Overview........................................................................................................... 3–74
Figure 3-93 TapPlot Main Window with Submenus.................................... 3–74
Figure 3-94 TapPlot Window with Data Logging Data Example................. 3–75
Figure 3-95 TapPlot Window with Oscillograph Data Example.................. 3–76
Markers............................................................................................................. 3–77
Figure 3-96 TapPlot Screen With Callouts................................................. 3–77
Figure 3-97 TapPlot Main Screen Data Time Stamp Display..................... 3–77
Right-Click Filter Menus.................................................................................... 3–78
Figure 3-98 Datalog File Right-Click Filter Menu....................................... 3–78
Figure 3-99 Oscillograph File Right-Click Filter Menus.............................. 3–78
File Menu.......................................................................................................... 3–79
View Menu........................................................................................................ 3–79
Figure 3-100 Device Information Screen................................................... 3–79
Settings Menu................................................................................................... 3–80
Figure 3-101 Select Waveform Dialog Screen........................................... 3–80
Figure 3-102 Select Color Dialog Screen.................................................. 3–80
Figure 3-103 Change Scale Screen.......................................................... 3–80
Figure 3-104 Search Time Stamp Screen................................................. 3–81
Help Menu ....................................................................................................... 3–81
Figure 3-105 About TapPlot Screen........................................................... 3–81
Chapter 4 System Setup

4.1 System Setup........................................................................................................ 4–4
General Unit Setup............................................................................................. 4–4
User Access Codes............................................................................................ 4–4
Setting Level 1 or Level 2 User Access Codes From The HMI........................... 4–4
Setting Level 1 or Level 2 User Access Codes From TapTalk............................. 4–6
Figure 4-1 Change User Access Code Dialog Screen................................ 4–6
Figure 4-2 Save to Device Confirmation Screen.......................................... 4–6
Figure 4-3 Access Codes Were Changed Successfully Dialog Screen....... 4–6
Setting Multi Level Access Codes From TapTalk.................................................. 4–7
Figure 4-4 Multi Level Access Code Dialog Screen..................................... 4–7
xv
Chapter 4 System Setup (Cont.'d)

Figure 4-5 Access Level Code Dialog Screen............................................. 4–7
Figure 4-6 Access Key Dialog Screen......................................................... 4–7
Figure 4-7 Authentication Key Generated Successfully Dialog Screen....... 4–8
Figure 4-8 Multi Access Code Upload Dialog Screen.................................. 4–8
User Lines.......................................................................................................... 4–9
Setting User Lines From The HMI...................................................................... 4–9
Setting User Lines From TapTalk...................................................................... 4–10
Figure 4-9 Control Information Screen...................................................... 4–10
System Clock.................................................................................................... 4–10
Setting Time/Date and Daylight Savings From The HMI................................... 4–10
Setting Date/Time and Daylight Savings From TapTalk.................................... 4–12
Figure 4-10 Set Date/Time Warning Dialog Screen................................... 4–12
Figure 4-11 Set Control Date/Time Dialog Screen.................................... 4–12
Figure 4-12 Reset Demand and Energy Warning Dialog Screen.............. 4–12
Oscillograph Setup........................................................................................... 4–13
Table 4-1 Recorder Partitions and Cycles for 16 Samples/Cycle.............. 4–13
Setup Oscillograph Recorder........................................................................... 4–14
Figure 4-13 Setpoints Successfully Written
To The Control Dialog Screen...................................................................... 4–14
Figure 4-14 Oscillograph Setup Dialog Screen......................................... 4–14
Sequence of Events Recorder.......................................................................... 4–15
Table 4-2 Sequence of Events Recorder Triggers..................................... 4–15
Event Logic....................................................................................................... 4–16
Figure 4-15 Sequence Of Events Recorder Trigger Logic ........................ 4–16
Setup Sequence of Events Recorder............................................................... 4–17
Figure 4-16 Sequence of Events Setup Dialog Screen............................. 4–17
Figure 4-17 Sequence of Events Pickup/Dropout Edge Sensitive
OR Gate Setup Dialog Screen..................................................................... 4–18
Figure 4-18 Sequence of Events Pickup Level Sensitive
AND Gate Pickup Setup Dialog Screen....................................................... 4–18
Figure 4-19 Sequence of Events Dropout Level Sensitive
AND Gate Dropout Setup Dialog Screen..................................................... 4–18
Wakeup Screens.............................................................................................. 4–19
Selecting Wakeup Screen Parameters............................................................. 4–19
Figure 4-20 Wakeup Screen Menu Setup Dialog Screen.......................... 4–20
Communication................................................................................................. 4–21
Direct Connections........................................................................................... 4–21
Protocols........................................................................................................... 4–21
Communication Access Security and Timeout ................................................ 4–21
Enabling Communication Access Security and Timeout From The HMI.......... 4–22
Enabling Communication Access Security and Setting Timeout (TapTalk)....... 4–23
Figure 4-21 Communication Access Security Setup Dialog Screen.......... 4–23
Source Address Validation................................................................................ 4–24
Enabling Source Address Validation From The HMI......................................... 4–24
xvi

Enabling Source Address Validation From TapTalk®......................................... 4–25
Figure 4-22 Source Address Validation Dialog Screen ............................. 4–25
Feeder and/or Substation Addressing.............................................................. 4–25
Figure 4-23 Multiple Client, Feeder and/or Substation Addressing........... 4–26
Figure 4-24 Single Client, Feeder and/or Substation Addressing
Network Connection..................................................................................... 4–26
Setting Substation Address From The HMI...................................................... 4–27
Setting Feeder Address From The HMI............................................................ 4–28
Setting Communication Addresses From TapTalk............................................ 4–29
Figure 4-25 Change Address Warning Dialog Screen............................... 4–29
Figure 4-26 Change Communication Address Dialog Screen ................. 4–29
Automatic Mode Blocking................................................................................. 4–29
Comm Block Auto............................................................................................. 4–29
Setting Comm Block Auto From The HMI......................................................... 4–29
Setting Comm Block Auto at Power Off From TapTalk...................................... 4–30
Figure 4-27 Save to Device Confirmation Screen...................................... 4–30
Figure 4-28 Configuration (Save Comm Block at Power Off) Screen........ 4–31
SCAMP Initialize on Power Up......................................................................... 4–31
Setting SCAMP Initialize on Power Up From The HMI..................................... 4–31
Setting SCAMP Initialize on Power Up From TapTalk....................................... 4–32
Figure 4-29 Configuration (SCAMP Initialize on Power Up) Screen.......... 4–32
Optional Ethernet Port...................................................................................... 4–33
Ethernet Port Configuration From TapTalk........................................................ 4–33
Figure 4-30 Setup Ethernet Dialog Screen................................................ 4–34
Network Time Synchronization......................................................................... 4–35
HMI Configuration of the Control’s Ethernet Port for use on a network
that supports DHCP Protocol........................................................................... 4–35
HMI Configuration of the Control’s Ethernet Port for use on a network
that does not support DHCP Protocol.............................................................. 4–36
MODBUS Port and DNP Port Settings From The HMI..................................... 4–38
Ethernet Keepalive Time Settings From The HMI............................................. 4–39
RS-485/Fiber Optic Port................................................................................... 4–40
RS-485/Fiber Optic Port Setup From The HMI................................................. 4–40
RS-485/Fiber Optic Port Setup From TapTalk................................................... 4–44
Figure 4-31 Setup Comm Port Dialog Screen ......................................... 4–44
RS-232 Port Setup From The HMI.................................................................... 4–44
RS-232 Port Setup From TapTalk..................................................................... 4–47
Figure 4-32 Setup RS-232 Comm Port Dialog Screen.............................. 4–47
Installing Modems............................................................................................. 4–47
Connecting the PC Modem.............................................................................. 4–47
Initializing the PC Modem................................................................................. 4–48
Figure 4-33 Modem Connection Dialog Screen......................................... 4–48
Connecting the Local Modem to the Control.................................................... 4–48
Figure 4-34 Terminal Window.................................................................... 4–48
xvii

Optional Bluetooth®.......................................................................................... 4–49
Bluetooth Module Initialization.......................................................................... 4–50
Bluetooth Initialization Overview....................................................................... 4–50
Bluetooth Setup From the HMI......................................................................... 4–50
Bluetooth Setup From TapTalk®................................................................................................................................. 4–52
Figure 4-35 Bluetooth Hardware Option Dialog Screen............................ 4–53
Figure 4-36 Bluetooth Information Dialog Screen...................................... 4–53
Bluetooth Mode1 Setup (TapTalk).................................................................... 4–54
Figure 4-37 Secure Bluetooth Setup Screen............................................. 4–54
Resetting Bluetooth Module (HMI)................................................................... 4–54
Resetting Bluetooth Module (TapTalk).............................................................. 4–55
Figure 4-38 Bluetooth Reset Command Sent Confirmation Screen.......... 4–55
Figure 4-39 Bluetooth Reset Status Screen.............................................. 4–55
Figure 4-40 Bluetooth Reset Confirmation Screen.................................... 4–55
Resetting Bluetooth Passkey (HMI).................................................................. 4–56
Resetting Bluetooth Passkey (TapTalk)............................................................ 4–57
Figure 4-41 Bluetooth Authentication Password Dialog Screen................ 4–57
Figure 4-42 New Bluetooth Password Written Successfully Screen.......... 4–57
SCADA HeartBeat............................................................................................ 4–58
SCADA HeartBeat for LTC and Regulator....................................................... 4–58
SCADA HeartBeat for Profile Switching........................................................... 4–59
HeartBeat Manual Mode.................................................................................. 4–59
Setting SCADA HeartBeat Option.................................................................... 4–60
Figure 4-43 SCADA HeartBeat Dialog Screen.......................................... 4–60
Figure 4-44 SCADA HeartBeat LTC and Regulator DNP 3.0 Protocol...... 4–61
Figure 4-45 Profile Switching..................................................................... 4–62
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Tapchanger Type Selections............................................................................... 5–6
Figure 5-1 Tapchanger Type Selections Dialog Screen............................... 5–6
Table 5-1 Vendor Specific Regulator Settings.............................................. 5–7
5.2 Configuration...................................................................................................... 5–8
User Programmable Alarm Relay....................................................................... 5–8
Setting Programmable Alarm Relay Inputs From TapTalk.................................. 5–8
Figure 5-2 Programmable Alarm Relay Setting Dialog Screen................... 5–8
Figure 5-3 Save to Device Confirmation Screen.......................................... 5–8
Figure 5-4 Setpoints Successfully Written To The Control Dialog Screen... 5–8
Figure 5-5 Programmable Alarm Function Programming............................ 5–9
Programmable Alarm Relay Mode.................................................................... 5–10
Setting Programmable Alarm Relay Mode From The HMI................................ 5–10
Setting Programmable Alarm Relay Mode From TapTalk................................. 5–10
Setting Programmable Alarm Relay Inputs From The HMI............................... 5–11
xviii
Chapter 5 Configuration (Cont.'d)

Op Count Signal Alarm..................................................................................... 5–12
Setting Op Count Signal Alarm From The HMI................................................. 5–12
Setting Op Count Signal Alarm From TapTalk®................................................. 5–13
Figure 5-6 Tap Settings Dialog Screen...................................................... 5–13
Counters........................................................................................................... 5–14
Operation Counter............................................................................................ 5–14
Setting the Operation Counter Configuration From The HMI............................ 5–14
Setting Operation Counter X Mode Delay From The HMI................................. 5–15
Setting Operation Counter Time Window From The HMI.................................. 5–16
Configuring the Operation Counter From TapTalk............................................ 5–17
Setting Input Selection 1 Operation Counter Input Configuration
to Switch Status From The HMI........................................................................ 5–17
to Switch Status From TapTalk.......................................................................... 5–18
Figure 5-7 Tap Information/Input Selection Conflict Error Screen.............. 5–18
Figure 5-8 Configuration Dialog Screen.................................................... 5–19
Motor Seal-in Failure Block............................................................................... 5–20
Motor Seal-In From The HMI............................................................................ 5–22
Motor Seal-In From TapTalk.............................................................................. 5–22
Setting Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block From The HMI................................ 5–23
Setting Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block From TapTalk.................................. 5–23
Input Selection 2 (Non-Sequential or SCADA Cutout)...................................... 5–24
Setting Input Selection 2 (Non-Sequential or SCADA Cutout) From The HMI... 5–24
Setting Input Selection 2 From TapTalk............................................................ 5–24
Input Selection 3 (VR2 or Aux)......................................................................... 5–25
Setting Input Selection 3 (VR2/Aux) From The HMI................................................ 5–25
Setting Input Selection 3 From TapTalk............................................................ 5–25
Auto/Manual Switch Type.................................................................................. 5–26
Setting Auto/Man Switch Type From The HMI................................................... 5–26
Setting Auto/Manual Switch Type From TapTalk................................................ 5–26
Resettable Operation Counter.......................................................................... 5–27
Resetting the Resettable Operation Counter From TapTalk.............................. 5–27
Presettable Operation Counters (Operation, Neutral, Lower and Raise).......... 5–27
Presetting the Operation Counter From TapTalk............................................... 5–28
Presetting the Neutral Counter From TapTalk................................................... 5–28
Ratio Multipliers................................................................................................ 5–29
Voltage and Current Multipliers......................................................................... 5–29
Normalizing Voltage Multiplier.......................................................................... 5–29
Setting The Voltage and Current Multipliers From The HMI.............................. 5–29
Setting The Voltage and Current Multipliers From TapTalk............................... 5–30
Primary Power Display Selection...................................................................... 5–31
Setting Primary Power Display Selection From The HMI.................................. 5–31
xix

Setting Primary Power Display Selection From TapTalk®.................................. 5–31
Correction Factors............................................................................................ 5–32
VT Ratio Correction.......................................................................................... 5–32
Setting Load VT Correction Factor from the HMI.............................................. 5–32
Setting Source VT Correction Factor from the HMI.......................................... 5–33
Setting Load and/or Source VT Correction Factors From TapTalk.................... 5–33
CT/VT Phase Shift............................................................................................ 5–34
Setting CT/Load and/or CT/Source Phase Shift Quantities From The HMI...... 5–34
Setting CT/Load and/or CT/Source Phase Shift Quantities From TapTalk....... 5–35
Auxiliary Current Transformer........................................................................... 5–35
Setting Auxiliary Current Transformer Rating From The HMI............................ 5–35
Setting Auxiliary Current Transformer Rating From TapTalk............................. 5–36
Metering Factors............................................................................................... 5–36
Secondary........................................................................................................ 5–36
Primary ............................................................................................................ 5–36
Present Demand .............................................................................................. 5–37
Energy Metering............................................................................................... 5–37
Demand History................................................................................................ 5–37
Frequency......................................................................................................... 5–37
Load VT Configuration...................................................................................... 5–38
Setting Load VT Configuration From The HMI.................................................. 5–38
Setting Load VT Configuration From TapTalk................................................... 5–38
Output Selection............................................................................................... 5–39
Output Pulse..................................................................................................... 5–39
SCADA Initiated Manual Raise/Lower.............................................................. 5–39
Continuous....................................................................................................... 5–39
Setting Output Configuration From The HMI.................................................... 5–39
Setting Output Configuration From TapTalk...................................................... 5–40
Motor Current Detection and Monitoring.......................................................... 5–41
Setting the Motor Current Detection Settings From The HMI........................... 5–42
Setting the Motor Current Detection Settings From TapTalk............................. 5–42
Regulator Type.................................................................................................. 5–43
Figure 5-9 Regulator Type......................................................................... 5–43
Setting Regulator Type From The HMI.............................................................. 5–44
Setting Regulator Type From TapTalk............................................................... 5–44
Enabling/Disabling Remote Voltage Bias From the HMI................................... 5–46
Enabling/Disabling and Remote Voltage Bias From TapTalk............................ 5–47
Run Through Neutral........................................................................................ 5–48
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Run Through Neutral From The HMI .............. 5–48
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Run Through Neutral From TapTalk................ 5–50
Fast Voltage Recovery...................................................................................... 5–51
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Fast Voltage Recovery From The HMI ........... 5–51
Enabling/Disabling and Fast Voltage Recovery From TapTalk.......................... 5–52
xx

Standard Voltage Reduction............................................................................. 5–53
Enabling/Disabling Standard Voltage Reduction From The HMI ...................... 5–53
Smart Voltage Reduction.................................................................................. 5–54
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Smart Voltage Reduction From The HMI ....... 5–54
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Standard or Smart Voltage Reduction
From TapTalk®................................................................................................... 5–55
Save Voltage Reduction at Power Off............................................................... 5–56
Setting Save Voltage Reduction at Power Off From The HMI........................... 5–56
Selecting Save Voltage Reduction at Power Off From TapTalk......................... 5–56
Setting Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer From The HMI................................... 5–57
Setting Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer From TapTalk.................................... 5–57
VAr Bias............................................................................................................ 5–58
VAr Bias Setpoints............................................................................................ 5–58
Overview........................................................................................................... 5–58
Enable/Disable VAr Bias From The HMI........................................................... 5–59
Setting VAr Bias From TapTalk.......................................................................... 5–61
5.3 Parallel Operation............................................................................................. 5–62
Circulating Current and Delta VAr Methods...................................................... 5–62
Circulating Current/∆VAR®1.............................................................................. 5–62
∆VAR2 Paralleling and ∆VAR2 Paralleling + KeepTrack™............................... 5–63
∆VAR2 Connection........................................................................................... 5–64
Figure 5-10 Simplified Schematic of Current Circuit for M-2001D Paralleling
Two Transformers using the Circulating Current or ∆VAR Method............... 5–66
Figure 5-11 M‑2001D and M‑2067B Paralleling Scheme for
Two Transformers using the Circulating Current or ∆VAR Method............... 5–67
Figure 5-12 M‑2001D and M-2067B Paralleling Scheme for
Three Transformers using the Circulating Current or ∆VAR Method............ 5–68
Figure 5-13 ∆VAR2 Paralleling.................................................................. 5–69
Selecting Paralleling Method and ∆VAR2 Settings........................................... 5–70
Selecting Paralleling Method and ∆VAR2 Settings From The HMI.................... 5–70
Selecting Paralleling Method and Settings From TapTalk................................. 5–71
Figure 5-14 DVAr2 and DVAr2 (KeepTrack) Paralleling Settings............... 5–71
Optional Master/Follower Paralleling Method................................................... 5–72
Grouping Operation Algorithm (GOA):.............................................................. 5–72
Figure 5-15 Master/Follower Paralleling Settings...................................... 5–72
Figure 5-16 Breaker/Control Network Map................................................ 5–73
Master/Follower Alarm Messages.................................................................... 5–74
Figure 5-17 Master/Follower Alarm Messages.......................................... 5–74
Lockout Condition............................................................................................. 5–74
Master Lockout................................................................................................. 5–74
Follower Lockout............................................................................................... 5–75
Master/Follower Configuration Tool.................................................................. 5–75
Discovered Devices.......................................................................................... 5–75
xxi

Figure 5-18 Master/Follower Configuration Tool Dialog Screen................. 5–76
Setting Masters and Followers From TapTalk®.................................................. 5–77
Master Control Setup From TapTalk................................................................. 5–77
Figure 5-19 Remote Control Dialog Screen............................................... 5–77
Follower Control Setup From TapTalk............................................................... 5–78
Setting Masters and Followers From The HMI.................................................. 5–79
Master Control Setup From The HMI................................................................ 5–79
Follower Control Setup From HMI.................................................................... 5–83
5.4 Tap Settings...................................................................................................... 5–88
Tap Information................................................................................................. 5–88
Load Tapchanger (LTC) Positive Tap Position Knowledge................................ 5–88
Table 5‑1 Tap Information Screen Selections............................................ 5–88
Contact KeepTrack™........................................................................................ 5–89
Contact KeepTrack Method I – Using 1R/1L Contact Input.............................. 5–89
Example of Contact KeepTrack Method I – Using 1R/1L Contact Input........... 5–89
Figure 5-20 Cam Switches Available With Dry Contacts........................... 5–90
Figure 5-21 Cam Switches Available With Wetted 120 Vac....................... 5–90
Contact KeepTrack Method II – Using Neutral Contact Input........................... 5–91
Example of Contact KeepTrack Method II – Using Neutral Contact Input
(with 84R/84L derived contacts)....................................................................... 5–92
Figure 5-22 Cam Switches Available......................................................... 5–93
Figure 5-23 84R and 84L Aux Relays Available With Wetted 120 VAC..... 5–93
Shaft Coupled KeepTrack™ Tap Position Knowledge...................................... 5–94
Beckwith Electric Shaft Coupled KeepTrack Method........................................ 5–94
Beckwith Electric-INCON Shaft Coupled KeepTrack Method........................... 5–94
Figure 5-24 Tap Position Scheme Using Shaft Coupled KeepTrack.......... 5–95
Figure 5-25 Tap Position Scheme Using INCON Devices......................... 5–95
Resistor Divider KeepTrack™ Tap Position Knowledge For LTCs.................... 5–96
Figure 5-26 Tap Position Scheme Using Resistor Divider KeepTrack........ 5–96
Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™ Tap Position Knowledge For LTCs................. 5–97
Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack Tap Position Knowledge For Regulators........... 5–98
Selecting Tap Position Knowledge From The HMI............................................ 5–99
Selecting Tap Position Knowledge From TapTalk................................................ 5–100
Contact KeepTrack™ 1N – Additional TapTalk Settings Screen..................... 5–100
Figure 5-27 Contact KeepTrack 1N Neutral Tap Configuration Screen.... 5–100
Initializing Tap Position When Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack
"Internal KeepTrack" is Active From The HMI................................................. 5–101
Initializing Tap Position When Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™
"Internal KeepTrack" is Active From TapTalk................................................... 5–102
Initializing Tap Position When Regulate (Reg or XFMR) External or
Contact KeepTrack™ 1R1L/1N is Active From The HMI................................. 5–102
Initializing Tap Position When Regulate (Reg or XFMR) External or
Contact KeepTrack™ 1R1L/1N is Active From TapTalk.................................. 5–103
Setting Highest Tap From The HMI................................................................. 5–104
xxii

Setting Lowest Tap From The HMI.................................................................. 5–105
Setting Highest and Lowest Tap From TapTalk®.............................................. 5–105
Intertap Time Delay........................................................................................ 5–106
Sequential/Non-Sequential/Blocking.............................................................. 5–106
Setting The Intertap Delay From The HMI...................................................... 5–107
Setting Intertap Time Delay From TapTalk...................................................... 5–107
Tap Limits....................................................................................................... 5–108
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Tap Limits From The HMI ............................. 5–108
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Tap Limits From TapTalk................................ 5–109
5.5 Data Logging and Harmonics......................................................................... 5–110
Data Logging.................................................................................................. 5–110
Data Logging Setup From The HMI................................................................ 5–110
Data Logging Setup From TapTalk.................................................................. 5–111
Figure 5-28 Data Logging Setup Dialog Screen...................................... 5–111
Harmonics Setup............................................................................................ 5–112
Setting the Active Harmonics Inputs to the Oscillograph and
Sequence of Events Recorders From The HMI.............................................. 5–112
Setting the Harmonic Voltage, Current Threshold and
Minimum Current Threshold Setting(s) From The HMI................................... 5–113
Setting the Harmonic Voltage and Current Threshold Delay (HMI)................ 5–114
Setting the Active Harmonics Inputs to the Oscillograph and
Sequence of Events Recorders From TapTalk................................................ 5–115
Figure 5-29 Harmonics Setup Dialog Screen.......................................... 5–115
5.6 CBEMA Configuration.................................................................................... 5–116
CBEMA Functionality...................................................................................... 5–116
Setpoints......................................................................................................... 5–116
Outputs........................................................................................................... 5–116
Triggers........................................................................................................... 5–116
Operation........................................................................................................ 5–116
CBEMA Setup From The HMI......................................................................... 5–116
CBEMA Setup From TapTalk.......................................................................... 5–118
Figure 5-30 CBEMA Sequence of Event Enable Confirmation Screen... 5–119
Figure 5-31 CBEMA Setup Dialog Screen............................................... 5–119
Chapter 6 Setpoints
6.1 Setpoints............................................................................................................. 6–4
Setpoint Profiles................................................................................................. 6–4
Editing Setpoint Profiles..................................................................................... 6–4
Selecting a Setpoint Profile for Editing From The HMI....................................... 6–4
Selecting a Setpoint Profile for Editing From TapTalk......................................... 6–4
Naming Setpoint Profiles.................................................................................... 6–5
Assigning a Setpoint Profile Name From The HMI............................................. 6–5
xxiii
Chapter 6 Setpoints (Cont.'d)

Assigning a Setpoint Profile Name (TapTalk®).................................................... 6–5
Figure 6-1 Setpoint Profile Names Dialog Screen....................................... 6–5
Figure 6-2 Active Setpoint Profile and Setpoint Profile to Edit Identifier...... 6–6
Regulation Limits................................................................................................ 6–7
Overvoltage Limit and Voltage Runback............................................................. 6–7
Undervoltage Block and Voltage Runup............................................................. 6–7
Coordination with Backup Relay......................................................................... 6–7
Tap Position Block.............................................................................................. 6–8
Overcurrent Block Operation.............................................................................. 6–8
Low Current Block.............................................................................................. 6–8
Figure 6-3 Local Voltage as Function of Load Current Using Line Drop
Compensation/Action of Overvoltage and Overvoltage Runback Control...... 6–8
Setting the Overvoltage Block Raise Limit From The HMI ................................. 6–9
Setting the Voltage Runback Deadband From The HMI .................................. 6–10
Setting the Undervoltage Block Lower Limit From The HMI ............................ 6–11
Setting the Voltage Runup Deadband From The HMI ...................................... 6–12
Enabling/Disabling Voltage Runup From The HMI ........................................... 6–13
Setting the Current Block Limit From The HMI ................................................ 6–14
Enabling/Disabling The Low Current Block/Alarm From The HMI.................... 6–15
Enabling/Disabling The Low Current Block/Alarm From TapTalk...................... 6–15
Setting Block Raise Limit, Runback Deadband, Block Lower Limit,
Runup Deadband and Current Block Limit From TapTalk................................. 6–16
Figure 6-4 Save to Device Confirmation Screen........................................ 6–16
Figure 6-5 Setpoints Successfully Written To The Control Screen............ 6–16
Figure 6-6 Setpoints Dialog Screen........................................................... 6–16
Setting Voltage Reduction Steps 1, 2 and 3 From The HMI ............................ 6–17
Setting Voltage Reduction Steps 1, 2 and 3 From TapTalk............................... 6–18
Line Drop Compensation.................................................................................. 6–19
Voltage Regulation Without LDC ..................................................................... 6–19
Voltage Regulation With LDC........................................................................... 6–19
LDC R/X........................................................................................................... 6–19
Table 6-1 Approximate Ratio of Line Resistance to Reactance (R/X)
of Typical Distribution Circuits....................................................................... 6–19
Setting.............................................................................................................. 6–20
LDC‑Z............................................................................................................... 6–20
Table 6-2 Line Drop Compensation Setpoint Ranges................................ 6–20
Selecting Line Drop Compensation Type and Settings From The HMI ............ 6–21
Setting Power Flow Forward and Power Flow Reverse
LDC Resistance (R) and Reactance (X) Values From The HMI....................... 6–22
Setting Power Flow Forward and Reverse LDC Z Values From The HMI......... 6–23
Setting Line Drop Compensation From TapTalk............................................... 6–24
Basic Time Delay.............................................................................................. 6–25
Figure 6-7 Inverse Time Delay Curve........................................................ 6–25
xxiv
Chapter 6 Setpoints (Cont.'d)

Setting Basic Time Delay Timer Characteristic and Type From The HMI......... 6–26
Setting Basic Time Delay Timer Characteristic and Type From TapTalk®.......... 6–27
Reverse Power Operation................................................................................. 6–28
Detecting Reverse Power................................................................................. 6–28
Power Direction Bias Setpoints........................................................................ 6–28
"None" Setting.................................................................................................. 6–28
"Forward Bias" Setting...................................................................................... 6–28
"Reverse Bias" Setting...................................................................................... 6–28
Reverse Power Operation Mode....................................................................... 6–28
Smart Reverse Power (Auto Determination)..................................................... 6–30
TapTalk Reverse Power Vendor Cross Reference............................................ 6–31
Figure 6-8 TapTalk Reverse Power Vendor Cross Reference Table........... 6–31
Setting Reverse Power Operation and Power Direction Bias Mode (HMI)....... 6–32
Setting Reverse Power Operation and Power Direction Bias Mode (TapTalk).... 6–33
Power Flow Settings......................................................................................... 6–34
Bandcenter....................................................................................................... 6–34
Bandwidth......................................................................................................... 6–34
Setting Bandcenter and Bandwidth From The HMI.......................................... 6–34
Setting Bandcenter and Bandwidth From TapTalk............................................ 6–35
Setting The Definite or Inverse Delay From The HMI............................................... 6–36
Setting The Definite or Inverse Delay From TapTalk......................................... 6–37
Chapter 7 Installation
7.0 Installation.......................................................................................................... 7–1
7.1 External Connections......................................................................................... 7–1
Figure 7-1 External Connection Locations.................................................... 7–2
Pin 1 Voltage Input........................................................................................... 7–3
Pin 2 Load Current Return............................................................................... 7–3
Pin 3 Neutral.................................................................................................... 7–3
Pin 4 Load Current Polarity.............................................................................. 7–3
Pin 5 Circulating Current Polarity..................................................................... 7–3
Pin 6 Circulating Current Return...................................................................... 7–3
Pin 7 Tapchanger Raise................................................................................... 7–3
Pin 8 Motor Power Input................................................................................... 7–3
Pin 9................................................................................................................... 7–4
– Voltage Reduction Step #2.............................................................................. 7–4
– Neutral Input Operation................................................................................... 7–4
Pin 10 +12 Vdc Wetting Voltage....................................................................... 7–4
Pins 11 & 12 Operations Counter Inputs 1 and 2............................................ 7–4
Pin 13 Input 1 - Motor Seal-In/Switch Status Input.......................................... 7–4
Pins 14 & 15 Neutral Position Detector Inputs 1 and 2/
∆VAR2 (KeepTrack) Disable Input...................................................................... 7–4
Pin 16 Tapchanger Lower Output..................................................................... 7–4
xxv
Chapter 7 Installation (Cont.'d)

Pin 17 Input 2 .................................................................................................. 7–5
– Non-sequential Operation................................................................................ 7–5
– Auto Tapchange Inhibit.................................................................................... 7–5
– SCADA Cutout Input........................................................................................ 7–5
Pin 18 Voltage Reduction Step #1................................................................... 7–5
Pin 19 Motor Seal-In Disconnect Output.......................................................... 7–5
Pins 20 & 22 User-Programmable Alarm......................................................... 7–5
Pins 21 and 24 Self-Test Alarm........................................................................ 7–5
Pin 23 Non-Interruptible Power Supply Input................................................... 7–5
Pin 1 Source Voltage Input................................................................................. 7–6
Pin 2 Auxiliary Output......................................................................................... 7–6
Pin 3 Auxiliary Input A1...................................................................................... 7–6
Pins 4 and 5, Auxiliary Inputs - A2, A3............................................................... 7–6
7.2 Non-Sequential Operation.................................................................................. 7–6
Figure 7‑2 Typical M‑2001D Stand-Alone External Connections................. 7–7
Figure 7‑3 Typical Adapter Panel External Connections.............................. 7–8
7.3 Multi-Step Voltage Reduction ............................................................................ 7–9
7.4 LTC Backup Control............................................................................................ 7–9
7.5 Communication Ports......................................................................................... 7–9
Fiber Optic Interface .......................................................................................... 7–9
Table 7-1 Multi-Step Voltage Reduction External Connections.................... 7–9
Ethernet (RJ-45 Interface)................................................................................ 7–10
RS‑485 Interface (Additional Communication Port)............................................... 7–10
Figure 7‑4 Communication Connections................................................... 7–10
7.6 Communication Cables..................................................................................... 7–11
Figure 7-5 Null Modem Cable 9-Pin to 9-Pin............................................. 7–11
Figure 7-6 Null Modem Cable 9-Pin to 25-Pin........................................... 7–11
7.7 Grounding......................................................................................................... 7–12
7.8 Typical LTC Connection.................................................................................... 7–12
7.9 Typical Regulator Connection........................................................................... 7–12
Figure 7‑7 M-2001D and LTC Transformer Control Adapter Panel
Typical Connections..................................................................................... 7–13
Figure 7-8 M-2001D and Regulator Control Adapter Panel
Typical Connections..................................................................................... 7–14
7.10 Control Power Backup Input Connection.......................................................... 7–15
Transient Protection.......................................................................................... 7–15
Surge Withstand Capability.............................................................................. 7–15
Electrostatic Discharge Test............................................................................. 7–15
Fast Transient Disturbance Test........................................................................ 7–15
Figure 7‑9 Typical Control Power Backup Connection for M‑2001D.......... 7–16
Figure 7‑10 Control Power Backup Input Cable Assembly........................ 7–17
xxvi
Chapter 7 Installation (Cont.'d)

7.11 TapTalk S-2001D Communications Software Installation................................. 7–18
Starting TapTalk................................................................................................ 7–18
Figure 7-11 S-2001D TapTalk Program-Item Icon....................................... 7–18
7.12 Activating Initial Local Communications........................................................... 7–18
Figure 7-12 USB Port Connection Dialog Screen...................................... 7–19
Figure 7-13 Failed to Connect to the Device Screen................................. 7–19
Figure 7-14 Successfully Connected Read Only Access Screen.............. 7–19
Chapter 8 Testing
8.0 Set-up Procedure............................................................................................... 8–1
Equipment List.................................................................................................... 8–1
Procedure........................................................................................................... 8–1
Table 8‑1 Initial Settings............................................................................... 8–1
Figure 8-1 External Connections for Test Procedure................................... 8–2
8.1 Bench Test.......................................................................................................... 8–3
Resistance.......................................................................................................... 8–3
Reactance.......................................................................................................... 8–3
Voltage Reduction.............................................................................................. 8–3
Paralleling........................................................................................................... 8–3
Counter............................................................................................................... 8–4
Block Raise/Block Lower/Deadband................................................................... 8–4
8.2 Check-out Procedure.......................................................................................... 8–4
Applying Power................................................................................................... 8–4
8.3 Operational Test.................................................................................................. 8–5
8.4 In-Service Test.................................................................................................... 8–5
Figure 8‑2 Setup for Current Checkout Procedure...................................... 8–5
8.5 Bias Voltage Status/Test Mode........................................................................... 8–6
Bias Voltage Testing............................................................................................ 8–6
Figure 8-3 Bias Voltage Test Index.............................................................. 8–6
8.6 LED Scroll Test................................................................................................... 8–7
8.7 Input Test............................................................................................................ 8–8
8.8 Output Test......................................................................................................... 8–9
8.9 Button Test........................................................................................................ 8–10
Front Panel Pushbutton Testing........................................................................ 8–10
xxvii
Appendix A HMI
A.1 HMI Menu Flow...................................................................................................A–2
Figure A‑1 Monitor Menu Flow....................................................................A–2
Figure A‑2 Setpoints Menu Flow ................................................................A–3
Figure A‑3 Configuration Menu Flow (1 of 3) ..............................................A–4
Figure A‑4 Communication Menu Flow.......................................................A–7
Figure A‑5 Utilities Menu Flow ....................................................................A–8
A.2 HMI Screen Review............................................................................................A–9
Figure A‑6 Monitor Screens (page 1 of 6)...................................................A–9
Figure A‑7 Setpoints Screens (page 1 of 4)..............................................A–15
Figure A‑8 Configuration Screens (page 1 of 10)......................................A–19
Figure A‑8(B) Master/Follower Breaker Option Settings............................A–21
Figure A‑9 Communication Screens (page 1 of 5)....................................A–29
Figure A‑10 Utilities Screens (page 1 of 3)................................................A–34
Appendix B Record Forms

Figure B‑1 Setpoints Record Form (1 of 6)..................................................B–2
Figure B‑2 Configuration Record Form (1 of 4)...........................................B–8
Figure B‑3 Tap Settings Record Form (1 of 2)...........................................B–12
Figure B‑4 Alarms and Wakeup Screens Record Form.............................B–14
Figure B‑5 Data Logging and Harmonics Setup Record Form..................B–15
Figure B‑6 Oscillograph Setup Record Form.............................................B–16
Figure B‑7 Sequence of Events Setup Record Form (1 of 2)....................B–17
Figure B‑8 CBEMA Setup Record Form....................................................B–19
Figure B‑9 Comm Settings Record Form (page 1 of 3).............................B–20
Appendix C DNP Configuration Editor

Figure C-1 DNP Configuration Editor Dialog Screen.................................. C–2
Figure C-2 Configure Update Keys and Critical Request
Function Codes Dialog Screen...................................................................... C–4
Figure C-3 Authentication Key Generated Successfully Screen................. C–5
Figure C-4 Send Dialog Screen.................................................................. C–5
Figure C-5 DNP Upload Confirmation Screen............................................ C–5
Figure C-6 Inverse CROB........................................................................... C–6
Figure C-7 Individual Binary Points and Different CROB............................ C–7
xxviii
Appendix D IEC 61850 Configuration Editor

Figure D-1 IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Dialog Screen........................ D–1
Figure D-2 IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Reporting
Metering Dataset Dialog Screen................................................................... D–2
Figure D-3 IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Reporting Status
Dataset Dialog Screen.................................................................................. D–3
Figure D-4 Report Trigger Options Dialog Screen......................................... D–4
Figure D-5 Integrity and Buffer Time........................................................... D–5
Figure D-6 Option Fields For Buffered Report Control Block..................... D–4
Figure D-7 Option Fields For Unbuffered Report Control Block................. D–4
GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Events)..................................... D–6
GOOSE Message Retransmission Timing After Initial GOOSE Message......... D–6
Figure D-8 IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Schema Selection Screen...... D–7
Figure D-9 IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Goose Publisher Screen........ D–8
Figure D-10 IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Goose Subscriber Screen.... D–9
Appendix E Self-Test Error Codes
© 2010 Beckwith Electric Co. All Rights Reserved. 800‑2001D‑IB‑04 10/13

Printed in U.S.A. (02.21.03)
xxix
xxx
Introduction – 1
1 Introduction
1.1 Instruction Book Contents........................................................ 1–1
1.2 Adapter Panel/Surface Mounting Kit ....................................... 1–2
1.3 General Overview of M-2001D Tapchanger Control................. 1–2
1.4 Accessories.............................................................................. 1–3
1.1 Instruction Book Contents
This instruction book includes eight Chapters and

six Appendices.
Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 5: Configuration

Chapter One introduces the instruction book Chapter Five is designed for the person or group
contents, provides an overview of M-2001D responsible for the configuration of the M-2001D
Tapchanger Control and describes the available Digital Tapchanger Control. Chapter Five provides
accessories. definitions of system quantities and equipment
characteristics required by the control.
Chapter 2: Operation
Chapter Two provides the necessary instructions Chapter 6: Setpoints
regarding operation of the M-2001D. Operation of Chapter Six is designed for the person or group
the M-2001D is accomplished by utilizing either the responsible for the Setpoints of the M-2001D.
unit's front panel controls or through the TapTalk®
S-2001D Communications Software. Chapter 7: Installation
The person or group responsible for the installation
Chapter 3: TapTalk of the M-2001D will find herein all mechanical
Chapter Three provides a description of each information required for physical installation,
element of the TapTalk S-2001D Communications equipment ratings, and all external connections in
Software. The TapTalk menu structure and this chapter.
commands are described for each feature and
function. Chapter 8: Testing
This chapter provides step-by-step test procedures
Chapter 4: System Setup for Bench Testing, Check-out, Operational, and
Chapter Four is designed for the person(s) In‑Service tests.
responsible for the system setup of the control. It
describes the procedures for entering system setup Appendix A: Human Machine Interface (HMI)
information into the M-2001D. It also illustrates
the definition of system quantities and equipment This Appendix provides a graphical representation
characteristics required by the M-2001D, and of the Human Machine Interface (HMI) menu
describes the individual control settings. structure. It also includes descriptions of each
menu element.
1–1
M-2001D Instruction Book
Appendix B: Setpoint Configuration and The M‑2054 is an adapter kit which permits
Communication Record Forms surface mounting of the control using two right
This Appendix provides a set of forms to record angle mounting brackets, four screws and a 24-pin
and document the settings required for the proper connector with six-foot pigtails on each pin. Refer
operation of the M-2001D. Also included are the to the Instruction Manual of the M‑2054 for the
default values for each setting, where applicable. mounting details and additional information.
Appendix C: DNP Configuration Editor 1.3 General Overview of M-2001D

This Appendix includes the DNP Configuration Tapchanger Control
Editor features and functions.
The M‑2001D Digital Tapchanger Control is a
Appendix D: IEC 61850 Configuration Editor microprocessor-based transformer and step-voltage
This Appendix includes the IEC 61850 Configuration regulator load tapchanger control.
Editor features and functions. The control is designed for initial OEM installation
on new tapchangers or to replace a particular
Appendix E: Self-Test Error Codes manufacturer’s tapchanger control. Figure 1-1
This Appendix lists all error codes and their provides an overview of the functional elements
definitions. of the control. The M-2001D is designed to
mechanically and electrically replace an old
control, with mounting hardware to facilitate the
Appendix F: Index replacement. See Chapter 7, Installation for
This Appendix includes the index for the M-2001D detailed information.
Instruction Book.
Interrogation of the control and setting changes are
made using either the front panel Human Machine
1.2 Adapter Panel/ Interface (HMI), or through the communications
Surface Mounting Kit ports (MODBUS® or DNP3.0 protocol) utilizing
TapTalk® S-2001D Communications Software. The
An adapter panel or an M‑2050 or M‑2054 Surface HMI consists of a 20-character by 2‑line display and
Mounting Kit must be used with the M‑2001D seven pushbuttons. Two Access Codes are available
Tapchanger Control. Each panel adapts the to the user from the pushbuttons. All setpoints are
M‑2001D as a transformer and regulator control stored in nonvolatile memory which is unaffected
replacement and provides the external connections by control voltage disturbances.
necessary for operation via terminal blocks on
Three Tapchanger operation counters are provided:
the rear of the adapter panel. Contact Beckwith
Electric for a list of adapter panels that are currently Presettable Operations Counter
available. Refer to the Application Guides of the
Resettable Operations Counter
specific adapter panel for the mounting details. See
Figure 1-2 for a typical adapter panel mounting. Presettable Neutral Counter
The M‑2050 is an adapter kit which permits Ten LEDs are used to indicate Tapchanger Band
surface mounting of the control using two right Status, timing for RAISE and LOWER, REV PWR
angle mounting brackets, four screws and a 24- Reverse Power detection, CPU OK, ALARM,
pin connector with six-foot pigtails on each pin. V/RED Voltage Reduction in Effect, MANUAL,
The M‑2050 does not include features available on LOCAL, and TX/RX.
adapter panels. These features include mechanical
configurations and wiring connections for direct The alphanumeric display and six pushbutton
replacement, CT shorting or front panel switches, interface provides complete front panel access to
fuses or test points. Refer to the Instruction Manual the scrolling menu program shown in Appendix A,
of the M-2050 for the mounting details. Figures A-1 through A-5. The control applies to
tapchangers with ±16 taps and one neutral position.
A Voltage Reduction pushbutton allows the user to
locally apply up to three levels of Voltage Reduction
from the control front panel.
1–2
Introduction – 1
Optional Communication Ports

1.4 Accessories
The M‑2001D Digital Tapchanger Control can
be equipped with optional Bluetooth® capability
TapTalk® S-2001D Communications Software
(COM2). COM2 is located on the top rear of the unit.
TapTalk is a Windows-based communications COM2 utilizes the DNP 3.0 and MODBUS protocols.
software program available for remote control and
metering of the M‑2001D Tapchanger Control. It is The M-2001D can also be equipped with an optional
designed to interface with the microprocessor of the Ethernet Port through a RJ-45 Jack (10/100 Base-T)
control through the standard USB Port (MODBUS®) or Fiber Optic through ST connectors (100 Base‑Fx).
and all installed communication ports. The TapTalk These ports support DNP over TCP/IP and
software displays all pertinent operating information. MODBUS over TCP/IP.
All operations that can be performed from the front
panel user interface of the control can be duplicated M‑2025B(D) Current Loop Interface Modules
remotely, through TapTalk. These operations
include: The M‑2025B(D) are external self-contained
interfaces designed to operate with the tapchanger
• Changing setpoint values. This includes control for tap position by positive knowledge,
those values for normal tapchanger for LTC transformer applications. The modules
control operation, as well as custom connect to the current loop output of a tap
configuration to the site. position monitor such as the 1250-series INCON
Programmable Position Monitors. The tap position
• Monitor ing values. This includes
monitor includes current loop outputs whose level
measured and calculated values of
corresponds linearly to any of a pre-programmed
real-time operating parameters.
number of tap positions depending on the
• Data logging. The control can internally tapchanger mechanism being monitored. The
store various parameters at selected modules accept current loop ranges of:
intervals. The TapTalk program can
download this data into a spreadsheet • 0 to 1 mA dc
and display. Alternatively, the PC can • 0 to 2 mA dc
be programmed to poll the control and
obtain a pre-selected list of parameters • -1 to +1 mA dc
at selected intervals. • 4 to 20 mA dc
Also, TapTalk includes a utility to convert
the downloaded Datalog files from the The Tap Information screen is provided in the
Smart Flash SD Card into a spreadsheet tapchanger's Tap Settings Menu to select whether
readable format. the control uses the current loop method or the Motor
• Remote Control. The Remote Control Direct Drive KeepTrack™ method for tap position
feature allows the user to remotely raise knowledge. The M‑2025B(D) Current Loop Interface
or lower one tap position as well as apply module is not used with the "KeepTrack™" method.
voltage reduction to the target control. The Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack method is used
with single-phase line regulators having a counter
contact and a neutral contact. The M‑2025B(D)
module easily connects to the tapchanger control
through a six-pin connector located on the bottom
of the control. For more information, refer to the Tap
Information section of Chapter 5, Configuration.
For parallel operation using the circulating current
method, the following accessories are needed: the
M-0115A Parallel Balancing Module, the M-0127A
AC Current Relay and the M-0169A Auxiliary
Current Transformer. For more information, refer
to the Parallel Operation section of Chapter 5,
Configuration.
1–3
Backup Relay M-2948 Tap Position Sensor

The M-0329B Backup Relay or the M‑5329 Multi The M-2948 tap position sensor is a rotary shaft
phase Backup Relay are available to provide encoder that includes a built-in microprocessor that
protection against failure of the primary control. provides stepped output signals in 9 or 10 degree
increments. The M-2948 is available with 0 to 297°,
M‑2026 AC-DC Control Power Backup Supply 306°, 315°, 330°, 340° and 350° rotation for ±16
taps and 1, 2 or 3 neutral positions. The electrical
The M‑2026 accepts either AC or DC input over output of the sensor is a 4-20 mA current loop
a range of 21 to 32, 42 to 60 and 105 to 145 V. that converts easily to a voltage signal at the input
The unit will supply a regulated +12 Vdc at up to a of the M-2025B(D) with the addition of a proper
1.5 A output. The unit includes a fused input, surge value shunt resistor. For a 4-20 mA Current Loop,
protection, and reverse polarity protection. 150 ohms is required on the input of the M-2025B(D).
The signal from the M-2025B(D) is then conditioned
M‑2027 Control Power Backup Supply - AC and sent to the M-2001D as an analog signal.
Only The M-2948 Tap Position Sensor is available with
The M‑2027 will accept an AC input over a range either a positive or negative slope. Negative slope
of 105 to 140 Vac at 50/60 Hz. The unit will supply (clockwise rotation) causes a decrease in Tap
a +12 Vdc at up to 1.0 A output. Position. Positive slope (clockwise rotation) causes
an increase in Tap Position. M-2948 Tap Position
Sensor directly mechanically replaces the Selsyn-
B-0920 Control Power Backup Harness
Type Tap Position Sensor.
The B-0920 Control Power Backup Harness
provides fused (3 A) power to the M-2001D when
a M‑2026 or M-2027 Control Power Backup Supply
is not used.
1–4
Introduction – 1
Backup Power Real-Time

Power Input Supply Clock
VT
EPROM
Load Voltage
Bus I/O RAM

Source Voltage
Line Current Display

A/D
CT
I
Circulating N Watchdog Timer
Current P
U
CT T
S
Motor RAISE & LOWER
Current Outputs
CT Status
LEDs
Outputs
Alarm Outputs
Digital 9 9
Opto- Aux Contact
Inputs
Isolator Output
(9)
Digital Ethernet
Inputs Port (Optional)
Pushbuttons UTP or Fiber Optic
RS-485 Port
(Note 1)
Power Supply
Monitoring COM 1 OR
Circuits/Reset Fiber Optic Port
(Note 1)
USB Port RS-232 Port
COM 2
SD Card Optional Bluetooth

(Note 2)
 NOTES:
1. The RS-485 and Fiber Optic ports are standard on COM 1. However, only one can be active at
a time.
2. COM 2 is limited to either the standard RS-232 Port or the optional Bluetooth® capability. Only
one option can be active on COM 2 at a time.
Figure 1‑1 Functional Diagram
1–5
M-2
001
D
Figure 1‑2 Typical Adapter Panel Mounting
1–6
Operation – 2
2 Operation
2.0 Overview and Quick Index....................................................... 2–2
2.1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators Overview......................... 2–5
2.2 Operation (HMI/TapTalk).......................................................... 2–9
2.0 Overview and Quick Index
The purpose of this chapter is to describe the steps If this is the first attempt to establish communications
that are necessary to interrogate the M-2001D with the unit, then see Chapter 7, Installation,
utilizing either the front panel HMI or a PC running Section 7.11, Activating Initial Local Communications.
TapTalk ® S-2001D Communications Software
through any of the available communications Message Screens and Access Codes
ports. These instructions assume that the following
conditions exist: See Chapter 6, Setpoints for Setpoint information.
M-2001D operation from either TapTalk or HMI is
• The unit is energized from an appropriate described herein.
power supply (Green OK status light is
illuminated).
See Chapter 7, Installation, Section 7.1,
External Connections, for power supply
connection details.
• For PC communications, TapTalk is
installed on the host PC.
See Chapter 7, Installation, Section
7.10, TapTalk S-2001D Communications
Software Installation, if TapTalk is not
installed.
• For PC communication, initial PC
communication has been established with
the unit.
2–1
2.1 Front Panel Controls and Data Logging.................................................2–17

Indicators Overview........................... 2–5
Retrieve Data Logging Data.......................2–17
Display and Pushbuttons..............................2–5 Clear Data Log Records From TapTalk.....2–19
Status Indicators............................................2–6 Clear Data Log Records From The HMI....2–19
Active Setpoint Profile.................................2–20

2.2 Operation (HMI/TapTalk®)............. 2–9
Set Active Setpoint Profile (TapTalk).........2–20
Message Screens...........................................2–9 Metering And Status.....................................2–21
Default Message Screen..............................2–9 Accessing Monitoring Screens (HMI).........2–24
Local Voltage Reduction Screen..................2–9 Monitor (From Control Front Panel)...........2–24
Op Count Signal Alarm Screen....................2–9 Accessing The Metering Screens (HMI)....2–25
Oscillograph Record Triggered Screen........2–9 Accessing The Status Screens (HMI)........2–25
Wakeup Message Screens........................2–10 Accessing The Tapchanger Status
Alarms........................................................2–10 Screens (HMI).............................................2–26
Accessing The Alarm Status Screens
Access Codes...............................................2–11
(HMI)..........................................................2–27
Access Levels...............................................2–11 Accessing The Input Status Screens
(HMI)..........................................................2–28
Oscillograph Recorder.................................2–11
Accessing The Output Status Screens
Trigger Oscillograph Recorder...................2–11 (HMI)..........................................................2–29
Retrieve Oscillograph Record (TapTalk)....2–12 Accessing the Metering & Status Screen
Clear Oscillograph Records (TapTalk).......2–13 (TapTalk)....................................................2–29
Clear Oscillograph Records (HMI).............2–13 Primary Metering (Single or Three Phase)...2–31

Remote Voltage Bias.................................2–31
Sequence of Events Recorder.....................2–14
Secondary Metering Status........................2–31
Trigger Sequence of Events Recorder
(TapTalk)....................................................2–14 Tap Information..........................................2–32
Retrieve Sequence of Events Record Tapchanger Status.....................................2–33

(TapTalk)....................................................2–15
Input Status................................................2–34
View Sequence of Events From TapTalk...2–16
Aux Input Status.........................................2–34
Clear Sequence of Events Records
Alarm Status...............................................2–34
(TapTalk)....................................................2–17
2–2
Operation – 2
CBEMA Events And Counter Status...........2–36 Harmonic Analysis.......................................2–49
Demand And Energy Metering....................2–37 Accessing The Harmonics Screens (HMI)....2–49
Accessing the Present Demand Accessing Voltage/Current Harmonics

Screens (HMI)............................................2–37 Screens (HMI)............................................2–50
Setting The Demand Interval (HMI)...........2–37 Accessing Harmonic Analysis Screen

From TapTalk.............................................2–50
Accessing The Demand History
Screens (HMI)............................................2–38 Tap Information............................................2–51
Resetting Individual Demand History Accessing The Tap Information
Values (HMI)..............................................2–38 Screens (HMI)............................................2–51
Resetting ALL Demand History Parameter Calibrating Tap Position (HMI)...................2–52
Values (HMI)..............................................2–39
Drag Hands................................................2–52
Performing a Master Reset of ALL Demand
Reset Drag Hands Values (HMI)................2–52
History and Energy Metering Parameter
Values (HMI)..............................................2–39 Reset Drag Hands Values (TapTalk).........2–52
Accessing The Energy Metering Screens
Resettable Operation Counter.....................2–53
(HMI)..........................................................2–40
Reset Operation Counter (HMI).................2–53
Resetting Individual Energy Metering
Values (HMI)..............................................2–41 Reset Operations Counter (TapTalk).........2–53
Resetting ALL Energy Metering Parameter Tap Statistics................................................2–53
Values (HMI)..............................................2–41
Viewing Specific Tap Statistics (HMI)........2–53
Performing a Master Reset of ALL Energy
Metering and Demand History Parameter Clearing Tap Statistics (HMI).....................2–53
Values (HMI)..............................................2–42
View Tap Statistics From TapTalk.............2–54
Accessing The Demand & Energy Metering
Screen (TapTalk).......................................2–42 Smart Flash Sd Card....................................2–55
Demand History/Energy Metering..............2–43 Accessing The Smart Flash SD Card

Screens (HMI)............................................2–55
Real Time Voltage Plot.................................2–45
SD Card Quick Capture.............................2–55
Real Time Voltage Plot (TapTalk)..............2–45
Quick Capture File Naming Convention.....2–55
Display All Metering.....................................2–46 Loading Setpoints from a Smart Flash
SD Card.....................................................2–57
Motor Current Profile...................................2–47
Saving Setpoints to a Smart Flash
Accessing The Motor Current SD Card.....................................................2–58
Screens (HMI)............................................2–47
Saving Data Log to a Smart Flash
Initializing Motor Current Values (HMI)......2–48 SD Card.....................................................2–58
Accessing Motor Current Profile Screen, Saving Sequence of Events to a
Resetting Training Mode and Peak Motor Smart Flash SD Card.................................2–59
Current From TapTalk................................2–48
Saving Oscillograph Record to a
Smart Flash SD Card.................................2–60
Clone Save and Load.................................2–61
2–3
Clone Save with "DNP Configuration" and Datalog Files.................................................2–71

"Multi-user Password" files.........................2–61
Converting Datalog Files to
Clone Load with "DNP Configuration" and "*.CSV" Format..........................................2–71
"Multi-user Password" files.........................2–61
About Screens..............................................2–71
Clone Save Without "DNP Configuration"
and "Multi-user Password" files..................2–61 Accessing The About Screens (HMI).........2–71
Clone Save to a Smart Flash SD Card......2–61 Remote Control (TapTalk)............................2–72

Clone Load from a Smart Flash SD Card....2–62 Remote Tap Control...................................2–72
Loading DNP Configuration from a Remote Voltage Reduction........................2–72
Smart Flash SD Card.................................2–63
Block Auto Control via Communication......2–72
Saving DNP Configuration to a
Smart Flash SD Card.................................2–64 SCAMP Control..........................................2–72
Saving Metering Data to a Smart Flash Remote Control/Miscellaneous..................2–72

SD Card......................................................2–64
Low Current Alarm/Block............................2–74
Firmware Update from Smart Flash
SD Card.....................................................2–65 Clearing Low Current Alarm/Block
From The HMI............................................2–74
Smart Flash SD Card User Access Code....2–66
Clearing Low Current Alarm/Block From
Load IEC 61850 Configuration from TapTalk......................................................2–75
a Smart Flash SD Card..............................2–67
Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block..............2–76
Save IEC 61850 Configuration to
a Smart Flash SD Card...............................2–67 Resetting Motor Seal-in Failure
Alarm/Block From The HMI........................2–76
Wakeup Screen Parameter Save to
a Smart Flash SD Card..............................2–68 Resetting Motor Seal-in Failure
Alarm/Block From TapTalk.........................2–77
Utility/Calibration..........................................2–68
Master/Follower Lockout Alarm..................2–78
Accessing Utility/Calibration Screens
(HMI)..........................................................2–68 Clearing Master/Follower Lockout
Alarm From The HMI..................................2–78
Source Voltage.............................................2–69
Clearing Master/Follower Lockout
Changing Source Voltage Input.................2–69 Alarm From TapTalk..................................2–79
Watchdog And Power Resets......................2–70 Send/Receive IEC 61850

Configuration File.........................................2–80
Watchdog Resets and Power Resets........2–70
Checksum Error.........................................2–70
2–4
Operation – 2
2.1 Front Panel Controls and

Indicators Overview
Display and Pushbuttons ENT Pushbutton

The front-panel user interface consists of a Liquid The ENT pushbutton is a hot button for the "Utility
Crystal Display (LCD) or Vacuum Fluorescent (VFD) Menu". It is also used to perform the following
Display, directional (Hot Buttons), EXIT, ENT, and functions:
VR pushbuttons, and the status indicators as shown • Enter the "edit" mode of a screen
in Figure 2-1, M-2001D Front Panel. • Store a setpoint or condition in memory
The display normally displays the user lines • Enter the sub-header or data level
and remains so until the , , ,  or ENT • Reset certain monitoring screens
pushbutton is depressed. Pressing any pushbutton
will display the heading corresponding to the "Hot EXIT Pushbutton
Button" label above the pushbutton (Figure 2-1). The
The EXIT pushbutton is a hot button for a unit
"Hot Buttons" directly access the menu headers and
"wakeup", which starts cycling through a series
can only be selected from either the user lines or
of user selectable metering and tap information
the cycling display.
screens. The user can move up and down the
automatic cycling using the UP and DOWN
, ,  and  Pushbuttons pushbuttons. Pressing EXIT will stop the cycling
The directional pushbuttons have three functions. on the displayed parameter. The screens for the
• They are used to change screens and wakeup sequence can be enabled or disabled
scroll through selections. from the TapTalk® Communications Software (See
Section 4.1, System Setup).
• They are used to enter new values
by incrementing or decrementing the The EXIT pushbutton is also used to perform the
displayed value. The new value is not following functions:
stored until the ENT pushbutton is
pressed a second time. • Exit a level to the next higher level
• Cancel data entry
• Activate the "Hot Button" feature for
the corresponding labels above each • Clear the screen when at the header level
pushbutton to jump to that screen.
Data Entry Screens
HMI Menu Structure Data entry screens are of three types:
The HMI menu structure (Appendix A) consists of • Alphanumeric
three levels: Header, Sub-Header and Data/Data
Entry. From the header level (Figure 2-2) the user • List
can navigate to the adjacent headers with the LEFT • Bit Mask
and RIGHT pushbuttons, go to the sub-header level
by pressing ENT or DOWN pushbutton, or clear the
For Alphanumeric Data, the LEFT and RIGHT
screen by pressing the EXIT pushbutton.
pushbuttons advance the cursor to the digit to
From the sub-header level, the user can navigate be edited and the UP and DOWN pushbuttons
to the adjacent sub-headers with the LEFT and change the value. For List Data, the UP and DOWN
RIGHT pushbuttons, return to the header level by pushbuttons change the data. For Bit Mask (i.e. Prog
pressing the EXIT or UP pushbuttons, or enter the Alarm Function) the LEFT and RIGHT pushbuttons
data/data entry level by pressing ENT or DOWN. move the cursor to the bit and the UP and DOWN
Once in the data/data entry screens, the user can pushbuttons change the value. For all screens
navigate through the list with the UP and DOWN the ENT pushbutton saves the value and EXIT
pushbuttons. In this level the list wraps around. To pushbutton cancels the operation. A "C" indicates
exit the level, the user can press EXIT to return to the user is in the edit mode.
the corresponding sub-header, or use the LEFT
and RIGHT pushbuttons to go to the adjacent
sub-header level. To enter data, reset parameters
or access data screens, press ENT.
2–5
Power Up Screens Volt Red Pushbutton (Voltage Reduction)

Each time the control is powered up, it will briefly The VR pushbutton acts as a "hot" key to allow the
display a series of screens that include: user to change the Voltage Reduction status from
the front panel. It can only be accessed when the
• User Lines
screen displays the user lines, or a cycling message
• Control Firmware Number is being displayed on the front panel. The Voltage
• Serial Number Reduction pushbutton allows the user to apply 3
Steps of Voltage Reduction.
• Date
• Time of Day
Status Indicators
RAISE LED
Screen Blanking
The Raise LED (yellow) illuminates when the
The display automatically displays the user lines voltage is below the lower band edge and the timer
after exiting from any menu, or from any screen has started timing for a tapchanger Raise operation.
after 15 minutes of unattended operation.
LOWER LED
LCD Screen Contrast
The Lower LED (yellow) illuminates that the voltage
The LCD screen contrast can be set/reset from is above the upper band edge and the timer has
the control front panel through the HMI menu item started timing for a tapchanger Lower operation.
or at any time. Pressing the Right and Left arrow
pushbuttons at the same time displays the LCD
Contrast screen which cycles from dim to bright. REV PWR LED
Selecting ENT during the cycle sets the displayed The Reverse Power LED (red) will illuminate to
contrast to the value at the time ENT was pressed. indicate when the unit detects reverse power flow.
The LCD Screen Contrast adjustment menu item is
located in the Communication/HMI menu. OK LED
The OK LED (green) will remain illuminated
"C" CHANGE Prompt whenever power is applied to the unit and the
This prompt, in the bottom right corner of a screen, control is functioning properly. The OK LED will
is enabled by initially pressing Utility/ENT. This also extinguish when a Motor Seal-in Failure Block
prompt indicates that the user can change a setting is in effect.
using the  or  pushbuttons to increment or
decrement the settings. Values have factory preset ALARM LED
increments, such as 0.1 volt or 1 second. Press
The Alarm LED (red) will illuminate when any of
ENT the second time to execute the setting change.
the Programmable Alarm Functions set the output
relay to true.
"ENT" Prompt
When the "E" prompt appears in the top right V/RED LED
corner of the display window it indicates that the
The Voltage Reduction LED (yellow) will flash
value of the display will reset if the ENT pushbutton
corresponding to the level of Voltage Reduction
is pressed.
that has been invoked. This is true for any Voltage
Reduction process whether it came from an external
 and  Prompt contact, any Comm input or HMI.
Some setpoints screens include the Left and Right
Arrows but do not move to the adjacent sub-header, • 1 Flash for Level 1 Voltage Reduction
but instead go to a configuration screen. • 2 Flashes for Level 2
• 3 Flashes for Level 3
2–6
Operation – 2
Smart Flash
Card
Figure 2-1 M-2001D Front Panel
2–7
COMMUNICATION UTILITIES MONITOR SETPOINTS CONFIGURATION

CNFG UTIL COMM MNTR UTIL SETP MNTR CNFG SETP COMM
Status Motor Current Harmonics Tap Information Metering Present Demand Demand History Energy Metering
Press ENT to view Peak RMS Curr Voltage % THD Tap Position/Cal Load Voltage Demand Interval Demand Interval Watt Hours Fwd E
Tapchanger Status x.x mA (x.x) T x.x % 0 xxx.x Volts xx Min xx Min x kWh
Press ENT to view Avg RMS Curr Current % THD Drag Hands E Meter Out Voltage Demand Load Voltage Min Load Voltage E Lagging VAr Hours E
Alarm Status x.x mA (xx.x) T xx.x % L= 0 N R= 0 N xxx.x Volts xxx.x Volts x.x Volts x kVArh
Press ENT to view Profile Duration Press ENT to view Definite Timer Source Voltage Demand Pri. Current Max Load Voltage E Watt Hours Rev E
Input Status xxx.x ms(xxx.x) T Voltage Harmonics Raise xxs Lower xxs xxx.x V(Calculated) xxx.x Amps xxx.x Volts xx kWh
Press ENT to view Peak Motor Current E Press ENT to view Intertap Timer Load Current Demand Pri. Watts Max Pri.Current E Leading VAr Hours E
Output Status x.x mA Current Harmonic x % x.x mA LEAD/LAG x.xx MW xxx.x Amps xx kVArh
Operation Counter Circulating Current Demand Pri. VArs Max Primary Watts E Press ENT to reset
0 x.x mA LEAD/LAG x.xx MVArs x.xx MW Energy Metering
If DVAr enabled
Resettable Counter E DVar Current Demand Pri. VA Max Primary VArs E Press ENT to perform
0 x.x mA LEAD/LAG x.xx MVA x.xx MVAr Master Reset
Neutral Sw Counter Compensated Voltage Max Primary VA E

x xxx.x Volts x.xx MVA
Lower Counter Primary Voltage PF @ Max VA E

x x.xx kV x.xxx PF
Raise Counter Primary Src Voltage Press ENT to reset

x x.xx kV Demand History
Press ENT to view Primary Current Press ENT to perform

specific Tap Stats xxx.x Amps Master Reset
Press ENT to clear Primary Watts

Tap Statistics x.xx MW
RTN Success Counter Primary VArs

00000 x.xx MVArs
RTN Status Primary VA

DISABLED x.xx MVA
Count to RTN Active Power Factor

00000 x.xxx LEAD/LAG
Frequency
xx.x Hz
Figure 2-2 Example of HMI Menu Structure, Header, Sub-Header and Data/Data Entry Menus
2–8
Operation – 2
MANUAL LED
2.2 Operation (HMI/TapTalk®)
The Manual LED (red) will illuminate when Auto
operation of the control has been blocked from any
Com port. It will also illuminate when Manual Mode MESSAGE SCREENS
has been selected using the Adapter Panel Auto/ Default Message Screen
Manual Pushbutton or Toggle switch. When the M-2001D is energized and unattended,
the User Logo lines are displayed.
LOCAL LED
The Local LED (yellow) will illuminate when all Local Voltage Reduction Screen
SCADA write capability to the control is blocked. If Local Voltage Reduction is active, the display will
cycle the appropriate Voltage Reduction Screen.
COM1 TX/RX LEDS When Local Voltage Reduction is terminated, then
The Transmit TX (red) and Receive RX LEDs the display will return to the User Lines.
(green) indicate that the control is transmitting and/
or receiving through COM1. Also, during the boot-up Op Count Signal Alarm Screen
sequence the TX and RX LEDs will cycle indicating The Op Count Signal Alarm will initiate a cycling
that the memory test is in progress. If the memory display as long as the alarm is active.
test is successful, then the TX and RX LEDs will be
extinguished. If the memory test fails then both TX
and RX LEDs will illuminate. Oscillograph Record Triggered Screen
If the "ENABLE OSC Message" feature is enabled
(default setting is Enabled) and the Oscillograph
Smart Flash SD Card Slot
has been triggered, a cycling display indicating
The Smart Flash SD Card Slot allows the user to: that there is an oscillograph record available for
• Quick Capture download will be displayed. The screen will be
displayed until the oscillograph record is cleared or
• Load and Save Setpoints the "ENABLE OSC Message" is disabled. However,
• Save Datalog files (in COMTRADE format) if the Oscillograph file is not cleared, re-enabling
this feature will restart the cycling.
• Save Sequence of Events files
• Save Oscillograph records (in COMTRADE The "Oscillograph Record Triggered" cycling display
format) can be enabled from the TapTalk Communications
Software by navigating to the "ENABLE Oscillograph
• Clone Save and Load
Message" (Setup/Oscillograph/ENABLE Message)
• Load and Save DNP files dialog screen (Figure 2-3) and selecting "Enable".
• Update Firmware It can also be enabled from the HMI by navigating
to the "Communication HMI" menu.
• Save Wakeup Screen parameters
• Save All Metering parameters
• Utilize the SD Card as an Access Code Key
• Save/Load IEC 61850 CID Files (when
IEC 61850 is purchased)
The steps necessary to perform these actions are

described later in this chapter.
Figure 2-3 Oscillograph Message
Dialog Screen
2–9
Wakeup Message Screens 3. When the "Save Wake Data to SD Press

If the "Wake/EXIT" pushbutton is selected, then ENT to begin" screen is displayed, press
control will respond as follows: the ENT pushbutton. The control will
display the following:
• Pressing "WAKE/EXIT" when User
Lines are being displayed will initiate a Enter file name
stepped display of the selected Wakeup M2001DMT
parameters for a period of 15 minutes and
then return to the User Lines display. 4. Utilizing the Up/Down and Left/Right
• If no Wakeup screens are selected, then arrow pushbuttons enter the desired
no parameters will be displayed and the "File Name".
User Lines will blink for a moment. 5. Press the ENT pushbutton, the control
■ NOTE: The Adapter Panel Drag Hand Reset will display the following sequence of
only resets the Tap position Drag Hands. screens.
• While the stepped parameter display is Saving CSV...

in effect, when ENT is pressed on any "File Name"
demand metering value, all demand
metering Drag Hand parameters will be
reset. This is also true for all metering Drag Save Wake Data to SD
Hand values when ENT is pressed on an Press ENT to begin
energy metering menu.
• The Wakeup stepped display can be
stopped on the displayed parameter by Alarms
selecting EXIT. Select EXIT again to If enabled the following alarms will be displayed on
terminate the stepped parameter display the HMI when the alarm condition is active and set
and return to the User Lines. in the Programmable Alarm Relay:
The Wakeup screen values can be
browsed by utilizing the Up and Down • Communication Block
arrow pushbuttons. In this mode, if the • Block Raise (Tap)
ENT pushbutton is pressed while on a • Block Lower (Tap)
demand or energy metering value, it will
only reset that individual Drag Hand value. • Block Raise (Voltage)
• When a Smart Flash SD Card present in • Block Lower (Voltage)
the control while in the Wakeup screen • Voltage Reduction
menu, an additional Smart Flash SD Card • Max VAr Bias Duration–Lag
menu item will be present. All Wakeup
screen parameters can be saved to the • Max VAr Bias Duration–Lead
Smart Flash SD Card in *.csv format by • Individual Tap Wear
pressing ENT which initiates the following
• LDC/LDZ
sequence of screens.
• Line Current Limit
To save Wakeup screen parameters to a Smart • Reverse Power Flow
Flash SD Card proceed as follows:
• Abnormal Tap Position
1. Verify that a (FAT) formatted Smart Flash • Backup Fail (If Backup Power purchased)
SD Card is inserted into the Smart Flash
SD Card slot. • Op Count Signal
2. Press "WAKE/EXIT" to initiate the
Wakeup screen cycling display.
2–10
Operation – 2
The Alarm Activity feature can be accessed from OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER

the Utility/Calibration/Test HMI menu to display all Trigger Oscillograph Recorder
currently active alarms.
The Oscillograph Recorder can be manually
The following alarms will also be displayed on the triggered by the user from TapTalk.
HMI when their features are enabled:
To manually trigger the Oscillograph recorder,
• Motor Seal-in Failure perform the following:
• ∆VAR®2 Over Current Limit 1. S t a r t Ta p Ta l k , t h e n e s t a bl i s h
• Low Current Block communications with the target control.
• Master/Follower Lockout 2. Select Setup/Oscillograph/Trigger
from the TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk
will display an Oscillograph Trigger
Access Codes confirmation dialog screen (Figure 2-4).
To prevent unauthorized access to the control
functions, there are provisions in the software for
assigning a Level 1 and/or Level 2 Access Code (up
to six characters). A fixed factory assigned Level 3
Access Code is required for changing calibration
factors. When Level 1 or Level 2 Access Codes are
active, then an additional 30 Level Access Codes
(up to 15 characters) can be enabled as either Level
1 or Level 2. The Access Codes can be set in the
Communication/HMI Menu or from TapTalk®.
Figure 2-4 Manual Oscillograph Trigger
Level Access protection will be automatically Confirmation Dialog Screen
reinstated when either of the following conditions
are met: 3. Select Yes. TapTalk will display an
"Oscillograph was triggered successfully"
• No HMI menu activity for a period of confirmation screen (Figure 2-5).
15 minutes
• The user exits to the top of the HMI menu
for a period of greater than 10 seconds
Access Levels
General access to read setpoints, to monitor status,
to reset draghand parameters and the resettable
operations counter do not require an Access Code.
The Level 1 Access Code, if set, is required to
make setpoint changes. If the Level 1 Access Code Figure 2-5 Oscillograph Recorder Successfully
is set to all zeros, this request for an Access Code Triggered Confirmation Dialog Screen
will not be seen and changes can be made without
an Access Code. The default Level 1 Access Code The control will display an "Oscillograph
is 000000. Record Triggered" cycling message
indicating that an oscillograph record
The Level 2 Access Code, if set, is required to is available for download. This screen
make changes to the configuration, communication, message will continue until the
and utilities. If the Level 2 Access Code is set to all oscillograph record is cleared.
zeros, this request for an Access Code will not be 4. Select OK. TapTalk will return to the Main
seen and changes can be made without an Access screen.
Code. The default Level 2 Access Code is 222222.
The Level 3 Access Code is required to make
changes to calibration settings on the control.
Contact Beckwith Electric Customer Service for
M-2001D Level 3 Access Codes.
2–11
Retrieve Oscillograph Record (TapTalk) 4. Select a folder to save the file to and
Oscillograph data must be retrieved from the control the desired file name, then select Save,
in a Comtrade file (*.cfg) in order to be viewed. TapTalk will momentarily display an
S-2001D TapPlot® can be utilized to view the file Initialization status screen (Figure 2-8),
contents. then a Retrieving Oscillograph Record
status screen (Figure 2-9).
To retrieve Oscillograph data, perform the following:
1. S t a r t Ta p Ta l k ® , t h e n e s t a bl i s h
communications with the target control.
2. Select Setup/Oscillograph/Retrieve
from the TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will
display a "Retrieve Oscillograph Record"
dialog screen (Figure 2-6).
Figure 2-8 Initialize Oscillograph Record

Download Screen
Figure 2-9 Retrieving Oscillograph Record

Status Screen
Figure 2-6 Retrieve Oscillograph Record
When the oscillograph record has been
Dialog Screen downloaded, TapTalk will display the
following confirmation screen. Also, the
3. Select the desire oscillograph record, cycling display on the control will not
then select Retrieve. TapTalk will display stop until the oscillograph records are
a Retrieve Oscillograph Record "Save cleared.
As" dialog screen (Figure 2-7).
Figure 2-10 Oscillograph Data Records Were

Retrieved Confirmation Screen
5. Select OK. TapTalk will return to the Main

screen.

(Save As) Dialog Screen
2–12
Operation – 2
Clear Oscillograph Records (TapTalk) Clear Oscillograph Records From The HMI
To Clear all Oscillograph records in the control, To clear Oscillograph Records from the HMI perform
perform the following: the following:
1. S t a r t Ta p Ta l k ® , t h e n e s t a bl i s h 1. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot
communications with the target control. Button) pushbutton to awaken the
unit. The menu will advance to either
2. Select Setup/Oscillograph/Clear from "COMMUNICATION" or if a Memory
the TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display a Card is present in the Smart Flash SD
Clear Oscillograph Record confirmation CARD slot "Memory Card".
screen (Figure 2-11).
COMMUNICATION
CNFG
UTIL
OR
Memory Card
 
Figure 2-11 Clear Oscillograph Record 2. If the "Communication" menu is

Confirmation Screen displayed, then press the Down Arrow
pushbutton once. The unit will display
3. Select Yes. TapTalk will display a the following:
confirmation dialog screen (Figure 2-12).
Comm Settings


3. From either the "Comm Settings" or

"Memory Card" menu, press the Right
or Left Arrow pushbutton as necessary
until "HMI" is displayed.
HMI
Figure 2-12 Clear Oscillograph Record  
Confirmation Screen
4. Press the Down Arrow as necessary until
4. Select OK. TapTalk will return to the the following is displayed.
Main screen. The cycling display will be
stopped. Clear OSC Records
Ready Press ENTER
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level

2 Access is not active or has been
previously input, then the following will
be displayed. Go to Step 8.
Confirm press ENTER

Cancel press EXIT.
2–13
6. If Level 2 Access is active, then the SEQUENCE OF EVENTS RECORDER

Level 2 Access prompt will be displayed. Trigger Sequence of Events Recorder
(TapTalk)
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS The Sequence of Events Recorder can be manually
_ triggered by the user from TapTalk®.
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code To manually trigger the Sequence of Events
the display will automatically advance recorder, perform the following:
the cursor to the next digit when input 1. S t a r t Ta p Ta l k , t h e n e s t a bl i s h
is momentarily paused. communications with the target control.
7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then 2. Select Setup/Sequence of Events/
press the ENT pushbutton. Trigger from the TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk
If a valid Level 2 Access Code was will display a Sequence of Events Trigger
entered, then the display will briefly flash confirmation dialog screen (Figure 2-13).
a confirmation screen and then display
the following:
Confirm press ENTER

Cancel press EXIT
If not, re-enter a valid code.
8. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following Figure 2-13 Sequence of Events Trigger
will be displayed: Confirmation Dialog Screen
Records Cleared! 3. Select Yes. TapTalk will display a

"Sequence of Events was triggered
Any key to continue
successfully" confirmation screen
(Figure 2-14).
Figure 2-14 Sequence of Events Recorder

Successfully Triggered Confirmation
Dialog Screen

screen.
2–14
Operation – 2
Retrieve Sequence of Events Record (TapTalk)

S-2001D TapPlot can be utilized to view the file
contents.
To retrieve Sequence of Events data, perform the
following:
2. Select Setup/Sequence of Events/
Retrieve from the TapTalk toolbar. Figure 2-16 Initialize Sequence of Events
TapTalk will display a Retrieve Sequence Record Download Screen
of Events Record "Save As" dialog
Figure 2-17 Retrieving Sequence of Events

Record Status Screen
When the Sequence of Events record

has been downloaded TapTalk will
Figure 2-15 Retrieve Sequence of Events display the following confirmation
Record (Save As) Dialog Screen screen.
3. Select a folder to save the file to and

the desired file name, then select Save.
TapTalk will momentarily display an
Initialization status screen (Figure 2-16),
then a "Retrieving Sequence of Events
Record" status screen (Figure 2-17).
Figure 2-18 Sequence of Events Records

Retrieved Successfully Confirmation Screen
4. S e l e c t OK. TapTalk will display

Figure 2-19, "View Sequence of Events
Record" dialog screen.
2–15
View Sequence of Events From TapTalk Trigger Status – The "Trigger Status" section
To view Sequence of Events records, perform the of the View Sequence of Events Dialog Screen
following: displays the current trigger status at the instant
the Sequence of Events Recorder was triggered.
1. S t a r t Ta p Ta l k ® , t h e n e s t a bl i s h Sequence of Events is monitored at a fixed period
communications with the target control. of 1 cycle.
2. Select Setup/Sequence of Events/ Pickup/Dropout – The "Pickup and Dropout"
View from the TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk sections of the View Sequence of Events Dialog
will display a "View Sequence of Events
Screen indicate which signal caused the Sequence
Record" dialog screen (Figure 2-19).
of Events recorder to trigger. These sections also
3. Select the desired Sequence of include all the signals that changed at the instant
Events record to display the captured that the Sequence of Events Recorder triggered.
parameters.
Figure 2-19 View Sequence of Events Dialog Screen
2–16
Operation – 2
Clear Sequence of Events Records (TapTalk) DATA LOGGING

To Clear Sequence of Events records from the Retrieve Data Logging Data
control perform the following: ■ NOTE: When Load Voltage, Compensated
Voltage, Source Voltage and Load
1. S t a r t Ta p Ta l k ® , t h e n e s t a bl i s h Current are selected, the data to be
communications with the target control. retrieved will consist of the average,
2. Select Setup/Sequence of Events/ minimum and maximum values over the
Clear from the TapTalk toolbar. sampling period.
TapTalk will display a Clear Sequence
of Events Record confirmation screen
(Figure 2-20). To retrieve Data Logging data perform the following:
1. S t a r t Ta p Ta l k , t h e n e s t a bl i s h
2. Select Setup/Data Logging/Retrieve
from the TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will
display a Data Log Download dialog
Figure 2-20 Clear Sequence of Events Record

Confirmation Screen
3. Select Yes. TapTalk will display a

"Clear" status screen (Figure 2-21),
then a Sequence of Events records
cleared successfully confirmation
Figure 2-23 Data Log Download Dialog Screen
 NOTE: Load Voltage, Compensated Voltage,

Figure 2-21 Clear Status Screen Load Current and Source Voltage are the
average value during the data logging
interval.
3. From the "Data to be retrieved" section

of the Data Log Download screen select
the desired parameters to be retrieved.
4. From the "Data Log Download Range"
section of the Data Log Download
Figure 2-22 Sequence of Events Records screen select the "Start Date", "Start
Cleared Successfully Confirmation Screen Time", "End Date" and "End Time" or
select "Set 'Download Range' to start
4. Select OK. TapTalk will return to the Main from last retrieval".
screen.
2–17
5. Select "Download". TapTalk® will display 6. Select a folder to save the file to and
a "Setpoints Successfully written to the the desired file name, then select Save.
control" confirmation screen (Figure TapTalk will display a Transferring Data
2-24) and then display a "Save As" Log status screen (Figure 2-26).
dialog screen (Figure 2-25).
Figure 2-26 Transferring Data Log Status Screen

Figure 2-24 Setpoints Successfully Written To
Control Confirmation Screen When the Data Log download is
complete TapTalk will display the
following confirmation screen.
Figure 2-27 Data Log Records Retrieved

Successfully Confirmation Screen

Figure 2-25 Data Log Download (Save As) screen.
Dialog Screen
2–18
Operation – 2
Clear Data Log Records From TapTalk Clear Data Log Records From The HMI
To Clear all Data Log records in the control perform To clear Data Log Records from the HMI, proceed
the following: as follows:
1. S t a r t Ta p Ta l k ® , t h e n e s t a bl i s h 1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button)
communications with the target control. pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
will advance to "CONFIGURATION".
2. Select Setup/Data Log/Clear from the
TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display a
Clear Data Log Record confirmation CONFIGURATION
screen (Figure 2-28). SETP COMM
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.

The unit will display the following:
Tapchanger Type
 
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton,

Figure 2-28 Clear Data Log Record as necessary, to navigate to the "Data
Confirmation Screen Logging" menu.
3. Select OK. TapTalk will display a Data Logging

"Clear" status screen (Figure 2-29) and  
then a "All of the data logging records
were cleared" confirmation screen 4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as
(Figure 2-30). necessary, until the "Press ENT to clear
Data Log Records" screen is displayed.
Press ENT to clear

Data Log Records

previously input, the following will be
displayed. Go to Step 8.
Figure 2-29 Clear Data Log Record
Status Screen Press ENT to confirm
clearing Data Log
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2

Access prompt will be displayed.
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS

_
Figure 2-30 Data Log Records Cleared


screen.
2–19
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code ACTIVE SETPOINT PROFILE
the display will automatically advance Set Active Setpoint Profile (TapTalk)
the cursor to the next digit when input
is momentarily paused.
7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
press the ENT pushbutton.
If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
entered, the display will briefly flash a
confirmation screen and display the
following:
Press ENT to confirm

clearing Data Log
To set the Active Setpoint Profile perform the

8. Press the ENT pushbutton, the following following:
sequence of screens will be displayed.
Erasing Data Log communications with the target control.
records... 2. Select Setup/Profile/Set Active Profile
from the TapTalk toolbar.
Data Log records ▲ CAUTION: The control will immediately respond
to the new Active Setpoint Profile settings.
have been cleared.
3. Select the desired profile to activate.
The Active Profile will be indicated in the
menu dropdown and the TapTalk Lower
Information Bar (Figure 2-31).
The Active Profile can also be selected from the

Lower Information Bar as well. See Chapter 6,
Setpoints for instructions for selecting the Active
Profile and selecting a "Profile for editing".
Figure 2-31 Set Active Profile from TapTalk

Information Bar
2–20
Operation – 2
METERING AND STATUS Present Demand

Metering The Present Demand metering capability provided
The control has the capability of displaying in the control follows the concept of a lagged
measured and calculated secondary quantities demand meter. The demand time interval is selected
and calculated primary quantities. Refer to Figures by the user as 15, 30 or 60 minutes. This is the time
2-33 and 2-34. it takes for a thermal meter to indicate 90% of a
change in load.
Secondary
Energy Metering
The display will show local voltage, source voltage,
compensated voltage, line frequency, and load The Energy Metering function of the control displays
current in secondary quantities along with load the following measured values:
power factor. The voltage is displayed on a 120 V • Total Lagging VAr Hours (KVArh, MVArh
base and the current is displayed on a 200 mA base. or GVArh)
 NOTE: The local voltage displayed will not • Total Leading VAr Hours (KVArh, MVArh
match the voltage measured at the or GVArh)
test terminals on the adapter panel if a • Total Reverse Watt Hours (KWh, MWh or
sensing VT ratio correction other than GWh)
0.0 V has been entered.
• Total Forward Watt Hours (KWh, MWh or
Primary GWh)
In order to use the calculated primary quantities
feature, the user must enter the following data in The measured values are retained in non-volatile
the Configuration Menu: memory. A real time clock is utilized to record a date/
time stamp for each quantity to indicate when the
• Select line-to-line or line-to-ground VT period of measurement was initiated.
configuration.
When a Energy Metering screen is selected, the
• Select single-phase quantities based screen cycles continuously to indicate the total
on measured inputs, or three-phase value, date and time the measurement was initiated.
quantities based on measured inputs The E indicates that the measured value can be
and assume a balanced system.
reset by pushing ENT.
• Select primary voltage and current
multipliers needed to calculate primary
quantities.
2–21
Demand History Frequency

Demand History quantities are the maximum The control provides for real-time metering of the
and minimum values for the period since the last line frequency. If the control is a 60 Hz model, the
reset command. These are retained in non-volatile operating frequency is 55 to 65 Hz; if the control
memory. A real-time clock allows the recording of a is a 50 Hz model, the operating frequency is 45
date/time stamp with each Demand History quantity. to 55 Hz.
The following are available for drag-hand use:
• Min/Max tap position (when Tap Position
is enabled)
• Min Load voltage (120 V base)
• Max Load voltage (120 V base)
• Max Primary current
• Max Primary watts, kW or MW
• Max Primary VAr, kVAr or MVAr
• Max Primary VA, kVA or MVA
• Power Factor at max VA
Where primary quantities are used, values displayed

are single-phase or three-phase as defined in the
Pri Pwr Display Screen of the Configuration Menu.
▲ CAUTION: When the M‑2001D Tapchanger
Control is used with a Beckwith Electric adapter
panel, the panel’s drag hands reset button only
resets the mechanical drag hands of the regulator
or LTC transformer. The button does not reset the
tap draghands information stored in the control. The
maximum and minimum tap position of the control
should always be reset when the mechanical drag
hands are reset.
The values retained in memory are time-tagged
quantities that are calculated using the demand
period selected (5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 minutes). For
voltage, values are the average of samples taken
over a period of 32 seconds which avoids undue
retention of momentary voltage transients. The
load power factor retained is the value at the time
of max VA.
When selected, three screens for each parameter
cycle continuously and indicate the value, date and
time of each parameter. The E indicates that the
drag-hand can be reset by pushing ENT.
The control is equipped with a real-time, 24‑hour
clock which is used with the drag-hand feature to
record date/time stamp information on quantities
saved in memory. The power source for the clock
is maintained for at least 24 hours during a system
power outage by a charged capacitor (no battery). If
the power outage lasts longer than 24 hours, check
the clock and reset if necessary.
2–22
Operation – 2
Primary
Current Main CT Transmission/ Theoretical
Distribution Line Load Center
IPRI
Bypass
Arrestor IL VT
0.2 A
VS Nominal VLOC VCOMP
Load Current
VPRI
Primary
Source Voltage 120 V Compensated
Voltage Nominal Voltage
NOTE: The VT and CT are usually integral to the regulator.

S L SL
Indicates calculated quantities
Regulator
Figure 2-32 Secondary Quantity Metering and Primary Quantity Calculations

for Regulator Applications
Primary
Current Main CT Transmission/ Theoretical
Distribution Line Load Center
IPRI
Auxiliary VT
CT
Primary
IL VLOC
Voltage VCOMP
0.2 A VPRI
Nominal
High Low Load Current 120 V Compensated
Voltage Voltage
Nominal Voltage
NOTE: The figure shows a Line-to-Ground VT and a

single-phase CT. The system can also accommodate a
Line-to-Line VT and a Phase-to-Phase connected CT.
Transformer
Indicates calculated quantities
Figure 2-33 Secondary Quantity Metering and Primary Quantity Calculations

for Transformer Applications
2–23
Accessing Monitoring Screens (HMI) • Present Demand

The Monitor menu provides the user with the capability Demand Interval
to view the Metering, Status, Tap Information, Demand Load Voltage
Present Demand, Demand History, Energy Demand Primary Current
Metering, Harmonics and Motor Current elements
Demand Primary Watts
of the monitoring screens (Single or Three Phase).
The steps necessary to access, view, and where Demand Primary VArs
applicable, perform parameter specific operations Demand Primary VA
for each monitoring category are described herein. • Demand History
(E) Indicates Demand History parameters
Monitor (From Control Front Panel) that can be reset to zero.
The HMI categories/parameters for Monitoring are: Demand Interval
Min Load Voltage (E)
• Metering
Max Load Voltage (E)
Load Voltage
Max Primary Current (E)
Meter Out Voltage
Max Primary Watts (E)
Source Voltage
Max Primary VArs (E)
Load Current
Max Primary VA (E)
Circulating/DVAr Current
PF @ Max VA (E)
Compensated Voltage
Primary Voltage • Energy Metering
Primary Src Voltage (E) Indicates Energy Metering parameters
Primary Current that can be reset to zero.
Primary Watts Forward Watt Hours (E)
Primary VArs Lagging VAr Hours (E)
Primary VA Reverse Watt Hours (E)
Power Factor Leading VAr Hours (E)
Frequency • Harmonics
• Status Voltage % THD
Tapchanger Status Current % THD
Alarm Status View Voltage Harmonics
Input Status View Current Harmonics
Output Status • Motor Current
• Tap Information (E) Indicates Motor Current parameters
that can be reset to zero.
(E) Indicates Tap Information parameters
that can be reset to zero or set to a value. Peak RMS Curr
Tap Position/Cal Avg RMS Curr
Drag Hands (E) Profile Duration
Definite Timer Peak Motor Current (E)
Intertap Timer
Operation Counter
Resettable Counter (E)
Neutral Sw Counter
Lower Counter
Raise Counter
Specific Tap Statistics
Clear Tap Statistics
RTN Counter
RTN Status
Count to RTN Active
2–24
Operation – 2
Accessing The Metering Screens (HMI) Accessing The Status Screens (HMI)
To access the Metering screens from the control To access the Status screens from the control front
front panel proceed as follows: panel proceed as follows:
1. Press the Left Arrow (MNTR Hot Button) 1. Press the Left Arrow (MNTR Hot Button)
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The pushbutton to awaken the unit. The
menu will advance to "MONITOR". menu will advance to "MONITOR".
MONITOR MONITOR
SETP
UTIL SETP
UTIL
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
The unit will display the following: The unit will display the following:
Metering Metering
   
Pressing the Down arrow pushbutton 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton
will display the first metering parameter as necessary to navigate to the "Status"
(Load Voltage). Pressing the Down screen.
arrow pushbutton will advance to the
following Metering parameters: Status
Load Voltage  
Meter Out Voltage
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once.
Source Voltage The menu will advance to the first status
element (Tapchanger Status) of the
Load Current
Status groups.
Circulating Current or DVAr Current
Compensated Voltage The status groups can be accessed by continuing to
Primary Voltage press the Down pushbutton within the Status menu
and then pressing ENT to view.
Primary Source Voltage
The Status screens consist of four individual status
Primary Current groups that include:
Primary Watts
Tapchanger Status
Primary VArs
Alarm Status
Primary VA
Input Status
Power Factor
Frequency Output Status
Details regarding each individual group follow in

this chapter.
2–25
Accessing The Tapchanger Status Screens

(HMI)
To access the Tapchanger Status screens from the
Blocks in Effect
control front panel proceed as follows:
-- -- -- -- -- -- --
1. Navigate to the "Tapchanger Status"
screen. The range of displayed values for Blocks
in Effect (BLK) from left to right are:
Press ENT to view

Position 1
T
apchanger Status LL – Block Line Limit
2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The DL – Delta VAr Overcurrent Limit Block
control will display a summary of the
Tapchanger Status parameters, similar Position 2
to the following.
FL – Force Lower Block
TAP BDS PWR BLK VRD BR – Volt Block Raise
BL – Volt Block Lower
0 lo fwd --- off
TAP = Tap Position Position 3

BDS = Band Status TR – Tap Raise Block
TL – Tap Lower Block
PWR = Power Direction
BLK = Blocks In Effect
Position 4
VRD = Voltage Reduction NS – Non Sequential Block
SR – Seal-in Failure Raise Block
To cycle through each element of the SL – Seal-in Failure Lower Block
"Tapchanger Status" display press the IB – Low Current Block
Down arrow pushbutton.
Tap Position Position 5

0 CB – Comm Block
The range of displayed values for Tap Position 6

Position (TAP) are 16L–0–16R.
RP – Reverse Power Block
Band Status
Position 7
Low
SC – SCADA Cutout Local
The range of displayed values for Band
Status (BDS) are HIGH, LOW and In
Band. Voltage Reduction
off
Power Direction
Forward The range of displayed values for Voltage
reduction (VRD) are on and off. Press
The range of displayed values for Power the Exit pushbutton to return to the
Direction (PWR) are Forward and "Tapchanger Status" screen.
Reverse.
2–26
Operation – 2
Accessing The Alarm Status Screens (HMI)

H: Comm Block
To access the Alarm Status screens from the control disabled/not met
front panel proceed as follows:
1. Navigate to the "Alarm Status" screen. I: LDC/LDZ
disabled/not met
Press ENT to view
Alarm Status J: Abnormal Tap
disabled/not met
2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control
will display a summary of the Alarm
Status parameters, similar to the K: VAr Bias Lag
following. disabled/not met
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
L: VAr Bias Lead
--00---------------- disabled/not met
Alarm Status Display Key
M: Backup Fail
– = Disabled/Condition Not Met
disabled/not met
1 = ALARM, ENABLED/Condition Met
0 = ENABLED/Condition Not Met *N: DVar2 Over Curr
X = Disabled/Condition Met disabled/not met
To cycle through each element of the
Alarm Status display, press the Down *O: Seal-in Failure
arrow pushbutton. The control will disabled/not met
display a detailed status screen similar to
the example below for each parameter.
*P: Low Current Blk
A: Block Raise Tap disabled/not met
disabled/not met
*Q: RTN Fail
B: Block Lower Tap disabled/not met
disabled/not met
*R: Ind Tap Wear
C: Block Raise Volt disabled/not met
ENABLED/not met
*S: Op Count Signal
D: Block Lower Volt disabled/not met
ENABLED/not met
*T: Tap Changer Fail
E: Voltage Reduction disabled/not met
disabled/not met
*These parameters will decrement
by 1 letter if Backup Power (M) is not
F: Power Direction purchased.
disabled/not met The range of displayed values for
each Alarm element are, disabled/not
G: Current Limit met, ENABLED/not met, COND MET/
disabled/not met disabled and ALARM (Enabled/condition
exists).
Press the Exit pushbutton to return to
the "Alarm Status" screen.
2–27
Accessing The Input Status Screens (HMI) Input Status Display Key
To access the Input Status screens from the control 1 = On
0 = Off
1. Navigate to the "Input Status" screen.
Press ENT to view For VR

Input Status - - = No Voltage Reduction Steps in effect
1 - = Voltage Reduction Step 1 in effect
will display a summary of the Input - 2 = Voltage ReductionStep 2 in effect
Status parameters, similar to the
1 2 = Voltage Reduction Step 3 in effect
following.
C NS VR TC KT N MS For KT
0 0 -- 0 RL 0 0 - - = No Raise or Lower inputs active
Input Status Parameter Key R - = Raise Input detected

- L = Lower Input detected
C = Counter Contact
RL = Motor power is not connected or
NS = Non-Sequential Input
circuit failure
VR = Voltage Reduction 1
Voltage Reduction 2 To cycle through each element of the "Input Status"
TC = Tap Connection display press the Down arrow pushbutton. The
control will display a detailed status screen similar
KT = Keeptrack Lower to the example below for each parameter.
Keeptrack Raise
N = Neutral Tap Position Counter Contact
MS = Motor Seal-In off
2–28
Operation – 2
Accessing The Output Status Screens (HMI) Accessing the Metering & Status Screen
To access the Output Status screens from the (TapTalk)
control front panel proceed as follows: The Metering & Status Screen, when connected
to a control, displays parameter values consistent
1. Navigate to the "Output Status" screen. with the capabilities of the communication system.
Press ENT to view To access the Metering and Status screen from
the TapTalk® Main Menu, select Monitor/Metering
Output Status
& Status, or the menu bar Metering & Status hot
button. TapTalk will display the Metering & Status
will display a summary of the Output
Status parameters, similar to the The Metering Status display colors and text can be
following. set in the Monitor/Set Metering Colors dialog screen
(See Chapter 3, TapTalk S-2001D for details).
RAISE LOWER ALARM

1 1 0  NOTE: When changing Metering and Status
screen colors you must exit the Metering
Output Status Parameter Key and Status screen for the color change
to take affect.
RAISE = Raise Output Contact
LOWER = Lower Output Contact
ALARM = Alarm Output Contact
Output Status Display Key

1 = On
0 = Off
To cycle through each element of the "Output

Status" display press the Down arrow pushbutton.
The control will display a detailed status screen
similar to the example below for each parameter.
Raise Contact
ON
2–29
Figure 2-34 Metering & Status Screen
7620 V Primary V
x 64.5 x 63.5
Load V
Control V Not used for Normalized 120.0 V
for Settings Settings Voltage
x 1.0127
Resultant 1.5 V PT Correction x 1.0127
Multiplier Factor Multiplier
118.5 V Meter Out Meter Out Load V 118.5 V
Regulator PT Output or Cabinet Ratio

if Ratio Transformer Transformer
Figure 2-35 Meter Out Voltage Calculation
2–30
Operation – 2
PRIMARY METERING (Single or Three Phase) SECONDARY METERING STATUS

Voltage Load Voltage
Displays the calculated primary voltage based on Displays the real-time measured value of voltage at
the user-selected voltage multiplier, VT corrections, the Tapchanger and includes any corrections made
and measured secondary voltage. using the user-selected VT correction voltage.
Source Voltage Meter Out Voltage

Displays the calculated primary source voltage based Displays the measured voltage at the terminals of
on the user selected source voltage multiplier, source the M-2001D without any software modifications.
VT corrections and source secondary voltage. Used as the base for normalizing voltage.
Current Source Voltage

Displays the calculated primary current based on Displays the real-time calculated/measured source
the user-selected current multiplier, and measured voltage and includes any corrections made using
secondary current. the user-selected VT correction voltage. See
Chapter 6, Setpoints "Regulate REV and Regulate
Watts Reverse Measured" section to determine if the
Displays the calculated primary quantity based on Source Voltage is Measured or Calculated.
the user-selected voltage and current multipliers; VT
configuration (line-to-ground or line-to-line), single- Compensated Voltage
phase or three-phase, and measured secondary Displays the calculated voltage at the "load center".
voltage and current.
Normalizing Voltage
VAr Displays the result of the Normalizing Multiplier
Displays the calculated primary quantity based on (0.80 to 1.20) times the Meter Out Voltage.
the user-selected voltage and current multipliers, VT
Load Current
configuration (line-to-ground or line-to-line), single-
phase or three-phase, and measured secondary Displays the real-time measured value of current.
voltage and current. Power Factor
VA Displays the real-time calculated value of power
Displays the calculated primary quantity based on factor.
the user-selected voltage and current multipliers, VT Frequency
configuration (line-to-ground or line-to-line), single-
phase or three-phase, and measured secondary Displays the real-time measured frequency value.
voltage and current. Circulating Current
Displays a representable value of circulating
REMOTE VOLTAGE BIAS current, if the control is used with the Beckwith
Voltage Electric M-0115A Parallel Balancing Module, or
Displays the Remote Voltage value provided to it's equivalent.
the control utilizing either DNP 3.0, MODBUS or
IEC 61850 protocols. If a voltage value is present
the control is utilizing the Remote Voltage Bias
Voltage to control.
2–31
TAP INFORMATION Resettable Operations Counter

Tap Position The user resets this counter to zero by pressing
Displays the tap position of the tapchanger when ENT while viewing the resettable operation counter
any method of KeepTrack™ is used. Recognizes screen within the Status Menu. No password is
tapchanges commanded via manual, automatic or required to reset the resettable operations counter.
external (SCADA) means.  NOTE: The counter will only increment with a
Drag Hands connection to the counter input.
Displays the tap position Drag Hands values for
each direction. Neutral Counter
Timer (Raise/Lower) Records the number of times the Neutral Input is
energized.
Displays the integrated out-of-band time for a
voltage excursion outside the upper/lower band limit The counter accommodates 999,999 operation
up to the value of the time delay setpoint. counts and the number of counts stored in memory
is not affected by a loss of supply power. Total
Intertap Timer operation count is displayed in the Status Menu.
In the sequential mode of operation, displays the This counter cannot be reset, but can be preset to
integrated out-of-band time for a voltage excursion any value up to 999,999 in the Configuration menu.
and the subsequent tapchange. Adjustable from 0 to
60 seconds, in 1 second increments, with a factory RTN Status
setting of 0 seconds. Displays the "Run Through Neutral" feature status
(Enabled or Disabled).
Operation Counter
Records the number of raise and lower operations. Count To RTN Active
The operation counter will increment based on Displays the number of counter operations since the
the counter configuration, as set by the user. This operations between runs setting was set, or since
counter is not resettable. the feature was enabled. The counter will reset to
zero if the feature is enabled and successfully runs
The counter accommodates 999,999 operation through neutral.
counts and the number of counts stored in memory
is not affected by a loss of supply power. Total RTN Success Counter
operation count is displayed in the Status Menu. The RTN Counter will increment after each
This counter cannot be reset, but can be preset to successful operation of the Run Through Neutral
any value up to 999,999 in the Configuration menu. feature.
2–32
Operation – 2
TAPCHANGER STATUS VAr Bias Effect

Operation Mode Indicates one of three conditions when enabled.
Indicates the operational mode of the control (Auto, If the control has determined that the absolute
Manual or Off). reactive power is >¾ of the Max Cap Bank Setting
and the inverse timer has timed out, then the
Block Status control will increase the effective bandcenter by
Indicates blocks that are active. Blocks that can be 1 Volt depending on the direction of the reactive
active include: power and will either indicate "Bandcenter Raise"
for negative reactive power or "Bandcenter Lower"
• Selftest for positive reactive power. If the absolute power is
• Comm Block <¾ of the Max Cap Bank Setting then the display
will indicate "None".
• Line Limit
• Reverse Power Power Direction
• Over Voltage Runback Indicates one of two power directions: Forward
(forward power condition) or Reverse (reverse
• Block Raise (Tap) power condition).
• Block Lower (Tap)
Voltage Reduction
• Block Raise (Voltage)
VR Off indicates voltage reduction is not active,
• Block Lower (Voltage blocked either by non-sequential input, reverse
• SCAMP Switch power condition, or by communicated command.
VR Step 1, 2, and 3 indicate that voltage reduction
• Front Panel Switch
is in effect for the stated step value. VR Step 1,
• Non-Sequential Block 2, and 3 indicate that voltage reduction has been
• Seal-in Failure Raise Block implemented from the control front panel for the
stated step value.
• Seal-in Failure Lower Block
• Low Current HMI Active Mode
Indicates that HMI menu at the control is active.
Band Status Turns off after 15 minutes of inactivity.
Indicates one of three conditions: High, when
voltage is out of band high, Low when voltage is
out of band low, or OK when voltage is within band.
2–33
INPUT STATUS ALARM STATUS

Neutral Tap There are three available states designated by color
Indicates neutral position contact input is closed. for each of the Alarm Status elements:
Counter • Gray with Dark Gray Text – Alarm disabled.

Indicates operation counter contact input is closed. • Gray with Black Text – Alarm enable and
condition not met
Non-Sequential
• RED – Alarm enabled and condition exists
Indicates Non‑sequential contact input is closed.
Tapchanger control blocks raise or lower operation
on a sustained closed contact. Comm Block
The control has had its automatic operation
Motor Seal-In blocked via communications and is now in manual
Indicates when motor power is applied. operation mode and the alarm output is on due to
this condition.
Voltage Reduction 1
Indicates Step 1 Voltage Reduction contact output Block Raise (Tap)
is closed. The tap position equals or exceeds the block raise
tap limit setting and the alarm output is on due to
Voltage Reduction 2 this condition.
Indicates Step 2 Voltage Reduction contact output
is closed. Block Lower (Tap)
The tap position equals or exceeds the block lower
SCADA Cutout tap limit setting and the alarm output is on due to
Indicates SCADA (switch) input is closed. this condition.
Tapchanger control blocks remote Raise or Lower
operation. Block Raise (Voltage)
The tap position equals or exceeds the block raise
AUX INPUT STATUS voltage limit setting and the alarm output is on due
to this condition.
Indicates (red) when the Auxiliary Input is active.
Block Lower (Voltage)
OUTPUT STATUS The tap position equals or exceeds the block lower
Raise voltage limit setting and the alarm output is on due
to this condition.
Indicates when a Tap Raise output is active. Limited
by tap Block Raise setpoint and tap position limit DVAr2 Load Current Limit
settings. DVAr2 Load Current is exceeding the respective
Lower maximum current limit setting and the alarm output
is on due to this condition.
Indicates when a Tap Lower output is active. Limited
by tap Block Lower setpoint and tap position limit Mtr. Seal-In Failure
settings. Indicates that motor current has not been detected
Programmable Alarm for a period 15 seconds after a Raise or Lower
command has been executed. This event must
Indicates when a Programmable Alarm condition
occur two consecutive times for this alarm to occur.
is true.
Backup Pwr Failure
Motor Seal-In
Indicates the absence of Backup Power circuiting
Indicates when a Motor Seal-In Output is active.
when Backup Power option has been detected.
2–34
Operation – 2
Low Current Block Master/Follower Lockout

When enabled the control determines if Load There are two types of lockout conditions, Master
Current following a tapchange is less than 4 mA, lockout and Follower lockout. Any lockout of the
coincident with Tap Delta Voltage being less than paralleling mode will set the Master/Follower
4 VAC. When these conditions exist the control will Lockout Alarm. When a lockout condition exists,
initiate an alarm and block regulation. the control issuing the lockout will stop any further
GOOSE publishing and will stop load voltage
Individual Tap Wear regulation. Also, the alarm can be configured as
The number of operations on any single tap exceeds a DNP event, or as a report in case of IEC 61850.
the Individual Tap Wear Alarm setting. The lockout state will be displayed on the control
front panel display and in the Master/Follower
Tap Changer Failure
Configuration Tool (Figure 3-87).
When the Operation Counter Configuration is set to
"Cam Follower" and this alarm has been enabled,  NOTE: Master/Follower Alarm messages can
indicates the counter contact input has detected a be observed for the connected control
Tap Changer Failure condition. from the TapTalk ® Monitor/Master/
Follower Alarm messages menu item
A Cam Follower contact is a cam driven contact (Figure 3-34).
which is normally closed when the Tapchanger is
at rest, and opens and closes once during each tap
Master Lockout
operation in either direction. If this contact does not
open and close within 30 seconds after the control • Follower Detection Lockout - When
issues a Raise or Lower in either local automatic the control powers up in Master Mode,
or remote manual operational modes, this alarm the control will wait for approximately
will activate. This alarm can be reset either by the 65 seconds to allow all the GOOSE
Cam Follower contact operating correctly during a messages from all the Followers in the
subsequent Raise or Lower operation, or if reset network to reach the Master. Once all
by the user. GOOSE messages have been received,
the Master will start its normal algorithm.
LDC/LDZ If within the initial 65 second period the
Any value other than zero has been set for LDC/ Master does not receive all the GOOSE
LDZ. messages it expected, it will enter the
Master lockout state.
Line Current Limit
• Follower Timer Lockout - The Tap
The line current is exceeding the respective Position Response Timer will start after
maximum current limit setting and the alarm output the Master has published its new tap
is on due to this condition. position message after it has performed
Reverse Power a successful tap operation. If it doesn’t
receive the tap position messages from all
Reverse power is present at the control and the the participating Followers in the network
alarm output is on due to this condition. before the timer expires, then a Master
Abnormal Tap Position Lockout is issued.
Abnormal Tap Position is indicated when the alarm • Tap Difference Lockout - If the Tap
is enabled, KeepTrack™ is enabled and the neutral position difference between any Follower
input is detected but the present tap position at that and the Master is greater than or equal
instant is neither at minus one nor plus one. The to the Tap Difference setting, the Master
Abnormal Tap Position Alarm will also be activated will enter the lockout state.
when the Motor Seal-in Failure detection feature • Follower Comm. Loss Lockout - If
has detected a Motor Seal-in Failure. any follower does not send a valid
retransmitted GOOSE message within a
Voltage Reduction
65 second internal keepalive time, then
Any level of voltage reduction is active. a lockout is issued, signaling a broken
VAr Bias Lead or Lag communication link.
Indicates when the VAr Bias effect (Lead or Lag)
has exceeded the time limit imposed by the Max
VAr Bias Duration Setting.
2–35
Follower Lockout CBEMA EVENTS AND COUNTER STATUS

• Master Comm. Loss Lockout - When When the Load Voltage is sagging or swelling
the Follower does not receive a valid greater than the pickup setting, then a pickup status
retransmitted GOOSE message from will be set after a minimum duration, in addition to
the Master, within a 65 second internal incrementing a counter.
keepalive time, and if the previous Master
GOOSE message indicates that the Up to 4 CBEMA events can be set and enabled
breaker statuses were closed, then a allowing the control to trigger a Sequence of Events
Follower Lockout is issued. This provides record when each event occurs. Also, the control
an indication that a broken communication will report both the time and duration of each event
occurred. via DNP. These 4 settings allow the control to be
set to record violations of the ITIC curves (formerly
• Follower Comm. Loss Lockout - If known as CBEMA curves).
any follower does not send a valid
retransmitted GOOSE message within a
65 second internal keepalive time, then
a lockout is issued, signaling a broken
communication link.
• Tap Difference Lockout - If the Tap
Position Difference between the Follower
and the Master is greater than or equal
to the Tap Difference setting, the Follower
will enter the lockout state.
RTN Fail to Operate

The RTN Fail alarm will actuate when the "Maximum
RTN operations before Alarms" setting has been
exceeded.
Op Count Signal
The total number of operations has exceeded the
Operations Counter Alarm Limit setting.
2–36
Operation – 2
DEMAND AND ENERGY METERING Setting The Demand Interval (HMI)

Accessing the Present Demand Screens (HMI)  NOTE: The Demand Interval can be set from
To access the Present Demand screens from the either the "Present Demand" menu or
control front panel proceed as follows: the "Demand History" menu.
1. Press the Left Arrow (MNTR Hot Button)

pushbutton to awaken the unit. The To set the Demand Interval from the "Present
menu will advance to "MONITOR". Demand" menu or the "Demand History" menu
perform the following:
MONITOR 1. Navigate to the desired "Demand
SETP
UTIL Interval" screen (Present Demand or
Demand History), then press the ENT
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. pushbutton.
The unit will display the following: If Level 2 Access is not active or has
been previously input, then a "C" will be
Metering displayed. Go to Step 4.
 
Demand Interval
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, 15
Min C
as necessary, to navigate to the
"Present Demand" screen. 2. If Level 2 Access is active then the Level
2 Access prompt will be displayed.
Present Demand
  ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS
_
4. Pressing the Down arrow pushbutton
once will advance the menu to the  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code
first element (Demand Interval) of the the display will automatically advance
"Present Demand" screens. the cursor to the next digit when input
Demand Interval
15 Min 3. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then
5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton to
access the remaining Present Demand If a valid Level 2 Access code was
parameter screens. entered, then the display will briefly flash
a confirmation screen, then a "C". If not,
Demand Load Voltage re-enter a valid code.
Demand Primary Current 4. Utilizing either the Up or Down arrow
Demand Primary Watts pushbuttons, select between 5, 10, 15,
30 or 60 minute interval settings, then
Demand Primary VArs press the ENT pushbutton.
Demand Primary VA The display will return to the "Demand
Interval" screen and display the new
interval.
2–37
Accessing The Demand History Screens (HMI) Resetting Individual Demand History Values
To access the Demand History screens from the (HMI)
control front panel proceed as follows: The presence of the "E" on the top line of the display
indicates that the value can be reset from this menu
1. Press the Left Arrow (MNTR Hot Button) item. The steps necessary to reset Demand History
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The items are as follows:
menu will advance to "MONITOR".
1. Navigate to the desired Demand History
MONITOR parameter screen, then press the ENT
pushbutton.
SETP
UTIL
The control will display a "confirmation"
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. screen similar to the following.
Min Load Voltage R
Metering Press ENT to confirm
 
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, will reset the Demand History value.
"Demand History" screen. Min Load Voltage E
XXX.X Volts
Demand History
 
Min Load Voltage E
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton 01/01/0906:30:48
once. The menu will advance to the
first element (Demand Interval) of the The screen will return to the target
"Demand History" screens. "Demand History" screen and display
the new value.
Demand Interval
15 Min
 NOTE: Demand Interval is also included in the

"Present Demand" menu. The Demand
Interval can be set from either menu. See
Setting the Demand Interval (HMI) in
the previous section for details regarding
setting the Demand Interval value.
The remaining "Demand History" screens are

accessed by navigating within the "Demand History"
menu. When accessed the individual screen
displays bottom line will cycle between the Demand
History parameter value and the corresponding
Date and Time Stamp for that value. "Demand
History" screens that include an "E" on the right
side of the top display line can be reset.
Max Load Voltage E

XXX.X Volts
Max Load Voltage E

01/01/090 6:30:48
2–38
Operation – 2
Resetting ALL Demand History Parameter Performing a Master Reset of ALL Demand
Values (HMI) History and Energy Metering Parameter
All Demand History parameter menu items that Values (HMI)
include an "E" on the top line of the display can be The "Demand History" menu includes the capability
reset from this menu item. The steps necessary to to initiate a Master Reset of both the Demand
reset ALL Demand History parameter values are History and Energy Metering parameter values. This
as follows: capability is also included in the "Energy Metering"
menu. The steps necessary to reset ALL Demand
1. Navigate to the "Reset Demand History" History and Energy Metering parameter values are
parameter values screen. as follows:
Press ENT to reset 1. Navigate to the "Master Reset" menu

item within the "Demand History" or
Demand History "Energy Metering" menus.
Press ENT to perform
will display a "confirmation" screen
similar to the following. Master Reset
Press Ent to confirm 2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control

will respond with a "confirmation" screen.
reset Demand History
will reset ALL the Demand History Press Exit to cancel
values.
The control will then display the following
will then display the following sequence
sequence of screen displays.
of screen displays.
Press Ent to confirm
Master Reset
reset Demand History
is complete.
Demand History
has been reset.
Master Reset
4. Press the Exit pushbutton to return to
the "Demand History" menu.
the "Demand History" menu.
2–39
Accessing The Energy Metering Screens (HMI)

To access the Energy Metering screens from the The remaining "Energy Metering" screens are
control front panel proceed as follows: accessed by navigating within the "Energy Metering"
menu. When accessed, the individual screen displays
bottom line will cycle between the Energy Metering
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The
menu will advance to "MONITOR". parameter value and the corresponding Date and
Time Stamp for that value. "Energy Metering"
MONITOR screens that include an "E" on the right side of the top
display line can be reset individually or all at one time.
SETP
UTIL
Lagging VAr Hours E
The unit will display the following: x kVArh
Metering Watts Hours Rev E

  x kWh
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, Leading VAr Hours E

as necessary, to advance to "Energy
Metering". x kVArh
Energy Metering Press ENT to reset

  Energy Metering
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton

once. The menu will advance to the Press ENT to perform
first element (Watt Hours Fwd) of the Master Reset
"Energy Metering" screens.
Watt Hours Fwd E

X KWh
2–40
Operation – 2
Resetting Individual Energy Metering Values Resetting ALL Energy Metering Parameter
(HMI) Values (HMI)
The presence of the "E" on the top line of the display All Energy Metering parameter menu items that
indicates that the value can be reset from this menu include an "E" on the top line of the display can be
item. The steps necessary to reset Energy Metering reset from this menu item. The steps necessary to
items are as follows: reset ALL Energy Metering parameter values are
as follows:
1. Navigate to the desired Energy Metering
parameter screen, then press the ENT 1. Navigate to the "Reset Energy Metering"
pushbutton. parameter values screen.
The control will display a "confirmation"
screen similar to the following. Press ENT to reset
Energy Metering
Watt Hours Fwd R
Press ENT to confirm 2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control
will display a "confirmation" screen
similar to the following.
will reset the Energy Metering value.
Press Ent to confirm
Watt Hours Fwd E reset Energy Metering
X kWh
will reset ALL the Energy Metering
Watt Hours Fwd E values.
01/01/0906:30:48 The control will then display the following
sequence of screen displays.
The screen will return to the target
"Energy Metering" screen and display Press Ent to confirm
the new value.
reset Energy Metering
Energy Metering
has been reset.

the "Energy Metering" menu.
2–41
Performing a Master Reset of ALL Energy Accessing The Demand & Energy Metering
Metering and Demand History Parameter Screen (TapTalk)
Values (HMI) To access the Demand & Energy Metering screen
The "Energy Metering" menu includes the capability from the TapTalk® Main Menu, select Monitor/
to initiate a Master Reset of both the Energy Metering Demand & Energy Metering. TapTalk will display the
and Demand History parameter values. This Demand & Energy Metering screen (Figure 2-36).
capability is also included in the "Demand History"
menu. The steps necessary to reset ALL Energy The Demand & Energy Metering screen, when
Metering and Demand History parameter values connected to a control, displays parameter values
are described in the Demand History section of consistent with the capabilities of the communication
this chapter. system.
Each element of the Demand History and Energy
Metering can be reset individually by selecting the
desired parameter(s) and then selecting Reset
Selected Items. When the Reset command is
issued, the metered value is reset to zero and the
time and date are updated.
Select All – Allows the user to select all parameters.
Clear All – Allows the user to reset all parameter
values.
Reset Selected Items – Allows the user to reset
only the selected parameter values.
Demand Interval – The Demand Interval applies
to the Demand Present Primary Current (Amps)
parameter and the Demand History parameters.
The Demand Interval can be set to 15, 30, and 60
minutes.
The Demand Present Primary Current parameter
value follows the concept of a lagged demand meter.
The demand time interval is selected by the user as
15, 30 or 60 minutes. This is the time it takes for a
thermal meter to indicate 90% of a change in load.
2–42
Operation – 2
Load Voltage – Displays the real-time measured Demand History/Energy Metering

value of voltage at the Tapchanger or transformer All demand history (single phase) and Energy
and includes any corrections made using the user Metering Values include the date and time at which
selected VT Correction Voltage. each occurred. A drag hand value is the maximum
Primary Current – Displays the calculated or minimum value of a measured quantity recorded
primary demand current based on the user-selected since the last reset.
current multiplier and measured secondary current. Minimum Load Voltage – Displays minimum Load
voltage at the Tapchanger or transformer. This value
Primary Watts – Displays the real time demand
continuously averaged over consecutive 32-second
value base on the user-selected voltage and current
intervals.
multipliers; VT configuration (line-to-ground or line-
to-line), single-phase or three-phase, and measured Maximum Load Voltage – Displays drag hand
secondary voltage and current. maximum Load voltage at the Tapchanger or
transformer. This value continuously averaged over
Primary VAr – Displays the real time demand
consecutive 32-second intervals.
value based on the user-selected voltage and
current multipliers, VT configuration (line-to-ground Maximum Primary Current – Displays drag hand
or line-to-line), single-phase or three-phase, and maximum primary current.
measured secondary voltage and current.
Maximum Primary Watts – Displays drag hand
Primary VA – Displays the real time demand value maximum primary watts.
based on the user-selected voltage and current
multipliers, VT configuration (line-to-ground or line- Maximum Primary VAr – Displays drag hand
to-line), single-phase or three-phase, and measured maximum primary VArs.
secondary voltage and current.
Maximum Primary VA – Displays drag hand
maximum primary VA. Resets automatically when
Power Factor at (Max) VA value, below, is reset.
Power Factor @ Max VA – Displays drag hand
power factor at time of maximum VA.
Forward Watt Hours – Displays drag hand forward
Watt hours.
Reverse Watt Hours – Displays drag hand reverse
Watt hours.
Lagging VAr Hours – Displays drag hand Lagging
VAr hours.
Leading VAr Hours – Displays drag hand Leading
VAr hours.
2–43
Figure 2-36 Demand & Energy Metering Screen
2–44
Operation – 2
REAL TIME VOLTAGE PLOT

Real Time Voltage Plot (TapTalk)
The Real Time Voltage Plot feature allows the user
to monitor in real time the last 60 seconds of the
source voltage value and load voltage. The Voltage
Chart freezes the last 30 seconds of the voltage
profile and displays the current values.
To access the Real Time Voltage Plot screen from
the TapTalk® Main Menu, select Monitor/Real Time
Voltage Plot. TapTalk will display the Real Time
Voltage Chart screen (Figure 2-37).
Figure 2-37 Real Time Voltage Chart
2–45
Display All Metering

The Display All Metering
feature provides the user with
a snapshot of all metering
parameters. This feature also
allows the Display All Metering
screen (Figure 2-38) to be
printed or saved to a *.HTM file.
Figure 2-38 Display All Metering Screen
2–46
Operation – 2
MOTOR CURRENT PROFILE The remaining Motor Current screens are accessed
Accessing The Motor Current Screens (HMI) by navigating within the "Motor Current" menu.
When accessed, the individual screen displays
To access the Motor Current screens from the
bottom line will display current values for each
control front panel proceed as follows:
parameter. For Peak Motor Current, Peak RMS
1. Press the Left Arrow (MNTR Hot Button) Current, Average RMS Current and Duration the
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The bottom display line may also include a "T" that
menu will advance to "MONITOR". indicates the Motor Current Monitoring is in the
"Training" mode.
MONITOR
The "Training" mode is used during commissioning
SETP
UTIL of the Tapchanger control. Several tapchange
operations are manually performed, then the profile
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. is stored in the EEPROM. The profile is compared
The unit will display the following: during normal tapchange operation to initiate
alarms.
Metering
  Avg RMS Curr
0.0 mA (0.0) T
as necessary, to advance to the "Motor
Current" screen. Profile Duration
xxxxx.x ms (xxxx.x) T
Motor Current
 
4. Pressing the Down arrow pushbutton will

advance the menu to the first element
(Peak RMS Curr) of the "Motor Current"
screens.
Peak RMS Curr

0.0 mA (0.0) T
5. Press the Down arrow to access the

following "Motor Current" parameter
screens.
Avg RMS Curr
Profile Duration
2–47
Initializing Motor Current Values (HMI) Accessing Motor Current Profile Screen,
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) Resetting Training Mode and Peak Motor
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu Current From TapTalk
will advance to "CONFIGURATION". To access the TapTalk® Motor Current Profile screen
CONFIGURATION
COMM
SETP communications with the target control.
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. 2. Select Monitor/Motor Current Profile
The unit will display the following: from the TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will
display a "Motor Current Profile" dialog
Tapchanger Type
 
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton

as necessary until "Mtr Current Profile"
is displayed.
Mtr Current Profile

 
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as

necessary, to navigate to the "Init. Motor
Current" screen.
Init. Motor Current

Press ENT to reset

Figure 2-39 Motor Current Profile
will momentarily display the following. Dialog Screen
Init. Motor Current 3. To reset the Motor Current Profile to the

Training Mode select "Reset Training
I
nitialization Done Mode". TapTalk will display a "Motor
Current Profile Reset" confirmation
Init. Motor Current
Press ENT to reset

Figure 2-40 Motor Current Profile Training

Mode Reset Confirmation Screen
2–48
Operation – 2
4. Select OK. TapTalk® will display a Motor HARMONIC ANALYSIS

Current Profile Reset successfully sent Accessing The Harmonics Screens (HMI)
confirmation screen (Figure 2-41).
To access the Harmonics screens from the control
MONITOR
Figure 2-41 Motor Current Profile SETP
UTIL
Reset Training Mode Successfully Sent
Confirmation Screen 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
See Chapter 5, Motor Current
Detection and Monitoring for details Metering
regarding this feature.
 
5. To reset the Peak Motor Current Value
to zero select "Reset Motor Current". 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton,
TapTalk will display a "Peak Motor as necessary, to advance to the
Current" reset configuration screen "Harmonics" screen.
(Figure 2-42).
Harmonics
 
4. Pressing the Down arrow pushbutton will

advance the menu to the first element
(Voltage % THD) of the "Harmonics"
screens.
Figure 2-42 Peak Motor Current Profile Reset Voltage % THD

Confirmation Screen X.X %
6. Select OK. TapTalk will display a Peak 5. Press the Down arrow to access the
Motor Current reset successfully sent remaining "Harmonics" parameter
confirmation screen (Figure 2-43). screens.
Current % THD
View Voltage Harmonics
View Current Harmonics
The remaining "Harmonics" screens are accessed

by navigating within the "Harmonics" menu.
Figure 2-43 Peak Motor Current Profile Reset
Successfully Sent Confirmation Screen
7. Select OK. TapTalk will return to the

Motor Current Profile dialog screen
(Figure 2-39).
2–49
Accessing Voltage/Current Harmonics Accessing Harmonic Analysis Screen From

Screens (HMI) TapTalk
The steps necessary to view "Harmonics Voltage" To access the Harmonic Analysis screen perform
or "Current Harmonics" screens are as follows: the following:
1. Navigate to the "Voltage" or "Current 1. S t a r t Ta p Ta l k ® , t h e n e s t a bl i s h
Harmonics" screen. communications with the target control.
2. Select Monitor/Harmonic Analysis
Press ENT to view from the TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will
Voltage Harmonics display a "Harmonic Analysis" screen
(Figure 2-44).
will display the following screen.
Harmonic Magn Per

2 0.0 0.0 %
or
Harmonic Mag Per

2 0mA 0
Press the Up or Down arrow pushbutton

as necessary to navigate to the desired
Harmonic (2 – 31).
Figure 2-44 Harmonic Analysis Screen
2–50
Operation – 2
TAP INFORMATION
Accessing The Tap Information Screens (HMI)
To access the Tap Information screens from the The remaining "Tap Information" screens are
control front panel proceed as follows: accessed by navigating within the "Tap Information"
menu. "Tap Information" screens that include an "E"
1. Press the Left Arrow (MNTR Hot Button) on the right side of the top display line can be reset
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The from this menu item.
Tap Position/Cal
MONITOR
Drag Hands (Reset)
SETP
UTIL
Definite Timer (Raise Sec. / Lower Sec.)
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. Intertap Timer (0-100%)
Operation Counter
Metering Resettable (Operation) Counter (reset)
  Neutral Switch Counter
Lower Counter
3. Press the Left or Right arrow pushbutton,
as necessary, to advance to "Tap Raise Counter
Information".
View Specific Tap Statistics
Tap Information Clear Specific Tap Statistics
  RTN Success Counter
RTN Status (Enabled/Disabled)
once. The menu will advance to the first Count to RTN Active
element (Tap Position/Cal) of the "Tap
Information" screens.
Tap Position/Cal
0
2–51
Calibrating Tap Position (HMI) DRAG HANDS

To Calibrate the Tap Position proceed as follows: Reset Drag Hands Values (HMI)
To reset Drag Hands values proceed as follows:
1. Navigate to the "Tap Position/Cal" screen
in the Monitor/Tap Information menu. 1. Navigate to the "Drag Hands" screen in
the Monitor/Tap Information menu.
Tap Position/Cal
0 Drag Hands E
L=0N R=0N
2 Access is not active or has been The presence of the "E" on the top line of
previously input, then a "C" will be the display indicates that the Drag Hands
displayed. Go to Step 5. values can be reset from this menu item.
Tap Position/Cal 2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The displayed

"E" will change to a "R".
0 C
3. If Level 2 Access is active then the Level will display the following.
Drag Hands R
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS Press ENT to confirm
_
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code will display the following.
the display will automatically advance
the cursor to the next digit when input Drag Hands
is momentarily paused. L=0N R=0N
4. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then The Drag Hands values are now reset
press the ENT pushbutton. to the current value.
If a valid Level 2 Access code was

entered, then the display will briefly flash Reset Drag Hands Values (TapTalk)
a confirmation screen, then a "C". If not, To reset Drag Hands values from TapTalk® perform
reenter a valid code. the following:
5. At the cursor, input the desired Tap 1. Select Setup/Tap Settings from the
Position utilizing arrow pushbuttons, TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
then press the ENT pushbutton. The Tap Settings dialog screen (Figure 3-45).
display will return to the "Tap Position/
Cal" screen. 2. From the "Drag Hands" section of the Tap
Settings dialog screen select "Reset".
3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a "Save
to Device" confirmation screen.
4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
Setpoints "Successfully Written to
Control" confirmation screen.
5. The Drag Hands values will be reset to
the current value.
2–52
Operation – 2
RESETTABLE OPERATION COUNTER TAP STATISTICS

Reset Operation Counter (HMI) Viewing Specific Tap Statistics (HMI)
To reset the Operation Counter proceed as follows: To view tap statistics proceed as follows:
1. Navigate to the "Resettable Counter" 1. Navigate to the View Specific Tap
screen in the Monitor/Tap Information Statistics screen in the Monitor/Tap
menu. Information menu.
Resettable Counter E Press ENT to view

X specific Tap Stats
2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The displayed 2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control
"E" will change to a "R", then press ENT will display the number of recorded
again. tapchanges and the Accumulated
Primary Current for each individual tap
R
esettable Counter R position on the Tapchanger control.
Tap
Tap Number
3. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control 0 0 0.0 A
will display the following.
The Up and Down arrow pushbuttons
Resettable Counter are utilized to scroll through the tap
positions. Press the Exit pushbutton to
0 exit Tap Stats.
The Operation Counter is now reset.
Press the Exit pushbutton to return to Clearing Tap Statistics (HMI)
the "Tap Information" screen. To clear Tap Statistics proceed as follows:
1. Navigate to the Clear Tap Statistics
Reset Operation Counter (TapTalk) screen in the Monitor/Tap Information
To reset the Operation Counter from TapTalk® menu.
Press ENT to clear
1. Select Setup/Tap Settings from the
TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the Tap Statistics
Tap Settings dialog screen (Figure 3-45).
2. Press the ENT pushbutton. The
2. From the "Operation Counter" section of control will display "Clearing Tap Stats"
the Tap Settings dialog screen select the confirmation display.
"Reset" for the "Resettable" parameter.
3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a "Save Press ENT to confirm
to Device" confirmation screen.
Clearing Tap Stats
Setpoints "Successfully Written to 3. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control
Control" confirmation screen. will briefly display the "Tap Statistics
have been cleared" confirmation and
5. The Operations Counter value will be
then return to the previous display.
reset to zero.
Tap Statistics
have been cleared
Press the Exit pushbutton to exit Tap

Stats.
2–53
View Tap Statistics From TapTalk

To view Tap Statistics from TapTalk® perform the
following:
2. Select Monitor/Tap Statistics from the
TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display a
"Tap Statistics" screen (Figure 2-45).
The "Tap Statistics" screen includes the
capability to Refresh the screen display,
Reset All displayed values, and save the
data to a ".csv" file which can be read by
a spreadsheet program.
Selecting "Reset All" will clear the
Individual Tap Wear Alarm in the
Metering & Status screen.
 NOTE: By pointing the mouse to any bar, the corresponding tap statistic will be highlighted as well as
displayed in a tool tip.
Figure 2-45 Tap Statistics Screen
2–54
Operation – 2
SMART FLASH SD CARD SD Card Quick Capture

Accessing The Smart Flash SD Card Screens The SD Card Quick Capture feature provides the
(HMI) means (in one step) to initiate a save of the following
To access the Smart Flash SD Card screens data files to the inserted SD Card (if they exist on
proceed as follows: the control):
▲ CAUTION: The "Smart Flash SD Card" menu • Control Clone

screens can only be accessed when a properly • Data Logging
formatted Smart Flash SD Card or SDHC Card is
• Oscillography
inserted and seated in the Smart Flash SD Card slot.
• Sequence of Events
1. Verify that a (FAT) formatted Smart Flash
SD or SDHC Card is inserted into the • DNP Map
Smart Flash SD Card slot. • Multi-user Access Code
2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot • Multi-user Access Code Log
Button) pushbutton to awaken the unit.
The menu will advance to "Memory The SD Card Quick Capture feature requires a Level
Card". 2 Access Code to initiate. If any data file other than
"Control Clone" does not exist on the control at
Memory Card the time the Quick Capture is initiated, the control
  will display a "XXX file doesn't exist" message for
approximately three seconds before continuing with
The Memory Card can now be utilized to: the Quick Capture process.
Quick Capture
Quick Capture File Naming Convention
Load Setpoints Since Data Logging and Oscillography files
Save Setpoints both utilize the same Comtrade format, the
Quick Capture feature will name Data Logging
Save Data Log files as DSXXXXXX.dat and DSXXXXXX.cfg.
Save Sequence of Events Oscillography files will be named as YYXXXXXX.
dat and YYXXXXXX.cfg, with YY representing the
Save Oscillograph Records "Partition" and XXXXXX representing the "Serial
Clone Save Number" of the control. For example, 16009999.dat
would be an Oscillography file of the 16th Partition
Clone Load
in control Serial Number 9999.
Load DNP Config
Save DNP Config
Save Metering Data
Firmware Update
Save/Load IEC 61850 CID Files
User Access Code Key
Save Wakeup Screen Parameter data
 NOTE: If the Smart Flash SD Card has had a valid

Access Level 1 or Access Level 2 code
written to it, the control will accept the code
and not prompt for an Access Code.
2–55
Initiating a Smart Flash SD Card Quick Capture 7. Press the "ENT" pushbutton. The control
will cycle through the Quick Capture
1. Insert the target Smart Flash SD Card sequence of displays listed below:
into the control as previously described.
 NOTE: If a file is not present (OSC for example)
2. Press the Right Arrow (Comm Hot the control will display a "XXX file does
Button) pushbutton. The control will go not exist" message for approximately
directly to the "Memory Card" menu. three seconds before continuing with
the next save item in the Quick Capture
Memory Card sequence.
W V
3. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton as Confirm press ENT

necessary to navigate to the "SD Quick Cancel press EXIT
Capture" menu item.
SD Quick Capture Saving...

Press ENT to begin Clone File
4. Press the "ENT" pushbutton. If Level

Saving...
previously input, then the following will DNP CFG file
Saving...
Confirm press ENT
SOE file
Cancel press EXIT.
5. If Level 2 Access is active, then the Level Saving...

Data Log file
_ Saving data file
......
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code
the cursor to the next digit when input Saving...
is momentarily paused. OSC file
6. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then Saving...

press the "ENT" pushbutton.
Multi-user Pass.log
entered, then the display will briefly flash
a confirmation screen and then display Quick Cap Complete
the following: Any key to continue
Confirm press ENT
Cancel press EXIT
2–56
Operation – 2
Loading Setpoints from a Smart Flash SD Card  NOTE: If an arrow is displayed on either end of the
1. Insert the target Smart Flash SD Card bottom display line, additional setpoint
(that includes the setpoints file) into the files are available for selection. Utilize
control as previously described. the Right or Left arrow pushbuttons to
select the desired file.
2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot
Button) pushbutton. The control will go 7. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control
directly to the "Memory Card" menu. will prompt the user to select the file to
be loaded.
Memory Card
File Name.tpt
 
MM/DD/YYYYY hh:mm 
3. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as
necessary to navigate to the "Load 8. Utilize the Right or Left arrow pushbutton
Setpoints" menu item. to select the desired setpoint file (*.tpt) .
▲ CAUTION: Setpoint changes are immediately
Load Setpoints acted upon by the control and may cause undesired
Press ENT to begin control operation.
9. Select ENT. The control will briefly
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level display a progress screen and then
2 Access is not active or has been display the setpoints loaded screen.
be displayed. Go to Step 7. Loading file.
Confirm press ENT Please wait........
Cancel press EXIT.

Setpoints loaded.
5. If Level 2 Access is active, then the Any key to continue
Level 2 Access prompt will be displayed.
The new setpoints are now available to
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS the control.
_

6. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then

the following:
Confirm press ENT

Cancel press EXIT.
2–57
Saving Setpoints to a Smart Flash SD Card Saving Data Log to a Smart Flash SD Card
1. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that 1. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that
has adequate space available) into the has adequate space available) into the
control as previously described. control as previously described.
2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot 2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot
Button) pushbutton. The control will go Button) pushbutton. The control will go
directly to the "Memory Card" menu. directly to the "Memory Card" menu.
Memory Card Memory Card

   
3. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as 3. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as
necessary to navigate to the "Save necessary to navigate to the "Save Data
Setpoints" menu item. Log" menu item.
Save Setpoints Save Datalog

Press ENT to begin Press ENT to begin
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control 4. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control
will respond with a "confirmation" will respond with a "confirmation"
message screen. message screen.
Confirm press ENT Press ENT to view

Cancel press EXIT. available data range
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control 5. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control
will prompt for a file name to be entered. will display a range of data.
Enter file name MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS

M2001SP MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS
6. Utilize the arrow pushbuttons to enter 6. Press the ENT pushbutton to enter the
the desired file name. desired data range. The control will
display the following with the cursor
7. Select ENT. The control will briefly
located under the far left digit:
display a progress screen and then
display the setpoints loaded screen.
Enter start time
Saving setpoints MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS C
Please wait........
7. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter
the desired "start" date and time, then
File saved! press ENT. The control will display the
following:
Any key to continue
Enter end time
MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS C
2–58
Operation – 2
8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter Saving Sequence of Events to a Smart Flash
the desired "end" date and time, then SD Card
press ENT. The control will display the 1. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that
following: has adequate space available) into the
control as previously described.
Enter file name
M2001DLG Button) pushbutton. The control will go
directly to the "Memory Card" menu.
the desired "file name", then press ENT. Memory Card
The control will briefly display a progress
screen and then display the file saved  
screen.
Saving data file. necessary to navigate to the "Save seq.
of events" menu item.
Please wait........
Save seq. of events
File saved! Press ENT to begin
Any key to continue
will respond with a "enter file name"
prompt screen with the cursor under the
far left position.
Enter file name

M2001D

the desired file name, then press ENT.
The control will display the following
confirmation screen:
File Saved!
Any key to continue
6. Press any key. The display will return to

the "Save seq. of events" screen.
2–59
Saving Oscillograph Record to a Smart Flash 7. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the
SD Card desired file name, then press ENT. The
1. Verify that the "Oscillograph Record control will display the following:
Triggered" message cycling display is
present on the control. Saving data file
2. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that .......OO
has adequate space available) into the
control as previously described. 8. When the file has been saved to the
Smart Flash SD Card, then the control
3. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot will display the following confirmation
Button) pushbutton. The control will go screen:
File Saved!
Memory Card
Any key to continue
 
9. Press any key, the display will return to
4. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as the "Save oscillograph" screen.
necessary to navigate to the "Save
oscillograph" menu item.
Save oscillograph
Press ENT to begin

will respond with a "Select partition#"
prompt screen.
Select partition:
1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS
6. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbutton

select the desired partition, then press
ENT. The control will respond with a
"Enter file name" prompt screen with the
cursor under the far left position.
Enter file name

M2001OSC
2–60
Operation – 2
Clone Save and Load Clone Save to a Smart Flash SD Card

There are two types of "Clone Save" and "Clone To save Clone files to the Smart Flash SD Card
Load" features included in the control. The two types perform the following:
are distinguished by the file name that is utilized
when initiating a Clone Save or Clone Load. 1. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that
has adequate space available) into the
Clone Save with "DNP Configuration" and
"Multi-user Password" files 2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot
Button) pushbutton. The control will
When the Clone Save feature is initiated, a default display the "Memory Card" menu.
file name that includes the control Serial Number
is displayed (SNxxxxxx). If the user utilizes the
Memory Card
default file name, the control will write the control
Settings File, DNP Configuration File and Multi-user  
Password File (if the DNP and Password files exist
on the control) to the Smart Flash SD Card. 3. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as
necessary to navigate to the "Clone
If the DNP and/or Password files do not exist on the Save" menu item.
cloned control, a message stating "DNP CFG file
does not exist" or "Multi-user Password file doesn't Clone save
exist" will be displayed during the Load sequence.
Press ENT to begin
Clone Load with "DNP Configuration" and 4. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control
"Multi-user Password" files will respond with a "confirmation" screen.
When the Clone Load feature is initiated, the user
must enter/select the clone file name that includes Confirm press ENT
the control Serial Number (SNxxxxxx) that was
Cancel press EXIT.
saved with the associated DNP Configuration and
Multi-user Password files. When the clone file name
5. Press ENT. The control will respond with
is entered, the control will check for DNP and Multi- a "Enter file name" prompt screen with
user Password files named for the serial number the cursor under the far left position.
of the clone file and will write the found files to the
target control.
Enter file name
If the DNP and/or Password files do not exist on the
SN1
cloned control, a message stating "DNP CFG file
does not exist" or "Multi-user Password file doesn't 6. Determine if any found DNP Configuration
exist" will be displayed during the Load sequence. and Multi-user Password files are to be
included in the Clone Save and proceed
Clone Save Without "DNP Configuration" and as follows:
"Multi-user Password" files a. If found DNP Configuration and
When the Clone Save feature is initiated, a default Multi-user Password files are to be
file name that includes the control Serial Number is included in the Clone Save go to
displayed (SNxxxxxx). If the user enters a different Step 10.
file name the control will only write the control b. If found DNP Configuration and
Settings File to the Smart Flash SD Card. Multi-user Password files are not to
be included in the Clone Save go to
Step 7.
7. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the
desired file name, then press ENT. The
control will display the following:
Saving data

SN1
2–61
8. When the file has been saved to the Clone Load from a Smart Flash SD Card
Smart Flash SD Card, then the control To load Clone files to another control which may
will display the following "confirmation" or may not include DNP Configuration and/or
screen: Multi‑user Password files proceed as follows.
File Saved! 1. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that
includes the Clone file) into the control
Any key to continue
as previously described.
9. Press any key. The display will return 2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot
to the "Clone Save" screen. No further Button) pushbutton. The control will go
action is required. directly to the "Memory Card" menu.
10. To include found DNP Configuration
and/or Multi-user Password files in the Memory Card
Clone Save, Do Not change the default  
file name displayed by the control.
11. Press "ENT". The control will display the 3. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as
following sequence of screens: necessary to navigate to the "Clone
Load" menu item.
Saving data
Clone load

XXXXXXXXX
Press ENT to begin
Saving... 4. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level

DNP CFG File

If DNP Configuration file does not exist
on the control the following will be
displayed: Confirm press ENT
Cancel press EXIT.
DNP CFG
5. If Level 2 Access is active, then the
File doesn't exist!

Saving... ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS

M
ulti-user Password _
If Multi-user Password File file does not  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code
exist on the control the following will be the display will automatically advance
displayed: the cursor to the next digit when input
Multi-user Pass File
File doesn't exist!
File Saved! If a valid Level 2 Access code was
Any key to continue a confirmation screen and then display
the following:
12. Press any key, the display will return
to the "Clone Save" screen. No further Confirm press ENT
action is required.
Cancel press EXIT.
2–62
Operation – 2
7. Press ENT. The control will display the Loading DNP Configuration from a Smart
following: Flash SD Card
1. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that
SN000001.cln includes the DNP config file) into the
MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM  control as previously described.
8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select Button) pushbutton. The control will go
the desired Clone File name, then directly to the "Memory Card" menu.
press ENT. The control will display the
following: Memory Card
 
Loading file
Please wait .... 3. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as
necessary to navigate to the "Load DNP
Config" menu item.
Loading...
DNP CFG File
Load DNP config
Press ENT to begin
If DNP Configuration file does not exist
on the control the following will be
displayed: 4. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control
will display the following.
DNP CFG
M2001DNP.xml
File doesn't exist!

MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM 
Loading... 5. Select the desired file name, then press

the ENT pushbutton. The control will
M
ulti-user Password
display the following:
If Multi-user Password File file does not
exist on the control the following will be File loaded!
displayed: Any key to continue
Multi-user Pass Log The new DNP configuration is now

available to the control.
File doesn't exist!

9. When the clone file has been loaded

the control will display the following
"confirmation" screen:
Clone loaded
Any key to continue
10. Press any key. The display will return to

the "Clone load" screen.
2–63
Saving DNP Configuration to a Smart Flash Saving Metering Data to a Smart Flash SD Card
SD Card 1. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that
1. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that has adequate space available) into the
has adequate space available) into the control as previously described.
2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot Button) pushbutton. The control will go
Button) pushbutton. The control will go directly to the "Memory Card" menu.
Memory Card
Memory Card  
 
3. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as necessary to navigate to the "Save
necessary to navigate to the "Save DNP Metering Data" menu item.
Config" menu item.
Save Metering Data
Save DNP config Press ENT to begin
Press ENT to begin
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will display the following:
will display the following:

Enter file name
Enter file name M2001MT
M2001DNP
5. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter desired file name, then press the ENT
the desired file name, then press the pushbutton. The control will save the
ENT pushbutton. The control will save Metering Data in a *.csv file and respond
the DNP config file and respond with a with the following sequence of screens:
"confirmation message" screen.
Saving CSV...
File saved! M2001MT
Any key to continue
Saving Done...
M2001MT
Save Metering Data

Press ENT to begin
2–64
Operation – 2
Firmware Update from Smart Flash SD Card After the setpoints and configuration
1. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that have been successfully restored after
contains the firmware update file) into rebooting, the control will display the
the control as previously described. following:
2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot Update Successful
Button) pushbutton. The control will go
directly to the "Memory Card" menu. Any Key to continue
Memory Card At this point the control is fully operational

by pressing any key.
 
3. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as 7. Press any key. The control will display
necessary to navigate to the "Firmware the following sequence of screens:
Update" menu item.
User Line 1
Firmware Update User Line 2
Press ENT to begin
D-0214VXX.XX.XX
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. The Level 2
Access prompt will be displayed. Serial Number XXXX

Date & Time
_
XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX
the display will automatically advance Factory Options
is momentarily paused. XXXXX XXXXX
5. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then User Line 1

press the ENT pushbutton. The control User Line 2
will begin the firmware update.
If restoring of setpoints and configuration
Updating From SDCARD fail, then the control will display the
... following:
6. When the firmware update is complete Failed to restore!

the control will display a "confirmation Any key to continue
message" screen.
At this point the control will be operating
Update Complete with default initialized setpoints and
Rebooting... configuration data.
If this condition exists, the user should
reload the correct file settings and
contact Beckwith Electric Customer
Service.
2–65
Smart Flash SD Card User Access Code 6. Enter the desired User Access Code,
A user Access Code Level 1 or 2 can be written to then select "Write". TapTalk will display a
a Smart Flash SD Card. The user Access Code will "Write Successfully" confirmation screen
be read by the control when the SD Card is inserted (Figure 2-47).
into the Smart Flash Card slot on the front of the
control. As long as the SD Card is inserted, the
control will not prompt for the Level Access Code
contained on the SD Card.
Writing a user Access Code to a Smart Flash SD
Card.
1. Start the TapTalk® Communications
Software on the PC.
2. Open a TapTalk "File" or connect to Figure 2-47 SD Card Access Code Written
M‑2001D control. Successfully Confirmation Screen
3. Verify that the target Smart Flash Card
is inserted in the PC. 7. Select "OK", then select "Verify". TapTalk
will display the user Access Code that
4. Select Utility/SD Card Access Code. was written to the SD Card (Figure 2-48).
TapTalk will display the SD Card dialog
Figure 2-48 SD Card User Access Code

Verification Screen
8. Select OK. The SD Card now contains

Figure 2-46 SD Card Dialog Screen the user Access Code and will be read
each time the SD Card is inserted into
the control.
5. From the Operation section of the dialog
screen select the drive that the SD Card
represents in the drop down menu.
2–66
Operation – 2
Load IEC 61850 Configuration from a Smart Save IEC 61850 Configuration to a Smart Flash
Flash SD Card SD Card
1. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that 1. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that
contains the IEC 61850 Configuration has adequate space available) into the
file) into the control as previously control as previously described.
described.
2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot Button) pushbutton. The control will go
Button) pushbutton. The control will go directly to the "Memory Card" menu.
Memory Card
Memory Card  
 
4. Press the Down pushbutton arrow as necessary to navigate to the "Save IEC
necessary to navigate to the "Load IEC Config" menu item.
Config" menu item.
Save IEC Config
Load IEC config Press ENT to begin
Press ENT to begin
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. The control will display the following:
will display the following:
Enter file name

file name.cid M2001
xx/xx/xxxx
xx:xx
6. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select desired file name, then press the ENT
the desired file name, then press the pushbutton. The control will save the IEC
ENT pushbutton. The control will load Configuration in a *.cid file and respond
the IEC config file and respond with a with the following sequence of screens:
"confirmation message" screen.
Saving IEC Config
Loaded Successfully Please wait...
Any key to continue
File Saved
Any key to continue
2–67
Wakeup Screen Parameter Save to a Smart UTILITY/CALIBRATION

Flash SD Card Accessing Utility/Calibration Screens (HMI)
The Wakeup Screen Parameter Save feature THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION REGARDING
provides the user with the capability to save all CHANGING CALIBRATION PARAMETERS IS
Wakeup Screen Parameters to the Smart Flash INTENDED FOR AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL
SD Card. ONLY. CHANGES TO THESE PARAMETERS
1. Insert the Smart Flash SD Card (that CAN RESULT IN PHYSICAL DAMAGE TO THE
has adequate space available) into the CONTROL AND THE SYSTEM/COMPONENT
control as previously described. THAT IT IS APPLIED TO.
2. Press the Exit (Wake Hot Button) The Utility/Calibration HMI screens provide access
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The to calibration parameters that can be reset by the
menu will advance to "Save Wake Data user as necessary to restore calibration settings
to SD". to those that were calculated at the factory. Also
included are key parameters that are indication only.
SAVE WAKE DATA to SD

Press ENT to begin
The following calibration parameters can be
accessed and set by the user:
3. Press ENT. The control will respond with • Voltage Offset
a "Enter file name" prompt screen with
the cursor under the far left position. • Volt Cal Coefficient
• Volt RMS Coefficient
Enter file name • Curr Cal Coefficient

SN1 • I Sin Coefficient
4. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the • I Cos Coefficient
desired file name, then press ENT. The • Mtr Cal. Coefficient
control will display the following: • Mtr Sin Coefficient
Saving data • Mtr Cos Coefficient
SN1 • Mtr RMS Coefficient
• Circ Cal Coefficient
5. When the file has been saved to the • Circ Sin Coefficient
Smart Flash SD Card, the control will
return to the Wakeup Screens. • Circ Cos Coefficient
Indication only parameters available from the

Calibration/Test HMI menus:
• Load Voltage
• Control Load I
• Power Factor
• Motor Current
• X1 Duration
These instructions describe making a change to

the "Volt Cal Coefficient" calibration parameter.
The other calibration parameters are changed in
the same manner.
2–68
Operation – 2
▲ CAUTION: Incorrect calibration parameter SOURCE VOLTAGE

settings can result in damage to the control. Changing Source Voltage Input
This feature allows the user to manually switch the
1. Press the ENT (UTIL Hot Button)
sensing voltage source for diagnostic procedures.
menu will advance to "UTILITIES". To manually switch the Source Voltage input
proceed as follows:
UTILITIES
MNTR
COMM pushbutton to awaken the unit. The
menu will advance to "UTILITIES".
UTILITIES
Calibration/Test MNTR
COMM
  2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
as necessary to navigate to the "Volt
Calibration/Test
Cal Coefficient" calibration parameter
screen.  
Volt Cal Coefficient 3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as

necessary to navigate to the "Change
32767 X Src Input" screen.
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following
Change Src Input
will be displayed.
Press ENTER.
4. To toggle between voltage source inputs
_ press the ENT pushbutton. The following
will be displayed depending on the
 NOTE: When entering the Level 3 Access code source that is selected:
Change Src Input
Calculated XXX.X V
press the ENT pushbutton. Change Src Input
If a valid Level 3 Access code was Measured XXX.X V
a confirmation screen, then a "C". If not,
reenter a valid code.
6. At the cursor, input the desired Voltage
Calibration Coefficient value utilizing the
arrow pushbuttons, then press the ENT
pushbutton. The display will return to the
"Voltage Calibration Coefficient" screen.
Volt Cal Coefficient

32767 X
7. Remove power to the control, then

reapply power to the control.
2–69
WATCHDOG AND POWER RESETS CHECKSUM ERROR

Watchdog Resets and Power Resets  NOTE: When a Checksum ERROR occurs the
This feature provides the user with the ability to voltage control element of the control is
determine the number of processor resets that NOT available.
have occurred and also the number of power cycles
the control has experienced. Both counters can be In the event a "checksum error" occurs, then the
reset by the user. control will initiate a cycling "Checksum Error"
display. In this case the "Clear reset counters" menu
In the event that a "checksum error" occurs this
item in the Utilities/Configuration/Test menu display
menu will change to "Init Setpoints".
will change to "Init setpoints" function. To reinitialize
To clear the Watchdog reset and Power Cycle the control setpoints perform the following:
counters proceed as follows:
1. Press the ENT (UTIL Hot Button) pushbutton to awaken the unit. The
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu will advance to "UTILITIES".
menu will advance to "UTILITIES".
UTILITIES
UTILITIES MNTR
COMM
MNTR
COMM
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. The unit will display the following:
Calibration/Test
Calibration/Test  
 
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as as necessary to navigate to the "Init
necessary to navigate to the "Clear reset setpoints" screen.
counters" screen.
Init setpoints
Clear reset counters Press ENT to begin
Press ENT to begin
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following 2 Access is not active or has been
will be displayed: previously input, then the following will
Confirm press ENTER
Init setpoints
Cancel press EXIT.
Press ENT to begin
5. Press ENT. The control will display a
"Counters Reset" screen, 5. If Level 2 Access is active, then the

Counters Reset
_
then return to the following:
Clear reset counters

Press ENT to begin
2–70
Operation – 2
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code DATALOG FILES

the display will automatically advance Converting Datalog Files to "*.CSV" Format
is momentarily paused. This utility converts "*.CFG" datalog files to "*.CSV"
files for viewing in Excel. Selecting this utility from
the TapTalk® utility drop down menu opens an
6. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then "Open" file dialog screen. Selecting the target
press the ENT pushbutton. CFG file and then selecting "Open" converts the
If a valid Level 2 Access code was file and saves the resulting CSV file in the target
entered, then the display will briefly flash file directory.
the following: ABOUT SCREENS
Accessing The About Screens (HMI)
Init setpoints
The About screens provide the user with unit serial
Press ENT to begin number and firmware version. To access the About
screens from the control front panel proceed as
If not, re-enter a valid code. follows:
7. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following pushbutton to awaken the unit. The
will be displayed: menu will advance to "UTILITIES".
Confirm press ENT UTILITIES

Cancel press EXIT. MNTR
COMM
8. Press ENT. The control will display the 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
following sequence of screen displays: The unit will display the following:
Initializing.... Calibration/Test
 
Initialization Done 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton.

The menu will advance to About.
About
Init Setpoints  
Press ENT to begin
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as
necessary to navigate to the desired
screen.
2–71
REMOTE CONTROL (TapTalk) Remote Voltage Reduction

▲ CAUTION: This feature should be used with Off – No Voltage Reduction command is sent when
extreme caution. Apply is selected.
The Remote Control menu item located in the Step #1 – Initiates first step voltage reduction
Utility drop down menu displays the applicable command for addressed control.
Remote Control screen (Figure 2-49 or 2-50).
Remote Control allows the user to: Step #2 – Initiates second step voltage reduction
command for addressed control.
• Remotely raise or lower one tap position.
Step #3 – Initiates third step voltage reduction
• Apply Voltage Reduction Step 1 or 2 or 3. command for addressed control.
• When the Auto/Manual Switch Type is set
to either "Toggle" or "NONE" the Block Block Auto Control via Communication
Auto Control via Communication (Comm
Block) setting is available. Block – Blocks automatic operation of the
addressed control.
to "SCAMP" the SCAMP Auto/Manual Unblock – Initiates automatic operation of the
Control setting is available. addressed control.
Remote Tap Control SCAMP Control

■ NOTE: If the unit is supplied with DC Power The SCAMP Control feature (Figure 2-50) allows the
Backup, then all automatic Raise or user to remotely observe the status of the Adapter
Lower operations are blocked when the Panel SCAMP pushbutton (when equipped). This
input voltage decreases to less than feature also allows the user to change the state
85.0 Vdc. Remote initiated Raise or of the Local SCAMP pushbutton on the Adapter
Lower operations will still be initiated if Panel/Control.
Motor Power is available.
Remote Control/Miscellaneous
▲ CAUTION: The control will not accept a new Close – Returns to the TapTalk® main screen.
command unless the previous command is
completed.
Lower 1 Tap – Initiates remote Lower in 1 tap
increments. Limited by tap Block Lower setpoint
and tap position limit settings.
▲ CAUTION: If an appropriate pulse width setting
is not input, then a misoperation of the tapchanger
may occur when a SCADA Manual Raise or Lower
is initiated.
Raise 1 Tap – Initiates remote Raise in 1 tap
increments. Limited by tap Block Raise setpoint and
tap position limit settings.
2–72
Operation – 2
Figure 2-49 Remote Control Screen for Toggle or None Auto/Manual Switch Type
Figure 2-50 Remote Control Screen for SCAMP Auto/Manual Switch Type
2–73
Low Current Alarm/Block  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code,
Clearing Low Current Alarm/Block From The the display will automatically advance
HMI the cursor to the next digit when input
To clear the Low Current Alarm/Block from the HMI,
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) press the ENT pushbutton.
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
will advance to "CONFIGURATION". If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
CONFIGURATION confirmation screen and then display
the following:
COMM
SETP
Confirm press ENTER
The unit will display the following: Cancel press EXIT.
Tapchanger Type If not, re-enter a valid code.

 
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, sequence of screens will be displayed:
as necessary, until "Programmable
Alarm" is displayed. Confirm press ENTER
Cleared
Programmable Alarm
 
Clr Low Current Blk
4. Press the Down arrow, as necessary, Ready Press ENTER
until the following will be displayed.
Clr Low Current Blk

Ready Press ENTER

Confirm press ENTER

Cancel press EXIT.


_
2–74
Operation – 2
Clearing Low Current Alarm/Block From

TapTalk
To clear the Low Current Alarm/Block from TapTalk®,
1. S e l e c t Setup/Alarms from the
TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
Programmable Alarm dialog screen
(Figure 2-51).
2. From the Low Current Block Reset
section of the dialog screen select Reset.
Figure 2-51 Programmable Alarms Dialog Screen
2–75
Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block Resetting Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block

When Motor Seal-in is selected in the control the From The HMI
Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block feature and To reset the Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm from the
the input to the Abnormal Tap Position alarm are HMI, perform the following:
enabled by default. The user may choose to disable
the Motor Seal-in Block feature. However, the input 1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button)
to the Abnormal Tap Position alarm and the Motor
Seal-in Failure Alarm is always enabled when
Motor Seal-in is selected. The feature includes the
following: CONFIGURATION
COMM
SETP
Abnormal Tap Position Alarm Input - The Motor
Seal-in Failure Block feature provides an input to 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
the "Abnormal Tap Position" alarm. This input is The unit will display the following:
actuated on the first occurrence of a tapchange
coincident with no motor seal-in current detected Tapchanger Type
for 15 seconds.
 
Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm - The Motor Seal-in
Failure Alarm is actuated on the second occurrence 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton,
(either direction) of a tapchange coincident with no as necessary, until "Programmable
motor seal-in current detected for 15 seconds. This Alarm" is displayed.
alarm can be reset by the user from the Human
Machine Interface (HMI), from the TapTalk® "Alarms" Programmable Alarm
dialog screen or via SCADA. The alarm is also reset  
when a successful tapchange operation occurs
(motor seal-in current detected) in either direction. 4. Press the Down arrow, as necessary,
Alarm Active
MTR SEAL-IN FAILURE Clear Seal in Alarm
Ready Press ENTER
Motor Seal-in Failure Block - The Motor Seal-in
Failure Block is actuated on the second occurrence 5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
of a tapchange coincident with no motor seal‑in 2 Access is not active or has been
current detected for 15 seconds in either direction. previously input, the following will be
The block will be in effect in the direction that displayed. Go to Step 8.
produced the second Motor Seal-in Failure
occurrence. If a Motor Seal-in Failure is detected in Confirm press ENTER
the opposite direction, then operation will be blocked
Cancel press EXIT.
in that direction also.
This Block can be reset by the user from the HMI, 6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
from the TapTalk "Alarms" dialog screen or via Access prompt will be displayed.
SCADA. The block is also reset when a successful
tapchange operation occurs (motor seal-in current ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS
is detected) in the opposite direction. _
The internal accumulator that counts the occurrences
of failed tapchanges is stored in volatile memory and
is set to zero when a loss of power occurs and the
unit is not equipped with a backup power supply.
This is considered normal operation of the feature.
2–76
Operation – 2
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code, Resetting Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block
the display will automatically advance From TapTalk
the cursor to the next digit when input To reset the Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm from
is momentarily paused. TapTalk®, perform the following:
7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then 1. S e l e c t Setup/Alarms from the
press the ENT pushbutton. TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
If a valid Level 2 Access Code was Programmable Alarm dialog screen
entered, the display will briefly flash a (Figure 2-51).
confirmation screen and then display 2. From the Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm
the following: reset section of the dialog screen select
Reset.
Confirm press ENTER
Cancel press EXIT.

sequence of screens will be displayed:
Confirm press ENTER

Cleared
Clear Seal in Alarm

Ready Press ENTER
2–77
Master/Follower Lockout Alarm  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code,
Clearing Master/Follower Lockout Alarm From the display will automatically advance
The HMI the cursor to the next digit when input
To clear the Master/Follower Lockout Alarm from
the HMI, perform the following: 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button)
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
will advance to "CONFIGURATION". entered, the display will briefly flash a
confirmation screen and then display
CONFIGURATION the following:
SETP
COMM
Confirm press ENTER
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. Cancel press EXIT.
Tapchanger Type
  8. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following
as necessary, until "Paralleling" is Confirm press ENTER
displayed.
Cleared
Paralleling
  Clear Lockout Alarm
Ready press ENTER
4. Press the Down arrow, as necessary,
Clear Lockout Alarm

Ready Press ENTER

Confirm press ENTER

Cancel press EXIT.


_
2–78
Operation – 2
Clearing Master/Follower Lockout Alarm 2. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code,

From TapTalk then select OK. TapTalk will display
To clear the Master/Follower Lockout Alarm from the Access Granted Successfully
TapTalk®, perform the following: confirmation screen (Figure 2-53).
1. S e l e c t U t i l i t y / M a s t e r / F o l l ow e r
Configuration from the TapTalk toolbar.
TapTalk will display the Access Level
Code dialog screen (Figure 2-52).
Figure 2-53 Access Granted Successfully

Confirmation Screen
Figure 2-52 Access Level Code Dialog Screen
3. Select OK. TapTalk will display the
Master/Follower Configuration Tool
dialog screen.
4. Select the desired control to be reset,
then select "Alarm Reset" to reset the
Master/Follower Lockout Alarm.
 NOTE: The Master/Follower Lockout Alarm can
also be reset from the Programmable
Alarm dialog screen.
Figure 2-54 Master/Follower Configuration Tool Dialog Screen
2–79
Send/Receive IEC 61850 Configuration File To Receive a Configuration file proceed as follows:

To Send a Configuration file proceed as follows: 1. Start the TapTalk Communications
1. Start the TapTalk® Communications Software on the PC.
Software on the PC. 2. Connect to the M-2001D control.
2. Connect to the M-2001D control. 3. Select Utility/IEC61850/Configuration
3. Select Utility/IEC61850/Configuration File/Receive. TapTalk will display the
File/Send. TapTalk will display the "Save As" dialog screen with a default
" Au t h e n t i c a t i o n Key G e n e ra t e d file extension of "*.cid".
Successfully" confirmation screen 4. Name the Configuration file, then
(Figure 3-79). select "Save". TapTalk will display the
4. Select OK. TapTalk will display the "Transferring" status screen (Figure
"Open" dialog screen with a default file 2-56) while the Configuration file is
extension of "*.cid". transferred.
5. Select the desired Configuration file,
then select "Open". TapTalk will display
the "Send" status screen (Figure 3-81)
while the Configuration file is sent.
6. When the file has been successfully sent
to the control, TapTalk will display the
File Uploaded Successfully confirmation
Figure 2-56 IEC Configuration File
Transferring Status Screen
5. When the file has been successfully

downloaded from the control, TapTalk
will display the File Downloaded
Successfully confirmation screen
(Figure 2-57).
Figure 2-55 IEC Configuration File Uploaded

Figure 2-57 IEC Configuration File

Downloaded Successfully Confirmation Screen
2–80
TapTalk – 3
3
TapTalk® S‑2001D
Communications Software
3.0 Availability................................................................................ 3–2
3.1 Hardware Requirements.......................................................... 3–2
3.2 Installing TapTalk...................................................................... 3–2
3.3 Communications using a Direct USB Connection.................... 3–3
3.4 RS-485 Communications......................................................... 3–4
3.5 Fiber Optic Communications.................................................... 3–5
3.6 Ethernet Communications........................................................ 3–6
3.7 Bluetooth Communications...................................................... 3–7
3.7 Communications with Multiple Controls................................... 3–8
3.8 Cautions................................................................................... 3–8
3.9 Overview of Operation........................................................... 3–11
3.10 TapPlot® Analysis Software.................................................... 3–74
This chapter describes the TapTalk S-2001D

Communications Software which provides the
user with the capability to interrogate Beckwith
Electric Digital Tapchanger Controls using a
Windows™ based personal computer. Firmware
version is displayed when power is applied to the
control or through the display panel. While the
software has been carefully designed for easy use
and installation, we suggest that first‑time users
acquaint themselves with its operation prior to use
by carefully reading this chapter.
3–1
3.0 Availability 3.2 Installing TapTalk
Ta p Ta l k ® S - 2 0 0 1 D C o m m u n i c a t i o n s The TapTalk S-2001D installation program has

Software is available on CD‑ROM or from been written to overwrite previous versions of
www.beckwithelectric.com. Also included on the TapTalk. However, considering variations in installed
CD‑ROM is the companion Instruction Book in software, hardware and operating systems, if you
*.pdf format. are upgrading from a previous version of TapTalk,
it is recommended that any older versions of the
TapTalk program be removed before installing the
3.1 Hardware Requirements new TapTalk.
TapTalk will run on any PC that provides at least TapTalk runs with the Windows 2000, Windows XP,
the following: Windows Vista or Windows 7 operating system.
Familiarity with Windows is important in using

• Windows 2000®, Windows XP®, Windows TapTalk, as the conventions defined in the Windows
Vista® or Windows 7® documentation are strictly followed.

• One CD‑ROM drive TapTalk will be installed on the host PC’s hard

• One USB (serial) port disk. While it does not require special installation
procedures, an installation utility has been provided
Hardware Required for Direct USB (Serial) to make the process easier.
Communication To install TapTalk:
To use TapTalk to communicate with a Beckwith
Electric Digital Tapchanger Control using a direct pCAUTION: The USB cable must be disconnected
USB (serial) connection, a USB cable is required. from the M-2001D control before installing TapTalk.
The M‑2001D Digital Tapchanger Control includes a 1. Insert the TapTalk software into your
fiber optic port and RS‑485 port. See Section 7.1, CD‑ROM drive.
External Connections, for detailed information 2. Select Run from the Start Menu.
regarding the use of these connections.
3. In the Run dialog box, initiate software
installation by typing D:\Setup.exe
(or other drive designator:\Setup.exe,
depending on the letter designation for
the CD‑ROM drive).
4. The Installation Wizard will prompt the
user through the installation process.
After installation, the TapTalk program
icon (located in the Becoware folder) can
be placed on the desktop (Figure 3-1).
Starting TapTalk
1. Select the TapTalk program-item icon
from the Becoware group in the Program
Manager, or select TapTalk from the
program list using the Start Menu. The
TapTalk Main Screen will be displayed.
Figure 3-1 TapTalk S-2001D

Program-Item Icon
3–2
TapTalk – 3
4. Start the TapTalk program. TapTalk will

3.3 Communications Using Direct display the TapTalk Main dialog screen.
USB Connection
5. Select Connect/USB from the Connect
To use TapTalk® to interrogate, set, or monitor the drop-down menu.
M‑2001D Digital Tapchanger Control using a direct
USB connection, the appropriate driver must be
loaded. The driver that is required to be resident in
the "windows\inf" folder on the host PC is "beco_
usb.inf." This driver is automatically loaded by the
TapTalk installation software.
When the control is connected to the PC utilizing
a USB cable, Windows will enumerate the control
as a serial com device and will assign an unused
COM Port to the control.
Direct Communication Using USB (Serial) TapTalk will display the USB Port dialog
Connection screen (Figure 3-2).
1. Ensure the following conditions exist:
• TapTalk is installed on the host
computer
• The control is energized
2. Plug the USB cable into the host PC USB

port.
3. Plug the USB cable into the USB port
on the control. The host PC will:
Figure 3-2 USB Port Connection Dialog Screen
a. Interrogate the control to determine
the type of hardware device it is. 6. Ensure that the correct COM port is
 NOTE: If the host PC cannot identify the proper displayed for the selected USB device.
driver for the M‑2001D, the driver  NOTE: TapTalk will automatically choose the
can be found on the TapTalk software port for the control you just connected
installation disk. to.
b. Load any required drivers. 7. Enter "Access Level Code" and check
c. Assign the next available COM port "Save" if desired.
to the USB connection. Default Values:
Level 1 000000 (Disabled)
Level 2 222222
8. Select Connect. TapTalk will attempt to

connect to the target control.
3–3
9. If TapTalk® returns a Failed to Connect

Error screen (Figure 3-3), then repeat 3.4 RS-485 Communications
Steps 6,7 and 8.
To use TapTalk to interrogate, set, or monitor
the M‑2001D Digital Tapchanger Control using a
RS-485 connection the following conditions must
be met:
• The control is physically connected to
a RS-485 network consistent with the
hardware and connection requirements
of Section 7.1, External Connections.
Figure 3-3 Failed to Connect Error Screen • TapTalk software communication
parameters and device parameters
10. If Level 1 Access is not active or the must match the control’s default RS-485
proper Level 1 or Level 2 access code settings and the selected/default device
was entered, then TapTalk will briefly parameters.
display a "Successfully Connected Level
1/Level 2" confirmation screen, then Elements of the control’s RS-485 Port communication
display the connected version of the
parameters include the following (default settings):
TapTalk Main Screen (Figure 3-13) with
the appropriate Access Level. • Baud Rate (9600 bps)
11. If Level 1 Access is active and an invalid • Sync Time (2 ms)
access code was entered, then TapTalk
• Parity (None)
will display a "Failed to complete Access
Code Verification" error message (Figure • Stop Bits (1)
3-4).
Default device parameters that are at the default
settings or have been configured locally at the
control include (default settings):
• Device (Comm) Address (1)
• Protocol (DNP)
• Echo Cancel (fiber optic) (None)
Figure 3-4 Failed to complete Access Code
Verification Error Screen
12. Select OK. TapTalk will briefly display

the "Successfully Connected Read-Only
Access" screen (Figure 3-5) and then
Read-Only permission.
Figure 3-5 Successfully Connected Read Only

Access Screen
3–4
TapTalk – 3
Communication Using RS-485 Connection

3.5 Fiber Optic Communications
• The control is physically connected The fiber optic interface is connected to the rear COM
to the RS-485 network Port of the device. It can be enabled through the front
• TapTalk® is installed on the host panel under the Comm setting menu. When fiber
computer optic is selected, the RS-485 is disabled. The fiber
optic baud rate is selectable from 300 to 115200 bps.
The echoing of the received data is supported by the
2. Start the TapTalk program. TapTalk will hardware. Switch (located on the side of the control
display the TapTalk Main dialog screen. to the right of the TX fiber transmitter connection as
viewed from the rear of the control) opened, will
3. Select Connect/Com Port from the
disable the echoing feature (echo off). Echo ON
Connect drop-down menu.
is primarily used if the control is in a daisy chain
network. Disabling the echo transmission is usually
done when there is peer to peer communication. If
the client software supports echo canceling, as is the
case for TapTalk, then there is no need to disable
echo transmission. In this case echo cancel should be
enabled on the client software. Physical specification:
• Fiber type: Multi mode
• Tested with fiber size 62.5/125 or 200 HCS™
• 820 nm nominal wavelength
TapTalk will display the Serial Port dialog
screen (Figure 3-14). To use TapTalk to interrogate, set, or monitor the
M‑2001D Digital Tapchanger Control using a Fiber
4. Ensure that the correct COM port is Optic connection the following conditions must be met:
displayed.
5. Ensure that both the Device and Comm • The control is physically connected to a
settings are consistent with the control’s Fiber Optic network consistent with the
default values. hardware and connection requirements
of Section 7.1, External Connections.
connect to the target control. • TapTalk software communication
parameters and device parameters must
7. If TapTalk returns a Failed to Connect match the control’s default Fiber Optic
Error screen (Figure 3-3), then repeat settings and the selected/default device
Steps 4, 5 and 6. parameters.
8. If Level 1 Access is not active or the
proper Level 1 or Level 2 access code Elements of the control’s Fiber Optic Port
was entered, then TapTalk will briefly communication parameters include the following
display a "Successfully Connected Level (default settings):
1/Level 2" confirmation screen, then
display the connected version of the • Baud Rate (115200 bps)
TapTalk Main Screen (Figure 3-13) with • Sync Time (2 ms)
the appropriate Access Level.
• Parity (None)
9. If Level 1 Access is active and an invalid • Stop Bits (1)
Default device parameters that are at the default
Code Verification" error message (Figure
settings or have been configured locally at the
3-4). Select OK. TapTalk will briefly
display the "Successfully Connected control include (default settings):
Read-Only Access" screen (Figure 3-5) • Device (Comm) Address (1)
and then display the connected version
of the TapTalk Main Screen (Figure 3-13) • Protocol (MODBUS®)
with Read-Only permission. • Echo Cancel (fiber optic) (None)
3–5
Communication Using Fiber Optic Connection

3.6 Ethernet Communications
• The control is physically connected The optional Ethernet Port can be purchased as
to the Fiber Optic network either a RJ-45 (10/100 Base-T) interface or Fiber
• TapTalk® is installed on the host Optic through ST or SC connectors (100 Base-Fx)
computer for Ethernet communication to the M‑2001D. The
port supports up to 17 concurrent connections.
• The control is energized The maximum number of allowed DNP connections
2. Start the TapTalk program. TapTalk will is five. The maximum number of MODBUS ®
display the TapTalk Main dialog screen. connections is eight. When IEC 61850 is purchased,
the maximum number of IEC 61850 connections
3. Select Connect/Com Port from the is four. The port supports DHCP protocol and
Connect drop-down menu. also allows manual configuration of the Ethernet
port. MODBUS protocol "Port Number" and DNP
Protocol "Port Number" are required for manual
configuration.
 NOTE: TapTalk can be used through the
Ethernet port and may be considered
a MODBUS connection for the purpose
of determining how many concurrent
connections are allowed.
 NOTE: Using Fiber Ethernet requires the Auto

Negotiate setting in the control be set to
Disable to operate correctly.
TapTalk will display the Serial Port dialog
screen (Figure 3-14). Ethernet Fiber Optic Physical Specification:
4. Ensure that the correct COM port is • Fiber type: Multi mode
displayed.
• Tested with Fiber size 62.5/125 or
5. Ensure that both the Device and Comm 200 HCS™
settings are consistent with the control’s
default values. • 1300 nm nominal wavelength

connect to the target control. Communication Using Ethernet Connection
7. If TapTalk returns a Failed to Connect
Error screen (Figure 3-3), then repeat • The control is physically connected
Steps 4, 5 and 6. to the Ethernet network
8. If Level 1 Access is not active or the • TapTalk is installed on the host
proper Level 1 or Level 2 access code computer
was entered, then TapTalk will briefly • The control is energized
1/Level 2" confirmation screen, then 2. Start the TapTalk program. TapTalk will
display the connected version of the display the TapTalk Main dialog screen.
3. Select Connect/ TCP/IP from the
the appropriate Access Level.
Connect drop-down menu. TapTalk will
9. If Level 1 Access is active and an invalid display the TCP/IP Connection Dialog
access code was entered, then TapTalk Screen (Figure 3-16).
4. Enter the Device and TCP/IP parameters
Code Verification" error message (Figure
for the target control or select from the
3-4). Select OK. TapTalk will briefly
Address Book.
display the "Successfully Connected
Read-Only Access" screen (Figure 3-5) 5. Select Connect. TapTalk will attempt to
and then display the connected version connect to the target control.
of the TapTalk Main Screen (Figure 3-13)
with Read-Only permission.
3–6
TapTalk – 3

Error screen (Figure 3-3), then repeat 3.7 Bluetooth Communications
Steps 4 and 5.
Optional Bluetooth
proper Level 1 or Level 2 access code The Bluetooth® option enables wireless access to
was entered, then TapTalk will briefly the M-2001D. Utilizing the Bluetooth wireless feature
display a "Successfully Connected Level the user is able to configure the control, read status
1/Level 2" confirmation screen, then and metering values, as well as change setpoints.
The Beckwith factory default values for device
the appropriate Access Level. information are:
8. If Level 1 Access is active and an invalid • Friendly Name – M2001D-Serial Number

access code was entered, then TapTalk • Mode of Device – Mode0 (discoverable)
Code Verification" error message (Figure • Internal operation status – Standby
3-4). Select OK. TapTalk will briefly • Authentication: None
display the "Successfully Connected • Encryption: None
Read-Only Access" screen (Figure 3-5)
and then display the connected version
of the TapTalk Main Screen (Figure 3-13) Communication Using Bluetooth Connection
with Read-Only permission. 1. Ensure the following conditions exist:
If the control is to be connected to a network that • The Bluetooth Factory Option is

enabled on the control
does not support DHCP protocol, then the following
information must be obtained from the Network • The Bluetooth Status on the control
Administrator, to be entered locally at the control is "Present" and "Connectable"
or remotely utilizing TapTalk:
• TapTalk is installed on the host
• IP Address computer
• Net Mask 2. Start the TapTalk program. TapTalk will
• Gateway (may be necessary) display the TapTalk Main dialog screen.
3. Select Connect/Bluetooth from the
Also, if the network MODBUS® Port address is not Connect drop-down menu. TapTalk will
"502" or the DNP Port address is not "20000", then display the Bluetooth Connection Dialog
the MODBUS and DNP Port settings must be set. Screen (Figure 3-17).
COM 1, RS-485, (2Wire), 4. Enter the Bluetooth device parameters
Fiber Optic (ST) or (V-pin) Cable for the target control or select from the
Address Book.
Beckwith
M-2001D
connect to the target control.
Digital
Tapchanger The connection time to the control will
Control
depend on the distance between the
USB Cable
control and the client device and also on
the amount of RF interference present.
Error screen (Figure 3-3), then repeat
To Transformer/Regulator Steps 4 and 5.
proper Level 1 or Level 2 access code
was entered, then TapTalk will briefly
Printer
1/Level 2" confirmation screen, then
TapTalk® Communications Software display the connected version of the
Figure 3-6 Direct Connection the appropriate Access Level.
3–7
8. If Level 1 Access is active and an invalid

access code was entered, then TapTalk 3.9 Cautions
Code Verification" error message (Figure Control and TapTalk Compatibility
3-4). Select OK. TapTalk will briefly Every attempt has been made to maintain
display the "Successfully Connected compatibility with previous control software versions.
Read-Only Access" screen (Figure 3-5) In some cases (most notably, with older controls),
and then display the connected version compatibility cannot be maintained. However,
of the TapTalk Main Screen (Figure 3-13) TapTalk should work correctly with more than one
with Read-Only permission. version of the M‑2001D Series Digital Tapchanger
Controls on a single bus, provided that the controls
are all set to use the same protocol. If there is any
3.8 Communications with Multiple question about compatibility, contact the factory.
Controls
Control Priority
 CAUTION: Each control connected to either a
direct or modem connection configuration must Control conflicts will not occur as local commands
have a unique communications address. If two or initiated from the front panel receive priority
more controls share the same address, corrupted recognition.
communication will result.
Time and Date Stamping
The remote addressing capability of TapTalk® and Time and date stamping of events is only as useful
the M‑2001D Digital Tapchanger Control allows as the validity of the control’s internal clock. Under
multiple controls to share a direct or network the Configuration/System Clock menu, the Set
connection. A fiber optic loop network (see Figure Control Date/Time command allows you to manually
3-7, Fiber Optic Connection Loop), RS‑485 tree set the control’s clock. For reference, the computer’s
configuration (see Figure 3-8, RS‑485 Connection clock is also displayed.
Tree) or Ethernet Network (see Figure 3-9, Optional
Ethernet Network Connection) may also be used.
A control address of zero is a "wild card" that will
illicit a response from all controls on a shared
connection and result in corrupted communication.
With these arrangements, any control can be
selected from within TapTalk by specifying it’s
unique communications address, ranging from
1 to 200. The communications address must have
previously been set from the control’s front panel.
3–8
TapTalk – 3
Connect to computer

Straight DB25 TapTalk® Communications Software
Connection to Computer
RS-232 COM Port
ST Multi-mode 62/125 Optical Fiber
Dymec Model No. 5843 TX

DTE=On
Repeat=Off RX
Figure 3-7 Fiber Optic Connection Loop
Connect to computer

Straight DB9 Connection TapTalk® Communications Software
to Computer RS-232
COM Port
120
Model No. 485 LP9TB A

B & B Electronics
RS-232/RS-485 B
Figure 3-8 RS‑485 Connection Tree
3–9

TapTalk ® Communications Software
Network
CAT 5 Twisted Pair RJ-45
Hub or
Fiber Optic Through
ST Connectors
Figure 3-9 Optional Ethernet Network Connection
Cellular Modem with TCP/IP or

UDP capabilites using
standards-based
EDGE, GPRS or CDMA
technologies
RS232 Link
RS232 Link
RS232 Link
Figure 3-10 Cellular Modem Network
3–10
TapTalk – 3
3.10 Overview of Operation
The TapTalk® S-2001D Communications Software This section provides a general description of
can be used to successfully communicate settings each TapTalk menu selection and command in the
and operational commands to the M-2001D as same order as they are displayed in the software
well as access the extensive monitoring and status program. Those TapTalk features and functions that
reporting features. Figure 3-11 represents the are covered in other sections of this Instruction Book
TapTalk Main Screen menu structure. TapTalk Main will be noted and referenced.
Screen "File Mode" menu structure and TapTalk
Main Screen "Connected" menu structure are
presented in Figures 3-12 and 3-13 respectively.
Figure 3-11 TapTalk Main Screen Menu Selections
3–11
Figure 3-12 TapTalk Main Screen Menu Selections (File Mode)
3–12
TapTalk – 3
The TapTalk® Main Screen "Connected" (Figure

3-13) also displays the type of connection that is in
effect (top of menu bar), and on the bottom menu
bar the Control Time, Firmware Version, Connection
Status and Active Setpoint Profile. When in File
Mode with a named file open the file name and
path to the file are displayed in the top menu bar.
Also displayed is the Active Profile in the bottom
menu bar.
Figure 3-13 TapTalk Main Screen Menu Selections (Connected)
3–13
 NOTE: If communication is not established to File Open or Connected Mode

the unit and no file is open, items relating
to settings, utilities, or monitoring are
disabled. If not connected but a file is
open, monitoring and utilities screens
are displayed without data (Tap and
Harmonics display simulated data.)
Once installed, the TapTalk® program-item icon is

available from the Program Manager and TapTalk
can be run like any other Windows™ program
(The installation utility places TapTalk in a Program
Manager group named Becoware).
File The File toolbar item when TapTalk is connected

File Not Open or Not Connected Mode to a control or a file is open provides the following
features:
• Save – Saves the open file.
• Save As – Allows the user to save the
open file with a different file name.
• Close – Closes the open file in the
control window.
• Write to Control – When connected to a
The File drop down menu when TapTalk is not control and no file is previously open, this
connected to a control or a file is not open provides function allows the user to open a *.cfg file
the following features: and send the setpoints and configuration
to the control in one step.
• New – Opens the File Information Box to • Read from Control – When connected to
allow the user to select the unit type and a control and no file is previously open, this
nominal frequency. function allows the user to recall the control
• Open – Opens the file browser window profile and save the data to a *.cfg file.
to allow the user to select an existing file. • Exit – Exits the TapTalk program.
It will not allow the user to create a new
file.
• Exit – Exits the TapTalk program.
3–14
TapTalk – 3
Connect and Communication Modem

The Modem menu selection initiates the Modem
communication dialog screen (Figure 3-15). This
screen contains the Device, Phone, PC Comm Port
and Modem parameters that are necessary to setup
and communicate with a modem attached to the
host PC and the target M-2001D. This screen also
contains a phone book, selection of Comm Port or
modem and a selection for bringing up a terminal
window after dialing.
TCP/IP
The Connect drop down menu is displayed when
The TCP/IP menu selection initiates the TCP/IP
the unit is not connected to a control. This menu
communication dialog screen (Figure 3-16). This
provides the user with access to the screens that
screen contains the parameter settings for
are necessary to set TapTalk® communication
communicating with a M-2001D over a network.
parameters and connect to the target control.
Menu selections include USB, Com Port, Modem,
TCP/IP and Bluetooth. Bluetooth
The Bluetooth menu selection initiates the
USB Bluetooth communication dialog screen (Figure
3-17). This screen contains the parameter settings
The USB menu selection initiates the USB dialog
for communicating with a M-2001D using the
screen to connect to the M-2001D USB Port (Figure
optional Bluetooth feature.
3-2). The user is prompted to input the required
Device and Access code. The USB/Comm Port
selection identifies the PC Comm Port to be utilized
for communication.
Com Port
The Com Port menu selection initiates the
Serial Port dialog screen (Figure 3-14). The user is
prompted to input the necessary communications
information to open Serial communications through
the selected Comm Port.
Figure 3-14 Serial Port Connection

Dialog Screen
3–15
Figure 3-15 Modem Connection Dialog Screen
Figure 3-16 TCP/IP Connection Dialog Screen
Figure 3-17 Bluetooth Connection Dialog Screen
3–16
TapTalk – 3
Communication Communication/Setup/Comm Port

See Chapter 4, Section 4.1 System Setup for
details regarding the selection of Comm Port
settings (Figure 3-19) when the RS-485/Fiber Optic
rear Comm Port is present.
The Communication drop down menu is displayed

when TapTalk is connected to a control. This menu
provides the user with access to the screens that are
necessary to Disconnect from the target control,
initiate the Open Terminal Window feature or
access the Setup menu items.
Disconnect
The Disconnect menu item when selected prompts
the user to confirm (Figure 3-18) the disconnect
command.
Figure 3-19 Setup Comm Port Dialog Screen
Communication/Setup/RS-232 Comm Port

See Chapter 4, Section 4.1 System Setup for
details regarding the selection of RS-232 Comm
Port Settings (Figure 3-20) when the RS-232 Comm
Port is present.
Figure 3-18 Disconnect Command

Confirmation Screen
Open Terminal Window

Not Available at this time.
Communication/Setup
The Setup submenu provides the user with the
capability to setup and configure the standard
RS485 Fiber Optic Port. Also, the Setup submenu
provides for the setup and configuration of the
Figure 3-20 Setup RS-232 Comm Port
RS-232 port, optional Ethernet and Bluetooth®
communication features. Dialog Screen
The Communication/Setup submenu also provides

the user with access to the Change Address,
Communication Access Timeout and HeartBeat
settings.
3–17
Communication/Setup/Ethernet Communication/Setup/Change Address

See Chapter 4, Section 4.1 System Setup for Multiple Control Addressing
detailed information regarding the selection of To modify the Control Communication Address, the
Ethernet Port Settings when the Ethernet Port is user can do so from the Change Communication
present. Address screen (Figure 3-22). The Communication
Address is used for both MODBUS® and DNP
protocols. Substation and Feeder Addresses apply
only to DNP protocol (see Substation and Feeder
Addresses definition in Chapter 4, Feeder and/or
Substation Addressing).
Figure 3-22 Change Communication Address

Dialog Screen
When Change Address submenu item is selected,

TapTalk® will respond with a confirming dialog
screen (Figure 3-23), As long as communication
to the remote location is maintained, the user can
switch between controls.
Figure 3-21 Ethernet Setup Dialog Screen
Figure 3-23 Change Address Warning Screen
Change Address/Miscellaneous
Save – The Save command saves the Address
change to the control when TapTalk is connected
to a control.
Close – The Close command cancels any Address
changes before the changes have been sent to the
control.
3–18
TapTalk – 3
Communication/Setup/Communication
Access Security
When Communication Access Security is enabled
it applies only when MODBUS has been selected
regardless of the physical interface. If enabled, the
user Level Access Code must match either the
Level 1 or Level 2 Access Codes in order to be
granted the access to control settings ascribed to Figure 3-25 HeartBeat Option Screen
each Level. See Section 4.1 System Setup for
detailed information. If an invalid Access Level Code Communication/Setup/Bluetooth® Settings
is entered at the connection prompt, then read only
access will be granted. TapTalk® must be closed for The Bluetooth Information dialog screen provides
the timeout period specified (1 to 50,000 seconds) the user with the capability to setup Bluetooth
in order for any Access Code changes to take effect communication parameters and also initiate a
when this feature is enabled. The setting range is "Reset" of the Bluetooth module. See Chapter 4,
from 1 to 50,000 seconds. See Section 4.1, System Section 4.1 System Setup for detailed information.
Setup for details regarding selection of connection
timeout features.
Figure 3-24 Communication Access Security

Dialog Screen
Communication/Setup/HeartBeat Option
The purpose of the SCADA HeartBeat feature is
to have two sets of settings for the control and
switch between these two setting sets based on the Figure 3-26 Bluetooth Information
presence or absence of SCADA communications Dialog Screen
(utilizing the DNP protocol) to the control. The
SCADA HeartBeat feature can be enabled from Communication/Options
TapTalk Communications software. There are four
different types of SCADA HeartBeat modes that This feature allows the user to enable RS-232 and
can be selected: the optional Bluetooth module if equipped.
• SCADA HeartBeat for transformer control TapTalk provides the means to enable or disable
applications (LTC) installed RS-232 and Bluetooth modules. This
capability is provided by a communication options
• SCADA HeartBeat for regulator control utility under the Communications menu. Prompts to
applications (Regulator) enable communication hardware are also contained
• Profile Switching (DNP) in the individual port setup menus.
• Profile Switching (GOOSE)
See Section 4.1 System Setup for details regarding

Enabling/Disabling and selecting control type.
Figure 3-27 Communication Options

Dialog Screen
3–19
MONITOR MONITOR/METERING & STATUS

The Metering & Status submenu item displays
the Metering & Status Screen (Figure 3-28).
Values displayed are updated depending on
communication system capabilities.
PRIMARY STATUS (Single or Three-Phase)

Voltage – Displays the calculated primary voltage
based on the user-selected voltage multiplier, VT
corrections, and measured secondary voltage.
Source Voltage – Displays the calculated primary
source voltage based on the user selected source
voltage multiplier, source VT corrections and source
secondary voltage.
The Monitor toolbar item provides the user with Current – Displays the calculated primary current
the means to display the control’s Metering & based on the user-selected current multiplier, and
measured secondary current.
Status, Motor Current Profile, Demand & Energy
Metering, Tap Statistics, Real Time Voltage Plot, Watts – Displays the calculated primary quantity
Harmonic Analysis, Master/Follower Alarm based on the user-selected voltage and current
Messages, Display All Metering and Set Metering multipliers; VT configuration (line-to-line or line-
Colors screens. The data that is displayed is only to-ground), single-phase or three-phase, and
available when communication is established measured secondary voltage and current.
between the control and the PC.
VAr – Displays the calculated primary quantity
multipliers, VT configuration (line-to-line or line-
to-ground), single-phase or three-phase, and
VA – Displays the calculated primary quantity
multipliers, VT configuration (line-to-line or line-
to-ground), single-phase or three-phase, and
REMOTE VOLTAGE BIAS

Voltage
Displays the Remote Voltage value provided to
the control utilizing either DNP 3.0, MODBUS or
IEC 61850 protocols. If a voltage value is present
the control is utilizing the Remote Voltage Bias
Voltage to control.
3–20
TapTalk – 3
SECONDARY STATUS Normalizing Voltage – A Normalizing Voltage

Load Voltage – Displays the real-time measured Multiplier with a range of 0.80 to 1.20 is available
value of voltage at the regulator or transformer to be applied to Meter Out Voltage and displayed
and includes any corrections made using the in real time as Normalizing Voltage.
user-selected VT correction voltage.
Load Current – Displays the real-time measured
Meter Out Voltage – Displays the measured voltage value of current.
at the terminals of the M-2001D without any software
Power Factor – Displays the real-time calculated
modifications. Used as the base for normalizing
value of power factor.
voltage.
Source Voltage – Displays the calculated primary Frequency – Displays the real-time measured
source voltage based on the user selected source frequency value.
voltage multiplier, source VT corrections and source Circulating Current – Displays a representative
secondary voltage. value of circulating current, if the control is used
Compensated Voltage – Displays the calculated with a Beckwith Electric M‑0115A Parallel Balancing
voltage at the "load center". Module, or its equivalent.
Figure 3-28 Metering and Status Screen
3–21
TAP INFORMATION RTN Status

Tap Position – Displays the tap position of the Displays the "Run Through Neutral" feature status
tapchanger when any method of KeepTrack™ is (Enabled or Disabled).
used. Recognizes tapchanges commanded via
manual, automatic or external (SCADA) means. Count Towards RTN
Displays the number of counter operations since the
Drag Hands – Displays the tap position Drag Hands operations between runs setting was set, or since
values for each direction. the feature was enabled. The counter will reset to
Raise Timer – Displays the integrated out-of-band
time for a voltage excursion greater than the upper through neutral.
band limit up to the value of the time delay setpoint. RTN Counter
Lower Timer – Displays the integrated out-of-band The RTN Counter will increment after each
time for a voltage excursion less than the lower successful operation of the Run Through Neutral
band limit up to the value of the time delay setpoint. feature.
Intertap Timer – In the sequential mode of
operation, displays the integrated out-of-band TAPCHANGER STATUS
time for a voltage excursion and the subsequent Operation Mode (Auto)
tap-change. Adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds, in Gray Background – Indicates that the control is
1 second increments, with a factory setting of 0 in automatic mode of operation.
seconds.
Yellow Background – Indicates Automatic but
Operation Counter – Records the number of raise some Limits in effect.
and lower operations. The operation counter will
advance by one or two counts, as set by the user, Red Background – Indicates Auto Operation
for each open-close-open contact operation. This Blocked.
counter is not resettable.
Block Status – Indicates blocks that are active.
The counter accommodates 999,999 operation
counts and the number of counts stored in memory Band Status – Indicates one of three conditions:
is not affected by a loss of supply power. Total High, when voltage is out of band high, Low when
operation count is displayed in the Status Menu. voltage is out of band low, and OK when voltage
This counter cannot be reset, but can be preset to is within band.
any value up to 999,999 in the Configuration menu. VAr Bias Effect
Indicates one of three conditions when enabled.
Resettable Operations Counter If the control has determined that the absolute
A second, resettable operations counter operates reactive power is >¾ of the Max Cap Bank Setting
with the method selected by X1/X2/Count Window. and the inverse timer has timed out, then the
The user resets this counter to zero by pressing control will increase the effective bandcenter by
ENT while viewing the resettable operation counter 1 Volt depending on the direction of the reactive
screen within the Status Menu. No password is power and will either indicate "Bandcenter Raise"
for negative reactive power or "Bandcenter Lower"
required to reset the resettable operations counter.
for positive reactive power. If the absolute power is
 NOTE: The counter will only increment with a <¾ of the Max Cap Bank Setting then the display
connection to the counter input. will indicate "None".
Whenever VAr Bias is in effect, the control will
Neutral Switch Counter display the "VAr Bias in effect" message on the
The Neutral Switch Counter is updated each time display and the appropriate Raise/Lower LED will
the neutral input is detected. Neutral Switch Counter flash.
can also preset to any value. The Neutral Switch
Counter is a software counter that is stored in Power Direction – Indicates one of two power
non-volatile memory and has a maximum value of directions: Forward (forward power condition) and
1,000,000. Reverse (reverse power condition).
3–22
TapTalk – 3
Voltage Reduction VR Off – Indicates voltage Backup Pwr Failure – Indicates the absence of
reduction is not active, blocked either by Backup Power circuiting when Backup Power option
non‑sequential input, a reverse power condition, has been detected.
or by communicated command. Steps 1, 2, and 3
indicate that voltage reduction is in effect for the Low Current Block – When enabled the control
stated step value. determines if Load Current following a tap change
is less than 4 mA, coincident with Tap Delta Voltage
HMI Active Mode – Indicates (Yellow) that HMI being less than 4 VAC. When these conditions exist
menu at the control is active. the control will initiate an alarm and block regulation.
Individual Tap Wear
ALARM STATUS
The number of operations on any single tap exceeds
There are three available states designated by color the Individual Tap Wear Alarm setting.
for each of the Alarm Status elements:
Tap Changer Failure
• Gray with Dark Gray Text – Alarm
When the Operation Counter Configuration is set to
disabled.
"Cam Follower" and this alarm has been enabled,
• Gray with Black Text – Alarm enable and indicates the counter contact input has detected a
condition not met Tap Changer Failure condition.
• RED – Alarm enabled and condition
A Cam Follower contact is a cam driven contact
exists
which is normally closed when the Tapchanger is
at rest, and opens and closes once during each tap
Comm Block operation in either direction. If this contact does not
The control has had its automatic operation open and close within 30 seconds after the control
blocked via communications and is now in manual issues a Raise or Lower in either local automatic
operation mode and the alarm output is on due to or remote manual operational modes, this alarm
this condition. will activate. This alarm can be reset either by the
Cam Follower contact operating correctly during a
Block Raise (Tap) subsequent Raise or Lower operation, or if reset
The tap position equals or exceeds the block raise by the user.
tap limit setting and the alarm output is on due to
this condition. LDC/LDZ
Any value other than zero has been set for LDC/
Block Lower (Tap) LDZ.
The tap position equals or exceeds the block lower
tap limit setting and the alarm output is on due to Line Current Limit
this condition. The line current is exceeding the respective
maximum current limit setting and the alarm output
Block Raise (Voltage) is on due to this condition.
The tap position equals or exceeds the block raise
voltage limit setting and the alarm output is on due Reverse Power
to this condition. Reverse power is present at the control and the
alarm output is on due to this condition.
Block Lower (Voltage)
The tap position equals or exceeds the block lower Abnormal Tap Position
voltage limit setting and the alarm output is on due Abnormal Tap Position is indicated when the alarm
to this condition. is enabled, KeepTrack™ is enabled and the neutral
input is detected but the present tap position at that
DVar2 Load Current Limit – DVar2 Load Current instant is neither at minus one nor plus one. The
is exceeding the respective maximum current Abnormal Tap Position Alarm will also be activated
limit setting and the alarm output is on due to this when the Motor Seal-in Failure detection feature
condition. has detected a Motor Seal-in Failure.
Motor Seal-In Failure – Indicates that motor Voltage Reduction
current has not been detected for a period 15
Any level of voltage reduction is active.
seconds after a Raise or Lower command has been
executed. This event must occur two consecutive
times for this alarm to occur.
3–23
VAr Bias Lead or Lag – Indicates when the VAr OUTPUT STATUS
Bias effect (Lead or Lag) has exceeded the time Raise – Indicates (Green) when a Tap Raise output
limit imposed by the Max VAr Bias Duration Setting. is active. Limited by tap Block Raise setpoint and
Master/Follower Lockout tap position limit settings.
There are two types of lockout conditions, Master Lower – Indicates (Green) when a Tap Lower
lockout and Follower lockout. Any lockout of the output is active. Limited by tap Block Lower setpoint
paralleling mode will set the Master/Follower and tap position limit settings.
Lockout Alarm. When a lockout condition exists,
the control issuing the lockout will stop any further Programmable Alarm – Indicates (Green) when
GOOSE publishing and will stop load voltage a Programmable Alarm condition is true.
regulation. Also, the alarm can be configured as Motor Seal-In – Indicates when a Motor Seal-In
a DNP event, or as a report in case of IEC 61850. Output in active.
The lockout state will be displayed on the control
front panel display and in the Master/Follower
Configuration Tool (Figure 3-87). CBEMA EVENTS AND COUNTER STATUS
When the Load Voltage is sagging or swelling
 NOTE: Master/Follower Alarm messages can greater than the pickup setting, then a pickup status
be observed for the connected control will be set after a minimum duration, in addition to
from the TapTalk ® Monitor/Master/
incrementing a counter.
Follower Alarm messages menu item
(Figure 3-34). Up to 4 CBEMA events can be set and enabled
allowing the control to trigger a Sequence of Events
RTN Fail record when each event occurs. Also, the control
The RTN Fail alarm will actuate when the "Maximum will report both the time and duration of each event
RTN operations before Alarms" setting has been via DNP. These 4 settings allow the control to be
exceeded. set to record violations of the ITIC curves (formerly
known as CBEMA curves).
Op Count Signal
The total number of operations has exceeded the AUX INPUT STATUS
Operations Counter Alarm Limit setting.
Indicates (red) when the Auxiliary Input is active.
INPUT STATUS
Neutral Tap – Indicates (Green) neutral position
contact input is closed.
Counter – Indicates (Green) operation counter
contact input is closed.
Non-Sequential – Indicates (Green)
Non‑sequential contact input is closed. Tapchanger
control blocks raise or lower operation on a
sustained closed contact.
Motor Seal-in – Indicates (Green) when motor
power is applied.
Volt Reduction 1 – Indicates (Green) Step 1
voltage reduction contact output is closed.
Volt Reduction 2 – Indicates (Green) Step 2
voltage reduction contact output is closed.
SCADA Cutout – Indicates (Green) SCADA
(switch) input is closed. Tapchanger control blocks
Raise or Lower operation.
3–24
TapTalk – 3
Monitor/Motor Current Profile The training mode will be used during the
The M-2001D Tapchanger Control measures the commissioning of the Tapchanger Control. In
motor current during tapchange operation. The this mode twenty tapchange operations will be
motor current is sampled at 64 samples per cycle manually conducted and the average profile stored
and the total RMS value of the current is computed in non‑volatile memory. This profile will be compared
every cycle (60 Hz or 50 Hz cycle). The dynamic with the profile during normal tapchange operation
range of the current measurement is from 0 to 10 A. to trigger the Sequence of Events Recorder when
the above conditions occur.
The tapchange start signal is generated when the
motor current exceeds a threshold value (user
programmable or fixed at a small value such as
0.1 A). The tapchange operation is considered
complete when the counter contact input is
generated. If the tapchanger is making multiple
tapchanges where the current is not interrupted
between tapchanges then the counter contact can
be used to decide the completion of one tap before
the start of the next tap.
The following parameters are logged for the motor
current profile:
• Average RMS value of the motor current
(once every cycle for the complete
duration of the tapchange)
• Total duration of the tapchange in ms
• Peak RMS value of the motor current Figure 3-29 Motor Current Profile
Dialog Screen
The Sequence of Events Recorder will trigger when
any of the following conditions occur:
 NOTE: The average RMS current is the average
of the RMS current for the tapchange
duration.
• Peak RMS current exceeds a certain

percent (programmable from 110% to
200%) of the stored peak current which
was recorded during the training mode.
• Average RMS current exceeds a certain
percent (programmable from 110%
to 200%) of the stored average RMS
current which was recorded during the
training mode.
• Total duration of the tapchange exceeds
a certain percent (programmable from
110% to 200%) of the stored value which
was recorded during the training mode.
3–25
Figure 3-30 Demand & Energy Metering Dialog
3–26
TapTalk – 3
Monitor/Demand & Energy Metering Demand History

The Demand & Energy Metering submenu item All demand history values (single phase) include
displays the Demand & Energy Metering screen the date and time at which each occurred. A drag
(Figure 3-30). Real‑time demand and metering hand value is the maximum or minimum value of a
information can be monitored from an addressed measured quantity recorded since the last reset.
control.
Minimum Load Voltage – Displays minimum local
Demand Interval voltage at the regulator or transformer. This value
The Demand Interval applies to the Demand continuously averaged over consecutive 32-second
Present Primary Current (Amps) parameter and the intervals.
Demand History parameters. The Demand Interval
Maximum Load Voltage – Displays drag hand
can be set to 5, 10, 15, 30, and 60 minutes.
maximum local voltage at the regulator or
transformer. This value continuously averaged over
Demand Present consecutive 32-second intervals.
The Demand Present Primary Current parameter
Maximum Primary Current – Displays drag hand
value follows the concept of a lagged demand meter.
maximum primary current.
The demand time interval is selected by the user as
15, 30 or 60 minutes. This is the time it takes for a Maximum Primary Watts – Displays drag hand
thermal meter to indicate 90% of a change in load. maximum primary watts.
Load Voltage – Displays the real-time measured Maximum Primary VAr – Displays drag hand
value of voltage at the regulator or transformer. maximum primary VArs.
This value continuously averaged over consecutive
32-second intervals. Maximum Primary VA – Displays drag hand
maximum primary VA. Resets automatically when
Primary Current – Displays the calculated Power Factor at (Max) VA value, below, is reset.
primary demand current based on the user-selected
current multiplier and measured secondary current. Power Factor @ Max VA – Displays drag hand
power factor at time of maximum VA.
Primary Watts – Displays the real time demand
value base on the user-selected voltage and current
multipliers; VT configuration (line-to-ground or Energy Metering
line-to-line), single-phase or three-phase, and The Energy Metering section of the Demand &
measured secondary voltage and current. Energy Metering screen displays the Energy
Metering parameters. This feature enables the user
Primary VAr – Displays the real time demand value to review real-time and historical demand metering
based on the user-selected voltage and current information (Single Phase). This section includes
multipliers, VT configuration (line-to-ground or Forward and Reverse Watt Hours and Forward and
line-to-line), single-phase or three-phase, and Reverse VAr Hours.
Primary VA – Displays the real time demand value Miscellaneous
based on the user-selected voltage and current Each element of the Demand History and Energy
multipliers, VT configuration (line-to-ground or Metering can be reset individually by selecting the
line-to-line), single-phase or three-phase, and desired parameter(s) and then selecting Reset
measured secondary voltage and current. Selected Items. When the Reset command is
issued, the metered value is reset to zero and the
time and date are updated
Select All – Allows the user to select all parameters.
Clear All – Allows the user to reset all parameter
values.
Reset Selected Items – Allows the user to reset
only the selected parameter values.
3–27
Monitor/Tap Statistics
The Tap Statistics submenu item displays a
statistical representation of the Tapchanger
operation (Figure 3-31). The cumulative (since last
visit) number of tapchanges and the Accumulated
Primary Current for each tap position is displayed
both graphically and numerically. Selecting Refresh
updates tap statistical data. Selecting Reset All
resets all tap statistic counters to zero and clears the
Individual Tap Wear Alarm in the Metering & Status
screen. Selecting Save to CSV File allows the user
to save the tap statistics as a ".csv" file which can
be read by a spreadsheet program.
 NOTE: By pointing the mouse to any bar, the corresponding tap statistic will be highlighted as well as
displayed in a tool tip.
Figure 3-31 Tap Statistics Screen
3–28
TapTalk – 3
Monitor/Real Time Voltage Chart

The Real Time Voltage Chart (Figure 3-32) feature
allows the user to monitor in real time the last 60
seconds of the source voltage value and load
voltage. The Voltage Chart freezes the last 30
seconds of the voltage profile and displays the
current values.
Figure 3-32 Real Time Voltage Chart
3–29
Monitor/Harmonic Analysis
The input signal is sampled at 64 samples per In addition to Harmonics and THD calculations the
cycle, giving an overall sampling rate of 3840 secondary task also triggers the Sequence of Event
samples per second for a 60 Hz system. This (SOE) recorder whenever any Harmonic selected
provides the ability to reproduce signals of up to by the user exceeds a preset threshold level.
1920 Hz. Therefore, up to the 31st harmonic can
be calculated using discrete Fourier transform The user is able to select which Harmonic(s) will
with a fundamental frequency of 60 Hz. The trigger the SOE function and also set the threshold
fundamental for both the Voltage and Current level, above which the SOE recorder will be initiated
channels is calculated every sample meaning, every and below which the current will be ignored.
260.41 µs. These voltage and current magnitudes The threshold level is set as a percentage of the
are used in a real-time decision making algorithm magnitude of the fundamental. The user can also
and real-time metering. set the threshold level of either the Voltage or the
Current Harmonic.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) for both voltage
and current are calculated and displayed using the
following equation:

Figure 3-33 Harmonic Analysis Dialog Screen
3–30
TapTalk – 3
Monitor/Master/Follower Alarm Messages

Master/Follower Alarm Messages for the control
that TapTalk® is connected to can be observed from
TapTalk by selecting Monitor/Master/Follower Alarm
Messages. TapTalk will display Figure 3-34.
Figure 3-34 Master/Follower Alarm Messages Screen
3–31
Monitor/Display All Metering

The Display All Metering feature provides the
user with a snapshot of all metering parameters.
This feature also allows the Display All Metering
screen to be printed or saved as a *.HTML file. The
menu bar also includes a refresh feature to refresh
parameters displayed on the screen.
Figure 3-35 Display All Metering Screen
3–32
TapTalk – 3
Monitor/Set Metering Colors Toolbar Editor

This feature allows the user to select individual The Toolbar Editor feature allows the user to create
display colors for the Metering and Status screen. TapTalk® toolbar menu items that are available from
The Alarm, Warning, Input, Output and Metering the TapTalk main menu screen. By right clicking on
Background text and background colors can be set. the toolbar TapTalk will display the Toolbar Editor
Mode selections "Start Edit Toolbar" and "End Edit
Toolbar" (Figure 3-37). To add a Toolbar item simply
select "Start Edit Toolbar" and then drag and drop
the desired single menu item onto the main toolbar.
To remove menu items drag and drop the item on
the "Help" menu item. When the Toolbar Editor is
active (as displayed in the TapTalk menu top line)
no TapTalk functions can be initiated.
By right clicking and selecting "End Edit Toolbar"
TapTalk features are accessible.
Figure 3-36 Set Metering Colors Screen
Figure 3-37 TapTalk Main Menu Screen with Toolbar Editor Active
3–33
Setup Also included in the Setup submenu is the Display

All Settings command which when invoked
displays the M-2001D All Setpoints Dialog Screen
(Figure 3-65).
Setup/Profile
The Profile menu item includes the "Set Active
Profile" selection which allows the user to manually
select the active Setpoint Profile. Also included is
the "Profile Names" menu item which allows the
user to Enter/Edit the 16 character Profile name for
each file (Figure 3-38).
Setup/Tapchanger Type
The Tapchanger Type Selection feature (Figure
3-39) provides the user with the ability to set
regulator vendor specific configuration settings in
the control from TapTalk. See Chapter 5 Section
5.2 Tap Changer Type Selection.
The Setup menu item provides the user with access

to the Profile, Tapchanger Type, Setpoints,
Configuration, Tap Settings, Alarms, Wakeup
Screens, Data Logging, Harmonics Setup,
Oscillograph, Sequence of Events and CBEMA
Events submenu items. The setpoint information
displayed on these screens can be from either the
control or from an open TapTalk® file.
Figure 3-38 Profile Names Dialog Screen
3–34
TapTalk – 3
Figure 3-39 Tapchanger Type Dialog Screen
3–35
Setup/Setpoints Setpoints/Forward Power

Setpoints/General Band Center – Adjustable from 100.0 V to 135.0 V
Line Drop Compensation – Toggles between two in 0.1 V increments with a factory setting of 120 V.
modes of operation: R, X (factory setting), and Z.
Band Width – Adjustable from 1.0 V to 10.0 V in
Timer Delay Selection – Toggle between two 0.1 V increments with a factory setting of 2.0 V.
modes of operation: Definite Time (factory setting)
Definite/Inverse Time – Adjustable from 1 sec.
and Inverse Time.
to 360 sec. in 1 second increments with a factory
Basic Timer Type – Toggles between Integrating setting of 30 seconds.
and Instant Reset.
LDC‑Z – Adjustable from 0 V to 72 V in 1 V incre-
Power Direction Bias – The Power Direction Bias ments with a factory setting 0 V.
setpoint feature includes three settings to determine
LDC Resistance – Adjustable from –72 V to +72 V
how the control will switch between forward and
in 1 V increments with a factory setting of 0 V.
reverse power operation. The three settings are
None, Forward, and Reverse. LDC Reactance – Adjustable from –72 V to +72 V
Setpoints/Voltage Reduction
Step 1 – First of three independent steps of voltage
reduction adjustable from 0% to 10% in 0.1% Setpoints/Reverse Power
increments of the bandcenter setpoint. Factory Operation – Toggles between eight modes of
setting is 2.5%. operation:
Step 2 – Second voltage reduction step, adjustable • Block – inhibits automatic tapchange
from 0% to 10% in 0.1% increments of the operation.
bandcenter setpoint. Factory setting is 5.0%. • Regulate Forward (Ignore) – continues
unit action as though forward power flow
Step 3 – Third voltage reduction step, adjustable
continued to exist.
from 0% to 10% in 0.1% increments of the
bandcenter setpoint. Factory setting is 7.5%. • Regulate Reverse – (calculated voltage
or measured voltage) detects a reverse
power condition and regulates according
Setpoints/Limit and Runback
to reverse power settings.
Block Raise – Over voltage limit is adjustable from
95.0 V to 135.0 V in 0.1 V increments with a factory • Return to Neutral – detects a reverse
setting of 128.0 V. power operation and drives tap position
to neutral and then stops.
Runback Deadband – Adjustable from 1.0 V to 4.0 • Regulate Reverse (Measured) – allows
V in 0.1 V increments with a factory setting of 2.0 V. the control to switch it’s voltage sensing
input from a load side VT to a source
Block Lower – Under voltage limit is adjustable
side VT if one is available and operate in
from 95.0 V to 135.0 V in 0.1 V increments with a
Reverse Power Mode using that input.
factory setting of 114.0 V.
• Distributed Generation – allows alternate
Runup Deadband – Adjustable from 1.0 V to 4.0 V LDC R and X values to be applied to the
in 0.1 V increments with a factory setting of 2.0 V. control when reverse power is detected.
Runup – This feature may be Enabled/Disabled. • Auto Determination – allows the control
to use the "Smart Reverse Power" feature
Current Limit – Adjustable from 50 mA to 640 mA, to choose the applicable reverse power
in increments of 1 mA. If the value of the current mode, either Distributed Generation or
exceeds the current limit setpoint, the unit will not Regulate Reverse.
permit automatic control in either the raise or lower
• Auto Determination (Measured) –
direction. Factory setting is 640 mA.
allows the control to use the "Smart
Reverse Power" feature to choose the
applicable reverse power mode, either
Distributed Generation or Regulate
Reverse (Measured).
3–36
TapTalk – 3
The Setpoints Reverse Power section also contains Setpoints/Miscellaneous

a link which displays the "Reverse Power Vendor Undo/Refresh – The Undo command allows the
Cross Reference" table showing Cooper/Siemens user to undo any setting changes in the Setpoints
reverse power names and their Beckwith Electric screen before the settings have been saved to either
equivalents (Figure 3-41). the Device or Open File. It also refreshes the screen
with the data stored in the unit.
Band Center – Adjustable from 100.0 V to 135.0 V
in 0.1 V increments with a factory setting of 120 V. Save – The Save command saves the setting
changes to either the Open File when in File mode
Band Width – Adjustable from 1.0 V to 10.0 V in
or the Device when TapTalk® is connected to a
0.1 V increments with a factory setting of 2.0 V.
device.
Definite/Inverse Time – Adjustable from 1 sec.
Close – The Close command cancels any setting
to 360 sec. in 1 second increments with a factory
changes before the settings changes have been
setting of 30 seconds
sent to either the Device or Open File.
LDC‑Z – Adjustable from 0 V to 72 V in 1 V incre-
ments with a factory setting 0 V.
LDC Resistance – Adjustable from –72 V to +72 V
LDC Reactance – Adjustable from –72 V to +72 V
Figure 3-40 Setpoints Dialog Screen
3–37
Figure 3-41 Reverse Power Vendor Cross Reference Table
Setup/Configuration Configuration/VT/CT Load

Configuration/Primary Normalizing Voltage Multiplier – Displays the
Voltage Multiplier – Adjustable from 0.1 to 3260.0 result of the Normalizing Multiplier (0.80 to 1.20)
in 0.1 increments with a factory setting of 60.0. User times the Meter Out Voltage.
selection must include knowledge of VT ratio and VT Correction – Adjustable from –15.0 V to +15.0 V
sensing VT-ratio correction. in 0.1 V increments with a factory setting of 0.0 V.
Voltage Source Multiplier – Adjustable from 0.1 CT/VT Phasing – Adjustable from 0° to 330° in 30°
to 3260.0 in 0.1 increments with a factory setting increments with a factory setting of 0°.
of 60.0. User selection must include knowledge
of source VT ratio and sensing source VT-ratio Aux Current Transformer – Can be set to 200 mA,
correction. 1 A or 5 A. This choice fixes the scale of both the
Current Multiplier – Adjustable from 1 to 32600 metering readout quantities and the settings and
in 1 increments with a factory setting of 6000. User current values.
selection must include knowledge of CT ratio, from VT Configuration – Load VT configuration toggles
primary rating to 0.2 A rating of control. between Line-to-Line and Line-to-Ground.
Primary Power Display – Toggles between two
modes of operation: Single-Phase – based on Configuration/VT/CT Source
measured inputs, and Three-Phase – based on VT Source Correction – Adjustable from –15.0 V
measured inputs and presumed balanced system. to +15.0 V in 0.1 V increments with a factory setting
Factory setting is single-phase. of 0.0 V.
CT/VT Source Phasing – Adjustable from 0° to 330°
in 30° increments with a factory setting of 0°.
3–38
TapTalk – 3
Figure 3-42 Configuration Dialog Screen
3–39
Configuration/Raise/Lower Output Contacts Input Selection 2 – The Input Selection 2 can

Output Selection – Toggle between two modes be configured to be either an input that initiates
of operation: CONTINUOUS (factory setting) and Non‑Sequential control operation or a SCADA
PULSED. Cutout switch input. The default configuration setting
is Non-Sequential.
Pulse Width – Adjustable from 0.2 seconds to 12.0
seconds in 0.1 second increments with a factory Input Selection 3 – Can be configured to become
setting of 1.5 second. When the output is set to an Auxiliary Input that can be read as a DNP point
pulse and the control is calling for Raise/Lower (and or Voltage Reduction 2.
no non‑sequential or counter input is applied), an
Auto/Manual Switch Type – The Auto/Manual
output will turn on for the preprogrammed time, and
Switch Type setting allows the Auto/Man Switch type
then turn off for 0.5 seconds, plus the intertap time
on the adapter panel to be set to "Toggle, SCAMP or
delay. A square wave is generated on the output.
None". None is used when no Auto/Manual Switch
exists. The default configuration setting is None.
Configuration/Motor Current Settings
Peak RMS Current – Adjustable from 110% to Configuration/Regulator
200% in 1% increments.
Regulator Type – Allows the Regulator type to be
Avg RMS Current – Adjustable from 110% to 200% selected as Type A or B for correct source voltage
in 1% increments. calculation. Factory setting is Type A.
Avg Duration – Adjustable from 110% to 200% in Configuration/Paralleling

1% increments.
Paralleling Type – Paralleling Type can be selected
(when purchased) to Disable, Circulating Current,
Configuration/Program Alarm Relay Mode – ∆VAR®1, ∆VAR2, ∆VAR2 (KeepTrack™), or Master/
When the Auto/Manual Switch Type configuration Follower.
is set to "SCAMP", then the Programmable Alarm
Function can be set to function as "Normal" or "As
a Deadman Output". This option is available when Paralleling Options for ∆VAR2 and
SCAMP mode is used since the Deadman Output ∆VAR2 (KeepTrack)
is not available. Sensitivity – Adjustable from –4 to +4 in 0.1
increments with a factory setting of 0.0.
Configuration/Inputs and Switch Circulating Current Limit (Reactive) – Adjustable
Input Selection 1 – Allows the Operation Counter from 5 mA to 200 mA in 1.0 mA increments with a
Input to be selected to either Seal-In Input or Switch factory setting of 200 mA.
Status. When a Cooper Regulator is used the
"Seal‑In Input" selection must be chosen. Input Ratio (Load/Parallel) – Adjustable from
0.50 to 2.00 in 0.01 increments with a factory setting
of 1.00.
Figure 3-43 DVAR2 and DVAR2 (Keeptrack) Configuration Dialog Screen
3–40
TapTalk – 3
Master/Follower Paralleling Configuration Tap Position Response Timeout – The time within
Settings which the Followers have to be at the same tap
Paralleling Address – The unique address for each position as that of the Master (range 1,000 ms -
device (range 1-16). 6,000 ms).
Master/Follower Configuration – Sets the control If the Master Timeout is greater than the intertap
configuration as None, a Follower or a Master. delay setting, then the Master Timeout is used as
the Intertap delay, so that the Master waits for all the
Number of Devices – The total number of devices Followers to make a tapchange before the Master
that are in the paralleling scheme (maximum of 16 takes the next Tap.
inclusive of the master).
Line Breaker, Right Tie Breaker, Left Tie Breaker
Tap Difference – The difference between Master – The Line Breaker, Right and Left Tie Breakers can
and Follower tap positions that will result in a be individually selected to be included or excluded
Lockout condition. from the algorithm. Furthermore, the polarity of the
input detection can be either negative or positive.
Figure 3-44 Master/Follower Configuration Dialog Screen
3–41
Configuration/Remote Voltage Bias Save Comm Block at Power Off

Enable/Disable – Allows Remote Voltage Bias to When the Auto/Manual Switch Type is set to "None"
be Enabled or Disabled. or "Toggle", the following selections are available:
RVB Scale Factor Don’t Save – Allows the state of the "Block Auto
Allows a forward scale factor to be applied to the Operation" communication command to NOT be
raw value being supplied to the control from SCADA. saved when power has been lost.
RVB Heartbeat Timer Save – Allows the state of the "Block Auto
Operation" communication command to be saved
The Heartbeat Timer is the refresh value of the
when power has been lost.
Internal Heartbeat. The remote voltage parameter
must be written to the control within the period
defined in the RVB Heartbeat Timer. If the timer SCAMP Initialize on Power Up
times out, the control reverts back to the normal When the Auto/Manual Switch Type is set to
chosen regulating method using the bandcenter "SCAMP", the following selections are available:
and LDC settings.
When Last Save is selected, the SCAMP switch
Reverse RVB Scale Factor is configured in such a way that upon the control
Allows a reverse scale factor to be applied to the performing a cold power up, the state of the SCAMP
raw value being supplied to the control from SCADA. switch is initialized to the last saved state of the
SCAMP switch prior to the control powering off.
Configuration/Run Through Neutral For example, if prior to powering off the control,
Enable/Disable – Allows the Run Through Neutral the SCAMP switch was in Manual, then when the
feature to be Enabled and Disabled. control is powered back on the control will initially go
back to the Manual state and vise versa. Now when
Maximum Allowed Taps – The Maximum Allowed Auto Mode is selected, the control always initializes
Tap setting provides a user selectable limit for the into the Auto Mode after powering up regardless of
number of taps that are allowed to be taken to the saved state of the control prior to powering off.
accomodate taking one tap through neutral.
Tap Operations Between Runs – This setting is Configuration/Fast Voltage Recovery
the number of operations the control will count up Enable/Disable – Allows Fast Voltage Recovery to
to before allowing the Run Through Neutral feature be Enabled or Disabled.
to operate if all pre-conditions are met.
Fast Voltage Recovery – Allows a setting from
Maximum Load Current – The Run Through 1.0 to 15.0 V outside the normal band edges in
Neutral feature will not be allowed to operate when 1.0 V increments. When voltage exceeds the Raise
the Maximum Load Current setting is exceeded. or Lower band edge plus the Fast Voltage Recovery
setting, the normal definite or inverse time delay is
Maximum RTN Standby Operations – This setting
replaced with instantaneous operation (<0.5 Sec).
provides the number of attempts to exceed the RTN
feature before the "RTN Fail to Operate" Alarm is
initiated.
Configuration/Low Current Block – When

enabled the control determines if Load Current is
less than 4 mA coincident with Tap Delta Voltage
being less than .4 V AC. When these conditions exist
the control will initiate an alarm and block regulation.
3–42
TapTalk – 3
Configuration/Voltage Reduction (VR) Configuration/VAr Bias

Standard VR – Allows standard Voltage Reduction VAr Bias can be enabled or disabled. Use of VAr
to be Enabled or Disabled. Bias allows coordination of the M-2001D with
M-2501 series Capacitor Bank Controls. Maximum
Smart VR – Allows Smart Voltage Reduction to be Capacitor Bank size is adjustable from 4 KVAr to
Enabled or Disabled. This setting is only available 12000 KVAr.
when Standard VR is Disabled.
Max 3 Phase Capacitor Bank Size – Maximum
Smart VR LDC – Allows Smart Voltage Reduction Capacitor Bank size is adjustable from 4 KVAr to
LDC to be Enabled or Disabled. This setting is only 12000 KVAr.
available when Smart VR is Enabled.
Lead % Bank Size Pickup – Lower negative VAr
Smart VR LDC Settings – When enabled, existing limit in percentage of the Max Cap Bank size below
LDC settings are ignored and the Smart VR LDC which the control will increase the upper band edge
settings will be used. The choice between R and X, by the amount defined by VAr Bias Voltage Step.
or Z compensation is determined by the LDC setting
in the Setpoints screen. Lag % Band Size Pickup – Upper positive VAr
limit in percentage of the Max Cap Bank size above
Com VR Turnoff Timer – Allows Voltage Reduction which the control will decrease the lower band edge
to be turned off after a prescribed time period from by the amount defined by VAr Bias Voltage Step.
1 to 999 minutes. A setting of zero disables this
feature. VAr Bias Voltage Step – Amount by which the
control will increase or decrease the Upper or Lower
Save VR at Power Off – Save Voltage Reduction band edges when there is a VAr Bias out of band
at Power Off allows the state of the "Voltage situation.
Reduction" communication command to be saved
or not saved when power has been lost. The default Max VAr Bias Duration – Maximum allowable time
setting is "Don’t Save". in minutes the control will bias the voltage edge.
Configuration/Miscellaneous
Undo/Refresh – The Undo command allows
the user to undo any setting changes in the
Configuration screen before the settings have been
saved to either the Device or Open File. It also
refreshes the screen with the data stored in the unit.
Save – The Save command saves the setting
changes to either the Open File when in File mode or
the Device when TapTalk® is connected to a device.
Close – The Close command cancels any hardware
setting changes before the hardware settings
changes have been sent to either the Device or
Open File.
3–43
Setup/Tap Settings Tap Setting/Operation Counter

Tap Settings/General Configuration – Selects the contact operation
Tap Information – Tap information can be disabled sequence that will cause the software counter to
or can be selected to one of the following tap increment by one. Open/close/open (X1), open/
position knowledge methods: close or close/open contact operation (X2). The
count window mode registers any activity as a valid
• Regulate Internal (KeepTrack™) input within the count window time setting. Factory
• Regulate External #1 setting is X1.
• Regulate External #2 The Cam Follower setting should be selected
• Regulate External #3 when a Cam Follower contact input is wired into
the Counter contact input of the M‑2001D. The
• XFMR External #1 operation counter and resettable operation counter
• XFMR External #2 will increment when the counter input sees the cam
• XFMR External #3 follower open and then close.
• Contact KeepTrack™ 1R1L Count Window – Operation count will increment by
• Contact KeepTrack 1N only one count during a set time period or "Count
Window". This is true no matter how many counter
inputs occur during the count window time period.
InterTap Delay – Adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds After a counter input is accepted, the count window
in 1 second increments with a factory setting of timer begins and another count won’t be accepted
0 seconds. This value must be set less than the until the count window time period expires. The
count window setting for counter operation. count window time period can be set from 0.5 to
60.5 seconds. The count window setting must be
Tap Settings/Tap Limits set greater than the InterTap Delay setting.
Enable/Disable – Allows Tap Limits to be enabled X Mode Delay
or disabled.
When the control is using X1 or X2 mode counter
Block Raise/Block Lower – When enabled, Block contact detection method, the X1/X2 mode delay
Raise and Block Lower are adjustable from the Tap setting in millisecond can be used to delay the
Maximum configuration point to the Tap Minimum detection of the NEUTRAL position switch. This is
value in 1 step increments (Tap Limit Block Raise sometimes necessary if the regulator activates the
cannot be lower than Tap Limit Block Lower +4. Tap counter contact switch before the neutral switch
Limit Block Lower cannot be higher than Tap Limit when moving to the neutral position. The default
Block Raise –4). value is 10 ms.
Highest Tap/Lowest Tap Preset (Counter) – Displays the number of

operations since the last reset.
The M‑2001D Digital Tapchanger Control tap position
information applies to many different configurations Alarm Limit (Op Count Signal Alarm) – Displays
of tapchangers, e.g., ±16 taps, 1 to 17 taps, ±10 taps, the Op Count Signal Alarm limit value from 0
1 to 33 taps, etc. Two configuration points, Lowest to 999,999. This value sets the trigger for the
Tap and Highest Tap, are assigned to allow the user Programmable Alarm "Op Count Signal" if enabled.
to select the range of a specific tapchanger. The
Resettable (Operation Counter) – Displays the
Highest Tap range is 0 to 33 taps, and the Lowest
number of operations since the last reset. Selecting
Tap range is –33 to +29 taps.
the Reset check box and then selecting Save sends
a reset command to the control.
Neutral Counter – The Neutral Switch Counter is
updated each time the neutral input is detected.
Neutral Switch Counter can also preset to any value.
The Neutral Switch Counter is a software counter
that is stored in non-volatile memory and has a
maximum value of 999,999.
3–44
TapTalk – 3
Tap Settings/Motor Seal-in Failure Block The Tap Statistics Tap Wear feature also includes
When Input Selection 1 is set to "Seal-In Input", the two settings that are located in the TapTalk,
Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature and the input Tap Settings dialog screen (Figure 3-45) in the
to the Abnormal Tap Position alarm are enabled by Tap Statistics section and in the HMI under the
default. The user may choose to disable the Motor Configuration/Tap Settings menu. Both settings
Seal-in Block feature. However, the input to the are considered to generate a Programmable Alarm
Abnormal Tap Position alarm is always enabled output "Individual Tap Wear Alarm":
when Motor Seal-in is selected.
• Maximum Tap Wear setting – The
Maximum Tap Wear setting can be set
Tap Settings/Drag Hands from 1–999,999.
Drag Hands Lower – Displays the lowest tap since • Individual Tap Wear Alarm setting – The
last reset. Selecting the Reset check box and then Individual Tap Wear Alarm setting is a
selecting Save sends a reset command to the control. percentage setting with a range from
Drag Hands Raise – Displays the highest tap since 1–200% and a default of 100%. This
last reset. Selecting the Reset check box and then setting is used in conjunction with the
selecting Save sends a reset command to the control. Maximum Tap Wear setting to determine
when the "Individual Tap Wear Alarm" is
triggered.
Tap Settings/Tap Statistics
The Individual Tap Wear alarm will trigger
The Tap Statistics Tap Wear feature provides the when the number of operations on any
user with the capability to determine tap wear single tap exceeds the Individual Tap
in a regulator’s tap change mechanism. The Tap Wear Alarm setting. This alarm also
Statistics Tap Wear feature records the accumulated triggers SOE and OSC.
primary current on each tap change using the
measured Primary Current just prior to moving off
a tap. Primary current is calculated from measured Tap Settings/Tap Calibration
Secondary Load Current times the Primary Current Tap Position – Value of actual tap position can be
Multiplier. The accumulated Primary Current for set from -16 to 16 including Neutral.
each tap position is displayed on the Tap Statistics
dialog screen (Figure 3-31) which displays the Tap Settings/Miscellaneous
number of times the regulator has been on each
tap. The Tap Statistics are stored in non-volatile Undo/Refresh – The Undo command allows the
memory and will remain intact through power cycle user to undo any setting changes in the Tap Settings
and firmware update, as its value is in its long term screen before the settings have been saved to either
indication of mechanism wear. the Device or Open File. It also refreshes the screen
with the data stored in the unit.
The Tap Statistics can be downloaded to a CSV file
and printed. Tap Statistics can also be downloaded Save – The Save command saves the Tap Settings
in CSV format to an SD card. The File name defaults changes to either the Open File when in File mode or
to the serial number of the unit but allows for user the Device when TapTalk® is connected to a device.
modification. Close – The Close command cancels any Tap
Settings changes before the changes have been
sent to either the Device or Open File.
3–45
Figure 3-45 Setup Tap Settings Dialog Screen
Figure 3-46 Tap Settings Dialog Screen – Contact KeepTrack™ 1N
3–46
TapTalk – 3
Setup/Alarms Alarms/Miscellaneous
Programmable Alarm Relay Undo/Refresh – The Undo command allows the
The programmable alarm function (Figure 3-47) user to undo any setting changes in the Alarms
provides alarm monitoring for one or more of the screen before the settings have been saved to either
following conditions: Comm Block, Block Raise the Device or Open File. It also refreshes the screen
(Tap), Block Lower (Tap), Block Raise (Voltage), with the data stored in the unit.
Voltage Reduction, Max VAr Bias Duration
Save – The Save command saves the Alarms
Lead/Lag, Individual Tap Wear, LDC/LDZ, Line
settings changes to either the Open File when in
Current Limit, Reverse Power, Block Lower
File mode or the Device when TapTalk is connected
(Voltage), Abnormal Tap Position, Backup Power
to a device.
Fail, Run Through Neutral Fail to Operate, and
Operations Count Signal. Alarm conditions are Close – The Close command cancels any Alarms
continuously displayed in the Metering & Status setting changes before the changes have been sent
screen (Figure 3-28). to either the Device or Open File.
The Tap Changer Failure Alarm is only functional
when the Operation Counter configuration is set to
Cam Follower.
The Alarms Dialog screen also provides the means
to reset the Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block, the
Low Current Block, the Run Through Neutral Fail
to Operate Alarm and the Master/Follower Lockout.
Figure 3-47 Programmable Alarms Dialog Screen
3–47
Setup/Wakeup Screens Wakeup Screens/Miscellaneous

The Wakeup Screens (Figure 3-48) feature allows Default – The Default command allows the user to
the user to select specific control parameters that reset the Wakeup Screens to the default settings.
will be displayed when the control is awakened by
depressing the EXIT/WAKE pushbutton. When the Save – The Save command saves the Wakeup
control is awakened the selected parameters are Screen changes to either the Open File when in
displayed in a cycling fashion. The display can also File mode or the Device when TapTalk® is connected
be directed to a specific parameter by utilizing the to a device.
 or  pushbuttons. Pressing the EXIT pushbutton Close – The Close command cancels any Wakeup
will stop the cycling display on the displayed Screen changes before the changes have been sent
parameter. Press EXIT again to return to the User to either the Device or Open File.
Lines screen.
Figure 3-48 Setup Wakeup Screen Dialog Screen
3–48
TapTalk – 3
Setup/Data Logging The checksum is used to ensure the integrity of the

Data is recorded internally into non volatile memory. record stored. The average value is calculated over
The data log is transferred in the Comtrade format. the data logging interval.
The Comtrade format consist of two files, the
Due to the internal structure of the Comtrade
configuration file (*.cfg) and the data file (*.dat).
format, time stamping is always performed. A total of
Data logging will continue indefinitely as long as 6 Mbytes (100,000 records) of data can be saved
the data interval is set to a non-zero value. A zero in non volatile memory.
value for the data interval will effectively disable
When connected to a M-2001D Tapchanger Control
data logging. The data log, can be downloaded the Data Logging feature provides the user with
using MODBUS® (see M-2001D protocol document) the ability to initiate data logging of all control
or DNP (using file transfer) protocol. The data can parameters to the selected control for downloading
be viewed using any Comtrade compatible viewer. at a later time.
TapTalk provides such a tool.
This feature allows the user to configure the
Data logging interval ranges from 0 to 120 min with parameters that the control will use to log data,
an increment of 1 minute. Once data logging is and to download the logged data to a Comtrade
enabled, the control will store the data in records at (*.cfg) file. This file format can be viewed by a third
the data interval rate. Each record has the following party Common Format for Transient Data Exchange
data: (COMTRADE) format viewer software.
• Load Voltage
Setup/Data Logging/Setup
• Primary VA
This submenu item displays the Data Logging
• Power Factor Setup Dialog Screen (Figure 3-49).
• Source Voltage
In the Logging Timer section, the Data Log
• Compensated Voltage
Interval allows the user to input the interval in
• Primary VAr minutes at which the data will be logged.
• Frequency
Save – The Save command saves the Data Logging
• Primary Watts Setup changes to either the Open File when in File
• Load Current mode or the Device when TapTalk® is connected to
• Tap Position a device.
• Primary Current Close – The Close command cancels any Data
• Operations Count Logging setup changes before the changes have
• Circulating/DVAr Current been sent to either the Device or Open File.
• Meter Out Voltage
■ NOTE: When Load Voltage, Compensated
• RTN Counter Voltage, Source Voltage and Load
Current are selected, the data to be
retrieved will consist of the average,
minimum and maximum values over the
sampling period.
Figure 3-49 Data Logging Setup Dialog Screen
3–49
Setup/Data Logging/Retrieve
This submenu item when selected, displays the
Data Log Download Screen (Figure 3-50) which
allows selection of the parameters and date/time
range to be retrieved. Selecting "Download" initiates
the retrieval of the current data logging file from
the control.
Setup/Data Logging/Clear
This submenu item when selected, clears the data
logging information stored in the control.
Figure 3-50 Data Log Download Dialog Screen
3–50
TapTalk – 3
Setup/Harmonics Setup
The Harmonics Setup dialog screen provides the
user with the ability to select Voltage and Current
Harmonics for monitoring relative to a Voltage
and Current threshold setting. Whenever any
selected Voltage or Current Harmonic exceeds
their respective threshold if selected in Sequence
of Events setup will initiate Sequence of Events
recording. The threshold level is set as a percentage
of the fundamental.
Figure 3-51 Harmonics Setup Dialog Screen
3–51
Setup/Oscillograph/Setup When triggered, the time stamp is

T h e O s c i l l o g r a p h R e c o rd e r p r o v i d e s recorded and the recorder continues
comprehensive data recording (voltage, current recording for a user-defined period. The
and status input/output signals) for all monitored snapshot of the waveform is stored in
waveforms (at 16 samples per cycle). Oscillograph memory for later retrieval using TapTalk
data can be downloaded using the communications S-2001D Communications Software.
ports to any Windows ™ personal computer • Samples/Cycle – The number of
running the S-2001D TapTalk® Communications samples/cycle can be selected to either
Software. Once downloaded, the waveform data 16, 32 or 64 samples/cycle.
can be examined and printed using the TapPlot®
• Post-Trigger Delay – A post-trigger
Oscillograph Data Analysis Software.
delay of 5% to 95% must be specified.
The general information required to setup the After triggering, the recorder will continue
Oscillograph Recorder (Figure 3-52) includes: to store data for the programmed portion
of the total record before rearming for the
• Number of Partitions – When next record. For example, a setting of 80%
untriggered, the recorder continuously will result in a record with 20% pre-trigger
records waveform data, keeping the data and 80% post-trigger data.
data in a buffer memory. The recorder’s
memory may be partitioned into 1 to 16
partitions (Table 3-1).
Number of Partitions Cycles Per Partition

1 1365
2 910
3 682
4 546
5 455
6 390
7 341
8 303
9 273
10 248
11 227
12 210
13 195
14 182
15 170
16 160
Table 3-1 Oscillograph Recorder Partitions and Cycles for 16 Samples/Cycle
3–52
TapTalk – 3
Figure 3-52 Oscillograph Setup Dialog Screen
3–53
Setup/Oscillograph/Front Panel Message Setup/Oscillograph/Retrieve

The "Oscillograph Record Triggered" cycling display The Retrieve command initiates a sequence of
can be enabled from the TapTalk® Communications dialog screens (Figures 3-55 and 3-56) to download
Software by navigating to the "Oscillography the Oscillograph data from the currently connected
Message" (Setup/Oscillograph/Front Panel control. Oscillograph data must be retrieved from
Message) dialog screen (Figure 3-53) and selecting the control in a Comtrade file (*.cfg) in order to
"Enable". It can also be enabled from the HMI by be viewed. TapPlot® can be utilized to view the file
navigating to the "Communication HMI" menu. contents.
Figure 3-53 Oscillograph Front Panel Message

Dialog Screen
Setup/Oscillograph/Trigger
The Oscillograph Recorder can be manually
triggered by the user. When trigger is selected a
confirming dialog screen is displayed. Selecting
Yes triggers the Oscillograph Recorder and TapTalk
displays a confirming dialog screen.
Dialog Screen
Figure 3-54 Oscillograph Trigger

Dialog Screen

(Save As) Dialog Screen
Setup/Oscillograph/Clear
The Clear command clears any Oscillograph
records on the connected control.
3–54
TapTalk – 3
Setup/Sequence of Events/Setup
The Sequence of Events Setup consists of
selecting the initiating Pickup and Dropout elements
of the control and also setting any logical conditions
relative to the Pickup and Dropout sequence to
trigger the Sequence of Events recorder.
Selecting the OR and AND Trigger elements is
accomplished by selecting either OR or AND Gate
boxes on Figure 3-57. TapTalk® will display the
OR Gate or AND Gate Setup Dialog Screen. After
selections are made in the OR Gate and AND
Gate dialog screens the user must select either
OR or AND logic to initiate the Sequence of Events
recorder. Selecting SAVE then writes the settings
to the control.
Figure 3-57 Sequence of Events Trigger Logic and Element Selection Dialog Screen
3–55
Figure 3-58 Sequence of Events Pickup/Dropout Edge Sensitive OR Gate Setup Dialog Screen
Figure 3-59 Sequence of Events Pickup Level Sensitive AND Gate Setup Dialog Screen
Figure 3-60 Sequence of Events Dropout Level Sensitive AND Gate Setup Dialog Screen
3–56
TapTalk – 3
Setup/Sequence of Events/Retrieve Setup/Sequence of Events/Clear

The Retrieve command downloads the events The Clear command clears out the Sequence of
from the currently connected control. Events must Events recorder.
be retrieved from the control and stored in a file in
order to be viewed.
Figure 3-62 Clear Sequence of Events Record

Dialog Screen
Figure 3-61 Retrieve Sequence of Events File

Save As Dialog Screen
Setup/Sequence of Events/View
The View command permits the user to display a
detailed list of past Sequence of Events and their
corresponding captured parameters. (Figure 3-63)
The parameters captured in the Sequence of Events
file include:
• Local Voltage
• Source Voltage
• Frequency
• Tap Position
• Motor Current
• Load Current
• Resettable Operations Counter
• RMS Voltage
• Meter Out Voltage
• RTN Success Counter
• Profile Number
• Time Stamp
• Trigger Status
• Voltage Harmonics Magnitude
• Current Harmonics Magnitude
• Voltage Harmonics Status (31)
• Current Harmonics Status (31)
3–57
Figure 3-63 View Sequence of Events Record Dialog Screen
3–58
TapTalk – 3
Setup/CBEMA Events/Setup
There are a total of 4 Event Monitors in CBEMA
(Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers
Association). Each CBEMA event monitor has a
different minimum duration limit; Event 1, 1 – 60
cycles, Event 2, 1 – 120 cycles, Event 3, 60 – 60000
cycles and Event 4, 1 – 60 cycles. When Pickup is
set to less than 100% it operates as a sag (under
voltage) function, and when it is greater than 100%
it operates as a swell (over voltage) function.
Figure 3-64 CBEMA Setting Dialog Screen
3–59
Setup/Display All Settings Command The All Setpoint Table includes Jump Command
Selecting Display All Settings displays the All Buttons which allow the user to jump from a
Setpoints dialog screen (Figure 3-65). This dialog scrolling dialog screen to an individual control
screen contains the settings for each control function dialog screen and return to the scrolling
function within a single window to allow scrolling dialog screen. All available parameters can be
through all control setpoint and configuration values. reviewed or changed when jumping to an individual
control function dialog screen.
The individual Feature and Function selection
buttons are described in the applicable sections. The All Setpoints screen can be printed or saved
to a *.HTM file for viewing.
Figure 3-65 All Setpoints Dialog Screen
3–60
TapTalk – 3
UTILITY Block Auto Control via Communication

Block – Blocks automatic operation of the
addressed control.
Unblock – Initiates automatic operation of the
addressed control.
Restoring Automatic Operation (Local)

Automatic operation can be restored from the front
panel by removing the "Block Auto Control via
Communication" through TapTalk® or by performing
the following:
1. From the control front panel pushbuttons
change the Comm Block Auto setting
in the Configuration/Nameplate menu
to DON’T SAVE.
2. Remove power to the control, then reapply
power to the control. Automatic operation
will then be restored.
The Utility menu includes the Remote Control, SCAMP Control

Control Information, Change User Access Code, The SCAMP Control feature (Figure 3-66) allows the
Set Date & Time, Device Discovery, Multi Level user to remotely observe the status of the Adapter
Access Code, SD Card Access Code, IEC 61850, Panel SCAMP pushbutton (when equipped). This
DNP, Master/Follower Configuration, Send feature also allows the user to change the state
Firmware Update, Convert Datalog File to CSV of the Local SCAMP pushbutton on the Adapter
Format, Convert Binary Soe File to .SOE Format Panel/Control.
and TapPlot® submenu items.
Utility/Remote Control
▲ CAUTION: This feature should be used with
extreme caution.
The Remote Control menu item located in the
Utility drop down menu displays the applicable
Remote Control screen (Figure 3-66). Remote
Control allows the user to:
• Remotely raise or lower one tap position.
• Apply Voltage Reduction Step 1 or 2 or 3.
to either "Toggle" or "NONE" the Block
Auto Control via Communication (Comm
Block) setting is available.
to "SCAMP" the SCAMP Auto/Manual
Control setting is available.
3–61
Figure 3-66 Remote Control Screens
3–62
TapTalk – 3
Utility/Control Information Utility/Change User Access Code

The Control Information submenu item displays The User Access Code Level 1 and User Access
the Control Information Screen (Figure 3-67). Code Level 2 protect access to the control from the
The Control Information screen provides specific front keypad and TapTalk.
information about the addressed control. The
Control Information screen includes the following: User Access Code protection, when implemented,
is as follows:
• The addressed control’s serial number
Default View All
• Control’s firmware version
Level 1 Change Setpoints, Date/Time
• The text currently displayed in the User
Level 2 Change Setpoints, Configuration,
Lines 1 and 2
Communication, Set New Access
Codes, Start Data Logging, Setup
Data Logging, Remote Control,
Set User Text Lines, Set Control
Date/Time
■ NOTE: If additional Access Codes are desired

then see Multi Level Access Code later
in the Utility section.
To change User Level Access Codes, perform the
following:
1. Select Utility/Change User Access
Code from the TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk
will display the Change User Access
Figure 3-67 Control Information Screen Code dialog screen (Figure 3-68).
The Control Information screen also provides the

user with the ability to review and change the user
lines for the addressed control.
Control Information/Miscellaneous
Save – The Save command saves the User Line
changes to the control when TapTalk® is connected
to a control.
Close – The Close command cancels any User
Line changes before the changes have been sent
to the control.
Figure 3-68 Change User Access Code
Dialog Screen
2. Input a new Level 1/Level 2 six digit

alphanumeric User Access Code.
3. Input the User Access Code from Step 2,
in Confirm New User Access Code.
4. Select Save. TapTalk will display a Save
to Device confirmation screen.
5. Select Yes. TapTalk will return to the Main
Screen.
3–63
Utility/Set Date & Time 3. Verify that the desired Daylight Saving
The Set Date & Time submenu item enables the setting is selected.
user to review the internal clocks for the PC or the 4. If desired select "Sync Time at
addressed control and also allows the selection of Startup" and the desired "Allowable time
daylight saving. mismatch" value.
To set control time/date and/or Daylight Saving, 5. If PC Clock was selected and the Date/
perform the following: Time of the PC is the desired time to be
set in the control. then select Save.
1. From the TapTalk® Main Screen Utility
drop down menu select Set Date & 6. If Control Clock was selected, then
Time. TapTalk will display a warning input the desired Date/Time, then select
(Figure 3-69) regarding time stamped Save. TapTalk will respond with a Reset
values. Select OK. TapTalk will display Demand and Energy warning screen
Figure 3-70. (Figure 3-71).
Figure 3-71 Reset Demand and Energy Warning

Dialog Screen
 CAUTION: Whenever the clock is reset and data

Figure 3-69 Set Date/Time Warning logging is enabled the data log should be cleared.
Dialog Screen
7. Select OK to reset Demand Metering,
Energy Metering, Drag Hands and
2. From the Set Control Date/Time dialog Resettable Operation Counter or Cancel
screen (Figure 3-70) select either which will not reset these parameters.
Control Clock or PC Clock.
TapTalk will return to the Main Screen.
Figure 3-70 Set Control Date/Time

Dialog Screen
3–64
TapTalk – 3
Utility/ Device Discovery Utility/Multi Level Access Code

The Device Discovery menu selection can be The Multi Level Access Code menu selection
used when the control exists on an Ethernet provides the user with the ability to create up
network. It allows the user utilizing TapTalk® to to 30 unique fifteen character Access Codes
discover M-2001D Beckwith Electric products on (Figure 3-73). The list is created in TapTalk and
the network without needing to know the individual downloaded to the control. Once a control has the
IP Addresses of other controls. When a control is list, the user can download a log of date and time
found and selected the user can send and receive each access code was used to access the control
DNP Configuration files, IEC 61850 CID files and as well as when that access was terminated.
receive Access Code Log files.
Figure 3-73 Multi Level Access Code

Dialog Screen
Figure 3-72 Device Discovery Dialog Screen
3–65
Utility/SD Card Access Code Utility/IEC 61850

This feature allows the user to write a User Access The IEC 61850 menu selection (when purchased)
Code Level 1 or 2 to a Smart Flash SD Card. When provides the user with access to the IEC 61850
a User Access Code is present on the SD Card, Protocol Configuration Editor (Figure 3-75). The
when inserted, the control reads the User Access following Configuration Editor features are provided:
Code and does not prompt for the Access Code
while the SD Card is inserted. • File - New, Open, Save Template, Save,
Save As
• Schema - 1.4 or 3.0
• Reporting - Metering Dataset and Status
Dataset
• GOOSE Publisher - 1 through 5
• GOOSE Subscriber - 1 and 2
• Validate
• Print and Print Preview
• See Appendix D for detailed information
Also, the IEC 61850 menu provides access to

"Send" and "Receive" Configuration Files, CID File
Figure 3-74 SD Card Access Code Identifier and the Non-Standard Data Definition
Dialog Screen document (.pdf) for reference.
Figure 3-75 IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Dialog Screen
3–66
TapTalk – 3
Utility/DNP Utility/DNP/DNP Configuration Editor

The Utility DNP Menu provides access to the The DNP Configuration Editor menu selection
DNP Configuration Editor, Source Address opens the M-2001D DNP Configuration Editor
Validation, Send DNP Configuration, Receive dialog screen (Figure 3-76) which provides the user
DNP Configuration File, DNP File Identifier and with the following capabilities:
UDP Port Settings features.
• M-2001D default DNP configuration files
(*.xml) can be loaded for editing or become
the basis for new DNP configuration files.
• Selected DNP configuration files (*.xml)
other than M-2001D default files can be
loaded for editing or become the basis for
new DNP configuration files.
• Binary Inputs, Analog Inputs, Binary/
Control Outputs and Analog Outputs may
be added, edited or deleted.
• Dummy positions may be added to allow
SCADA table matching.
• Variations may also be edited.
• File can be saved to disk or to the
connected control.
• Items in the editor can be moved, added
and removed by dragging and dropping.
• Enable/Disable unsolicited response.
• Screen can be printed.
• Master Address for unsolicited responses
and/or Source Address Validation.
• See Appendix C for detailed information.
3–67
Figure 3-76 M-2001D DNP Configuration Editor Dialog Screen
3–68
TapTalk – 3
Utility/DNP/Source Address Validation Utility/DNP/Send DNP Configuration File

The Source Address Validation feature is available The Send DNP Configuration File menu selection
from the Utility/DNP menu selection. When Source provides the user with the capability to upload a
Address Validation is enabled it applies only when DNP configuration file to the control. To upload a
DNP3.0 Protocol has been selected regardless of DNP configuration file proceed as follows:
the physical interface. If enabled the client address
must match the address set by the user in the DNP 1. From the TapTalk® Main Screen select
Configuration file before accepting the message as Utility/DNP/Send DNP Configuration
File. TapTalk will display the
a valid one.
Authentication Key Generated dialog
Figure 3-77 Source Address Validation

Dialog Screen Figure 3-79 Authentication Key Generated
Dialog Screen
2. Select OK. TapTalk will display the Open

File Dialog screen (Figure 3-80) with a
default *.xml file extension.
Figure 3-78 Confirm Writing to the Device

Dialog Screen
Figure 3-80 DNP Open File Dialog Screen
3. Select the target file, then select Open.

TapTalk will display the DNP Send
status screen Figure 3-81.
Figure 3-81 Send Status Screen
3–69
4. When the DNP Configuration file has

been uploaded TapTalk® will display
a confirmation screen (Figure 3-82).
Select OK. TapTalk will return to the
Main Screen.
Figure 3-84 Download Complete Dialog Screen
Utility/DNP/DNP File Identifier

The DNP File Identifier menu selection when
selected displays the DNP File Identifier that is
loaded onto the control.
Figure 3-82 DNP Upload Complete Screen
Utility/DNP/Receive DNP Configuration File

The Receive DNP Configuration File menu
selection provides the user with the capability to
download a DNP configuration file from the control.
To download a DNP configuration file proceed as
follows:
1. From the TapTalk Main Screen
select Utility/DNP/Receive DNP Figure 3-85 DNP File Information Dialog
Configuration File. TapTalk will display Screen
the Save As dialog screen (Figure 3-83)
with a default *.xml file extension. Utility/DNP/UDP Port Settings
A total of 5 UDP channels exist for DNP. The first
channel is reserved for unsolicited messages. The
control will send any unsolicited responses to the
UDP Remote IP/Port that has been configured. If
the Remote IP and Port have not been configured,
the unit will not send any unsolicited messages.
Figure 3-83 Save As File Dialog Screen
2. Select the target file or enter a valid name

for the new file, then select Save. TapTalk
will momentarily display a download
status screen. Figure 3-86 UDP Settings Dialog Screen
3. When the DNP Configuration file has
been downloaded TapTalk will display
a confirmation screen (Figure 3-84).
Select OK. TapTalk will return to the Main
Screen.
3–70
TapTalk – 3
Utility/ Master/Follower Configuration

The Master/Follower Configuration menu selection
(when purchased) provides the user with access
to the Master/Follower Configuration Tool dialog
screen (Figure 3-87). The Configuration Tool
provides the means to:
• Discover Master/Follower controls on the
connected network
• Display Control Master/Follower settings
• Edit and apply Master/Follower settings
to the selected control
• Reset the Master/Follower Lockout Alarm
Figure 3-87 Master/Follower Configuration Menu
3–71
Utility/Send Firmware Update 4. Press the ENT pushbutton, the control

The Send Firmware Update feature is available will display the following:
from the Utility menu selection. This feature allows
the user to upload firmware updates to the control. On the PC
Firmware updates may be uploaded at any time, Click OK
as the control settings are not affected. To send a
firmware update to the control proceed as follows: 5. From the Upload dialog screen Figure
3-89) select OK. TapTalk will display the
1. Remove the control from service.
Send Status Screen Figure 3-81).
2. From the TapTalk® Main Screen select
When the file transfer has been completed
Utility/Send Firmware Update. TapTalk
TapTalk will display a Firmware Upload
will display the Open file dialog screen
Confirmation screen (Figure 3-90) and
(Figure 3-88) with a default *.bot file
close communications.
extension.
Figure 3-90 File Transfer Confirmation Screen
6. When the control displays the following:
Update Complete
Figure 3-88 Open File Dialog Screen Rebooting
3. Select the target file, then select Open. The control will reboot automatically.
TapTalk will display the Firmware
Upload dialog screen Figure 3-89.
 NOTE: After a Firmware Update, remove power
to the control and then reapply power to
initialize the unit.
7. Select OK. TapTalk will return to the main

screen. Communication will need to be
reestablished.
Figure 3-89 Firmware Upload Screen
The dialog screen contains instructions

to verify that the control displays "On the
PC click OK" the control will display the
following:
Firmware Update
 Press ENT to begin
3–72
TapTalk – 3
Utility/Convert Datalog File to CSV Format Help

This feature allows Datalog Files created on the
M‑2001D to be converted to "*.csv" format files that
can be opened in any spreadsheet program.
Utility/Convert Binary Soe File to .SOE Format

This feature allows the user to convert binary Soe The Help toolbar item provides the user with
files downloaded from third party software to the information about the control and the firmware
Beco (.SOE) format for viewing in the TapTalk SOE version that is installed in the unit.
Viewer (Figure 3-91).
Help/Contents
Windows The Instruction Book menu topic has been indexed
to its Table of Contents. By selecting the 'Navigator
pane' in Adobe Acrobat Reader, the user can
directly access selected topics.
Help/About S-2001D
The About submenu item provides the TapTalk
software version number, control firmware version,
The Windows toolbar item provides the Cascade (if connected), and copyright information.
and Tile display options. The Windows toolbar
item also allows the user to select between open
TapTalk® windows.
Figure 3-92 About TapTalk
Figure 3-91 Convert Binary File to SOE Format Dialog Screen
3–73
3.11 TapPlot Analysis Software
The TapPlot ® Analysis Software operates in Overview

conjunction with all TapTalk® Communications TapPlot® is a windows based program for viewing
Software on any computer running Windows™. the data that has been retrieved using the Data
TapPlot allows the user to plot and print tap data Logging feature of TapTalk®.
(comtrade*.cfg) retrieved from Beckwith Electric
M-2001D series Digital Tapchanger Controls. When TapPlot is started, a menu and tool bar are
displayed. This section describes each TapPlot
menu selection and explains each TapPlot
Starting TapPlot
command in the same order that they are displayed
1. Select the TapPlot menu item from the in the software program. Figure 3-93 presents the
TapTalk Menu (Utility/TapPlot.) The TapPlot Menu and Submenu Callouts.
TapPlot Window and Toolbar is displayed
(Figure 3-93).
2. Select File->Open from the menu, and
browse for the .cfg file.
3. Open the file. TapPlot should display the
saved data, as shown in Figures 3-94 &
3-95.
Figure 3-93 TapPlot Main Window with Submenus
3–74
TapTalk – 3
Figure 3-94 TapPlot Window with Data Logging Data Example
3–75
Figure 3-95 TapPlot Window with Oscillograph Data Example
3–76
TapTalk – 3
Markers
TapPlot includes two user selectable markers.
The first is positioned by double clicking on the
plotted wave form data. The second is positioned
by pressing and holding the SHIFT key and then
double clicking on the plotted wave form data.
The markers can be dragged by moving the cursor
over the marker until the cursor changes to a
double-headed arrow 1 , then holding down the Left
mouse button and dragging the marker. The first
marker can also be moved an interval at a time by
pressing the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key. The second
marker can be moved by pressing the Shift key and
the Left or Right arrow key.
Highest Value in
the Data Record Marker 1 Marker 2
Data Label
Marker
Data
Difference
Lowest Value in the Data Record
Marker 2 Data
Marker 1 Data
Figure 3-96 TapPlot Screen With Callouts
TapPlot Main Window – Bottom Right Data Display
Data Record Start Time Marker 1 Time Marker 2 Time
Figure 3-97 TapPlot Main Screen Data Time Stamp Display
3–77
Right-Click Filter Menus

Right-Click menus are available to allow filtering of
the data results. Figures 3-98 and 3-99 show the
right-click menus available in either a Datalog or
Oscillograph file.
Right Click
displays:
Analog Filter
Figure 3-98 Datalog File Right-Click Filter Menu
Right Click
displays:
Analog Filter
Right Click
displays:
Digital Filter
Figure 3-99 Oscillograph File Right-Click Filter Menus
3–78
TapTalk – 3
File Menu View Menu
The File menu allows the user to:

The View menu allows the user to:
• Open a TapPlot® (.cfg) file previously
downloaded by TapTalk®. • Display the Device Information (Figure
3-100) for the corresponding TapPlot data
• Print the displayed TapPlot data. file.
• A Print Preview of the displayed TapPlot • Fundamental
data.
• Power Factor
• Select the printer and printer settings to
be used. • Original Waveform
• Select from previously viewed .cfg files • Harmonics
(the last eight files displayed). • Zoom In, increase the resolution of the
• Exit the TapPlot program. tap data displayed on the screen.
• Zoom Out, decrease the resolution of the
tap data displayed on the screen.
• View ALL, returns the display to include
all data within the record.
• Select which Tool Bar (Toolbar/Status Bar)
is available on the display window.
Figure 3-100 Device Information Screen
3–79
Settings Menu Select Color provides the user with the capability
to change Foreground and Background display
color of individual Waveform traces for customized
plotting (Figure 3-102).
The Settings menu allows the selection of the

waveforms to be displayed and the format of display
colors.
Select Waveform allows the selection of any of the
following Data Log Tap Parameters to be plotted
or printed:
• Load Voltage (V)
• Compensated Voltage (V)
• Primary Watts (W)
• Primary (VA)
• Primary (VAr) Figure 3-102 Select Color Dialog Screen
• Load Current (A) Change Scale provides the user with the capability
• Power Factor to change the scaling of the displayed parameter.
• Frequency
• Tap Position
• Source Voltage (V)
• Primary Current (A)
• Circulating Current (mA)
• Operation Counter
The Waveform selections are made from the Select

Waveform screen (Figure 3-101).
Figure 3-103 Change Scale Screen
Figure 3-101 Select Waveform Dialog Screen
3–80
TapTalk – 3
Search Time Stamp provides the user with the Help Menu
capability to place the marker exactly at the desired
time stamp in the TapPlot® window.
The Help menu provides access to the Quick

Guide which provides basic information about
TapPlot menus and commands. The About
command provides version information for TapPlot.
Figure 3-104 Search Time Stamp Screen
Figure 3-105 About TapPlot Screen
3–81
3–82
System Setup – 4
4 System Setup
4.1 System Setup........................................................................... 4–4
Chapter four is designed for the person or group The selection of the M-2001D Unit Setup
responsible for the System Setup of the M-2001D parameters is performed using either the TapTalk®
Digital Tapchanger Control. S-2001D Communications Software or the control
Front Panel Human Machine Interface (HMI).
Chapter 4 consists of the System Setup Section, Instructions for TapTalk and the HMI are provided
which consists of general unit setup information: where applicable.
• User Access Codes TapTalk instructions assume that communications
• User Lines have been established with the control.
• System Clock
• Oscillograph Setup
• Sequence of Events Setup
• Wakeup Screens
• Communication
• SCADA HeartBeat
4–1
4.1 System Setup................................ 4–4 Communication............................................4–21

Direct Connections.....................................4–21
General Unit Setup.........................................4–4
Protocols....................................................4–21
User Access Codes........................................4–4
Communication Access Security
Setting Level 1 or Level 2 User Access and Timeout ..............................................4–21
Codes From The HMI...................................4–4
Enabling Communication Access
Setting Level 1 or Level 2 User Access Security and Timeout From The HMI.........4–22
Codes From TapTalk®..................................4–6
Enabling Communication Access Security
Setting Multi Level Access Codes and Setting Timeout From TapTalk............4–23
From TapTalk................................................4–7
Source Address Validation.........................4–24
User Lines.......................................................4–9 Enabling Source Address Validation
Setting User Lines From The HMI................4–9 From The HMI............................................4–24
Setting User Lines From TapTalk..............4–10 Enabling Source Address Validation

From TapTalk.............................................4–25
System Clock................................................4–10 Feeder and/or Substation Addressing........4–25
Setting Time/Date and Daylight Savings Setting Substation Address
From The HMI............................................4–10 From The HMI............................................4–27
Setting Date/Time and Daylight Savings Setting Feeder Address From The HMI.....4–28
From TapTalk.............................................4–12
Setting Communication Addresses
Oscillograph Setup.......................................4–13 From TapTalk.............................................4–29
Setup Oscillograph Recorder.....................4–14 Comm Block Auto........................................4–29
Sequence of Events Recorder.....................4–15 Setting Comm Block Auto From The HMI...4–29
Event Logic................................................4–16 Setting Comm Block Auto at Power Off
From TapTalk.............................................4–30
Setup Sequence of Events Recorder.........4–17
SCAMP Initialize on Power Up....................4–31
Wakeup Screens...........................................4–19
Setting SCAMP Initialize on Power Up
Selecting Wakeup Screen Parameters......4–19
From The HMI............................................4–31
Setting SCAMP Initialize on Power Up
From TapTalk.............................................4–32
4–2
System Setup – 4
Optional Ethernet Port.................................4–33 Optional Bluetooth.......................................4–49

Ethernet Port Configuration From TapTalk....4–33 Bluetooth Module Initialization...................4–50
Network Time Synchronization..................4–35 Bluetooth Initialization Overview................4–50
Port Enabler...............................................4–35 Bluetooth Setup From the HMI...................4–50
HMI Configuration of the Control’s Ethernet Bluetooth Setup From TapTalk®..................................4–52
Port for use on a network that
Bluetooth MODE1 Setup (TapTalk)...........4–54
supports DHCP Protocol.........................4–35
Resetting Bluetooth Module (HMI).............4–54
HMI Configuration of the Control’s Ethernet
Port for use on a network that does not Resetting Bluetooth Module (TapTalk).......4–55
support DHCP Protocol...........................4–36
Resetting Bluetooth Passkey (HMI)...........4–56
MODBUS Port and DNP Port Settings
From The HMI............................................4–38 Resetting Bluetooth Passkey (TapTalk).....4–57
Ethernet Keepalive Time Settings SCADA HeartBeat.........................................4–58

From The HMI............................................4–39
SCADA HeartBeat for LTC and Regulator....4–58
RS-485/Fiber Optic Port...............................4–40 SCADA HeartBeat for Profile Switching.....4–59
RS-485/Fiber Optic Port Setup HeartBeat Manual Mode............................4–59
From The HMI............................................4–40
Setting SCADA HeartBeat Option..............4–60
RS-485/Fiber Optic Port Setup
From TapTalk.............................................4–44
RS-232 Port Setup From The HMI...............4–44

RS-232 Port Setup From TapTalk..............4–47
Installing Modems........................................4–47
Connecting the PC Modem........................4–47
Initializing the PC Modem..........................4–48
Connecting the Local Modem
to the Control..............................................4–48
4–3

4.1 System Setup make changes to the configuration, communication,
and utilities. If the Level 2 Access Code is set to all
 NOTE: Appendix A includes the HMI menu zeros, this request for an Access Code will not be
structure for reference. Appendix seen and changes can be made without an Access
B Setpoint, Configuration and Code. The default Level 2 Access Code is 222222.
Communication Record Forms is
available to document control settings. The Level 3 Access Code is required to make
changes to calibration settings on the control.
GENERAL UNIT SETUP Contact Beckwith Electric Customer Service for
M‑2001D Level 3 Access Codes.
The General Unit setup consists of the setup of the
following features and functions:
 NOTE: Please record all user access codes in a
• User Access Codes secure location. If the user access code
• User Lines is lost or forgotten, please contact the
factory.
• System Clock
• Time and Date
Setting Level 1 or Level 2 User Access Codes
USER ACCESS CODES From The HMI
 NOTE: Level 1 and Level 2 User Access Codes
To prevent unauthorized access to the control are alphanumeric. The alphabetic
functions, there are provisions in the software for characters are upper case only.
assigning a Level 1 and/or Level 2 Access Code (up
to six characters). A fixed factory assigned Level 3
Access Code is required for changing calibration When changing an access code, if no key entry is
factors. When Level 1 or Level 2 Access Codes are made for approximately 15 minutes, and the screen
active, then an additional 30 Level Access Codes goes blank, and the digit furthest to the left has not
(up to 15 characters) can be enabled as either Level been entered, the user access code will revert to
1 or Level 2. The Access Codes can be set in the the previous one regardless of digits that have been
Communication/HMI Menu or from TapTalk®. changed. After a new Level 2 User Access Code
has been entered, the new User Access Code
Level Access protection will be automatically must be used to re-enter the Communications/
reinstated when either of the following conditions HMI menu. Be sure to record the new user access
are met: code for future use.
• No HMI menu activity for a period of To change User Access Codes from the HMI,
15 minutes perform the following:
• The user exits to the top of the HMI menu
for a period of greater than 10 seconds Button) pushbutton to awaken the
General access to read setpoints, to monitor status, "COMMUNICATION" or if a Memory
to reset draghand parameters and the resettable Card is present in the Smart Flash SD
operations counter do not require an Access Code. CARD slot "Memory Card".
make setpoint changes. If the Level 1 Access Code COMMUNICATION
is set to all zeros, this request for an Access Code CNFG
UTIL
will not be seen and changes can be made without
an Access Code. The default Level 1 Access Code OR
is 000000.
Memory Card
 
4–4
System Setup – 4
2. If the "Communication" menu is  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code,
displayed, then press the Down Arrow the display will automatically advance
pushbutton once. The unit will display the cursor to the next digit when input
the following: is momentarily paused.
Comm Settings 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then



3. From either the "Comm Settings" or entered, the display will briefly flash a
"Memory Card" menu, press the Right confirmation screen and display the
or Left Arrow pushbutton as necessary following:
Change Access Code
HMI
000000
 
until the following is displayed.  NOTE: When entering the new user access code
Level 1 Access Code the cursor to the next digit when input
Pres ENT to change is momentarily paused.
8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level new Level1/Level2 User Access Code,
2 Access is not active, or has been then press the ENT pushbutton. The
previously input, the following will be following will be displayed.
Access Code Updated
Change Access Code

000000
As soon as new User Access Codes are
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 entered, they will be required to change
Access prompt will be displayed. any setpoint or configuration parameter.

_
4–5
Setting Level 1 or Level 2 User Access Codes 5. Select OK. TapTalk will display an "Access
From TapTalk Codes Were Changed Successfully"
To change User Access Codes from TapTalk®, confirmation screen (Figure 4-3).
1. Select Utility/Change User Access
Code from the TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk
will display the "Change User Access
Code" dialog screen (Figure 4-1).
2. Input a new Level 1/Level 2 six digit
alphanumeric User Access Code.
Figure 4-3 Access Codes Were Changed
3. Input the User Access Code from Step 2,
in Confirm New User Access Code. Successfully Dialog Screen
4. Select Save. TapTalk will display a 6. Select OK. TapTalk will return to the Main
"Save to Device" confirmation screen Screen.
(Figure 4-2).
As soon as new User Access Codes are
entered, they will be required to change
any setpoint or configuration parameter.
Figure 4-1 Change User Access Code

Dialog Screen
Figure 4-2 Save to Device Confirmation Screen
4–6
System Setup – 4
Setting Multi Level Access Codes From TapTalk 2. Select "Add Access Code". TapTalk will
The Multi Level Access Code feature allows the display the next consecutive Access
user to create up to 30 unique Access Codes. Each Code Index with a default Level 2 access.
Access Code can be up to 15 characters in length 3. Select the desired index (left click), then
including spaces. After creating a list of Access double left click. TapTalk will display the
Codes, the list can be saved to either the host Access Code entry/edit dialog box.
computer or to the control. The Access Code file is
4. Enter/Edit the Access Code, then click
encrypted for security measures.
off the Access Code in the dialog screen.
1. Select Utility/Multi Level Access 5. Select "Save to PC". TapTalk will display
Code/Send/Retrieve from the TapTalk® the "Save As" dialog screen with an *.xml
toolbar. TapTalk will display the "Multi default file extension.
Level Access Code" dialog screen
(Figure 4-4). 6. Enter the desired file name and
destination folder, then select "Save".
7. To send the Multi Level Access Code file
to the control select "Send to Control".
TapTalk will display the "Access Level
Code" dialog screen (Figure 4-5).
Figure 4-5 Access Level Code Dialog Screen
8. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code,

then select OK.
entered, then TapTalk will display the
"Access granted successfully" dialog
screen (Figure 4-6). If not, re-enter a
valid code.
Figure 4-4 Multi Level Access Code

Dialog Screen
Figure 4-6 Access Key Dialog Screen
4–7
9. Select OK, TapTalk ® will display

the "Authentication Key generated
successfully" dialog screen (Figure 4-7).
Figure 4-7 Authentication Key Generated

Successfully Dialog Screen
10. Select OK, TapTalk will display the

"Open" dialog screen.
11. Select the Access Code file to be sent
to the control, then select "Open".
TapTalk will briefly display a status dialog
screen followed by a "Multi Access Code
Upload" dialog screen (Figure 4-8).
Figure 4-8 Multi Access Code Upload

Dialog Screen
12. Select OK. TapTalk will return to the Multi

Level Access Code dialog screen.
4–8
System Setup – 4
USER LINES 4. Press the Down arrow as necessary until

the following is displayed.
The user station identification lines (User Lines)
allow the user to uniquely identify the unit. Each
User Line 1 E
line of this display can have up to 20 ASCII
characters. User Lines are factory preset with Beckwith Electric
"Beckwith Electric" for Line 1 and "M-2001D" for
Line 2. 5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
When ENT is pressed at the Communications/HMI/ previously input, the following will be
User Line 1 or User Line 2 menu, an underline displayed. Go to Step 8.
cursor is displayed under the left-most digit. Each
digit is changed by using the  and  pushbuttons New User Line 1
to select the ASCII character (the ASCII character
list begins with "!"). The  or  pushbutton is Beckwith Electric
used to move the underline to the next digit. When
the ENT pushbutton is pressed, the new user line 6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
is stored into nonvolatile memory.
Setting User Lines From The HMI
_
To change User Lines from the HMI, perform the
following:  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
1. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot the display will automatically advance
Button) pushbutton to awaken the the cursor to the next digit when input
unit. The menu will advance to either is momentarily paused.
"COMMUNICATION" or if a Memory 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
Card is present in the Smart Flash SD press the ENT pushbutton.
CARD slot "Memory Card".
COMMUNICATION entered, the display will briefly flash a
CNFG
UTIL the following:
OR New User Line 1
Memory Card Beckwith Electric
  If not, re-enter a valid code.
2. If the "Communication" menu is
displayed, then press the Down Arrow  NOTE: When entering the new User Line the
pushbutton once. The unit will display display will automatically advance the
the following: cursor to the next digit when input is
momentarily paused.
Comm Settings 8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the

 new Line 1/Line 2 user line(s), then press
the ENT pushbutton. The following will
3. From either the "Comm Settings" or be displayed.
or Left Arrow pushbutton as necessary User Line 1 E
Beckwith Electric
HMI
 
4–9
Setting User Lines From TapTalk SYSTEM CLOCK

To change User Lines from TapTalk®, perform the The control is equipped with a real-time, 24‑hour
following: clock which is used with the Demand History feature
1. Select Utility/Control Information from to record date/time stamp information on quantities
the TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display saved in memory.
the Control Information dialog screen The power source for the clock is maintained for at
(Figure 4-9). least 24 hours during a system power outage by a
2. Input the new Line 1/Line 2 Information. charged capacitor (no battery). If the power outage
lasts longer than 24 hours, check the clock and
3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
reset if necessary.
"Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
screen (Figure 4-2). The system clock includes the capability to
automatically switch to and from daylight savings
time.
Setting Time/Date and Daylight Savings From

The HMI
To set the Time and Date from the HMI, perform
the following:
 CAUTION: Whenever clock is reset and data
logging is enabled, the data log should be cleared.
Figure 4-9 Control Information Screen
CONFIGURATION
COMM
SETP

Tapchanger Type
 
3. Press the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons,

as necessary, until the "System Clock"
screen is displayed.
System Clock
 

necessary, until the "Set Date and Time"
dialog screen is displayed.
Set Date and Time

MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS
4–10
System Setup – 4
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level 9. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as
2 Access is not active or has been necessary, until the "Daylight Savings"
previously input, the following will be dialog screen is displayed.
Daylight Savings
Set Date and Time disable
M
M/DD/YY HH:MM:SS C
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 2 Access is not active or has been
Access prompt will be displayed. previously input, the following will be
Daylight Savings
_
disable C
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
the display will automatically advance 11. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
the cursor to the next digit when input Access prompt will be displayed.
7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, press
the ENT pushbutton. _
If a valid Level 2 Access Code was 12. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, press
entered, the display will briefly flash a the ENT pushbutton.
following: If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
Set Date and Time confirmation screen and then display
the following:
MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS C
Daylight Savings
disable C
 NOTE: The cursor will be positioned under the If not, re-enter a valid code.
far left hand "Month" element of the date.
Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons
will change the Month. Utilizing the 13. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons
Right/Left arrow pushbuttons will move select "ENABLE", then press the
the cursor between each element of the ENT pushbutton. The following will be
date and time. displayed:
desired Date and Time, then press the Daylight Savings
ENT pushbutton. The following will be ENABLE
displayed reflecting the Date and Time
settings that were entered.
Set Date and Time

XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX

4–11
Setting Date/Time and Daylight Savings From 3. Verify that the desired Daylight Saving
TapTalk setting is selected.
To set the control Date, Time and Daylight Savings 4. If desired select "Sync Time at Startup"
from TapTalk®, perform the following: and the desired "Allowable Time
mismatch" value.
1. Select Utility/Set Date & Time from
the TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display 5. Determine if the control is to be set to
a Warning (Figure 4-10) regarding time either "PC Clock" or "Control Clock",
stamped values. Select OK. TapTalk will then proceed as follows:
display Figure 4-11.
• If "PC Clock" was selected and the
Date/Time of the PC is the desired
time to be set in the control, then
select Save.
• If "Control Clock" was selected, input
the desired Date/Time, then select
Save.
TapTalk will respond with a Reset
Demand and Energy warning screen
(Figure 4-12).
Figure 4-10 Set Date/Time Warning

Dialog Screen
2. From the Set Control Date/Time dialog

screen (Figure 4-11) select either
"Control Clock" or "PC Clock".
Figure 4-12 Reset Demand and Energy Warning
Dialog Screen
 CAUTION: Whenever the clock is reset and data

logging is enabled the data log should be cleared.
6. Select OK to reset Demand Metering,
Energy Metering, Drag Hands and
Resettable Operation Counter or Cancel
which will not reset these parameters.
TapTalk will return to the Main Screen.
Figure 4-11 Set Control Date/Time

Dialog Screen
4–12
System Setup – 4
OSCILLOGRAPH SETUP Number of Cycles Per

The Oscillograph Recorder provides comprehensive Partitions Partition
data recording (voltage, current, and status input/ 1 1365
output signals) for all monitored waveforms.
2 910
Oscillograph data can be downloaded using the
communications ports to any PC compatible 3 682
personal computer running the TapTalk® S-2001D 4 546
Communications Software. Once downloaded,
5 455
the waveform data can be examined and printed
using TapPlot® Analysis Software. The waveform 6 390
data is also available in COMTRADE file format. 7 341
Oscillograph records are retained if power to the
8 303
control is interrupted.
9 273
The general information required to be input to
10 248
complete the Oscillograph Setup includes:
11 227
• N u m b e r o f Pa r t i t i o n s – W h e n 12 210
untriggered, the recorder continuously
records waveform data, keeping the 13 195
data in a buffer memory. The recorder's 14 182
memory may be partitioned into 1 to 16 15 170
partitions. Table 4-1 illustrates the number
of cycles of waveform data per partition. 16 160
When triggered, the time stamp is Table 4-1 Recorder Partitions and Cycles
recorded, and the recorder continues for 16 Samples/Cycle
recording for a user-defined period. The
snapshot of the waveform is stored in
memory for later retrieval using TapPlot
Analysis Software.
• Samples/Cycle – The number of samples/
cycle can be selected to either 16, 32 or
64 samples/cycle.
• Post-Trigger Delay – A post-trigger delay
of 5% to 95% must be specified. After
triggering, the recorder will continue to
store data for the programmed portion of
the total record before re-arming for the
next record. For example, a setting of 80%
will result in a record with 20% pre trigger
data, and 80% post-trigger data.
• Inputs and Outputs – The recorder
can be triggered remotely through
serial communications using TapTalk, or
automatically, using programmed status
signals (Figure 4-14).
4–13
Setup Oscillograph Recorder A post-trigger delay of 5% to 95%

 NOTE: Communication must be established must be specified. After triggering, the
with the target control for this procedure. recorder will continue to store data for the
When not connected to the control, programmed portion of the total record
the Send selection does not save the before re-arming for the next record. For
Oscillograph Recorder settings to an example, a setting of 80% will result in
open file. a record with 20% pre-trigger data, and
80% post-trigger data.
To setup the Oscillograph Recorder, perform the
following: 5. Select the desired Pickup Trigger(s)
and Dropout Trigger(s) (Figure 4-14).
1. From the TapTalk® Main Screen menu, The recorder can be triggered remotely
select Setup/Oscillograph/Setup. through serial communications using
TapTalk will display the Oscillograph TapTalk, or automatically, using
Setup dialog screen (Figure 4-14). programmed status inputs or outputs.
2. Select the Number of Partitions. 6. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
The recorder's memory may be partitioned "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
into 1 to 16 partitions. The Oscillograph screen (Figure 4-2).
Recorder memory buffer is fixed and 7. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
contains room for a finite number of "Setpoints Successfully Written to Control"
cycles of recorded data. Consider Table confirmation screen (Figure 4-13).
4-1 when determining the number of
Oscillograph records. The number of
cycles of recorded data is directly related
to the number of records selected.
3. Select the number of Samples/Cycle.
The number of Samples/Cycle can be
selected to either 16, 32 or 64 Samples/
Cycle. Figure 4-13 Setpoints Successfully Written
4. Select the Post Trigger Delay. To The Control Dialog Screen
Figure 4-14 Oscillograph Setup Dialog Screen
4–14
System Setup – 4
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS RECORDER Sequence of Events

State
The Sequence of Events recorder provides Recorder Triggers
comprehensive time tagged data recording of the Raise Command Initiated
following parameters:
Lower Command Initiated
• Time Tag VR Contact 1 True
• Local Voltage VR Contact 2 True
• Source Voltage Force Lower (Runback) Initiated
• Frequency Raise Tap Limit True
• Tap Position Lower Tap Limit True
• Motor Current Low Band Exceeded
• Load Current High Band Exceeded
• Counter Operation (presettable) Low Voltage Limit True
• Voltage Harmonics Values High Voltage Limit True
• Current Harmonics Values Auto Inhibit True
• Voltage Harmonics Status Non-Sequential Active
• Current Harmonics Status Reverse Power Detected
Peak Motor Current Exceeded
The total number of events that can be recorded is Average Motor Current Exceeded
132. Sequence of Events data can be downloaded
Motor Current Duration Exceeded
using the communications ports to any computer
running the S-2001D TapTalk® Communications Voltage Harmonics Exceeded
Software. The Sequence of Events Recorder can be Current Harmonics Exceeded
triggered by the status change of any of the signals
CBEMA Event 1 True
in Table 4-2 or manually by the user from TapTalk.
CBEMA Event 2 True
CBEMA Event 3 True
CBEMA Event 4 True
VAr Bias Active
Seal-in Failure Alarm Active
Seal-in Failure Raise Block Active
Seal-in Failure Lower Block Active
Low Current Block Active
Motor Seal-in Input Detected
Neutral Input Detected
Counter Input Detected
Op Count Signal Exceeded
HMI Active True
Individual Tap Wear Alarm Active
Table 4-2 Sequence of Events Recorder Triggers
4–15
Event Logic
Combinations of the trigger signals in Table 4-2 that is user selectable as either an "AND" or "OR"
can be AND’ed and OR’ed to produce the desired gate. When the logic is true, it triggers the Sequence
trigger logic. Figure 4-15 illustrates the trigger logic of Events Recorder.
that can be applied.
The event will be recorded in volatile SDRAM and
The first level of the Event Logic consists of an transferred to non-volatile flash memory every four
"AND" gate and an "OR" gate which uses the trigger cycles. There is a possibility that events can be lost
parameters in Table 4-2 as inputs. The output of the in cases where the control loses power in the middle
"AND" and "OR" gates are passed to a logic gate of a storage cycle.
Pickup
OR
Dropout
Edge Sensitive Trigger(s)
Start Sequence
Level Sensitive Trigger OR/AND of Events
Recorder
Pickup
AND
Level Sensitive Trigger(s)
Level Sensitive Trigger OR
Dropout
AND
Level Sensitive Trigger(s)
Figure 4-15 Sequence Of Events Recorder Trigger Logic
4–16
System Setup – 4
Setup Sequence of Events Recorder Select the desired "OR gate setup", Pickup
Pickup or Dropout for each trigger parameter may and/or Dropout trigger parameters, and
be selected to trigger the Sequence of Events then select OK. TapTalk will return to the
Recorder. Sequence of Events setup dialog screen.
3. If an "AND" type trigger logic is desired,
 NOTE: Communication must be established then select the AND "Pickup" or "Dropout"
with the target control for this procedure. in Figure 4-16. TapTalk will display the
When not connected to the control, "AND gate setup" dialog screen (Figures
the Save selection does not save the 4-18 and 4-19).
Sequence of Event settings to the open
file. Select the desired "AND gate setup"
Pickup and/or Dropout trigger parameters,
To setup the Sequence of Events Recorder, perform then select OK. TapTalk will return to the
the following: Sequence of Events setup dialog screen.
1. From the TapTalk® Main Screen menu 4. Select the desired logic gate OR/AND for
select Setup/Sequence of Events/ the "OR" and "AND" gates, then select
Setup. TapTalk will display the Sequence Save. TapTalk will display a "Confirm
of Events Setup dialog screen (Figure Writing to Device" confirmation screen
4-16). (Figure 4-2).
2. If an "OR" type trigger logic is desired, 5. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
then select "Pickup Dropout Edge "Setpoints Successfully Written to
Sensitive" in Figure 4-16. TapTalk will Control" confirmation screen (Figure
display the "OR gate setup" dialog screen 4-13).
(Figure 4-17).
Figure 4-16 Sequence of Events Setup Dialog Screen
4–17
Figure 4-17 Sequence of Events Pickup/Dropout Edge Sensitive OR Gate Setup Dialog Screen
Figure 4-18 Sequence of Events Pickup Level Sensitive AND Gate Pickup Setup Dialog Screen
Figure 4-19 Sequence of Events Dropout Level Sensitive AND Gate Dropout Setup Dialog Screen
4–18
System Setup – 4
WAKEUP SCREENS Selecting Wakeup Screen Parameters

If the "Wake/EXIT" pushbutton is selected, then To select the wakeup screen parameters perform
control will respond as follows: the following:
• Pressing "EXIT" when User Lines are being 1. Select Setup/Wakeup Screens from the
displayed will initiate a cycling display of TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the
the selected Wakeup parameters for a "Wakeup Screen Menu Setup" dialog
period of 15 minutes and then return to screen (Figure 4-20).
the User Lines display.  NOTE: The order in which parameters are
• If no Wakeup screens are selected, then being displayed can be changed by
nothing will be displayed and the User dragging and dropping items in the
Lines will blink for a moment. active metering window.
■ NOTE: The Adapter Panel Drag Hand Reset 2. Select the Wakeup Screen parameters
switches only reset the Tap position Drag to be displayed by moving, (dragging
Hands value. and dropping), each parameter from the
"Disable Metering Items" to the "Active
• While cycling is in effect, when ENT is Metering Items" list.
pressed on any demand metering value
3. Select the Wakeup Screen parameters
("E" displayed on screen), all demand
that are not to be displayed by moving
metering Drag Hand parameters will be (dragging and dropping) those parameter
reset. This is also true for all metering from the "Active Metering Items" list to
Drag Hand values when ENT is pressed the "Disable Metering Items" list.
on an energy metering menu.
• The Wakeup stepped display can be "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
stopped on the displayed parameter screen (Figure 4-2).
by pressing EXIT. Press EXIT again to
terminate the stepped parameter display
"Setpoints Successfully Written to Control"
and return to the User Lines. confirmation screen (Figure 4-13).
The Wakeup screen values can be
browsed by utilizing the Up and Down
arrow pushbuttons. In this mode, if the
ENT pushbutton is pressed while on a
demand or energy metering value, it will
only reset that individual Drag Hand value.
• The Wake screen cycles at a 3 second
interval between parameters. While
the wake screen menu is cycling, if a
parameter is missed while recording,
press the up arrow to display it again. This
displays the previous parameter and then
continues cycling to the next parameter
3 seconds later. Pressing ENT stops the
cycling and allows the user to utilize the
Up and Down Arrows to view the Wake
screen parameters at a user defined pace.
• When there is a Smart Flash SD Card
present while in the Wakeup screen menu,
an additional Smart Flash SD Card menu
item will be present. All Wakeup screen
parameters can be saved to the Smart
Flash SD Card in *.csv format.
4–19
Figure 4-20 Wakeup Screen Menu Setup Dialog Screen
4–20
System Setup – 4
COMMUNICATION Direct Connections

The communication ports provide access to all TapTalk supports direct communication (MODBUS®
features, including metering, software updates, and protocol) with a Beckwith Electric Digital Tapchanger
programming of all functions. This is accomplished Control using the applicable connector (USB cable)
using a connection from any WindowsTM computer for the PC, Fiber Optic communication using ST
running the TapTalk® S-2001D Communications standard, two-wire RS‑485 or RS-232.
Software or SCADA communications software.
Protocols
Using a PC, the operator has real‑time, remote
access to all functions of the Digital Tapchanger The standard protocols included in the M-2001D
Control. The control can act as the monitoring point are DNP3.0 and MODBUS. IEC 61850 is available
for all voltage, current, and related power quantities. as an option. The USB port uses MODBUS for
This simplifies operation while avoiding transducers local communications. The optional Ethernet Port
and multiple Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) analog supports DNP over TCP/IP and UDP; MODBUS
inputs. The protocols implement half‑duplex, over TCP/IP and UDP protocol and IEC 61850
two‑way communications. This allows all functions, over TCP/IP protocols simultaneously. The user
which would otherwise require the presence of an must select the protocol that is to be used with
operator at the control, to be performed remotely. the M-2001D Tapchanger Control's RS485/Fiber
Optic Port.
Communication capabilities include:
Detailed descriptions of the data points used for
• Interrogation and modification of the standard protocols are available from Beckwith
setpoints Electric upon request, and are available for download
from our website, www.beckwithelectric.com.
• Broadcast of commands, such as
tapchange inhibit and voltage reduction For information regarding Communication Port
(up to three steps) to networked controls connections, please see Section 7.1, External
Connections.
• Recognition of alarm conditions, such as
voltage extremes and excessive load
Communication Access Security and Timeout
• Selective control of raise and lower When Communication Access Security and Timeout
tapchange operations is enabled it applies only when MODBUS has been
• Re-configuration of the control, such as selected regardless of the physical interface. If
a change to the demand integration time enabled the user Level Access Code must match
period or a selection of different alarm either the Level 1 or Level 2 Access Codes in
parameters order to be granted the access to control settings
ascribed to each Level. See "User Access Codes"
TapTalk provides the means to enable or disable earlier in this chapter for detailed information. If
installed RS-232 and Bluetooth® modules. This an invalid Access Level Code is entered at the
capability is provided by a communication options connection prompt, then read only access will be
utility under the Communication menu. Prompts to granted. TapTalk must be closed for the timeout
enable communication hardware are also contained period specified (1 to 50,000 seconds) in order for
in the individual port setup menus. any Access Code changes to take effect when this
feature is enabled.
4–21
Enabling Communication Access Security 6. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level

and Timeout From The HMI 2 Access is not active or has been
1. Ensure the control is energized. previously input, the following will be
 NOTE: If password protection has been
implemented on the control, then a Comm Access Security
valid Level 2 Access Code is required
to be entered to enable Communication disable C
Access Security and set the Timeout.
Button) pushbutton to awaken the
"COMMUNICATION" or if a Memory _
Card is present in the Smart Flash SD
CARD slot "Memory Card".  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code
COMMUNICATION the cursor to the next digit when input
CNFG
UTIL
OR 8. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then

Memory Card If a valid Level 2 Access code was
  entered, the display will briefly flash a
confirmation screen, and then display
3. If the "Communication" menu is the following:
displayed, then press the Down Arrow
pushbutton once. The unit will display Comm Access Security
the following: disable C
Comm Settings If not, re-enter a valid code.


9. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select
4. If Memory Card is displayed, then press "ENABLE", then press the ENT
the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as pushbutton. The desired Communication
necessary, until "Comm Settings" is Access Security mode will be displayed.
displayed.
Comm Access Security
Comm Settings
ENABLE or disable
 
5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary, until the "Comm Access
necessary, until the "Comm Access Timeout" menu item is displayed.
Security" menu item is displayed.
Comm Access timeout
60 Sec
disable
4–22
System Setup – 4
11. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level Enabling Communication Access Security
2 Access is not active or has been and Setting Timeout From TapTalk
previously input, the following will be To setup Communication Access Security from
displayed. Go to Step 9. TapTalk®, proceed as follows:
Comm Access timeout 1. S e l e c t C o m mu n i c a t i o n / S e t u p /

Communication Access Security from
60 Sec C the TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display
the "Communication Access Security"
12. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 dialog screen (Figure 4-21).
2. Select "ENABLE", then enter the
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS desired Communication Access Timeout
value from 1 to 50,000 seconds.
_
3. Select "Save". TapTalk will display
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code a "Setpoints Successfully Written
the display will automatically advance to Control" confir mation screen
the cursor to the next digit when input (Figure 4-13).

confirmation screen, and then display
the following:
Figure 4-21 Communication Access Security
Comm Access timeout Setup Dialog Screen
60 Sec C

desired Comm Access timeout value,
then press the ENT pushbutton. The
desired Comm Access timeout value will
be displayed.
Comm Access timeout

XX Sec
4–23
Source Address Validation 5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as

When Source Address Validation is enabled it necessary, until the "Source Address
applies only when DNP3.0 Protocol has been Validation" menu item is displayed.
selected regardless of the physical interface. If
enabled the client address must match the address Src Addr Validation
set by the user in the DNP Configuration file before disable
accepting the message as a valid one.
Enabling Source Address Validation From The 2 Access is not active or has been
HMI previously input, the following will be
1. Ensure the control is energized.
 NOTE: If password protection has been Src Addr Validation
implemented on the control, then a
valid Level 2 Access Code is required disable C
to be entered to enable Source Address
Validation. 7. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS

unit. The menu will advance to either _
"COMMUNICATION" or if a Memory
Card is present in the Smart Flash SD  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code
CARD slot "Memory Card". the display will automatically advance
COMMUNICATION is momentarily paused.
CNFG
UTIL
OR press the ENT pushbutton.
Memory Card entered, the display will briefly flash a
  confirmation screen, and then display
the following:
displayed, then press the Down Arrow Src Addr Validation
pushbutton once. The unit will display disable C
the following:
Comm Settings

 9. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select
"ENABLE", then press the ENT
4. If Memory Card is displayed, then press pushbutton. The desired Source Address
the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as Validation mode will be displayed.
necessary, until "Comm Settings" is
displayed. Src Addr Validation
Comm Settings ENABLE or disable
 
4–24
System Setup – 4
Enabling Source Address Validation From Feeder and/or Substation Addressing

TapTalk Each control has three addresses.
To setup Source Address Validation from TapTalk®,
1. Communications address
proceed as follows:
2. Feeder address
1. Select Utility/DNP/Source Address
Validation from the TapTalk toolbar. 3. Substation address
TapTalk will display the "Source Address
Validation" dialog screen (Figure 4-22). Any valid DNP command (Figure 4-23) can be
2. Select "ENABLE", then select "Save". used to communicate with individual controls
TapTalk will display a "Setpoints using the Communications address. To address
Successfully Written to Control" a group of controls using the Feeder and/or the
confirmation screen (Figure 4-13). Substation addresses, a DNP command with
no acknowledgment shall be used. For example
Direct Operate with NO acknowledgment (FC 06).
If a command with acknowledgment is sent by the
Client, the control will accept the command but will
not reply with an acknowledgment.
All addresses range from 0 to 0xFFEF. For feeder
and substation addresses, setting the value to zero
effectively Disables the corresponding address. It
is important that there are no duplicate addresses
Figure 4-22 Source Address Validation
on any device on the network.
Dialog Screen
In the system depicted in Figure 4-23, there are
three substations: S1, S2, and S3. There are a total
of 9 feeders, F1-F9, grouped as shown. Each feeder
has 3 controls, one for each phase. Each control
will have 3 addresses assigned to it.
For example: control D1 on Feeder F4 in substation
S2 will have the following.
1. Individual not duplicated communications
address (0x212)
2. Feeder address = 0x4003
3. Substation address = 0x5001
In order to poll D1 on an individual basis address,

0x212 is used.
To invoke for example, voltage reduction individually
on D1, use direct operate with or without acknowledge
for address 0x212 on the appropriate point.
To invoke voltage reduction on Feeder F4, use direct
operate without acknowledge to address 0x4003
instead of 3 different commands sent to D1, D2
and D3 individually.
Similarly, invoking voltage reduction on an entire
substation requires a direct operate command
without acknowledge to be sent to that substation
address e.g. substation S2 ( address 0x5001).
 NOTE: The same concept applies to network
configuration (Figure 4-24).
4–25
Figure 4-23 Multiple Client, Feeder and/or Substation Addressing
Figure 4-24 Single Client, Feeder and/or Substation Addressing Network Connection
4–26
System Setup – 4
Setting Substation Address From The HMI 6. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
1. Ensure the control is energized. 2 Access is not active or has been
 NOTE: If password protection has been displayed. Go to Step 9.
implemented on the control, then a valid
Level 2 Access Code is required to be Substation Address
entered to set the Substation Address.
0 C
2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot 7. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
Button) pushbutton to awaken the Access prompt will be displayed.
CARD slot "Memory Card". _
COMMUNICATION  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code

CNFG
UTIL the cursor to the next digit when input
OR
Memory Card 8. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then

 
3. If the "Communication" menu is entered, the display will briefly flash a
displayed, then press the Down Arrow confirmation screen, and then display
pushbutton once. The unit will display the following:
the following:
Substation Address
Comm Settings 0 C


4. If Memory Card is displayed, then press
the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as  NOTE: When entering the digital values the
necessary, until "Comm Settings" is display will automatically advance the
displayed. cursor to the next digit when input is
momentarily paused.
Comm Settings
  9. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter
the desired Substation Address, then
5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, press the ENT pushbutton. The desired
as necessary, until the "Substation Substation Address will be displayed.
Address" menu item is displayed.
Substation Address
Substation Address
xxxxx
0
4–27
Setting Feeder Address From The HMI 6. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
1. Ensure the control is energized. 2 Access is not active or has been
 NOTE: If password protection has been displayed. Go to Step 9.
Level 2 Access Code is required to be Feeder Address
entered to set the Feeder Address.
0 C
2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot 7. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
Button) pushbutton to awaken the Access prompt will be displayed.
CARD slot "Memory Card". _
COMMUNICATION  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code

CNFG
UTIL the cursor to the next digit when input
OR
Memory Card 8. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then

 
3. If the "Communication" menu is entered, the display will briefly flash a
displayed, then press the Down Arrow confirmation screen, and then display
pushbutton once. The unit will display the following:
the following:
Feeder Address
Comm Settings 0 C


4. If Memory Card is displayed, then press
the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as  NOTE: When entering the digital values the
necessary, until "Comm Settings" is display will automatically advance the
displayed. cursor to the next digit when input is
momentarily paused.
Comm Settings
  9. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the
desired Feeder Address, then press the
5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as ENT pushbutton. The desired Feeder
necessary, until the "Feeder Address" Address will be displayed.
menu item is displayed.
Feeder Address
Feeder Address
xxxxx
0
4–28
System Setup – 4
Setting Communication Addresses From Automatic Mode Blocking

TapTalk The Automatic Mode Blocking feature will cause the
To set Communication Addresses from TapTalk®, control to respond in a predefined manner to either
proceed as follows: a serial communication interruption or power loss
to the control. The Control will respond as follows:
1. Select Communication/Setup/Change
Address from the TapTalk toolbar. • If Automatic control has been Blocked
TapTalk will display the "Change using TapTalk, then Automatic Control will
Address Warning" dialog screen (Figure remain Blocked if serial communication is
4-25). disrupted or lost.
• If Automatic Control has been Blocked
using TapTalk, and the Save Comm
Block at Power Off selection is Save,
then the Automatic Control Block will be
reinstated at power up.
• If Automatic Control has been Blocked
using TapTalk, and the Save Comm
Block at Power Off selection is Don’t
Save, then the Automatic Control Block
will not be reinstated at power up.
Comm Block Auto

Comm Block Auto allows the state of the "Block
Auto Operation" communication command to be
Figure 4-25 Change Address Warning saved or not saved when power has been lost. The
Dialog Screen default setting is "DON'T SAVE".
 NOTE: The Comm Block Auto at power off
2. Select Yes. TapTalk will display the setting requires the "Auto/Manual Switch
"Change Communication Address" Type" in the configuration to be set to
dialog screen (Figure 4-26). either "None" or "Toggle".
Setting Comm Block Auto From The HMI

To set the Comm Block Auto feature, proceed as
follows:
CONFIGURATION
COMM
SETP

Figure 4-26 Change Communication
Address Dialog Screen Tapchanger Type
3. Enter the desired Communication,  

Substation or Feeder address, then
select "Save". TapTalk will display the
"Setpoints Successfully Written to Control"
4–29
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, 8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons,
as necessary, to navigate to the select "DON'T SAVE or SAVE", then
"Nameplate" menu. press the ENT pushbutton. The selected
setting will be displayed.
Nameplate
Comm Block Auto
 
(DON'T SAVE or SAVE)
necessary, until "Comm Block Auto" is
displayed. Setting Comm Block Auto at Power Off From
TapTalk
Comm Block Auto To set Comm Block Auto at Power Off from TapTalk®,
DON'T SAVE proceed as follows:
 NOTE: The Comm Block Auto at power off
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level setting requires the "Auto/Manual Switch
2 Access is not active or has been Type" in the configuration to be set to
previously input, the following will be either "None" or "Toggle".
1. Select Setup/Configuration from the
Comm Block auto TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
DON'T SAVE C "Configuration" dialog screen (Figure
4-28).
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 2. Verify that the Auto/Manual Switch Type
Access prompt will be displayed. is set to either "None" or "Toggle". From
the "Save Comm Block at Power Off"
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS section, select either "Don't Save" or
_ "Save", then select "Save". TapTalk will
display the "Save to Device Confirmation
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code, Screen" (Figure 4-27).

following: Figure 4-27 Save to Device Confirmation Screen
Comm Block auto 3. Select "OK". TapTalk will briefly display

the "Setpoints successfully written to the
DON'T SAVE C control" confirmation screen.
4–30
System Setup – 4
Figure 4-28 Configuration (Save Comm Block at Power Off) Dialog Screen
SCAMP Initialize on Power Up

SCAMP Initialize on Power Up – When Last Save 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
is selected, the SCAMP switch is configured in such The unit will display the following:
a way that upon the control performing a cold power
up, the state of the SCAMP switch is initialized to Tapchanger Type
the last saved state of the SCAMP switch prior to
 
the control powering off.
For example, if prior to powering off the control, the 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton,
SCAMP switch was in Manual, then when the control as necessary, to navigate to the
is powered back on the control will initially go back "Nameplate" menu.
to the Manual state and vice versa. Now when Auto
Mode is selected, the control always initializes into Nameplate
the Auto Mode after powering up regardless of the  
saved state of the control prior to powering off.
 NOTE: The "Auto/Manual Switch Type" setting
necessary, until "SCAMP Init Pwrup" is
in configuration must be set to "SCAMP"
displayed.
to effect this setting change.
Scamp Init Pwrup
Setting SCAMP Initialize on Power Up From
Last Save
The HMI
To set the SCAMP Initialize on Power Up feature, 5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
proceed as follows: 2 Access is not active or has been
Scamp Init Pwrup
CONFIGURATION Last Save C
COMM
SETP
4–31
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 Setting SCAMP Initialize on Power Up From
Access prompt will be displayed. TapTalk
To set SCAMP Initialize on Power Up from TapTalk®,
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS proceed as follows:
_  NOTE: The "Auto/Manual Switch Type" setting
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code, to effect this setting change.
is momentarily paused. 1. Select Setup/Configuration from the
"Configuration" dialog screen (Figure
7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then 4-29).
2. Verify that the Auto/Manual Switch Type
If a valid Level 2 Access code was is set to "SCAMP". From the "SCAMP
entered, the display will briefly flash a Initialize on Power Up" section, select
confirmation screen and display the either "Auto Mode" or "Last Save", then
following: select "Save". TapTalk will display the
"Save to Device Confirmation Screen"
Scamp Init Pwrup (Figure 4-27).
Last Save C 3. Select "OK". TapTalk will briefly display
the "Setpoints successfully written to the
If not, re-enter a valid code. control" confirmation screen.
8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons,

select "Last Save or Auto Mode", then
press the ENT pushbutton. The selected
Scamp Init Pwrup

(Last Save or Auto Mode)
Figure 4-29 Configuration (SCAMP Initialize on Power Up) Dialog Screen
4–32
System Setup – 4
Optional Ethernet Port 3. Select Connect/USB, Com Port

The optional Ethernet Port is available through an or Modem from the Connect drop-
RJ45 (10/100 Base-T) or a (100 Base-Fx) Fiber down menu. TapTalk will display the
Optic interface for ethernet communication to the appropriate Connection Dialog Screen
M-2001D. The port supports up to 17 concurrent (Figures 3-2, 3-14 or 3-15).
connections. The maximum number of allowed 4. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code (if
DNP connections is five. The maximum number of enabled), then select Connect, TapTalk
MODBUS® connections is eight. When IEC 61850 will attempt to connect to the target
is purchased the maximum number of IEC 61850 control.
connections is four. The port supports DHCP 5. If TapTalk returns a Failed to Connect
protocol and also allows manual configuration of Error screen (Figure 3-3), repeat Steps
the Ethernet port. MODBUS protocol "Port Number" 3 and 4.
and DNP Protocol "Port Number" are required for
manual configuration. 6. Level 2 Access if enabled is necessary to
complete the Ethernet Port configuration.
If no communication activity is detected on a If an invalid Access Code was entered,
previously open ethernet socket, for the amount TapTalk will display the connected
of time specified by the "Keepalive Time" setting, version of the TapTalk main screen with
the control will then close the socket and make it either "Read-Only" or "Level 1" access.
available for future connection. Disconnect from the control and repeat
 NOTE: Keepalive Time applies only to Ethernet Step 4.
communication. 7. If Level Access is not active or a
valid Level 2 Access Code was
entered, TapTalk will briefly display
Ethernet Port Configuration From TapTalk
the "Successfully Connected Level 2"
 NOTE: Manual configuration of the Ethernet screen and then display the connected
Port (not enabling DHCP Protocol) version of the TapTalk Main Screen
requires that the IP Address, Net Mask (Figure 3-13) with Level 2 Access.
and Gateway settings be obtained from
the System Administrator. 8. From the Communication drop-down
menu, select Setup/Ethernet Settings.
1. Ensure the following conditions exist: TapTalk will then display the Setup
Ethernet dialog screen (Figure 4-30).
9. If the Ethernet network that the target
• TapTalk is installed on the host control is connected to supports DHCP
computer Protocol, then perform the following:
• The host computer is physically
connected to the target control a. From the Setup Ethernet dialog
through either a USB, Serial Port or screen (Figure 4-30) select DHCP
Modem connection Protocol "Enable"
• The host computer and the control b. Select the desired "Keepalive Time"
are physically connected to the duration.
target Ethernet network c. Select "Save" to save the settings to
the target control.
2. Start the TapTalk program. TapTalk will
display the TapTalk Main dialog screen. d. Go to Step 12.
4–33
10. If the Ethernet network that the target

control is connected to does not support
DHCP Protocol, or manual configuration
is desired, perform the following:
a. Select DHCP Protocol "Disable".
b. Enter the IP Address, Net Mask,
Gateway and the applicable
MODBUS® or DNP3.0 Port settings.
c. Select the desired "Keepalive Time"
duration.
d. Select "Save" to save the settings
to the target control. TapTalk will
display a "Setpoints Successfully
Written to Control" confirmation
11. If the Network MODBUS Port address is
not "502" or the DNP Port address is not
"20000", set these parameters to match
the target network settings.
The Ethernet option for the control is now enabled.
See Communication Using Ethernet Connection
section of Chapter 3 to connect to the target control
through the Ethernet connection. If Source Address
Validation is desired, then see "Enabling Source
Address Validation" earlier in this section.
Figure 4-30 Setup Ethernet Dialog Screen
4–34
System Setup – 4
Network Time Synchronization HMI Configuration of the Control’s Ethernet

 NOTE: Network Time Synchronization requires Port for use on a network that supports DHCP
the SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol
Protocol) "Server Name" or "Server 1. Ensure the control is energized.
IP Address" to be known and also the
 NOTE: If Level Access is active on the control,
Control Location "Time Zone".
a valid Level 2 Access Code is required
to be entered to manually configure each
1. From the Communication drop-down element of the Ethernet port.
menu, select Setup/Ethernet Settings.
TapTalk will then display the "Setup 2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot
Ethernet" dialog screen (Figure 4-30). Button) pushbutton to awaken the
2. From the "SNTP Server" section of the "COMMUNICATION" or if a Memory
dialog screen proceed as follows: Card is present in the Smart Flash SD
a. If the Server Name is known, enter CARD slot "Memory Card".
the Server Name and then select
the magnified glass icon. TapTalk COMMUNICATION
will search for the corresponding IP
CNFG
UTIL
Address.
b. If the server IP Address is known, OR
enter the IP Address.
3. Select the Time Zone that the control Memory Card
resides in, then select "Save". TapTalk  
will display a "Setpoints Successfully
Written to Control" Confirmation Screen 3. If the "Communication" menu is
(Figure 4-13). displayed, then press the Down Arrow
the following:
Comm Settings



until "Ethernet" is displayed.
Ethernet
 

The following will be displayed.
DHCP Enable
disable

DHCP Enable
disable C
4–35
7. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 HMI Configuration of the Control’s Ethernet
Access prompt will be displayed. Port for use on a network that does not
support DHCP Protocol
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS 1. Ensure the control is energized.
_  NOTE: If password protection has been
implemented on the control, a valid Level
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code, 2 password is required to be entered to
the display will automatically advance manually configure each element of the
the cursor to the next digit when input Ethernet port.
8. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then Button) pushbutton to awaken the
press the ENT pushbutton. unit. The menu will advance to either
the following:
COMMUNICATION
DHCP Enable CNFG
UTIL
disable C
OR
Memory Card
 
9. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons
select ENABLE, then press the ENT
pushbutton. The following will be 3. If the "Communication" menu is
displayed. displayed, then press the Down Arrow
the following:
DHCP Enable
ENABLE Comm Settings


10. The control is now addressable from
TapTalk® over the target network.
• Also, if the network MODBUS® Port "Memory Card" menu, press the Right
address is not "502" or the DNP or Left Arrow pushbutton as necessary
Port address is not "20000", go to until "Ethernet" is displayed.
the MODBUS Port and DNP Port
Settings section of this chapter. Ethernet
• If Source Address Validation is  
desired, then see "Enabling Source
Address Validation" earlier in this 5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once.
section. The following will be displayed.
DHCP Enable
disable
4–36
System Setup – 4
6. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level 11. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following
2 Access is not active or has been will be displayed.
displayed. Go to Step 9. IP Address
0.0.0.0 C
DHCP Enable
disable C 12. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons input the
desired IP Address, then press the ENT
7. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 pushbutton, the desired IP Address will
Access prompt will be displayed. be displayed.
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS The following will be displayed.
_
Net Mask
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code 0.0.0.0
will be displayed.
8. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then Net Mask

0.0.0.0 C
entered, the display will briefly flash a 15. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, input the
confirmation screen and then display desired Net Mask, then press the ENT
the following: pushbutton, the desired Net Mask will
be displayed.
DHCP Enable 16. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once.
disable C The following will be displayed.
If not, re-enter a valid code. Gateway

0.0.0.0
select "disable", then press the ENT 17. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following
pushbutton. The following will be will be displayed.
displayed.
Gateway
DHCP Enable 0.0.0.0 C
disable
18. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons input the
10. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once. desired Gateway, then press the ENT
The following will be displayed. pushbutton, the desired Gateway will be
displayed.
IP Address  NOTE: Auto negotiation is an Ethernet procedure
0.0.0.0 by which two connected devices choose
common transmission parameters,
 NOTE: When entering the digital values the such as speed and duplex mode. In
display will automatically advance the this process, the connected devices
cursor to the next digit when input is first share their capabilities as for these
momentarily paused. parameters and then choose the fastest
transmission mode they both support.
4–37
19. If the control is connected to a host MODBUS Port and DNP Port Settings From
device which is capable of 10 and 100 The HMI
mbps transmission rates and handles 1. Ensure the control is energized.
both half or full duplex modes, then
the Ethernet port is now configured to  NOTE: If password protection has been
support network communications with implemented on the control, then a valid
the MODBUS® port and DNP port default Level 2 Access Code is required to be
values. If the network requires specific entered to set MODBUS® port and DNP
MODBUS port and DNP port settings, port settings.
then see the MODBUS Port and DNP
Port Setting section in this chapter. 2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot
 NOTE: Auto Negotiation must be disabled if Button) pushbutton to awaken the
using Fiber Ethernet. unit. The menu will advance to either
20. If a fixed speed of 100 mbps is desired as CARD slot "Memory Card".
in the case of Fiber Optic mode, utilize the
Up/Down arrow pushbuttons to navigate COMMUNICATION
to the "Auto Negotiation" menu item.
CNFG
UTIL
Auto Negotiation
OR
ENABLE
Memory Card
will be displayed.  
Auto Negotiation 3. If the "Communication" menu is

ENABLE C pushbutton once. The unit will display
the following:
select "disable", then press the ENT Comm Settings
pushbutton. The following will be
displayed. 

Auto Negotiation 4. From either the "Comm Settings" or

disable or Left Arrow pushbutton as necessary
until "Ethernet" is displayed.
The Ethernet port is now configured to support
network communications with the MODBUS port, Ethernet
DNP port, and Keepalive Time default values. If the
network requires specific MODBUS port and DNP  
port settings, see the MODBUS Port and DNP Port
Setting section in this chapter. If a Keepalive Time
duration other than 7200 seconds is desired, see
Keepalive Time section in this chapter.
If Source Address Validation is desired, then see
"Enabling Source Address Validation" earlier in this
section.
4–38
System Setup – 4
5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as 11. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following
necessary, until the "Enter MODBUS will be displayed.
Port" menu item is displayed.
Enter DNP Port
Enter Modbus Port 20000 C
502
12. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, input
6. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level the desired DNP Port address, press
2 Access is not active or has been the ENT pushbutton, the desired DNP
previously input, the following will be Port address will be displayed.
The control is now addressable from
TapTalk® over the network. Ensure that
Enter Modbus Port the MODBUS and DNP Port values are
502 C the same as the values manually set
when attempting to communicate with
7. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 the control from TapTalk.
Ethernet Keepalive Time Settings From The HMI
_
 NOTE: If password protection has been
Level 2 Access Code is required to be
entered to set Ethernet Keepalive Time
settings.

If a valid Level 2 Access code was "COMMUNICATION" or if a Memory
entered, the display will briefly flash a Card is present in the Smart Flash SD
confirmation screen, and then display CARD slot "Memory Card".
the following:
COMMUNICATION
Enter Modbus Port CNFG
UTIL
502 C
OR
Memory Card
 NOTE: When entering the digital values the  
display will automatically advance the
cursor to the next digit when input is 3. If the "Communication" menu is
momentarily paused. displayed, then press the Down Arrow
the following:
desired MODBUS® port address, then
press the ENT pushbutton. The desired Comm Settings
MODBUS port address will be displayed. 

The following will be displayed.
Enter DNP Port

20000
4–39
4. From either the "Comm Settings" or  NOTE: When entering the digital values the
"Memory Card" menu, press the Right display will automatically advance the
or Left Arrow pushbutton as necessary cursor to the next digit when input is
until "Ethernet" is displayed. momentarily paused.
Ethernet
  the desired Keepalive Time value, then
press the ENT pushbutton. The desired
5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as Keepalive Time value will be displayed.
necessary, until the "Keepalive time"
menu item is displayed. Keepalive time
xxx sec
Keepalive time
7200 sec
RS-485/Fiber Optic Port
6. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level M-2001D COM Port can be selected for two different
2 Access is not active or has been configurations: RS‑485 or Fiber Optics.
RS-485/Fiber Optic Port Setup From The HMI
Keepalive time This procedure provides the steps necessary to
7200 sec C setup all RS-485 and Fiber Optic parameters.
Parameter definitions and the default value (default
7. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 value) for each parameter are included below:
Access prompt will be displayed. • Comm Protocol – Allows selection
between standard protocols, DNP 3.0 or
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS MODBUS®. (DNP3.0)
_ • Comm Address – Configures a three-digit
numerical address, from 1 to 200, for
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code remote communications. (1)
the cursor to the next digit when input • Baud Rate – Selects baud rate for COM1,
is momentarily paused. located on the top of the control. (9600)
• Parity – None, odd or even parity is
available. (NONE)
press the ENT pushbutton. • Stop Bits – One or two stop bits are
available. (ONE STOPBIT)
entered, the display will briefly flash a • Sync Time – This time delay improves
confirmation screen, and then display robust operation when communication
the following: lines are intermittent. Communication
dead-sync time is the time that the control
Keepalive time will wait from the last received character
and continue without attempting to
7200 sec C resynchronize. (2 ms)
If not, re-enter a valid code. • Echo/Repeat – Selects Echo/Repeat
on/off as determined by the user. Selector
switch is located on side of unit adjacent
to the Fiber Optic connection and is
accessed through the slot in the cover.
Switch position towards the front of the
control is the off position. (OFF)
4–40
System Setup – 4
If the default value for a parameter does not need 6. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
to be changed, skip the applicable steps. 2 Access is not active or has been
 NOTE: If Access Code protection has been Comm1 Port Type
2 Access Code is required to be entered RS485 C
to manually configure each element of
the RS-485/Fiber Optic port. 7. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS

unit. The menu will advance to either _
Card is present in the Smart Flash SD  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code
CARD slot "Memory Card". the display will automatically advance
COMMUNICATION is momentarily paused.
CNFG
UTIL
OR press the ENT pushbutton.
Memory Card entered, the display will briefly flash a
  confirmation screen and then display
the following:
displayed, then press the Down Arrow Comm1 Port Type
pushbutton once. The unit will display RS485 C
the following:
Comm Settings

 9. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons
select "RS485 or FIBER", then press the
4. If Memory Card is displayed, then press ENT pushbutton. The selected port type
the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, as will be displayed.
necessary, until “Comm Settings” is
displayed. Comm1 Port Type
Comm Settings (RS485 or FIBER)
  10. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton,

as necessary, until the "Comm Protocol"
5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as menu item is displayed.
necessary, until "Com Port Type" is
displayed. Comm Protocol
Comm1 Port Type DNP3.0
RS485
4–41
 NOTE: From this point on in this procedure it 16. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton, as
is assumed that a valid Access Level necessary, until the "Baud Rate" menu
2 Code has been previously entered. If item is displayed.
not, a valid Level 2 Access Code will be
required to be entered as described in Baud Rate
Step 8.
9600
11. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level 17. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
2 Access is not active or has been 2 Access is not active or has been
previously input, the following will be previously input, the following will be
displayed. displayed.
Comm Protocol Baud Rate

DNP3.0 C 9600 C
12. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select 18. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons,
"DNP3.0 or MODBUS®", then press the select the desired Baud Rate:
ENT pushbutton. The selected protocol
will be displayed. • 115,200
• 57,600
Comm Protocol • 38,400
(DNP3.0 or MODBUS) • 19,200
• 9,600
13. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton, • 4,800
as necessary, until the "Comm Address"
• 2,400
• 1,200
Comm Address • 600
1 • 300
When the desired Baud Rate has
14. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level been selected, then press the ENT
2 Access is not active or has been pushbutton. The selected Baud Rate will
previously input, the following will be be displayed.
displayed.
Baud Rate
Comm Address
XXXXXXX
1 C
19. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton, as
15. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons necessary, until the "Parity" menu item
enter the desired "Comm Address", then is displayed.
press the ENT pushbutton. The entered
Comm Address will be displayed. Parity
Comm Address NONE
4–42
System Setup – 4
20. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level 25. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton, as
2 Access is not active or has been necessary, until the "Sync Time" menu
previously input, the following will be item is displayed.
displayed.
Sync Time
Parity 2 mS
NONE C
21. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons 2 Access is not active or has been
select "NONE, EVEN or ODD", then previously input, the following will be
press the ENT pushbutton. The selected displayed.
Parity setting will be displayed.
Sync Time
Parity
2 mS C
(NONE, EVEN or ODD)
22. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton, desired Sync Time value (2 to 5,000 mS
as necessary, until the "Stop Bits" menu in 1 mS increments), then press the ENT
item is displayed. pushbutton. The entered Sync Time
Stop Bits
Sync Time
ONE STOPBIT
XXXX mS
2 Access is not active or has been 28. The RS-485 or Fiber Optic Port is now
previously input, the following will be available for communications.
displayed.
29. If DNP3.0 was selected in Step 12 and
Source Address Validation is desired,
Stop Bits then see "Enabling Source Address
ONE STOPBIT
C Validation" earlier in this section.

select "ONE STOPBIT or TWO
STOPBITS", then press the ENT
pushbutton. The selected Stop Bits
Stop Bits
(ONE STOPBIT or TWO STOPBITS)
4–43
RS-485/Fiber Optic Port Setup From TapTalk RS-232 Port Setup From The HMI
To setup the RS-485/Fiber Optic from TapTalk®, This procedure provides the steps necessary to
proceed as follows: setup all RS-232 Port parameters. Parameter
definitions and the default value (default value) for
1. Select Communication/Setup/Comm each parameter are included below:
Port from the TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk
will display the "Setup Comm Port" • Comm Protocol – Allows selection
dialog screen (Figure 4-31). between standard protocols, DNP 3.0 or
MODBUS®. (MODBUS)
• Baud Rate – Selects baud rate for COM2,
located on the top of the control. (115,200)
• Parity – None, odd or even parity is
available. (NONE)
• Stop Bits – One or two stop bits are
available. (TWO STOPBITS)
• Sync Time – This time delay improves
robust operation when communication
lines are intermittent. Communication
dead-sync time is the time that the control
will wait from the last received character
and continue without attempting to
re-synchronize. (50 ms)
Figure 4-31 Setup Comm Port Dialog Screen If the default value for a parameter does not need to
be changed, then skip the applicable steps.
2. Select Comm Port Type "RS-485" or
"Fiber".
3. If Echo/Repeat is required then Enable
 NOTE: If Access Code protection has been
Echo/Repeat by placing the Echo/
Repeat on/off switch located adjacent
2 Access Code is required to be entered
to the Fiber connection on the side of
to manually configure each element of
the control in the on position towards
the RS-232 port.
the rear of the control.
4. Enter the desired settings for the
following parameters: 2. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot
• Protocol unit. The menu will advance to either
• Baud Rate "COMMUNICATION" or if a Memory
• Parity Card is present in the Smart Flash SD
• Stop Bits
• Sync Time
COMMUNICATION
• TX Delay
CNFG
UTIL
"Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation OR
6. Select OK. TapTalk will display a Memory Card
"Setpoints Successfully Written to  
Control" confirmation screen (Figure
4-13).
then see "Enabling Source Address
Validation" earlier in this section.
4–44
System Setup – 4
3. If the "Communication" menu is 9. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons,

displayed, then press the Down Arrow select "DNP3.0 or MODBUS®", then
pushbutton once. The unit will display press the ENT pushbutton. The selected
the following: protocol will be displayed.
Comm Settings Protocol


 (DNP3.0 or MODBUS)
4. From either the "Comm Settings" or 10. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton, as
"Memory Card" menu, press the Right necessary, until the "Baud Rate" menu
or Left Arrow pushbutton as necessary item is displayed.
until "RS232" is displayed.
Baud Rate
RS232 115200
 
 NOTE: From this point on in this procedure it
5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once. is assumed that a valid Access Level 2
The unit will display the following: Code has been previously entered. If not,
then a valid Level 2 Access Code will be
Protocol required to be entered as described in
Step 8.
MODBUS
displayed. Go to Step 9. displayed.
Protocol Baud Rate

MODBUS C 115200 C
7. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 12. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons
Access prompt will be displayed. select the desired Baud Rate:
• 115,200
• 57,600
_ • 38,400
• 19,200
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code,
the display will automatically advance • 9,600
the cursor to the next digit when input • 4,800
is momentarily paused. • 2,400
• 1,200
8. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then • 600
• 300
If a valid Level 2 Access code was When the desired Baud Rate has
entered, the display will briefly flash a been selected, then press the ENT
confirmation screen and display the pushbutton. The selected Baud Rate will
following: be displayed.
Protocol Baud Rate
MODBUS C XXXXXXX
4–45
13. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton as 18. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons
necessary until the "Parity" menu item is select "ONE STOPBIT or TWO
displayed. STOPBITS", then press the ENT
pushbutton. The selected Stop Bits
Parity setting will be displayed.
NONE
Stop Bits
14. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level (ONE STOPBIT or TWO STOPBITS)
previously input, the following will be 19. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton, as
displayed. necessary, until the "Sync Time" menu
item is displayed.
Parity
Sync Time
NONE C
50 mS
select "NONE, EVEN or ODD", then 20. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
press the ENT pushbutton. The selected 2 Access is not active or has been
Parity setting will be displayed. previously input, the following will be
displayed.
Parity
(NONE, EVEN or ODD) Sync Time
50 mS C
16. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton,
as necessary, until the "Stop Bits" menu 21. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the
item is displayed. desired Sync Time value (1 to 5,000 mS
in 1 mS increments), then press the ENT
Stop Bits pushbutton. The entered Sync Time
TWO STOPBITS setting will be displayed.
17. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level Sync Time

2 Access is not active or has been XXXX mS
displayed.
Stop Bits Source Address Validation is desired,
TWO STOPBITS C then see "Enabling Source Address
4–46
System Setup – 4
RS-232 Port Setup From TapTalk INSTALLING MODEMS

To setup the RS-232 Port from TapTalk® proceed Using TapTalk® to interrogate, set or monitor the
as follows: control using a modem requires both a remote
1. Select Communication/Setup/RS232 modem connected at the controls location and
Comm Port from the TapTalk toolbar. a local modem connected to the computer with
TapTalk will then display the Setup TapTalk installed.
RS-232 Comm Port dialog screen
 NOTE: Any compatible modem may be used;
(Figure 4-32).
however, the unit only communicates at
1200 to 9600 baud.
In order to use TapTalk to communicate with the

control using a modem, the following must be
provided with the control:
• An external modem (1200 baud or higher),
capable of understanding standard AT
commands.
• Serial modem cable with 9-pin connector
for the control and the applicable
connector for the modem.
Figure 4-32 Setup RS-232 Comm Port
Similarly, the computer running TapTalk must also
Dialog Screen have access to a compatible internal or external
modem.
following parameters:
• Protocol Connecting the PC Modem
• Baud Rate 1. If the computer has an external modem,
then use a standard straight-through
• Parity
RS‑232 modem cable (M-3933) to
• Stop Bits connect the computer to the modem.
• Sync Time
2. If the computer has an internal modem,
3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a then refer to the modem’s instruction
"Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation book to determine which communications
screen (Figure 4-2). port should be selected.
4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a 3. Verify that the modem is attached to (if
"Setpoints Successfully Written to Control" external) or assigned to (if internal) the
confirmation screen (Figure 4-13). same serial port as assigned in TapTalk.
5. If DNP3.0 was selected in Step 2 and While TapTalk can use any of the 255
Source Address Validation is desired, serial ports (COM1 through COM255),
then see "Enabling Source Address most computers support only COM1 and
Validation" earlier in this section. COM2.
The RS-232 option for the control is now enabled. 4. Connect the modem to a telephone line,
then energize the modem.
See Communication Using Serial Port section of
Chapter 3 to connect to the target control through
the RS-232 connection.
4–47
Initializing the PC Modem Connecting the Local Modem to the Control

1. Verify that the modem is connected Setup of the modem attached to the control may
as described in "Connecting the PC be slightly complicated. It involves programming
Modem". parameters (using the AT command set), and storing
2. Open TapTalk, then select the Connect/ this profile in the modem’s nonvolatile memory.
Modem menu item. After programming, the modem will power up in the
3. TapTalk will display the Modem proper state for communicating with the control.
Connection Dialog screen (Figure 4-33). Programming may be accomplished by using the
"Bring Up Terminal Window after dialing" selection
4. Enter the required information in the
(Figure 4-34). Refer to your modem manual for
Modem Settings section of the screen,
further information.
then select Connect.
COMMAND BUTTONS
Add Allows you to review and change
the user lines (unit identifier), phone
number, and communication address
of a selected entry.
Remove Deletes a selected entry.
Save Saves any changes to the displayed
information
Connect Dials the entry selected from the
directory.
Cancel Ends modem communication,
allowing the user to dial again.
Figure 4-34 Terminal Window
 NOTE: The control does not issue or

understand any modem commands. It
will not adjust the baud rate and should
be considered a "dumb" peripheral. It
communicates with 1 start, 8 data, and
0, 1 or 2 stop bits.
Connect the Modem to the control as follows:

1. Connect the unit to an external
modem by attaching a standard RS-232
modem cable to the appropriate serial
communications port on both the unit
and the modem.
Figure 4-33 Modem Connection Dialog Screen 2. Connect the modem to a telephone line,
then energize the modem.
4–48
System Setup – 4
The modem attached to the control must have the Optional Bluetooth
following AT command configuration: The Bluetooth® option enables wireless access to
the M-2001D. Utilizing the Bluetooth wireless feature
E0 No Echo
the user is able to configure the control, read status
Q1 Don’t return result code and metering values, as well as change setpoints.
The following lists the initialization scheme and
&D3 On to OFF DTR, hangup and reset
setpoint options available for Bluetooth.
&S0 DSR always on
The M-2001D provides generic serial Bluetooth
&C1 DCD ON when detected service. The user must select the generic serial
S0=2 Answer on second ring service among any other listed services, if the user’s
Bluetooth device doesn’t automatically recognize
The following commands may also be required at the available service.
the modem:
The following features on the M-2001D are available
&Q6 Constant DTE to DCE to the user:
N0 Answer only at specified speed • Enable/Disable – The user can enable or
disable Bluetooth functionality.
W Disable serial data rate adjust
• Reset – The Bluetooth can be reset to
\Q3 Bidirectional RTS/CTS relay Beckwith factory default values.
&B1 Fixed serial port rate • Authentication – The device can be
authenticated for security purposes, if
S37 Desired line connection speed
enabled, the user can select a passkey
When connected to another terminal device, the to connect to the device.
Terminal Window allows the user to send messages • Passkey – If authentication is enabled, the
or commands. Outgoing communications are customer can assign up to a maximum of
displayed in the top pane and incoming messages 16 alphanumeric characters as a passkey.
are displayed in the bottom two panes, in ASCII text
• Friendly Name – The user can give the
and HEX format.
Bluetooth his/her preferred name, which
There are some variations in the AT commands can be a maximum of 20 characters,
supported by modem manufacturers. Refer to the including alphanumeric as well as the '_'
hardware user documentation for a list of supported and '-' characters.
AT commands and direction on issuing these • Mode – The following configurations are
commands. available for the Bluetooth Mode:
- Mode 0, the device is discoverable
and connectable to any client
station.
- Mode 1, the device is non‑discoverable
but it is connectable to any client
station that knows the control
Bluetooth device address indicated
under "Control BT Device" in the
HMI menu.
• Protocol – MODBUS or DNP.
4–49
Bluetooth Module Initialization To verify that these conditions are present on the
 NOTE: For first time Bluetooth® module use, control, observe the display while applying power
the Bluetooth module needs to be reset to the control. The following sequence of messages
to ensure that the Bluetooth module will be displayed during the control boot up:
functions according to the Beckwith
factory values. See "Resetting Bluetooth Factory Options
Module" later in this section.
BLUETOOTH
Bluetooth Initialization Overview
Following a control power cycle, the M-2001D Bluetooth Status
hardware is checked for Bluetooth by sending an BLUETOOTH PRESENT
AT command and waiting for an ‘OK’ response. If
no response is received, a ‘Bluetooth not present’
message will be displayed on the HMI. If an ‘ERROR’ Bluetooth Status
message is received, Bluetooth is reset to factory CONNECTABLE
default values and the hardware is checked again.
If the unit display messages are consistent with the
The Bluetooth device information, i.e., BD address, above, the unit is physically ready to be setup for
friendly name, mode of device, internal operation wireless communication.
state and status of authentication and encryption
features will be retrieved.  NOTE: If it becomes necessary to reset
the Bluetooth module during the
The Beckwith factory default values for device performance of this procedure, navigate
information are: to the Bluetooth Reset menu item and
select ENT. See "Resetting Bluetooth
• Friendly Name – M2001D-Serial Number
Module" later in this section.
• Mode of Device – Mode0
• Internal operation status – Standby To setup the M-2001D Bluetooth module from the
• Authentication: None HMI, proceed as follows:
• Encryption: None 1. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot
The retrieved Bluetooth device information is unit. The menu will advance to either
compared to the factory defaults, if they are not the "COMMUNICATION" or if a Memory
same; they are forced to the default values. If internal Card is present in the Smart Flash SD
operation status is not standby, an AT+BTCANCEL CARD slot "Memory Card".
command is issued to force standby status. The
mode is set by issuing a AT+BTMODE command. COMMUNICATION
The friendly name is set by AT+BTNAME. The CNFG
UTIL
device is now in connectable mode, hence the
user can use the Bluetooth device to connect to the OR
M-2001D using the generic serial service.
Memory Card
Bluetooth Setup From the HMI  
In order to setup the Bluetooth feature on the
M-2001D from the HMI the following conditions 2. If the "Communication" menu is
must be present: displayed, then press the Down Arrow
• The Bluetooth Factory Option must be the following:
enabled on the control
• The Bluetooth Status on the control must Comm Settings
be "Present" and "Connectable" 

4–50
System Setup – 4
3. From either the "Comm Settings" or 9. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton, as
"Memory Card" menu, press the Right necessary, until the "Bluetooth Protocol"
or Left Arrow pushbutton as necessary menu item is displayed.
until "Bluetooth®" is displayed.
Bluetooth Protocol
Bluetooth MODBUS
 
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once. is assumed that a valid Access Level 2
The unit will display the following: Code has been previously entered. If not,
then a valid Level 2 Access Code will be
Bluetooth Enable required to be entered as described in
Step 7.
disable
displayed. Go to Step 8. displayed.
Bluetooth Enable Bluetooth Protocol

disable C MODBUS C
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 11. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons
Access prompt will be displayed. select "MODBUS® or DNP3.0", then
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS Protocol setting will be displayed.
_ Bluetooth Protocol
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code MODBUS or DNP3.0
the cursor to the next digit when input 12. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton,
is momentarily paused. as necessary, until the "Authentication"
7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then Authentication
disable
entered, the display will briefly flash a 13. If "Authentication" is to be ENABLED,
confirmation screen and display the press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
following: 2 Access is not active or has been
Bluetooth Enable displayed.
disable C
Authentication
If not, re-enter a valid code. disable C
8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, 14. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons
select "ENABLE", then press the select "ENABLE", then press the
ENT pushbutton. The following will be ENT pushbutton. The following will be
Bluetooth Enable Please Enter Passkey

ENABLE _
4–51
15. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the 20. Press the "ENT" pushbutton. If Level
desired Passkey (up to 16 characters), 2 Access is not active or has been
then press ENT. The following sequence previously input, the following will be
of screens will be displayed: displayed.
Please Enter Passkey Bluetooth Mode

Please -WAIT-
Mode0 C
21. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select

Please Enter Passkey the desired Bluetooth Mode (0 or 1),
-DONE- then press the "ENT" pushbutton.
The selected Bluetooth Mode will be
displayed.
Authentication
ENABLE Bluetooth Mode
ModeX
16. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton,
as necessary, until the "Friendly Name" The Bluetooth feature is now available
menu item is displayed. for use.
Friendly Name 22. If DNP3.0 was selected in Step 11 and

M2001D-2005 then see "Enabling Source Address
previously input, the following will be Bluetooth Setup From TapTalk®
displayed. In order to setup the Bluetooth feature on the
M‑2001D, the following conditions must be present:
Enter New Name
• The Bluetooth Factory Option must be
– enabled on the control
18. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter • The Bluetooth Status on the control must
the desired Friendly Name value (up be "Present" and "Connectable"
to 21 characters), then press the ENT To verify that these conditions are present on the
pushbutton. The entered Friendly Name control, observe the display while applying power
that was entered will be displayed. to the control. The following sequence of messages
will be displayed during the control bootup:
Friendly Name
M2001D-2005 Factory Options
BLUETOOTH
The Bluetooth® "Device Address" is
available by pressing the Down arrow
once, Bluetooth Status
BLUETOOTH PRESENT
Control BT Device
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
Bluetooth Status
19. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbutton, CONNECTABLE
as necessary, until the "Bluetooth Mode"
menu item is displayed. If the unit HMI display messages are consistent with
the above, the unit is physically ready to be setup
Bluetooth Mode for wireless communication.
Mode0
4–52
System Setup – 4
 NOTE: If it becomes necessary to reset

the Bluetooth module during the
performance of this procedure, see
"Resetting Bluetooth Module" later in
this section.
To setup Bluetooth wireless communication from

TapTalk®, proceed as follows:
Figure 4-35 Bluetooth Hardware Option
1. S e l e c t C o m mu n i c a t i o n / S e t u p / Dialog Screen
Bluetooth Settings from the TapTalk
toolbar.
Depending on the status of the Bluetooth
option in the control, TapTalk will respond
as follows:
• If the Bluetooth option is disabled in
the control, TapTalk will display the
Bluetooth Hardware option dialog
• If the Bluetooth option is enabled in
the control, TapTalk will display the
Bluetooth Information dialog screen
(Figure 4-36).
2. If the Bluetooth Hardware option dialog

screen (Figure 4-35) is displayed,
proceed as follows:
a. If the Bluetooth hardware is present,
then select "OK" to enable. TapTalk
will then display the Bluetooth
Information dialog screen (Figure
4-36). Go to Step 3.
b. If the Bluetooth hardware is not Figure 4-36 Bluetooth Information
present, then select "Cancel". Dialog Screen
TapTalk will return to the Main
screen. 4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
3. Enter the desired settings for the "Setpoints Successfully Written to
following parameters: Control" confirmation screen (Figure
4-13).
• Protocol (MODBUS® or DNP3.0)
• Mode (0 or 1) 5. Verify that removing power to the control
will not cause upset operation conditions
• Friendly Name (20 characters max) on the control.
• Bluetooth (Enable/Disable)
6. Remove power to the control, and then
• Authentication (Enable or Disable) reapply power to the control.
• Set Password (16 characters max)
if Authentication is "Enabled" The Bluetooth feature is now available
for use. Consult the Bluetooth wireless
device documentation that is to be used
to communicate with the M-2001D for
setup information.
then see "Enabling Source Address
4–53
Bluetooth MODE1 Setup (TapTalk) Resetting Bluetooth Module (HMI)

When the control’s Bluetooth module is set to The Bluetooth Module can be reset to Beckwith
MODE1, the only way to connect to the control is factory values if necessary.
to use the Secure Non-Discoverable connection
method. To reset the Bluetooth Module from the HMI proceed
as follows:
1. Select Connect/Bluetooth from the
TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the 1. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot
"Secure Bluetooth" dialog screen (Figure Button) pushbutton to awaken the
4-37). unit. The menu will advance to either
2. Enter the Control Name, the control MAC Card is present in the Smart Flash SD
Address, Pass Key if needed and the CARD slot "Memory Card".
Device Address.
The user can create a Bluetooth session COMMUNICATION
and save it to an address book. The CNFG
UTIL
session must contain a name unique
to the address book, the MAC address, OR
Pass Key and Device address.
Memory Card
 

the following:
Comm Settings
Figure 4-37 Secure Bluetooth Setup Screen 


until "Bluetooth" is displayed.
Bluetooth
 

necessary to navigate to the "Bluetooth
Reset" menu item.
Bluetooth Reset
Ready Press ENTER

CONFIRM PRESS ENTER

Cancel press EXIT.
4–54
System Setup – 4
6. If Level 2 Access is active, then the Level


_

is momentarily paused. Figure 4-38 Bluetooth Reset Command Sent
Confirmation Screen
press the ENT pushbutton. 3. Select "OK". TapTalk will send the "reset"
command to the control and display a
If a valid Level 2 Access code was "Waiting for Bluetooth to Reset" status
entered, then the display will briefly flash screen (Figure 4-39).
the following:
CONFIRM PRESS ENTER

Cancel press EXIT.
8. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following Figure 4-39 Bluetooth Reset Status Screen
When the Bluetooth Module has been
Bluetooth Reset reset, TapTalk will display "Bluetooth
Resetting -WAIT- has been reset successfully" message
(Figure 4-40).
Bluetooth Reset
-DONE-
Resetting Bluetooth Module (TapTalk)

The Bluetooth Module can be reset to Beckwith
factory values if necessary.
To reset the Bluetooth Module from TapTalk®
proceed as follows: Figure 4-40 Bluetooth Reset Confirmation
Screen
1. S e l e c t C o m mu n i c a t i o n / S e t u p /
Bluetooth Settings from the TapTalk 4. Select "OK". TapTalk will return to the
toolbar. TapTalk will display the "Bluetooth "Bluetooth Information" Dialog Screen
Information" dialog screen (Figure 4-36). (Figure 4-36).
2. Select "Reset Control Bluetooth Module".
TapTalk will respond with a "Bluetooth
Reset Command Sent Successfully"
4–55
Resetting Bluetooth Passkey (HMI) 6. If Level 2 Access is active, then the Level
The Bluetooth Passkey can be changed or reset to 2 Access prompt will be displayed.
default conditions (no Passkey and Authentication
Disabled) if necessary. ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS
_
To reset the Bluetooth Passkey from the HMI
proceed as follows:
1. Press the Right Arrow (COMM Hot the display will automatically advance
Button) pushbutton to awaken the the cursor to the next digit when input
unit. The menu will advance to either is momentarily paused.
Card is present in the Smart Flash SD 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then
CARD slot "Memory Card". press the ENT pushbutton.
COMMUNICATION entered, then the display will briefly flash
CNFG
UTIL a confirmation screen and then display
the following:
OR
Confirm press ENTER
Memory Card Cancel press EXIT.
 
displayed, then press the Down Arrow 8. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following
pushbutton once. The unit will display sequence of screens will be displayed:
the following:
Bluetooth Pass Reset
Comm Settings
Resetting -WAIT-


3. From either the "Comm Settings" or Bluetooth Pass Reset

-DONE-
until "Bluetooth" is displayed.
Bluetooth
Ready Press ENTER
 
The Passkey is now set to NONE and
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as Authentication is disabled.
necessary to navigate to the "Bluetooth
Pass Reset" menu item. 9. To assign a NEW Passkey, press the Up/
Down arrow pushbutton, as necessary,
until the "Authentication" menu item is
Bluetooth Pass Reset displayed.
Ready Press ENTER
Authentication
disable
Confirm press ENTER

Cancel press EXIT.
4–56
System Setup – 4
10. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level Resetting Bluetooth Passkey (TapTalk)
2 Access is not active or has been The Bluetooth Passkey can be reset if necessary.
be displayed. Go to Step 13. To reset the Bluetooth Passkey from TapTalk®
proceed as follows:
Authentication
1. S e l e c t C o m mu n i c a t i o n / S e t u p /
disable C Bluetooth Settings from the TapTalk
toolbar. TapTalk will display the "Bluetooth
11 If Level 2 Access is active, then the Level Information" dialog screen (Figure 4-36).
2. Select "Set Password". TapTalk will
display the "Bluetooth Authentication
Password" dialog screen (Figure 4-41).
_


a confirmation screen and then display Figure 4-41 Bluetooth Authentication Password
the following: Dialog Screen
Authentication 3. Enter the "Old" Password and then enter

the desired "New" Password (up to 16
disable C
characters).
If not, re-enter a valid code. 4. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
13. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pusbuttons
select "ENABLE", then press the 5. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
ENT pushbutton. The following will be "New Password written successfully"
displayed: confirmation screen (Figure 4-42).
Please Enter Passkey

_

desired Passkey (up to 16 characters),
then press ENT. The following sequence
of screens will be displayed:
Bluetooth Pass Reset Figure 4-42 New Bluetooth Password Written

Resetting -WAIT- Successfully Screen
Bluetooth Pass Reset 6. Select OK. TapTalk will return to the

"Bluetooth Information" Dialog screen
-DONE- (Figure 4-36).

Ready Press ENTER
4–57
SCADA HeartBeat SCADA HeartBeat for LTC and Regulator

The purpose of the SCADA HeartBeat feature is SCADA HeartBeat, when enabled, provides
to have sets of settings for the control and switch an additional set of control settings called
between these settings sets based on the presence HeartBeat DNP points (HBBandcenter (Forward),
or absence of SCADA communications to the control. HBBandwidth (Forward), etc), that are only
accessible through communications utilizing the
In order to determine if the SCADA communications DNP protocol. Although LTC and Regulator modes
is present a HeartBeat detection algorithm is are mutually inclusive (meaning if one of the options
implemented. is selected, the other selection is also available),
There are four different types of SCADA HeartBeat the selection is still required due to a difference in
modes: the physical input requirement. In LTC mode, the
non-sequential input is used as a counter input,
• SCADA HeartBeat for transformer control and hence an object 10 point "Non-Sequential" is
applications (LTC) made available to activate non sequential through
communication. When SCADA HeartBeat is active,
• SCADA HeartBeat for regulator control
HeartBeat DNP points are used as a second set
applications (Regulator)
of settings.
• SCADA HeartBeat for Profile Switching
The HeartBeat DNP points (applicable only for
• Manual HeartBeat Mode
forward power settings) include:
The LTC, Regulator and Profile Switching have • Bandcenter

to be selected using TapTalk® Communications • Bandwidth
software or from the HMI, for these modes to be
• Time Delay
operational. But the Manual HeartBeat Mode does
not need to be selected for operation. • LDC R
• LDC X
• Block Lower Voltage
• Block Raise Voltage
• Intertap Time Delay
• Sequential or Non-Sequential
• HeartBeat Timer Period
• Voltage Reduction 1
As the M2001D has 4 different setpoint profiles

to choose from, when the SCADA HeartBeat is
inactive, the previously selected active profile
is used. In order to determine the actively used
settings a third group of DNP points called the Active
DNP points ("Active Bandcenter (Forward)", "Active
Bandwidth (Forward)" etc), can be used. Reading
the Active DNP points gives the current used
settings, but writing always changes the selected
Active Profile.
The SCADA HeartBeat DNP3.0 Protocol sequence
for LTC and Regulator are provided in Figure 4-44.
Also, Object 40 point "Write HB" is mapped by
default to Point 195, "HeartBeat Timer" mapped to
159, "Direct HeartBeat" mapped to 211 and "VRed
Turnoff Time" mapped to 212.
4–58
System Setup – 4
SCADA HeartBeat for Profile Switching HeartBeat Manual Mode

In the M-2001D algorithm, the user shall use Object The purpose of the Manual HeartBeat Mode feature
40 point "ScadaHB Profile Switch" (default Point: is to provide a method to place the control in Manual
79) to renew the Direct HeartBeat timer (writing operation and automatically place the control
to point 79), lower 12 bits of the data will contain back in Auto mode based on a HeartBeat Timer
the timer reload value in minutes and the most setting (settable only via DNP communication).
significant 4 bits will have the profile number to be The HeartBeat Timer setting is Object 40 "Remote
activated when the timer expires. The range for the Manual Timer".
timer is from 0 to 999 minutes and for the profile is
from 0 to 3 (profiles 1 through 4). It is important to The Manual HeartBeat Timer is settable from 0 to
know that to terminate the HeartBeat timer at any 999 Minutes. When the timer is set to a non zero
instant of time and to revert back to the original value it will place the control in HeartBeat Manual
active profile, a zero value should be entered for Mode (Auto operation blocked). If the timer expires
the entire 16 bits of the analog point. The SCADA the control is placed back in auto mode. If the timer
HeartBeat DNP3.0 Protocol sequence for Profile is refreshed before it expires, the control stays in
Switching is provided in Figure 4-45. HeartBeat Manual mode.
Additionally an IEC 61850 method of providing a The DNP status point (binary input Object 1) that
HeartBeat for profile switching is available when shows if the control is in the HeartBeat Manual
the optional IEC 61850 protocol is purchased. Mode is: "Manual HeartBeat Status". This point will
The HeartBeat mode for the IEC 61850 algorithm be set to 1 when placed in manual using the Manual
works exactly like profile switching HeartBeat mode HeartBeat Timer only and not by any other means.
in DNP, except that GOOSE subscription is used The HeartBeat Manual Mode is separate from
in case of IEC 61850. The M-2001D subscribes the original comm block manual mode. They both
to HeartBeat GOOSE message which has the perform the same function, but use a different
following attributes: method and DNP point to activate auto or Manual
• VLAN-ID: 0 mode. When the control is in Comm Blk Manual,
the Manual LED will turn on steady as before, but
• VLAN-PRIORITY: 4 when in the HeartBeat Manual mode it will flash. The
• MAC Address: 01-0C-CD-00-00-10 HeartBeat manual method can only be activated via
• APPID: 0 the new HeartBeat timer setting point while the old
comm blk method can be activated via comms or
the toggle/scamp switch as before.
Also, the GOOSE dataset contains only one data
which is organized as, the most significant 4 bits The Comm Blk mode has priority over the HeartBeat
will have the profile number to be activated and the Manual mode regardless of how it is enabled
rest will contain the timer reload value. (through communication or switch input). When
in HeartBeat Manual mode the tap/voltage limit
Using this method, the IEC 61850 client should blocks are active just as before with comm blk
repetitively publish a GOOSE message with the mode, but in HeartBeat manual the runback due to
above mentioned attributes and data, before the high Voltage will also be enabled. If the control is in
timer reload value expires. HeartBeat Manual mode and the comm blk manual
is also turned on (via comms or switch input), then
the HeartBeat timer will continue to count down.
If Comm Blk is turned off, then it will go back to
HeartBeat Manual mode unless the HeartBeat
manual timer has reached 0.
4–59
Setting SCADA HeartBeat Option

1. S e l e c t C o m m u n i c a t i o n / S e t u p /
Heartbeat Option from the TapTalk®
toolbar. TapTalk will display the
Heartbeat option dialog screen
(Figure 4-43).
Figure 4-43 SCADA HeartBeat Dialog Screen
2. Select either "Disable," "LTC (DNP),"

"Regulator (DNP)," "Profile Switching
(DNP)" or "Profile Switching (GOOSE)".
3. Select "Save". TapTalk will momentarily
display a "Setpoints Successfully written
to control" confirmation screen (Figure
4-13).
4–60
System Setup – 4
On Power Up Initially
use Setting #1. Settings that are included in
Load Timer with
Settings #1 and Settings #2
default value Bandcenter
Bandwidth
Time Delay
LDC R
1 Second LDC X
Proceed to Next No
Timer Block Lower
Step
Elapsed? Block Raise
Intertap Delay
Yes Non-Sequential
Timer Period
Voltage Reduction 1
Confirmed HeartBeat Direct HeartBeat Voltage Reduction 2
Timer Type Voltage Reduction 3
Dec Timer
(Point 159) Timer P 0 Yes
(Point 211)
No
Received Yes
Confirmed
Active Settings = Active Settings =
HeartBeat?
Settings #1 Settings #2
No Reload Timer
Yes Timer is Zero

(Point 159)
Active Settings =
Settings #2
Active Settings = No
Settings #1
Comm.
No Voltage
Reduction in
Effect Notes:
1. Object 40 Point 195 is used to update the HeartBeat
Yes Timer Type = Confirmed HeartBeat
2. Object 40 Point 159 is used to update the timer period.
Dec V Red Timer 3. Object 40 Point 211 is added to reload the timer automatically.
(Point 212)
Range 1-999 mins
Timer Type = Direct HeartBeat
4. Object 40 Point 212 is used for Voltage Reduction Timer Reload Value.
No V Red
Timer
O0
Yes
Stop Voltage
Reduction
Proceed to Next
Step
Figure 4-44 SCADA HeartBeat LTC and Regulator DNP 3.0 Protocol Sequence
4–61
On Power Up Initially use

the Active Profile. Load
Timer with default value
1 Second
No Timer Elapsed
Proceed to Yes
Next Step
Dec Timer
(Point 79)
Yes
Timer = < 0
(Point 79)
No Active settings =
Active Profile (can be
changed manually by
Active settings = Profile using DNP or
Note3 in most significant MODBUS 3796)
nibble of Point 79
Comm.
No Voltage
Reduction in
Effect
Yes
Dec V Red Timer

(Point 212)
No V Red
Timer
=< 0
Yes
Stop Voltage
Reduction
Notes:
1. Object 40 point 79 is added to reload the timer automatically
Proceed to Range 1-999 mins
Next Step Timer Type = Direct HeartBeat
2. Object 40 point 80 is used for Voltage Reduction Timer reload value
3. If IEC 61850 GOOSE is used, then the Active Setting Profile in most
significant nibble of ATCC0$CO$HbTimer$Oper$ctlVal
Figure 4-45 Profile Switching
4–62
Configuration – 5
5 Configuration
4.4 Tapchanger Type Selections.................................................... 5–6
5.2 Configuration............................................................................ 5–8
5.3 Parallel Operation.................................................................. 5–62
5.4 Tap Settings........................................................................... 5–88
5.5 Data Logging and Harmonics.............................................. 5–110
5.6 CBEMA Configuration.......................................................... 5–116
Chapter Five is designed for the person or group • Remote Voltage Bias
responsible for the Configuration of the M-2001D • Run Through Neutral
Digital Tapchanger Control.
• Fast Voltage Recovery
Chapter 5 provides the definitions of system • Voltage Reduction
quantities and equipment characteristics required
by the control which include: • VAr Bias
• Parallel Operation (∆VAr®/ Master/Follower)
• Tapchanger Type
• Tap Information
• User Programmable Alarm Relay
• Intertap Time Delay
• Op Count Signal Alarm
• Tap Limits
• Counters
• Data Logging
• Input Selection 1, 2, and 3
• Harmonics Setup
• Auto/Manual Switch Type
• CBEMA Functionality
• Ratio Multipliers
• Correction Factors The selection of the M-2001D Configuration
• Metering Factors parameters are performed using either the TapTalk®
• VT/CT Source S-2001D Communications Software or the control
Front Panel Human Machine Interface (HMI).
• VT/CT Load Instructions for TapTalk and the HMI are provided
• Output Selection where applicable.
• Motor Current Settings TapTalk instructions assume that communications
• Regulator Type have been established with the control.
5–1
5.1 Tapchanger Type Selections........ 5–6 Setting Input Selection 1 Operation

Counter Input Configuration Motor Seal-In
From TapTalk........................................5–22
5.2 Configuration................................ 5–8
Setting Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block
User Programmable Alarm Relay..................5–8 From The HMI........................................5–23
Setting Programmable Alarm Relay Inputs Setting Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block
From TapTalk..........................................5–8 From TapTalk........................................5–23
Programmable Alarm Relay Mode.........5–10 Input Selection 2 (Non-Sequential or

SCADA Cutout)......................................5–24
Setting Programmable Alarm Relay Mode
From The HMI........................................5–10 Setting Input Selection 2 (Non-Sequential
or SCADA Cutout) From The HMI.........5–24
Setting Programmable Alarm Relay Mode
From TapTalk........................................5–10 Setting Input Selection 2 From TapTalk...5–24
Setting Programmable Alarm Relay Inputs Input Selection 3 (VR2 or Aux)..............5–25

From The HMI........................................5–11 Setting Input Selection 3 (VR2/Aux)
From The HMI.........................................5–25
Op Count Signal Alarm................................5–12
Setting Input Selection 3 From TapTalk...5–25
Setting Op Count Signal Alarm
From The HMI........................................5–12 Auto/Manual Switch Type............................5–26
Setting Op Count Signal Alarm From Setting Auto/Man Switch Type
TapTalk..................................................5–13 From The HMI........................................5–26
Counters........................................................5–14 Setting Auto/Manual Switch Type

From TapTalk.........................................5–26
Operation Counter.................................5–14
Setting the Operation Counter Resettable Operation Counter.....................5–27
Configuration From The HMI.................5–14 Resetting the Resettable Operation
Setting Operation Counter X Mode Delay Counter From TapTalk...........................5–27
From The HMI........................................5–15 Presettable Operation Counters
Setting Operation Counter Time Window (Operation, Neutral, Lower and Raise)....5–27
From The HMI........................................5–16 Presetting the Operation Counter
Configuring the Operation Counter From TapTalk........................................5–28
From TapTalk........................................5–17 Presetting the Neutral Counter
Setting Input Selection 1 Operation From TapTalk........................................5–28
Counter Input Configuration to Switch
Ratio Multipliers............................................5–29
Status From The HMI............................5–17
Voltage and Current Multipliers.............5–29
Setting Input Selection 1 Operation
Counter Input Configuration to Switch Normalizing Voltage Multiplier...............5–29
Status From TapTalk.............................5–18
Setting The Voltage and Current
Motor Seal-in Failure Block....................5–20 Multipliers From The HMI......................5–29
Setting Input Selection 1 Operation Setting The Voltage and Current
Counter Input Configuration Motor Seal-In Multipliers From TapTalk.......................5–30
From The HMI........................................5–22
Primary Power Display Selection...........5–31
5–2
Configuration – 5
Setting Primary Power Display Selection Output Selection...........................................5–39

From The HMI........................................5–31
Output Pulse..........................................5–39
Setting Primary Power Display Selection
SCADA INITIATED Manual
From TapTalk........................................5–31
Raise/Lower...........................................5–39
Correction Factors.......................................5–32 Continuous.............................................5–39
VT Ratio Correction...............................5–32 Setting Output Configuration
Setting Load VT Correction Factor From The HMI........................................5–39
from the HMI..........................................5–32 Setting Output Configuration
Setting Source VT Correction Factor From TapTalk........................................5–40
from the HMI..........................................5–33
Motor Current Detection and Monitoring...5–41
Setting Load and/or Source VT
Setting the Motor Current Detection
Correction Factors From TapTalk..........5–33
Settings From The HMI..........................5–42
CT/VT Phase Shift.................................5–34
Setting the Motor Current Detection
Setting CT/Load and/or CT/Source Settings From TapTalk..........................5–42
Phase Shift Quantities From The HMI...5–34
Regulator Type.............................................5–43
Setting CT/Load and/or CT/Source
Phase Shift Quantities From TapTalk....5–35 Setting Regulator Type From The HMI...5–44
Auxiliary Current Transformer................5–35 Setting Regulator Type From TapTalk...5–44
Setting Auxiliary Current Transformer Remote Voltage Bias....................................5–45

Rating From The HMI............................5–35
Enabling/Disabling Remote Voltage
Setting Auxiliary Current Transformer Bias From the HMI.................................5–46
Rating From TapTalk.............................5–36
Enabling/Disabling and Remote
Metering Factors...........................................5–36 Voltage Bias From TapTalk...................5–47
Secondary..............................................5–36 Run Through Neutral....................................5–48

Primary .................................................5–36 Enabling/Disabling and Setting Run
Present Demand ...................................5–37 Through Neutral From The HMI ............5–48
Energy Metering....................................5–37 Enabling/Disabling and Setting Run

Through Neutral From TapTalk.............5–50
Demand History.....................................5–37
Fast Voltage Recovery.................................5–51
Frequency..............................................5–37
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Fast Voltage
Load VT Configuration...........................5–38 Recovery From The HMI ......................5–51
Setting Load VT Configuration Enabling/Disabling and Fast Voltage
From The HMI........................................5–38 Recovery From TapTalk........................5–52
Setting Load VT Configuration
From TapTalk........................................5–38
5–3
Voltage Reduction........................................5–53 Optional Master/Follower Paralleling

Method...................................................5–72
Standard Voltage Reduction..................5–53
Grouping Operation Algorithm (GOA)....5–72
Enabling/Disabling Standard Voltage
Reduction From The HMI .....................5–53 Master/Follower Alarm Messages..........5–74
Smart Voltage Reduction.......................5–54 Lockout Condition..................................5–74
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Smart Master Lockout......................................5–74
Voltage Reduction From The HMI ........5–54
Follower Lockout....................................5–75
Enabling/Disabling and Setting
Standard or Smart Voltage Reduction Master/Follower Configuration Tool.......5–75
From TapTalk........................................5–55 Discovered Devices...............................5–75
Save Voltage Reduction at Power Off...5–56 Setting Masters and Followers From
Setting Save Voltage Reduction at TapTalk..................................................5–77
Power Off From The HMI.......................5–56 Master Control Setup From TapTalk.....5–77
Selecting Save Voltage Reduction Follower Control Setup From TapTalk...5–78
at Power Off From TapTalk...................5–56
Setting Masters and Followers
Setting Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer From The HMI........................................5–79
From The HMI........................................5–57
Master Control Setup From The HMI.....5–79
Setting Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer
From TapTalk........................................5–57 Follower Control Setup From HMI.........5–83
VAr Bias.........................................................5–58 5.4 Tap Settings................................ 5–88

VAr Bias Setpoints.................................5–58
Tap Information............................................5–88
Overview................................................5–58
Load Tapchanger (LTC) Positive Tap
Enable/Disable VAr Bias From Position Knowledge...............................5–88
The HMI.................................................5–59
Contact KeepTrack™............................5–89
Setting VAr Bias From TapTalk.............5–61
Contact KeepTrack Method I –
Using 1R/1L Contact Input.....................5–89
5.3 Parallel Operation....................... 5–62
Example of Contact KeepTrack
Circulating Current and Delta VAr Method I – Using 1R/1L Contact Input...5–89
Methods.................................................5–62
Contact KeepTrack Method II –
Circulating Current/∆VAR1....................5–62 Using Neutral Contact Input...................5–91
∆VAR2 Paralleling and Example of Contact KeepTrack
∆VAR2 Paralleling + KeepTrack™........5–63 Method II – Using Neutral Contact Input
∆VAR2 Connection................................5–64 (with 84R/84L derived contacts)............5–92
Selecting Paralleling Method and Shaft Coupled KeepTrack™

Tap Position Knowledge........................5–94
∆VAR2 Settings.....................................5–70
Beckwith Electric Shaft Coupled
Selecting Paralleling Method and
KeepTrack Method................................5–94
∆VAR2 Settings From The HMI..............5–70
Beckwith Electric-INCON Shaft Coupled
Selecting Paralleling Method and
KeepTrack Method................................5–94
Settings From TapTalk..........................5–71
5–4
Configuration – 5
Resistor Divider KeepTrack™ 5.5 Data Logging and Harmonics... 5–110

Tap Position Knowledge For LTCs........5–96
Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™ Data Logging...............................................5–110
Tap Position Knowledge For LTCs........5–97 Data Logging Setup From The HMI.....5–110
Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™ Tap Data Logging Setup From TapTalk......5–111
Position Knowledge For Regulators......5–98
Harmonics Setup........................................5–112
Selecting Tap Position Knowledge
From The HMI........................................5–99 Setting the Active Harmonics Inputs to
the Oscillograph and Sequence of Events
Selecting Tap Position Knowledge
Recorders From The HMI....................5–112
From TapTalk........................................5–100
Setting the Harmonic Voltage, Current
Contact KeepTrack™ 1N – Additional
Threshold and Minimum Current
TapTalk Settings Screen.....................5–100
Threshold Setting(s) From The HMI....5–113
Initializing Tap Position When
Setting the Harmonic Voltage and Current
Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack
Threshold Delay From The HMI..........5–114
"INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" is Active
From The HMI......................................5–101 Setting the Active Harmonics Inputs to
Initializing Tap Position When Motor
Recorders From TapTalk.....................5–115
Direct Drive KeepTrack™ "INTERNAL
KEEPTRACK" is Active
From TapTalk......................................5–102 5.6 CBEMA Configuration............... 5–116
Initializing Tap Position When CBEMA Functionality...........................5–116
Regulate (Reg or XFMR) External or
Contact KeepTrack™ 1R1L/1N is Setpoints..............................................5–116
Active From The HMI...........................5–102
Outputs................................................5–116
Initializing Tap Position When
Triggers................................................5–116
Regulate (Reg or XFMR) External or
Contact KeepTrack™ 1R1L/1N is Operation.............................................5–116
Active From TapTalk............................5–103
CBEMA Setup From The HMI.............5–116
Setting Highest Tap From The HMI.....5–104
CBEMA Setup From TapTalk...............5–118
Setting Lowest Tap From The HMI......5–105
Setting Highest and Lowest Tap
From TapTalk........................................5–105
Intertap Time Delay....................................5–106

Sequential/Non-Sequential/Blocking...5–106
Setting The Intertap Delay
From The HMI......................................5–107
Setting Intertap Time Delay
From TapTalk......................................5–107
Tap Limits....................................................5–108
Tap Limits From The HMI ...................5–108
Tap Limits From TapTalk.....................5–109
5–5
The Tap Changer Type Selection feature allows the

5.1 Tapchanger Type Selections user to easily select the Vendor of the Regulator
the control is being installed on and populate the
The Tapchanger Type Selection feature provides the settings specific to that Vendor Regulator type in a
user with the ability to set vendor specific regulator single menu. This menu will always display Beckwith
configuration settings in the control from TapTalk®. recommended settings by default for each vendor
These settings can be accessed through the when opening it, but the interface allows the user
traditional settings screens or from the Tapchanger to make changes if desired, and save them to the
Type Selections dialog screen (Figure 5-1) located control or settings file. Once this menu is saved,
in the Setup dropdown menu. The selectable these settings are written to the control or settings
settings are available for the following vendor file and can be viewed in their appropriate locations.
regulator models:
Table 5-1 includes the vendor specific settings that
• Siemens are available for each vendor specific regulator.
• Howard
The Tapchanger "Type" (A or B) and "Regulator
• General Electric Vendor" selection settings can be observed in the
• Cooper Spring Drive HMI in the CONFIGURATION menu "Tapchanger
Type" submenu. These settings however, cannot be
• Cooper Direct Drive
changed from the HMI.
• Cooper Quick Drive
Figure 5-1 Tapchanger Type Selections Dialog Screen
5–6
Configuration – 5
Raise/Lower Raise/Lower
Operation Input Write
Regulator Tap Intertap Output Output
Vendor Counter Selection 1 SOE
Type Information Delay Contacts Contacts
Configuration Configuration Triggers?
Configuration Pulse Width
Switch
Default A Disabled 0 X1 Continuous 1.0 Sec. N/A
Status
Regulate
Switch
Siemens A Internal 1 Sec. X2 Pulsed 8.0 Sec. N/A
Status
(KeepTrack)
Regulate
Switch
Howard A Internal 1 Sec. X2 Pulsed 8.0 Sec. N/A
Status
(KeepTrack)
Regulate
General Switch
A Internal 1 Sec. X1 Pulsed 8.0 Sec. N/A
Electric Status
(KeepTrack)
Cooper Regulate
Seal-In
Spring A Internal 1 Sec. X1 Pulsed 3.0 Sec. Yes
Input
Drive (KeepTrack)
Cooper Regulate
Seal-In
Direct A Internal 1 Sec. X1 Pulsed 0.5 Sec. Yes
Input
Drive (KeepTrack)
Cooper Regulate
Seal-In
Quick A Internal 1 Sec. X1 Pulsed 0.3 Sec. Yes
Input
Drive (KeepTrack)
Table 5-1 Vendor Specific Regulator Settings
5–7
5.2 Configuration
USER PROGRAMMABLE ALARM RELAY

The User Programmable Alarm Relay (Form c) is
a non‑latching relay that is capable of switching
6 A at 125 Vac or 0.2 A at 125 Vdc and is user-
programmable to indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• Block Comm is in effect
• Block-Raise Voltage Limit exceeded
• Block-Lower Voltage Limit exceeded
• Voltage Reduction of any step is invoked
• Reverse Power Flow condition is detected
• Line Current Limit/Limit exceeded
• Tap Block Raise/Lower is in effect
• LDC_LDZ is in effect
• Abnormal Tap position detected
• VAr Bias Lead Limit Exceeded Figure 5-2 Programmable Alarm Relay Setting
Dialog Screen
• VAr Bias Lag Limit Exceeded
• Backup Power Fail (If purchased) 2. Select the desired Programmable Alarm
• RTN Fail to Operate relay inputs.
• Individual Tap Wear Limit Exceeded 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
• Operations Count Limit Exceeded
When activated, the LDC/LDZ programmable

alarm will initiate when any non-zero setting has
been entered as LDC Fwd resistance or reactance,
or LDC-Z. It will also alarm when any non-zero
setting has been entered as LDC Rev resistance or
reactance with the "Rev Power Oper" configuration
set to "Regulate in Reverse" and the control in
reverse power mode. Figure 5-3 Save to Device Confirmation Screen
The Alarm Relay will de-energize and generate an 4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
output without any of the conditions being enabled "Setpoints Successfully Written to
when power to the unit is lost. the Control" confirmation screen
(Figure 5-4).
Setting Programmable Alarm Relay Inputs

From TapTalk
To set the Programmable Alarm Relay from TapTalk®
1. Select Setup/Alarms from the TapTalk
toolbar. TapTalk will display the Alarms
dialog screen (Figure 5-2). Figure 5-4 Setpoints Successfully Written To
The Control Dialog Screen
5–8
Configuration – 5
All Disabled Prog Alarm Function

(factory Setting) 0000000000000000
Prog Alarm Function

1111111111111111 All Enabled
––––––––––––––––
Communication Block (in effect)
COMMUNICATION BLOCK Block Raise Voltage Limit (exceeded)
MNTR Block Lower Voltage Limit (exceeded)
0000000000000001 C
Voltage Reduction (any step) (invoked)
Reverse Power Flow (condition detected)
In "Change Mode" continue pressing Line Current Limit (exceeded)
LEFT to access Programmable Tap Block Raise (in effect)
Alarm Relay II screen Tap Block Lower (in effect)
LDC/LDZ (in effect)
TAP CHANGER FAILURE Abnormal Tap (condition detected)
1– C VAr Bias Lag (limit exceeded)
Var Bias Lead (limit exceeded)
Backup Power Fail (if purchased)
Tap Changer Failure (detected)
RTN Fail To Operate (condition detected)
Individual Tap Wear Limit (exceeded)
Op Count Limit (exceeded)
Programmable Alarm
CNFG
Prog Alarm Function

0000000000000000
Press ENT to enter change mode UTIL

ENT Flashing "Underline" and
"C" indicates change mode
Alarm condition displayed on top communication block
line is based on the digit that is 0 disables alarm condition
underlined on the bottom line 0000000000000000 C 1 enables alarm condition
Use LEFT or RIGHT to navigate to SETP CNFG Use UP or DOWN to select 0 or 1

desired Alarm Condition
COMMUNICATION BLOCK
MNTR
0000000000000001 C Press ENT to exit change
mode and save settings
block raise voltage UTIL

0000000000000001 C ENT
Figure 5-5 Programmable Alarm Function Programming
5–9
Programmable Alarm Relay Mode 6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2

When the Auto/Man Switch Type is set to "SCAMP", Access prompt will be displayed.
the Programmable Alarm Function can be set to
"Normal" or "As a Deadman Output". This option ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS
is used since the Deadman Output is not available. _
The default configuration setting is NORMAL.
Setting Programmable Alarm Relay Mode the display will automatically advance
From The HMI the cursor to the next digit when input
To set the Programmable Alarm Relay Mode from
the HMI, proceed as follows: 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
 NOTE: The "Auto/Man Switch Type Selection"
in configuration must be set to "SCAMP" If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
to access this setting. entered, the display will briefly flash a
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) the following:
will advance to "CONFIGURATION". Prog Alarm Function
CONFIGURATION NORMAL C
COMM
SETP If not, re-enter a valid code.
The unit will display the following: 8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select the
desired Programmable Alarm Function
Tapchanger Type Mode (NORMAL or AS DEADMAN
OUT), then press the ENT pushbutton.
  The following will be displayed reflecting
the selection that was entered.
as necessary, to navigate to the Prog Alarm Function
"Programmable Alarm" menu.
NORMAL or AS DEADMAN OUT
Programmable Alarm
  Setting Programmable Alarm Relay Mode
From TapTalk
 NOTE: The "Auto/Man Switch Type Selection"
necessary, until the "Programmable
Alarm Function" screen is displayed.
to access this setting.
Prog Alarm Function 1. Select Setup/Configuration from the
NORMAL TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the
Configuration dialog screen (Figure 5-8).
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level 2. From the "Programmable Alarm Relay
2 Access is not active or has been Mode" section of the dialog screen select
previously input, the following will be either "Normal" or "Deadman Out".
Prog Alarm Function screen (Figure 5-3).
NORMAL C
"Setpoints Successfully Written to
Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5-4).
5–10
Configuration – 5
Setting Programmable Alarm Relay Inputs 6. If the unit displays the Programmable
From The HMI Alarm function Relay Mode selection
Each alarm condition (Figure 5-5) corresponds to screen ("NORMAL" on Line 2), then
one of the digits on the bottom line of the display: press the "ENT" pushbutton. If Level
a "0" indicates that the alarm condition is disabled; 2 Access is not active or has been
a "1" indicates that the alarm condition is enabled. previously input, the following will be
To set the Programmable Alarm, perform the
following: Prog Alarm Function
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) NORMAL C
will advance to "CONFIGURATION". 7. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
CONFIGURATION
COMM
SETP
_
The unit will display the following:  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code,
Tapchanger Type the cursor to the next digit when input
 
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, press the ENT pushbutton.
as necessary, until "Programmable If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
Alarm" is displayed. entered, the display will briefly flash a
Programmable Alarm the following:
 
Prog Alarm Function
4. Press the Down arrow, as necessary, NORMAL C
until either of the following are displayed
depending upon whether the Auto/Manual If not, re-enter a valid code.
Switch Type is selected to "SCAMP" or not.
Prog Alarm Function 9. Press the "ENT" pushbutton. The

following will be displayed.
–<0000000000000000
Prog Alarm Function
OR
NORMAL
Prog Alarm Function
10. Press the "ENT" pushbutton again. The
NORMAL following will be displayed.
5. If the unit displays the Programmable Prog Alarm Function
Alarm setup screen (zeros and/or ones
on Line 2), then go to Step 11. –<0000000000000000
Go to Step 11.
5–11
11. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level OP COUNT SIGNAL ALARM

previously input, the following will be The Op Count Signal Alarm feature provides the
displayed. Go to Step 14. user with the ability to set a predefined alarm point
for the number of tapchanges initiated by the control.
When the predefined alarm setting is exceeded,
communication block
the following alarm message will be displayed on
–<0000000000000000 C the HMI screen:
12. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 Op Count Signal Alarm

Rst Op Count XXX
_ Setting Op Count Signal Alarm From The HMI
To set the Op Count Signal Alarm, perform the
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code, following:
the cursor to the next digit when input 1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button)
is momentarily paused. pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
press the ENT pushbutton. CONFIGURATION
If a valid Level 2 Access Code was COMM
SETP
confirmation screen and then display 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
the following: The unit will display the following:
communication block Tapchanger Type

–<0000000000000000 C  
If not, re-enter a valid code. 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton,
as necessary, until "Programmable
 NOTE: See Figure 5-5 for the index of alarm Alarm" is displayed.
functions.
Programmable Alarm
14. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter
a "1" for those Alarm Functions to be  
activated and a "0" for those that are
to be disabled, then press the ENT 4. Press the Down arrow, as necessary,
pushbutton. The selected alarm will until the following is displayed.
change from "lower case" when disabled
(0), to "UPPER CASE" when activated Op Count Signal Alrm
(1). The following will be displayed 0
reflecting the selections that were made.
Prog Alarm Function 2 Access is not active, or has been
–<0000000000000000 previously input, the following will be
Op Count Signal Alrm

0 C
5–12
Configuration – 5
6. If Level 2 Access is active, then the 8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons
Level 2 Access prompt will be displayed. enter the desired alarm value, then press
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS be displayed reflecting the selections
that were made.
_
Op Count Signal Alrm
the display will automatically advance X
Setting Op Count Signal Alarm From TapTalk
7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then To set the Op Count Signal Alarm from TapTalk®
press the ENT pushbutton. perform the following:
following:
2. From the "Operation Counter" section
Op Count Signal Alrm of the Tap Settings screen select the
desired Op Count Signal Alarm setpoint
0 C (Alarm Limit).
If not, re-enter a valid code. 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
the Control" confirmation screen
(Figure 5-4).
Figure 5-6 Tap Settings Dialog Screen
5–13
COUNTERS Count Window – Operation count will increment by

only one count during a set time period of "Count
Operation Counter
Window". This is true no matter how many counter
The user must select the method of counting inputs occur during the count window time. After a
tapchanger operations consistent with the counter input is accepted, the count window timer
tapchanger. begins and another count won't be accepted until
The Operation Counter accommodates 999,999 the count window time expires. The count window
operation counts. The number of counts are stored time can be set from 0.5 to 60.5 seconds.
in non-volatile memory and are not affected by a ▲ CAUTION: The Count Window setting should not
loss of supply power to the control. The total number be set to a value greater than the Intertap Delay
of operation counts is displayed in the Status Menu. when in pulsed or continuous mode. Also, it should
The Operation Counter can be preset to any value not be set greater than the Pulse Width setting, if
up to 999,999. Pulsed mode is used.
Cooper Regulators do not provide a counter
contact. Therefore, the "Operation Counter Input Cam Follower – The Cam Follower setting should
Configuration" must be set to "Seal-In Input". See be selected when a Cam Follower contact input is
"Setting Operation Counter Input Configuration" in wired into the Counter contact input of the M‑2001D.
this section. The Seal-In Input selection has a fixed The operation counter and resettable operation
3 second Seal-In Delay. counter will increment when the counter input sees
the cam follower open and then close.
X1 – Operation count will increment by one with an ▲ CAUTION: The Cam Follower contact requires
open-close-open state change on the tapchanger a minimum of 500 milliseconds to open and a
counter switch. The closed state must be present minimum of 500 milliseconds to close. For this
for at least 20 mS. The open state may be present reason, if configuring the Output Selection to
indefinitely. Pulsed Mode, the Pulse Width must be set to
X Mode Delay (X1) – When the control is using longer than the actual time it takes for the Cam
X1 Mode counter contact detection method, the X Follower switch to complete its operational cycle.
Mode Delay setting in millisecond is used to define If this is not set correctly, tap position could be
the minimum time duration for the X1 counter inaccurate. Beckwith Electric recommends that
contact signal. Any signal duration of less than the X Output Selection be configured to Continuous
Mode Delay will be considered as an invalid counter unless the LTC mechanism requires Pulsed Mode
contact signal. Depending on the condition of the to operate correctly.
counter contact switch, the X Mode Delay should
be set between 10 - 20 mS. Neutral Switch Counter - The Neutral Switch
Counter is updated each time the neutral input is
For greater noise immunity a debounce window of detected. Neutral Switch Counter can also preset to
160 mS exists after valid count operation. any value. The Neutral Switch Counter is a software
counter that is stored in non-volatile memory and
X2 – Operation count will increment by one with has a maximum value of 999,999.
either an open-close or a close-open state change
of the tapchanger operation counter switch. Both Setting the Operation Counter Configuration
the closed and open states may exist indefinitely. From The HMI
X Mode Delay (X2) – When the control is in X2  NOTE: This feature is not functional unless Input
Mode detection, the X Mode Delay setting is used Selection 1 is set to "Switch Status".
to delay the detection and processing of the next X2 To setup the Operation Counter Configuration,
counter contact signal. This is necessary especially perform the following:
in the case where the neutral signal starts before
the next counter contact signal when the voltage 1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button)
regulator is moving to neutral. pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
CONFIGURATION
COMM
SETP
5–14
Configuration – 5
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. 8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons,
The unit will display the following: select the desired counter configuration
for the application (1 X, 2 X, COUNT
Tapchanger Type WINDOW or CAM FOLLOWER), then
press the ENT pushbutton. The following
  will be displayed reflecting the counter
configuration that was entered.
as necessary, to navigate to the "Tap Op Counter Config
Settings" menu.
1 X C
Tap Settings
  9. Depending on the Operation Counter
configuration that was selected in
Step 8, proceed as follows to complete
the Operation Counter configuration:
necessary, until the "Operation Counter
Configuration" screen is displayed. • If the "1 X" or "2 X" counter
configuration was selected, proceed
Op Counter Config to the "Setting the Operations
Counter X Mode Delay from the HMI"
1 X section of this chapter.
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level • If the "COUNT WINDOW" counter
2 Access is not active or has been configuration was selected, proceed
previously input, the following will be to the "Setting the Counter Time
displayed. Go to Step 8. Window" section of this chapter.
• If the "CAM FOLLOWER" counter
Op Counter Config configuration was selected, the
Operation Counter configuration is
1 X C complete.

Access prompt will be displayed. Setting Operation Counter X Mode Delay
From The HMI
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS  NOTE: This feature is not functional unless Input
Selection 1 is set to "Switch Status".
_
To set the Operation Counter X Mode Delay, perform
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code, the following:
the cursor to the next digit when input 1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button)
is momentarily paused. pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
press the ENT pushbutton. CONFIGURATION
If a valid Level 2 Access Code was COMM
SETP
confirmation screen and then display 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
the following: The unit will display the following:
Op Counter Config Tapchanger Type

1 X C  
5–15
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, Setting Operation Counter Time Window
as necessary, to navigate to the "Tap From The HMI
Settings" menu.  NOTE: This feature is not functional unless Input
Selection 1 is set to "Switch Status".
Tap Settings
To set the Operation Counter Time Window, perform
  the following:
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as 1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button)
necessary, until the "X Mode Delay" pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
screen is displayed. will advance to "CONFIGURATION".
X Mode Delay CONFIGURATION

10 ms COMM
SETP
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
2 Access is not active or has been The unit will display the following:
displayed. Go to Step 7. Tapchanger Type
 
X Mode Delay
10 ms C 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton,
as necessary, to navigate to the "Tap
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 Settings" menu.
Tap Settings
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS  
_
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton,
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code, as necessary, until the "Counter Time
the display will automatically advance Window" screen is displayed.
is momentarily paused. Counter Time Window
7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then 0.5 Sec
If a valid Level 2 Access Code was 2 Access is not active or has been
entered, the display will briefly flash a previously input, the following will be
confirmation screen and then display displayed. Go to Step 8.
the following:
Counter Time Window
X Mode Delay
0.5 Sec C
10 ms C
6. If Level 2 Access is active, then the Level
If not, re-enter a valid code. 2 Access prompt will be displayed.
8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS

select the desired Counter X Mode Delay _
value for the application (0 to 3000 ms),
following will be displayed reflecting the
X Mode Delay setting that was entered.
X Mode Delay
XX ms
5–16
Configuration – 5
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code Setting Input Selection 1 Operation Counter
the display will automatically advance Input Configuration to Switch Status From
the cursor to the next digit when input The HMI
is momentarily paused. To set the Input Selection 1 Operation Counter Input
7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then Configuration from the HMI, proceed as follows:
press the ENT pushbutton. 1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button)
If a valid Level 2 Access Code was pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
entered, the display will briefly flash a will advance to "CONFIGURATION".
the following: CONFIGURATION
COMM
SETP
Counter Time Window
0.5 Sec C 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
Tapchanger Type
8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select the  
desired "Counter Time Window" value
for the application (0.5 to 60.5 Seconds),
3. Press the Right or Left Arrow pushbutton,
as necessary, until "Input Selection" is
displayed.
Counter Time Window setting that was
entered.
Input Selection
Counter Time Window  
X.X Sec
necessary, until the "Input Selection 1"
Configuring the Operation Counter From screen is displayed.
TapTalk
 NOTE: This feature is not functional unless Input Input Selection 1
Selection 1 is set to "Switch Status". SWITCH STATUS
To configure the Operation Counter, perform the
following: 5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
1. Select Setup/Tap Settings from the previously input, the following will be
TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the displayed. Go to Step 8.
2. Select the desired Operation Counter Input Selection 1
configuration (X1, X2, Count Window or SWITCH STATUS C
Cam Follower).
3. If "X1 or X2" configuration was selected 6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
in Step 2, enter the desired "X Mode Access prompt will be displayed.
Delay" setting (0 to 3000 mS).
4. If "Count Window" configuration was
selected in Step 2, enter the desired _
"Count Window" setting (0.5 to 60.5
seconds).
"Save to Device" confirmation screen
(Figure 5-3).
5–17
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code, Setting Input Selection 1 Operation Counter
the display will automatically advance Input Configuration to Switch Status From
the cursor to the next digit when input TapTalk
is momentarily paused. To set the Input Selection 1 Operation Counter Input
7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then Configuration from TapTalk®, proceed as follows:
press the ENT pushbutton. 1. Select Setup/Configuration from the
If a valid Level 2 Access Code was TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
entered, the display will briefly flash a Configuration dialog screen (Figure 5-8).
confirmation screen and then display ▲ CAUTION: Input Selection 1 is required to be
the following: set to "Switch Status" if "Contact KeepTrack 1R1L"
or "Contact KeepTrack 1N" is selected for Tap
Input Selection 1 Information. TapTalk will display the following Error
SWITCH STATUS C Screen if applicable (Figure 5-7):
▲ CAUTION: Input Selection 1 is required to be

set to "Switch Status" if "Contact KeepTrack™
1R1L" or "Contact KeepTrack 1N" is selected for
Tap Information. The unit will display the following
error message if applicable:
Figure 5-7 Tap Information/Input Selection
Tap Info conflict Conflict Error Screen
Any Key to Continue
2. From the "Inputs and Switch" section of
the dialog screen set Input Selection 1
to "Switch Status".
select "SWITCH STATUS" then press 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
the ENT pushbutton. The following will "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
be displayed reflecting the mode that screen (Figure 5-3).
was selected.
Input Selection 1 Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5-4).
SWITCH STATUS
The applicable counter type must be

selected in Tap Settings.
5–18
Configuration – 5
Figure 5-8 Configuration Dialog Screen
5–19
Motor Seal-in Failure Block • The Motor Seal-in Switch in the Cooper
The Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature addresses regulator may malfunction in either
the following scenarios that can occur on Cooper one direction or both. The result of this
regulators which can result in incorrect tap position, condition is a regulator that cannot track
a failure of the regulator to regulate voltage, or both tap position accurately.
conditions simultaneously. — In this scenario, the motor is capable of
turning, but tap position will be inaccurate
• Failing or open motor capacitor (Stalled as the circuit’s proper operation is the
Tapchanger). If the motor capacitor only method of tracking tap position
degrades over time, it will result in a motor accurately. Since it is possible for the
that does not always have enough torque Motor Seal-in switch to fail in only one
to operate correctly. Eventually, it will direction, the blocking function of the
degrade enough to prevent any operation Motor Seal-in Failure feature is designed
of the motor. The result of this scenario to be unidirectional such that it will allow
is a regulator that intermittently and the regulator to operate in the opposite
eventually permanently fails to regulate direction that caused the block to occur.
voltage and cannot track tap position — The Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature
accurately. actuates an alarm to alert the user
— The Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature to the problem. The operation block
will block the regulator from operating would not be needed in this scenario
and actuate an alarm to alert the user to as loss of accurate KeepTrack™ is
this malfunction. If the motor capacitor is the only negative consequence of the
not open but degraded, then input voltage malfunction. Since the unit cannot
affects the motor’s ability to operate. For detect the difference between this failure
this reason, instead of blocking the and the Stalled Tapchanger scenario,
regulator operation permanently, it will the block must be in effect. The block
only block in the direction it was moving function of this feature can be disabled
when the Motor Seal-in Failure Block by the user if it is desired to continue
feature was triggered. operating the regulator with this failure
until it can be repaired. The alarm
however, will remain in effect as long as
• Low motor voltage (Stalled Tapchanger), the failure conditions exist.
for example a brown out condition, could
result in a motor temporarily not having
enough torque to operate correctly. The • Reaching a Physical Tap Limit as set in the
result of this scenario is a regulator that regulator. When the tap limit is reached,
intermittently fails to regulate voltage and motor power is physically disconnected
cannot track tap position accurately. from the raise or lower motor windings in
— In this scenario, the motor also does not the direction of the tap limit and operation
have enough torque to execute a in that direction cannot occur.
tapchange. The Motor Seal-in Failure — This scenario removes motor power
Block feature will operate the same from the raise or lower motor winding
as it does for a failing or open motor when the associated physical tap
capacitor except that once voltage limit is reached. There is no negative
is restored, the control will operate consequence of this occurring when
normally. The alarm will alert the user the Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature
to the low voltage condition and its effect is disabled. With the Motor Seal-in
on the regulator. Failure Block feature enabled however,
the control cannot detect the difference
between Reaching a Physical Tap Limit
and a Motor Seal-in Switch failure, so it
must block and alarm.
5–20
Configuration – 5
— The unidirectional nature of the block Motor Seal-in Failure Block – The Motor
is designed for this scenario as well as Seal-in Failure Block is actuated on the
a Motor Seal-in Switch failure to allow second occurrence of a tapchange
operation of the regulator in the opposite coincident with no motor seal-in current
direction when needed. Alarming in detected for 15 seconds in either
this condition can provide the user direction. The block will be in effect in
with information that there may be a the direction that produced the second
settings error or an upstream Fixed Tap Motor Seal-in Failure occurrence. If a
Transformer may be tapped incorrectly Motor Seal-in Failure is detected in the
as a regulator should not normally need opposite direction, then operation will be
to issue a raise or lower command when blocked in that direction also.
at its physical limit.
This Block can be reset by the user
from the HMI, from the TapTalk "Alarms"
When Motor Seal-in is selected in the control the dialog screen or via SCADA. The block is
Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature and the input also reset when a successful tapchange
to the Abnormal Tap Position alarm are enabled by operation occurs (motor seal-in current
default. The user may choose to disable the Motor is detected) in the opposite direction.
Seal-in Block feature. However, the input to the The internal accumulator that counts
Abnormal Tap Position alarm is always enabled the occurrences of failed tapchanges is
when Motor Seal-in is selected. The feature includes stored in volatile memory and is set to
the following: zero when a loss of power occurs and
the unit is not equipped with a backup
Abnormal Tap Position Alarm Input – power supply. This is considered normal
The Motor Seal-in Failure Block feature operation of the feature.
provides an input to the "Abnormal Tap
Position" alarm. This input is actuated
on the first occurrence of a tapchange
coincident with no motor seal-in current
detected for 15 seconds.
Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm – The
Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm is actuated
on the second occurrence (either
direction) of a tapchange coincident with
no motor seal-in current detected for 15
seconds. This alarm can be reset by the
user from the Human Machine Interface
(HMI), from the TapTalk® "Alarms" dialog
screen or via SCADA. The alarm is also
reset when a successful tapchange
operation occurs (motor seal-in current
detected) in either direction.
5–21
Setting Input Selection 1 Operation Counter  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code,
Input Configuration Motor Seal-In From The HMI the display will automatically advance
▲ CAUTION: If Tap Information is selected to either the cursor to the next digit when input
"Contact KeepTrack™ 1R1L" or "Contact KeepTrack is momentarily paused.
1N" the control will not accept an Input Selection 1 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
setting of "Seal-In Input". The unit will display the press the ENT pushbutton.
following error message if applicable:
Tap Info conflict confirmation screen and then display
Any Key to Continue the following:
To Enable/Disable Motor Seal-In from the HMI, Input Selection 1

proceed as follows: SWITCH STATUS C
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu If not, re-enter a valid code.
CONFIGURATION select "SEAL-IN INPUT", then press the
COMM
SETP ENT pushbutton. The following will be
displayed reflecting the mode that was
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. selected.
Input Selection 1
Tapchanger Type SEAL-IN INPUT
 
 NOTE: Motor Seal-in Delay is fixed at 3 seconds.
3. Press the Right/Left arrow pushbutton
as necessary to navigate the "Input
Selection" screen. Setting Input Selection 1 Operation Counter
Input Configuration Motor Seal-In From
Input Selection TapTalk
  ▲ CAUTION: If Tap Information is selected to either
"Contact KeepTrack 1R1L" or "Contact KeepTrack
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as 1N" the control will not accept an Input Selection
necessary, until the "Input Selection 1" 1 setting of "Seal-In Input".TapTalk will display the
screen is displayed. Tap Information/Input Selection Error Screen if
applicable (Figure 5-7):
Input Selection 1
To Enable/Disable Motor Seal-In from TapTalk®,
SWITCH STATUS proceed as follows:
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level 1. Select Setup/Configuration from the

2 Access is not active or has been TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
previously input, the following will be Configuration dialog screen (Figure 5-8).
displayed. Go to Step 8. 2. From the "Inputs and Switch/Input
Selection 1" section of the dialog screen
Input Selection 1 select "Seal-in Input".
SWITCH STATUS C 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5-4).

_
5–22
Configuration – 5
Setting Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
From The HMI the display will automatically advance
To set the Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm, perform the the cursor to the next digit when input
following: is momentarily paused.
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu press the ENT pushbutton.
CONFIGURATION confirmation screen and display the
COMM
SETP following:
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. Seal-In Fail Block

The unit will display the following: disable C

 
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, select enable, then press the ENT
as necessary, to navigate to the "Tap pushbutton. The following will be
Settings" menu. displayed reflecting the selections that
were made.
Tap Settings
  Seal-In Fail Block
ENABLE
Setting Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm/Block
Seal-In Fail Block From TapTalk
disable To set the Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm from TapTalk®
2 Access is not active, or has been 1. Select Setup/Tap Settings from the
previously input, the following will be TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
displayed. Go to Step 8. Tap Settings dialog screen (Figure 5-6).
2. From the "Block Automatic Operation
Seal-In Fail Block on Motor Seal-in Failure" section of the
Tap settings screen select Motor Seal-in
disable C
Failure "Enable" or "Disable".
6. If Level 2 Access is active, then the Level 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
2 Access prompt will be displayed. "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS 4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
_ "Setpoints Successfully Written to
5–23
Input Selection 2 (Non-Sequential or SCADA 6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2

Cutout) Access prompt will be displayed.
The Input Selection 2 can be configured to be
either an input that initiates Non-Sequential control ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS
operation or a SCADA Cutout switch input. The _
default configuration setting is Non-Sequential.
Setting Input Selection 2 (Non-Sequential or the display will automatically advance
SCADA Cutout) From The HMI the cursor to the next digit when input
To set the Input Selection 2 (Non-Sequential or
SCADA Cutout) from the HMI, proceed as follows: 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
COMM
SETP
Input Selection 2
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. NONSEQ INPUT C
Tapchanger Type
  8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons,
select the desired Input Selection 2
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, (Non-Sequential or SCADA Cutout),
as necessary, to navigate to the "Input then press the ENT pushbutton. The
Selection" menu. following will be displayed reflecting the
selection that was entered.
Input Selection
Input Selection 2
 
NONSEQ INPUT or SCADA CUTOUT
screen is displayed. Setting Input Selection 2 From TapTalk
Input Selection 2 TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the
NONSEQ INPUT Configuration dialog screen (Figure 5-8).
2. From the "Inputs and Switch/Input
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level Selection 2" section of the dialog
2 Access is not active or has been screen select either "Non-sequential" or
previously input, the following will be "SCADA Cutout".
Input Selection 2
NONSEQ INPUT C
5–24
Configuration – 5
Input Selection 3 (VR2 or Aux) 6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2

The Input Selection 3 can be configured as the Access prompt will be displayed.
Voltage Reduction 2 input or as an auxiliary input
that can be read as a DNP or MODBUS® point. The ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS
default configuration setting is Voltage Reduction 2. _
Setting Input Selection 3 (VR2/Aux) From The HMI  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
To set Input Selection 3 (VR2/Aux) from the HMI,
proceed as follows:
CONFIGURATION entered, the display will briefly flash a
COMM
SETP the following:
Input Selection 3
VOLTAGE RED 2 C
Tapchanger Type
 
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, 8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select
as necessary, to navigate to the "Input the desired Input Selection (VR2/Aux),
Selection" menu. then press the ENT pushbutton. The
Input Selection selection that was entered.
 
Input Selection 3
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as VOLTAGE RED 2 or AUX INPUT
Setting Input Selection 3 From TapTalk
Input Selection 3 1. Select Setup/Configuration from the
VOLTAGE RED 2 TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level 2. From the "Inputs and Switch/Input
2 Access is not active or has been Selection 3" section of the dialog screen
previously input, the following will be select either "VR2" or "Aux" for Input
displayed. Go to Step 8. Selection 3.
Input Selection 3
VOLTAGE RED 2 C screen (Figure 5-3).
5–25
AUTO/MANUAL SWITCH TYPE 6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2

The Auto/Manual Switch Type setting allows the Access prompt will be displayed.
Auto/Man Switch type on the adapter panel to be set
to "Toggle, SCAMP or None". None is used when no ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS
Auto/Manual Switch exists. The default configuration _
setting is None. See Chapter 4, "Comm Block Auto
at Power Off" and "SCAMP Initialize on Power Up"  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
for additional settings associated with Auto/Manual the display will automatically advance
Switch Type. the cursor to the next digit when input
 NOTE: When the Auto/Manual Switch Type
configuration is set to "SCAMP", then the
Programmable Alarm Function can be set 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
to function as "Normal" or "As a Deadman press the ENT pushbutton.
Output". This option is available when If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
SCAMP mode is used since the Deadman entered, the display will briefly flash a
Output is not available. confirmation screen and then display
the following:
Setting Auto/Man Switch Type From The HMI
To set the Auto/Man Switch Type from the HMI, Auto/Man Sw Type
proceed as follows:
NONE C
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu If not, re-enter a valid code.
CONFIGURATION
the desired Auto/Manual Switch Type
COMM
SETP (None, Toggle or SCAMP), then press
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. be displayed reflecting the selection that
The unit will display the following: was entered.
Tapchanger Type Auto/Man Sw Type

  NONE, TOGGLE or SCAMP

as necessary, to navigate to the Setting Auto/Manual Switch Type From TapTalk
"Nameplate" menu.
TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the
Nameplate
 
2. From the "Inputs and Switch/Auto/Man
Switch Type" section of the dialog screen
select either "None, Toggle or SCAMP".
necessary, until the "Auto/Man Sw Type"
screen is displayed. 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
Auto/Man Sw Type screen (Figure 5-3).
NONE 4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5-4).
Auto/Man Sw Type
NONE C
5–26
Configuration – 5
Resettable Operation Counter Resetting the Resettable Operation Counter

The resettable operation counter operates with the From TapTalk
method selected by X1, X2, Count Window or Cam To reset the Operation Counter from TapTalk®,
Follower. This counter can be reset to zero. perform the following:
To reset this counter to zero from the HMI, perform 1. Select Setup/Tap Settings from the
the following: TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The 2. Select the "Reset" check box located
menu will advance to "MONITOR". next to the "Resettable" counter located
in the Operation Counter section of the
dialog screen.
MONITOR
SETP
UTIL 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
(Figure 5-3).
The unit will display the following: 4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
Metering Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5-4).
 
Presettable Operation Counters (Operation,
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, Neutral, Lower and Raise)
as necessary to advance to the "Tap The Operation, Neutral, Lower and Raise Counters
Information" screen. operate with the selected count method (X1, X2,
Count Window or Cam Follower). It provides the
Tap Information user with the ability to preset a value up to 999,999.
  The counters will increment from the preset value
based on the selected count method.
Presetting the Operation Counter is described. The
"Resettable Counter" menu. steps to preset the Neutral Counter, Lower and
Raise Counters are similar.
Resettable Counter E To preset the Operation Counter from the HMI
0 proceed as follows:
5. Press ENT, a flashing "R" will be pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
displayed. Press ENT again to reset the will advance to "CONFIGURATION".
Operations Counter.
CONFIGURATION
COMM
SETP

Tapchanger Type
 

Settings" menu.
Tap Settings
 
5–27
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as Presetting the Operation Counter From
necessary, until the "Op Counter Preset" TapTalk
screen is displayed. To Preset the Operation Counter from TapTalk®,
Op Counter Preset
000000 TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
2 Access is not active or has been 2. Enter the Operation Counter Preset
previously input, the following will be value located in the Operation Counter
displayed. Go to Step 8. section of the dialog screen.
Op Counter Preset "Save to Device" confirmation screen
000000 C (Figure 5-3).
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 "Setpoints Successfully Written to
Access prompt will be displayed. Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5-4).

Presetting the Neutral Counter From TapTalk
_
To Preset the Neutral Counter from TapTalk, perform
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code the following:
the display will automatically advance 1. Select Setup/Tap Settings from the
the cursor to the next digit when input TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
is momentarily paused. Tap Settings dialog screen (Figure 5-6).
7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then 2. Enter the Neutral Counter Preset value
press the ENT pushbutton. located in the Neutral Counter section
If a valid Level 2 Access Code was of the dialog screen.
entered, the display will briefly flash a 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
confirmation screen and then display "Save to Device" confirmation screen
the following: (Figure 5-3).
Op Counter Preset 4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a

000000 C Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5-4).

the desired Operations Counter Preset
value from 0 to 999,999, then press
be displayed reflecting the Operations
Counter value that was entered.
Op Counter Preset
XXXXXX
5–28
Configuration – 5
RATIO MULTIPLIERS Setting The Voltage and Current Multipliers

From The HMI
Voltage and Current Multipliers
▲ CAUTION: The current input to the control is
 NOTE: The voltage and current multipliers do
rated at 0.2 A continuous, 0.4 A for two hours, and
not affect the regulation of the control.
They are only used in the calculation of 4.0 A for 1 second.
primary values.  NOTE: The CT Multiplier selection in the
Configuration/CT and VT menu only
▲ CAUTION: The use of a voltage correction changes the scaling factor for current
factor is incorporated in the calculation of primary reading and setting.
quantities in the control. Although the control
operation is not affected, erroneous values will be To set the Voltage and Current Multipliers from the
displayed and recorded if the VT correction factor HMI, proceed as follows:
is not included in the PT multiplier.
Primary quantities are displayed when voltage and pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
current multipliers are set in the control. The voltage will advance to "CONFIGURATION".
multiplier is:
Vmult = Vpri/(Vsec + Vcorr) CONFIGURATION
COMM
SETP
For a VT ratio of 7620/117 V and a voltage correction
of 3 V, the multiplier is:
Vmult = 7620/(117 + 3) = 63.5 The unit will display the following:
The voltage multiplier setting range is from 0.1 to
3260.0 in 0.1 steps. Tapchanger Type
 
The current multiplier is the value of the line CT
primary rating divided by 0.2 A. For a CT primary 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton,
rating of 1000 A, the multiplier is: as necessary, to navigate to the
"Nameplate" menu.
CTmult = 1000/0.2 = 5000
The current multiplier setting range is from 1 to Nameplate
32600 in 1 step increments.  
Normalizing Voltage Multiplier  NOTE: The following sequence of steps

provide direction for setting the Current
A Normalizing Voltage Multiplier with a range of 0.80 Multiplier. The steps necessary to set
to 1.20 is available to be applied to Meter Out Voltage the Load Voltage, Source Voltage and
and displayed in real time as Normalizing Voltage. Normalizing Voltage multipliers are
The purpose of the Normalizing Voltage Multiplier similar.
is to allow the user to overcome differences in the
ratio of the PT that the Meter Out Voltage input is 4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as
using versus the PT the end user or other metering necessary, until the "Current Multiplier"
methods are using. screen is displayed.
CT Multiplier

6000 X
5–29
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level Setting The Voltage and Current Multipliers
2 Access is not active or has been From TapTalk
previously input, the following will be To set the Current, Voltage, Voltage Source and
displayed. Go to Step 8. Normalizing Voltage Multipliers from TapTalk®,
proceed as follows:
CT Multiplier
6000 X C
Access prompt will be displayed. 2. Enter the Current, Voltage, Voltage
Source and Normalizing Voltage
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS Multipliers.
_ 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code screen (Figure 5-3).
the display will automatically advance 4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
the cursor to the next digit when input "Setpoints Successfully Written to
is momentarily paused. Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5-4).
following:
CT Multiplier
6000 X C

the desired Current Multiplier value from
1 to 32600, then press the ENT
displayed reflecting the Current Multiplier
value that was entered.
CT Multiplier

XXXXX X
5–30
Configuration – 5
Primary Power Display Selection 6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2

The Primary Power Display Selection toggles Access prompt will be displayed.
between two modes of operation:
• Single-Phase-based on measured inputs
_
• Three-Phase-based on measured inputs
and presumed balanced system  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
Factory setting is single-phase. the cursor to the next digit when input
Setting Primary Power Display Selection From 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
The HMI press the ENT pushbutton.
To set the Primary Power Display Selection from
the HMI, proceed as follows:
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) confirmation screen and then display
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu the following:
Power Display Option
CONFIGURATION SINGLE_PHASE C
COMM
SETP
The unit will display the following: 8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select
the desired Power Display Option
Tapchanger Type (Single or 3 Phase), then press the
  ENT pushbutton. The following will be
displayed reflecting the selection that
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, was entered.
"Nameplate" menu. Power Display Option
SINGLE_PHASE or THREE_PHASE
Nameplate
 
Setting Primary Power Display Selection From
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as TapTalk
necessary, until the "Power Display 1. Select Setup/Configuration from the
Option" screen is displayed. TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the
Power Display Option 2. From the "Primary Power Display" section
SINGLE_PHASE of the dialog screen select either "Single
Phase" or "Three Phase".
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
2 Access is not active or has been "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
previously input, the following will be screen (Figure 5-3).
Power Display Option "Setpoints Successfully Written to
SINGLE_PHASE C
5–31
CORRECTION FACTORS 4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as

necessary, until the "Load VT Correction"
VT Ratio Correction
The operation of some regulators is such that the
internal VT does not provide the desired voltage Load VT Correction
ratio. In these cases, it is desirable to correct the
VT secondary voltage to a 120 Vac reference base. 0.0 Volts
This change is easily made in software, eliminating
the need for a multi-tap sensing transformer. 5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
The correction is derived from information provided previously input, the following will be
by the regulator original equipment manufacturer displayed. Go to Step 8.
(OEM). The numerical value of the correction is the
value, in volts, required to adjust the VT nominal Load VT Correction
secondary voltage to 120.0 volts. The correction 0.0 Volts C
range is ±15 volts in 0.1 volt increments.
 NOTE: The maximum allowable continuous 6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
VT secondary voltage is 140 volts. The Access prompt will be displayed.
correction is made only in software.
As a result, the value of VLoad read on ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS
the control display will differ from that _
measured at the voltmeter test terminals
by the percent of the correction voltage.  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
Setting Load VT Correction Factor from the HMI the cursor to the next digit when input
To set the Load VT Correction Factor from the HMI,
proceed as follows: 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
COMM
SETP
Load VT Correction
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. 0.0 Volts C
Tapchanger Type
  8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter
the desired Load VT Correction value
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, from -15.0 to +15.0 Volts, then press
as necessary, to navigate to the the ENT pushbutton. The following will
"Nameplate" menu. be displayed reflecting the Load VT
Correction value that was entered.
Nameplate
Load VT Correction
 
X.X Volts
5–32
Configuration – 5
Setting Source VT Correction Factor  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
from the HMI the display will automatically advance
To set the Source VT Correction Factor from the the cursor to the next digit when input
HMI, proceed as follows: is momentarily paused.
COMM
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. Source VT Correction

The unit will display the following: 0.0 Volts C

 
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, the desired Source VT Correction value
as necessary, to navigate to the from -15.0 to +15.0 Volts, then press
"Nameplate" menu. the ENT pushbutton. The following will
be displayed reflecting the Source VT
Nameplate Correction value that was entered.
 
Source VT Correction
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, X.X Volts
as necessary, until the "Source VT
Correction" screen is displayed.
Setting Load and/or Source VT Correction
Source VT Correction Factors From TapTalk
0.0 Volts To set either the Load or Source VT Correction
Factors from TapTalk®, perform the following:
2 Access is not active or has been 1. Select Setup/Configuration from the
displayed. Go to Step 8. Configuration dialog screen (Figure 5-8).
2. Enter the Load and/or Source VT Correction
Source VT Correction Factor value(s) (–15.0 to +15.0 Volts).
0.0 Volts C 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a "Confirm
Writing to Device" confirmation screen
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 (Figure 5-3).
4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a "Setpoints
Successfully Written to Control" confirmation
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS screen (Figure 5-4).
_
5–33
CT/VT Phase Shift Setting CT/Load and/or CT/Source Phase Shift

The control will recognize forward and reverse power Quantities From The HMI
flow to the load. With the CT and VT (reference) To set the CT/Load and/or CT/Source Phase Shift
signals in-phase for unity power flow to the load, quantities from the HMI, proceed as follows:
it will properly calculate line drop compensation.
Depending on the connection of the CT and VT, the pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
phasors may not be in‑phase. If this is the case, the will advance to "CONFIGURATION".
phase shift can be corrected in software. The usual
characteristics of three phase systems only allow CONFIGURATION
multiples of 30° phase shifts. The control, therefore, COMM
SETP
has a range of 0° to 330° in 30° increments.
By comparing system operating conditions with 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
power flow direction and power factor as shown on
the M-2001D Tapchanger Control, improper phase
shift can be determined. An incorrect connection Tapchanger Type
may be resolved using well-known phasor methods.  
The following procedure may be useful to check
the choice of correction or even to determine the 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton,
correction by trial and error: as necessary, to navigate to the
"Nameplate" menu.
1. Place the regulator in manual control.
2. Determine the Watts and VArs load on Nameplate
the regulator from other metering.  
3. Read the Watts and VArs indicated by the
control, and make certain that they are  NOTE: The following sequence of steps provide
of the same sign and ratio of magnitudes direction for setting the CT/Load VT
as obtained from the external readings. Phasing quantities. The steps necessary
to set the CT/Source VT Phasing are
4. If not, change the correction in 30° similar.
increments until the control and external
readings are in best agreement. 4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton,
as necessary, until the "CT/Load VT
When two single-phase regulators are connected Phasing" screen is displayed.
in open delta, the current signals will be out-of-
phase with the voltage signals. For one regulator, CT/Load VT Phasing
the current will lead the voltage by 30° and is called 0 Deg
the "leading" regulator. For the "lagging" regulator,
the current will lag the voltage by 30°. 5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
Contact Beckwith Electric for Application Note #17
for more information on VT and CT connections. displayed. Go to Step 8.
 NOTE: Source Side parameters are used when CT/Load VT Phasing

operation mode is regulate reverse
(measured) and the system is in reverse 0 Deg C
power.
5–34
Configuration – 5
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 Auxiliary Current Transformer

Access prompt will be displayed. The current input rating of the M‑2001D Tapchanger
Control is 200 mA, continuous. Auxiliary CT's are
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS necessary if primary currents exceed this value.
_
The Current Transformer scaling selection is set in
the Configure menu to be 200 mA, 1 A or 5 A. This
choice fixes the scale of both the metering readout
the cursor to the next digit when input quantities and the settings of current values.
is momentarily paused. The metering screens showing this information,
7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then Load Current and Circulating Current will be
press the ENT pushbutton. updated accordingly
If a valid Level 2 Access Code was ▲ CAUTION: This selection is for scaling purposes
entered, the display will briefly flash a only, and neither 1 A nor 5 A should be input to the
"Confirmation" screen and display the control.
following:
The values of the current displayed in the control
CT/Load VT Phasing Load Current, and on Circulating Current screens
can be displayed in either 200 mA, 1 A or 5 A scale.
0 Deg C
If not, re-enter a valid code. rated at 0.2 A continuous, 0.4 A for two hours, and
4.0 A for 1 second.
8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter The Line Limit Current setpoint screen is also
the desired CT/Load VT Phasing affected by this selection.
value from 0 to 330 Degrees (30
Degree increments), then press the
ENT pushbutton. The following will be Setting Auxiliary Current Transformer Rating
displayed reflecting the CT/Load VT From The HMI
Phasing value that was entered. To set the Auxiliary Current Transformer Rating from
the HMI, proceed as follows:
CT/Load VT Phasing
X Deg pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
Setting CT/Load and/or CT/Source Phase Shift CONFIGURATION

Quantities From TapTalk
COMM
SETP
To set the CT/Load and/or CT/Source Phase Shift
quantities from TapTalk®, proceed as follows: 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
1. Select Setup/Configuration from the The unit will display the following:
Configuration dialog screen (Figure 5-8). Tapchanger Type
2. Enter the CT/Load or CT/Source Phase  
Shift Quantities (0 to 330 Degrees, in 30
Degree Increments). 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton,
3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a "Nameplate" menu.
screen (Figure 5-3). Nameplate
4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a  
5–35
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, Setting Auxiliary Current Transformer Rating
as necessary, until the "Aux Current From TapTalk
Transformer" screen is displayed. 1. Select Setup/Configuration from the
Aux Curr Transformer Configuration dialog screen (Figure 5-8).
200 mA 2. From the "VT/CT Load/Aux Current
Transformer" section of the dialog screen
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level select either "200 mA, 1 Amp or 5 Amps".
previously input, the following will be 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
displayed. Go to Step 8. "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
Aux Curr Transformer 4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
200 mA C
Access prompt will be displayed. METERING FACTORS
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS The control has the capability of displaying

measured and calculated secondary quantities
_ and calculated primary quantities. Refer to Figures
2-32 and 2-33.
the cursor to the next digit when input Secondary
is momentarily paused. The display will show local voltage, source voltage,
compensated voltage, line frequency, and load
current in secondary quantities along with load
power factor. The voltage is displayed on a 120 V
If a valid Level 2 Access Code was base and the current is displayed on a 200 mA
entered, the display will briefly flash a base.
the following:  NOTE: The local voltage displayed will not
match the voltage measured at the
Aux Curr Transformer test terminals on the adapter panel if a
sensing VT ratio correction other than
200 mA C 0.0 V has been entered.
If not, re-enter a valid code. Primary

In order to use the calculated primary quantities
8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the feature, the user must enter the following data in
desired Aux Current Transformer rating the Configuration Menu:
(200 mA, 1 Amp or 5 Amps), then press
the ENT pushbutton. The following will • Select line-to-line or line-to-ground VT
be displayed reflecting the selection that configuration.
was entered. • Select single-phase quantities based
on measured inputs, or three-phase
Aux Curr Transformer quantities based on measured inputs
200 mA, 1 Amp or 5 Amps and assume a balanced system.
• Select primary voltage and current
multipliers needed to calculate primary
quantities.
5–36
Configuration – 5
Present Demand Where primary quantities are used, values displayed

The Present Demand metering capability provided are single-phase or three-phase as defined in the
in the control follows the concept of a lagged Primary Power Display Screen of the Configuration
demand meter. The demand time interval is selected Menu.
by the user as 5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 minutes. This is
▲ CAUTION: When the M‑2001D Tapchanger
the time it takes for a thermal meter to indicate 90%
Control is used with a Beckwith Electric adapter
of a change in load.
panel, the panel’s drag hands reset button only
resets the mechanical drag hands of the regulator
Energy Metering or LTC transformer. The button does not reset the
The Energy Metering function of the control displays tap drag hands information stored in the control. The
the following measured values: maximum and minimum tap position of the control
• Total Lagging VAr Hours (KVArh, MVArh should always be reset when the mechanical drag
or GVArh) hands are reset.
• Total Leading VAr Hours (KVArh, MVArh The values retained in memory are time-tagged
or GVArh) quantities that are calculated using the demand
• Total Reverse Watt Hours (KWh, MWh or period selected (5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 minutes). For
GWh) voltage, values are the average of samples taken
over a period of 32 seconds which avoids undue
• Total Forward Watt Hours (KWh, MWh or retention of momentary voltage transients. The
GWh) load power factor retained is the value at the time
of max VA.
The measured values are retained in non-volatile
When selected, two screens for each parameter
memory. A real time clock is utilized to record a date/
cycle continuously and indicate the value, date and
time stamp for each quantity to indicate when the
time of each parameter. The E indicates that the
period of measurement was initiated.
drag hand can be reset by pushing ENT.
When a Energy Metering screen is selected, the
The control is equipped with a real-time, 24‑hour
screen cycles continuously to indicate the total
clock which is used with the drag hand feature to
value, date and time the measurement was initiated.
record date/time stamp information on quantities
The E indicates that the measured value can be
saved in memory. The power source for the clock
reset by pushing ENT.
is maintained for at least 24 hours during a system
power outage by a charged capacitor (no battery). If
Demand History the power outage lasts longer than 24 hours, check
Demand History quantities are the maximum the clock and reset if necessary.
and minimum values for the period since the last
reset command. These are retained in non-volatile Frequency
memory. A real-time clock allows the recording of a
The control provides for real-time metering of the
date/time stamp with each Demand History quantity.
line frequency. If the control is a 60 Hz model, the
The following are available for drag hand use:
operating frequency is 55 to 65 Hz; if the control is a
• Min/Max tap position (when Tap Position 50 Hz model, the operating frequency is 45 to 55 Hz.
is enabled)
• Min Load voltage (120 V base)
• Max Load voltage (120 V base)
• Max Primary current
• Max Primary watts, kW or MW
• Max Primary VAr, kVAr or MVAr
• Max Primary VA, kVA or MVA
• Power Factor at max VA
5–37
Load VT Configuration  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code

Load VT Configuration toggles between Line-to-Line the display will automatically advance
and Line-to-Ground. the cursor to the next digit when input
Setting Load VT Configuration From The HMI 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
To set the Load VT Configuration (Line-to-Line or press the ENT pushbutton.
Line-to-Ground) from the HMI, proceed as follows: If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
Load VT Config
CONFIGURATION
LINE_TO_GROUND C
COMM
SETP
Tapchanger Type the desired Load VT Configuration
(Line-to-Line or Line-to-Ground), then
  press the ENT pushbutton. The following
will be displayed reflecting the selection
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, that was entered.
"Nameplate" menu.
Load VT Config
Nameplate LINE_TO_LINE or LINE_TO_GROUND
 
Setting Load VT Configuration From TapTalk
as necessary, until the "Load VT 1. Select Setup/Configuration from the
Configuration" screen is displayed. TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the
Load VT Config 2. From the "VT/CT Load" section of the
LINE_TO_GROUND dialog screen select either "Line-to-Line"
or "Line-to-Ground".
2 Access is not active or has been "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
previously input, the following will be screen (Figure 5-3).
Load VT Config Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5-4).
LINE_TO_GROUND C


_
5–38
Configuration – 5
Output Selection Setting Output Configuration From The HMI

Output Pulse To set Output Selection from the HMI, proceed as
follows:
▲ CAUTION: If an appropriate pulse width setting is
not entered, then a misoperation of the tapchanger 1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button)
may occur when a SCADA Manual Raise or Lower pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
is initiated. will advance to "CONFIGURATION".
When the output selection is "Pulsed", the pulse
CONFIGURATION
width can be programmed from 0.2 to 12 seconds,
in increments of 0.1 seconds. An initiated pulse will COMM
SETP
continue until the pulse time has been reached or a
counter contact or motor hold input operates. 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
Under normal conditions, when the output is set to
"Pulsed" and the control is calling for Raise/Lower, Tapchanger Type
an output will turn on for the pre‑programmed
time, or until a counter contact or motor hold input  
operates, and then turn off the output for a time
period of 0.5 seconds plus the intertap time delay 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton,
setting value. When the control is calling for a Raise/
"Nameplate" menu.
Lower and no non‑sequential or counter input or
motor hold input is applied, the output will activate
for the full pre‑programmed time and deactivate for Nameplate
0.5 seconds, plus the intertap time delay.  
When a counter input or motor hold input is applied, 4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as
and there is an intertap delay, the pulse will cease necessary, until the "Output Selection"
immediately with counter contact closure for the screen is displayed.
intertap time delay. After the counter contact or
motor hold input opens, the intertap timer will start Output Selection
at the end of the time delay. If there is still a Raise/
Lower condition, another pulse will start. CONTINUOUS
When the non‑sequential input is applied, the Raise/ 5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
Lower timers will reset with the contact closure, and a 2 Access is not active or has been
timer count will start again, if a Raise/Lower condition previously input, the following will be
is still present, the pulse will start once more. displayed. Go to Step 8.
SCADA INITIATED Manual Raise/Lower Output Selection

When the control is placed in Manual via SCADA, CONTINUOUS C
to perform a Manual Raise/Lower, the control will
switch to the "Pulsed" output mode until the control 6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
is returned to "Auto". This will allow only a single Access prompt will be displayed.
Raise/Lower operation to take place each time a
SCADA Raise/Lower command is sent. When the ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS
control is returned to "Auto," the control will revert _
back to the output selection setting. Therefore, an
appropriate "Pulsed" output time setting should
be set if SCADA initiated Manual Raise/Lower
operations are performed.
Continuous
The output is continuous until the voltage returns
into the bandwidth.
5–39
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code 11. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following
the display will automatically advance will be displayed:
is momentarily paused. Output Pulse
7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then 1.5 Sec C
If a valid Level 2 Access Code was desired "Output Pulse" (0.2 to 12.0 Sec)
entered, the display will briefly flash a duration, then press the ENT pushbutton.
confirmation screen and display the The following will be displayed reflecting
following: the Output Pulse value that was entered.
Output Selection Output Pulse
CONTINUOUS C X.X Sec
Setting Output Configuration From TapTalk
8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, To set the Output Configuration from TapTalk®,
select the desired Output configuration proceed as follows:
(CONTINUOUS or PULSED), then
press the ENT pushbutton. The following 1. Select Setup/Configuration from the
will be displayed reflecting the Output TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
configuration that was entered. Configuration dialog screen (Figure 5-8).
2. From the "Raise/Lower Output Contacts"
Output Selection section of the dialog screen select either
"Continuous" or "Pulsed", then proceed
CONTINUOUS or PULSED
as follows:
9. Depending on the Output configuration • If "Continuous" was selected, go to
that was selected in Step 8, proceed Step 3.
as follows to complete the Output • If "Pulsed " was selected, enter a
configuration: "Pulse Width" value (0.2 to 12.0
• If a "PULSED" Output configuration seconds)
was selected, proceed to 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
Step 10. "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
• If the "CONTINUOUS" Output screen (Figure 5-3).
configuration was selected, the
Output configuration is complete. 4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
10. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5-4).
necessary, until the "Output Pulse"
Output Pulse
1.5 Sec
5–40
Configuration – 5
Motor Current Detection and Monitoring The following parameters are logged for the motor
current profile and are stored in battery backed-up
The M-2001D includes a tapchanger Motor Current
RAM for each tapchange:
Measurement and Recording feature. The M-2001D
tapchanger control measures the motor current • Peak RMS Current
during tapchange operations. The motor current
is sampled at 64 samples per cycle and the total 1 Totalprofiles
RMS value of the current is computed every cycle
i i =1
∑ PeakRMSCurrenti2
(60 Hz or 50 Hz cycle). The dynamic range of the
current measurement is from 0 to 10 A.
• Average RMS Current
The tapchange start signal is generated when
1 Totalprofiles
the control begins a Raise or Lower operation.
The tapchange operation is considered complete i i =1
∑ AverageRMSCurrent i2
when the counter contact input is generated. If the
tapchanger is making multiple tapchanges where • Average Duration
the current is not interrupted between tapchanges
then the counter contact can be used to decide the 1 Totalprofiles
completion of one tap before the start of the next tap.
i i =1
∑ Durationi
The Motor Current Monitor feature also includes
a Training Mode which will be used during the Where i is the training profile number and
commissioning of the tapchanger control. In this Totalprofiles is the total number of training profiles
mode several tapchange operations will be manually (fixed to 20 training operations).
conducted and the profile stored. This profile will be
An alarm will be generated when any of the following
compared with the profile during normal tapchange
conditions occur:
operation to generate alarm signals.
• Peak RMS current exceeds a defined
Based on the type of regulator, the counter contact
percent (programmable from 110% to
signal will be different:
200%) of the stored Peak RMS Current
• GE: Counter pulse is used to indicate the which was recorded during the Training
completion of the tapchange Mode.
• SIEMENS and Howard: State change of • Average RMS Current exceeds a certain
the counter contact is used to detect the percent (programmable from 110%
tapchange (X 2 setting) to 200%) of the stored Average RMS
Current which was recorded during the
• Cooper: Motor seal-in current is used Training Mode.
to detect the tapchange operation. See
"Counters" section of this chapter for The Average RMS Current is the average
instructions for Enabling/Disabling "Motor of the RMS current for the tapchange
Seal-In". duration.
• The Average Duration of the tapchange
exceeds a certain percent (programmable
from 110% to 200%) of the stored value
which was recorded during the Training
Mode.
5–41
Setting the Motor Current Detection Settings  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
From The HMI the display will automatically advance
To set the Peak RMS Current Percent Change, the cursor to the next digit when input
Average RMS Percent Change or Average Duration is momentarily paused.
Percent Change setting, perform the following: 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
 NOTE: The steps necessary to set the Peak press the ENT pushbutton.
RMS Current Percent Change setting If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
are described here. The steps to set entered, the display will briefly flash a
the Average RMS Percent Change and confirmation screen and display the
Average Duration Percent Change are following:
similar.
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) Peak RMS % Change
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu 110 C
CONFIGURATION
COMM
SETP 8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the
desired Peak RMS Current % Change
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. value (110% to 200%), then press the
The unit will display the following: ENT pushbutton. The following will be
displayed reflecting the Peak RMS
Tapchanger Type Current % Change value that was
entered.
 
Peak RMS % Change
as necessary, to navigate to the "Mtr XXX
Current Profile" menu.
9. Repeat Steps 4 through 8 for the Average
Mtr Current Profile RMS Current % Change and Average
Duration % Change settings.
 
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as Setting the Motor Current Detection Settings
necessary, to navigate to the "Peak RMS From TapTalk
% Change" (Average RMS Current %
To set the Peak RMS Current Percent Change,
Change or Average Duration % Change)
Average RMS Percent Change or Average Duration
settings dialog screen.
Percent Change Setting, perform the following:
Peak RMS % Change 1. Select Setup/Configuration from the
110 TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level 2. From the "Motor Current Settings"
2 Access is not active or has been section of the dialog screen enter the
previously input, the following will be desired Peak RMS Current, Average
displayed. Go to Step 8. RMS Current and Average Duration
settings (110% to 200%).
Peak RMS % Change
110 C "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
_
5–42
Configuration – 5
Regulator Type addition to the PT tap selection jumper. This series

resistor limits short circuit currents in the event of
Regulator Type A or B can be selected. This will
an external fault.
allow the source voltage to be calculated correctly
for either type of regulator (see Figure 5-9). It will On the older regulator controls (those not having a
also allow the control to operate more accurately power disconnect and CT shorting knife switches),
when in the "regulate in reverse power" mode. the resistor is usually connected between terminals
NN-9 and NN-22. The PT tap selection jumper is
General Electric VR-1 voltage regulators are
usually connected between terminals NN-22 and
available in two winding configurations; Type "A"
NN-20 or NN-21. On newer regulator controls,
non-inverted configuration and type "B" inverted
(those with power disconnect and CT shorting knife
configuration. These types refer to the internal
switches) the resistor is usually connected between
power component connections. See Figure 5-9.
terminals NN-8 and NN-22. The PT tap selection
The Type "A" non-inverted configuration regulator jumper is usually connected between terminals
includes a wire jumper on the NN terminal block for NN-22 and NN-20 or NN-21. In all cases, please
Potential Transformer tap selection. consult the regulator tank nameplate for the
proper jumper connections.
On the older regulator controls (those not having
power disconnect and CT shorting knife switches), ▲ CAUTION: The control can be damaged if the
the PT tap selection jumper is usually connected PT tap selection jumper is not connected properly
between terminals NN-9 and NN-20, NN-21 or when the regulator is energized.
NN‑22. On newer regulator controls, (those with
The control is not powered if either the PT tap
power disconnect and CT shorting knife switches),
selection jumper or resistor is missing or open.
the PT tap selection jumper is usually connected
between terminals NN-8 and NN-20, NN-21 or The user should always verify proper connections
NN-22. There are special cases when a PT ratio by consulting the nameplate on the regulator
correcting transformer is supplied and the jumper tank. The user is cautioned that the nameplate
position is different. In all cases please consult the on the control cabinet could possibly be incorrect
regulator tank nameplate for the proper jumper if the control has ever been replaced. If the serial
connections. number on the control cabinet matches the serial
number on the regulator tank or nameplate, the
The Type "B" inverted configuration regulator is
control cabinet nameplate may be consulted for
supplied from the factory with a standard 0.75
proper jumper configuration.
ohm resistor installed on the NN terminal block in
Figure 5-9 Regulator Type
5–43
Setting Regulator Type From The HMI  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
To set Regulator Type from the HMI, proceed as the display will automatically advance
follows: the cursor to the next digit when input
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
will advance to "CONFIGURATION". press the ENT pushbutton.
CONFIGURATION entered, the display will briefly flash a
COMM
SETP confirmation screen and display the
following:
The unit will display the following: Regulator Type
TYPE A C
Tapchanger Type
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, 8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons,
as necessary, to navigate to the select the desired Regulator Type
"Nameplate" menu. (Type A or Type B), then press the
ENT pushbutton. The following will be
Nameplate displayed reflecting the Regulator Type
that was selected.
 
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as Regulator Type

necessary, until the "Regulator Type" TYPE X
Regulator Type Setting Regulator Type From TapTalk

TYPE A To set the Regulator Type from TapTalk®, proceed
as follows:
2 Access is not active or has been 1. Select Setup/Configuration from the
displayed. Go to Step 8. Configuration dialog screen (Figure 5-8).
2. From the "Regulator "section of the
Regulator Type dialog screen select either "Type A" or
"Type B".
TYPE A C
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
Access prompt will be displayed. screen (Figure 5-3).
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS "Setpoints Successfully Written to
_ Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5-4).
5–44
Configuration – 5
REMOTE VOLTAGE BIAS The Remote Voltage Bias feature requires a remote
voltage parameter to be written to the control within
The Remote Voltage Bias (RVB) feature is similar
a period defined by a Remote Voltage Heartbeat
to Load Drop Compensation (LDC) that biases
timer. If the timer times out without the Remote
the Bandcenter of the control using the difference
Voltage being written to the control, then the control
between a remotely monitored voltage and the
reverts back to the normal chosen regulating
control's Load voltage. This method allows the
method using the Bandcenter and LDC settings.
control to operate using the existing timing as well
as allow it to respond to the blocking limits and A Forward and a Reverse Remote Voltage
runback functions. parameter can be written to the control utilizing
DNP3.0, MODBUS or IEC 61850 protocols. The
The M-2001D will regulate the measured voltage
range is determined by the "Remote Voltage
according to a calculated Effective Bandcenter. The
Maximum" and "Remote Voltage Minimum" values.
Effective Bandcenter will ONLY be calculated when
Each value has a range from 90.00 to 150.00 volts.
a Remote measurement is supplied to the control.
Any value received by the control above or below
The Effective Bandcenter calculation is based on
these settings will be discarded and the Remote
the following equations:
Voltage Heartbeat Timer will not be refreshed. Upon
Equation #1 receiving a valid Forward/Reverse Remote Voltage
value, the control will start or restart an internal
BCbias = Vremote – BC
heartbeat timer with the value set by the "Remote
Equation #2 Voltage Heartbeat Timer" setting. Upon timeout, the
EffBCi = (Vmeasured – BCbias) control removes the Bandcenter bias and controls
solely by the Bandcenter and LDC settings.
where:
The Forward parameter will be used as Vremote in
Effective Bandcenter is EffBC Forward Power mode only. This point’s associated
Bandcenter Bias is BCbias internal timer will only be used in Forward Power
Measured Secondary Voltage is Vmeasured mode. Similarly, the Reverse parameter will be
used as Vremote in Reverse Power mode only. This
Remote Voltage is Vremote point’s associated internal timer will only be used
Bandcenter setting is BC in Reverse Power mode.
The currently effective high band (Veffhi)i will be at The RVB scale factor is the scale factor by which
EffBCi + BW/2 and the currently effective low band the raw remote voltage value obtained through the
(Vefflo)i will be at EffBCi – BW/2, where BW is the DNP3.0, MODBUS or IEC 61850 analog output
regular bandwidth setting. point is scaled by before being used in the Remote
Voltage Bias feature.
Example: If Voltage Reduction is initiated while RVB mode is
If BC = 120 V, BW = 2 V and the system is in band enabled and active, it will be calculated based on
Vmeasured = 120 V. the regular Bandcenter setting, not the Effective
Bandcenter.
Initially before the first Vremote is received, EffBCi =
BC = 120 V. If Reverse Power is sensed and the control is
set to "Regulate Reverse" or "Regulate Reverse
Then, if Vremote = 117 V, BCbias = (117–120) = –3, (Measured)", the control will use the "Reverse
EffBCi = 120 – (–3) = 120 + 3 = 123 V Remote Voltage" parameter in the Effective
Bandcenter calculation. It will also apply BCbias to
Since Vmeasured is 120 V, the control will perform
the Reverse Power Bandcenter setting.
approximately 3 tap operations in the RAISE
direction to bring the Vmeasured back in band. The equation for BCbias when in reverse:
BCbias = Vremote – BCreverse.
5–45
Enabling/Disabling Remote Voltage Bias From 7. Enter a valid Level Access Code, then
the HMI press the ENT pushbutton.
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) If a valid Level Access Code was
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu entered, the display will briefly flash a
will advance to "CONFIGURATION". confirmation screen and display the
following:
CONFIGURATION
COMM
SETP Enable/Disable
disable C
The unit will display the following: If not, re-enter a valid code.
Tapchanger Type
  select either "Enable" or Disable", then
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, will be displayed reflecting the selection
as necessary, until the "Remote Voltage that was entered.
Bias" screen is displayed.
Enable/Disable
Remote Voltage Bias
ENABLE
 
4. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. 9. Depending on the selection in Step
The unit will display the following: 8, proceed as follows to complete the
Remote Voltage Bias setup:
Enable/Disable • If Remote Voltage Bias was
disable "ENABLED", proceed to Step 10.
• If Remote Voltage Bias was
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level "DISABLED", no further action is
Access is not active or has been required.
displayed. Go to Step 8.  NOTE: From this point on in this procedure it
is assumed that a valid Level 2 Access
Enable/Disable Code has been previously entered. If
disable C required to be entered as described in
Step 7.
6. If Level Access is active, the Level
Access prompt will be displayed. 10. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as
necessary, until the "RVB HB Timer"
ENTER LEVEL ACCESS screen is displayed.
_ RVB HB Timer
 NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code 5 Secs
the cursor to the next digit when input 11. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
is momentarily paused. Access is not active or has been
displayed.
RVB HB Timer
5 Secs C
5–46
Configuration – 5
12. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the 15. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter
desired Remote Voltage Bias Heartbeat the desired Reverse Remote Voltage
Timer (2 to 120 Seconds), then press the Bias Scale Factor (0.1 to 100.0), then
ENT pushbutton. The following will be press the ENT pushbutton. The following
displayed reflecting the Remote Voltage will be displayed reflecting the Reverse
Bias Heartbeat Timer value that was Remote Voltage Bias Scale Factor
entered. setting that was selected.
RVB HB Timer Rev RVB Scale Factor

XXX Secs 1.0
13. Press the Down arrow once, the "RVB

Scale Factor" screen is displayed. Enabling/Disabling and Remote Voltage Bias
From TapTalk
RVB Scale Factor To Enable or Disable the Remote Voltage Bias
1.0 feature from TapTalk®, proceed as follows:
14. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
Access is not active or has been Configuration dialog screen (Figure 5-7).
displayed. 2. Select "Enable" or "Disable" from the
Remote Voltage Bias section of the
RVB Scale Factor dialog screen.
1.0 C 3. Depending on the selection in Step
2, proceed as follows to complete the
15. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter Remote Voltage Bias setup:
the desired Forward Remote Voltage
• If Remote Voltage Bias was
Bias Scale Factor (0.1 to 100.0), then
"ENABLED", proceed to Step 4.
will be displayed reflecting the Forward • If Remote Voltage Bias was
Remote Voltage Bias Scale Factor "DISABLED", no further action is
setting that was selected. required.
4. Enter the following Remote Voltage Bias
RVB Scale Factor settings:
1.0
• Forward RVB Scale Factor (0.1 to
100.0)
13. Press the Down arrow once, the "Rev
RVB Scale Factor" screen is displayed. • RVB Heartbeat Timer (2 to 120 Sec)
• Reverse RVB Scale Factor (0.1 to
Rev RVB Scale Factor 100.0)
1.0 5. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
14. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level screen (Figure 5‑3).
Access is not active or has been
previously input, the following will be 6. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
displayed. "Setpoints Successfully Written to
Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5‑4).
Rev RVB Scale Factor
1.0 C
5–47
RUN THROUGH NEUTRAL If Neutral indication is not sensed during this

process, the Abnormal Tap Position alarm will be
The Run Through Neutral feature allows the
activated and will not reset until the tap position has
reversing switch of a regulator to be exercised
been re-calibrated.
periodically to prevent contact buildup and coking.
The Run Through Neutral feature considers If Neutral is "found" during this process, but the
regulator operating parameters to periodically run feature cannot complete the reversing switch swipe
the regulator through neutral. The frequency is successfully due to the Maximum Allowed Taps
primarily based on the Tap Operations Between setting, then the Run Through Neutral feature will
Runs setting value. However, in addition to the Tap standby until the conditions that are necessary to
Operations Between Runs setting, the following run are met and it can complete.
regulator operating parameters are also considered
and must all be within prescribed limits before the After the feature has completed successfully, the
feature will be activated. control will return to regulation and take any taps
necessary to satisfy its settings requirements.
• The regulator must be within 2-6 taps of
neutral (Actual value based on a Maximum ▲ CAUTION: Manipulating the Tap position via
Allowed taps setting). The Run Through communications or HMI while Run Through Neutral
Neutral feature will require the control to is active and in the process of running through
take one tap in the same direction it was neutral will result in the feature not properly executing
moving once a Neutral input is received and could trigger an Abnormal Tap Position Alarm
to accomplish the swipe of the reversing depending on the changes made and where tap
switch. position was when it was changed by a user.
• Measured load current is below the user
set Maximum Load Current setting. Enabling/Disabling and Setting Run Through
Neutral From The HMI
• The feature will not operate the regulator
if its operation would cause the control to 1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button)
exceed any voltage or tap limits. (If tap pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
limits are enabled.) will advance to "CONFIGURATION".
• The feature will not operate if any of the CONFIGURATION
Motor Current settings are exceeded.
COMM
SETP
The control also considers the following conditions 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
during operation of the Run Through Neutral feature: The unit will display the following:
• If detected tap position is determined to
be incorrect during the feature’s operation, Tapchanger Type
the control will attempt to find neutral  
within an allowed number of operations,
and trigger an Abnormal Tap Position 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton,
alarm if it is unsuccessful. as necessary, until the "Run Through
• If the control initiates the feature and Neutral" screen is displayed.
does not receive a neutral input by the
time it reaches the Maximum Allowed Run Through Neutral
Taps setting, it will initiate operations  
in the opposite direction not to exceed
the original starting position, plus the 4. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
Maximum Allowed Taps setting. The unit will display the following:
For example, if the Maximum Allowed Taps setting Enable/Disable

is 4, and Tap Position starts at 3R, the control will disable
move 4 taps towards what it thinks is neutral, and if
the Neutral input is not energized, then 7 taps in the
opposite direction. It will not take the eighth tap as
that is reserved for exercising the reversing switch
by passing through neutral).
5–48
Configuration – 5
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level 10. Press the Down arrow pushbutton,
Access is not active or has been as necessary, until the "Reset RTN
previously input, the following will be Success Counter" screen is displayed.
Reset RTN Succ Ctr
Enable/Disable Press ENT to begin
disable C
6. If Level Access is active, the Level Access is not active or has been
Access prompt will be displayed. previously input, the following will be
displayed.
ENTER LEVEL ACCESS
Confirm press ENTER
_
Cancel press EXIT
 NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code
the display will automatically advance 12. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following
the cursor to the next digit when input will briefly be displayed confirming the
is momentarily paused. reset of the counter and then return to
the "Reset RTN Succ Ctr" screen.
7. Enter a valid Level Access Code, then
If a valid Level Access Code was RTN Succ Ctr Reset
confirmation screen and display the 13. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as
following: necessary, until the "Max Allowed Taps"
Enable/Disable
disable C Max Allowed Taps
4
8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, Access is not active or has been
select either "Enable" or Disable", then previously input, the following will be
press the ENT pushbutton. The following displayed.
that was entered. Max Allowed Taps
4 C
Enable/Disable
ENABLE 15. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the
desired Max Allowed Taps (3 to 7), then
9. Depending on the selection in Step 8, press the ENT pushbutton. The following
proceed as follows to complete the Run will be displayed reflecting the Max
Through Neutral setup: Allowed Taps value that was entered.
• If Run Through Neutral was Max Allowed Taps
• If Run Through Neutral was X
"DISABLED", no further action is
required. 16. Press the Down arrow once, the "Taps
Between Runs" screen is displayed.
is assumed that a valid Level 2 Access Taps Between Runs
Code has been previously entered. If
not, a valid Level 2 Access Code will be 1000
required to be entered as described in
Step 7.
5–49
17. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level 24. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons,
Access is not active or has been enter the desired Max RTN Standby
previously input, the following will be Operations (1 to 10000), then press
displayed. the ENT pushbutton. The following will
be displayed reflecting the Max RTN
Taps Between Runs Standby Operations setting that was
1000 C entered.
18. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter Max RTN Standby Ops
the desired Tap Operations Between XXXXXX
Runs (10 to 10000), then press the
displayed reflecting the Tap Operations Enabling/Disabling and Setting Run Through
Between Runs setting that was selected. Neutral From TapTalk
To Enable or Disable the Run Through Neutral
Taps Between Runs
feature from TapTalk®, proceed as follows:
XXXXXX
19. Press the Down arrow once, the "Max TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
Load Current" screen is displayed. Configuration dialog screen (Figure 5-7).
2. Select "Enable" or "Disable" from the
Max Load Current Run Through Neutral section of the
50 mA dialog screen.
3. Depending on the selection in Step 2,
20. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level proceed as follows to complete the Run
Access is not active or has been Through Neutral setup:
displayed. • If Run Through Neutral was
Max Load Current • If Run Through Neutral was
50 mA C required.
21. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the 4. Enter the following Run Through Neutral
desired Max Load Current (1 to 100 mA), settings:
then press the ENT pushbutton. The • If desired, reset the RTN Successful
following will be displayed reflecting Operations Counter
the Max Load Current setting that was
entered. • Maximum Allowed Taps (3 to 7)
• Tap Operations Between Runs (10
Max Load Current to 10000)
XX mA • Maximum Load Current (1 to
100 mA)
22. Press the Down arrow once, the "Max • Maximum RTN standby operations
RTN Standby Ops" screen is displayed. before Alarm (1 to 10000)
Max RTN Standby Ops "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
20 screen (Figure 5‑3).
23. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level "Setpoints Successfully Written to
Access is not active or has been Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5‑4).
displayed.
Max RTN Standby Ops

20 C
5–50
Configuration – 5
FAST VOLTAGE RECOVERY 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton,

as necessary, until the "Nameplate"
The Fast Voltage Recovery feature when enabled, screen is displayed.
bypasses normal timing operation to return voltage
to an in-band condition as rapidly as possible. This
Nameplate
is required for unplanned and planned load transfers
to allow critical loads to be shifted to a transformer  
quickly without causing that transformer’s voltage
to decrease too quickly. 4. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton
as necessary to navigate to the "Fast
When Fast Voltage Recovery is enabled in Voltage Recovery" menu item.
automatic mode and the voltage exceeds either
the Raise or Lower Band edges plus the Fast Fast Volt Recovery
Voltage Recovery setting, the normal definite or
inverse time delay curve and setting is replaced disable
with instantaneous operation (<0.5 seconds). In
all cases, once the normal time delay has been 5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
replaced with instantaneous operation, normal
timing will not be in effect until the voltage returns in
band. This feature can be enabled or disabled and
will not affect other functions until the Fast Voltage
Fast Volt Recovery
Recovery setting is exceeded.
disable C
The setting range is from 1.0 to 15.0 volts outside
the normal band edges in 0.1 V increments. Once 6. If Level Access is active, the Level
the voltage is back in band, the instantaneous Access prompt will be displayed
operation curve is replaced by the normal definite
or inverse time delay curve and setting. Subsequent ENTER LEVEL ACCESS
excursions outside the bandwidth will use the
original time delay unless the voltage again exceeds _
the Fast Voltage Recovery threshold setting.
When Fast Voltage Recovery is active, Overcurrent the display will automatically advance
Blocking (Current limit setting) will be bypassed the cursor to the next digit when input
should conditions require this block to be in effect. is momentarily paused.
Fast Voltage Recovery is not available if any 7. Enter a valid Level Access Code, then
paralleling method is active. If an Intertap delay press the ENT pushbutton.
is set in the control, it will not be bypassed by this
feature. If a valid Level Access Code was
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Fast Voltage following:
Recovery From The HMI
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) Fast Volt Recovery
will advance to "CONFIGURATION". disable C

CONFIGURATION
COMM
SETP 8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons,
select either "Enable" or Disable", then
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. press the ENT pushbutton. The following
The unit will display the following: will be displayed reflecting the selection
that was entered.
Tapchanger Type
Fast Volt Recovery
 
ENABLE or disable
5–51
9. Depending on the selection in Step 8, Enabling/Disabling and Fast Voltage Recovery

proceed as follows to complete the Fast From TapTalk
Voltage Recovery setup: To Enable or Disable the Fast Voltage Recovery
• If Fast Voltage Recovery was feature from TapTalk®, proceed as follows:
• If Fast Voltage Recovery was TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
"DISABLED", no further action is Configuration dialog screen (Figure 5-7).
required.
2. Select "Enable" or "Disable" from the
 NOTE: From this point on in this procedure it Fast Voltage Recovery section of the
is assumed that a valid Level 2 Access dialog screen.
Code has been previously entered. If
not, a valid Level 2 Access Code will be 3. Depending on the selection in Step 2,
required to be entered as described in proceed as follows to complete the Fast
Step 7. Voltage Recovery setup:
• If Fast Voltage Recovery was
necessary, until the "Fast Volt R Setting"
screen is displayed. • If Fast Voltage Recovery was
Fast Volt R Setting required.
5.0 V 4. Enter the Fast Voltage Recovery setting
(1.0 to 15.0 V).
Access is not active or has been "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
previously input, the following will be screen (Figure 5‑3).
displayed.
Fast Volt R Setting "Setpoints Successfully Written to
Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5‑4).
5.0 V C

the desired Fast Voltage Recovery
setting (1.0 to 15.0 V), then press the
displayed reflecting the Fast Voltage
Recovery value that was entered.
Fast Volt R Setting

XXX V
5–52
Configuration – 5
VOLTAGE REDUCTION Enabling/Disabling Standard Voltage

Reduction From The HMI
The M‑2001D allows the selection of either
Standard Voltage Reduction or Smart Voltage 1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button)
Reduction. Standard Voltage Reduction lowers the pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
Bandcenter based on a percentage of the existing
Bandcenter setting. When initiated, the control
immediately begins Lower operations to reduce the CONFIGURATION
voltage until it reaches the new upper band edge COMM
SETP
(Bandcenter plus ½ the Bandwidth setting). Smart
Voltage Reduction will further reduce voltage using 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
a variety of methods detailed in the "Smart Voltage The unit will display the following:
Reduction" section later in this Chapter.
Tapchanger Type
Standard Voltage Reduction  
The control allows three steps of voltage reduction
initiated by external dry contacts, front panel 3. Press the Right or Left Arrow pushbuttons
pushbutton or SCADA. The percentage of voltage as necessary until the following is
reduction at each step is adjustable from 0 to 10% displayed:
in 0.1% increments. When one or more contacts are
closed, the effect is to shift the bandcenter setpoint Nameplate
lower thus causing the control to lower the voltage.  
In addition, voltage reduction functionality can
4. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton as
be enabled or disabled using Communication
necessary to navigate to the "Standard
MODBUS® and DNP protocols.
Voltage Reduction" menu item.
The Voltage Reduction feature can be turned off by
the Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer (0 to 999 min). Standard VR
A setting of zero disables the Turnoff Timer. disable
Recognize that the "effective" bandcenter may
have been raised by line drop compensator action
when the voltage reduction is initiated and that the
resultant voltage setting will be the combination displayed. Go to Step 8.
of the two effects. Note also that the undervoltage
block setting may limit the lowering of voltage,
Standard VR
especially if there is little raising of the local voltage
due to LDC action. disable C
When first initiated, or when a subsequent step of 6. If Level Access is active, the Level
voltage reduction is needed, the control will respond Access prompt will be displayed
immediately to the voltage reduction command
without regard to either the intertap time delay ENTER LEVEL ACCESS
setting or the control time delay setting. After the
desired voltage reduction, operation will revert back _
to normal operation with the time delay. Refer to
Section 7.1, External Connections for contact  NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code
connections. the display will automatically advance
When Voltage Reduction is enabled the front panel is momentarily paused.
pushbutton, wired SCADA dry contacts, RS-485,
Fiber Optic port or Ethernet connection can be used
to provide stepped voltage reduction as described
earlier.
Also, the state of the "Voltage Reduction"
communications command can be saved or not
saved when power has been lost. The default setting
is "DON'T SAVE".
5–53
7. Enter a valid Level Access Code, then 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
press the ENT pushbutton. The unit will display the following:
If a valid Level Access Code was
entered, the display will briefly flash a Tapchanger Type
confirmation screen and display the  
following:
3. Press the Right or Left Arrow pushbuttons
Standard VR as necessary until the following is
disable C displayed:
If not, re-enter a valid code. Nameplate

 
select either "ENABLE" or Disable", then 4. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton as
press the ENT pushbutton. The following necessary to navigate to the "Smart
will be displayed reflecting the selection Voltage Reduction" menu item.
that was entered.
Smart VR
Standard VR
disable
ENABLE or disable
Smart Voltage Reduction previously input, the following will be
Smart Voltage Reduction, when enabled, will lower displayed. Go to Step 8.
voltage to between the new Bandcenter setting
and the lower band edge instead of stopping at the Smart VR
upper band edge. It will also disable VAr Bias if it
disable C
is in effect. When "Smart VR LDC" is enabled, the
control will ignore existing LDC settings and instead
use the "Smart VR LDC" R and X or Z settings to
Access prompt will be displayed
apply LDC while the Voltage Reduction is in effect.
The intent of this is to allow a utility to apply positive
ENTER LEVEL ACCESS
compensation such that if capacitor banks are
on the feeder, the control will compensate for the _
result of closed capacitor banks increasing voltage
downstream and allow greater voltage drop at the  NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code
source while keeping end of line customer voltage the display will automatically advance
within acceptable limits. the cursor to the next digit when input
 NOTE: When Smart VR with Smart VR LDC is
enabled and the unit goes into Reverse
Power operation, the control will apply 7. Enter a valid Level Access Code, then
the selected Reverse Power mode press the ENT pushbutton.
Standard LDC settings and stop using If a valid Level Access Code was
the Smart VR LDC settings. entered, the display will briefly flash a
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Smart Voltage following:
Reduction From The HMI
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) Smart VR
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu disable C
CONFIGURATION
COMM
SETP
5–54
Configuration – 5
8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, 13. If "Smart VR LDC" was enabled,
select either "ENABLE" or Disable", then press the Down arrow pushbutton, as
press the ENT pushbutton. The following necessary, until the "Smart VR LDC R"
will be displayed reflecting the selection screen is displayed.
that was entered.
Smart VR LDC R
Smart VR
0 Volts
ENABLE or disable
 NOTE: The following sequence of steps provide
9. Depending on the selection in Step direction for the Smart VR LDC R setting.
8, proceed as follows to complete the The steps necessary to set the Smart
Smart Voltage Reduction setup: VR LDC X or (if applicable) Z settings
• If Smart Voltage Reduction was are similar.
• If Smart Voltage Reduction was Access is not active or has been
"DISABLED", no further action is previously input, the following will be
required. displayed.
is assumed that a valid Level 2 Access Smart VR LDC R
Code has been previously entered. If 0 Volts C
required to be entered as described in 15. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter the
Step 7. desired Smart VR LDC R setting (–72 to
10. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as 72 V), then press the ENT pushbutton.
necessary, until the "Smart VR LDC" The following will be displayed reflecting
screen is displayed. the Smart VR LDC R (X or Z) value that
was entered.
Smart VR LDC
Smart VR LDC R
disable
X Volts
previously input, the following will be Enabling/Disabling and Setting Standard or
displayed. Smart Voltage Reduction From TapTalk
Smart VR LDC TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the
disable C
2. From the "Voltage Reduction" section of
12. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, the Configuration dialog screen select
select either "ENABLE" or Disable", then "Standard VR" Enable or "Smart VR"
press the ENT pushbutton. The following Enable. Only one voltage reduction
will be displayed reflecting the selection method can be enabled.
that was entered. 3. If "Smart VR" is enabled, "Smart VR
LDC" may also be enabled.
Smart VR LDC
4. Enter the "Smart VR LDC" desired
ENABLE or disable settings.
5–55
Save Voltage Reduction at Power Off  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code,
Save Voltage Reduction at Power Off allows the the display will automatically advance
state of the "Voltage Reduction" communication the cursor to the next digit when input
command to be saved or not saved when power is momentarily paused.
has been lost. The default setting is "DON'T SAVE".
Setting Save Voltage Reduction at Power Off
From The HMI If a valid Level 2 Access code was
To set the Save Voltage Reduction at Power Off confirmation screen and display the
feature, proceed as follows: following:
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu Save VR at Power Off
will advance to "CONFIGURATION". DON'T SAVE C
CONFIGURATION If not, re-enter a valid code.

COMM
SETP
select "DON'T SAVE or SAVE", then
Tapchanger Type Save VR at Power Off
  (DON'T SAVE or SAVE)
3. Press the Right or Left Arrow pushbuttons

as necessary until the following is Selecting Save Voltage Reduction at Power Off
displayed: From TapTalk
Nameplate TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the
  Configuration dialog screen (Figure 5-8).
2. From the "Voltage Reduction" section of
4. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton as the Configuration dialog screen select
necessary to navigate to the "Save VR Save for the "Save VR at Power Off"
at Power Off" menu item. option.
Save VR at Power Off 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
DON'T SAVE screen (Figure 5-3).
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level 4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
2 Access is not active or has been "Setpoints Successfully Written to
previously input, the following will be Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5-4).
Save VR at Power Off

DON'T SAVE C


_
5–56
Configuration – 5
Setting Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer From  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
The HMI the display will automatically advance
To set the Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer from the the cursor to the next digit when input
HMI, proceed as follows: is momentarily paused.
COMM
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. VRed Turnoff Time

0 Min C

 
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, the desired Voltage Reduction Turnoff
as necessary, to navigate to the Timer value (0 to 999 min), then press
"Nameplate" menu. the ENT pushbutton. The following will
be displayed reflecting the selection that
Nameplate was entered.
 
VRed Turnoff Time
0 to 999 Min
necessary, until the "Voltage Reduction
Turnoff Timer " screen is displayed.
Setting Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer From
VRed Turnoff Time TapTalk
0 Min 1. Select Setup/Configuration from the
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level Configuration dialog screen (Figure 5-8).
2 Access is not active or has been  NOTE: Entering a value of zero disables the
previously input, the following will be Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer.
2. From the Voltage Reduction section of
VRed Turnoff Time the dialog screen enter the desired time
0 Min C period (1 to 999 minutes).
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
Access prompt will be displayed. screen (Figure 5-3).

5–57
VAr BIAS Overview

This feature is intended for but not restricted to When the control determines that the reactive
use with distribution feeders which have switched power is lower or greater than the limits defined
capacitor banks controlled by Beckwith Electric by the Lead or Lag % pickup setting, the control
Autodaptive® M‑2501 Series Capacitor Controls. will start an inverse VAr Bias Pickup Trigger timer.
After the inverse time expires, the control will either
The use of VAr Bias allows the M-2001D Tapchanger increase or decrease the effective bandcenter by
Control to coordinate its operation with the M-2501 the amount defined by the VAr Bias Step Voltage
Autodaptive Series Capacitor Control devices setting depending on the direction of the reactive
on the distribution system in order to minimize power. At this moment VAr Bias becomes active.
losses, subsequent voltage variations, and The use of an inverse timer is to avoid jittering in
equipment capacity requirements of transmitting the VAr Bias detection and also to provide a faster
VArs. This function is enabled through TapTalk® response as the difference between the Upper or
Communications Software or from the control HMI. Lower VAr Bias band edge and the measured VArs
increase. For example, suppose the system is highly
VAr Bias Setpoints inductive (positive VArs) the load voltage will tend
to decrease, when VAr Bias is in effect, the control
Max 3 Phase Cap Bank: Adjustable from 4 to will automatically reduce the lower band edge and
12,000 kVAr. thus the control will be back in band, allowing the
Lead % Bank Size Pickup: Defines a Lower downstream cap controls to operate.
negative VAr limit in percentage of the Max Cap The longest allowable time delay before VAr Bias
Bank size below which the control will increase the comes into effect is 10 seconds. The inverse timer
upper band edge by the amount defined by VAr follows the following equation:
Bias Voltage Step.
Time delay = 10 *(Upper or Lower VAr Limit)/IVAr
Lag % Bank Size Pickup: Defines an Upper measured.
positive VAr limit in percentage of the Max Cap
Bank size above which the control will decrease Upper VAr limit is defined as Lag % Bank Size
the lower band edge by the amount defined by VAr Pickup multiply by a third of Max Cap Bank size.
Bias Voltage Step.
Lower VAr limit is defined as Lead % Bank Size
VAr Bias Voltage Step: Amount by which the Pickup multiply by a third of Max Cap Bank size.
control will increase or decrease the Upper or
Lower band edges when there is a VAr Bias out of The VAr Bias Pickup trigger timer will instantly
band situation. reset to ZERO if the reactive power measurement
returns within the allowable band before VAr Bias
Max VAr Bias Duration: Maximum allowable time becomes active.
in minutes the control will bias the voltage edge.
Once VAr Bias is active, the control will remove the
VAr Bias condition for the following situations.
1. When Max VAr Bias Duration is
exceeded (see description below).
2. When reactive power returns back in
band within 90% of the VAr limits set
by Lag or Lead % Bank Size Pickup
settings.
For example, if the Upper VAr limit is
75 % of 12000 kVAr bank then the level
below which the control will return in
band after going out above the Upper
VAr limit is 9*3000/10 = 2700 kVAr.
Similarly if the Lower VAr limit is at –3000
then the in band limit is –2700 kVAr.
5–58
Configuration – 5
The application of both the M-2001D Tapchanger 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton,
Control and the Autodaptive® Capacitor Control(s) as necessary, to navigate to the
on a circuit provides for an interaction between the "Nameplate" menu.
devices that provides for faster response in times
of rapidly changing conditions on the distribution Nameplate
system. For example, if one regulator is serving 6  
feeders, with each feeder using 1200 kVAr pole-top
feeder capacitor banks, and if each feeder is 4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as
correctly compensating to within 400 kVAr, all feeder necessary, until the "Enable VAr Bias"
bank controls would be considered to be operating screen is displayed.
correctly. However the regulator would still be
transforming up to 2400 kVAr (six feeders times 400 Enable VAr Bias
kVAr) from the transmission system. The M-2001D
Control on the regulator would detect this condition disable
and affect additional line capacitor operation by
making a temporary voltage level setting change. 5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
By effectively lowering its setting (delaying a voltage 2 Access is not active or has been
tap RAISE for a short time), line capacitor bank previously input, the following will be
control could be biased into operation sooner by displayed. Go to Step 8.
the tapchanger control. This would reduce losses
of the circuit, provide a better voltage profile and Enable VAr Bias
reduce the number of tapchanges. disable C
In effect, when enabled user sets VAr Bias setting 6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
values at which bandcenter/bandwidth is shifted Access prompt will be displayed.
to influence downstream Capacitor Control(s) into
operation. Shifted bandcenter/bandwidth returns to
prior settings after measured VAr level returns within
band. If Max VAr bias Duration is exceeded, the _
shifted bandcenter/bandwidth returns to prior setting
and an ALARM is activated if configured to do so. The  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
alarm will also have corresponding communication the display will automatically advance
events reported. When VAr Bias is active the OSC the cursor to the next digit when input
and SOE may be triggered if selected. is momentarily paused.
Enable/Disable VAr Bias From The HMI press the ENT pushbutton.
To Enable/Disable VAr Bias from the HMI, proceed If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
as follows: entered, the display will briefly flash a
following:
Enable VAr Bias
CONFIGURATION disable C
COMM
SETP
The unit will display the following: 8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons,
select either "ENABLE or disable", then
Tapchanger Type press the ENT pushbutton. The following
will be displayed reflecting the mode that
 
was selected.
Enable VAr Bias

ENABLE
5–59
9. Depending on what mode was selected  NOTE: Capacitor Bank size is a single phase
in Step 8, proceed as follows to complete value.
the VAr Bias setup:
• If VAr Bias was "ENABLED", proceed the desired "Max Cap Bank Size"
to Step 10. (4 to 12,000 kVAr), then press the
• If VAr Bias was "DISABLED", no ENT pushbutton. The following will be
further action is required. displayed reflecting the Max Cap Bank
Size that was entered.
10. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons,
as necessary, to navigate to the "Max Max Cap Bank Size
Cap Bank Size" menu item within the
"Nameplate" menu. XXXXX KVAr
Max Cap Bank Size

 NOTE: From this point on in this procedure, it
12000 KVAr is assumed that a valid Access Level 2
Code has been previously entered. If not,
11. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level then a valid Level 2 Access Code will be
2 Access is not active or has been required to be entered as described in
previously input, the following will be Step 13.
Max Cap Bank Size 15. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons,
12000 KVAr C "Lead % Pickup" menu item within the
"Nameplate" menu.
Access prompt will be displayed. Lead % Pickup
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS 75
_ 16. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code previously input, the following will be
the display will automatically advance displayed.
is momentarily paused. Lead % Pickup
13. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then 75 C
If a valid Level 2 Access Code was 17. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons
entered, the display will briefly flash a enter the desired "Lead % Pickup" value,
confirmation screen and display the then press the ENT pushbutton. The
following: entered setting will be displayed.
Max Cap Bank Size Lead % Pickup

12000 KVAr C XX
If not, re-enter a valid code. 18. Press the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons,
"Lag % Pickup" menu item within the
"Nameplate" menu.
Lag % Pickup
75
5–60
Configuration – 5
Lag % Pickup Max VAr Bias Time

75 C 300 mins C
20. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons 26. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons
enter the desired "Lag % Pickup" value, enter the desired "Max VAr Bias Time"
then press the ENT pushbutton. The value, then press the ENT pushbutton.
entered setting will be displayed. The entered setting will be displayed.
Lag % Pickup Max VAr Bias Time

XX XXX mins

as necessary, to navigate to the "VAr Setting VAr Bias From TapTalk
Bias Volt Step" menu item within the To enable VAr Bias and establish the Maximum
"Nameplate" menu. Capacitor Bank Size from TapTalk®, proceed as
follows:
VAr Bias Volt Step
1.0 Volts 1. Select Setup/Configuration from the
2 Access is not active or has been 2. From the VAr Bias section of the dialog
previously input, the following will be screen select "Enable".
displayed.
following:
VAr Bias Volt Step
• Enter a Maximum Capacitor Bank
1.0 Volts C
Size (4 to 12,000 kVAr)
23. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons • Lead % Bank Size Pickup (10 to
enter the desired "VAr Bias Volt Step" 100%)
value, then press the ENT pushbutton.
• Lag % Bank Size Pickup (10 to 100%)
The entered setting will be displayed.
• VAr Bias Voltage Step (0.1 to 2.0 V)
VAr Bias Volt Step • Max VAr Bias Duration (10 to 1440
XX Volts min)

as necessary, to navigate to the "Max
VAr Bias Time" menu item within the
"Nameplate" menu.
Max VAr Bias Time "Setpoints Successfully Written to
300 mins
5–61
The first current path shown (Circulating Current)

5.3 Parallel Operation has a current analogous in angle and magnitude
to the reactive current circulating through the
Circulating Current and Delta VAr Methods paralleled transformers. It also includes the
Refer to Figures 5-10, 5-11, 5-12, 5-13 and to M‑0127A Overcurrent Relay, which is used to
Appendix A, Figure A‑8. The user with access to detect excessive circulating current and block the
the Configuration Menu may select the circulating tapchanger movement, if this occurs. Also, a lamp
current method of paralleling LTC transformers, or will alert the operator when excessive circulating
disable the feature. If the optional ∆VAR®1/∆VAR2 current is detected.
methods were purchased, they may also be selected.
Paralleling by the circulating current method or the The second path shown (Balance Current),
∆VAR1 method involves a configuration in which connecting the K1 auxiliary CT of the M‑0115A
each M‑2001D Tapchanger Control is used with modules together, has a balance current which
a Beckwith Electric M‑0115A Parallel Balancing forces the two load currents of transformers #1 and
Module. The control is provided with a current input #2 to be identical. This means that any difference in
which is representative of the circulating current currents must flow in the circulating current path.
between two or more LTC transformers operating The third and fourth path shown (Half Current and
in parallel. LDC Current), connecting the K2 auxiliary CT of
the M‑0115A modules together, ensures proper
Circulating Current/∆VAR1 operation of the Load Drop Compensator circuit if
The general paralleling schemes for two and three one of the transformers is taken out of service by
transformer paralleling using the circulating current opening its breaker. For instance, if transformer #2
method are shown in Figures 5-10 through 5-12. is taken out of service by opening breaker 52-2,
then half of transformer #1's load current is forced
Figure 5-10 is a schematic of the current circuit to flow through the half current loop. In this way,
only; redrawn from the Paralleling Scheme figures transformer #1's voltage regulating control sees the
to allow easier tracing of the load current (IL) and same load current as it did before, and the proper
circulating current (Ip) paths. amount of line drop compensation in the transformer
#1 control is maintained. This circuit configuration
A current, proportional to the transformer secondary and grounding points must be maintained, if
current, is fed to the M‑0115A unit. Because of the transformers are to be successfully paralleled.
secondary parallel connection, however, this is
actually the vector sum of the desired load current A more detailed description of the theory of
and any undesired circulating current. The M‑0115A operation is available from Beckwith Electric upon
separates these currents, and sends them to the request. Application Note #11, "Introduction to
proper load (LDC) and circulating current inputs of Paralleling of LTC Transformers by the Circulating
the associated control. Current Method" and Application Note #13,
"Advanced Paralleling of LTC Transformers by the
Two current loops are formed. One involves the K3 Circulating Current Method" provide a thorough
auxiliary transformers in each of the M‑0115A units. analysis of parallel LTC transformers operating by
This loop forms a measure of the transformer bank the circulating current method.
circulating current, subtracted from the LDC control
input and forced to flow into the control circulating It is suggested that either the non‑sequential or
current input. Intertap time delay be used when paralleling.
The second loop involves the K1 and K2 auxiliary The sensitivity of the control or the amount of control
transformers. They force the load current to divide setpoint bias for a 200 mA circulating current is 24 V.
properly between the various controls so that For circulating current applications, that is a 24 V
each senses its proper portion of the total bank setpoint shift for 200 mA of total circulating current
load. Thus, the LDC setting for each control may input. For ∆VAR1 applications, that is a 24 V setpoint
properly be the same, regardless of whether or not shift for 200 mA of reactive circulating current.
the associated transformer is being used in parallel.
5–62
Configuration – 5
For applications with low transformer impedances, ∆VAR2 Paralleling and ∆VAR2 Paralleling +
the circulating current or VArs per tap difference is KeepTrack™
greater than in applications with high transformer The theoretical basis for the ∆VAR®2 Method
impedances. This creates a need for a method to of paralleling is that paralleled transformers are
adjust the sensitivity of the control according to the meant to SHARE the VAr load (as well as the
system application. KW load) of the load bus. Since the KW sharing
of the parallel transformers is determined by
On the circulating current application method and the
the relative transformer impedances and NOT
∆VAR1 application method, this is accomplished
the tap position, KW flow should not effect tap
with a sensitivity adjustment on the M‑0115A
position choice. Further, that the best choice of
Parallel Balancing Module (see the M‑0115A
loading parallel transformers is to maintain the VAr
Instruction Book.)
sharing regardless of KW loading which can be
 NOTE: In all M‑0115A applications, the M‑0115A accomplished with relative tap positioning.
sensitivity settings should be equal on all
paralleled transformers. The ∆VAR Method will result in the VAr flow to the
substation load to be shared in the appropriate
ratio of the paralleled transformers’ ratings. It
should be noted that auxiliary CT’s are required in
circulating current schemes to balance the currents
when transformers with different impedances are
paralleled. Those auxiliary CT’s are not necessary
when the ∆VAR Method is used.
The ∆VAR2 implementation is limited to use with no
more than two transformers and each transformer
current is input to each control. This eliminates the
need for the parallel balancing module and removes
the path for the installation of the overcurrent relay.
For this implementation, the sensitivity setting is
added to the M-2001D Tapchanger Control along
with a circulating current overcurrent inhibit function.
The ∆VAR2 implementation also contains a CT
ratio-matching setting making it unnecessary to
match CT ratios exactly to transformer MVA ratings
for proper operation.
The ∆VAR2 Method is incorporated in the Beckwith
Electric M-2001D Tapchanger Control, as an option.
This option internally calculates and compares
the individual transformer VAr flows. Decisions
for voltage setpoint biasing are then made and
implemented to change tap positions in such a
manner that the difference in VAr flow is minimized.
Action is taken continuously as the MVAr load is
changing such that the magnitude of difference in
VAr loading is minimized (depending on the VAr
difference of one, off-optimum, tap position).
The use of LDC (line drop compensation) is
precluded when ∆VAR2 is used since no provision
is made for the increase in load currents in one
transformer when the other is out of service. The
result would be doubling the LDC effect when in
independent operation.
5–63
∆VAR2 Connection On the ∆VAR®2 application method, which uses no

As shown in Figure 5-13, the current input is M‑0115A module, a control setting is provided to
connected to the load current terminals of the control accomplishment the sensitivity adjustment.
and then into the circulating current terminals (Ip)  NOTE: In all ∆VAR2 applications, the sensitivity
of the paralleled transformer control. Each control settings should be equal on all paralleled
now sees the same voltage and each transformer transformer controls.
current separately. This allows each control to
calculate the VAr flows in both transformers for
comparison, without externally sorting out the load Exclusively for the ∆VAR2 method, there are three
and circulating current values. Breaker contact functions activated and set in the Configuration
52‑3b is used to signal the M-2001D Control to menu for proper operation: ∆VAR2 Sensitivity,
disable paralleling using the neutral light input ∆VAR2 Reac Limit, and ∆VAR2 I Ratio. When the
(Redefined when ∆VAR2 selected). An external ∆VAR option has not been purchased, these input
independent/parallel switch (43P) is suggested to screens will be disabled.
provide manual control for testing and maintenance.
The ∆VAR2 Sensitivity ranges from –4.0 to +4.0, as
The effectiveness of this grounding is important for
did the M‑0115A adjustment. At a ∆VAR2 Sensitivity
the recognition of this condition.
setting of 0.0, 100% of calculated reactive current
Paralleling by the ∆VAR2 method does not use the difference will be used to bias the setpoint. At a
M‑0115A Parallel Balancing Module. This method setting of –4.0, only 50% of the calculated reactive
of paralleling can only be used for two transformers. current difference will be used to bias the setpoint,
Refer to Figure 5-13 for the ∆VAR2 connections. making the control less sensitive to the circulating
Instead, the two load currents are brought into the current. At a setpoint of +4.0, the bias will be
control, and the actual ∆VAR's which exist between adjusted by a value of 200% of the calculated
the paralleled transformers is calculated internally. reactive current difference, making the control more
When using the ∆VAR2 method, the control's load sensitive to the system current.
current input is to be connected to the load current
CT of the transformer which is controlling the tap The ∆VAR2 Circ Limit I setpoint establishes a
position. The control's circulating current is to be limit on the calculated reactive current difference
connected to the load current CT for the opposite between transformers. The settings range from 5
paralleled transformer. mA to 200 mA in 1 mA increments. If the calculated
reactive current difference reaches this setpoint,
The measured voltage the M‑2001D controls on the operation of the control will be blocked and the
each of the transformers will be biased in such
alarm output function will be activated, if enabled.
a way as to attempt to minimize the circulating
The purpose of this limit is to stop any runaway
current between the two. In the case of ∆VAR, the
tap positions will minimize the difference in VArs condition. This feature is required to replace the
from each transformer. M‑0127A overcurrent relay used in the circulating
current and ∆VAR1 applications.
For ∆VAR2 applications, there is a 24 V setpoint shift
for 200 mA of calculated reactive current difference  NOTE: Care must be taken in setting the ∆VAR2
Circ Limit I, to ensure it is high enough
between transformers. (∆VAR2 is only applicable for
to allow a two or three tap difference
two parallel transformer applications.)
from optimum in transformers before
For applications with low transformer impedances, operating. Some knowledge of system
the circulating current or VArs per tap difference is impedances are useful in determining
greater than in applications with high transformer this setting, but the current difference
impedances. This creates a need for a method to may also be tested for immediate system
conditions by reading the current change
adjust the sensitivity of the control according to the
when one tap is changed on either
system application.
transformer.
5–64
Configuration – 5
The ∆VAR2 I Ratio is used to adjust the sensitivity This feature can also be used to replace the need
to the line current input versus the circulating for auxiliary transformer for matching transformer
current input (opposite transformer load current) CT ratios. No correction is necessary to compensate
to compensate for unequal CT ratios between for impedance differences in the transformers with
transformers. For proper operation with a ratio ∆VAR operation.
setting of 1, the ratio of the CT ratios must be
equal to the ratio of the transformer ratings (CT1/ For ∆VAR2 applications (without KeepTrack™),
CT2=MVA1/MVA2). paralleling will be disabled if either current input
drops to less than approximately 10 mA or if a
( TX1 Rating
TX2 Rating )( TX2 CT Ratio
TX1 CT Ratio ) = T Ratio TX 1
neutral input is present. When ∆VAR2 operation
is configured, the normal neutral input is directed
to this duty rather than the normal neutral light
operation. It is highly recommended that this input
( TX2 Rating
TX1 Rating )( TX1 CT Ratio
TX2 CT Ratio ) = T Ratio TX 2 be connected to operate whenever any breaker
opens which isolates the transformer from parallel
operation.
Example: A 20 MVA transformer is being paralleled For ∆VAR2 Paralleling mode the Auxiliary Input
with a 15 MVA transformer. If the CT ratios are 2000 A1 will be the ∆VAR2 Disable Input. This is
A and 1500 A to 0.2 A, no compensation would be needed since the Neutral Position Input is used for
required (both transformers are fully loaded when KeepTrack.
the CT outputs are 200 mA.) However, if they each
had 2000 A to 0.2 A CTs, the ∆VAR2 I Ratio on the  NOTE: This input configuration has changed
20 MVA transformer control should be 1.34, and the from previous firmware versions
∆VAR2 I Ratio on the 15 MVA transformer control (V01.05.13 and prior).
should be 0.75.
The settings for this ratio are 0.50 to 2.00, in 0.01
increments. When the setting is 0.50, the control
will be 0.50 times as sensitive to the VArs from
the circulating current input versus the load input
current. The default setting for the sensitivity is 1.00,
indicating the ratio of the CT ratios are equal to the
ratio of the transformer ratings.
5–65

 NOTES:
1. 52 contacts are shown in the breaker closed position; 43P in parallel position.
2. K3 is a circulating current sensitivity control.
3. M-0127A is a current relay to detect excessive circulating current.
Figure 5-10 Simplified Schematic of Current Circuit for M-2001D Paralleling

Two Transformers using the Circulating Current or ∆VAR® Method
5–66
Configuration – 5

Figure 5-11 M‑2001D and M‑2067B Paralleling Scheme for Two Transformers
using the Circulating Current or ∆VAR® Method
5–67

Figure 5-12 M‑2001D and M-2067B Paralleling Scheme for Three Transformers
using the Circulating Current or ∆VAR® Method
5–68
Configuration – 5
Main CT
TRANS 1
52-1
Optional 2 1
LOADS
52-1b M-0169A Auxiliary 5.0 A
Current Transformer Main VT
0.2 A 90 Relay
52-2b 4 3
6 1
IP VT
52-3b 3
5
7
LOADS
Source PAR
Disable
R
L
4
Motor
9 L R
43P IL 52-3
Power In
2 8
Motor
Auxiliary
Relay Coils
LOADS
Main CT
TRANS 2
LOADS
52-2
Optional 2 1
52-1b M-0169A Auxiliary 5.0 A
Current Transformer Main VT
0.2 A 90 Relay
52-2b 4 3
6 1
IP VT
52-3b 3
5
7
PAR R
Disable
L
4
Motor
9 L R
43P IL
Power In
2 8
Motor
Auxiliary
Relay Coils
Figure 5-13 ∆VAR®2 Paralleling
5–69
Selecting Paralleling Method and ∆VAR2  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
Settings the display will automatically advance
The available paralleling methods if purchased are: the cursor to the next digit when input
∆VAR®2 (KeepTrack™), ∆VAR2, ∆VAR1, Circulating is momentarily paused.
I and Master/Follower. 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
Selecting Paralleling Method and ∆VAR2 press the ENT pushbutton.
Settings From The HMI If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
To select the Paralleling Method and ∆VAR2 entered, the display will briefly flash a
Settings from the HMI, proceed as follows: confirmation screen and then display
the following:
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu Paralleling Type
DISABLE C
CONFIGURATION
COMM
SETP
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. 8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select
The unit will display the following: the desired Paralleling Type, then press
be displayed reflecting the selection that
Tapchanger Type
was entered.
 
Paralleling Type
as necessary, to navigate to the DISABLE, MASTER/FOLLOWER,
"Paralleling" menu. DELTA VAR #2(KT), DELTA VAR #2,
DELTA VAR #1 or CIRCULATING I
Paralleling
9. If DVAR2 or DVAR2 (KeepTrack) was
  selected in Step 8, then press the Down
arrow pushbutton once. The following will
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as be displayed.
necessary, until the "Paralleling Type"
screen is displayed. DVAR2 Sensitivity
Paralleling Type 0.0
DISABLE 10. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following

will be displayed
2 Access is not active or has been DVAR2 Sensitivity
displayed. Go to Step 8. 0.0 C
Paralleling Type 11. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select

the desired DVAR2 Sensitivity, then
DISABLE C press the ENT pushbutton. The following
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 that was entered.
DVAR2 Sensitivity
X.X
_
5–70
Configuration – 5
12. If DVAR2 or DVAR2 (KeepTrack™) was 16. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following
selected in Step 8, then press the Down will be displayed
arrow pushbutton once. The following will
be displayed. DVAR2 I Ratio
1.00 C
DVAR2 Reac I Lmt
200 mA 17. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select
the desired DVAR2 I Ratio, then press
13. Press the ENT pushbutton. The following the ENT pushbutton. The following will
will be displayed be displayed reflecting the selection that
was entered.
DVAR2 Reac I Lmt
200 mA C DVAR2 I Ratio
x.xx
the desired DVAR2 Reac I Limit, then
press the ENT pushbutton. The following Selecting Paralleling Method and Settings
will be displayed reflecting the selection From TapTalk
that was entered. 1. Select Setup/Configuration from the
DVAR2 Reac I Lmt Configuration dialog screen (Figure 5-8).
xxx mA 2. From the "Paralleling" section of
the dialog screen select the desired
15. If DVAR2 or DVAR2 (KeepTrack) was Paralleling Type and as applicable DVAr2
selected in Step 8, then press the Down Sensitivity, Reactive Current Limit and
arrow pushbutton once. The following will Input Ratio (Figure 5-14).
be displayed.
DVAR2 I Ratio
1.00
Figure 5-14 DVAr2 and DVAr2 (KeepTrack) Paralleling Settings (Configuration Dialog Screen)
5–71
Optional Master/Follower Paralleling Method Each control upon detecting a change in any
The Master/Follower Paralleling scheme employs Breaker Status or Tap Position will issue a GOOSE
the GOOSE messaging of the IEC 61850 protocol message to update all the other controls in the
to provide peer to peer communications. The control network with the new information.
can be placed in either the Master or Follower mode
The following rules are applied to produce the
if paralleling is to be achieved. The Master/Follower
Control Network Map (refer to Figure 5-16):
settings can also be changed individually on each
control through Setup/Configuration/Paralleling • The Master in the initial setup of the
(Figure 5-15). The Master/Follower Configuration network should always be at the highest
Tool (Figure 5-18) includes the settings for each position in the network map (e.g.
control in the network for the Master/Follower position 8).
paralleling scheme.
• The paralleling address of each control
should be the same as the position it is
Grouping Operation Algorithm (GOA): located in the network map (e.g. position
This GOA determines the action that is taken by 7 = address 7).
the control when it detects any OPEN Tie Breakers • All GOOSE messages are sor ted
(Figure 5-16) in the network. according to their corresponding
paralleling addresses.
Each control individually monitors the status of
the Tie Breakers (A2, A3 Auxiliary Inputs) and • The control scans all the tie breakers
broadcasts to all the other controls these statuses statuses (if any) in the downstream
via a GOOSE message. Each control in turn positions to find the downstream boundary.
processes the tie breaker statuses to produce a
map of the network every 64 ms.
Figure 5-15 Master/Follower Paralleling Settings (Configuration Dialog Screen)
5–72
Single bus
High Side Bus DOWNSTREAM UPSTREAM
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
M2001D M2001D M2001D M2001D M2001D M2001D M2001D M2001D

Position 1 i1 Position 2 i2 Position 3 i3 Position 4 i4 Position 5 i5 Position 6 i6 Position 7 i7 Position 8 i8
LB1 LB2 LB3 LB4 LB5 LB6 LB7 LB8
Figure 5-16 Breaker/Control Network Map

Low Side Bus TB1-2 TB2-3 TB3-4 TB4-5 TB5-6 TB6-7 TB7-8
5–73
Configuration – 5
• The first OPEN status indicates the Master Lockout

boundary has been reached. Similarly the There are four Master Lockouts:
control scans all the upstream tiebreaker
statuses (if any) to find the upstream • GOOSE Message Delay – When the
boundary. Once the boundaries are control powers up in Master Mode, the
located the sub network is defined. control will wait for approximately 65 sec
• If the control is a Master, the control will to allow all the GOOSE messages from
determine how many Followers are in its all the Followers in the network to reach
network. the Master. Once all GOOSE messages
have been received, the Master will start
• If the control is a Follower, the Master/ its normal algorithm. If within that initial
Follower Identification will be equal to the 65 second period the Master does not
address of the Master in that network. receive all the GOOSE messages it
expected, it will enter the Master lockout
Master/Follower Alarm Messages state.
The Master/Follower Alarm Messages that are • Tap Position Response Timeout Lockout
displayed on the Control’s HMI display, can be – The Tap Position Response Timeout
remotely observed (Figure 5-17) from TapTalk® will start after the Master has published
utilizing the Monitor/Master/Follower Alarm its new tap position message after it has
Messages menu selection. In addition to the lockout performed a successful tap operation. If it
conditions, it also will display the serial number of doesn’t receive the tap position messages
the Follower that caused the lockout condition for from all the participating Followers in the
Tap Difference Lockout. network before the timer expires, then a
Master Lockout is issued.
• Tap Difference Lockout – If the Tap
position difference between any Follower
to Tap Difference setting, the Master will
enter the lockout state.
• Follower Communication Loss Lockout
– If any follower does not send a valid
Figure 5-17 Master/Follower Alarm Messages re‑transmitted GOOSE message within a
65 sec internal Follower Detection Lockout
Lockout Condition "Keep Alive" time, then a lockout is issued,
There are two types of lockout conditions, Master signaling a broken communication link.
Lockout and Follower Lockout. Any lockout of the
paralleling mode will initiate a Lockout alarm. When
a lockout is active, the unit issuing the lockout
will stop any further GOOSE publishing and will
stop load voltage regulation. Also, the alarm can
be configured as a DNP event, or as a report in
the case of IEC 61850. The lockout alarm will be
displayed on the control front panel HMI display
and in the Master/Follower Configuration Tool
(Figure 5-18).
 NOTE: Master/Follower Alarm messages can
be observed for the connected control
from the TapTalk Monitor/Master/
Follower Alarm Messages menu item
(Figure 5-17).
5–74
Configuration – 5
Follower Lockout Discovered Devices

There are three types of Follower Lockout: Each discovered control and its data is displayed
on the Master/Follower Configuration Tool dialog
• Master Communication Loss Lockout – screen. The data is organized into control identifiers,
When the Follower does not receive a read only statuses, and configurable (writable)
valid re-transmitted GOOSE message settings. The control identifiers are indicated by the
from the Master within a 65 second color "yellow", read only statuses by "green", and
internal "Keep Alive" time, and the configurable settings are identified by an asterisk.
previous Master GOOSE message NA indicates the data is not applicable.
indicates that the breaker statuses
were closed, then a Follower Lockout is The Control Identifiers are:
activated. This Lockout is an indication
that communication with the Master has • SN – Serial Number of the device
been lost. • IP Address – IP address of the device
• Follower Communication Loss Lockout • User Line – User Logo on the device
– If any follower does not send a valid
re-transmitted GOOSE message within The Read Only Statuses are:
a 65 sec internal Keep Alive time, then a
lockout is activated, indicating a broken • Status – Indicates whether the device is
communication link. a Master, Follower or None and whether
• Tap Difference Lockout – If the Tap the unit is in Lockout condition.
Position Difference between the Follower • Tap Pos – Tap position of the device
• A1 – Line Breaker status of the device
to the Tap Difference setting, a Follower
Lockout will be activated. • A2 – Right Tie Breaker status of the device
• A3 – Left Tie Breaker status of the device
TapTalk® includes a Master/Follower Configuration  NOTE: A1, A2, and A3 are references to the
Tool located in the Utility menu (Figure 5-18) to M‑2001D Auxiliary Inputs.
help configure the controls for the Master/Follower
Paralleling scheme. The tool allows the user to
discover on a Local Area Network (LAN) all the
Beckwith M-2001D controls that have the Master/
Follower feature. Note that the Master/Follower
Paralleling scheme can only be implemented on
controls that are on the same network. In addition,
if a multiple network adapter exists on the host
computer the configuration tool will allow the user
to select on which network card the tool should
perform the discover of all M-2001D controls. Failure
to choose the correct network card may result in
the tool not discovering all the available M-2001D
controls. Accessing the Master/Follower Paralleling
Tool dialog screen requires a Level 2 Access code.
5–75
The Configuration Tool allows the user to enter the

following settings:
• Paralleling Mode – Master/Follower
Paralleling Mode is automatically changed
to Master/Follower when settings are
written to the control.
• Paralleling Address – The unique address
for each device (Range 1 – 16)
• Mode – Master/Follower mode of
operation. M = Master, F= Follower, N =
None
• Tap Difference – The difference between
Master and Follower tap positions for
which Lockout will be issued.
Figure 5-18 Master/Follower Configuration Tool Dialog Screen

• Tap Position Response Timeout – Time
within which the Followers have to be at
the same tap position as that of the Master
(Range 1000 ms – 60000 ms).
If the Tap Position Response Timeout is
greater than the Intertap Delay setting,
then the Tap Position Response Timeout
is used as the Intertap Delay, so that the
Master waits for all the Followers to make
a tapchange before the Master takes the
next tap.
• # Devices – The number of total devices
that are in the paralleling scheme
(maximum 16 inclusive of the Master)
• Breaker In Use (A1) – Option to use the
Line Breaker Status in the algorithm.
• Breaker Polarity – Positive or negative
polarity of the Line Breaker.
• Right TB In Use (A2) – Option to use the
Right Tie Breaker Status in the algorithm.
• Right TB Polarity – Positive or negative
polarity of the Right Tie Breaker.
• Left TB In Use (A3) – Option to use the
Left Tie breaker Status in the algorithm.
• Left TB Polarity – Positive or negative
polarity of the Left Tie Breaker.
5–76
Configuration – 5
Setting Masters and Followers From TapTalk • Number of Devices (2 to 16)

A minimum of 2 controls are required for the • Tap Difference (2 to 8)
paralleling scheme to work. The Master unit will be • Tap Position Response Timeout
configured first and then the Follower(s). (1000 to 60000 ms)
The Tap Position Response Timeout
 NOTE: This procedure requires communication is the time within which the Followers
to be established with the target control have to be at the same tap position
(Master or Follower) with Level 2 Access. as that of the Master (Range 1000
ms – 60000 ms).
Master Control Setup From TapTalk If the Tap Position Response
Timeout is greater than the Intertap
To set up the Master Control(s) utilizing TapTalk® Delay setting, then the Tap Position
perform the following: Response Timeout is used as the
Intertap Delay, so that the Master
1. Verify that the appropriate Setup Settings
waits for all the Followers to make a
have been entered for the control
tapchange before the Master takes
application.
the next tap.
2. Place the Master Control to be setup • Line Breaker "Not In Use" or "In Use"
in Manual by selecting "Block" from the (Auxiliary Input A1)
Remote Control dialog screen (Figure
• Line Breaker Polarity "Positive" or
5-19) "Remote Operation/Block Auto
"Negative"
Control via Communication (Comm
Block)" section. • Right Tie Breaker "Not In Use" or "In
Use" (Auxiliary Input A2)
3. Select Paralleling Type to be "Master/
• Right Tie Breaker Polarity "Positive"
Follower" from the "Paralleling" section
or "Negative"
of the "Configuration" dialog screen
(Figure 5-8) . • Left Tie Breaker "Not In Use" or "In
Use" (Auxiliary Input A3)
4. Select "None" from the "Master/
• Left Tie Breaker Polarity "Positive"
Follower Configuration" section of the
or "Negative"
"Configuration" dialog screen .
 NOTE: Followers are in remote manual mode
 NOTE: The Master/Follower Configuration
and operate in "Pulse Mode" regardless
settings can also be set utilizing the
of the mode of operation of the Raise/
Lower Output contacts.
Figure 5-18.
5. Enter the desired Master/Follower

Configuration Settings from the "Master/
Follower Configuration Settings" section
of the "Configuration" dialog screen:
• Paralleling Address (1 to 16) – The
Master Paralleling Address must be
the highest address in the network.
All Follower addresses must be a
value less than the Master.
The control’s position in the
paralleling network is determined
by its paralleling address. As shown
in Figure 5-16, Position 1 should be
assigned a paralleling address of 1, Figure 5-19 Remote Control Dialog Screen
Position 2 a paralleling address of 2
and so on, in an ascending order. In
this example the Master control will
be in Position 8 with a Paralleling
Address of 8.
5–77
Follower Control Setup From TapTalk • Tap Position Response Timeout

To set up the Follower Control(s) utilizing TapTalk® (1000 to 60000 ms)
perform the following: The Tap Position Response Timeout
is the time within which the Followers
1. Verify that the appropriate Setup Settings have to be at the same tap position
have been entered for the control as that of the Master (Range 1000
application. ms – 60000 ms).
2. Verify that the designated network If the Tap Position Response
Master Control operational mode is as Timeout is greater than the Intertap
follows: Delay setting, then the Tap Position
Response Timeout is used as the
– The control is in "Manual". Intertap Delay, so that the Master
– The "Master/Follower Configuration" waits for all the Followers to make a
section of the Configuration dialog tapchange before the Master takes
screen is selected to "None". the next tap.
3. Select Paralleling Type to be "Master/ • Line Breaker "Not In Use" or "In Use"
Follower" from the "Paralleling" section (Auxiliary Input A1)
of the "Configuration" dialog screen • Line Breaker Polarity "Positive" or
(Figure 5-8) . "Negative"
4. Select "Follower" From the "Master/ • Right Tie Breaker "Not In Use" or "In
Follower Configuration" section of the Use" (Auxiliary Input A2)
"Configuration" dialog screen . • Right Tie Breaker Polarity "Positive"
or "Negative"
5. Enter the desired Master/Follower
Configuration Settings from the "Master/ • Left Tie Breaker "Not In Use" or "In
Follower Configuration Settings" section Use" (Auxiliary Input A3)
of the "Configuration" dialog screen: • Left Tie Breaker Polarity "Positive"
or "Negative"
• Paralleling Address (1 to 16) – The
Follower Paralleling Address must 6. Drive the Follower Tap Position to match
be a value less than the Master. the Master Tap Position.
The control’s position in the 7. Repeat Steps 3 through 6 for each
paralleling network is determined Follower in the Master/Follower scheme.
by its paralleling address. As shown
in Figure 5-16, Position 1 should be 8. Determine the Master Band Status, then
assigned a paralleling address of 1, proceed as follows:
Position 2 a paralleling address of 2 • If the Master Band Status is "In-Band",
and so on, in an ascending order. In then:
this example the Master control will
be in Position 8 with a Paralleling a. Select "Master" from the Master,
Address of 8. "Master/Follower Configuration"
section of the "Configuration" dialog
• Number of Devices (2 to 16)
screen.
• Tap Difference (2 to 8)
▲ CAUTION: After placing the Master control in
"Master" the Master will not respond
to any tapchange requests for 32
seconds.
b. When at least 32 seconds have
elapsed, initiate a Raise or Lower
tapchange from the Master, Remote
Control dialog screen (Figure 5-19)
"Tap Control" section.
c. Verify that all Followers initiate
tapchanges to match the Master tap
position.
5–78
Configuration – 5
d. Return the Master to an "In-Band" Setting Masters and Followers From The HMI
tap position. A minimum of 2 controls are required for the
e. S e l e c t " U n bl o ck " f r o m t h e paralleling scheme to work. The Master unit will be
Master, Remote Control dialog configured first and then the Follower(s).
screen (Figure 5-19) "Remote
Operation/Block Auto Control via Master Control Setup From The HMI
Communication (Comm Block)"
section.  NOTE: This procedure requires Level 2 Access.
• If the Master Band Status is not
In‑Band, then: To set up the Master Control utilizing the HMI
a. Adjust the Master tap position by
initiating a tapchange as necessary 1. Verify that the appropriate Setup Settings
to bring the Master Band Status have been entered for the control
"In-Band" from the Master, Remote application.
"Tap Control" section. 2. Place the Master Control to be setup in
Manual.
b. Drive each Follower tap position
in the Master/Follower scheme to 3. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button)
match the Master tap position. pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
c. Select "Master" from the Master, will advance to "CONFIGURATION".
"Master/Follower Configuration"
section of the "Configuration" dialog CONFIGURATION
screen. COMM
SETP
"Master" the Master will not respond 4. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
to any tapchange requests for 32 The unit will display the following:
seconds.
d. When at least 32 seconds have Tapchanger Type
 
tapchange from the Master, Remote
"Tap Control" section. 5. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton,
e. Verify that all Followers initiate "Paralleling" menu.
position.
Paralleling
f. Return the Master to an "In-Band"
tap position.  
g. S e l e c t " U n bl o ck " f r o m t h e 6. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as

Master, Remote Control dialog necessary, until the "Paralleling Type"
screen (Figure 5-19) "Remote screen is displayed.
Operation/Block Auto Control via
Communication (Comm Block)" Paralleling Type
section.
DISABLE
9. The Master/Follower Paralleling scheme
is now in effect. 7. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
Paralleling Type
DISABLE C
5–79
8. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 12. Ver ify that the Master/Follower
Access prompt will be displayed. Configuration is selected to "NONE".
• If the Master/Follower Configuration
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS is set to "NONE", go to Step 13.
_ • If the Master/Follower Configuration
is not set to "NONE" utilize the arrow
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code pushbuttons to select "NONE", then
the display will automatically advance press the ENT pushbutton. The
the cursor to the next digit when input following will be displayed reflecting
is momentarily paused. the selection that was entered.
9. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then Master/Follower
NONE
entered, the display will briefly flash a  NOTE: From this point on in this procedure it
confirmation screen and then display is assumed that a valid Access Level 2
the following: has been entered. If the Level 2 Access
Prompt is displayed, then it will be
Paralleling Type necessary to re-enter the valid Level 2
DISABLE C Access Code as described in Step 9.
13. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once,
If not, re-enter a valid code. the "Paralleling Address" screen will be
displayed.
the Paralleling Type to be "MASTER/ Paralleling Address
FOLLOWER", then press the ENT 16
displayed reflecting the selection that The Master Paralleling Address must
was entered. be the highest address in the network.
All Follower addresses must be a value
Paralleling Type less than the Master.
MASTER/FOLLOWER The control’s position in the paralleling
network is determined by its paralleling
11. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once, address. As shown in Figure 5-16,
the "Master/Follower" screen will be Position 1 should be assigned a
displayed. paralleling address of 1, Position 2 a
paralleling address of 2 and so on, in
Master/Follower an ascending order. In this example the
Master control will be in Position 8 with
NONE, MASTER, FOLLOWER
a Paralleling Address of 8.
displayed.
Paralleling Address
16 C
5–80
Configuration – 5
15. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter 19. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once,
the desired Paralleling Address (1 to the "T.P.R. Timeout" screen will be
16) then press the ENT pushbutton. The displayed.
selection that was entered. T.P.R. Timeout
60000 ms
Paralleling Address
1 to 16 The Tap Position Response Timeout is
the time within which the Followers have
16. Press the Down arrow pushbutton to be at the same tap position as that of
once, the "Num. Devices" screen will be the Master (Range 1000 ms – 60000 ms).
displayed.
If the Tap Position Response Timeout is
greater than the Intertap Delay setting,
Num. Devices
2 is used as the Intertap Delay, so that the
Master waits for all the Followers to make
Number of Devices is the number of total a tapchange before the Master takes the
devices that are in the paralleling scheme next tap.
(maximum 16 inclusive of the Master) 20. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
17. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level 2 Access is not active or has been
2 Access is not active or has been previously input, the following will be
previously input, the following will be displayed.
displayed.
T.P.R. Timeout
Num. Devices 60000 ms C
2 C
18. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter desired Tap Position Response Timeout
the total Number of Devices in the (1000 ms to 60000 ms) then press the
Master/Follower network (maximum ENT pushbutton. The following will be
of 16 including Master) then press the displayed reflecting the selection that
ENT pushbutton. The following will be was entered.
was entered. T.P.R. Timeout

XXXXX ms
Num. Devices

2 to 16 22. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once,
the "Breaker Option" screen will be
displayed.
Breaker Option
000000

displayed.
line breaker
000000 C
5–81
24. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter 25. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once,
the desired Breaker Options: the "Tap Difference" screen will be
displayed.
 NOTE: Position 1 is the first position from the
right.
Tap Difference
2
Position 1 – Line Breaker (A1)
"0" = Not Selected The Tap Difference setting is the
"1" = Selected difference between Master and Follower
tap positions for which Lockout will be
issued.
Position 2 – Line Breaker Polarity
"0" = Positive 2 Access is not active or has been
"1" = Negative previously input, the following will be
displayed.
Position 3 – Right Tie Breaker (A2)
Tap Difference
"0" = Not Selected
2 C
"1" = Selected
Position 4 – Right Tie Breaker Polarity the desired Tap Difference setting (2 to
8) then press the ENT pushbutton. The
"0" = Positive following will be displayed reflecting the
"1" = Negative selection that was entered.
Tap Difference
Position 5 – Left Tie Breaker (A3)
"0" = Not Selected
2 to 8
"1" = Selected
Position 6 – Left Tie Breaker Polarity

"0" = Positive
"1" = Negative
When all Breaker Options have been

entered, then press the ENT pushbutton.
The following will be displayed reflecting
the selection that was entered.
Breaker Option
XXXXXX
5–82
Configuration – 5
Follower Control Setup From HMI 7. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
 NOTE: This procedure requires Level 2 Access. 2 Access is not active or has been
To set up the Follower Control(s) utilizing the HMI
perform the following: Paralleling Type
1. Verify that the appropriate Setup Settings DISABLE C
have been entered for the control
application. 8. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
2. Verify that the designated network
Master Control operational mode is as
follows: ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS
_
– The control is in "Manual"
– The "Master/Follower Configuration"  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
section of the Configuration dialog the display will automatically advance
screen is selected to "None". the cursor to the next digit when input
If the designated network Master Control
is not in the operational mode described 9. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
above, then take the necessary steps press the ENT pushbutton.
to place the control in the described
operational mode before continuing in If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
this procedure. entered, the display will briefly flash a
3. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) the following:
will advance to "CONFIGURATION". Paralleling Type
CONFIGURATION DISABLE C
COMM
SETP If not, re-enter a valid code.
The unit will display the following: 10. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select
the Paralleling Type to be "MASTER/
Tapchanger Type FOLLOWER", then press the ENT
  displayed reflecting the selection that
was entered.
as necessary, to navigate to the Paralleling Type
"Paralleling" menu.
MASTER/FOLLOWER
Paralleling
  the "Master/Follower" screen will be
displayed.
necessary, until the "Paralleling Type" Master/Follower
NONE, MASTER, FOLLOWER
Paralleling Type
DISABLE
5–83
Master/Follower Paralleling Address

NONE C 16 C
13. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select 16. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter
"FOLLOWER", then press the ENT the desired Paralleling Address (1 to
pushbutton. The following will be 16) then press the ENT pushbutton. The
displayed reflecting the selection that following will be displayed reflecting the
selection that was entered.
was entered.
Paralleling Address
Master/Follower

1 to 16
FOLLOWER
once, the "Num. Devices" screen will be
is assumed that a valid Access Level 2
displayed.
has been entered. If the Level 2 Access
Prompt is displayed, then it will be
necessary to re-enter the valid Level 2 Num. Devices
Access Code as described in Step 9. 2
the "Paralleling Address" screen will be Number of Devices is the number of total
displayed. devices that are in the paralleling scheme
(maximum 16 inclusive of the Master)
Paralleling Address 18. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
16 previously input, the following will be
displayed.
The Master Paralleling Address must
be the highest address in the network.
Num. Devices
All Follower addresses must be a value
less than the Master. 2 C
The control’s position in the paralleling
network is determined by its paralleling
the total Number of Devices in the
address. As shown in Figure 5-16,
Master/Follower network (maximum
Position 1 should be assigned a
of 16 including Master) then press the
paralleling address of 1, Position 2 a
paralleling address of 2 and so on, in
an ascending order. In this example the
was entered.
Master control will be in Position 8 with
a Paralleling Address of 8.
Num. Devices

2 to 16
5–84
Configuration – 5
20. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once, 25. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter
the "T.P.R. Timeout" screen will be the desired Breaker Options:
displayed.
 NOTE: Position 1 is the first position from the
right.
T.P.R. Timeout
60000 ms
Position 1 – Line Breaker (A1)
The Tap Position Response Timeout "0" = Not Selected
is the time within which the Followers "1" = Selected
have to be at the same tap position as
that of the Master (Range 1000 ms –
60000 ms). Position 2 – Line Breaker Polarity
If the Tap Position Response Timeout is "0" = Positive
greater than the Intertap Delay setting, "1" = Negative
is used as the Intertap Delay, so that the
Master waits for all the Followers to make Position 3 – Right Tie Breaker (A2)
a tapchange before the Master takes the "0" = Not Selected
next tap. "1" = Selected
2 Access is not active or has been Position 4 – Right Tie Breaker Polarity
displayed. "0" = Positive
"1" = Negative
T.P.R. Timeout
60000 ms C Position 5 – Left Tie Breaker (A3)
"0" = Not Selected
desired Tap Position Response Timeout "1" = Selected
(1000 ms to 60000 ms) then press the
ENT pushbutton. The following will be Position 6 – Left Tie Breaker Polarity
was entered. "0" = Positive
"1" = Negative
T.P.R. Timeout
XXXXX ms When all Breaker Options have been
entered, then press the ENT pushbutton.
23. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once, The following will be displayed reflecting
the "Breaker Option" screen will be the selection that was entered.
displayed.
Breaker Option
Breaker Option
XXXXXX
000000

displayed.
line breaker
000000 C
5–85
26. Press the Down arrow pushbutton once, 32. If the Master Band Status is not In-Band,
the "Tap Difference" screen will be then:
displayed.
a. Adjust the Master tap position by
initiating a tapchange as necessary
Tap Difference to bring the Master Band Status
2 In‑Band.
b. Drive each Follower tap position
The Tap Difference setting is the in the Master/Follower scheme to
difference between Master and Follower match the Master tap position
tap positions for which Lockout will be
issued. 33. If the Master Band Status is In-Band "ok",
then:
2 Access is not active or has been a. From the Master Control HMI,
previously input, the following will be navigate to the Master, "Master/
displayed. Follower" menu.
Master/Follower
Tap Difference
NONE
2 C
b. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
28. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter 2 Access is not active or has been
the desired Tap Difference setting (2 to previously input, the following will be
8) then press the ENT pushbutton. The displayed. Go to Step e.
selection that was entered. Master/Follower
Tap Difference NONE C

2 to 8 c. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level
29. Drive the Follower Tap Position to match
the Master Tap Position. ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS
30. Repeat Steps 3 through 25 for each _
Follower in the Master/Follower scheme.
31. Determine the Master "Band Status" by
navigating on the Master HMI menu to
the "Monitor/Status" menu item, then
proceed as follows:
a. Press the Down arrow pushbutton d. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code,
as necessary to navigate to the then press the ENT pushbutton.
"Tapchanger Status" screen. If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
entered, the display will briefly flash
Press ENT to view a confirmation screen and then
Tapchanger Status display the following:
Master/Follower
b. Press the ENT pushbutton. The
control will display a summary of the NONE C
Tapchanger Status parameters
TAP BDS PWR BLK VRD
0 lo fwd --- off
BDS = Band Status "lo, hi, ok"
5–86
Configuration – 5
e. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons

select "MASTER", then press the
ENT pushbutton. The following will
be displayed reflecting the selection
that was entered.
Master/Follower
MASTER

"Master" the Master will not respond
to any tapchange requests for 32
seconds.
f. When at least 32 seconds have
tapchange.
g. Verify that all Followers initiate
position.
h. Return the Master to an In-Band
tap position, then place the Master
Control in Automatic.
34. The Master/Follower Paralleling scheme
is now in effect.
5–87
5.4 Tap Settings
TAP INFORMATION Load Tapchanger (LTC) Positive Tap Position

Knowledge
The M‑2001D Digital Tapchanger Control tap
position information applies to many different With the advent of Smart Grid initiatives, Utility
configurations of tapchangers, e.g., ±16 taps, 1 to 17 SCADA systems require positive tap position
taps, ±10 taps, 1 to 33 taps, etc. Two configuration information for Real Time Power Flow Calculations
points, Lowest Tap and Highest Tap, are assigned that are required for proper implementation of their
to allow the user to select the range of a specific tap Integrated Volt VAr Management (IVVM) programs.
changer. The Highest Tap range is 0 to 33 taps, and This section reviews several different methods
the Lowest Tap range is –33 to +29 taps. The user that can be used to provide positive tap position
is able to program the control to select the method knowledge in LTC transformer applications. The
of tap position knowledge or to disable this feature. following positive tap position knowledge methods
Table 5‑1, outlines the ten selections available for will be reviewed that can be applied in new and retrofit
the Tap Information screen. applications depending on installed equipment.
• Contact KeepTrack™
• Shaft Coupled KeepTrack™
• Resistor Divider KeepTrack™
• Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™
Tap Position
Screen Selections Current Range Screens Disabled
Knowledge Method
XFMR EXTERNAL #3 Current Loop 0 to 1 mA Source Voltage
XFMR EXTERNAL #2 Current Loop 4 to 20 mA Source Voltage
XFMR EXTERNAL #1 Current Loop 0 to 1; 0 to 2; or 1 mA Source Voltage
REG EXTERNAL #3 Resistor Divider Not Applicable None
REG EXTERNAL #2 Current Loop 4 to 20 mA None
REG EXTERNAL #1 Current Loop 0 to 1; 0 to 2; or 1 mA None
INTERNAL Motor Direct Drive
Not Applicable None
KEEPTRACK KeepTrack
Direct Contact
CONTACT KT 1R1L Not Applicable None
KeepTrack
Direct Contact
CONTACT KT 1N Not Applicable None
KeepTrack
Source Voltage,
DISABLE None None
Tap Position
Table 5‑1 Tap Information Screen Selections
5–88
Configuration – 5
Contact KeepTrack™ All four contacts must be either dry contacts or

M‑2001D Tapchanger Control Firmware Version run through auxiliary relay contacts if wet. The
D-0214V01.06.04 and above include the 1R/1L and M‑2001D control Voltage Reduction, Neutral, and
1N Contact KeepTrack methods. No cost firmware Counter inputs require dry inputs wetted internally
upgrades are available for M‑2001D Tapchanger with 12 Vdc. The conceptual diagram illustrated
Controls with earlier firmware versions. in Figure 5-8 assumes dry contacts are available.
The conceptual diagram illustrated in Figure 5-9
There are two basic methods of Contact KeepTrack. assumes the contacts are wetted with 120 Vac.
The applicable method used depends on whether
a neutral contact is available that will always stay Example of Contact KeepTrack Method I –
closed while the LTC is on neutral, including Using 1R/1L Contact Input
multiple neutrals. Both methods require that up
to four contacts be available and accessible in the In this example, an out‑of‑band condition occurs
LTC to operate correctly. which causes the raise output from the M‑2001D
to turn on. This will cause current to flow to the
The original M‑2001D Voltage Reduction inputs are motor causing it to start a raise operation. The Aux
now used for the Aux Raise and Aux Lower Inputs Raise contact will close which will send directional
required by the Contact KeepTrack methods. Thus, feedback to the VR1 Input of the M‑2001D. This will
the voltage reduction function via physical contacts tell the control to increment the Contact KeepTrack
will not be available when Contact KeepTrack is tap position by 1 tap.
selected, but voltage reduction via communications
is not affected. Once the raise operation is completed, the Aux
Raise contact will open removing the input to VR1.
The Raise and Lower Outputs from the control must When the unit no longer requires a raise output the
agree with the operation of the external Aux Raise raise output from the control will be turned off. If a
and Aux Lower status contacts, and this must be lower operation is required then the same steps will
maintained whether the tapchanger is on the low occur except that Aux Lower contact will close and
or the high side of the transformer. VR2 will be used.
The Neutral input on the M‑2001D is used for Tap Activation of the 1R contact in conjunction with the
Calibration in the Contact KeepTrack method. Aux Raise contact closing, then opening will cause
the Contact KeepTrack tap position to be set to
Contact KeepTrack Method I – Using 1R/1L 1R. If the next operation results in the 1R contact
Contact Input opening in conjunction with the Aux Lower contact
closing then opening, then Contact KeepTrack will
If the neutral contact can’t be used, the following increment to Neutral. Once in Neutral, the control
four Cam switch based dry contacts are required. will continue to display Neutral until either the 1R
• Aux Raise contact – This contact must or 1L contact operates in conjunction with the
close and open once between taps each appropriate Aux Raise or Lower contact. That allows
time the LTC takes a tap in only the Raise the control to compensate for multiple neutrals.
direction.
• Aux Lower contact – This contact must
close and open once between taps each
time the LTC takes a tap in only the Lower
direction.
• 1R contact – This contact must close when
the tapchanger moves onto the 1 Raise
tap position and open when leaving it.
• 1L Contact – This contact must close when
the tapchanger moves onto the 1 Lower
tap position and open when leaving it.
5–89
M-2001D With Raise/Lower Contact KeepTrack™ Feedback Inputs
M-2001D
M-2001D VR1 Aux Raise contact N.O.
Input (Changes state for each Raise operation)
(Acts as a Raise counter input)
Switch 1 Cam
M-2001D VR2 Aux Lower contact N.O.

Input (Changes state for each Lower operation)
(Acts as a Lower counter input)
Switch 2 Cam
M-2001D
Neutral Input 1R contact N.O.
(Closes when in Tap 1R)
Switch 3 Cam
M-2001D
Counter Input 1L contact N.O.
(Closes when in Tap 1L)
Switch 4 Cam
M-2001D +12 V dc
wetting output
Figure 5-20 Cam Switches Available With Dry Contacts
M-2001D
Aux Relays
M-2001D VR1 Aux Raise contact N.O.

(Changes state for each Raise operation)
Input
120 VAC
Aux Relay 1
M-2001D VR2 Aux Lower contact N.O.

(Changes state for each Raise operation)
Input
120 VAC
Aux Relay 2
M-2001D 1R contact N.O.

(Closes when on Tap 1R)
Neutral Input
120 VAC
Aux Relay 3
M-2001D 1L contact N.O.

(Closes when on Tap 1L)
Counter Input
120 VAC
Aux Relay 4
M-2001D +12 V dc
wetting output
Figure 5-21 Cam Switches Available With Wetted 120 Vac
5–90
Configuration – 5
Contact KeepTrack Method II – Using Neutral All three contacts must be either dry contacts or run
Contact Input through auxiliary relay contacts if wet. The M‑2001D
This method provides Contact KeepTrack for LTC Voltage Reduction inputs, now used for the Aux
transformers that have dedicated Raise, Lower, and Raise and Aux Lower contact inputs, and the Neutral
a Neutral contact that stays closed while the LTC input require dry contacts wetted internally with 12
is on neutral, including multiple neutrals. A Counter Vdc. The conceptual diagram illustrated in Figure
contact may also be required. 5-10 assumes dry contacts are available.
This Contact KeepTrack method requires a pulsed To implement the Contact KeepTrack Method II
input for each tap operation either raise or lower. scheme with 84R and 84L derived contacts, the
The raise contact input to the M‑2001D must close KeepTrack method requires that four contacts be
and open each time the tap position raises by one available and accessible in the LTC to operate
tap as is the case when the contacts are derived correctly.
from Cam switches. Likewise the lower contact input
• Aux Raise contact – This contact closes
to the M‑2001D must close and open each time the
when the LTC takes a tap in the Raise
tap position lowers by one tap.
direction.
If the contacts are derived from 84R and 84L relays, • Aux Lower contact – This contact closes
an additional contact derived from the operations when the LTC takes a tap in the Lower
counter must be placed in series with them to direction.
provide the required pulsed input. With these inputs
• Counter contact – This contact is only
the M‑2001D Control can "keep track" of the tap
required when using Aux Relays and must
position since it will always receive either a raise or
close and open when the unit moves in
lower pulse as an indication of which direction the
either the Raise or Lower tap position.
tapchanger is moving.
• Neutral contact – This contact must close
The neutral contact input recalibrates the control when the unit moves onto the Neutral tap
tap position to neutral if needed. This provides an position and open when leaving it.
extremely positive indication that the tapchanger is
performing either a raise or lower operation.
Auxiliary relays must be connected to the 84R
To implement the Contact KeepTrack™ Method II and 84L contacts to provide dry contacts for the
scheme with contacts derived from Cam switches, Aux Raise and Aux Lower inputs. The Neutral and
the Contact KeepTrack method requires that three Counter contacts must be either dry contacts or
contacts be available and accessible in the LTC to run through auxiliary relay contacts if wet. The Aux
operate correctly. Raise and Aux Lower contacts are connected in
series with a dry Operations Counter contact. They
• Aux Raise contact – This contact closes are then wetted with the M‑2001D’s internal 12 Vdc
when the LTC takes a tap in the Raise wetting voltage thereby providing the required
direction. pulsed signals to properly increment tap position.
• Aux Lower contact – This contact closes The conceptual diagram illustrated in Figure 5-11
when the LTC takes a tap in the Lower assumes wet contacts are available.
direction.
• Neutral contact – This contact must close
when the unit moves onto the Neutral tap
position and open when leaving it.
5–91
Example of Contact KeepTrack Method II –

Using Neutral Contact Input (with 84R/84L
derived contacts)
In this example, an out‑of‑band condition occurs
which causes the raise output from the M‑2001D to
turn on or a manual operation is initiated. This will
cause current to flow to the motor and it will start
a raise operation. The Aux Raise contact will close
and then the counter contact will close once the tap
change is in process. When both of these contacts
close they will send directional feedback to the
VR1 Input of the M‑2001D. This will tell the control
to increment the KeepTrack tap position by 1 tap.
If more than one tap raise is needed, the raise
contact will stay closed and the Counter contact is
used to open the Aux Raise contact circuit removing
the input to VR1 resulting in the correct tap position
being kept. When the unit no longer requires a
raise output, the raise output from the control will
be turned off. If a lower operation is required, then
the same steps will occur except that Aux Lower
contact will close and VR2 will be used.
As a verification scheme, a contact that closes when
the tapchanger is on the neutral position is also used
as an input to the M‑2001D control. When this Cam
operated contact closes, the control recalibrates the
tap position to neutral if needed. As an example,
if the tap position is on 1R and a lower command
is issued, the tapchanger moves to the neutral
position, and when the neutral contact closes, the
control would recalibrate the tap position if it was
not already indicating neutral. If there are multiple
neutral positions the neutral contact would need to
be closed on all the neutral positions.
5–92
Configuration – 5
M-2001D With Raise/Lower Contact KeepTrack™ Feedback Inputs
M-2001D
M-2001D VR1
Input Aux Raise contact N.O.
Switch 1 Cam
M-2001D VR2
Input Aux Lower contact N.O.
Switch 2 Cam
M-2001D
Neutral Input
Neutral contact
Switch 3 Cam
M-2001D +12 V dc
wetting output
Figure 5-22 Cam Switches Available
M-2001D Aux Relays
Aux Raise contact N.O.

M-2001D VR1
Input
120 VAC
Aux Relay 1 84R
Aux Lower contact N.O.

M-2001D VR2
Input
120 VAC
Aux Relay 2 84L
120 VAC
Aux Relay 3 Counter
M-2001D Neutral
Input
120 VAC
Aux Relay 4 Neutral contact
M-2001D +12 V dc
wetting output
Figure 5-23 84R and 84L Aux Relays Available With Wetted 120 VAC
5–93
Shaft Coupled KeepTrack™ Tap Position Beckwith Electric-INCON Shaft Coupled

Knowledge KeepTrack Method
Applicable controls and accessories for both Shaft If tap position sensors already exist such as the
Coupled KeepTrack Methods include: INCON 1292 Synchro Transmitter, the shaft coupled
KeepTrack method is still applicable. The INCON
• M‑2001D Tapchanger Controls 1292 Synchro Transmitter is an electromagnetic
• Beckwith Electric M-2025B(D) Current device that resembles a small electric motor.
Loop Interface Although various configurations of internal windings
• Beckwith Electric M-2948 Tap Position are used, they typically excite rotor winding(s), and
Sensor induce AC signal voltages in the stator windings
which can be compared in amplitude and polarity
OR
to determine the angular position of the rotor shaft.
• INCON 1292 Synchro Transmitter and
1250 Tap Position Monitor This application is traditionally used with the INCON
1250 Tap Position Monitoring device (Figure 5-25).
Beckwith Electric Shaft Coupled KeepTrack The INCON 1250 supplies the 120 VAC to the
Method INCON 1292 rotor winding(s). It then measures the
If Cam positions are not available and switches resulting signals from the stator winding to determine
can not be retrofitted, a Shaft Coupled KeepTrack the shaft's rotational position. This information is
method can be used. Most LTC tapchangers have an converted to a tap number and displayed on the front
output shaft on the tapchanger mechanism whose panel numeric readout. An analog current signal is
angular position is a mechanical analog of the also generated which corresponds to tap position.
tapchanger tap position. For these applications, the The M-2025B(D) Current Loop Interface module
following methods can be used to provide positive accepts this current analog. The scheme can be
tap position knowledge. used with all M‑2001D Load Tap Changer models.
Figure 5-24 represents a typical application of Connection of the optional M‑2025B(D) will require
the Beckwith Electric Model M-2948 Tap Position either a B‑0752 (5 pin to 6 pin) or B‑0753 (6 pin to 6
Sensor. The tap position sensor is a rotary shaft pin) interface cable. See M‑2025B(D) Specification
encoder with a built-in microprocessor that provides for details.
stepped output signals in 9 or 10 degree increments. The transformer (XFMR) and regulator (REG)
The tap position sensor is available in both clockwise external setting is for use with the Positive
and counter-clockwise rotation configurations for Knowledge (current loop) system, except REG #3,
increasing tap position. It has rotations of 0° to which is designed to be used with a Toshiba resistive
297°, 306°, 315°, 330°, 340° and 350° degrees to voltage divider. Selecting either XFMR or REG will
accommodate tapchangers with 32 taps, 9 or 10 determine which screens are disabled, and then
degrees per tap, and one to three neutral positions. selecting either #1, #2, or #3 will depend on the
Thus, the information needed from an individual output current or voltage signal from the Tap Position
transformer is: the number of degrees per tap monitor. Table 5‑1 outlines the options available for
(always 9 or 10), rotation of the Tap Position Sensor, the Tap Information screen.
and the number of neutral tap positions. The sensor The user initializes the control at a given, known,
requires a +12 V dc power input that is supplied from tap position upon installation, by following the steps
the M-2001 control via the M‑2025D. The electrical described later in this section. See "Initializing Tap
output of the M‑2948 Tap Position Sensor is a 4-20 Position when Regulate (Reg or XFMR) External or
mA current loop that is converted to a voltage signal Contact KeepTrack™ 1R1L/1N is Active" for detailed
at the input of the M-2025D Current Loop Interface steps for entering the tap position using the HMI or
with the addition of a shunt resistor. The resultant TapTalk®.
voltage signal is conditioned in the M-2025D
Current Loop Interface and routed to the M‑2001D  NOTE: To obtain accurate calibration, it is
Tapchanger Control where the voltage is converted suggested that the calibration should
to a corresponding tap position number. The scheme be performed near the neutral tap for 0
can be used with all M‑2001D Tapchanger Controls. to 1, 0 to 2 and 4 to 20 mA, and at tap
position 8 R or 8 L in the case of –1 to
If replacing an INCON Tap Position Monitoring +1 mA range.
device, the INCON 1292 Synchro Transmitter is
removed and the Beckwith Electric M-2948 Tap
Position Sensor mounts in the existing bracket and
uses the existing flexible coupling shaft.
5–94
Configuration – 5
Control Cabinet
M-2001
Series
RTU / LTC Control
SCADA HMI
Tap Position
Transformer RS-485
or FO
M-2948
mounted on shaft
Interface Cable
M-2948
Sensor
. . M-2025D
Current Loop
Interface
Rx Current
4-20 mA signal Loop Resistor
Figure 5-24 Tap Position Scheme Using Shaft Coupled KeepTrack
Control Cabinet
M-2001
Series
RTU / LTC Control
SCADA HMI
Tap Position
Transformer RS-485
or FO
INCON 1292
mounted on shaft
Interface Cable
1292
Synchro
INCON 1250
Tap Position
. . M-2025B/D
Current Loop
Monitor Interface
Rx Current
4-20 mA dc Loop Resistor
120 VAC signal signal
Figure 5-25 Tap Position Scheme Using INCON Devices
5–95
Resistor Divider KeepTrack™ Tap Position The application uses a tap position transducer
Knowledge For LTCs driven from a customer selectable AC or DC voltage
Applicable controls and accessories for Resistor source. The transducer provides a low DC voltage of
Divider KeepTrack Method include: 1 to 10 volts to the resistor string of the tapchanger
mechanism. The transducer measures the DC
• M‑2001D Tapchanger Controls voltage from the wiper on the currently active tap,
• Beckwith Electric M-2025B(D) Current comparing it to the voltage applied to the string. The
Loop Interface transducer then converts that voltage to a current
loop value of 0-1 mA or 4-20 mA for transmission
• Existing installations may use the of an analog signal. The M-2025B(D) Current Loop
Crompton Model 253-TRTU transducer or Interface module accepts this current analog signal.
the Rochester Instrument Systems Model The scaling to the correct number of taps is achieved
PR-2050 transducer (both now obsolete). by sizing the scaling resistor to obtain a 3.0 V signal
• New installations or existing installations at the maximum tap position.
with failed transducers use the Carrel
Precision Model T-R Series transducer (or Older installations may use the Crompton Model
equivalent). 253-TRTU transducer or the Rochester Instrument
Systems Model PR-2050 transducer, both of which
are now obsolete. The Carrel Precision Model T-R
The typical application (Figure 5-26) uses a resistor Series transducer (or equivalent) can be used
string mounted on a separate insulating deck within in new installations or to replace failed obsolete
the tap-changing mechanism. The resistor string transducers. The scheme can be used with all
is comprised of equal value and wattage resistors. M-2001 Series Load Tap Changer models, M-2001
Depending on manufacture and age the resistance through M‑2001D. This output can then be provided
varies from 10 to 400 ohms between each tap and to a M-2025B(D) Current Loop Interface Module and
can have either the same valued resistors between then input to a M‑2001D using the XFMR EXT #3
multiple neutral positions or direct wire connections. configuration setting.
R R
R 10 R
9 11
8 12
R 13 R
7
14
M-2001
R 6 RTU / Series
R
15 SCADA LTC Control
5
R R HMI Tap
4 16 Position
R 3 17 R
RS-485
18 or FO
2
R 1 19 R
R R
Interface Cable
AC/DC C&C T-R Series M-2025B(D)

Supply Resistance Current Loop
Transducer Interface
Scaling
4-20 mA signal Resistor
Figure 5-26 Tap Position Scheme Using Resistor Divider KeepTrack
5–96
Configuration – 5
The regulator (REG #3) setting is designed to be Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™ Tap Position
used with a Toshiba resistive voltage divider. Knowledge For LTCs
In most Load Tap Changer (LTC) applications, the
The positive knowledge by voltage divider method
M‑2001D control does not directly energize the LTC
(REG External #3) is used on regulators that have
motor. Instead it energizes interposing relays which
+/– 16 taps, a voltage divider tap position sensor,
energize the motor in the raise or lower direction.
and a separate raise/lower output. The Tap Max and
Tap Min can only be set to 16 raise and 16 lower, Some LTC Transformers however, have been
respectively, while in the REG External #3 tap mode. designed such that the control does directly energize
The voltage divider method is designed to read a the motor similar to a Line or Feeder Voltage
tap position sensor that contains 18 resistors in a Regulator. M-2001A and later Beckwith controls
voltage divider network. Each tap position will give a contain a Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack method for
specific output voltage from the tap position sensor. Line and Feeder Regulators which may be applicable
The voltage from the sensor will only be read into the to these LTC Transformers.
M‑2001D control once one (1) second has elapsed
after the counter input has toggled. The tap position ▲ CAUTION: Reverse Power Operation must
sensor will not be read again until another tap NOT be programmed for "Regulate in Reverse" if
change occurs, causing the counter input to toggle the "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" method is used.
once more. Also, an external input to the control will Incorrect operation will occur.
be read to determine if a raise or lower condition
exists. The raise/lower input and the voltage from This can be easily verified on the LTC transformer by
the divider network will be used to determine what setting the Tap Information setting on the M‑2001D
position the tap is on. Control to Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack "INTERNAL
KEEPTRACK" in the control and observing the
 NOTE: The tap position calibration must be tap position displayed in the control during both
performed at or above the 4 raise tap, automatic and manual tap operation in both the
but to obtain the best accuracy, it should Raise and Lower directions. It is very important that
be calibrated at or above the 8 raise tap. Reverse Power Operation NOT be programmed
for "Regulate in Reverse" if this method is used.
"Regulate in Reverse" was designed for Line and
Feeder Regulators which have fixed impedances.
Since LTC Transformer impedances are not
predictable, incorrect operation will occur if Reverse
Power Operation is set to "Regulate in Reverse".
5–97
Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack™ Tap Position Or, if the neutral tap position contact is connected
Knowledge For Regulators to the control, run the regulator to neutral as shown
▲ CAUTION: This feature is applicable to single- by the tap position indicator on the regulator. The
phase regulators only. control will recognize the neutral light signal and set
the tap position accordingly.
▲ CAUTION: This feature is only applicable for 16
tap ranges with neutral tap and neutral indicator. The Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack "INTERNAL
The source voltage will only be applicable with a tap KEEPTRACK" procedure recognizes tapchanges
range of 16 taps. commanded via manual, automatic or external
(SCADA) contacts. The power source for the
This feature allows the control to keep track of the manual- or SCADA-initiated tapchanges must be
present tap position. The "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" the same as the motor power source used for the
setting is selected for this method. automatic tapchangers.
8 WARNING: Do not rely on the tap position The Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack "INTERNAL
indication on the M‑2001D Tapchanger Control KEEPTRACK" position knowledge is based on the
display for neutral position when bypassing detection of a closed switch (manual or automatic),
voltage regulators. and feedback from the operation counter input.
The motor power source for the manual, automatic, The method by which Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack
or external (SCADA) initiated tap changes must be "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" is achieved is as follows:
the same as the motor power input to the control. The control includes two Zero Voltage Detection
The operations counter and neutral light circuit (ZVD) circuits. These circuits individually monitor
should be operational. The counter input and power the AC voltage across the internal raise and lower
source is required for detecting tap changes and triacs. This is done since any external raise or lower
determining direction of the tap change. Connecting contacts or manual switches have to be placed in
a regulator neutral tap position indicating contact to parallel with the triacs to run the tapchanger motor.
the control will reset the tap position to neutral each When the triacs (or any contact paralleled across
time the tap goes through the neutral position. It the triacs) closes, the voltage measure decreases to
is recommended that the indicated tap position be almost zero. When a counter input event is received
compared to the mechanical tap position indicator while the raise circuit is activated, the Motor Direct
at regular intervals, and that the indicated value be Drive KeepTrack "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" will
corrected, if necessary. increment the tap count by one. When a counter input
The tap position stored in memory is not affected by event is received while the lower circuit is activated,
a loss of power. The tap position record is checked the Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack "INTERNAL
and corrected to neutral, if necessary, with the KEEPTRACK" will decrement the tap count by one.
closure of a neutral contact (when the neutral tap If the tapchanger reaches the mechanical tap limits
position contact is connected to the controls). of operation, (16), limit switches open up the
▲ CAUTION: When the Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack appropriate circuit so the control cannot force a
"INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" tap position method is raise above +16, or force a lower below –16. This is
used, it must be calibrated for proper voltage control potentially confusing to the ZVD circuits, since they
with reverse power operation. can see zero voltage on the output with a closed
triac and also see zero voltage on the other output
If desired, the Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack due to an open limit switch. When this condition is
"INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" feature can be disabled encountered, the control can only make a best guess
in which case the screen will indicate "Disabled". of which operation really occurs and moves one step
in the direction of neutral, which should be away from
The user initializes the control at a given, known, tap the side with the open limit switch.
position upon installation, by selecting "INTERNAL
KEEPTRACK" in the Tap Information screen in the An additional feature is the neutral zero feature.
Configuration Menu and following the steps described When a regulator passes through the neutral
later in this section. See "Initializing Tap Position position, a neutral contact closes. This is most often
When Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack 'INTERNAL used to drive a neutral light that is an indicator that
KEEPTRACK' is Active" for detailed steps for the mechanism is in the neutral position, and it is
entering the tap position using the HMI or TapTalk®. safe to bridge the input and output of the regulator
because they are at the same voltage. Upon
detection of a neutral circuit closure, Motor Direct
Drive KeepTrack "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" resets
the tap position to neutral to resynchronize the circuit.
5–98
Configuration – 5
Selecting Tap Position Knowledge From The HMI  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
To select the Tap Position Knowledge method the display will automatically advance
of tapchange position monitoring, perform the the cursor to the next digit when input
following: is momentarily paused.
▲ CAUTION: When the Motor Direct Drive 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
KeepTrack™ "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" tap
position method is used, it must be calibrated If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
for proper voltage control with Reverse Power entered, the display will briefly flash a
Operation. confirmation screen and display the
following:
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) Tap Information

will advance to "CONFIGURATION". disable C
CONFIGURATION If not, re-enter a valid code.

COMM
SETP
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. select the desired "Tap Position
The unit will display the following: Knowledge" method (Table 5-1), then
Tapchanger Type will be displayed reflecting the Tap
Information selection that was entered.
 
Tap Information
as necessary, to navigate to the "Tap (See Table 5-1)
Settings" menu.
9. If "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" was
Tap Settings selected in Step 8, then proceed to
"Initializing Tap Position When Motor
  Direct Drive KeepTrack is Active" in this
section.
4. Press the Down arrow as necessary
until the "Tap Information" screen is 10. If an External Tap Position or Contact
displayed. KeepTrack™ 1R1L/1N method was
selected in Step 8, then proceed to
"Initializing Tap Position when Regulate
Tap Information (Reg or XFMR) External or Contact
disable KeepTrack is Active" in this section.

Tap Information
disable C


_
5–99
Selecting Tap Position Knowledge From TapTalk The Neutral Tap Configuration window allows the
To select Tap Position Knowledge from TapTalk®, user to program the following settings:
perform the following: 1. the full tap range of the tapchanger from
1. Select Setup/Tap Settings from the highest tap to lowest tap (–33 to +33)
TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the 2. assign the neutral tap position based on
Tap Settings dialog screen (Figure 5-6). the tapchanger mechanism
2. Select either "Disabled" or the desired 3. assign the number of neutrals based on
Tap Position Knowledge (Table 5-1) the tapchanger mechanism
from the "General" section of the dialog
screen. 4. assign a resting tap to communicate
tapchanger position when stopped on
3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a neutral
screen (Figure 5-3). 5. assign which neutral taps have an
associated closed neutral contact
"Setpoints Successfully Written to 6. Select Cam Follower as the Operation
Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5-4). Counter configuration if desired
5. If "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" was
selected, then proceed to "Initializing
Tap Position When Motor Direct Drive
KeepTrack™ is Active" in this section.
6. If an External Tap Position or Contact
KeepTrack™ 1R1L/1N method was
selected in Step 7, then proceed to
"Initializing Tap Position when Regulate
(Reg or XFMR) External or Contact
KeepTrack is Active" in this section.
Contact KeepTrack™ 1N – Additional TapTalk

Settings Screen
When Contact KeepTrack 1N is selected as the
Tap Information method, an additional Contact
KeepTrack 1N Tap Configuration window becomes
available (Figure 5-27). The Contact KeepTrack 1N
method of Tap Position knowledge can function with
any combination of taps and multiple neutrals, or
with the neutral assigned to a non-zero tap.
This feature will allow the physical neutral input to
automatically calibrate the tap position to whatever Figure 5-27 Contact KeepTrack 1N Neutral Tap
the Neutral Tap Position setting is set to. The Configuration Dialog Screen
recalibrating "neutral" input can be set for any tap
position not just neutral. Also, the Abnormal Tap
Position Alarm will function based on this setting
instead of 0. For example, if the Neutral Tap position
setting is 9R, then an Abnormal Tap Position alarm
will occur if the physical neutral input is received with
tap position not indicating 8R, 9R, or 10R.
5–100
Configuration – 5
Initializing Tap Position When Motor Direct 8. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
Drive KeepTrack "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" is 2 Access is not active or has been
Active From The HMI previously input, the following will be
▲ CAUTION: When the Motor Direct Drive displayed. Go to Step 11.
KeepTrack tap position method is used, it must be
calibrated for proper voltage control with Reverse Tap Position/Cal
Power Operation. 0 C
To initialize the control when Motor Direct Drive
KeepTrack method of tap position knowledge is
active, perform the following:
1. Initialize the control at a given, known, ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS
tap position upon installation. _
2. Enable INTERNAL KEEPTRACK
method of tap knowledge as described ■ NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
in this section. the display will automatically advance
3. Determine the actual tap position from is momentarily paused.
the external tap position indicator on the
regulator or transformer.
4. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) press the ENT pushbutton.
CONFIGURATION confirmation screen and display the
following:
COMM
SETP
Tap Position/Cal
The unit will display the following: 0 C

 
6. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, enter the tap position determined in
as necessary, to navigate to the "Tap Step 3, then press the ENT pushbutton.
Settings" menu. The following will be displayed reflecting
the tap position that was entered.
Tap Settings
Tap Position/Cal
 
X
necessary, until the "Tap Position/Cal" 12. If a neutral tap position contact is
screen is displayed. connected to the control, run the
regulator to the neutral tap position as
Tap Position/Cal indicated on the regulator.
0 The control will recognize the neutral
contact/light signal and set the tap
position accordingly.
5–101
Initializing Tap Position When Motor Direct Initializing Tap Position When Regulate (Reg
Drive KeepTrack™ "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" or XFMR) External or Contact KeepTrack™
is Active From TapTalk 1R1L/1N is Active From The HMI
▲ CAUTION: When the Motor Direct Drive Internal ▲ CAUTION: When the Regulate (Reg or XFMR)
KeepTrack tap position method is used, it must be External tap position method is used, it must be
calibrated for proper voltage control with Reverse calibrated for proper voltage control with Reverse
Power Operation. Power Operation.
To initialize the control when Motor Direct Drive To initialize the control when Regulate (Reg or
KeepTrack method of tap position knowledge is XFMR) External or Contact KeepTrack™ method
active, perform the following: of tap position knowledge is active, perform the
following:
TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the 1. Initialize the control at a given, known,
Tap Settings dialog screen (Figure 5-6). tap position upon installation.
2. Verify that "INTERNAL KEEPTRACK" is 2. Enable a Regulate External method
selected in the "General" section of the of tap knowledge as described in this
dialog screen. section.
3. Determine the actual tap position from 3. Determine the actual tap position from
the external tap position indicator on the the external tap position indicator on the
regulator or transformer. regulator or transformer.
4. Enter the tap position determined 4. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button)
in Step 3, then select "Yes" for Tap pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
Calibrate. will advance to "CONFIGURATION".
"Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation CONFIGURATION
screen (Figure 5-3). COMM
SETP
"Setpoints Successfully Written to 5. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5-4). The unit will display the following:
7. If a neutral tap position contact is Tapchanger Type

connected to the control, run the
regulator to the neutral tap position as  
indicated on the regulator.
The control will recognize the neutral as necessary, to navigate to the "Tap
contact/light signal and set the tap Settings" menu.
Tap Settings
 

necessary, until the "Tap Position/Cal"
Tap Position/Cal
0
5–102
Configuration – 5
8. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level Initializing Tap Position When Regulate (Reg
2 Access is not active or has been or XFMR) External or Contact KeepTrack™
previously input, the following will be 1R1L/1N is Active From TapTalk
displayed. Go to Step 11. ▲ CAUTION: When the Regulate (Reg or XFMR)
External tap position or Contact KeepTrack method
Tap Position/Cal is used, it must be calibrated for proper voltage
0 C control with Reverse Power Operation.
To initialize the control when Regulate (Reg or
XFMR) External or Contact KeepTrack method
of tap position knowledge is active, perform the
following:
_ 1. Select Setup/Tap Settings from the
■ NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code Tap Settings dialog screen (Figure 5-6).
the display will automatically advance 2. Verify that a "Regulate (Reg or XFMR)
the cursor to the next digit when input External" mode is selected in the
is momentarily paused. "General" section of the dialog screen.
3. Determine the actual tap position from
10. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then the external tap position indicator on the
press the ENT pushbutton. regulator or transformer.
If a valid Level 2 Access Code was 4. Enter the tap position determined in
entered, the display will briefly flash a Step 3, then select "Yes" for Tap Calibrate.
following: 5. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
Tap Position/Cal
0 C
7. If a neutral tap position contact is
11. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, regulator to the neutral tap position as
enter the tap position determined in indicated on the regulator.
Step 3, then press the ENT pushbutton.
The following will be displayed reflecting The control will recognize the neutral
the tap position that was entered. contact/light signal and set the tap
Tap Position/Cal
X
12. If a neutral tap position contact is

regulator to the neutral tap position as
indicated on the regulator.
The control will recognize the neutral
contact/light signal and set the tap
5–103
Setting Highest Tap From The HMI 6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
To set the Highest Tap setting, perform the following: Access prompt will be displayed.
■ NOTE: This setting is applicable to Reg External ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS

#1 and #2, and XFMR External #1, #2
and #3, modes of Tap Information. _

1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) the display will automatically advance
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu the cursor to the next digit when input
will advance to "CONFIGURATION". is momentarily paused.
CONFIGURATION 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then

COMM
SETP
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. entered, the display will briefly flash a
The unit will display the following: confirmation screen and display the
following:
Tapchanger Type
Highest Tap
 
16 C
as necessary, to navigate to the "Tap If not, re-enter a valid code.
Settings" menu.
Tap Settings enter the desired Highest Tap value, then
  press the ENT pushbutton. The following
will be displayed reflecting the Highest
Tap value that was entered.
4. Press the Down arrow as necessary until
the "Highest Tap" screen is displayed.
Highest Tap
Highest Tap XX
16

Highest Tap
16 C
5–104
Configuration – 5
Setting Lowest Tap From The HMI  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
To set the Lowest Tap setting, perform the following: the display will automatically advance
■ NOTE: This setting is applicable to Reg External is momentarily paused.
#1 and #2, and XFMR External #1, #2
and #3, modes of Tap Information. 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
will advance to "CONFIGURATION". confirmation screen and display the
following:
CONFIGURATION
Lowest Tap
COMM
SETP
–16 C
Tapchanger Type 8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons,

  enter the desired Lowest Tap value, then
will be displayed reflecting the Lowest
Tap value that was entered.
Settings" menu.
Lowest Tap
Tap Settings XX
 
4. Press the Down arrow as necessary until Setting Highest and Lowest Tap From TapTalk
the "Lowest Tap" screen is displayed. To set the Highest Tap and Lowest Tap setting from
TapTalk®, perform the following:
Lowest Tap
■ NOTE: This setting is applicable to Reg External
–16 #1 and #2, and XFMR External #1, #2
and #3, modes of Tap Information.
previously input, the following will be 1. Select Setup/Tap Settings from the
displayed. Go to Step 8. TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
Lowest Tap 2. Enter the desired Highest and Lowest
Tap values from the "Tap Limits" section
–16 C
of the dialog screen.
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
Access prompt will be displayed. "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
5–105
INTERTAP TIME DELAY Sequential/Non-Sequential/Blocking

The intertap time delay may be used in conjunction The control normally operates in Sequential Mode.
with sequential operation or pulsed output. The In this mode, the tapchange output is initiated after
normal operation of this delay timer occurs once a the time delay timer has timed out. The tapchange
tapchange command is initiated, when there would output will remain "on" until the control senses
normally be a continuous command (raise or lower) that the voltage has returned in-band. This permits
to run the tapchanger until the voltage has returned successive tapchanges to be made in a "sequential"
to within the band setting, there is now an intertap mode with no delay between tapchanges.
time delay initiated between tapchanges. When If a delay between successive tapchanges is
the intertap time delay is set to zero, it is disabled. desired, an intertap time delay may be used.
The intertap time delay will: The value is set from 0 to 60 seconds and will
interrupt tapchange outputs for the preset time
• Recognize that a tapchange has after a counter-contact closure or motor hold input
occurred, indicated by the counter is detected by the control's operations counter
contact input or motor hold input. input #1.
• Remove the output signal and wait for If the full initial time delay is desired, the control may
the intertap time delay, even though the
be used in the "non-sequential" mode. Enabling
voltage remains outside the designated
non-sequential mode operation is accomplished
voltage band.
by setting the Input Selection 2 setting to
• Command another tapchange after the "non-sequential". Applying a momentary contact
intertap time delay has expired, without closure to the control's Input Selection 2 will activate
regard to the basic time delay setting, non-sequential mode operation.
if the voltage remains out of band in
the same direction as the previous If the closed contact supplied to Input Selection 2 is
tapchange. maintained, instead of momentary, the initial timer
will not time out for the duration of the maintained
contact, and the outputs of the control will be
If the intertap time delay is enabled on a control
effectively blocked.
where non-sequential operation is enabled, the
intertap time delay setpoint is disregarded. The
basic time delay setting prevails for subsequent
tapchange commands in the non-sequential mode.
 NOTE: The intertap time delay is similar in

operation to non-sequential operation,
but the two should not be confused.
The intertap time delay applies a
short delay after every tapchange. The
non‑sequential operation time delay
will be the same as that of the Basic
User‑Selected Time Delay as described
in this chapter. For application with
pulsed output, see Output Pulse in this
chapter.
5–106
Configuration – 5
Setting The Intertap Delay From The HMI  NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) the display will automatically advance
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu the cursor to the next digit when input
will advance to "CONFIGURATION". is momentarily paused.
CONFIGURATION press the ENT pushbutton.
COMM
SETP If a valid Level Access Code was
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. confirmation screen and display the
The unit will display the following: following:
Tapchanger Type Intertap Delay

  0 Sec C
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, If not, re-enter a valid code.
Settings" menu.
Tap Settings desired Intertap Time Delay value (0 to
60 seconds in 1 second increments),
  then press the ENT pushbutton. The
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as Intertap Time Delay that was entered.
necessary, to navigate to the "Intertap
Delay" menu item. Intertap Delay
Intertap Delay
X Sec
0 Sec
Setting Intertap Time Delay From TapTalk
Access is not active or has been 1. Select Setup/Tap Settings from the
previously input, the following will be TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the
displayed. Go to Step 8. Tap Settings dialog screen (Figure 5-6).
2. From the General section of the Tap
Intertap Delay Settings dialog screen enter the desired
Intertap Delay (0 to 60 seconds in 1
0 Sec C
second increments).
6. If Level Access is active, the Level 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
Access prompt will be displayed. "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
ENTER LEVEL ACCESS 4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
5–107
TAP LIMITS  NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code

Tap Limits, when enabled, include "Block Raise" the cursor to the next digit when input
and "Block Lower" limits which are adjustable from is momentarily paused.
the Tap Maximum configuration point to the Tap
Minimum value in 1 step increments. 7. Enter a valid Level Access Code, then
Enabling/Disabling and Setting Tap Limits If a valid Level Access Code was
From The HMI entered, the display will briefly flash a
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) confirmation screen and display the
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu following:
Tap Limits
COMM
SETP
The unit will display the following: 8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons,
select either "Enable" or Disable", then
Tapchanger Type press the ENT pushbutton. The following
  will be displayed reflecting the selection
that was entered.
as necessary, to navigate to the "Tap Tap Limits
Settings" menu. disable or ENABLE
Tap Settings
9. Depending on what mode was selected
 
in Step 8, proceed as follows to complete
the Tap Limits setup:
necessary, until the "Tap Limits" screen • If Tap Limits were "ENABLED",
is displayed. proceed to Step 10.
• If Tap Limits were "DISABLED", no
Tap Limits further action is required.
disable 10. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as
necessary, until the "Tap Block Raise"
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level screen is displayed.
previously input, the following will be Tap Block Raise
16
Tap Limits
disable C Access is not active or has been
6. If Level Access is active, the Level displayed. Go to Step 14.
Tap Block Raise
ENTER LEVEL ACCESS
16 C
_
5–108
Configuration – 5
12. If Level Access is active, the Level  NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code
Access prompt will be displayed. the display will automatically advance
ENTER LEVEL ACCESS is momentarily paused.
_ 18. Enter a valid Level Access Code, then
the display will automatically advance If a valid Level Access Code was
the cursor to the next digit when input entered, the display will briefly flash a
is momentarily paused. confirmation screen and display the
following:
press the ENT pushbutton. Tap Block Lower
If a valid Level Access Code was –16 C
confirmation screen and display the If not, re-enter a valid code.
following:
Tap Block Raise
the desired Tap Block Lower limit
16 C (–16 to +12), then press the ENT
If not, re-enter a valid code. displayed reflecting the Tap Block Lower
limit that was selected.
Tap Block Lower
the desired Tap Block Raise limit
(–12 to +16), then press the ENT XX
displayed reflecting the Tap Block Raise
limit that was selected. Enabling/Disabling and Setting Tap Limits
From TapTalk
Tap Block Raise To Enable and Set Tap Limits from TapTalk®,
proceed as follows:
XX
15. Press the Down arrow once, the "Tap TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
Block Lower" screen is displayed. Tap Settings dialog screen (Figure 5-6).
2. Select "Enable" from the Tap Limits
Tap Block Lower section of the dialog screen.
–16 3. Enter the desired Block Raise and Block
Lower limits.
Access is not active or has been 4. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
previously input, the following will be "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
displayed. Go to Step 19. screen (Figure 5-3).
Tap Block Lower "Setpoints Successfully Written to
–16 C Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5-4).

ENTER LEVEL ACCESS

_
5–109
The Checksum is used to ensure the integrity of

5.5 Data Logging and Harmonics the record stored.
DATA LOGGING Data mask is used to mask off data that the user
does not want to retrieve.
 CAUTION: Whenever the M-2001D clock is reset
and data logging is enabled, the data log should Due to the internal structure of the Comtrade
be cleared. format, time stamping is always performed. A total
of 200,000 data records can be saved in non volatile
The Data Logging feature allows the user to record memory.
data internally into non volatile memory. The data log
is transferred in the Comtrade format. The Comtrade
format consists of two files, the configuration file Data Logging Setup From The HMI
(*.cfg) and the data file (*.dat). To setup Data Logging from the HMI, proceed as
follows:
Data logging will continue indefinitely as long as
the data Interval is set to a non-zero value. A zero 1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button)
value for the data interval will effectively disable pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu
data logging. The data log can be downloaded using will advance to "CONFIGURATION".
MODBUS® (see M-2001D Protocol document) or
DNP (using file transfer) protocol. The data can CONFIGURATION
be viewed using any Comtrade compatible viewer. COMM
SETP
Data logging interval ranges from 0 to 120 min
with an increment of 1 minute. Once data logging 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
is enabled, the control will store the data in a data The unit will display the following:
record at the selected interval. Each data record
includes the following data: Tapchanger Type
 
• Load Voltage*
• Compensated Voltage* 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton,
• Load Watts as necessary, to navigate to the "Data
Logging" menu.
• Load VA
• Load VAr Data Logging
• Load Current*  
• Power Factor
• Line Frequency necessary, until the "Data Log Select"
• Tap Position screen is displayed.
• Source Voltage*
Data Log Select
• Primary Current
11111111111111
• Operation Count
• Circulating/DVAr Current 5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
• Meter Out Voltage 2 Access is not active or has been
 NOTE: * Load Voltage, Compensated Voltage,
Load Current and Source Voltage are the Data Log Select
average, maximum and minimum value
during the data logging interval. 11111111111111 C
5–110
Configuration – 5
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 9. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as
Access prompt will be displayed. necessary, until the "Data Log Interval"
Data Log Interval
_
5 mins
the display will automatically advance 10. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter
the cursor to the next digit when input the desired "Data Log Interval" (0 to 120
is momentarily paused. minutes in 1 minute increments), then
7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then will be displayed reflecting the Data Log
press the ENT pushbutton. Interval that was entered.
entered, the display will briefly flash a Data Log Interval
confirmation screen and display the XXX mins
following:
Data Log Select Data Logging Setup From TapTalk

11111111111111 C To select the data to be logged and the interval
between logs from TapTalk®, proceed as follows:
1. Select Setup/Data Logging/Setup from
the TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display
 NOTE: The cursor will be positioned under the the Data Logging Setup dialog screen
far right hand zero which corresponds to (Figure 5-28).
LOCAL VOLTAGE. The remaining Data
Log parameter selections are displayed  NOTE: The Data Logging Setup dialog screen
by moving the cursor to the left. contains a self calculating Duration
parameter that represents the number of
Days and the specific time when the data
8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter logging buffer will be full. The number
a "1" for those Data Log parameters of parameters selected to log and the
to be activated and a "0" for those Data Log Interval are considered in this
that are to be disabled, then press the calculation.
displayed reflecting the selections that 2. Enter a Data Log Interval (0 to 120
were made. minutes).
Data Log Select "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
XXXXXXXXXXXXX screen (Figure 5-3).
Figure 5-28 Data Logging Setup Dialog Screen
5–111
HARMONICS SETUP 5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level

The Harmonics Calculation feature provides the previously input, the following will be
user with the ability to set predefined harmonic displayed. Go to Step 8.
voltage and current thresholds (individual, voltage
percent from 0 to 30%, current percent from 0
Harmonic 2
to 100%) for the selected harmonics. Current
Threshold includes a minimum Current Threshold 0000000000000000 C
setting from 0 to 200 mA. Also, a common delay
setting from 1 to 10 seconds is available. 6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
The Harmonic voltage and/or current threshold
Pickup and Dropout can be selected as inputs to ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS
trigger the Oscillograph Recorder. The Harmonic
voltage/current Pickup or the voltage/current _
Dropout can be selected to trigger the Sequence
of Events Recorder.  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
Setting the Active Harmonics Inputs to is momentarily paused.
Recorders From The HMI 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
To set the Voltage and Current Harmonics Inputs,
perform the following: If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
Harmonic 2
CONFIGURATION
0000000000000000 C
COMM
SETP
 NOTE: The cursor will be positioned under the
Tapchanger Type far right hand zero which corresponds
to Harmonic 2. The remaining Harmonic
  selections are displayed by moving the
cursor to the left.
as necessary, until "Harmonics Setup" 8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons
is displayed. enter a "1" for those Harmonics to
be activated and a "0" for those that
Harmonics Setup are to be disabled, then press the
  displayed reflecting the selections that
were made.
necessary, until the desired Harmonic V 2-16 Har. Alarm
setting screen is displayed. In this
example the "V 2-16 Har. Alarm" will be XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
setup.
V 2-16 Har. Alarm

0000000000000000
5–112
Configuration – 5
9. If additional Harmonic Inputs to the 5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level

Oscillograph and Sequence of Events 2 Access is not active or has been
recorders are to be setup, navigate to previously input, the following will be
the desired harmonic screen within the displayed. Go to Step 8.
"Harmonics Setup" menu, then repeat
Steps 4 through 8. V Alarm Threshold
10. If all Harmonic inputs have been 0 % C
selected, proceed to the Voltage Alarm
Threshold, Current Alarm Threshold and 6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
Harmonic Alarm Delay settings in this Access prompt will be displayed.
section.
Setting the Harmonic Voltage, Current _
Threshold and Minimum Current Threshold
Setting(s) From The HMI  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
 NOTE: The following sequence of steps are the cursor to the next digit when input
for setting the Voltage Alarm threshold. is momentarily paused.
The steps used to set the Current
Alarm Threshold and Minimum Current 7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access Code, then
Threshold are the same. press the ENT pushbutton.
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
will advance to "CONFIGURATION". confirmation screen and then display
the following:
CONFIGURATION
Alarm Threshold
COMM
SETP
0 % C
Tapchanger Type 8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons

  enter the desired Voltage Alarm
Threshold value from 1 to 30%, press
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbutton, the ENT pushbutton. The following will
as necessary, until "Harmonics Setup" be displayed reflecting the Voltage Alarm
is displayed. Threshold value that was entered.
Harmonics Setup Alarm Threshold

  X %

necessary, until the desired "Alarm
Threshold" setting screen is displayed.
In this example the Voltage Alarm
Threshold will be setup.
V Alarm Threshold
0 %
5–113
Setting the Harmonic Voltage and Current 6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2
Threshold Delay From The HMI Access prompt will be displayed.
To set the Voltage Threshold and Current Threshold
delay setting, perform the following: ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS
 NOTE: This delay setting applies to both the _

Voltage Threshold and the Current
Threshold.  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) the cursor to the next digit when input
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu is momentarily paused.
CONFIGURATION
COMM
SETP If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
the following:
Harmonic Alarm Delay
Tapchanger Type
1 s C
 
as necessary, until "Harmonics Setup"
is displayed. 8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons,
enter the desired Threshold Delay value
Harmonics Setup from 1 to 10 Seconds, then press the
 
displayed reflecting the Harmonic Alarm
Delay value that was entered.
necessary, until the "Harmonic Alarm
Delay" setting screen is displayed. Harmonic Alarm Delay
X s
1 s


1 s C
5–114
Configuration – 5
Setting the Active Harmonics Inputs to 3. Select the desired Current Harmonics,
the Oscillograph and Sequence of Events Current Threshold and Minimum Current
Recorders From TapTalk Threshold setting.
To select the Voltage and Current Inputs, Voltage 4. Select the desired Voltage & Current
and Current Threshold settings and the Voltage/ Delay setting.
Current Delay perform the following:
1. Select Setup/Harmonics Setup from "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
the TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display screen (Figure 5-3).
the Harmonics Setup dialog screen
(Figure 5-29).
2. Select the desired Voltage Harmonics Control" confirmation screen (Figure 5-4).
and Voltage Threshold setting.
Figure 5-29 Harmonics Setup Dialog Screen
5–115
The CBEMA counters are cleared after it reaches

5.6 CBEMA Configuration 10,000 counts, or it can also be cleared through
the TapTalk® Communication Software or the HMI.
CBEMA Functionality
Setpoints Each of the CBEMA Events has a Binary Input DNP
point associated with it that will indicate the status
Normal Voltage
of the event, as well as an Analog Input that will
CBEMA Event Enable indicate the duration in cycles of the most recent
CBEMA Event Pickup event.
CBEMA Event Dropout
CBEMA Setup From The HMI
CBEMA Minimum Duration
Setting CBEMA Normal Voltage, enabling Event
1, and entering Event 1 parameters are described
Outputs in this procedure. Enabling Events 2, 3 and 4 and
CBEMA Pickup Status entering their respective settings is similar.
CBEMA Counters 1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button)
Triggers will advance to "CONFIGURATION".
Oscillography
CONFIGURATION
Sequence of Events
COMM
SETP
Operation
There are a total of 4 Event Monitors in CBEMA The unit will display the following:
(Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers
Association). Each CBEMA event monitor has a Tapchanger Type
different minimum duration limit: Event 1, 1 – 60
cycles; Event 2, 1 – 120 cycles; Event 3, 60 – 60000  
cycles and Event 4, 1 – 60 cycles. When Pickup is
set to less than 100% it operates as a sag (under 3. Press the Right or Left Arrow pushbuttons,
voltage) function, and when it is greater than 100% as necessary until the "CBEMA Setup"
it operates as a swell (over voltage) function. Sags screen is displayed.
and swells can be accurately detected from 90 to
180 Vac. CBEMA Setup
 
The following rules need to be followed when setting
up CBEMA Setpoints: 4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as
• The Dropout should always be greater necessary, to navigate to the "Normal
than Pickup in the Sag case Voltage" screen.
• The Dropout should be fixed to 100% in Normal Voltage

the Swell case

120.0 Volts
• The Pickup cannot be 100%
5. Press the ENT pushbutton, if Level
If any of the above rules are violated, an ERROR Access is not active or has been
message will scroll across the HMI and the error previously input, the following will
can also be read using DNP. displayed. Go to Step 8.
When the load voltage is sagging or swelling greater Normal Voltage

than the pickup setting, then a pickup status will be
set after the set minimum duration, in addition to 120.0 Volts C
incrementing the counter. When the load voltage is
back to the dropout level, the status is cleared. Any
or all of the Event Pickup statuses can be used to
trigger Sequence of Events and/or Oscillography.
5–116
Configuration – 5
6. If Level Access is active, the Level 10. Press the ENT pushbutton, if Level
Access prompt will be displayed. Access is not active or has been
previously input, the following will
ENTER LEVEL ACCESS displayed.
–
Event 1
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code ENABLE C
the cursor to the next digit when input 11. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons,
is momentarily paused. select either "Enable" or Disable", then
7. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then will be displayed:
If a valid Level 2 Access code was Event1
entered, then the display will briefly flash ENABLE or disable
the following: 12. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as
necessary, to navigate to the "Event1
Normal Voltage Sag Pickup" screen.
120.0 Volts C
Event1 Sag Pickup
If not, re-enter a valid code. 70 %
8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, 13. Press the ENT pushbutton, if Level
enter the desired "Normal Voltage" Access is not active or has been
(100.0 to 130.0 Volts) value, then press previously input, the following will
the ENT pushbutton. The following displayed.
will be displayed reflecting the Normal
Voltage value that was entered.
Event1 Sag Pickup
Normal Voltage 70 % C
XXX.X Volts
 NOTE: From this point on in this procedure it enter the desired "Event 1 Sag Pickup"
is assumed that a valid Level 2 Access (50 to 130 %) value, then press the
Code has been previously entered. If ENT pushbutton. The following will be
not, a valid Level 2 Access Code will be displayed reflecting the Event 1 Sag
required to be entered as described in Pickup value that was entered.
Step 7.
Event1 Sag Pickup
9. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as XX %
necessary, to navigate to the "Event 1"
screen. 15. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as
necessary, to navigate to the "Event1
Event 1 Sag Dropout" screen.
ENABLE
Event1 Sag Dropout
95 %
5–117
16. Press the ENT pushbutton, if Level CBEMA Setup From TapTalk
Access is not active or has been 1. Select Setup/CBEMA Events/Setup
previously input, the following will from the TapTalk® toolbar, TapTalk will
displayed. display the CBEMA Sequence of Events
Setup dialog screen (Figure 5-31).
Event1 Sag Dropout
2. Enter the desired "Normal Voltage"
95 % C (100.0 to 130.0 Volts) value,
17. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, 3. From the "CBEMA Event 1" section of the
enter the desired "Event 1 Sag Dropout" dialog screen select ENABLE, then enter
(71 to 130 %) value, then press the the following CBEMA Event 1 settings;
ENT pushbutton. The following will be • Event 1 Sag Pickup (50 to 130 %)
displayed reflecting the Event 1 Sag • Event 1 Sag Dropout (71 to 130 %)
Dropout value that was entered.
• Event 1 Sag Minimum Duration
Event1 Sag Dropout (1 to 60 Cycles)
XX % 4. From the "CBEMA Event 2" section of the
dialog screen select ENABLE, then enter
18. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as the following CBEMA Event 2 settings;
necessary, to navigate to the "Event 1
Sag Minimum Duration" screen. • Event 2 Sag Pickup (50 to 130 %)
• Event 2 Sag Dropout (81 to 130 %)
Event1 Sag Min Dur • Event 2 Sag Minimum Duration

1 Cycles (17ms) (1 to 120 Cycles)
19. Press the ENT pushbutton, if Level 5. From the "CBEMA Event 3" section of the
Access is not active or has been dialog screen select ENABLE, then enter
previously input, the following will the following CBEMA Event 3 settings;
displayed. • Event 3 Sag Pickup (50 to 130 %)
• Event 3 Sag Dropout (91 to 130 %)
Event1 Sag Min Dur
• Event 3 Sag Minimum Duration
1
Cycles C (60 to 60,000 Cycles)
20. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons, 6. From the "CBEMA Event 4" section of the
enter the desired "Event 1 Sag Minimum dialog screen select ENABLE, then enter
Duration" (1 to 60 Cycles) value, then the following CBEMA Event 4 settings;
will be displayed reflecting the Event 1 • Event 4 Sag Pickup (50 to 130 %)
Sag Minimum Duration value that was • Event 4 Sag Dropout (50 to 114 %)
entered. • Event 4 Sag Minimum Duration
(1 to 60 Cycles)
Event1 Sag Min Dur

X Cycles (XXms)
5–118
Configuration – 5
7. Select Save, TapTalk ® will display  NOTE: CBEMA Event and counter status can
a "Do you want to enable CBEMA be observed on the Metering and Status
Sequence of events?" confirmation screen (Figure 3-28).
9. If CBEMA Events are Not to be used to
trigger the Sequence of Events recorder,
then select "No". TapTalk will display
a "Setpoints Successfully Written to
10. If desired, CBEMA Events can be used
to trigger the Oscillograph Recorder.
See Setup Oscillograph Recorder in
Figure 5-30 CBEMA Sequence of Event Enable Chapter 4, for additional information
Confirmation Screen regarding Oscillograph Recorder/
CBEMA trigger settings.
8. If CBEMA Events are to be used to
trigger the Sequence of Events recorder,
then select "Yes". TapTalk will display
the Sequence of Events Setup dialog
screen (Figure 4-16). See Sequence
of Events Recorder in Chapter 4,
for additional information regarding
Sequence of Events Recorder/CBEMA
trigger settings.
Figure 5-31 CBEMA Setup Dialog Screen
5–119
5–120
Setpoints – 6
6 Setpoints
6.1 Setpoints.................................................................................. 6–3
Chapter Six is designed for the person or group The selection of the M-2001D Setpoints is performed
responsible for the Setpoints of the M-2001D Digital using either the TapTalk® S-2001D Communications
Tapchanger Control. Software or the control Front Panel Human Machine
Interface (HMI). Instructions for TapTalk and the HMI
Chapter 6 consists of Setpoints, which include the
are provided where applicable.
following control settings:
TapTalk instructions assume that communications
• Setpoint Profiles
have been established with the control.
• Regulation Limits
• Voltage Reduction
• Line Drop Compensation
• Basic Time Delay
• Reverse Power Operation
• Power Flow Settings
6–1
6.1 Setpoints....................................... 6–4 Enabling/Disabling The Low Current

Block/Alarm From The HMI...................6–15
SETPOINT PROFILES.....................................6–4 Enabling/Disabling The Low Current
Editing Setpoint Profiles...........................6–4 Block/Alarm From TapTalk....................6–15
Selecting a Setpoint Profile for Editing Setting Block Raise Limit, Runback
From The HMI..........................................6–4 Deadband, Block Lower Limit, Runup
Deadband and Current Block Limit
Selecting a Setpoint Profile for Editing From TapTalk........................................6–16
From TapTalk..........................................6–4
VOLTAGE REDUCTION................................6–17
Naming Setpoint Profiles.........................6–5
Setting Voltage Reduction
Assigning a Setpoint Profile Name
Steps 1, 2 and 3 From The HMI ...........6–17
From The HMI..........................................6–5
Setting Voltage Reduction
Assigning a Setpoint Profile Name
Steps 1, 2 and 3 From TapTalk.............6–18
(TapTalk).................................................6–5
LINE DROP COMPENSATION......................6–19
REGULATION LIMITS.....................................6–7
Voltage Regulation Without LDC ..........6–19
Overvoltage Limit and Voltage Runback...6–7
Voltage Regulation With LDC................6–19
Undervoltage Block and Voltage Runup...6–7
LDC R/X.................................................6–19
Coordination with Backup Relay..............6–7
Setting....................................................6–20
Tap Position Block...................................6–8
LDC‑Z....................................................6–20
Overcurrent Block Operation...................6–8
Selecting Line Drop Compensation
Low Current Block...................................6–8
Type and Settings From The HMI .........6–21
Setting the Overvoltage Block Raise
Setting Power Flow Forward and Power
Limit From The HMI ................................6–9
Flow Reverse LDC Resistance (R) and
Setting the Voltage Runback Deadband Reactance (X) Values From The HMI....6–22
From The HMI .......................................6–10
Setting Power Flow Forward and
Setting the Undervoltage Block Lower Power Flow Reverse LDC Z Values
Limit From The HMI ..............................6–11 From The HMI........................................6–23
Setting the Voltage Runup Deadband Setting Line Drop Compensation
From The HMI .......................................6–12 From TapTalk........................................6–24
Enabling/Disabling Voltage Runup
From The HMI .......................................6–13
Setting the Current Block Limit
From The HMI .......................................6–14
6–2
Setpoints – 6
BASIC TIME DELAY......................................6–25

Setting Basic Time Delay Timer
Characteristic and Type From The HMI... 6–26
Setting Basic Time Delay Timer
Characteristic and Type From TapTalk...6–27
REVERSE POWER OPERATION.................6–28

Detecting Reverse Power......................6–28
Power Direction Bias Setpoints.............6–28
"None" Setting........................................6–28
"Forward Bias" Setting...........................6–28
"Reverse Bias" Setting...........................6–28
Reverse Power Operation Mode...........6–28
Smart Reverse Power
(Auto Determination)..............................6–30
TapTalk Reverse Power Vendor
Cross Reference....................................6–31
Setting Reverse Power Operation
and Power Direction Bias Mode
From The HMI........................................6–32
Setting Reverse Power Operation
and Power Direction Bias Mode
From TapTalk........................................6–33
POWER FLOW SETTINGS...........................6–34

Bandcenter............................................6–34
Bandwidth..............................................6–34
Setting Bandcenter and Bandwidth
From The HMI........................................6–34
Setting Bandcenter and Bandwidth
From TapTalk........................................6–35
Setting The Definite or Inverse Delay
From The HMI..........................................6–36
From TapTalk........................................6–37
6–3

6.1 Setpoints Access is not active or has been
SETPOINT PROFILES displayed. Go to Step 7.
Editing Setpoint Profiles
Profile to Edit
Editing setpoints is accomplished only when the
specific setpoint profile has been selected for Profile: 1 C
editing in TapTalk® or the HMI. The following setpoint
categories are included in the four setpoint profiles: 5. If Level Access is active, the Level
Setpoints/Limits
Setpoints/Common Settings ENTER LEVEL ACCESS
Setpoints/Power Flow Forward _
Setpoints/Power Flow Reverse
In TapTalk the setpoint profiles are identified by the display will automatically advance
Tabs on the Setpoints dialog screen Figure 6-6. the cursor to the next digit when input
In the HMI, the Limits, Common Settings, Power is momentarily paused.
Flow Forward and Power Flow Reverse submenu 6. Enter a valid Level Access Code, then
headers indicate in the upper right hand corner the press the ENT pushbutton.
setpoint profile that is being edited (Figure 6-2).
If a specific setpoint profile has not been previously entered, the display will briefly flash a
selected for editing, then the number in the submenu confirmation screen and display the
header (Figure 6-2) will indicate the Active Setpoint following:
Profile. After changing the active setpoint profile the
user must exit the Profile Settings sub header for Profile to Edit
approximately 1 minute to see the Active Setpoint
Profile: 1 C
Profile change indicated in the setpoints sub header.
▲ CAUTION: The control will immediately respond If not, re-enter a valid code.
to the new Active Setpoint Profile settings.
Selecting a Setpoint Profile for Editing From the desired Setpoint Profile for Editing,
The HMI then press the ENT pushbutton. The
1. Press the Up Arrow (SETP Hot Button) following will be displayed reflecting the
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The Setpoint Profile that was selected for
menu will advance to "SETPOINTS". Editing.
SETPOINTS Profile to Edit

CNFG
MNTR Profile: 1, 2, 3, 4

The unit will display the following: Selecting a Setpoint Profile for Editing From
TapTalk
Profile Settings Editing Setpoint Profiles from TapTalk is
  accomplished by selecting the desired Profile Tab
in the "Setup/Setpoints" dialog screen (Figure 6-6).
necessary until the unit displays the
following:
Profile to Edit
Profile: 1
6–4
Setpoints – 6
Naming Setpoint Profiles  NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code
Custom names may be assigned to Setpoint the display will automatically advance
Profiles 1 through 4. The Profile name may be up the cursor to the next digit when input
to 16 standard alphanumeric characters. Alpha is momentarily paused.
characters may be either upper or lower case. The 6. Enter a valid Level Access Code, then
user may Enter/Edit the Profile name in either the press the ENT pushbutton.
HMI or TapTalk.
Assigning a Setpoint Profile Name entered, the display will briefly flash a
From The HMI confirmation screen and display the
1. Press the Up Arrow (SETP Hot Button) following:
menu will advance to "SETPOINTS". Edit Profile 1 name
0
SETPOINTS
CNFG
MNTR If not, re-enter a valid code.
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. 7. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter
The unit will display the following: the desired Setpoint Profile Name, then
Profile Settings will be displayed reflecting the Setpoint
  Profile Name that was entered.
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as Edit Profile 1 name

necessary until the unit displays the XXXXXXX
following:
Edit Profile 1 name Assigning a Setpoint Profile Name (TapTalk)

0 To assign a Setpoint Profile Name from TapTalk®,
proceed as follows:
Access is not active or has been 1. Select Setup/Profile/Profile Names
previously input, the following will be from the TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will
displayed. Go to Step 7. display the Profile Names dialog screen
(Figure 6-1).
Edit Profile 1 name 2. Enter the desired names for Setpoint
0 Profiles 1 through 4.
5. If Level Access is active, the Level "Save to Device" confirmation screen
Access prompt will be displayed. (Figure 6-4).
ENTER LEVEL ACCESS 4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a

Figure 6-1 Setpoint Profile Names Dialog Screen
6–5
6–6
Active Setpoint MONITOR SETPOINTS CONFIGURATION COMMUNICATION UTILITIES
UTIL SETP MNTR CNFG SETP COMM CNFG UTIL COMM MNTR
Profile or Setpoint
Profile Selected
for Editing
Limits 1 Profile Settings Common Settings 1 Power Flow Forward 1 Power Flow Reverse 1
Block Raise Voltage Active Profile Reduction Step 1 % Bandcenter Fwd Bandcenter Rev
xxx.x Volts Profile :1 2.5 xxx.x Volts xxx.x Volts
Runback Deadband Profile to Edit Reduction Step 2 % Bandwidth Fwd Bandwidth Rev
x.x Volts Profile :1 5.0 x.x Volts x.x Volts
Block Lower Voltage Edit Profile 1 Name Reduction Step 3 %

xxx.x Volts "Empty" 7.5 LDC R Fwd LDC Z Fwd LDC R Rev LDC Z Rev
x Volts x Volts x Volts x Volts
Runup Deadband Repeats for LDC Selection

x.x Volts Profiles 2-4 RX LDC X Fwd LDC X Rev
x Volts x Volts
Runup Enable/Disable Timer Characteristic

disable DEFINITE Definite Delay Fwd Alternate Inverse Definite Delay Rev Alternate Inverse
xx Sec Delay Fwd xx Sec Delay Rev
Current Block Limit Timer Reset

xxx mA INTEGRATING
Rev Power Operation

BLOCK
Power Flow Reverse setting screens are only available when the
"Reverse Power Operation" selection under "Common Settings" is
Power Direction Bias
selected to either REGULATE REVERSE, REG. R MEASURED SRC,
NONE
DISTRIBUTED GENERATION, AUTO DETERMINE or AUTO
DETERMINE MEASURED. If Distributed Generation is selected, then
only LDC values can be set.
Figure 6-2 Active Setpoint Profile and Setpoint Profile to Edit Identifier
Selecting BLOCK, IGNORE or RETURN TO NEUTRAL disables the
Power Flow Reverse setting screens.
Setpoints – 6
REGULATION LIMITS The voltage runup deadband is used to assure

that the runup setting is sufficiently below the lower
Overvoltage Limit and Voltage Runback
voltage limit setting to limit hunting. It is adjustable
Setpoints are available to establish a block raise from 1.0 to 4.0 V in 0.1 V increments, and must be
limit and voltage runback. The overvoltage limit set greater than the voltage change of one single
is adjustable from 95.0 V to 135.0 V in 0.1 V tapchange, or hunting will occur. It is suggested that
increments. The overvoltage limit must be set above it be set at approximately twice the voltage change
the upper control band limit. This limit is one portion of one tap.
of the First Customer Protector to limit overvoltage
from line drop compensation action during heavy If the voltage is lower than the runup limit, as
loading. might be caused by combinations of LDC action
and load shifts or by a system disturbance without
The voltage runback level is the Block Raise setting LDC action, the control will immediately call for an
plus the Runback Deadband setting (this establishes "automatic" raise without any time delay. The raise
the First Customer Protection Level.) This deadband command will continue until the voltage is above
should not be confused with the control deadband the runup voltage limit. After this occurs, the timer
above and below the center voltage setpoint, which will reset. If the voltage is still low, normal control
is generally called the control "bandwidth". action will bring the voltage up to within the normal
control band.
The voltage runback deadband is used to assure
that the runback setting is sufficiently above the If both "Voltage Runup" and "Fast Voltage Recovery"
upper voltage limit setting to limit hunting. It is are enabled, the Fast Voltage Recovery feature has
adjustable from 1.0 to 4.0 V in 0.1 V increments, precedence over Voltage Runup operationally.
and must be set greater than the voltage change Undervoltage block can be effectively disabled
of one single tapchange, or hunting will occur. It is by setting it to 95 volts. If the voltage is below the
suggested that it be set at approximately twice the Block Lower setpoint, the control will not respond
voltage change of one tap. to further lower commands. Raise commands are
If the voltage exceeds the runback limit, as might not affected. All automatic raise/lower operations
be caused by combinations of LDC action and are blocked when the input voltage decreases to less
load shifts or by a system disturbance without than 85.0 V. Manual tapchanges can be initiated if
LDC action, the control will immediately call for an Motor Power is available.
"automatic" lower without any time delay. The lower
command will continue until the voltage is reduced Operation of the overvoltage limit, voltage runback
below the runback voltage limit. After this occurs, and undervoltage block is illustrated in Figure 6-3.
the timer will reset. If the voltage is still high, normal
control action will bring the voltage down to within Coordination with Backup Relay
the normal control band.
The M‑2001D Digital Tapchanger Control provides
Overvoltage block can be effectively disabled by the first customer protection functions. Use of a
setting it to 135 V. By setting the runback deadband backup relay, such as the M‑0329B, is recommended
to 4 V, the runback voltage becomes 139 V which since the M‑2001D (or any independent control)
effectively disables the feature. All automatic raise/ cannot be expected to be its own backup. The
lower operations are blocked when the input voltage backup relay bandcenter setting is usually set the
decreases to less than 85.0 V. Manual tapchanges same as the primary control, with the bandwidth
can be initiated if Motor Power is available. setting 1 or 2 volts greater than the primary control
bandwidth, the block raise setting 1 volt greater than
Undervoltage Block and Voltage Runup the primary control, and the deadband setting 1 or
2 volts. These settings create a runback level 1 or 2
Setpoints are also available to establish a block volts above the runback level of the primary control.
lower limit and voltage runup. This limit is adjustable
from 95.0 V to 135.0 V in 0.1 V increments. This If primary control operation is desired first, the
limit can be set to limit low customer voltage to safe block raise setting and the resulting runback level
limits and will block voltage reduction action that of the backup relay must be higher than those of the
could cause motor stalling and other undesirable primary control and the block lower setpoint must
low voltage effects. be lower than the primary control setting.
The voltage runup level is the Block Lower setting
plus the Runup Deadband setting (this establishes
the First Customer Protection Level.)
6–7
Tap Position Block Low Current Block

The Tap Position Block is disabled by setting the Tap When enabled the control determines if Load
Information screen to the Disable condition. Refer Current following a tapchange is less than 4 mA,
to the Appendix, Figure A-3. If the Tap Information coincident with Tap Delta Voltage being less than
screen is not disabled, the Tap Position block can be .4 Vac. When these conditions exist the control will
disabled by setting the Tap Limits screen to Disable. initiate an alarm and block regulation. The Delta
Voltage is measured on every tap operation once
When using the M‑2025B(D) Current Loop Interface Load Current is less than 4 mA.
Module, a one-second intertap time delay should be
used, due to the time setting of the module. Regulation will be blocked until one of the following
conditions exists:
Overcurrent Block Operation • Power to the control is cycled
• The control is switched to Manual remotely
4.0 A for 1 second. • The control is switched to Manual via the
Auto/Manual switch on the control adapter
The Current Block Limit setpoint is available to panel
block operation whenever the current exceeds the
setting. The setting is adjustable from 50 to 640 mA • The Low Current Alarm is cleared/reset
in 1 mA increments. • Load Current measurement is greater
than or equal to 4 mA for 1 second
This feature can be used to protect the tapchanger
switch during periods of excessive current. This The Alarm Reset is located on the "Programmable
feature can be effectively disabled by setting the Alarm" dialog screen and in HMI "Configuration/
blocking current to 640 mA. Programmable Alarm/CLR Low Current Block.
Overvoltage
Runback 130
Block Raise 128
T1 T1 T2
Bandcenter 120
t t t
Block Lower 114
Low Load Load grows Voltage increases further

No action on part of Raise operation blocked at due to system switching
voltage limit control t = T1 Lower command issued at
VLOCAL
t = T2
Local voltage Raised Due to LDC
Figure 6-3 Local Voltage as Function of Load Current When Using Line Drop Compensation/
Action of Overvoltage and Overvoltage Runback Control
6–8
Setpoints – 6
Setting the Overvoltage Block Raise Limit 6. If Level Access is active, the Level
From The HMI Access prompt will be displayed.
1. Press the Up Arrow (SETP Hot Button)
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The ENTER LEVEL ACCESS
menu will advance to "SETPOINTS". _
SETPOINTS  NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code
CNFG
MNTR the display will automatically advance
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. is momentarily paused.
Profile Settings
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbuttons, following:
as necessary, to navigate to the "Limits"
menu.
Block Raise Voltage
LIMITS1,2,3,4 128.0 Volts C
▲ CAUTION: Editing Setpoints in the wrong 8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter
Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate the desired Block Raise Limit (95.0 to
incorrectly. 135.0 Volts in 0.1 increments), then
4. Verify that the desired Setpoint Profile
will be displayed reflecting the Block
is indicated, then press the Down arrow
Raise Limit that was entered.
the following:
Block Raise Voltage
Block Raise Voltage
XXX.X Volts

128.0 Volts

Block Raise Voltage

128.0 Volts C
6–9
Setting the Voltage Runback Deadband From 6. If Level Access is active, the Level
The HMI Access prompt will be displayed.
CNFG
Profile Settings
menu.
Runback Deadband
Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate the desired Runback Deadband (1.0 to
incorrectly. 4.0 Volts in 0.1 increments), then press
be displayed reflecting the Runback
Deadband value that was entered.
pushbutton, as necessary, until the
following is displayed:
Runback Deadband
Runback Deadband X.X Volts
2.0 Volts

Runback Deadband
2.0 Volts C
6–10
Setpoints – 6
Setting the Undervoltage Block Lower Limit 6. If Level Access is active, the Level
CNFG
Profile Settings
menu.
Block Lower Voltage
Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate the desired Block Lower Limit (95.0 to
incorrectly. 135.0 Volts in 0.1 increments), then
will be displayed reflecting the Block
Lower Limit that was entered.
Block Lower Voltage
Block Lower Voltage
XXX.X Volts
114.0 Volts

Block Lower Voltage

114.0 Volts C
6–11
Setting the Voltage Runup Deadband From 6. If Level Access is active, the Level
The HMI Access prompt will be displayed.
CNFG
Profile Settings
menu.
Runup Deadband
Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate the desired Runup Deadband (1.0 to
incorrectly. 4.0 Volts in 0.1 increments), then press
the ENT pushbutton. The following
will be displayed reflecting the Runup
Deadband value that was entered.
Runup Deadband
Runup Deadband X.X Volts
2.0 Volts

Runup Deadband
2.0 Volts C
6–12
Setpoints – 6
Enabling/Disabling Voltage Runup 6. If Level Access is active, the Level

CNFG
Profile Settings
menu.
Runup Enable/Disable
LIMITS1,2,3,4 disable C
▲ CAUTION: Editing Setpoints in the wrong 8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select
Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate ENABLE or disable, then press the
incorrectly. ENT pushbutton. The following will be
was entered.
following is displayed: Runup Enable/Disable
ENABLE or disable
disable

disable C
6–13
Setting the Current Block Limit From The HMI  NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code
1. Press the Up Arrow (SETP Hot Button) the display will automatically advance
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The the cursor to the next digit when input
menu will advance to "SETPOINTS". is momentarily paused.
SETPOINTS press the ENT pushbutton.
CNFG
MNTR If a valid Level Access Code was
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. confirmation screen and display the
The unit will display the following: following:
Profile Settings Current Block Limit

  640 mA C
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbuttons, If not, re-enter a valid code.
menu.
8. Utilize the arrow pushbuttons, to enter
LIMITS1,2,3,4 the desired Current Block Limit (50 to
640 mA in 1 mA increments), then press
  the ENT pushbutton. The following will
be displayed reflecting the Current Block
▲ CAUTION: Editing Setpoints in the wrong Limit that was entered.
Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate
incorrectly. Current Block Limit
XXX mA
pushbutton, until the unit displays the
following:
Current Block Limit

640 mA

Current Block Limit

640 mA C

ENTER LEVEL ACCESS

_
6–14
Setpoints – 6
Enabling/Disabling The Low Current Block/  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access Code
Alarm From The HMI the display will automatically advance
 NOTE: Enabling the Low Current Block feature the cursor to the next digit when input
also enables the Low Current Block/ is momentarily paused.
Alarm.
To enable/disable the Low Current Block/Alarm from If a valid Level 2 Access Code was
the HMI, proceed as follows: entered, the display will briefly flash a
1. Press the Down Arrow (CNFG Hot Button) confirmation screen and display the
Low Current Block
COMM
SETP
The unit will display the following: 8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select
ENABLE or Disable, then press the
Tap Settings ENT pushbutton. The following will be
  displayed reflecting the selection that
was entered.
as necessary, to navigate to the Low Current Block
"Nameplate" menu. ENABLE or Disable
Nameplate
  Enabling/Disabling The Low Current Block/
Alarm From TapTalk
4. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as To set the Low Current Block/Alarm from TapTalk®,
necessary, until the "Low Current Block" proceed as follows:
 NOTE: Enabling the Low Current Block feature
also enables the Low Current Block/
Low Current Block
Alarm.
disable
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level 1. Select Setup/Configuration from the

2 Access is not active or has been TapTalk toolbar. TapTalk will display the
previously input, the following will be Configuration dialog screen (Figure 5-8).
displayed. Go to Step 8. 2. From the "Low Current Block" section
of the configuration dialog screen select
Low Current Block "Enable or Disable".
disable C 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
6. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 (Figure 6-4).
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS Control" confirmation screen (Figure 6-5).
_
6–15
Setting Block Raise Limit, Runback Deadband, 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
Block Lower Limit, Runup Deadband and "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
Current Block Limit From TapTalk screen (Figure 6-4).
1. Select Setup/Setpoints from the
Setpoints dialog screen (Figure 6-6).
 NOTE: Selecting "Undo/Refresh" only affects
the displayed profile.
▲ CAUTION: Editing Setpoints in the wrong

incorrectly.
Figure 6-4 Save to Device Confirmation Screen
2. Select the desired Setpoint Profile
(1–4), then from the "Limit and Runback" 4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
section of the Setpoints dialog screen Setpoints "Successfully Written to
enter the desired settings for the Control" confirmation screen (Figure 6-5).
following:
• Block Raise
• Runback Deadband
• Block Lower
• Runup Deadband
• Runup Enable/Disable
• Current Limit
Figure 6-5 Setpoints Successfully Written To
 NOTE: Selecting "Save" saves all profiles to the The Control Dialog Screen
control.
Figure 6-6 Setpoints Dialog Screen
6–16
Setpoints – 6
VOLTAGE REDUCTION Setting Voltage Reduction Steps 1, 2 and 3

From The HMI
The M‑2001D allows the selection of either
Standard Voltage Reduction or Smart Voltage 1. Press the Up Arrow (SETP Hot Button)
Reduction. Standard Voltage Reduction lowers the pushbutton to awaken the unit. The
menu will advance to "SETPOINTS".
Bandcenter based on a percentage of the existing
Bandcenter setting. When initiated, the control
immediately begins Lower operations to reduce SETPOINTS
the voltage until it reaches the new upper band CNFG
MNTR
edge (Bandcenter plus ½ the Bandwidth setting).
Smart Voltage Reduction will further reduce voltage 2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once.
using several methods detailed in Section 5.2, The unit will display the following:
Configuration,"Smart Voltage Reduction".
Profile Settings
The control allows three steps of voltage reduction
initiated by external dry contacts, front panel  
pushbutton or SCADA. The percentage voltage
reduction at each step is adjustable from 0 to 10% 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbuttons,
in 0.1% increments. When one or more contacts are as necessary, to navigate to the
closed, the effect is to shift the bandcenter setpoint "Common Settings" menu.
lower thus causing the control to lower the voltage.
Common Settings 1,2,3,4
In addition, voltage reduction functionality can
 
be enabled or disabled using Communication
MODBUS® and DNP protocols.
 NOTE: The following sequence of steps are for
The Voltage Reduction feature can be turned off by setting Voltage Reduction Step 1. The
the Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer (0 to 999 min). steps used to set the Voltage Reduction
A setting of zero disables the Turnoff Timer. Steps 2 and 3 are similar.
Recognize that the "effective" bandcenter may have ▲ CAUTION: Editing Setpoints in the wrong
been raised by line drop compensator action when Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate
the voltage reduction is initiated and that the resultant incorrectly.
voltage setting will be the combination of the two
effects. Note also that the undervoltage block setting 4. Verify that the desired Setpoint Profile
may limit the lowering of voltage, especially if there is indicated, then press the Down arrow
is little raising of the local voltage due to LDC action. pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate
to the "Reduction Step 1 %" (or Step 2
When first initiated, or when a subsequent step of or 3) menu item.
voltage reduction is needed, the control will respond
immediately to the voltage reduction command Reduction Step 1 %
without regard to either the intertap time delay 2.5
setting or the control time delay setting. After the
desired voltage reduction, operation will revert back 5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
to normal operation with the time delay. Refer to Access is not active or has been
Section 7.1, External Connections for contact previously input, the following will be
connections. displayed. Go to Step 8.
When Voltage Reduction is enabled the front panel Reduction Step 1 %
pushbutton, wired SCADA dry contacts, RS-485,
Fiber Optic port or Ethernet connection can be used 2.5 C
to provide stepped voltage reduction as described
earlier.
Also, the state of the "Voltage Reduction"
communications command can be saved or not
saved when power has been lost. The default setting
is "DON'T SAVE".
6–17
6. If Level Access is active, the Level Setting Voltage Reduction Steps 1, 2 and 3
Access prompt will be displayed. From TapTalk
ENTER LEVEL ACCESS TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the
_ Setpoints dialog screen (Figure 6-6).
 NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code the displayed profile.
is momentarily paused. ▲ CAUTION: Editing Setpoints in the wrong
7. Enter a valid Level Access Code, then incorrectly.
2. Select the desired Setpoint Profile, then
If a valid Level Access Code was from the "Voltage Reduction" section
entered, the display will briefly flash a of the Setpoints dialog screen enter
confirmation screen and display the the desired Voltage Reduction settings
following: (0.0 to 10.0 % in 0.1 % increments) for
the following:
Reduction Step 1 %
• Step 1
2.5 C
• Step 2
If not, re-enter a valid code. • Step 3
 NOTE: Selecting "Save" saves all profiles to the

8. Utilize the arrow pushbuttons to control.
enter the desired Voltage Reduction
(0.0 to 10.0 % in 0.1 % increments), 3. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
then press the ENT pushbutton. The "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
following will be displayed reflecting the screen (Figure 6-4).
Voltage Reduction Step #1 Value that 4. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
was entered. "Setpoints Successfully Written to
Reduction Step 1 %
X.X
6–18
Setpoints – 6
LINE DROP COMPENSATION Table 6‑1 gives the R/X ratio for various wire sizes
and typical conductor spacings.
Voltage Regulation Without LDC
When the control is just used to regulate the voltage
on the regulator low-side bus, the only input required ACSR COPPER
is voltage from a line-to-line or line-to-ground VT with MCM R/X MCM R/X
a nominal 120 Vac secondary. 795 4.0 750 6.0
477 2.5 500 4.5
Voltage Regulation With LDC
336 2.0 350 3.3
When it is desirable to regulate the voltage at some
distance from the voltage regulator, or in general to 266 1.5 250 2.4
raise the voltage during high load conditions, the AVG R/X AWG R/X
Line Drop Compensation (LDC) feature is used. 4/0 1.2 4/0 2.0
Two different LDC methods are available in the 2/0 1.0 2/0 1.5
M‑2001D Digital Tapchanger Control. A selection 2 0.5 2 0.7
in the Setpoints/General section allows the user
to select from either Resistance/Reactance (R/X) 6 .02 6 0.3
or LDC-Z. Table 6-1 Approximate Ratio of Line Resistance
The Bandcenter, Bandwidth, and Time Delay to Reactance (R/X) of Typical Distribution Circuits
functions are set the same as if LDC were not used.
By knowing the ratio of the maximum expected
LDC R/X load to the present load, the amount of voltage
compensation needed is found as shown in the
A classical approach can be used to determine the following example.
R/X settings for the LDC, however this assumes a
load center point and is usually not applicable to Example
the typical distribution feeder. For more information, Desired
contact Beckwith Electric for Application Note #17.
local voltage @ min load = 120 volts
A simpler method, which will work for most
local voltage @ max load = 124 volts
applications, is recommended. This involves looking
at the lines leaving the station and determining the Using the following assumptions:
resistance/reactance (R/X) ratio for the main line.
The resistive and reactive line drop compensation Desired Bandcenter = 120 volts
setpoints should then be entered in this same R/X Desired Bandwidth = 2 volts
ratio.
The device being controlled is 50% loaded
If the CT and VT phasing corrections have been
made to compensate for any phase angles between
measured voltage and load current, only positive
values of R and X compensation need to be used.
6–19
Setting Basically, LDC-Z compensation consists of

Start with R=0 and X=0 and increase both values designating a target bus voltage increase (line drop
using the ratio shown in the table for the feeder compensation) that correlates to the magnitude of
conductor. Keeping the R/X ratio, increase Rset and the control current rather than to the calculation of
Xset until the difference between the compensated input R & X line drop at control current magnitude
voltage and the local voltage is 2.0 volts. and angle values.
This example would let the voltage vary from 119 The setting, (VR), is the calculated load voltage drop
V at no load to 125 V at maximum load taking into (at maximum load) in the circuit or line that has
account the bandwidth. the ratio of the highest voltage drop at maximum
load condition compared to the rated CT output
With this simplified method of LDC setting, the (200 mA).
first customer’s voltage will be limited by the upper
voltage limit at the highest daily load, depending VR = 0 to 72 volts in increments of 1 volt.
on the accuracy of the daily load projection. At the Example:
same time, the furthest customer will receive the
highest voltage possible under the line and loading • Calculated voltage drop = 5 volts at load
conditions. The first customer protection can be level of 150 mA control current.
set on the control. Refer to the Regulation Limits • VR setting = 200/150 X 5 = 6.7 volts
section of this chapter. (rounded) = 7 volts
Since the daily load projections will likely have a
seasonal variation, the best balance of first customer To calculate the line drop compensation at any given
to furthest customer voltage may require seasonal control current level (I):
adjustment of the LDC settings. Note that the • V = I/200 X 7 (setting):
settings of R and X compensation are proportional
to the peak load projection and that new settings If I = 50 mA; V = 50/200 X 7 = 1.75 volts
can be scaled from the first setting obtained by the
experimental process just described. As with R & X compensation applications, the "block
raise" and "deadband" settings are used for first
LDC‑Z house protection on all circuits or lines.
The second available compensation method is  NOTE: For additional information about LDC‑Z
called Z-compensation (LDC-Z). LDC-Z must applications, contact Beckwith Electric
be selected in the control setpoint portion of the to obtain Distributech Paper 1/27/05,
menu or software and the VOLTAGE RAISE "Maximizing Automatic Reverse Power
(VR) setpoint must be set in order for this feature Operations with LTC Transformers and
to be implemented. The LDC-Z application is Regulators."
especially useful on systems where several lines
exist with different load centers where the proper
compensation is not related to any single R & X
values as set in R & X compensation.
Function Setpoint Range Increment Default Setting

Bandcenter 100.0 V to 135.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V
Bandwidth 1.0 V to 10.0 V 0.1 V 2.0 V
Definite Delay 1 second to 360 seconds 1 second 10 seconds
Inverse Delay 1 second to 360 seconds 1 second 10 seconds
LDC Resistance -72 V to +72 V 1V 0V
LDC Reactance -72 V to +72 V 1V 0V
LDC-Z 0 V to 72 V 1V 0V
Table 6-2 Line Drop Compensation Setpoint Ranges
6–20
Setpoints – 6
Selecting Line Drop Compensation Type and  NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code
Settings From The HMI the display will automatically advance
1. Press the Up Arrow (SETP Hot Button) the cursor to the next digit when input
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The is momentarily paused.
SETPOINTS
CNFG
MNTR entered, the display will briefly flash a
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. following:
LDC Selection
Profile Settings
RX C
 
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbuttons,
"Common Settings" menu. 8. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow pushbuttons,
select the desired type of Line Drop
Common Settings 1,2,3,4 Compensation (RX or Z), then press
  be displayed reflecting the Line Drop
Compensation Type that was selected.
Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate LDC Selection
incorrectly. XX
is indicated, then press the Down arrow 9. Depending on the type of Line Drop
pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate Compensation that was selected in
to the "LDC Selection" menu item. Step 8, proceed as follows to complete
the Line Drop Compensation setup:
LDC Selection • If "RX" Line Drop Compensation was
RX selected, proceed to "Setting LDC
Resistance (R) and Reactance (X)
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level Values" in this chapter.
Access is not active or has been • If "Z" Line Drop Compensation was
previously input, the following will be selected, proceed to "Setting LDC-Z"
displayed. Go to Step 8. in this chapter.
LDC Selection
RX C

ENTER LEVEL ACCESS

_
6–21
Setting Power Flow Forward and Power Flow 6. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
Reverse LDC Resistance (R) and Reactance Access is not active or has been
(X) Values From The HMI previously input, the following will be
 NOTE: The steps necessary to set the Power displayed. Go to Step 9.
Flow Forward LDC Resistance (R) and
Reactance (X) values are described LDC R Fwd
here. The steps to set the Power Flow 0
Volts C
Reverse LDC Resistance (R) and
Reactance (X) are similar.
1. Press the Up Arrow (SETP Hot Button) Access prompt will be displayed.
menu will advance to "SETPOINTS". ENTER LEVEL ACCESS
_
SETPOINTS
CNFG
MNTR  NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. the cursor to the next digit when input
The unit will display the following: is momentarily paused.
Profile Settings press the ENT pushbutton.
  If a valid Level Access Code was
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbuttons, confirmation screen and display the
as necessary, to navigate to the following:
"Common Settings" menu.
LDC R Fwd
Common Settings 1,2,3,4
0
Volts C
 
Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate  NOTE: The double directional arrows in the
incorrectly. display indicate that by pressing Right or
Left arrow pushbuttons the display will
jump to the LDC Selection display in the
is indicated, then press the Right or
Common Settings menu. Pressing any
Left arrow pushbutton, as necessary, to
other pushbutton except ENT will then
navigate to the "Power Flow Forward"
jump back to the LDC R(X) Fwd(Rev)
menu.
display.
Power Flow Fwd 9. Utilize the arrow pushbuttons to enter
  the desired LDC R value (–72 to +72 in
1 Volt increments), then press the ENT
pushbutton. The display will advance to
the LDC X Fwd display.
necessary, to navigate to the "LDC R
Fwd" (or LDC R Rev) menu item.
LDC X Fwd
LDC R Fwd 
 0 Volts
0 Volts
6–22
Setpoints – 6
10. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level Setting Power Flow Forward and Power Flow
Access is not active or has been Reverse LDC Z Values From The HMI
previously input, the following will be  NOTE: The steps necessary to set the Power
displayed. Go to Step 13. Flow Forward LDC Z value are described
here. The steps to set the Power Flow
LDC X Fwd Reverse LDC Z value are similar.
0
Volts C 1. Press the Up Arrow (SETP Hot Button)
11. If Level Access is active, the Level menu will advance to "SETPOINTS".
SETPOINTS
ENTER LEVEL ACCESS
CNFG
MNTR
_
 NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code The unit will display the following:
the cursor to the next digit when input Profile Settings
 
press the ENT pushbutton. 3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbuttons,
If a valid Level Access Code was as necessary, to navigate to the
entered, the display will briefly flash a "Common Settings" menu.
the following: Common Settings 1,2,3,4
 
LDC X Fwd
0
Volts C ▲ CAUTION: Editing Setpoints in the wrong
If not, re-enter a valid code. incorrectly.
 NOTE: The double directional arrows in the
display indicate that by pressing Right or
Left arrow pushbuttons the display will
jump to the LDC Selection display in the
menu.
Common Settings menu. Pressing any
other pushbutton except ENT will then
jump back to the LDC R(X) Fwd(Rev) Power Flow Fwd
display.  
13. Utilize the arrow pushbuttons to enter
the desired LDC X value (–72 to +72 in
necessary, to navigate to the "LDC Z
1 Volt increments), then press the ENT
Fwd" (or LDC Z Rev) menu item.
pushbutton. The display will advance to
the LDC R Fwd display.
LDC Z Fwd 

LDC R Fwd 
 0 Volts
0 Volts
6–23
6. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level Setting Line Drop Compensation From
Access is not active or has been TapTalk
previously input, the following will be 1. Select Setup/Setpoints from the
displayed. Go to Step 9. TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the
LDC Z Fwd
0
Volts C the displayed profile.
7. If Level Access is active, the Level ▲ CAUTION: Editing Setpoints in the wrong
Access prompt will be displayed. Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate
incorrectly.
ENTER LEVEL ACCESS
_ 2. Select the desired Setpoint Profile,
then from the "General" section of the
Setpoints dialog screen, select the
 NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code,
desired type of Line Drop Compensation
(R, X or Z).
is momentarily paused. 3. From the "Forward Power" section of
the Setpoints dialog screen, enter the
8. Enter a valid Level Access Code, then desired LDC R, X or Z for Forward Power
press the ENT pushbutton. settings for the following:
If a valid Level Access Code was • R, X (–72 to +72 in 1 Volt increments)
confirmation screen and display the • Z (0 to 72 in 1 Volt increments)
following: If Reverse Power Flow settings are
required, enter the desired LDC R, X or
LDC Z Fwd Z values in the "Reverse Power" section
0
Volts C of the Setpoints dialog screen.
If not, re-enter a valid code. control.
 NOTE: The double directional arrows in the "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
display indicate that by pressing Right screen (Figure 6-4).
or Left arrow pushbuttons the display
will jump to the LDC Selection display 5. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
in the Common Settings menu. Pressing "Setpoints Successfully Written to
any other pushbutton except ENT will Control" confirmation screen (Figure 6-5).
then jump back to the LDC Z Fwd(Rev)
display.
9. Utilize the arrow pushbuttons to enter
the desired LDC Z value (0 to 72 in
1 Volt increments), then press the
displayed reflecting the LDC-Z value that
was selected.
LDC Z Fwd 

X Volts
6–24
Setpoints – 6
BASIC TIME DELAY Inverse Time Example

The Basic Time Delay setting is required to inhibit Bandcenter 120 V
the tapchanger from unnecessary operations on
Bandwidth 3 V
temporary voltage excursions and is commonly
set at 30 to 60 seconds. The timer includes Inverse Time Delay Setting 120 s
two selectable elements "Definite/Inverse" and
"Integrating/Instant Reset". ∆V = (Bandwidth/2) = 1.5 V
Vin = 123 V
The control will only respond to an out-of-band
voltage excursion after the Basic Time Delay has Voltage deviation in multiples of ∆V
timed out. The Basic Time Delay can be set as an
= [Vin – Bandcenter]/∆V
integrating timer or an instantaneous reset timer
upon the voltage return to an in-band condition. = (123 – 120)/1.5
As an integrating timer, it increments during time
=2
out-of-band and decrements during time in-band,
but not below zero. Time delay from Figure 6-7
The Basic Time Delay can be set to either a Definite = 50% of Inverse Time Delay setting
or Inverse delay. Both types of delay will work in = 60 sec
Forward or Reverse Power Flow. The inverse time
delay will follow the curve in Figure 6-7, Inverse
Time Delay Curve.

Figure 6-7 Inverse Time Delay Curve
6–25
Setting Basic Time Delay Timer Characteristic  NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code
and Type From The HMI the display will automatically advance
1. Press the Up Arrow (SETP Hot Button) the cursor to the next digit when input
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The is momentarily paused.
SETPOINTS
CNFG
MNTR entered, the display will briefly flash a
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. following:
Timer Characteristic
Profile Settings
DEFINITE C
 
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbuttons,
"Common Settings" menu. 8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons,
select the desired Timer Characteristic
Common Settings 1,2,3,4 (DEFINITE or INVERSE), then press
the ENT pushbutton. The following
  will be displayed reflecting the Timer
Characteristic that was selected.
Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate Timer Characteristic
incorrectly. DEFINITE or INVERSE
pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to 9. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as
the "Timer Characteristic" menu item. necessary, to navigate to the "Timer
Reset" menu item.
Timer Reset
DEFINITE
INTEGRATING
Access is not active or has been 10. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
previously input, the following will be Access is not active or has been
displayed. Go to Step 8. previously input, the following will be
Timer Reset
DEFINITE C
INTEGRATING C
Access prompt will be displayed. 11. If Level Access is active, the Level
ENTER LEVEL ACCESS
ENTER LEVEL ACCESS
_
_
6–26
Setpoints – 6
 NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code, Setting Basic Time Delay Timer Characteristic
the display will automatically advance and Type From TapTalk
the cursor to the next digit when input 1. Select Setup/Setpoints from the
is momentarily paused. TapTalk® toolbar. TapTalk will display the
press the ENT pushbutton.  NOTE: Selecting "Undo/Refresh" only affects
confirmation screen and display the ▲ CAUTION: Editing Setpoints in the wrong
following: Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate
incorrectly.
Timer Reset
2. Select the desired Setpoint Profile,
INTEGRATING C then from the "General" section of
the Setpoints dialog screen select the
If not, re-enter a valid code. desired User Selectable Time Delay type
(Definite or Inverse).
13. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, select 3. From the "General" section of the
the desired Timer Reset (INTEGRATING Setpoints dialog screen select the
or INSTANT RESET), then press the desired User Selectable Time Delay
ENT pushbutton. The following will be timer type (Integrating or Instant Reset).
displayed reflecting the Timer Reset type  NOTE: Selecting "Save" saves all profiles to the
that was selected. control.
Timer Reset 4. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
INTEGRATING or INSTANT RESET
6–27
REVERSE POWER OPERATION Power Direction Bias Setpoints

The importance of the correct operation of the Power Direction Bias includes three settings to
counter extends beyond mere counting operations. determine how the control will switch between
One additional feature of the control is distinct forward and reverse power operation. The three
"reverse power" operations depending on power settings are None, Forward Bias, and Reverse
flow direction. In addition to normal configurations of Bias.
"block" or "ignore" during automatic reverse power "None" Setting
detection, the control may be configured to "regulate
in reverse direction" or "return to the neutral position." When the Power Direction Bias function is set to
The control includes a power direction function for "None", the control applies an 8 mA hysteresis
detecting the reversal of power flow in the regulator band with a bandcenter of 0 load current (+4 mA
or transformer. The active power direction is based to –4 mA) to switch between forward and reverse
on the flow of real power and is not confused by power. The control will switch from forward power
reactive power flow in either direction. to reverse power when the load current exceeds
–4 mA (reverse direction). The control will switch
The directional operation of the control will be from reverse power to forward power when the load
reversed whenever the power flow reverses to as current exceeds +4 mA (forward direction).
little as 2% (4 mA) of the nominal 200 mA rating of
the control. For example, to change from a normal "Forward Bias" Setting
forward power to reverse operation, 4 mA of the real When the Power Direction Bias function is set
component of the load current must be detected to "Forward Bias", the control applies a 0 mA to
in the reverse direction. To then revert back to the –4 mA hysteresis band to switch between forward
normal forward direction operation, 4 mA of the real and reverse power. The control will switch from
component must be detected in the forward direction. reverse power to forward power when load current
This establishes an 8 mA "hysteresis" effect. is > 0 mA (forward direction). The control will switch
from forward power to reverse power when the load
Additionally, the control can be "biased" in either current exceeds –4 mA (reverse direction).
the forward or reverse direction depending on
circuit or system configuration. This essentially "Reverse Bias" Setting
removes the 2% requirement from the change to When the Power Direction Bias function is set
the biased direction. For example, a control biased to "Reverse Bias", the control applies a 0 mA to
in the forward direction will change to the reverse +4 mA hysteresis band to switch between forward
direction as described above. It will require only that and reverse power. The control will switch from
the power flow be in the forward direction to change forward power to reverse power when load current
back to forward operation. This biasing reduces the is < 0 mA (reverse direction). The control will switch
"hysteresis" effect to 4 mA from the original 8 mA. from reverse power to forward power when the load
current exceeds +4 mA (forward direction).
In order for the "regulate in reverse direction" or
"return to the neutral position" to implement properly,
two prerequisites are required. The first is Tap Reverse Power Operation Mode
Position Knowledge. Without knowledge of the tap Upon detection of power reversal, after a 5 second
position it would be impossible for the control to run delay, the control will operate in the selected mode.
the tapchanger to the neutral position. The second is The operating mode is selected from the following
source side voltage. Without knowledge of the source options:
side voltage, it would be impossible to regulate it.
Block – Inhibits automatic tapchange operation.
This locks the tapchanger on the tap position in
Detecting Reverse Power use at the time reverse power flow is detected. It is
Reverse power flow exists whenever the real the recommended setting for independent power
component of the load current changes direction producers or in situations when reverse power flow
from forward and remains until another reversal is not expected. The control will revert to normal
to forward power flow occurs. The control reliably operation when forward power flow resumes.
determines power direction with as little as 2% of
the real component of the nominal 200 mA load
current (4.0 mA). A LED on the front panel will
illuminate whenever the control senses a reverse
power condition.
6–28
Setpoints – 6
Regulate Forward (Ignore) – The control will take Return to Neutral – To use this feature, a counter
no different action than in the forward direction. It input must be provided, and KeepTrack™ tap
essentially does not use the power direction in the information modes must be enabled.
control decisions. This is the same as a control
which does not have power direction knowledge. The Return to Neutral feature will cause the tap
position to be driven to neutral when reverse power
Regulate Reverse and Regulate Reverse is detected. Tap position will be driven to neutral
Measured –The control will detect reverse power regardless of the voltage or currents present at the
flow and regulate according to reverse power control. Once neutral is reached, the tap position
settings as selected in the Setpoint Menu. With will remain unchanged as long as reverse power is
tap position knowledge, the control calculates the present. Normal operation will resume when forward
source-side potential without the use of a source power is detected.
side VT. This feature is designed for use with feeder
voltage regulators which continue to operate in This mode is intended as a safe response to
a radial mode after system switching causes the a power reversal on a system which can have
power flow reversal. conflicting situations. As described earlier, a radially
operating system with reverse power should be
For Regulate Reverse the source voltage is set to "Regulate Reverse Measured" However, if
calculated by knowing the local voltage, the load a DG causes a power reversal, the proper setting
current, and the tap position using a presumed is usually "Ignore". In an application where both
regulator impedance. That impedance is a function conditions are possible and it is not possible for the
of the tap position. The calculated source voltage is control to determine the cause of power reversal,
only valid with a 5/8 % step-voltage regulator. the proper setting of "Return to Neutral" is advised.
When Reverse power is detected and the Operation
Mode is in "Regulate Reverse Measured", the Distributed Generation – Distributed Generation
control will energize an internal contact that will allows alternate LDC R and X values to be applied
switch the input to the VT from Load side to Source to the control when reverse power is detected. The
side. After a 4 cycle delay, the source side voltage factory setting is BLOCK. This mode is intended for
will be measured, the load voltage at this instant will use on distribution systems that have the possibility
be displayed as zero. In forward power direction, of power reversal because of distributed generation
the control will switch the input back to the load (DG) on the feeders. In these applications, the DG
side voltage. usually does not have the capacity to control the
voltage with the more powerful system intact.
With the control recognizing reverse power flow, the
following occurs: The condition required for DG to control the voltage
is the generation and transmission of large amounts
• The REV PWR LED is illuminated. of VArs through the line impedance back towards
• Reverse power setpoints are used. the system source. Usually two items prohibit this
action:
• Source voltage is calculated in case
of Regulate Reverse and measured in • The ability of the DG to generate those
case of Regulate Reverse Measured and amounts of VArs.
motor output commands are reversed. For • The contractual obligations enforced by
example, when the voltage is high, the many utilities that the DG only affect KWs
control raises the tap thereby lowering on the system.
the voltage and a lower is indicated on
the front panel LEDs.
6–29
Smart Reverse Power (Auto Determination) c. If Tap Delta Voltage is greater than
Due to the increased use and larger capacities of 0.4 Vac on the second tap operation,
Distributed Generation, it is possible for a regulator the control does not increment
to see a reverse power condition requiring more than the internal counter, and stays in
one reverse power mode depending on the cause Distributed Generation Mode. The
control will then measure Tap Delta
of the reverse power condition; either Distributed
Voltage on the next tap. If that third
Generation mode or Regulate In Reverse/Regulate
tap has a Tap Delta Voltage greater
in Reverse Measured. The M‑2001D provides two than 0.4 Vac, then the control
new reverse power modes, "Auto Determination" remains in Distributed Generation
and "Auto Determination Measured" which allow the Mode and the internal counter is
control to intelligently choose which reverse power cleared. If the third tap has a Tap
mode applies at the time reverse power is sensed. Delta Voltage less than or equal to
0.4 Vac, the condition meets the
Auto Determination and Auto Determination
requirements of 2b above and the
Measured – This feature performs the following control will respond accordingly.
sequence when reverse power is detected:
3. Once the control has determined which
1. Distributed Generation Mode will be Reverse Power mode to apply using the
applied initially. method described above, it will operate
in that mode as long as Reverse Power
2. On the next tap operation, Load Voltage is detected.
will be measured before and one second
after the tap (defined as 1 second after
the operation counter has incremented
either due to a counter input or motor
hold). The absolute magnitude value of
this difference is stored internally as the
Tap Delta Voltage.
a. If the Tap Delta Voltage is greater
than 0.4 Vac, the control stays in
Distributed Generation Mode and
will behave normally in this mode
with no further measurements of
Load Voltage needed.
b. If the Tap Delta Voltage is less than
or equal to 0.4 Vac, the control
increments an internal counter
designed to keep track of how many
times the Tap Delta Voltage is less
than 0.4 Vac. The next tap operation
will again measure Load Voltage in
the same manner. If the control sees
two consecutive Tap Delta Voltage
measurements less than or equal
to 0.4 Vac, the control changes
from Distributed Generation Mode
to either Regulate Reverse if "Auto
Determination" has been selected,
or Regulate Reverse Measured if
"Auto Determination Measured" has
been selected.
6–30
Setpoints – 6
TapTalk Reverse Power Vendor Cross

Reference
The Reverse Power section of the TapTalk Setpoints
screen also contains a link which displays the
"Reverse Power Vendor Cross Reference" table
showing Cooper/Siemens reverse power names
and their Beckwith Electric equivalents (Figure 6-8).
Figure 6-8 TapTalk Reverse Power Vendor Cross Reference Table
6–31
Setting Reverse Power Operation and Power 6. If Level Access is active, the Level
Direction Bias Mode From The HMI Access prompt will be displayed.
SETPOINTS  NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code,
CNFG
Profile Settings
"Common Settings" menu.
Rev Power Operation
Common Settings 1,2,3,4 BLOCK C
▲ CAUTION: Editing Setpoints in the wrong 8. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select
Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate the desired Reverse Power Operation
incorrectly. mode:
4. Verify that the desired Setpoint Profile • BLOCK
is indicated, then press the Down arrow • IGNORE
pushbutton, as necessary, to navigate to
the "Rev Power Operation" menu item. • REGULATE REVERSE
• RETURN TO NEUTRAL
Rev Power Operation • REG. R MEASURED SRCC
BLOCK • DG Mode
• AUTO DETERMINE
5. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level • AUTO DETERMINE M
previously input, the following will be Press the ENT pushbutton. The following
displayed. Go to Step 8. will be displayed reflecting the Reverse
Power Operation mode type that was
Rev Power Operation selected.
BLOCK C
Rev Power Operation
XXXXX
6–32
Setpoints – 6
9. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as Setting Reverse Power Operation and Power
necessary, to navigate to the "Power Direction Bias Mode From TapTalk
Direction Bias" menu item. 1. Select Setup/Setpoints from the
Power Direction Bias Setpoints dialog screen (Figure 6-6).
NONE  NOTE: Selecting "Undo/Refresh" only affects
Access is not active or has been ▲ CAUTION: Editing Setpoints in the wrong
previously input, the following will be Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate
incorrectly.
Power Direction Bias 2. Select the desired Setpoint Profile,
NONE C then from the "General" section of
the Setpoints dialog screen select the
desired Power Direction Bias mode
(None, Forward or Reverse).
3. From the "Reverse Power" section of
ENTER LEVEL ACCESS the Setpoints dialog screen select the
desired Reverse Power Operation mode:
_
• Block
 NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code, • Regulate Forward (Ignore)
the display will automatically advance • Regulate Reverse
is momentarily paused. • Return to Neutral
• Regulate Reverse (Measured)
• Distributed Generation
• Auto Determination
• Auto Determination (Measured)
confirmation screen and display the  NOTE: Selecting "Save" saves all profiles to the
following: control.
Power Direction Bias 4. Select Save. TapTalk will display a

NONE C screen (Figure 6-4).
If not, re-enter a valid code. 5. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
13. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons select
the desired Power Direction Bias mode
(NONE, FORWARD or REVERSE), then
will be displayed reflecting the Power
Direction Bias mode that was selected.

NONE, FWD BIAS or REV BIAS
6–33
POWER FLOW SETTINGS  NOTE: The steps necessary to set Bandcenter

Forward are described here. The steps
Bandcenter
to set Bandcenter Reverse are similar.
The center of the voltage band is adjustable from
100.0 to 135.0 Vac in 0.1 volt increments (for 5. Press the Down arrow pushbutton,
example, 120.0 Vac). as necessary, to navigate to the
"Bandcenter Fwd" menu item.
Bandwidth
Bandcenter Fwd
The regulator uses discrete steps and the
Bandwidth must have a width that allows at least
120.0 Volts
one tapchange position where the control remains
satisfied. To minimize excessive operations on the 6. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
regulator, this bandwidth is usually set to include Access is not active or has been
two or three in-band tap operation positions.
The range is settable from 1.0 to 10.0 volts in 0.1 volt
increments, and 2 volts minimum is recommended. Bandcenter Fwd
This setting is the total bandwidth. 120.0 Volts C
Setting Bandcenter and Bandwidth From The 7. If Level Access is active, the Level
HMI Access prompt will be displayed.
SETPOINTS  NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code,

CNFG
The unit will display the following: 8. Enter a valid Level Access Code, then
Profile Settings
"Common Settings" menu. Bandcenter Fwd
Common Settings 1,2,3,4 120.0 Volts C
▲ CAUTION: Editing Setpoints in the wrong 9. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons enter the
Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate desired Bandcenter Fwd value (100.0 to
incorrectly. 135.0 in 0.1 Volt increments), then press
4. Verify that the desired Setpoint Profile be displayed reflecting the Bandcenter
is indicated, then press the Right or Fwd value that was entered.
menu item. Bandcenter Fwd
XXX.X Volts
Power Flow Fwd
 
6–34
Setpoints – 6
10. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as Setting Bandcenter and Bandwidth From
necessary, to navigate to the "Bandwidth TapTalk
Fwd" menu item. 1. Select Setup/Setpoints from the
Bandwidth Fwd Setpoints dialog screen (Figure 6-6).

2.0 Volts  NOTE: Selecting "Undo/Refresh" only affects
Access is not active or has been ▲ CAUTION: Editing Setpoints in the wrong
previously input, the following will be Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate
incorrectly.
Bandwidth Fwd 2. Select the desired Setpoint Profile, then
2.0 Volts C from the "Forward Power" or "Reverse
Power" section of the Setpoints dialog
screen enter the desired Bandcenter
value (100.0 to 135.0 in 0.1 Volt
increments).
ENTER LEVEL ACCESS 3. From the "Forward Power" or "Reverse
Power" section of the Setpoints dialog
_ screen enter the desired Bandwidth
value (1.0 to 10.0 Volts in 0.1 Volt
 NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code, increments).
the cursor to the next digit when input  NOTE: Selecting "Save" saves all profiles to the
is momentarily paused. control.
13. Enter a valid Level Access Code, then 4. Select Save. TapTalk will display a
press the ENT pushbutton. "Confirm Writing to Device" confirmation
entered, the display will briefly flash a 5. Select OK. TapTalk will display a
confirmation screen and display the "Setpoints Successfully Written to
following: Control" confirmation screen (Figure 6-5).
Bandwidth Fwd
2.0 Volts C

the desired Bandwidth Fwd value (1.0
to 10.0 Volts in 0.1 Volt increments),
Bandwidth Fwd value that was entered.
Bandwidth Fwd
X.X Volts
6–35
Setting The Definite or Inverse Delay From The HMI 6. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level
1. Press the Up Arrow (SETP Hot Button) Access is not active or has been
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The previously input, the following will be
menu will advance to "SETPOINTS". displayed. Go to Step 9.
SETPOINTS Definite Delay Fwd

CNFG
MNTR 30 Sec C
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. 7. If Level Access is active, the Level
The unit will display the following: Access prompt will be displayed.
Profile Settings ENTER LEVEL ACCESS

  _
3. Press the Right or Left arrow pushbuttons,  NOTE: When entering the Level Access Code,
as necessary, to navigate to the the display will automatically advance
"Common Settings" menu. the cursor to the next digit when input
Common Settings 1,2,3,4 8. Enter a valid Level Access Code, then
  press the ENT pushbutton.
If a valid Level Access Code was entered,
▲ CAUTION: Editing Setpoints in the wrong the display will briefly flash a confirmation
Setpoint Profile can cause the control to operate screen and display the following:
incorrectly.
Definite Delay Fwd
30 Sec C
navigate to the "Power Flow Forward" If not, re-enter a valid code.
menu item.
 NOTE: The double directional arrows in the
Power Flow Fwd display indicate that by pressing Right
  or Left arrow pushbuttons the display
will jump to the Timer Characteristic
Selection display in the Common Settings
 NOTE: The steps necessary to set Power Flow,
menu. Pressing any other pushbutton
Forward Definite (Inverse) Delay are
except ENT will then jump back to the
described here. The steps to set Power
Definite Delay Fwd (Rev) display.
Flow Reverse Definite (Inverse) Delay
are similar. 9. Utilizing the arrow pushbuttons, enter
the desired Definite (Inverse) Delay
Fwd value (1 to 360 Seconds in 1
necessary, to navigate to the "Definite
Second increments), then press the
(Inverse) Delay Fwd" menu item.
displayed reflecting the Definite (Inverse)
Definite Delay Fwd 
 Delay Fwd value that was entered.
30 Sec
Definite Delay Fwd 

xxx Sec
6–36
Setpoints – 6

From TapTalk

incorrectly.
2. Select the desired Setpoint Profile,
then from the "Forward Power" and/or
"Reverse Power" section of the Setpoints
dialog screen enter the desired Definite
(Inverse) Delay Fwd or Rev value (1 to
360 Seconds in 1 Second increments).
control.
6–37
6–38
Installation– 7
7 Installation
7.0 Installation................................................................................ 7–1
7.1 External Connections............................................................... 7–1
7.2 Non-Sequential Operation........................................................ 7–6
7.3 Multi-Step Voltage Reduction................................................... 7–9
7.4 LTC Backup Control................................................................. 7–9
7.5 Communication Ports............................................................... 7–9
7.6 Communication Cables.......................................................... 7–11
7.7 Grounding.............................................................................. 7–12
7.8 Typical LTC Connection.......................................................... 7–12
7.9 Typical Regulator Connection................................................ 7–12
7.10 Control Power Backup Input Connection................................ 7–15
7.11 TapTalk® S-2001D Communications Software Installation...... 7–18
7.12 Activating Initial Local Communications................................. 7–18
7.0 Installation 7.1 External Connections
An adapter panel or a M-2050 Surface Mounting Kit Available connectors include:

must be used with the M‑2001D Tapchanger Control.
Each panel adapts the control as a transformer or • One RS‑485
regulator control replacement and provides the • One Fiber Optic connection
external connections necessary for operation via • One RJ-45 (optional)
terminal blocks on the rear of the adapter panel.
• One 24-pin blue connector
In lieu of using one of the M‑2000 series adapter • One RS-232 DE9S connectors
panels to mount the control, the M‑2050 Surface
Mounting Kit permits surface mounting. The kit • In-line, 6-pin connector for the M‑2025B(D)
consists of two right angle mounting brackets Current Loop Module
which bolt to the rear top and bottom of the control. • Control Power Backup Input option
All necessary hardware is included in the kit. Also • Source Voltage Input
included is a 24-pin, in-line female connector with
six-foot pigtails on each pin to facilitate custom • 1 Auxiliary Output
connection of the control in original equipment • 3 Auxiliary Inputs
manufacturers’ applications.
See Figure 7‑1 for the locations of these external
connectors.
7–1
Control Power
Top View Backup Input
Ethernet over
Fiber Optic
Fiber Optic (optional)
V-pin RS-485
Connector
XT
(optional)
Fiber Optic
ST Connector
RJ-45 Ethernet RS-232 DE9S
over Copper Front
(optional)
In-Line, 6-Pin
Connector for the
M-2025B(D)
Current Loop Module
24-Pin Blue Connector

for M-2000 Series Source Voltage Input
Bottom View One Aux Output
Adapter Panels or
Three Aux Inputs
direct connection
Figure 7-1 External Connection Locations
7–2
Installation– 7
The external connections for the control are made Pin 2 Load Current Return
to the 24-pin connector, P2. For example, if external This is the non-polarity input to the load current
dry contacts are being used to control the voltage measuring transformer. The companion polarity
reduction Step #1 function, connections for these input is Pin 4. The line current transformer input is
contacts may be made between Pin 10 and Pin isolated from other pins.
18 as shown in Figure 7‑2. The dry contact inputs
for non-sequential input, voltage reduction, motor
seal-in, counter input and neutral detection must be Pin 3 Neutral
"wetted" by connecting to terminal Pin 10. This is the return for the Voltage Input (Pin 1), and
nominal +12 Vdc "wetting" voltage (Pin 10).
▲ CAUTION: These binary inputs must be "wetted"
by connection to Pin 10 only–a nominal 12 Vdc
Pin 4 Load Current Polarity
source. If the contacts are connected to a 120 Vac
source, it will result in damage to the control. The line current input range is 0–640 mA (200 mA
continuous) with 200 mA representing the 1.0
The external connections for the control are shown per‑unit value. The measured current value is used
in Figures 7‑2 and 7-3. for line drop compensation and metering calculation.
The communication ports provide remote access to ▲ CAUTION: The current input to the M‑2001D is
the tapchanger control using the M-2001D TapTalk® rated at 0.2 A continuous, 0.4 A for two hours, and
Communications Software. 4.0 A for 1 second.
Pin 1 Voltage Input Pin 5 Circulating Current Polarity

This input accepts nominal 120 Vac, 60 Hz (or The circulating current transformer measures a
50 Hz as ordered) to operate the control's power relative reactive current flow between transformers in
supply and voltage sensing input. The acceptable parallel configuration. Maximum anticipated current
voltage range for proper control operation is from input is 200 mA.
90–140 Vac.
▲ CAUTION: The current input to the M‑2001D is
Power consumption is less than 8 VA. The input rated at 0.2 A continuous, 0.4 A for two hours, and
voltage is referenced to line neutral (Pin 3). 4.0 A for 1 second.
Control users may encounter situations where
actuating the Drag Hands Reset pushbutton on one Pin 6 Circulating Current Return
of any of our adapter panels results in the loss of a This is the return path for Pin 5. The circulating
Voltage Sense fuse. The Drag Hands reset solenoid current transformer input is isolated from other pins.
is powered from the circuit that powers the control,
and provides the control with sensing voltage. Pin 7 Tapchanger Raise
Initially, a 1/4 Ampere fuse was used in this circuit,
and most recently a 1 Ampere fuse was substituted This switched output connects the tapchanger raise
to prevent further loss of the fuse. This phenomenon winding to the source of motor power. When the
is due to the fact that, as solenoids age, they may control calls for a raise, it is capable of switching up
become sticky due to mechanical misalignment, to 6 A at 120/240 Vac.
hardened grease, or shortened windings.
Pin 8 Motor Power Input
The adapter panels include a one ampere fuse in the
voltage sense circuit. This value should be adequate The source for powering the tapchanger motor is
for all but the most extreme problems. When a Drag connected here. It may have a maximum voltage
Hands Reset Solenoid that consistently blows a one of 240 Vac.
amp fuse is encountered, it is recommended that the
customer either remove the solenoid for cleaning and
adjustment, or replace it completely.
7–3
Pin 9 Pin 13 Input 1 - Motor Seal-In/Switch Status

– Voltage Reduction Step #2 Input
This digital input is typically enabled by connecting When the Input Selection (1) screen in the
it to the nominal +12 Vdc wetting source (Pin Configuration menu is set to Seal-In Input, this
10), through an external Form "a" dry contact. input will operate as a seal-in input and Counter Input.
In this configuration, the digital input is referenced to
The amount of voltage reduction implemented is
line neutral, but is unique in that it is configured to
determined by the setting.
accept only the output of the motor seal-in current
When "Contact KeepTrack™ 1R1L" or "Contact detection transformer, from the B‑0553 motor seal-in
KeepTrack 1N" Tap position knowledge is selected printed circuit board subassembly. The B‑0553 is a
the Voltage Reduction Step 2 Input is utilized as supplemental circuit board used in the appropriate
an "Auxiliary Lower Contact Input". In the "Contact adapter panels.
KeepTrack" method of Tap Position Knowledge, When the Input Selection (1) screen in the
Voltage Reduction Step 2 is still available through Configuration menu is set to Switch Status Input,
communications. this input will only operate as a switch status input. All
seal-in input functions will be disabled. In this mode,
– Neutral Input Operation the switch status on the adapter panel can be read
When the parallel configuration mode is set to to determine if it is in Auto or Manual ON/OFF. The
∆VAR®2 (KeepTrack™), this input becomes the status can be read through the seal-in/switch status
neutral input. This is due to the standard neutral data point in the communications protocols.
input being used for ∆VAR2 (Keeptrack) disable
input when ∆VAR2 (Keeptrack) configuration is used. Pins 14 & 15 Neutral Position Detector Inputs
1 and 2/∆VAR2 (KeepTrack) Disable Input
Pin 10 +12 Vdc Wetting Voltage  NOTE: This input will only perform one function,
either the Neutral Detect or the ∆VAR2
This is the output of an unregulated dc power supply
(KeepTrack) Disable Input.
internal to the control. It is referenced to neutral and
can supply up to 100 mA. It is used for powering the
digital inputs of the control through external relays. This digital input registers neutral position switch
Depending on the voltage supplied to Pin 1 and closures on regulators. The pins are isolated
loading, its output can vary from +10 to +18 Vdc. It from neutral to permit placement of the external
is not fused in the control. contact in series with either the wetting voltage or
neutral. Normally the wetting supply (Pin 10) will be
Pins 11 & 12 Operations Counter Inputs 1 connected to Pin 14.
and 2
When using the ∆VAR2 (KeepTrack) paralleling
▲ CAUTION: When "Input Selection 1" configuration method, this input becomes the disable input
is set to "Seal-In," the Counter Input is used as the for ∆VAR2 (KeepTrack). This is used to keep the
Switch Status Input and the Seal-In Input will cause paralleled devices from running to their limits (max
the counter to increment. raise or lower) if they have been un-paralleled for
maintenance, etc.
This digital input registers the counter contact
closure. The pins are isolated from neutral to permit
placing the external contact in series with either Pin 16 Tapchanger Lower Output
the wetting voltage or neutral. The operation count This switched output connects the tapchanger lower
will increment when Pin 12 is grounded via the winding to the source of motor power. When the
transformer or regulator dry operation count switch. control calls for a lower, it is capable of switching up
This contact is needed for using the intertap time to 6 A at 120/240 Vac.
delay. Once the contact is opened, the intertap time
delay will begin counting down.
 NOTE: With the "Cam Follower" Operation
Counter configuration, the Counter Input
is used for the Cam Follower contact
input.
7–4
Installation– 7
Pin 17 Input 2 - Non-Sequential Operation/ Pin 19 Motor Seal-In Disconnect Output
Auto Tapchange Inhibit/Block SCADA This output connects to the B‑0553 motor seal-in
– Non-sequential Operation printed circuit board subassembly. When the seal-in
detector input is actuated, this output drives a triac
When the Input Selection (2) screen (in the
on the B‑0553 motor seal-in printed circuit board
Configuration menu) is set to NONSEQ INPUT,
subassembly to temporarily disconnect the motor
non-sequential operation is invoked by momentarily
power to the control. The B‑0553 is a supplemental
connecting this input to the nominal +12 Vdc
circuit board used in the appropriate adapter panels.
wetting source (Pin 10) through an external Form
"a" dry contact. When this function is enabled, the
tapchanger control times out with the Time Delay Pins 20 & 22 User-Programmable Alarm
setting between every tapchange. This pair of terminals is a Form "a" alarm relay
contact rated for 3 A at 120 Vac, or 100 mA at
– Auto Tapchange Inhibit
120 Vdc. This alarm indicates when any of the
When the Input Selection (2) screen (in the programmable alarm conditions are detected. Refer
Configuration menu) is set to NONSEQ INPUT, to Section 5.1, Configuration.
auto tapchange inhibit is invoked by closing and
maintaining a Form "a" dry contact connected to this
input and to the nominal +12 Vdc wetting source (Pin Pins 21 and 24 Self-Test Alarm
10). As long as this contact is closed, the tapchanger  NOTE: If the M-2001D is configured for the
will not time out, thereby prohibiting raise and lower SCAMP pushbutton Auto/Manual Switch
commands. type, then the Self-Test Alarm relay is
NOT available.
– SCADA Cutout Input
When the Input Selection (2) screen (in the This pair of terminals is a held-open Form "b" alarm
Configuration menu) is set to SCADA CUTOUT relay contact rated for 6 A at 120 Vac, or 100 mA at
INPUT, all writes using SCADA will be blocked 120 Vdc. Failure of the power supply or the micro
when the non-sequential input is present. Any controller results in loss of power to the alarm relay,
read operations using SCADA will still be allowing the contact to close.
allowed regardless of the input state. When the
"SCADA Cutout Input" input mode is selected, all
non‑sequential input functions will be disabled. Pin 23 Non-Interruptible Power Supply Input
This input is normally connected to Pin 8, the motor
Pin 18 Voltage Reduction Step #1 power input. The power to Pin 8 is interrupted by
the motor seal-in process of the B‑0553 motor
This digital input is typically enabled by connecting seal-in printed circuit board. The purpose of Pin
it to the nominal +12 Vdc wetting source (Pin 23 is to provide continuous power to the raise and
10) through an external Form "a" dry contact.
lower KeepTrack™ detection circuits. It should be
The amount of voltage reduction implemented is
connected ahead of any motor power interruption
determined by the setting.
(for example, auto/manual, local/remote) of the
 NOTE: Enabling both voltage reduction Step #1 seal-in circuitry to maintain KeepTrack raise and
and Step #2 inputs simultaneously will lower operation. The motor seal-in function is used
result in the level of voltage reduction as in the following adapter panels: M‑2109, M‑2324
specified on the Voltage Reduction Step and M‑2355.
#3 screen of the control.
When "Contact KeepTrack™ 1R1L" or "Contact

KeepTrack 1N" Tap position knowledge is selected
the Voltage Reduction Step 1 Input is utilized as
an "Auxiliary Raise Contact Input". In the "Contact
KeepTrack" method of Tap Position Knowledge,
Voltage Reduction Step 1 is still available through
communications
7–5
FIVE PIN CONNECTOR (Bottom)

7.2 Non-Sequential Operation
Pin 1 Source Voltage Input
Source Voltage Input when mode of operation is ▲ CAUTION: Voltage applied through dry contacts
set to "Regulate Reverse with Measured Source to actuate non-sequential input, voltage reduction
Voltage". inputs, counter contacts and neutral contacts must
be nominal +12 Vdc obtained from Pin 10 of the
Pin 2 Auxiliary Output M‑2001D Tapchanger Control. The use of 120 Vac
Available Auxiliary Output. will result in damage to the M‑2001D.
The operation of the control can be interrupted
Pin 3 Auxiliary Input A1
during tapchanger operation by applying the
When using the ∆VAR2 paralleling method, this "wetting" voltage of Pin 10 to Pin 17 (timer reset
input becomes the disable input for ∆VAR2. This is for non-sequential operation input) on the control
used to keep the paralleled devices from running through an external contact. This causes the output
to their limits (max raise or lower) if they have been to de-energize and re‑initialize the time delay circuit
un-paralleled for maintenance, etc. when the reset signal is removed. This function
can be used to cause the LTC transformer, if so
Pins 4 and 5, Auxiliary Inputs - A2, A3 equipped, to wait for the unit to time out between
Available Auxiliary Inputs. tapchanges.
7–6
Installation– 7
OR CONTACT KEEPTRACK 1R1L/1N INPUT
Note
3
#1
OR CONTACT KEEPTRACK 1R1L/1N INPUT
P3
SOURCE VOLTAGE INPUT 1
AUX OUTPUT 2
AUX INPUT A1 3
OR DVAr2 DISABLE INPUT
AUX INPUT A2 4
AUX INPUT A3 5
 NOTES:
1. Motor voltage may be 120 or 240 V to neutral, or 240 V phase-to-phase.
2. The customer is to provide an earth ground connection to the CT/VT’s neutral connection, external
to the control.
3. To Motor Power Seal-In board.
4. If the M-2001D is configured for the SCAMP pushbutton Auto/Manual Switch type, then the Self‑Test
Alarm relay is NOT available.
8 WARNING: When an adapter panel is not used, automatic shorting of CT inputs is not provided by
the M‑2001D/M-2050; the customer must provide a method for shorting the CT's before the control is
disconnected.
Figure 7‑2 Typical M‑2001D Stand-Alone External Connections
7–7
TB1
Non-Sequential / Auto Non-Sequential / Auto Tapchange
1
Tapchange Inhibit Input Inhibit Contact
Voltage Reduction Voltage Reduction

2
Step #2 Input Step #2 Contact
Circulating Current
3
(Return)
To Paralleling
Circulating Current Unit
4
(Polarity)
Tapchanger Raise
5
Output
Tapchanger Lower Motor

6
Output
L R
Voltage Reduction Voltage Reduction
7
Step #1 Input Step #1 Contact
Neutral
Neutral 8 (Grd Stud)
(Motor Return)
Motor Power 120/
9
240 Vac Supply
Regulated Voltage 20, 21 or Voltage In

10
(120 Vac) 22 on T.C. (Reg 120 V)
11
Neutral Light
Neutral Light
Switch
Position
Drag Hands Reset 12
Indicator Reset
Operations Operations
13
Counter Input Counter Switch
Line Current
14
(Polarity) Line
CT
Current
Line Current
15
(Return) CT Shorting
Switch
Motor Power
16
Return
TB2
17
Local/Remote
18
19
Auto Disable
20
Manual Raise 21
Manual Lower 22
Motor Seal-In Input 23
Self-Test Alarm
24
(Return)
Self-Test Alarm
25
(Polarity)
User-Programmable
26
Alarm (Return)
User-Programmable
27
Alarm (Polarity)
+12 Vdc Wetting 28

Supply
8 WARNING: Open CT secondary will result in high voltage at CT terminals. Death, severe injury or
damage to equipment can occur.
▲ CAUTION: Do not operate with CT secondary open. Short circuit or apply burden at CT secondary
during operation.
Figure 7‑3 Typical Adapter Panel External Connections
7–8
Installation– 7
7.3 Multi-Step Voltage Reduction 7.5 Communication Ports
▲ CAUTION: Voltage applied through dry contacts The control includes three communication ports,
to actuate non-sequential input, voltage reduction COM1, COM 2, and COM3. COM2 supports RS‑232
inputs, counter contacts and neutral contacts must or V-pin, RS‑485, and fiber optic lines (ST connector
be nominal +12 Vdc obtained from Pin 10 of the only). COM 3 supports Ethernet using an RJ‑45
M‑2001D Tapchanger Control. The use of 120 Vac connector or Fiber ST.
will result in damage to the control.
Selection of specific communication parameters
On the M‑2001D Tapchanger Control, Pin 9 and Pin may be made through the COM1 or COM2 PORT
18 on connector P2 are used together to provide configuration screen or the COM3 Port screen if the
up to three levels of voltage reduction. The external optional Ethernet port is installed. USB is an internal
connections to achieve these steps are shown port, and supports only MODBUS® protocol and
in Table 7-1. Voltage reduction amounts are set software updates. COM1 and COM2 support baud
within the M‑2001D Tapchanger Control software. rates from 300 to 115200.
If these voltage reduction steps are instituted by
communications, the contacts are not being used Fiber Optic Interface
simultaneously.
The COM1 PORT screen allows the user to select
When Contact KeepTrack™ Tap Position Knowledge the specific communication equipment to be used:
is selected Voltage Reduction Step 1 (Pin 18) and RS‑485 (2 wire) or Fiber Optics (ST connector).
Voltage Reduction Step 2 (Pin 9) are assigned as
Auxiliary Tap position inputs. The control can be connected to fiber optics in two
ways. If Fiber Repeat Switch on the right side of
control (as viewed from the rear) is set to OFF, the
7.4 LTC Backup Control fiber interface is set in a point‑to‑point configuration.
Example: A PC to one control. If Fiber Repeat Switch
The M‑0329B is a single‑phase, solid‑state backup is set to ON, the control can be connected in a loop
control that prevents a defective tapchanger control or daisy chain (the TX of one control connected to the
from running the voltage outside the upper and lower RX of the next, etc.). When connecting the control in
voltage limits. The Block Raise and Block Lower this manner through TapTalk®, Echo Cancel should
voltage levels are set by accurately calibrated dials. be set to ON. The type of fiber used with these optical
Refer to the M‑0329B Instruction Book for details. transceivers is multi mode fiber. It was tested with
The M‑0329B LTC Backup Control or M‑5329 fiber size 62.5/125. A manufacturer of this product
Multi phase Backup Relay are connected as a is Amphenol Corporation. A typical part number
two‑terminal device to the voltage transformer. tested by Beckwith Electric is 943‑32255‑10030
from Amphenol Corporation, Lisle, Illinois. This is
a dual-fiber with a total of four ST connectors. See
Figure 7‑4 for part number selection.
Voltage Reduction Setpoint: Multiplier Range Apply "Wetting Voltage" from Pin 10 to Pin #
Voltage Reduction Setpoint #1: 0 to 10% Pin 18
Voltage Reduction Setpoint #2: 0 to 10% Pin 9
Voltage Reduction Setpoint #3: 0 to 10% Pins 18 and 9
Table 7-1 Multi-Step Voltage Reduction External Connections
7–9
Ethernet (RJ-45 Interface) RS‑485 Interface (Additional Communication Port)

The control includes an optional Ethernet Port The MODBUS and DNP3.0 communication
(COM3) which is compatible with all protocols in the protocols were set up to be compatible with a 2‑wire,
control. There are eleven configuration screens in the half duplex RS‑485 link of the M‑2001D COM1.
HMI for setting up the ethernet port: DHCP Enable,
IP Address, Net Mask, Gateway, MODBUS® Port, A port-powered converter made by B & B Electronics
DNP Port, Auto Negotiation, Keepalive time, SNTP of Ottawa, IL (Model 485LP9TB) was used to test
Enable, SNTP Server Address and Time Zone. the two‑wire RS‑485 link. This converter is available
in commercial and extended temperature ranges.
The IP Address screen is used to set the address When connecting the RS‑485, a 120 Ω resistor must
used to communicate with the control (when DHCP be connected at the last control connector across
is disabled). The IP Net Mask screen is used for A/B. The two-wire RS‑485 port assigns Pin A (+)
multicasting. and Pin B (–). The SH connection on the RS‑485
plug should be connected to the cable shield. The
The DHCP Mode screen, when enabled, will allow shield should only be connected on one end of the
the control to use any available IP address (which RS‑485 cable. If more than one M‑2001D control
will be shown while booting the Ethernet during is connected via RS‑485, only one shield/SH
control power up. When DHCP is disabled, it will connection should be made. One screen is directly
cause the control to use the IP address from the IP associated with setting an RS‑485 network. COM1
Address screen. port should be set to RS‑485. If using TapTalk®,
under Communications/Setup/Comm Port menu,
RS‑485 should be selected. When selecting RS‑485
transmission lines, there are cables specifically
made for this purpose. These cables have a shunt
capacitance of 16 pF or less per foot, and are usually
solid wire. Plenum-rated cabling is recommended.
The RS‑485 connector is designed to hold 12 to 24
AWG wire.
943 - X X X XX - X X X X X
Side A Side B
Cable Type
3 = 3 mm Jacketed Cable Length in Meters
5 = 900 µm Jacketed (e.g., 0001 = 1m)
9 = 900 µm Tight Buffered
Connector Types
2 = FC
Assembly Type 5 = ST
0 = Pigtail 6 = SC Boot Type
1 = Patch Cord (jumper) 1 = Standard
2 = Duplex Patch Cord (jumper) NOTE (for connector types): If 2 = Right Angle, Side A
3 = Duplex Connector Pigtail (SC only) assembly type = 0 (pigtail), 3 = Right Angle, Side B
4 = Duplex Connector Jumper (SC only) connector “type” digits are 4 = Right Angle, Side A & B
identical (i.e., 66=SC pigtail).
If assembly type = 1 (jumper),
Fiber Size use combinations of the above
1 = 50/125 types for each end of the jumper.
2 = 62.5/125 Always use the lower number in
Amphenol Fiber Optic cable the first (A) position (i.e., 11 =
4 = 100/140 P.N. Ordering biconic to biconic; 26 = FC to
Super ST).
Figure 7‑4 Communication Connections
7–10
Installation– 7
7.6 Communication Cables
Figure 7-5 Null Modem Cable 9-Pin to 9-Pin
Digital
Tapchanger
Control PC
(DB9P) (DB25S)
DCD 1 1 CG
RX 2 2 TX
TX 3 3 RX
DTR 4 4 RTS
SGND 5 5 CTS
DSR 6 6 DSR
RTS 7 7 SGND
CTS 8 8 DCD
unused 9 9
•
•
•
DTR
•
•
•
Figure 7-6 Null Modem Cable 9-Pin to 25-Pin
7–11
7.7 Grounding 7.9 Typical Regulator Connection
Ground the control by connecting a suitably sized Figure 7‑8 illustrates an example of connections for
wire from the ground stud on the bottom of the a control with a Regulator Control adapter panel.
control case, to a solid connection to ground. Do not This example does not cover all situations. Motor
rely on mounting screws for grounding. Power and sensing voltage can be obtained from
a common source or from an independent source
having a nominal 120 Vac output. Normally, this is
7.8 Typical LTC Connection line-to-neutral voltage, although line-to-line voltage
can be used if recognition is made of any phase shift
Figure 7‑7 illustrates an example of connections for between the voltage and current signals when using
a control with an LTC Transformer Control adapter line drop compensation, to avoid introducing an
panel. This example does not cover all situations. unintentional grounding into the control circuitry that
Motor Power and sensing voltage can be obtained could result in shorting a VT secondary. It is strongly
from a common source or from independent sources recommended that a 1:1 ratio isolation transformer
having a nominal 120 Vac output. Normally, this is of 25 VA or greater with required voltage accuracy
line‑to‑neutral voltage, although line‑to‑line voltage be used between the control and any line-to-line
can be used if recognition is made of any phase shift PT connections. Beckwith Electric has a suitable
between the voltage and current signals when using isolation transformer available in Beckwith Electric
line drop compensation, to avoid introducing an model M-0362. Please consult factory for availability.
unintentional grounding into the control circuitry that
could result in shorting a VT secondary. It is strongly ▲ CAUTION: The current input to the M‑2001D is
recommended that a 1:1 ratio isolation transformer rated at 0.2 A continuous, 0.4 A for two hours, and
of 25 VA or greater with required voltage accuracy 4.0 A for 1 second.
be used between the control and any line-to-line Load current must be reduced by an appropriate
PT connections. Beckwith Electric has a suitable auxiliary transformer to 0.2 A "full scale" before
isolation transformer available in Beckwith Electric connecting to the adapter panel current inputs.
model M-0362. Please consult factory for availability. Scaling factors may be chosen to resemble 200 mA,
Load current must be reduced by an appropriate 100 mA, or 5 A current transformers in readouts and
auxiliary transformer to 0.2 A "full scale" before current magnitude settings. It is important that you
connecting to the adapter panel currents. Please obtain an application guide on an adapter panel
obtain an application guide specific to your LTC specific to your regulator application and follow
control adapter panel and follow those instructions. those instructions.
7–12
Installation– 7
R
L
8 WARNING: In no case should the line current circuit be interrupted with the regulator or transformer
energized. Do not remove auxiliary current transformers without shorting the current inputs. Death
or severe electrical shock can occur.
 NOTES:
1. Motor voltage may be 120 or 240 V to neutral or 240 V phase to phase.
2. The customer is to provide earth ground connection to CT/VT's neutral connection, external to the
control.
3. The self-test alarm and user-programmable alarm contacts are shown in the de-energized state (no
voltage applied). The self-test alarm contacts open after the control passes the internal self-test.
4. The wiring from terminal 7 and 9 may or may not go directly to the motor. Depending on installation,
local codes and standards, the wiring may go to interposing relay contacts, limit switch, seal-in
circuits, starters contactors, SCADA, test switches etc.
5. To isolate the load current, remove the jumper from TB1‑2 to TB1‑3.
6. For counter operation, connect TB2‑20 to neutral TB1‑3 through an external dry contact. This
connection is required for the intertap time delay operation.
Figure 7‑7 M-2001D and LTC Transformer Control Adapter Panel Typical Connections
7–13
M-2293B
(Front Panel Inputs) Test
M-2001D
Terminal
TB1
Meter Voltage
Out In Fuse 3 A
Voltage Input Non-Sequential / Auto

1 1
(Polarity) Tapchange Inhibit Input
Load Current Voltage Reduction

2 2
(Return) Step #2 Contact
Neutral 3 3
To
Paralleling
Load Current Unit
4 4
(Polarity)
Circulating Current INT NN

5 5
(Polarity) OFF 27
See Note 1
Circulating Current EXT NN Motor
6 6
(Return) 28
INT L R
Tapchanger Raise Voltage Reduction
7 OFF 7
Output Step #1 Contact
EXT Neutral
Motor Power Input 8
NN
J4 8 (Grd Stud)
10
Voltage Reduction
(Motor Return)
Step #2 or Contact 9 Motor Power 9
KeepTrack 1R1L/1N Input Fuse (6 A)
Contact "Wetting" J5 Voltage In NN 20, 21 or Voltage In
10 10
Supply +12 V dc Fuse (1 A) 9 22 on T.C. (Reg 120 V)
Input
Operation Counter/ Neutral NN Neutral Light
11 Circuit 11
Switch Status Input #1 Light 31 Switch
Up
Operation Counter/ (Netrual) Drag Hands NN Position
12 12
Switch Status Input #2 Reset 29 Indicator Reset
Down
Motor Seal-In/ SW Status S1 (Hot)
NN Operations
13 13
Detector Input 30 Counter Switch
Neutral Position NN
14 14
Detector #1 23
J12 Line
CT
Neutral Position NN Current
15 15
Detector #2 R5 24 CT Shorting
Tapchanger Lower 1 K Ohm Switch
16 Motor Power
Output 16
Return
Non-Sequential Operation/
Auto T.C. Inhibit Input/ NN NN
17 Manual
SCADA Cutout xx Terminals
OFF
Voltage Reduction Manual
Step #1 or Contact 18 Raise OFF Auto Harness/
YY
KeepTrack 1R1L/1N Input (Momentary) Manual Terminals
Motor Seal-In
Disconnect Output
19 Manual
OFF
Auto
TB2
Lower
User-Programmable 17
20
Alarm
J14 Local/Remote
Self-Test Alarm 21 18
User-Programmable 19
22
Alarm
J15 Auto Disable
Non-Interruptable 20
23
Power Supply Input
Self-Test Alarm 24 21 Manual Raise

Optional
22 Manual Lower
Local
SCADA
23 Motor Seal-In Input/Switch Status
Remote
24 Self-Test Alarm (Return) See Note 3
25 Self-Test Alarm (Polarity) See Note 3

Optional
User-Programmable
VR1 26
Alarm (Return) See Note 2
Voltage
OFF User-Programmable
Reduction 27
Alarm (Polarity) See Note 2
VR2
+12 V dc Wetting Supply
28
RT1
(.150 A)
 NOTES:
1. The wiring from terminal 5 and 6 may or may not go directly to the motor. Depending on installation,
local codes and standards, the wiring may go to interposing relay contacts, limit switch, seal-in
circuits, starters contactors, SCADA, test switches etc.
2. The self-test alarm and user-programmable alarm contacts are shown in the de-energized state (no
voltage applied). The self-test alarm contacts open after the control passes the internal self‑test;
the user-programmable alarm contacts close when an alarm is recognized.
3. If the M-2001D is configured for the SCAMP pushbutton Auto/Manual Switch type, then the Self‑Test
Alarm Relay is not available.
Figure 7-8 M-2001D and Regulator Control Adapter Panel Typical Connections
7–14
Installation– 7
Both the M‑2026 and M‑2027 are housed in non-

7.10 Control Power Backup Input weathertight enclosures and are equipped with
Connection screw terminal blocks for both input and output
connections.
The Control Power Backup Input option is designed
to sustain communication port operation in the event ▲ CAUTION: Use of Non-Beckwith Electric
of the loss of AC control power. In the event of a loss converters to provide +12 V to the Control Power
of AC input power to the control, the option permits Backup Input may compromise system integrity
uninterrupted operation of the control by supplying due to a lack of adequate protection of the power
+12 Vdc to the control. In addition, the control converter. For reliability of the M-2001D, the power
retains functionality with the exception of the actual converter must meet the following requirements:
operation of the tapchanger mechanism.
Temperature: –40° C to + 80° C
When the AC input voltage drops below approximately
85 Vrms, the Control Power Backup Input will IEC 60068‑2‑1 Cold, –40° C for 96 hours
activate and all automatic tapchange operations IEC 60068‑2‑2 Dry Heat, +80° C for 96 hours
will then be suspended. If Motor Power is available, IEC 60068‑2‑3 Damp Heat, +40° C @ 95% RH for
manual tapchanges may be initiated. 96 hours
Transient Protection
When the control is being powered from the Control
Power Backup Input, it will continue to read any input High Voltage – All input and output terminals will
voltage present. withstand 1500 Vac rms to chassis or instrument
ground for one minute with a leakage current not
The control retains full functionality, and if the to exceed 25 mA, for all terminals to ground. Input
control's Motor Power remains energized then Raise and output circuits are electrically isolated from each
and Lower commands are possible. Fiber-Optic port other, from other circuits and from ground.
operation is maintained. All communication ports,
data-logging, status monitoring, configuration, and
Surge Withstand Capability
setpoint capability are also maintained.
IEEE C37.90.1‑2002 2,500 Vpk-pk Oscillatory
The Control Power Backup Input option is installed 4,000 Vpk Fast Transient
at the factory, and is wired through the two-pin Burst
connector located on the top rear of the control.
IEEE C37.90.1-1989 2,500 Vpk-pk Oscillatory
Beckwith Electric offers two Control Power Backup 5,000 Vpk Fast Transient
supplies for use with the M‑2001D when the Control
Power Backup Input option is purchased. The Radiated Electromagnetic Withstand Capability –
M‑2026 AC-DC Control Power Backup Supply is a All units are protected against electromagnetic
fused, surge protected and reverse polarity protected radiated interference from portable communications
AC‑DC Control Power Supply that accepts an AC or transceivers.
DC input (21 to 32, 42 to 60 and 105 to 145 V) and
outputs regulated +12 Vdc at up to 1.5 Amp.
Electrostatic Discharge Test
The M‑2027 Control Power Backup Supply - AC EN 60255‑22‑2‑1997 (EN61000‑4‑2)
Only is a fused and surge protected Control Power
Backup Supply that will accept an AC input range of Class 4 (8 Kv) – Point Contact Discharge
105 to 140 Vac, 50/60 Hz and output +12 Vdc to 1 A. (15 Kv) – Air Discharge
Fast Transient Disturbance Test

EN 60255‑22‑4‑2002 (EN61000‑4‑4)
Class A (4 Kv, 2.5 kHz)
7–15
Facility AC-DC Source

Facility AC Source
21 to 32 V, 42 to 60 V,
105-140 Vac
or 105 to 145 V
M-2026 AC-DC M-2027 Control

Control Power Power Backup
Backup Supply Supply AC to
DC Only
+12 V

with M-2026 or M-2027
Backup Power Supplies.

with Backup Power Supply
units other than M-2026 or
M-2027.
Figure 7‑9 Typical Control Power Backup Connection for M‑2001D
7–16
The B-1021 harness includes the
J2/P2 Adapter for connection to
M-2001D controls which (only)
utilize the two pin backup power
Input on the top of the control.
J2 P2
B-1021 Harness
M-2001D
12 Vdc from 6 FT.
Beckwith Electric A P1
+
M-2026 or M-2027 B -
Backup Power C
Supplies
J1
P1 connects to M-2001C -
+ M-6200
controls that include the
backup power option and
utilize the six pin Current P1 PIN
Loop Input on the bottom LOCATIONS 6 3
5 2
of the control for backup 4 1 The B-1021 harness includes the J1
power input. Adapter for connection to M-6200
Figure 7‑10 Control Power Backup Input Cable Assembly

terminals TB2-11and TB2-12.
N/C 4 GND CHASSIS
DRAIN C
GND 6 GND
BLK B
+12V 5 +12V
WHT A
P1 LUG
7–17
Installation– 7
7.11 TapTalk S-2001D 7.12 Activating Initial Local

Communications Software Communications
Installation
The M-2001D and TapTalk S-2001D Communications
The TapTalk® S-2001D installation program has Software are shipped from the factory with the same
been written to overwrite previous versions of default communication parameters. Therefore, it
TapTalk. However, considering variations in installed may not be necessary to setup communication
software, hardware and operating systems, if you parameters.
are upgrading from a previous version of TapTalk,
it is recommended that any older versions of the To use TapTalk to interrogate, set, or monitor the
TapTalk program be removed before installing the M-2001D Digital Tapchanger Control using a direct
new TapTalk. USB connection, the appropriate driver must be
loaded. The driver that is required to be resident
TapTalk runs with the Windows 2000®, Windows XP®, in the "windows/inf" folder on the host PC is
Windows Vista® or Windows 7® operating system. "beco_usb.inf." This driver is automatically loaded
Familiarity with Windows™ is important in using by the TapTalk installation software.
TapTalk, as the conventions defined in the Windows
documentation are strictly followed. When the control is connected to the PC utilizing a
USB cable, Windows will enumerate the control as
TapTalk will be installed on the host PC’s hard a serial com device and will assign an unused COM
disk. While it does not require special installation Port to the control.
procedures, an installation utility has been provided
to make the process easier. Refer to Section 4.1 System Setup, Communication
Protocols and Figure A-4, Communication Menu
To install TapTalk: Flow Screens, for additional setup information.
pCAUTION: The USB cable must be disconnected

from the M-2001D control before installing TapTalk.
1. Insert the TapTalk software into your
CD‑ROM drive.
2. Select Run from the Start Menu.
3. In the Run dialog box, initiate software
installation by typing D:\Setup.exe
(or other drive designator:\Setup.exe,
depending on the letter designation for
the CD‑ROM drive).
4. The Installation Wizard will prompt the
user through the installation process.
After installation, the TapTalk program
icon (located in the Becoware folder) can
be placed on the desktop (Figure 7-11).
Starting TapTalk
1. Select the TapTalk program-item icon
from the Becoware group in the Program
Manager, or select TapTalk from the
program list using the Start Menu. The
TapTalk Main Screen will be displayed.
Figure 7-11 S-2001D TapTalk Program-Item Icon
7–18
Installation– 7
Activating Initial Communication using USB (Serial) 6. Ensure that the correct COM port is
Connection and Default Communication parameters displayed for the selected USB device.
is accomplished as follows:  NOTE: TapTalk will automatically choose the port
1. Ensure the following conditions exist: for the control you just connected to.
• TapTalk® is installed on the host

computer 7. Enter "Access Level Code" and check
"Save" if desired.
Default Values:
2. Plug the USB cable into the host PC USB Level 1 000000 (Disabled)
port. Level 2 222222
3. Plug the USB cable into the USB port on 8. Select Connect, TapTalk will attempt to
the control. The host PC will: connect to the target control.
a. Interrogate the control to determine 9. If TapTalk returns a Failed to Connect
the type of hardware device it is. to the device screen (Figure 7-13), then
 NOTE: If the host PC cannot identify the proper repeat Steps 6, 7 and 8.
driver for the M-2001D, the driver can be
found on the TapTalk software installation
disk.
b. Load any required drivers.

c. Assign the next available COM port
to the USB connection.
4. Start the TapTalk program, TapTalk will
display the TapTalk Main dialog screen.
5. Select Connect/USB from the Connect Figure 7-13 Failed to Connect to the
drop-down menu. Device Screen
10. If Level Access is not active or the proper

will display the connected version of the
TapTalk Main Screen (Figure 3-12).
11. If Level Access is active and an invalid
access code was entered, then the
Successfully Connected read-only dialog
screen will be displayed (Figure 7-14).
TapTalk will display the USB Port dialog

Figure 7-14 Successfully Connected Read Only

Access Dialog Screen
12. Select OK, TapTalk will display the

connected version of the TapTalk Main
Figure 7-12 USB Port Connection Screen (Figure 3-12).
Dialog Screen
7–19
7–20
Testing – 8
8 Testing
8.0 Set-up Procedure..................................................................... 8–1
8.1 Bench-Test............................................................................... 8–3
8.2 Check-out Procedure............................................................... 8–5
8.3 Operational Test....................................................................... 8–5
8.4 In-Service Test......................................................................... 8–5
8.5 Bias Voltage Status/Test Mode................................................. 8–6
8.6 LED Scroll Test........................................................................ 8–7
8.7 Input Test................................................................................. 8–8
8.8 Output Test............................................................................... 8–9
8.9 Button Test............................................................................. 8–10
This chapter assumes that the M‑2001D Tapchanger Procedure

Control is not being used with a M‑2050B Mounting 1. Make electrical connections as shown in
Kit or an adapter panel (for example, when used Figure 8‑1, External Connections for Test
by an original equipment manufacturer for use in a Procedure.
control panel). If the control is being used with an
M‑2050B Mounting Kit or an adapter panel, refer to  NOTE: Refer to the Appendix, Figures A‑1
through A‑5, for the locations of screens
the Test Procedures chapter of the corresponding
within the software.
Application Guide rather than this chapter.
 NOTE: There is a one-second delay between
the out-of-band condition and panel LED
8.0 Set-up Procedure indication.
Equipment List 2. Enter initial settings:
▲ CAUTION: The current input to the M‑2001D is Function Initial Setting

4.0 A for 1 second. Bandcenter 120.0 V
Bandwidth 2.0 V
• 0 – 200 mA current supply with phase
angle settings of 0° to +90° LDC Resistance 0.0 V
• 90 – 145 Vac voltage source at 60 Hz LDC Reactance 0.0 V
• High impedance true RMS voltmeter with Paralleling Circulating Current Method
accuracy on ac of at least ±0.2% of reading Block Raise 135.0 V
• Accurate stop watch Block Lower 105.0 V
Deadband 2.0 V
Time Delay 5.0 Seconds
Table 8‑1 Initial Settings
8–1
Figure 8-1 External Connections for Test Procedure
8–2
Testing – 8
4. Decrease the input voltage to 108.0 Vac.

8.1 Bench Test The RAISE and LOWER LEDs should be
extinguished.
▲ CAUTION: Do not reverse the ground and hot
wires when connecting an external source. 5. Set LDC Reactance to –24.0 V; the
RAISE LED should illuminate.
1. Apply 120 Vac from power source. The 6. Increase input voltage to 132.0 Vac. Both
display of the M‑2001D will automatically RAISE and LOWER LEDs should be
advance to the Local Voltage screen. extinguished.
2. Increase voltage to 121.2. The LOWER 7. Set the LDC Reactance to 0.0 V.
LED should illuminate.
8. Decrease the input voltage to 120 Vac.
3. Decrease voltage to 118.8. The RAISE
Voltage Reduction
4. Set the input voltage to 120.0 Vac. Wait for
RAISE and LOWER LEDs to extinguish. 1. Set Voltage Reduction Step #1 to 2.5%
(default setting).
5. Increase voltage to 122.0 Vac, then start
timing when voltage passes 121.0 V. 2. Close S5 to enable Voltage Reduction
Step #1. The LOWER LED should
6. Stop timing when the lamp connected to illuminate.
the LOWER output illuminates (should
be approximately 5 seconds). 3. Decrease the voltage to 117.0 Vac. The
LOWER LED should be extinguished.
Resistance 4. Open S5 and decrease the input voltage

to 120.0 V.
1. Apply a 100.0 mA in-phase current to Pin
4 (load current-polarity) and Pin 2 (load 5. Set Voltage Reduction Step #2 to 5%
current-return) of the P2 connector. (default setting).
2. Set S1 to LDC and S2 to IL. 6. Close S3 to enable Voltage Reduction
step #2. The LOWER LED should
3. Set LDC Resistance to 24.0 V. The RAISE illuminate.
7. Decrease voltage to 114.0 Vac. The
4. Increase the input voltage to 132.0 Vac. LOWER LED should extinguish.
The RAISE and LOWER LEDs should
be extinguished. 8. Open S3 and decrease the input voltage
to 120.0 Vac.
5. Set the LDC Resistance to –24.0 V. The
LOWER LED should light.
Paralleling
6. Decrease the input voltage to 108.0 Vac.
Both RAISE and LOWER LEDs should 1. Apply 100.0 mA 90° leading current to
extinguish. Pin 5 (circulating current-polarity) and
Pin 6 (circulating current-return) of the
7. Set the LDC Resistance to 0.0 V. P2 connector.
8. Decrease the input voltage to 120 Vac. 2. Set S1 to CIRC and S2 to IP. The LOWER
Reactance 3. Decrease the voltage to 108.0 Vac. Both
1. Apply 100.0 mA 90° leading current to Pin RAISE and LOWER LEDs should be
4 (load current-polarity) and Pin 2 (load extinguished.
current-return) of the P2 connector. 4. Set S1 to OFF.
2. Set S1 to LDC and S2 to IL.
3. Set LDC Reactance to 24.0 V. The
LOWER LED should illuminate.
8–3
Counter ▲ CAUTION: Do not reverse the ground and hot

1. Set the M‑2001D Tapchanger Control to wires when connecting an external source.
display the Operations Count screen for
3. Apply motor auxiliary voltage to Pin 8
the Total Operations Counter.
(motor power input) and Pin 3 (neutral).
2. Verify counter operation by depressing S4
4. Verify that the motor runs in the proper
wired to Pin 11 and Pin 12 (counter in).
direction when conditions of sensed
3. The operations counter should increment. voltage result in activation of Raise and
Lower outputs.
Block Raise/Block Lower/Deadband 8 WARNING: In no case should the load current
1. Set Block Raise to 126.0 V. circuit be interrupted with the regulator or
transformer energized.
2. Set Block Lower to 114.0 V.
3. Set the unit to display the Bias Voltage 8 WARNING: Do not remove auxiliary current
screen. transformers without shorting the current inputs.
4. Press ENT. Death or severe electrical shock can occur.
5. Increase voltage to 126.5 V. BR should

be displayed on the screen. 5. As shown in Figure 8‑2, Setup for Current
Checkout Procedures, temporarily
6. Increase voltage to 128.5 V. FL is place a shorting device across the
displayed on the screen. LDC‑CT secondary to short the line drop
compensator circuit, and place another
7. Decrease voltage to 113.5 V. BL is
shorting device to short the circulating
displayed on the screen.
current paralleling output, for the load
current check.
—Bench Test Complete— 6. Insert an ammeter between the polarity
input and Pin 4.
7. Open the load current shorting device and
8.2 Check-out Procedure with a known load on the transformer or
regulator, measure the current in the load
 NOTE: All Beckwith Electric units are fully current circuit to ensure that this current
calibrated at the factory. There is no is correct for 0.2 A full load.
need to recalibrate the units before initial
installation. ▲ CAUTION: The current input to the control is
4.0 A for 1 second.
Applying Power
1. Remove any external connection 8. Replace the shorting device across
between Pin 1 (voltage input) and Pin 8 the load current input and remove the
(motor power input). ammeter.
2. Using a voltmeter, ensure that the voltage 9. Reconnect polarity to the unit and
applied to Pin 1 is nominal 120 Vac with remove both jumpers. The Line Drop
respect to Pin 3 (neutral). Compensator will be activated. Correct
CT polarity can be checked by simply
incorporating sufficient +R compensation.
The regulator should time out and run so
as to raise the output voltage.
8–4
Testing – 8
8.3 Operational Test 8.4 In-Service Test
1. Set VT Ratio Correction = 0 V; CT/VT 1. Set the M‑2001D Tapchanger Control to

phasing = 0° from the appropriate screen display the Bias Voltage screen.
in the software.
2. Press ENT.
2. Return to the Local Voltage screen.
3. Use the  and  pushbuttons to cause
3. Apply 120.0 Vac to Pin 1 (hot) and Pin 3 RAISE and LOWER outputs.
(neutral) of the adapter panel.
If either output is blocked, verify that the
4. Verify local voltage = input voltage ±0.3 V. unit is not at the maximum tap position.
5. Apply 100.0 mA in-phase current to Pin 4 4. Press ENT to return to the Local Voltage
(load current-polarity) and Pin 2 (load screen.
current-return).
6. Verify Control Load I =100 mA and Power —In-Service Test Complete—
Factor =1.0 ±0.02 from the appropriate
software screens.
7. Apply 100.0 mA 90° leading current to Pin
5 (circulating current-polarity) and Pin 6
(circulating current-return).
8. Verify Control Circ I = 100.0 mA ±2 mA.
9. Verify the  ,  and ENT pushbuttons
function properly.
10. De-energize the current source.
—Checkout Procedure Complete—

 NOTE: Pin numbers indicated above are accurate for the M‑2050B Mounting Kit only; check the Application
Guide of the specific adapter panel used for proper pin numbers.
Figure 8‑2 Setup for Current Checkout Procedure
8–5

8.5 Bias Voltage Status/Test Mode The unit will display the following:
This convenient feature permits entering a bias Calibration/Test

voltage for simulating the raising or lowering of the
sensed input voltage. This exercises the control as if  
the input voltage were being changed. The contacts
actually operate. 3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton as
necessary to navigate to the "Bias
This feature is valuable in the rapid determination Voltage Status Test Mode" menu item.
of operating quantities present to influence the
normal operation of the control. Items that will block Bias Voltage
operations or change setpoints are described here Status/Test Mode
and illustrated by LEDs on the face of the control.
The Test Mode/Status screen displays control status 4. Press the ENT pushbutton. The unit will
information that includes: display the following:
• Output Status Bias Voltage 0.0
• Compensated Voltage
-- XXX.X --
• Band Status
• Runback/Blocking Status The upper line of the display will initially
indicate "0.0" bias volts.
• Voltage Reduction Status
The second line will display the sequence
of parameters indicated in Figure 8-3. By
This feature automatically resets on exit or in 15 increasing/decreasing the applied bias
minutes if not exited. voltage the control will respond based
on the settings entered into the control.
Bias Voltage Testing
To apply a bias voltage to test the control proceed
as follows:
will advance to "UTILITIES".
UTILITIES
MNTR
COMM
LL = Line Current Limit

TL = Tap Limit Block Lower
FL = Runback
TR = Tap Limit Block Raise
BL = Limit Block Lower
-- = None
BR = Limit Block Raise
-- = None
__ XXX.X __ __ __ __
SRB = Seal-in Failure Block Raise
SLB = Seal-in Failure Block Lower
R = Tap Raise
SBK = Seal-in Failure Block Raise and Lower
L = Tap Lower
IBK = Low Current Block
-- = No Raise/Lower
NBK = Nonsequential Block
CBK = Comm Block
RBK = Reverse Power Block
HI = Band Status High
SCO = SCADA Cut Out
LO = Band Status Low
VR1 = Voltage Reduction #1
-- = In Band
DL = Delta VAr 2 Current
Limit/Block
-- = None
Figure 8-3 Bias Voltage Test Index
8–6
Testing – 8

8.6 LED Scroll Test Access prompt will be displayed.
To test the control front panel LEDs proceed as ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS
follows:
_
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code
will advance to "UTILITIES". the display will automatically advance
the cursor to the next digit when input is
UTILITIES momentarily paused.
MNTR
COMM
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. press the ENT pushbutton.
Calibration/Test confirmation screen and display the
  following:
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as LED Scroll Test

necessary, to navigate to the LED Scroll Test in Progress...
Test menu item.
LED Scroll Test
Press ENT to begin
7. The control will illuminate each of the
eight LEDs. To stop the LED test press
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level the EXIT pushbutton.
LED Scroll Test

Test in Progress...
8–7

8.7 Input Test press the ENT pushbutton.
To test the control inputs proceed as follows: If a valid Level 2 Access code was
1. Press the ENT (UTIL Hot Button) confirmation screen and display the
will advance to "UTILITIES".
Input Test  
UTILITIES vr1 vr2 ns c n l r t
MNTR
COMM
7. Determine the inputs to be tested and the
corresponding position (from left to right)
Calibration/Test in the input test screen.
 
• vr1, Voltage Reduction #1
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as • vr2, Voltage Reduction #2
necessary, to navigate to the Input Test • ns, Non-Sequential Input
menu item. • c, Operations Counter Contact
• n, Neutral Light Switch
Input Test
• l, Lower Status
Press ENT to begin • r, Raise Status
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level • t, Current Loop Input
2 Access is not active or has been • a1, Aux Input 1
previously input, the following will be • a2, Aux Input 2
displayed. Go to Step 7. • a3, Aux Input 3
• ms, Motor Sealin
Input Test  
vr1 vr2 ns c n l r t As each input is activated the
corresponding indicator will change from
lower case to upper case to indicate that
the control has read the input.
8. Verify that the control is in a configuration
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS that supports input testing, then proceed
as follows based on control status:
_
• If the control is not connected to field
 NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code connections, then utilize Figure 8-1
the display will automatically advance to connect test equipment and test
the cursor to the next digit when input is the desired inputs.
momentarily paused. • If the control is connected to field
connections, then determine the
necessary test method(s) for testing
the desired input.
Draghands, Lower and Raise
status can be tested by utilizing the
corresponding front panel switches.
9. When all input testing has been

completed, restore the control back to
pre-test conditions.
8–8
Testing – 8

8.8 Output Test the display will automatically advance
the cursor to the next digit when input is
To test the control outputs proceed as follows: momentarily paused.
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu 6. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then
will advance to "UTILITIES". press the ENT pushbutton.
UTILITIES entered, the display will briefly flash a
MNTR
COMM confirmation screen and display the
following:
The unit will display the following: alarm contact
0000000
Calibration/Test

7. The cursor will be located under the
necessary, to navigate to the LED Scroll
far right zero which corresponds to
Test menu item.
the control "Alarm Contact". Positions
2 through 7 are:
Output Test
• Position 2, Raise Contact
Press ENT to begin
• Position 3, Lower Contact
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level • Position 4, Source Contact
previously input, the following will be • Position 5, Aux Output 1
displayed. Go to Step 7. • Position 6, Seal-In Output
• Position 7, Deadman Output
alarm contact
0000000 To test output contacts proceed as follows
for the desired output:
5. If Level 2 Access is active, the Level 2 a. Verify that the control is in a
Access prompt will be displayed. configuration that supports output
contact testing.
ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS b. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow
_ pushbutton for the desired output
contact set the value to "1". The
contact output will be active. Verify
that the desired output is activated.
c. Utilizing the Up/Down arrow
pushbutton for the desired output
contact set the value to "0". The
contact output will be deactivated.
Verify that the desired output is
deactivated.
d. Repeat for the remaining outputs.
8–9

8.9 Button Test Access prompt will be displayed.
Front Panel Pushbutton Testing ENTER LEVEL 2 ACCESS

To test the control front panel pushbuttons, proceed
_
as follows:
1. Press the ENT (UTIL Hot Button)  NOTE: When entering the Level 2 Access code
pushbutton to awaken the unit. The menu the display will automatically advance
will advance to "UTILITIES". the cursor to the next digit when input is
momentarily paused.
UTILITIES
MNTR
COMM 6. Enter a valid Level 2 Access code, then
2. Press the Down Arrow pushbutton once. If a valid Level 2 Access code was
The unit will display the following: entered, the display will briefly flash a
Calibration/Test following:
 
Button Input Test
3. Press the Down arrow pushbutton, as Press A Key...
necessary, to navigate to the Button Input
Test menu item. If not, re-enter a valid code.
Button Input Test

7. Test the desired pushbutton by pressing
Press ENT to Begin and holding the pushbutton. The display
will identify the pushbutton if it is working
4. Press the ENT pushbutton. If Level correctly.
Button Input Test

Press A Key...
8–10
Appendix – A
A Appendix
A.1 HMI Menu Flow........................................................................ A–2
Figure A-1 Monitor Menu Flow................................................ A–2
Figure A-2 Setpoints Menu Flow............................................. A–3
Figure A-3 Configuration Menu Flow............................... A–4, 5, 6
Figure A-4 Communication Menu Flow................................... A–7
Figure A-5 Utilities Menu Flow................................................ A–8
A.2 HMI Screen Review................................................................. A–9

Monitor/Metering...................................................................... A–9
Monitor/Present Demand....................................................... A–10
Monitor/Demand History........................................................ A–10
Monitor/Energy Metering........................................................ A–11
Monitor/Status........................................................................ A–11
Monitor/Motor Current............................................................ A–12
Monitor/Harmonics................................................................. A–13
Monitor/Tap Information......................................................... A–13
Setpoints/Profile Settings....................................................... A–15
Setpoints/Common Settings................................................... A–15
Setpoints/Power Flow Forward............................................... A–16
Setpoints/Power Flow Reverse............................................... A–17
Setpoints/Limits...................................................................... A–18
Configuration/Tapchanger Type.............................................. A–19
Configuration/Tap Settings..................................................... A–19
Configuration/Paralleling........................................................ A–20
Configuration/Programmable Alarm....................................... A–22
Configuration/System Clock................................................... A–22
Configuration/Input Selection................................................. A–22
Configuration/Mtr Current Profile............................................ A–23
Configuration/CBEMA Setup.................................................. A–23
Configuration/Harmonics Setup............................................. A–24
Configuration/Data Logging.................................................... A–24
Configuration/Nameplate........................................................ A–25
Configuration/Run Through Neutral........................................ A–28
Configuration/Remote Voltage Bias........................................ A–28
Communication/Comm Settings............................................. A–29
Communication/Memory Card................................................ A–30
Communication/Ethernet........................................................ A–31
Communication/HMI............................................................... A–32
Communication/Bluetooth...................................................... A–33
Communication/RS232........................................................... A–33
Utilities/Calibration-Test.......................................................... A–34
Utilities/About......................................................................... A–36
A–1
A.1 HMI Menu Flow
COMMUNICATION UTILITIES MONITOR SETPOINTS CONFIGURATION

CNFG UTIL COMM MNTR UTIL SETP MNTR CNFG SETP COMM
Status Motor Current Harmonics Tap Information Metering Present Demand Demand History Energy Metering
Press ENT to view Peak RMS Curr Voltage % THD Tap Position/Cal Load Voltage Demand Interval Demand Interval Watt Hours Fwd E
Tapchanger Status x.x mA (x.x) T x.x % 0 xxx.x Volts xx Min xx Min x kWh
Press ENT to view Avg RMS Curr Current % THD Drag Hands E Meter Out Voltage Demand Load Voltage Min Load Voltage E Lagging VAr Hours E
Alarm Status x.x mA (xx.x) T xx.x % L= 0 N R= 0 N xxx.x Volts xxx.x Volts x.x Volts x kVArh
Press ENT to view Profile Duration Press ENT to view Definite Timer Source Voltage Demand Pri. Current Max Load Voltage E Watt Hours Rev E
Input Status xxx.x ms(xxx.x) T Voltage Harmonics Raise xxs Lower xxs xxx.x V(Calculated) xxx.x Amps xxx.x Volts xx kWh
Press ENT to view Peak Motor Current E Press ENT to view Intertap Timer Load Current Demand Pri. Watts Max Pri.Current E Leading VAr Hours E
Output Status x.x mA Current Harmonic x % x.x mA LEAD/LAG x.xx MW xxx.x Amps xx kVArh
Operation Counter Circulating Current Demand Pri. VArs Max Primary Watts E Press ENT to reset
0 x.x mA LEAD/LAG x.xx MVArs x.xx MW Energy Metering
If DVAr enabled
Resettable Counter E DVar Current Demand Pri. VA Max Primary VArs E Press ENT to perform
0 x.x mA LEAD/LAG x.xx MVA x.xx MVAr Master Reset
Neutral Sw Counter Compensated Voltage Max Primary VA E

x xxx.x Volts x.xx MVA
Lower Counter Primary Voltage PF @ Max VA E

x x.xx kV x.xxx PF
Raise Counter Primary Src Voltage Press ENT to reset

x x.xx kV Demand History
Press ENT to view Primary Current Press ENT to perform

specific Tap Stats xxx.x Amps Master Reset
Press ENT to clear Primary Watts

Tap Statistics x.xx MW
RTN Success Counter Primary VArs

00000 x.xx MVArs
RTN Status Primary VA

DISABLED x.xx MVA
Count to RTN Active Power Factor

00000 x.xxx LEAD/LAG
Frequency
xx.x Hz
At any menu screen:

Press EXIT to go to the Menu Header.
Press either   to move sideways to the adjacent Menu Header.
Figure A‑1 Monitor Menu Flow
A–2
Active Setpoint MONITOR SETPOINTS CONFIGURATION COMMUNICATION UTILITIES
Profile or Setpoint
Profile Selected
for Editing
Limits 1 Profile Settings Common Settings 1 Power Flow Forward 1 Power Flow Reverse 1
Block Raise Voltage Active Profile Reduction Step 1 % Bandcenter Fwd Bandcenter Rev
xxx.x Volts Profile :1 2.5 xxx.x Volts xxx.x Volts
Runback Deadband Profile to Edit Reduction Step 2 % Bandwidth Fwd Bandwidth Rev
x.x Volts Profile :1 5.0 x.x Volts x.x Volts
Block Lower Voltage Edit Profile 1 Name Reduction Step 3 %

xxx.x Volts "Empty" 7.5 LDC R Fwd LDC Z Fwd LDC R Rev LDC Z Rev
x Volts x Volts x Volts x Volts
Runup Deadband Repeats for LDC Selection

x.x Volts Profiles 2-4 RX LDC X Fwd LDC X Rev
x Volts x Volts
Runup Enable/Disable Timer Characteristic

disable DEFINITE Definite Delay Fwd Alternate Inverse Definite Delay Rev Alternate Inverse
xx Sec Delay Fwd xx Sec Delay Rev
Current Block Limit Timer Reset
Figure A‑2 Setpoints Menu Flow

xxx mA INTEGRATING
Rev Power Operation

BLOCK
Power Flow Reverse setting screens are only available when the
"Reverse Power Operation" selection under "Common Settings" is
selected to either REGULATE REVERSE, REG. R MEASURED SRC,
NONE
DISTRIBUTED GENERATION, AUTO DETERMINE or AUTO
DETERMINE MEASURED. If Distributed Generation is selected, then
only LDC values can be set.
Selecting BLOCK, IGNORE or RETURN TO NEUTRAL disables the
Power Flow Reverse setting screens.
At any menu screen:

A–3
Appendix – A
CONFIGURATION
SETP COMM
Continues on facing page →
UTILITIES MONITOR SETPOINTS CONFIGURATION COMMUNICATION

COMM MNTR UTIL SETP MNTR CNFG SETP COMM CNFG UTIL
Nameplate Run Through Neutral Remote Voltage Bias Tapchanger Type Tap Settings
CT Multiplier Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Tapchanger Type Tap Position/Cal

6000 X disable disable REGULATOR TYPE A 0
Lag % Pickup
75 Load VT Config Reset RTN Succ Ctr RVB HB Timer Regulator Vendor Tap Information
LINE_TO_GROUND Press ENT to begin 5 Secs Default INTERNAL KEEPTRACK
VAr Bias Volt Step
1.0 Volts Aux Curr Transformer Max Allowed Taps RVB Scale Factor Tap Limits
200 mA 4 1.0 disable/ENABLE
Max VAR Bias Time Tap Limits ENABLED
300 mins CT/Load VT Phasing Taps Between Runs Rev RVB Scale Factor
x Deg 1000 1.0 Tap Block Raise
xx
Enable VAr Bias
disable Load VT Multiplier Max Load Current
60.0 X 50 mA Tap Block Lower
xx
Auto/Man Sw Type Auto/Man Sw Type
NONE/TOGGLE SCAMP SWITCH Load VT Correction Max RTN Standby Ops
x.x Volts 20 Highest Tap
16
Not settable unless an
Comm Block Auto Scamp Init Pwrup external source of Tap
DON'T SAVE AUTO MODE CT/Source VT Phasing Position is selected
x Deg Lowest Tap
–16
Standard VR Source VT Multiplier

ENABLE 60.0 x Intertap Delay
x Sec
VRed Turnoff Time Source VT Correction

x Min x.x Volts Seal-in Fail Block
ENABLE
Smart VR Norm. VT. Multiplier

disable x.xx Op Counter Config Op Counter Config Op Counter Config
CAM FOLLOWER COUNT WINDOW 1X / 2X
Save VR at Power Off Power Display Option

DON'T SAVE SINGLE_PHASE Cam Follower Cam Follower Cam Follower
ENABLE disable disable
Smart VR LDC Regulator Type

disable TYPE A Counter Time Window X Mode Delay
0.5 Sec xx ms
Smart VR LDC R Output Selection

x Volts CONTINUOUS
Op Counter Preset
XXXXXX
Smart VR LDC X Output Pulse
x Volts X.X Sec
Ntrl Counter Preset
XXXXXX
Smart VR LDC Z Low Current Block
x Volts disable
Lower Counter Preset
XXXXXX
Fast Volt Recovery Max Cap Bank Size
disable 12000 KVAr
Raise Counter Preset
XXXXXX
Fast Volt R Setting Lead % Pickup
x.x V 75
Maximum Tap Wear
999999
IndTapWear Alrm Set

100 %
At any menu screen:

Figure A‑3 Configuration Menu Flow (1 of 3)
A–4
Appendix – A
CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION
SETP COMM SETP COMM
← Continues on facing page Continues on next page →
Paralleling Programmable Alarm System Clock
Paralleling Type Paralleling Type Paralleling Type Prog Alarm Function Set Date and Time
MASTER/FOLLOWER DISABLE DELTA VAR #2 –<0000000000000000 08/26/13 15:41:29
or
Auto/Man Switch Type set to SCAMP
DELTA VAR #2 (KT)
MASTER/FOLLOWER Paralleling Type Daylight Savings
NONE DELTA VAR #1 Prog Alarm Function disable
NORMAL/AS DEADMAN OUT
DVAR2 Sensitivity
Paralleling Address Paralleling Type x.x
xx CIRCULATING I Op Count Signal Alrm
0
DVAR2 Reac I Lmt
Num. Devices xxx mA
x Clear Sealin Alarm
Ready Press ENTER
DVAR2 I Ratio
T.P.R. Timeout x.xx
xxxxx ms Clr Low Current Blk
Ready Press ENTER
Breaker Option
xxxxxx Clr RTN Fail To Opr
Ready Press ENTER
Tap Difference
x
Clear Lockout Alarm

Ready Press ENTER
At any menu screen:

A–5
CONFIGURATION
SETP COMM
← Continues on previous page
Input Selection Mtr Current Profile CBEMA Setup Harmonics Setup Data Logging
Input Selection 1 Peak RMS % Change Use TapTalk For V 2-16 Har. Alarm Data Log Select
SWITCH STATUS xxx CBEMA in SOE or OSC 0000000000000000 111111111111111
Input Selection 2 Average RMS % Change Normal Voltage V 17-31 Har. Alarm Data Log Interval
NONSEQ INPUT xxx xxx.x Volts 00000000000000 5 mins
Input Selection 3 Duration % Change Event 1 V Alarm Threshold Press ENT to clear
VOLTAGE RED 2 xxx ENABLE 0 % Data Log Records
Init. Motor Current Event1 Sag Pickup I 2-16 Har. Alarm

Press ENT to reset xx % 0000000000000000
Event1 Sag Dropout I 17-31 Har. Alarm

xx % 00000000000000
Event1 Sag Min Dur I Alarm Threshold

1 cycles (xx ms) 0 %
Repeats for Min I Thresh. Enable

Events 2 thru 4 disable
Min I Thresh. ENABLED

Clear All Counters
Ready Press ENTER Min Fund I Threshold
200 mA

1 s
At any menu screen:

A–6
Appendix – A
MONITOR SETPOINTS CONFIGURATION COMMUNICATION UTILITIES

If Memory Card is present, the first menu

displayed under Communication is the
Memory Card menu, otherwise the
Memory Card menu is not displayed.
Ethernet HMI Bluetooth RS232 Comm Settings Memory Card
DHCP Enable Set LCD Contrast: E Bluetooth Enable Protocol Comm1 Port Type Load Setpoints
ENABLE ************ ENABLE MODBUS RS485 Press ENT to begin
IP Address User Line 1 E Bluetooth Reset Baud Rate Comm2 Port Type Save Setpoints
0.0.0.0 Beckwith Electric Ready Press ENTER 115200 RS232 Press ENT to begin
Net Mask User Line 1 E Bluetooth Protocol Parity Comm Protocol Save Datalog
0.0.0.0 M-2001D MODBUS NONE DNP3.0 Press ENT to begin
Gateway Level 1 Access Code Authentication Stop Bits DNP Configuration Save seq. of events
0.0.0.0 Press ENT to change disable TWO STOPBITS M2001D DNP DEFAULT Press ENT to begin
Enter Modbus Port Level 2 Access Code Friendly Name Sync Time CID File ID Save oscillograph
502 Press ENT to change M2001D 50 mS M2001D DEFAULT Press ENT to begin
Enter DNP Port Clear Osc Records Bluetooth Pass Reset Src Addr Validation Clone save
20000 Ready Press ENTER Ready Press ENTER disable Press ENT to begin
Auto Negotiation Oscillograph Message Control BT Device Substation Address Clone load
ENABLE ENABLE XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX x Press ENT to begin
Keepalive time Bluetooth Mode Feeder Address Load DNP Config

7200 sec MODE0 x Press ENT to begin
SNTP Enable Comm Address Save DNP Config

disable 1 Press ENT to begin
SNTP Server Address Baud Rate Save Metering Data

0.0.0.0 9600 Press ENT to begin
Time Zone GMT Parity Firmware Update

–5 Hr NONE Press ENT to begin
If IEC 61850 is purchased

Stop Bits
ONE STOPBIT Load IEC config
Press ENT to begin
Sync Time
2 mS Save IEC Config
Press ENT to begin
Output Pulse
1.5 Sec SD Quick Capture
Press ENT to begin

disable
Comm Access timeout

60 sec
TX Delay
10 ms
Heartbeat Option
Disabled
At any menu screen:

Figure A‑4 Communication Menu Flow
A–7
SETPOINTS CONFIGURATION COMMUNICATION UTILITIES MONITOR

MNTR CNFG SETP COMM CNFG UTIL COMM MNTR UTIL SETP
About Calibration/Test
Serial Number Bias Voltage

xxxxx Status/Test Mode
Firmware Version Mtr RMS Coefficient Load Voltage

D-0214V01.06.11 8192 X XXX.X Volts
EE Checksum Circ Cal. Coefficien Voltage Offset

XXXXXX 32767 X X
Last Loaded File CRC Circ Sin Coefficient Volt Cal Coefficient
XXX 0 X 32767 X
Hardware Number Circ Cos Coefficient Volt RMS Coefficient

1 8192 X 32762 X
LED Scroll Test Control Load I

Press ENT to begin x.x mA Lag/Lead
Input Test Curr Cal Coefficient

Press ENT to Begin 32767 X
Output Test Power Factor

Press ENT to test X.XXX Lag/Lead
Button Input Test I Sin Coefficient

Change Src Input I Cos Coefficient

press ENTER. 8192 X
Watchdog resets: X Motor Current

Total resets: X x.xx mA
Clear reset counters Mtr Cal. Coefficient

Press ENT to begin 8192 X
X1 Duration Mtr Sin Coefficient

0 ms, Avg: 0 ms 0 X
Alarm Activity Mtr Cos Coefficient

At any menu screen:

Figure A‑5 Utilities Menu Flow
A–8
Appendix – A
A.2 HMI Screen Review

Primary Voltage
Monitor/Metering X.XX kV
Load Voltage
Displays the calculated primary voltage based on
XXX.X Volts the user-selected voltage multiplier and measured
secondary voltage.
Displays the real-time measured value of voltage
at the regulator or the transformer, including the
voltage reduction if applicable and any corrections Primary Src Voltage
made using the user-selected VT correction voltage.
X.XX kV
Displays Primary Source Voltage based on the

Meter Out Voltage
user-selected Source VT Correction.
XXX.X Volts
Displays the measured voltage at the terminals of Primary Current

the M-2001D without any software modifications.
XXX.X Amps
Used as the base for normalizing voltage.
Displays the calculated primary current based on
the user-selected current multiplier and measured
Source Voltage
secondary current.
XXX.X V (Calculated) or (Measured)
Calculated - Displays the real-time calculated source Primary Watts

voltage-only applicable in regulator control
X.XX MW
applications and includes any corrections made
using the user-selected VT correction voltage. Displays the calculated primary quantity based
Measured - Displays the real-time measured source on the user-selected multipliers and measured
voltage when Reverse Power is detected and secondary voltage and current.
Reverse Power Operation is "Regulate Rev
Measured". Primary VArs
X.XX MVArs
Load Current
Displays the calculated primary quantity based
X.X mA LEAD/LAG on the user-selected multipliers and measured
Displays the real-time measured value of load secondary voltage and current.
current related to the scaling factor Current
Transformer of 200 mA. Primary VA
X.XX MVA
Circulating Current
Displays the calculated primary quantity based
X.X mA LEAD/LAG on the user-selected multipliers and measured
Displays the representable value of circulating
current, if the control is used with a Beckwith Electric
M-0115A Parallel Balancing Module or equivalent. Power Factor
Displays the value of DVAr Current when DVAr
Paralleling method is enabled. X.XXX LEAD/LAG
Displays the real-time calculated value of power factor.

Compensated Voltage
XXX.X Volts Frequency
Displays the calculated voltage at the “load center,” XX.X Hz
based on load current and the LDC settings. Displays the line frequency.
Figure A‑6 Monitor Screens (page 1 of 6)

A–9
Monitor/Present Demand Monitor/Demand History

Demand Interval Demand Interval
XX Min XX Min
Toggles between 5, 10, 15, 30 and 60 minute Toggles between 5, 10, 15, 30 and 60 minute
interval with a factory setting of 15 minutes. The time interval with a factory setting of 15 minutes. The time
interval is the amount of time it takes for a thermal interval is the amount of time it takes for a thermal
meter to indicate 90% of a change of load. meter to indicate 90% of a change of load.
Demand Load Voltage Min Load Voltage E

XXX.X Volts X.X Volts
Displays the real-time measured value of voltage at Displays minimum local voltage at the regulator
the regulator or transformer. This value continuously or transformer. Bottom line toggles between date/
averaged over consecutive 32-second intervals. time/Volts.
Demand Pri. Current Max Load Voltage E

XXX.X Amps XXX.X Volts
Displays the calculated primary demand current Displays maximum local voltage at the regulator
based on the user-selected current multiplier and or transformer. Bottom line toggles between date/
measured secondary current. time/Volts.
Demand Pri. Watts Max Pri. Current E

X.XX MW XXX.X Amps
Displays the demand value based on the Displays maximum primary current. Bottom line
user‑selected voltage and current multipliers or toggles between date/time/Amps.
Max Primary Watts E
Demand Pri. VArs X.XX MW
X.XX MVArs
Displays maximum Watts. Bottom line toggles
Displays the demand value based on the between date/time/W.
user‑selected voltage and current multipliers and
Max Primary VArs E
X.XX MVAr
Demand Pri. VA
X.XX MVA Displays maximum VAr. Bottom line toggles
between date/time/VAr.
Displays the demand value based on the
user-selected voltage and current multipliers and
measured secondary voltage and current. Max Primary VA E
X.XX MVA
Displays maximum VA. Bottom line toggles between

date/time/VA.
A–10
Appendix – A
Monitor/Demand History (Cont.'d) Monitor/Status

PF @ Max VA Press ENT to view
X.XXX PF Tapchanger Status
Displays power factor at time of maximum VA. TAP BDS PWR BLK VRD
Resets automatically when MAX VA screen, below,
is reset. 1 OK fwd --- Off
TAP Tap Position

Press ENT to reset BDS Band Status (Lo, Hi, OK)
Demand History PWR Power Direction (Fwd, Rev)
BLK Blocks in Effect
VRD Voltage Reduction (Off, 1, 2, 3)
Master Reset
Press ENT to view

Monitor/Energy Metering
Alarm Status
Watt Hours Fwd E
XX.XXX kWh A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T
Displays total forward WHr. Bottom line toggles 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
between date/time/WHR.
A = Block Raise Tap
B = Block Lower Tap
Lagging VAr Hours E
C = Block Raise Voltage
XX.XXX kVArh
D = Block Lower Voltage
Displays total forward VArHr. Bottom line toggles E = Voltage Reduction
between date/time/VArHr.
F = Power Direction
G = Current Limit
Watt Hours Rev E
H = Comm Block
X kWh
I = LDC/LDZ
Displays total reverse WHr. Bottom line toggles J = Abnormal Tap
between date/time/WHr. K = VAr Bias Lag
L = VAr Bias Lead
Leading VAr Hours E M = Backup Fail (If purchased)
X kVArh
N (*M) = DVar2 Over Curr (If purchased)
Displays total reverse VArHr. Bottom line toggles O (*N/**M) = Seal-in Failure
between date/time/VArHr. P (*O/**N) = Low Current Blk
Q (*P/**O) = RTN Fail
Press ENT to reset R (*Q/**P) = Ind Tap Wear
Energy Metering S (*R/**Q) = Op Count Signal
Press ENT to perform T (*S/**R) = Tap Changer Fail
Master Reset *These parameters will decrement by 1 letter if
Backup Power (M) is not purchased.
**These parameters will decrement by 2 letters if
Backup Power (M) and DVAr2 (N) are not purchased.
A–11
Monitor/Status (Cont.'d) Monitor/Motor Current

Alarm Status Key Peak RMS Curr
1 Alarm Enabled/Condition Met X.X mA (X.X) T
0 Alarm Enabled/Condition Not Met Displays the Peak RMS Current of the last operation
(profile). Also displays the average Peak RMS
X Alarm Disabled/Condition Met Current from the Training Mode (x.x). If a "T" is
- Alarm Disabled/Condition Not Met present, the Training Mode is active.
Press ENT to view Avg RMS Curr

Input Status X.X mA (XX.X) T
Displays the Average RMS Current of the last

C NS VR TC KT N MS operation (profile). Also displays the average
00 00 – – 0 RL 0 0 of the Average RMS Current from the Training
Mode (x.x). If a "T" is present, the Training Mode
C = Counter Contact is active.
NS = Non-Sequential Input
Profile Duration
VR = Voltage Reduction Inputs 1 and 2
XXXXX.X ms (XXXX.X) T
TC = Tap Connection
Displays the Profile Duration of the last operation
KT = Keeptrack Lower and Raise Input (profile). Also displays the average of the Profile
Duration from the Training Mode (x.x). If a "T" is
N = Neutral Tap Position
present, the Training Mode is active.
MS = Motor Seal-In
Key Peak Motor Current E
X.X mA
1 = True (on)
Displays the Peak Motor Current recorded. This
0 = False (off)
parameter is the highest Peak Motor Current
recorded by the control. This parameter is
Press ENT to view independent of the Peak RMS Current in the Motor
Current Profile.
Output Status
RAISE LOWER ALARM

1 0 0
RAISE Raise Contact

LOWER Lower Contact
ALARM Alarm Contact
Key
1 = True (on)
0 = False (off)
A–12
Appendix – A
Monitor/Harmonics Monitor/Tap Information

Voltage % THD Tap Position/Cal
X.X % 0
Displays the percent of Voltage THD. Displays the tap position of the tapchanger.
Recognizes tapchanges commanded via manual,
automatic or external (SCADA) means, if tap
Current % THD position is not disabled. The tap position can be
XX.X % calibrated by selecting ENT, then setting the tap
position using the / pushbuttons and selecting
Displays the percent of Current THD. ENT to confirm the new tap position.
Press ENT to view Drag Hands E

Voltage Harmonics L= 0 N R= 0 N
Allows the user to view individual Voltage Harmonic Displays minimum and maximum values of tap
Values (2-31). position since reset. (Section 5.2, Configuration)
Press ENT to view Definite Timer

Current Harmonic Raisexxs Lowerxxs
Allows the user to view individual Current Harmonic Displays the status of the raise, lower, and intertap
Values (2-31). timers; inverse or linear.
Intertap Timer
X %
Displays the status of the raise, lower, and intertap

timers; inverse or linear.
Operation Counter
0
Records the total number of raise and lower

operations. The operation counter will advance
based on the Operation Counter Configuration, as
set by user. This counter is not resettable, but can
be preset to any value between 0 and 999,999.
Resettable Counter E
X
Records the total number of raise and lower

operations as does the total operations counter,
discussed above. This counter is reset by pressing
ENT at this screen. This counter can be used to
monitor the number of tapchanges since the last
time it was checked.
A–13
Monitor/Tap Information (Cont.'d)

Neutral Sw Counter RTN Success Counter
x xxxxx
The Neutral Switch Counter is updated each The RTN counter increments after each successful
time the neutral input is detected. Neutral Switch operation of the Run Through Neutral feature.
Counter can also preset to any value. The Neutral
Switch Counter is a software counter that is stored
in non‑volatile memory and has a maximum value RTN Status
of 1,000,000. Disabled/Enabled
Displays the status of the Run Through Neutral

Lower Counter Feature.
x
Records the number of Lower operations, can be Count to RTN Active

Preset/Reset in Configuration/Tap Settings. xxxxx
Displays the number of counter operations since the

Raise Counter operations between runs setting was set, or since
x the feature was enabled. The counter will reset to
Records the number of Raise operations, can be through neutral.
Preset/Reset in Configuration/Tap Settings.
Press ENT to view

specific Tap Stats
Tap Tap Number

0 0 0.0 A
TAP = Tap Position

TAP Number = The number of tapchanges and the
Accumulated Primary Current for each individual
tap position on the Tapchanger control.
Press ENT to clear

Tap Statistics
Press ENT to confirm clearing tap statistics.
A–14
Appendix – A
Setpoints/Profile Settings
Active Profile Timer Characteristic
Profile: 1 DEFINITE
Provides the means to select the Active Profile Allows setting control timer for Definite or Inverse
(1, 2, 3 or 4). time. There are four setpoints associated with this
selection: Time Delay F/R, and Inverse Time F/R.
Profile to Edit
Profile: 1 Timer Reset
INTEGRATING
Selects the Setpoint Profile to be edited (1, 2, 3 or 4).
Toggles between integrating timer and instantaneous
reset (INST_RESET) timer upon voltage return to
Edit Profile 1 Name (2,3 or 4) in-band condition.
"Empty"
Allows the user to assign a profile name up to Rev Power Operation

16 standard alphanumeric characters. Alpha BLOCK
characters may be either upper or lower case.
Toggles between eight modes of operation:
Setpoints/Common Settings • BLOCK – to inhibit automatic tapchange
operation (Factory Setting)
Reduction Step 1 %
• REGULATE REVERSE/
2.5
REG. R MEASURED SRC – to detect
Voltage reduction can be achieved by contact or a reverse power condition and regulate
communication methods. First of three independent according to reverse power settings
steps of voltage reduction adjustable from 0% to • RETURN TO NEUTRAL – to drive the
10% in 0.1% increments of the bandcenter setpoint. tap position to Neutral
Factory setting is 2.5% .
• IGNORE – to continue unit action as
though Forward Power Flow continued to
Reduction Step 2 % exist
5.0 • DG Mode (Distributed Generation) – when
distribution systems have the possibility of
Voltage reduction can be achieved by contact or power reversal to control voltage
communication methods. Factory setting is 5.0%. • AUTO DETERMINE/
AUTO DETERMINE M – to allow the
Reduction Step 3 % control to intelligently choose which
reverse power mode applies at the time
7.5 reverse power is sensed, either Distributed
Voltage reduction can be achieved by contact or Generation mode or Regulate In Reverse/
communication methods. Third voltage reduction Regulate in Reverse Measured
step. Factory setting is 7.5%.
LDC Selection NONE
RX Allows one of three methods to be used for the
Allows the user to select between Line Drop control to switch between forward/reverse power
Compensation Resistance/Reactance or Z. operation. The three settings are None, Forward
Bias, and Reverse Bias.
Figure A‑7 Setpoints Screens (page 1 of 4)
A–15
Setpoints/Power Flow Forward

DEFINITE DELAY
Bandcenter Fwd
XXX.X Volts Definite Delay Fwd 

Forward power bandcenter is adjustable from XX Sec
100.0 V to 135.0 V in 0.1 V increments with a factory
setting of 120.0 V. Forward power time delay for a tapchange is
adjustable from 1 sec. to 360 sec. in 1 second
increments with a factory setting of 30 sec.
Bandwidth Fwd
X.X Volts
INVERSE DELAY
Forward power bandwidth is adjustable from 1.0 V
to 10.0 V in 0.1 V increments with a factory setting
of 2.0 V. Inverse Delay Fwd 

XX Sec
Forward power inverse delay for a tapchange is

LDC RES-REAC adjustable from 1 sec. to 360 sec. in 1 second
LDC R Fwd 

X Volts
Forward power Line Drop Compensation

resistance is adjustable from -72 V to +72 V in 1
V increments with a factory setting of 0 V.
LDC X Fwd
X Volts
Forward power Line Drop Compensation

reactance is adjustable from -72 V to +72 V in 1
V increments with a factory setting of 0 V.
LDC-Z
LDC-Z Fwd 

X Volts
Adjustable from 0 to 72 volts in 1 volt increments.
A–16
Appendix – A
Setpoints/Power Flow Reverse

DEFINITE DELAY
Bandcenter Rev
XXX.X Volts Definite Delay Rev 

Reverse power bandcenter is adjustable from xx Sec
100.0 V to 135.0 V in 0.1 V increments with a factory
setting of 120.0 V. Reverse power Definite delay for a tapchange is
Bandwidth Rev
X.X Volts
INVERSE DELAY
Reverse power bandwidth is adjustable from 1.0 V
to 10.0 V in 0.1 V increments with a factory setting
of 2.0 V. Inverse Delay Rev 

xx Sec
LDC RES-REAC Reverse power inverse delay for a tapchange is

LDC R Rev 

X Volts
Reverse power Line Drop Compensation

resistance is adjustable from -72 V to +72 V in 1
V increments, with a factory setting of 0 V.
LDC X Rev
X Volts
Reverse power Line Drop Compensation

reactance is adjustable from -72 V to +72 V in 1
V increments, with a factory setting of 0 V.
LDC-Z
LDC-Z Rev 

x Volts
Adjustable from 0 to 72 volts in 1 volt increments.
A–17
Setpoints/Limits
Block Raise Voltage Runup Deadband
XXX.X Volts X.X Volts
Overvoltage limit is adjustable from 95.0 V to Runup Deadband is adjustable from 1.0 V to 4.0 V
135.0 V in 0.1 V increments with a factory setting of in 0.1 V increments with a factory setting of 2.0 V.
128.0 V. The Block Raise setpoint should always be
set above the Block Lower setpoint and above the
upper band limit (the bandcenter plus one-half of the Runup Enable/Disable
bandwidth) for the control to operate. All automatic disable
Raise/Lower tap operations are blocked, when input
voltage is less than 85.0 Vdc. Enables or disabled the Voltage Runup feature.
Runback DeadBand Current Block Limit

X.X Volts XXX mA
Runback Deadband is adjustable from 1.0 V to 4.0 V Current Block Limit is adjustable from 50 mA to
in 0.1 V increments with a factory setting of 2.0 V. 640 mA in 1 mA increments with a factory setting of
640 mA with hysteresis of 5 mA. If the value of the
current exceeds the Current Block Limit setpoint,
Block Lower Voltage the unit will not permit automatic control.
XXX.X Volts
Undervoltage limit is adjustable from 95.0 V to

135.0 V in 0.1 V increments with a factory setting
of 114.0 V. The Block Lower setpoint should always
be set below the Block Raise setpoint and below
the lower band limit (the bandcenter minus one-
half of the bandwidth) for the control to operate. All
automatic Raise/Lower tap operations are blocked,
when input voltage is less than 85.0 Vdc.
A–18
Appendix – A
Configuration/Tapchanger Type
 NOTE: These screens display the Tapchanger Highest Tap
settings as selected by the user in
TapTalk and are for information purposes XX
only. The settings may not be changed
in the HMI. Not settable unless an external source of Tap
Position is selected. Allows the user to select the
range of a specific tapchanger (0 to 33 Taps).
Tapchanger Type
REGULATOR TYPE A Lowest Tap
XX
Regulator Vendor Not settable unless an external source of Tap
Default Position is selected. Allows the user to select the
range of a specific tapchanger (–33 to +29 Taps).
Configuration/Tap Settings
Intertap Delay
Tap Position/Cal XX sec
0
Adjustable from 0 to 60 Seconds in 1.0 second
Allows input of known tap position to calibrate the increments with a factory setting of 0 seconds.
unit tap position. This function is disabled when Tap
Information is disabled.
Seal-in Fail Block
Tap Information ENABLE
INTERNAL KEEPTRACK When enabled the operation of the tapchanger is
blocked when the control determines that a Motor
Toggles between ten modes of operation: XFMR Seal-in Failure has occurred.
External #3, XFMR External #2, XFMR External
#1, Reg External #3, Reg External #2, Reg
External #1, Contact KeepTrack™ 1R1L, Contact Op Counter Config
KeepTrack 1N, Internal KeepTrack™ and Disable. 1 X
Tap Limits Selects the contact operation sequence that will

cause the software counter to increment by one.
disable
Open/close/open (1X), open/close or close/open
Allows the tap position limits to be enabled/disabled. contact operation (2X). The Count Window mode
When enabled, the following Tap Block Raise and registers any activity as a valid input within the count
Lower setting screens will appear. window time setting. The Cam Follower setting is
used when a Cam Follower contact input is wired
into the Counter contact input of the M‑2001D. The
Tap Block Raise counter will increment when the counter input sees
XX the cam follower open and then close.
When enabled the Tap Block Raise Limit is

adjustable from –12 to +16 which includes a neutral Cam Follower
tap position. Default setting is 16. disable
Tap Block Lower Enables or disables the Cam Follower feature.

XX
When enabled the Tap Block Lower Limit is

adjustable from –16 to +12. Default setting is –16.
Figure A‑8 Configuration Screens (page 1 of 10)
A–19
Configuration/Tap Settings (Cont.'d)

X Mode Delay IndTapWear Alrm Set
XX ms 100 %
When the control is using 1X or 2X Mode counter A percentage setting with a range from 1 to 200%
contact detection method, the X Mode Delay setting which is used in conjunction with the Maximum Tap
in milliseconds can be used to delay the detection Wear setting to determine when the Individual Tap
of the NEUTRAL position switch. Wear Alarm is triggered. Default setting is 100%.
Counter Time Window Configuration/Paralleling

0.5 Sec Paralleling Type
DISABLE
When the control is using Count Window Mode
counter contact detection method, the counter time Toggles between six modes of operation, if
window may be set from 0.0 to 60.5 Seconds with purchased: Circulating I, DVAR1, DVAR2, DVAR2 +
a default setting of 0.5. KeepTrack™, Master/Follower and Disable. Factory
setting is Disable.
Op Counter Preset
XXXXXX DVAR2 Sensitivity
XX
The counter cannot be reset, but can be preset to
any value up to 999,999 in the Tap Settings menu. (DVAr2 and DVAr2 KT) Provides a method to control
how much the voltage bandcenter is shifted relative
to the delta VArs present between the circulating
Ntrl Counter Preset
current input and the load current input. The settings
XXXXXX for this screen are –4.0 to +4.0 in 0.1 increments,
which correspond to a sensitivity of 0.5 to 2 times
Provides the user with the capability to preset the
as sensitive (i.e., –4.0 = .5, –2.0 = .75, 0 = 1.00, 2.0
Neutral Counter to any value up to 999,999.
= 1.50, 4.0 = 2.00). The default setting is 0.0, for a
sensitivity of 1.
Lower Counter Preset
XXXXXX DVAR2 Reac I Lmt
The Lower Counter Preset allows the user to either XX mA
preset or reset the lower counter.
(DVAr2 and DVAr2 KT) Provides a method to
set a reactive current (VArs) limit between the
Raise Counter Preset circulating current input and the load current input.
If the reactive current reaches this setpoint, the
XXXXXX
operation of the M‑2001D will be blocked, and the
The Raise Counter Preset allows the user to either alarm output function will be activated, if enabled.
preset or reset the raise counter. The settings for this screen are 5 mA to 200 mA in
1 mA increments.
Maximum Tap Wear

999999
Allows the user to set a value from 1 to 999,999 for

the maximum number of times the regulator has
been on each tap before an alarm occurs.
A–20
Appendix – A
DVAR2 I Ratio Paralleling Address

X.XX XX
(DVAr2 and DVAr2 KT) Provides a method to adjust The Paralleling Address is the unique address for
the sensitivity to the circulating current input versus each device in the network. (1-16).
the load current input. When the setting is 0.50, the
control will be 0.50 times as sensitive to the VArs
from the circulating current versus the load current Num. Devices
input. At 1.00, the control will be equally sensitive X
to both current inputs. At 2.00, the control will be
2.00 times as sensitive to the VArs from circulating The number of total devices that are in the paralleling
current input versus the load current input. The scheme (maximum of 16 inclusive of the master).
settings for this screen are 0.50 to 2.00 in 0.01
increments. The default setting is 1.00 to obtain
T.P.R. Timeout
equally sensitive current inputs.
XXXXXX ms
Master/Follower The Tap Position Response Timeout is the period

(1000-60000 ms) that the Master waits following
None (Master,Follower)
a tapchange and subsequent message sent to
Determines the controls status in the Master/ followers to make the same tapchange that when
Follower paralleling scheme. A "None" setting allows expired will initiate a lockout if all followers have
the control to be removed from the scheme. not issued messages to the master confirming the
follower tapchange.
0 0 0 0 0 0
Line Breaker 0 = Not Selected
1 = Selected
Line Breaker Polarity 0 = Positive

1 = Negative
Right Tie Breaker 0 = Not Selected

1 = Selected
Right Tie Breaker Polarity 0 = Positive

1 = Negative
Left Tie Breaker 0 = Not Selected

1 = Selected
Left Tie Breaker Polarity 0 = Positive

1 = Negative
Figure A‑8(B) Master/Follower Breaker Option Settings
A–21
Configuration/Paralleling (Cont.'d)
Breaker Option Clear Sealin Alarm
XXXXXX Ready Press ENTER
The Breaker Option setting, see Figure A-8(B), Allows the user to reset the Motor Seal-In Alarm
allows the user to include Line Breaker Status, when the motor hold input has been restored.
Right Tie Breaker Status and Left Tie Breaker Status
in the Master/Follower scheme. Breaker Polarity
(Negative/Positive) is also able to be set. Clr Low Current Blk
Ready Press ENTER
Tap Difference Allows the user to clear the Low Current Block Alarm
X and Block. Alarm and Block occurs when the control
determines that load current is less than 4 mA and
The Tap Difference setting is the number of tap Tap Delta Voltage is less than .4 VAC.
positions between the Master and Follower tap
positions that when exceeded will result in lockout
of the control. Clr RTN Fail To Opr
Ready Press ENTER
Clear Lockout Alarm Allows the user to clear the Run Through Neutral
Ready Press ENTER Failure to Operate Alarm.
Allows the user to reset the lockout alarm at the Configuration/System Clock
control front panel.
Set Date and Time
Configuration/Programmable Alarm 03/26/07 15:41:29
Prog Alarm Function Displays and allows resetting of the time and date.
–<0000000000000000 Press ENT to set date; change mode indicated by
"C". Used in conjunction with drag hands memories
Provides alarm for one or more of the following where the date/time stamp will be recorded for each
user-selected conditions: Communication Block, drag hand quantity.
Block Raise Limit exceeded, Block Lower Limit
exceeded, Voltage Reduction (any step) invoked,
Reverse Power Flow condition detected, Line Limit Daylight Savings
Current exceeded, Tap Block Raise in effect, Tap disable
Block Lower in effect, LDC/LDZ in effect, Abnormal
Tap Position detected, VAr Bias Lag exceeded, VAr Allows automatic Daylight Savings time adjustment
Bias Lead exceeded, Backup Power fail detected to be enabled or disabled.
(if purchased), Tap Wear Limit exceeded, Operation
Count Limit exceeded, RTN Fail to Operate and Tap Configuration/Input Selection
Changer Failure detected. Factory setting is Disable.
(Bottom line of display indicates available alarms.) Input Selection 1
See Figure 5-5. SWITCH STATUS
Allows the Input Selection 1 to be used as a

Op Count Signal Alrm seal‑in input or a switch status input. When the
0 Switch Status input mode is selected, all Seal‑In
input functions will be disabled (Section 5.2,
When the resettable operations counter matches Configuration). The factory setting is Switch Status.
the Op Count Signal Alarm Setting, the control will A Switch Status setting is also required for "Contact
display a message that the Op Count Signal Alarm KeepTrack™ 1R1L" and "Contact KeepTrack 1N"
Setting has been exceeded. methods of tap knowledge.
A–22
Appendix – A
Configuration/CBEMA Setup
Input Selection 2 Normal Voltage
NONSEQ INPUT xxx.x Volts
Allows the non-sequential input to be used as the This parameter establishes the target voltage
Non-Sequential Input or as a SCADA Cutout input. around which the Event settings determine "Sag"
When SCADA Cutout is selected, all nonsequential or "Swell" conditions.
functions are disabled. (Section 5.2, Configuration)
Factory setting is Non-Sequential.
Event 1 (2, 3, 4)
ENABLE
Input Selection 3
VOLTAGE RED 2 Enables/Disables CBEMA Event 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Allows VR2 Input to be used as an Aux Status Input

that can be read via DNP or MODBUS®. Event 1 (2, 3, 4) Sag (Swell) Pickup
xx %
Configuration/Mtr Current Profile When pickup is set to less than 100% it operates as
Peak RMS % Change a Sag (undervoltage), greater than 100% it operates
as a Swell (overvoltage).
xxx
Setting for Peak RMS current programmable from

Event 1 (2, 3, 4) Sag (Swell) Dropout
110% to 200% of the stored Peak RMS current to
activate an alarm. xx %
Sag Dropout is always set greater than Sag Pickup.

Average RMS % Change Swell Dropout is fixed at 100%.
xxx
Event 1 (2, 3, 4) Sag (Swell) Min Dur
Setting for Average RMS current programmable
from 110% to 200% of the stored Average RMS 1 cycles (xx ms)
current to activate an alarm.
Establishes the minimum duration that Sag or Swell
condition exists before an Event is registered.
Duration % Change
xxx Clear All Counters
Setting for Duration current programmable from Ready Press ENTER
110% to 200% of the stored Duration current to
Clears all CBEMA Event Counters.
activate an alarm.
Init. Motor Current

Press ENT to reset.
Allows the user to reset all Motor Current Profiles

and initiate the "Training Mode".
A–23
Configuration/Harmonics Setup
V 2-16 Har. Alarm Harmonic Alarm Delay
0000000000000000 1 s
Provides the user with the means to select active Allows Harmonic Alarm Delay setting which is
harmonics for voltage alarm 2-16. applicable to both Voltage and Current Threshold
settings.
V 17-31 Har. Alarm
Configuration/Data Logging
00000000000000
Data Log Select
Provides the user with the means to select active
11111111111111
harmonics for voltage alarm 17-31.
Position From Right
V Alarm Threshold 1. Local Voltage
0 % 2. Compensated Voltage
3. Line Current
Allows the user to select the Harmonic Voltage 4. Load VA
Alarm Threshold value.
5. Load W
6. Load VAr
I 2-16 Har. Alarm 7. Power Factor
0000000000000000 8. Line Frequency
9. Tap Position
Provides the user with the means to select active
harmonics for current alarm 2-16. 10. Source Voltage
11. Primary Current
12. Circulating/DVAr Current
I 17-31 Har. Alarm 13. Operation Count
00000000000000 14. Meter Out Voltage
Provides the user with the means to select active Key
harmonics for current alarm 17-31. 1 = Enabled for Logging
0 = Logging Disabled
I Alarm Threshold
Data Log Interval
0 %
5 mins
Provides Current Alarm Threshold value input.
Press ENT to clear
Data Log Records
Min I Thresh. Enable
disable
Enables/Disables Minimum Current Threshold

feature.
Min Fund I Threshold

200 mA
Establishes minimum fundamental Current

Threshold for Current Harmonics 0 to 200 mA.
A–24
Appendix – A
Configuration/Nameplate
CT Multiplier CT/Source VT Phasing
6000 X 0 Deg
Adjustable from 1 to 32600 in 1 increments with a CT/VT phasing correction is adjustable from 0° to 330°
factory setting of 6000. User selection must include in 30° increments with a factory setting of 0°. This setting
knowledge of CT ratio, from primary rating to 0.2 A will advance the current phasor by the indicated value.
rating of control.
Source VT. Multiplier
Load VT Config 60.0 X
LINE_TO_GROUND
Adjustable from 0.1 to 3260.0 in 0.1 increments
VT configuration toggles between Line-to-Line with a factory setting of 60.0. User selection must
and Line-to-Ground with a factory setting of include knowledge of Source VT Ratio and sensing
Line-to-Ground. Source VT Ratio correction.
Aux Curr Transformer Source VT Correction

200 mA 0.0 Volts
▲ CAUTION: The current input to the control is VT ratio correction is adjustable from –15 V to +15
rated at 0.2 A continuous, 0.4 A for two hours, V in 0.1 V increments with a factory setting of 0 V.
and 4.0 A for one second.
Selection of display current can be made to be Norm. VT. Multiplier

either 200 mA, 1 A or 5 A. This screen allows load 1.00
and circulating current displays to be viewed on
200 mA, 1A or 5A scales. Line Limit I settings also Normalizing Voltage Multiplier 0.80 to 1.20 times
affected. (Section 5.1) the Compensating Voltage.
CT/LOAD VT Phasing Power Display Option

0 Deg SINGLE_PHASE
CT/VT phasing correction is adjustable from 0° to Toggles between two modes of operation:
330° in 30° increments with a factory setting of 0°. Single-Phase-based on measured inputs, and
This setting will advance the current phasor by the Three-Phase-based on measured inputs and
indicated value. presumed balanced system. Factory setting is
single-phase.
Load VT. Multiplier
60.0 X Regulator Type
TYPE A
Adjustable from 0.1 to 3260.0 in 0.1 increments with
a factory setting of 60.0. User selection must include Allows the regulator type to be selected as Type A
knowledge of VT ratio, sensing VT ratio correction. or B for correct source voltage calculation. Factory
setting is Type A.
Load VT Correction
0.0 Volts
VT ratio correction is adjustable from –15 V to +15 V

in 0.1 V increments with a factory setting of 0 V.
A–25
Configuration/Nameplate (Cont.'d)
Output Selection VAr Bias Volt Step
CONTINUOUS 1.0 Volts
Allows choice of output at tapchanger Raise/Lower Amount by which the control will increase or
output terminal. Choices are continuous or pulsed. decrease the Upper or Lower band edges when
For continuous, the control must wait to be in band there is a VAr Bias out of band situation.
or counter input valid for output to become disabled.
For pulsed, an adjustable pulse width will be applied
to the output triacs of 0.2 to 12 seconds. Max VAR Bias Time
300 mins
Output Pulse Maximum allowable time in minutes the control will
1.5 Sec bias the voltage edge.
Adjustable from 0.2 to 12 seconds in 0.1 second

increments. Factory set at 1.5 seconds. Enable VAr Bias
disable
Low Current Block Enables and disables the VAr Bias feature.
disable
Enables and disables the Low Current Block and Auto/Man Sw Type
Alarm feature. When enabled allows the control NONE
to determine when load current is less than 4 mA
and Tap Delta Voltage is less than .4 VAC to block Allows the Auto/Man switch type on the adapter
regulation and initiate the Low Current Block alarm. panel to be set to toggle, SCAMP or NONE. NONE
is used when no Auto/Manual switch exists.
Max Cap Bank Size

Comm Block Auto
12000 KVAr
DON'T SAVE
When VAr Bias is enabled provides the user with
the ability to set the largest capacitor bank size from If Auto/Manual Switch Type is set to "None"
4 to 12,000 KVAr. or "Toggle" allows the state of the "Block Auto
Operation" communication command to be saved
or not saved when power has been lost.
Lead % Pickup
75
SCAMP Init Pwrup
Defines a Lower negative VAr limit in percentage AUTO MODE/LAST SAVE
of the Max Cap Bank size below which the control
will increase the upper band edge by the amount If Auto/Manual Switch Type is set to "SCAMP" allows
defined by VAr Bias Voltage Step. the control to initialize the SCAMP status in either
"Auto Mode" or the "Last Save" position.
Lag % Pickup
Standard VR
75
ENABLE
Defines an Upper positive VAr limit in percentage
of the Max Cap Bank size above which the control Allows the user to Enable or Disable Standard
will decrease the lower band edge by the amount Voltage Reduction on the Control.
defined by VAr Bias Voltage Step.
A–26
Appendix – A
VRed Turnoff Time Smart VR LDC Z

0 Min x Volts
Settable from 0 to 999 minutes. 0 = Disabled. When Adjustable from 0 to 72 volts in 1 volt increments.
set from 1 to 999 it turns off any voltage reduction
invoked (via comms only) after the set time expires.
Fast Volt Recovery
disable
Smart VR
disable Allows the user Enable or Disable Fast Voltage
Recovery on the Control.
Allows the user to Enable or Disable Smart Voltage
Reduction on the Control. Smart Voltage Reduction,
when enabled, lowers voltage to between the Fast Volt R Setting
Bandcenter setting and the lower band edge x.x V
instead of stopping at the upper band edge. It also
disablesVAr Bias if it is in effect. The Fast Voltage Recovery setting range is from
1.0 to 15.0 volts outside the normal band edges in
0.1 V increments.
Save VR at Power Off
DON'T SAVE
Allows any Voltage Reduction command

communicated to the control to be saved or not
saved at power down.
Smart VR LDC
disable
Allows the user to Enable or Disable Smart Voltage

Reduction LDC on the Control. When "Smart VR
LDC" is enabled, the control ignores existing LDC
settings and instead uses the "Smart VR LDC" R
and X or Z settings to apply LDC while the Voltage
Reduction is in effect.
Smart VR LDC R
x Volts
Smart VR Line Drop Compensation resistance is

adjustable from -72 V to +72 V in 1 V increments
with a factory setting of 0 V.
Smart VR LDC X
x Volts
Smart VR Line Drop Compensation reactance is

adjustable from -72 V to +72 V in 1 V increments
with a factory setting of 0 V.
A–27
Configuration/Run Through Neutral Configuration/Remote Voltage Bias

Enable/Disable Enable/Disable
disable disable
Enables and Disables the Run Through Neutral Enables and Disables the Remote Voltage Bias
Feature. Feature.
Reset RTN Succ Ctr RVB HB Timer

Press ENT to begin xxx
Resets the Run Through Neutral Success Counter. The Remote Voltage Bias Heartbeat Timer setting
(2 to 120 sec) is the period that upon receiving the
remote voltage value the voltage bias is applied
Max Allowed Taps to the Bandcenter. If no remote voltage value is
x received and the timer times out the control will
revert to existing settings.
The Maximum Allowed Taps Setting (3 to 7)
determines the maximum number of taps that can
be taken to swipe the reversing switch. RVB Scale Factor
xxx.x
Taps Between Runs The Forward RVB Scale Factor (0.1 to 100.0) is the
xxxxx scale factor applied to the raw remote voltage value
obtained through communications.
This setting (10 to 10000) establishes the number
of taps that must be taken before the Run Through
Neutral Feature is activated. Rev RVB Scale Factor
xxx.x
Max Load Current The Reverse RVB Scale Factor (0.1 to 100.0) is the
xx mA scale factor applied to the raw remote voltage value
obtained through communications.
Establishes the Maximum Measured Load current
value (1 to 100 mA) that Load Current must be
less than to allow the Run Through Neutral feature
to activate.
Max RTN Standby Ops

xxxxx
The Maximum RTN Standby Operations setting (1 to

10000) is the number of Tap Operations that when
exceeded initiates the "RTN Fail to Operate" alarm.
A–28
Appendix – A
Communication/Comm Settings
Comm1 Port Type Feeder Address
RS485 x
M-2001D COM Port can be selected for two different The Feeder Address is utilized to set a specific
configurations: RS‑485 or Fiber Optics. communication identification for network addressing.
If set to zero the address is not in effect. The address
can be set from 1 to 65519.
Comm2 Port Type
RS232
Comm Address
M-2001D COM Port can be selected for two different 1
configurations: RS‑232 or Bluetooth.
Configures a three-digit numerical address, from
1 to 200, for remote communications. The factory
Comm Protocol setting is 1.
DNP3.0
Allows selection between standard protocols, Baud Rate

DNP 3.0 or MODBUS®. 9600
Selects baud rate for COM1, located on the top of

DNP Configuration the control.
M-2001D DNP DEFAULT
Displays the current DNP configuration. If no DNP Parity

configuration is present, then "File does not exist" NONE
will be displayed.
None, odd or even parity is available.
CID File ID
M2001D DEFAULT Stop Bits
ONE STOPBIT
Provides the user with the current CID File name
(up to 20 characters) loaded on the control. One or two stop bits are available.
Src Addr Validation Sync Time

disable 2 mS
Enables or Disables Source Address Validation in This time delay improves robust operation
the DNP3.0 protocol. when communication lines are intermittent.
Communication dead-sync time is the time that the
control will wait from the last received character
Substation Address and continue without attempting to resynchronize.
x Factory setting is 2 msec; range is 0-32000 msec.
The Substation Address is utilized to set a

specific communication identification for network Output Pulse
addressing. If set to zero the address is not in effect. 1.5 Sec
The address can be set from 1 to 65519.
Adjustable from 0.2 to 12 seconds in 0.1 second
increments. Factory set at 1.5 seconds.
Figure A‑9 Communication Screens (page 1 of 5)
A–29
Communication/Comm Settings (Cont.'d)

Comm Access Security Save Datalog
disable Press ENT to begin
The Comm Access feature when enabled allows Provides the user with the ability to save data log
the user to establish Level Access security for files to a Smart Flash SD Card from the unit.
MODBUS® communications regardless of physical
connection.
Save seq. of events
Press ENT to begin
Comm Access Timeout
60 sec Provides the user with the ability to save Sequence of
Events files to a Smart Flash SD Card from the unit.
Establishes the duration at which time
communications will be closed with the control
when no communication activity is sensed. Save oscillograph
Press ENT to begin
TX Delay Provides the user with the ability to save
10 ms Oscillograph files to a Smart Flash SD Card from
the unit.
Provides the means to delay transmission of a
response of a Serial Bus (RS-232, RS 485 or Fiber
Optic). Clone save
Press ENT to begin
Heartbeat Option Provides the user with the ability to save the entire
Disabled control settings to a Smart Flash SD Card with the
exception of the serial number.
Toggles between five modes of operation: LTC
(DNP), Regulator (DNP), Profile Switching (DNP),
Profile Switching (GOOSE) and Disabled. Clone load
Press ENT to begin
Communication/Memory Card Provides the user with the ability to load a clone
file on to a control to duplicate settings. Does not
Load Setpoints overwrite serial number of the target control.
Press ENT to begin
Provides the user with the ability to load setpoint Load DNP Config
files (Unit or Master) from a Smart Flash SD Card Press ENT to begin
into the unit.
Provides the user with the ability to load DNP
configuration files from a Smart Flash SD Card
Save Setpoints into the unit.
Press ENT to begin
Provides the user with the ability to save setpoint Save DNP Config
files (Unit or Master) to a Smart Flash SD Card Press ENT to begin
from the unit.
Provides the user with the ability to save DNP
configuration files to a Smart Flash SD Card from
the unit.
A–30
Appendix – A
Communication/Ethernet
Save Metering Data DHCP Enable
Press ENT to begin ENABLE
Provides the user with the capability to save all Allows DHCP Protocol to be enabled or disabled.
metering data to a Smart Flash SD Card.
IP Address
Firmware Update 0.0.0.0
Press ENT to begin
Either displays the assigned IP Address when
Provides the user with the ability to update the unit DHCP is enabled or allows the IP Address to be
firmware. manually assigned.
Load IEC Config Net Mask

Press ENT to begin 0.0.0.0
Provides the user with the capability to load IEC Either displays the assigned Net Mask when DHCP
Configuration files (*.cid) when IEC 61850 protocol is enabled or allows the Net Mask to be manually
has been purchased. assigned.
Save IEC Config Gateway

Press ENT to begin 0.0.0.0
Provides the user with the capability to save IEC Either displays the assigned Gateway when DHCP
Configuration files (*.cid) when IEC 61850 protocol is enabled or allows the Gateway to be manually
has been purchased. assigned.
SD Quick Capture Enter MODBUS Port

Press ENT to begin 502
The SD Card Quick Capture feature provides the Allows the MODBUS® port ID to be set. Default
means (in one step) to initiate a save of the following value is "502".
data files to the inserted SD Card (if they exist on
the control).
Enter DNP Port
• Control Clone
20000
• Data Logging
• Oscillography Allows the DNP port ID to be set. Default value is
"20000".
• Sequence of Events
• DNP Map
• Multi-user Access Code Auto Negotiation
• Multi-user Access Code Log ENABLE
When enabled allows the user to set the Ethernet

Port to a fixed speed of 100 mbps.
A–31
Communication/Ethernet (Cont.'d)
Keepalive time User Line 2 E
7200 sec M-2001D
The Keepalive Time feature applies only to the Allows input of 20 ASCII characters to configure a
Ethernet connection. If no communication activity unit locator or description. If not configured, a row
is detected on a previously open Ethernet socket of 15 asterisks will appear in bottom row of User
longer than the timeout setting the control will close Line #2 screen.
the socket and make it available for connection. The
setting range is from 1 to 50,000 seconds.
Level 1 Access Code
Press ENT to change
SNTP Enable
disable Configures a six-digit alpha/numerical Access Code
for Level 1. Factory setting is 000000 (disabled).
Enables the SNTP (Simple Network Time protocol)
to allow Network Time Synchronization.
Level 2 Access Code
Press ENT to change
SNTP Server Address
0.0.0.0 Configures a six-digit alpha/numerical Access Code
for Level 2. Factory setting is 222222.
Allows the user to enter the IP Address of the
network server.
Clear Osc Records
Ready Press ENTER
Time Zone GMT
-5 Hr Allows the user to clear Oscillograph records from
the HMI.
Allows the user to select the Time Zone that the
control resides in.
Oscillograph Message
Communication/HMI ENABLE
Set LCD Contrast: E Feature enables or disables the OSC Triggered

Message to be scrolled on the unit display when
an OSC record is available.
Allows contrast to be adjusted from +10 (lightest) to
–10 (darkest). Factory setting is 0, which provides
a neutral contrast.
User Line 1 E
Beckwith Electric
Allows input of 20 ASCII characters to configure

a unit locator or description. If not configured, a
row of 15 asterisks will appear in top row of User
Line #1 screen.
A–32
Appendix – A
Communication/Bluetooth
Bluetooth Enable Bluetooth Mode
ENABLE MODE0
Enables or disables the Bluetooth® feature when The Bluetooth mode can be set to Mode0 in which
installed on the control. the control is discoverable and connectable to any
client station, or Mode1 in which the control is
non‑discoverable but is connectable to any client
Bluetooth Reset station that knows the control Bluetooth device
Ready Press ENTER address.
Allows the user to reset the Bluetooth Module to Communication/RS232

"Beckwith" factory default settings.
Protocol
Bluetooth Protocol MODBUS
MODBUS Allows selection between standard protocols,
DNP3.0 or MODBUS.
Provides the ability to select either MODBUS® or
DNP3.0 protocol.
Baud Rate
Authentication 115200
disable Selects Baud Rate for the RS232 port.
Enables or disables Authentication and provides
the means to enter a Pass Key when set (1 to 16 Parity
characters). NONE
None, odd or even parity is available.

Friendly Name
M2001D
Stop Bits
Allows the user to name the unit (maximum of 32 TWO STOPBITS
characters).
One or Two Stop Bits are available.
Ready Press ENTER Sync Time
50 mS
The Bluetooth Passkey can be reset to default
conditions (no Passkey and Authentication This time delay improves robust operation
Disabled) if necessary. when communication lines are intermittent.
Communication dead-sync time is the time that the
control will wait from the last received character
Control BT Device and continue without attempting to resynchronize.
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX Factory setting is 50 msec; range is 0-32000 msec.
Displays the Bluetooth MAC address of the control.
A–33
Utilities/Calibration-Test
Bias Voltage Power Factor
Status/Test Mode X.XXX Lag
When ENT is pressed, the control status can be Provides the user with the real-time Power Factor
checked, and a bias test voltage can be entered to value.
test the control’s automatic operation (see Chapter
8, Section 8.5, Bias Voltage Status/Test Mode,
Figure 8-3). I Sin Coefficient
0 X
Load Voltage Current Sine Coefficient calibration factor. Requires
XXX.X Volts Level 3 Access to change.
Displays the real-time measured value of voltage

at the regulator or the transformer, including the I Cos Coefficient
voltage reduction if applicable and any corrections 8192 X
made using the user-selected VT correction voltage.
Displays the PF Factor Cosine correction factor as
determined by Autocal. Can also be manually set.
Voltage Offset However, Beckwith Electric does not recommend
X manual setting of this parameter.
Voltage calibration count offset from ADC reference

value. Requires Level 3 Access to change. Motor Current
x.xx mA
Volt Cal Coefficient Displays the real-time measured value of motor
32767 X current.
Voltage calibration factor. Requires Level 3 Access

to change. Mtr Cal. Coefficient
8192 X
Volt RMS Coefficient Motor Calibration Coefficient calibration factor.
32762 X Requires Level 3 Access to change.
Voltage RMS calibration factor. Requires Level 3

Access to change. Mtr Sin Coefficient
0 X
Control Load I Motor Sine Coefficient calibration factor. Requires
x.x mA Lag Level 3 Access to change.
Displays the real-time measured value of load

current related to the scaling factor Current Mtr Cos Coefficient
Transformer of 200 mA, 1 A or 5A. 8192 X
Motor Cosine Coefficient calibration factor. Requires

Curr Cal Coefficient Level 3 Access to change.
32767 X
Current calibration factor. Requires Level 3 Access

to change.
Figure A‑10 Utilities Screens (page 1 of 3)
A–34
Appendix – A
Utilities/Calibration-Test (Cont.'d)
Mtr RMS Coefficient Output Test
8192 X Press ENT to test
Motor RMS calibration factor. Requires Level 3 Provides the means to test all outputs from the
Access to change. control.
Cir Cal. Coefficien Button Input Test

32767 X Press ENT to Begin
Circulating Current calibration factor. Requires Level 3 Provides the means to verify proper operation of
Access to change. each front panel pushbutton from the HMI.
Circ Sin Coefficient Change Src Input

0 X press ENTER.
Circulating Current Sine Coefficient calibration Pressing Enter will cause the source side PT voltage
factor. Requires Level 3 Access to change. to be measured instead of being calculated. The
second line on the LCD screen will display
Circ Cos Coefficient Measured XXXXX V
8192 X Pressing Enter will toggle to the calculated source
side voltage and the second line on the LCD screen
Circulating Current Cosine Coeffiecient calibration will display
factor. Requires Level 3 Access to change.
Calculated XXXX V
LED Scroll Test

Watchdog resets: X
Press ENT to begin
Total resets: X
Momentarily illuminates each LED on the control
panel. Push EXIT to stop. This shows the total number of watchdog resets
and total resets which include Power down and
watchdog resets.
Input Test
Press ENT to Begin
Clear reset counters
Provides the means to test all external inputs to Press ENT to begin
the control.
This clears Watchdog Resets and Total Resets
counters.
A–35
Utilities/Calibration-Test (Cont.'d) Utilities/About

X1 Duration Serial Number
0 ms, Avg:0 ms XXXXX
When the Operation Counter is configured as X1, Displays the unit serial number.
the X1 duration is the instantaneous measure of the
X1 pulse generated by the counter contact switch.
It also displays the average X1 pulse duration over Firmware Version
the last 8 tap operations. The user can use this D-0214V01.00.04
measurement to set the X mode Delay.
Displays the firmware version that is loaded onto
When the Operation Counter is configured as X2, the control.
the X1 Duration will always display ZERO since this
is not applicable to X2 mode of Operation.
EE Checksum
XXXXXX
Alarm Activity
Press ENT to Begin Displays EE Prom Checksum value.
The Alarm Activity feature provides the means to

display all active screen messages that are active Last Loaded File CRC
on the control. XXX
Displays the CRC of the Last Loaded Settings file.
Hardware Number
1
The Hardware Number is used for identifying the

control hardware type.
1 = Pre 180 V Version of M-2001D hardware.
3 = 180 V Version of M-2001D hardware.
A–36
Appendix – B
Appendix B
Setpoint, Configuration and
Communication Record Forms
Setpoints.................................................................................. B–2
Configuration............................................................................ B–8
Tap Settings........................................................................... B–12
Alarms.................................................................................... B–14
Wakeup Screens.................................................................... B–14
Data Logging.......................................................................... B–15
Harmonics Setup................................................................... B–15
Oscillograph Setup................................................................. B–16
Sequence of Events Setup..................................................... B–17
CBEMA Setup........................................................................ B–19
Comm Settings...................................................................... B–20
B–1
Setpoints
PROFILE 1
General
Line Drop Compensation o R, X [R, X] oZ
Time Delay Selection o Definite Time [Definite Time] o Inverse Time
Basic Timer Type o Integrating [Integrating] o Instant Reset
Power Direction Bias o None [None] o Forward o Reverse
Voltage Reduction
Step 1 0.0 to 10.0 (%) of Bandcenter Setpoint [2.5] (______________ )
Limit and Runback/Runup

Block Raise 95.0 to 135.0 (V) [128.0] (________________)
Block Lower 95.0 to 135.0 (V) [114.0] (________________)
Runback Deadband 1.0 to 4.0 (V) [2.0] (________________)
Runup Deadband 1.0 to 4.0 (V) [2.0] (________________)
Runup o Disable [Disable] o Enable
Current Limit 50 to 640 (mA) [640] (________________)
Forward Power
Band Center 100.0 to 135.0 (V) [120.0] (________________)
Band Width 1.0 to 10.0 (V) [2.0] (________________)
Definite Time 1 to 360 (sec) [30] (________________)
LDC-Z 0 to 72 (V) [0] (________________)
LDC Resistance –72 to +72 (V) [0] (________________)
LDC Reactance –72 to +72 (V) [0] (________________)
 NOTE: [ ] Default Setting

Figure B‑1 Setpoints Record Form (1 of 6)
B–2
Appendix – B
Setpoints (Cont'd)
Profile 1 (Cont'd)
Reverse Power
Operation o Block [Block] o Regulate Forward (Ignore)
o Regulate Reverse o Return to Neutral
o Regulate Reverse (Measured) o Distributed Generation
o Auto Determination (Measured) o Auto Determination
Band Center 100.0 to 135.0 (V [120.0] (________________)
Band Width 1.0 to 10.0 (V) [2.0] (________________)
LDC-Z 0 to 72 (V) [0] (________________)
PROFILE 2
General
Voltage Reduction

B–3
Setpoints (Cont'd)
Profile 2 (Cont'd)
Block Raise 95.0 to 135.0 (V) [128.0] (________________)
Block Lower 95.0 to 135.0 (V) [114.0] (________________)
Forward Power
Band Center 100.0 to 135.0 (V) [120.0] (________________)
Band Width 1.0 to 10.0 (V) [2.0] (________________)
LDC-Z 0 to 72 (V) [0] (________________)
Reverse Power
Band Center 100.0 to 135.0 (V [120.0] (________________)
Band Width 1.0 to 10.0 (V) [2.0] (________________)
LDC-Z 0 to 72 (V) [0] (________________)

B–4
Appendix – B
Setpoints (Cont'd)
PROFILE 3
General
Voltage Reduction

Block Raise 95.0 to 135.0 (V) [128.0] (________________)
Block Lower 95.0 to 135.0 (V) [114.0] (________________)
Forward Power
Band Center 100.0 to 135.0 (V) [120.0] (________________)
Band Width 1.0 to 10.0 (V) [2.0] (________________)
LDC-Z 0 to 72 (V) [0] (________________)

B–5
Setpoints (Cont'd)
Profile 3 (Cont'd)
Reverse Power
Band Center 100.0 to 135.0 (V [120.0] (________________)
Band Width 1.0 to 10.0 (V) [2.0] (________________)
LDC-Z 0 to 72 (V) [0] (________________)
PROFILE 4
General
Voltage Reduction

B–6
Appendix – B
Setpoints (Cont'd)
Profile 4 (Cont'd)
Block Raise 95.0 to 135.0 (V) [128.0] (________________)
Block Lower 95.0 to 135.0 (V) [114.0] (________________)
Forward Power
Band Center 100.0 to 135.0 (V) [120.0] (________________)
Band Width 1.0 to 10.0 (V) [2.0] (________________)
LDC-Z 0 to 72 (V) [0] (________________)
Reverse Power
Band Center 100.0 to 135.0 (V [120.0] (________________)
Band Width 1.0 to 10.0 (V) [2.0] (________________)
LDC-Z 0 to 72 (V) [0] (________________)

B–7
Configuration
Primary
Voltage Multiplier 0.1 to 3260.0 (X) [60.0] (________________)
Voltage Source Multiplier 0.1 to 3260.0 (X) [60.0] (________________)
Current Multiplier 1 to 32600 (X) [6000] (________________)
Primary Power Display o Single Phase [Single Phase] o Three Phase
VT/CT Load
Normalizing Voltage Multiplier 0.80 to 1.20 (X) [1.00] (________________)
VT Correction –15.0 to +15.0 (V) [0.0] (________________)
CT/VT Phasing o 0 degree [0 degree] o 30 degrees

o 60 degrees o 90 degrees
Aux Current Transformer o 200 mA [200 mA] o 1 Amp o 5 Amp
VT Configuration o Line to Line o Line to Ground [Line to Ground]
VT/CT Source
VT Source Correction –15.0 to +15.0 (V) [0.0] (________________)
CT/VT Source Phasing o 0 degree [0 degree] o 30 degrees

Raise/Lower Output Contacts

o Continuous [Continuous] o Pulsed
Pulse Width 0.2 to 12.0 (sec) [1.5] (________________)

Figure B‑2 Configuration Record Form (1 of 4)
B–8
Appendix – B
Configuration (Cont'd)
Motor Current Settings

Peak Rms Current 110 to 200 (%) [110] (________________)
Average Rms Current 110 to 200 (%) [110] (________________)
Average Duration 110 to 200 (%) [110] (________________)
Program Alarm Relay Mode

o Normal [Normal] o Deadman Out
Low Current Block

o Disable [Disable] o Enable
Inputs and Switch

 NOTE: Input Selection 1 must be set to "Switch Status" if Tap Position Knowledge is to be selected to
either "Contact KeepTrack™ 1R1L" or "Contact KeepTrack 1N".
Input Selection 1 o Switch Status [Switch Status] o Seal-In Input
Input Selection 2 o Non-sequential [Non-sequential] o SCADA Cutout
Input Selection 3 o VR2 [VR2] o Aux
Auto/Man Switch Type o None [None] o Toggle o SCAMP
Regulator
o Type A [Type A] o Type B
Voltage Reduction (VR)

Standard Voltage Reduction o Disable o Enable [Enable]
Smart Voltage Reduction o Disable [Disable] o Enable
Smart VR LDC o Disable [Disable] o Enable
Smart VR LDC Resistance –72 to +72 (V) [0] (________________)
Smart VR LDC Reactance –72 to +72 (V) [0] (________________)
Smart VR LDC-Z 0 to 72 (V) [0] (________________)
Com VR Turnoff Timer 0 to 999 (Min) [0] (________________)
Save VR at Power Off o Don't Save [Don't Save] o Save

B–9
Var Bias
Max Capacitor Bank Size 4 to 12000 (Kvar) [12000] (________________)
Lead % Bank Size Pickup 10 to 100% [75] (________________)
Lag % Bank Size Pickup 10 to 100% [75] (________________)
VAr Bias Voltage Step 0.1 to 2.0 (V) [1.0] (________________)
Max VAr Bias Duration 10 to 1440 (min) [300] (________________)
Remote Voltage Bias (RVB)

RVB Scale Factor 0.1 to 100.0 [1.0] (________________)
RVB Heartbeat Timer 2 to 120 (sec) [5] (________________)
Reverse RVB Scale Factor 0.1 to 100.0 [1.0] (________________)
Run Through Neutral (RTN)

Maximum Allowed Taps 3 to 7 [4] (________________)
Tap Operations Between Runs 100 to 10000 [1000] (________________)
Maximum Load Current 1 to 100 (mA) [50] (________________)
Max RTN Standby Operations 1 to 10000 [20] (________________)
Fast Voltage Recovery

Fast Voltage Recovery 1.0 to 15.0 (V) [5.0] (________________)
Save Comm Block at Power Off

o Save o Don't Save [Don't Save]
SCAMP Initialize on Power Up
o Last Save o Auto Mode [Auto Mode]

B–10
Appendix – B
Paralleling
Paralleling Type o Disable [Disable] o Circ. Current
DVAr 1
o o DVAr 2
DVAr 2 (Keep Track)

o o Master/Follower
DVAr2/DVAr2 (KeepTrack) Settings

Sensitivity –4.0 to 4.0 [0.0] (________________)
Cir. Current Limit (Reactive) 5 to 200 (mA) [200] (________________)
Input Ratio (Load/parallel) 0.50 to 2.0 [1.00] (________________)
Master/Follower Settings
Master/Follower Configuration o None [None] o Follower o Master
Paralleling Address 1 to 16 [1] (________________)
Number of Devices 2 to 16 [2] (________________)
Tap Difference 2 to 8 [2] (________________)
Tap Pos. Response Timeout 1000 to 60000ms [1000] (________________)
Line Breaker o Not in Use [Not in Use] o In Use

o Positive Polarity [Positive Polarity] o Negative Polarity
Right Tie Breaker o Not in Use [Not in Use] o In Use

Left Tie Breaker o Not in Use [Not in Use] o In Use


B–11
Tap Settings
General
Tap Information o Disabled o Regulate Internal (KeepTrack™) [Regulate Internal]
o Reg external #1 o Reg external #2
o XFMR external #1 o XFMR external #2
o XFMR external #3 o Reg external #3
o Contact Keep Track 1R1L o Contact Keep Track 1N
Intertap Delay 0 to 60 (sec) [0] (________________)
Tap Limits
Block Raise 12 Lower to 16 Raise [16] (________________)
Block Lower 16 Lower to 12 Raise [–16] (________________)
Highest Tap 0 Neutral to 33 Raise [16] (________________)
Lowest Tap 33 Lower to 29 Raise [–16] (________________)
Operation Counter
Configuration o X1 [X1] o X2 o Count Window o Cam Follower
X Mode Delay 0 to 3000 (mS) [10] (________________)
Count Window 0.5 to 60.5 (sec) [0.5] (________________)
Preset 0 to 999999 [0] (________________)
Alarm Limit 0 to 999999 [0] (________________)
Neutral Counter 0 to 999999 [0] (________________)

Figure B‑3 Tap Settings Record Form (1 of 2)
B–12
Appendix – B
Tap Settings (Cont'd)
Block Automatic Operation on Motor Seal-in Failure

Motor Seal-in Failure Block o Disable o Enable [Enable]
Tap Statistics
Maximum Tap Wear 1 to 65534 [65534] (________________)
Individual Tap Wear Alarm 1 to 200% [100%] (________________)
Tap Calibration
 NOTE: Set to match actual tap position as read on the physical tap position indicator.
Tap Position –16 to +16 (Neutral) [0] (________________)
Tap Calibrate o Yes o No [No]

Figure B‑3 Tap Settings Record Form (2 of 2)
B–13
Alarms
Programmable Alarm Relay

o Comm Block o Max VAr Bias Duration - LEAD o Reverse Power
o Block Raise (Tap) o Max VAr Bias Duration - LAG o Block Lower (Volt)
o Block Lower (Tap) o Individual Tap Wear o Abnormal Tap Position
o Block Raise (Volt) o LDC/LDZ o Backup Power Fail
o Voltage Reduction o Line Current Limit o RTN Fail to Operate
o Op Count Signal o Tap Changer Failure
Wakeup Screens
o Load Voltage o Operation Counter o Maximum Primary Watts

o Source Voltage o Resettable Op Counter o Minimum Primary VArs
o Load Current o Demand Load Voltage o Maximum Primary VArs
o Circulating/DVAr Current o Demand Primary Current o Minimum Primary VA
o Compensated Voltage o Demand Primary Watts o Maximum Primary VA
o Primary Voltage o Demand Primary VArs o Power Factor @Minimum VA
o Primary Current o Demand Primary VA o Power Factor @Maximum VA
o Primary Watts o Energy Metering Watt Hrs Fwd o Lag Power Factor
o Primary VArs o Energy Metering Watt Hrs Rev o Lead Power Factor
o Primary VA o Energy Metering VAr Hrs Lag o Peak Motor Current
o Power Factor o Energy Metering VAr Hrs Lead o Normalizing Voltage
o Frequency o Minimum Load Voltage o Meter Out Voltage
o Voltage % THD o Maximum Load Voltage o Min Source Voltage
o Current % THD o Minimum Primary Current o Max Source Voltage
o Tap Position o Maximum Primary Current o Time and Date
o Tap Drag Hands o Minimum Primary Watts

Figure B‑4 Alarms and Wakeup Screens Record Form
B–14
Appendix – B
Data Logging
Logging Timer
Data Log Interval 0 to 120 (minute) [5] (________________)
Duration [451 Day 09:20:00] (_____________________________)
Harmonics Setup
Voltage Harmonics Selection ( Default Selection)

2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th
10th 11th o 12th 13th 14th 15th o 16th 17th
o 18th o 19th o 20th o 21st o 22nd o 23rd o 24th o 25th
o 26th o 27th o 28th o 29th o 30th o 31st
Voltage Alarm Threshold V Percent 0.0 to 30.0 % [0.0] (______________ )
Current Harmonics Selection ( Default Selection)

2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th
o 10th 11th o 12th 13th 14th 15th o 16th 17th
o 18th o 19th o 20th o 21st o 22nd o 23rd o 24th o 25th
o 26th o 27th o 28th o 29th o 30th o 31st
Current Alarm Threshold I Percent 0 to 100 % [0] (______________ )
Minimum Fundamental Current Threshold o Disable [Disable] o Enable
Min Fund I Threshold 0 to 200.0 mA [200.0] (______________ )
Harmonic Alarm Delay 1 to 10 Sec. [1] (______________ )

Figure B‑5 Data Logging and Harmonics Setup Record Form
B–15
Oscillograph Setup
Number of Partitions 1 to 16 [5] (______________ )
Samples/Cycle 16, 32, 64 [32] (______________ )
Post Trigger Delay 5 to 95 % [50] (______________ )
Front Panel Message o Enable [Enable] o Disable
Pickup ( Default Selection)

o Raise Contact o Lower Contact o VR Contact 1 o VR Contact 2
o Force Lower (Runback) o Raise Tap Limit o Lower Tap Limit o Low Band
o High Band Low Voltage Limit High Voltage Limit o Auto Inhibit
o Non Sequential o Reverse Power o Peak Motor Current o Avg. Motor Curent
o Motor Current Duration o Voltage Harmonics o Current Harmonics CBEMA 1
CBEMA 2 CBEMA 3 CBEMA 4 o VAr Bias Active
o Sealin Fail Alarm Active o Sealin Fail Low Blk Act. o Sealin Fail Raise Blk Act. o Low Current Blk Act.
o Motor Seal-in Input o Neutral Input o Counter Input o Op Count Signal
o Individual Tap Wear Alarm
Dropout
o High Band o Low Voltage Limit o High Voltage Limit o Auto Inhibit
o Non Sequential o Reverse Power o Voltage Harmonics o Current Harmonics
o CBEMA 1 o CBEMA 2 o CBEMA 3 o CBEMA 4
o VAr Bias Active o Sealin Fail Alarm Act. o Sealin Fail Low Blk Act. o Sealin Fail Raise Blk Act.
o Low Current Blk Act. o Motor Seal-in Input o Neutral Input o Counter Input
o Op Count Signal
o Individual Tap Wear Alarm

Figure B‑6 Oscillograph Setup Record Form
B–16
Appendix – B
Sequence Of Events Setup
OR Gate Setup
Pickup (Edge Sensitive) ( Default Selection)
Force Lower (Runback) Raise Tap Limit Lower Tap Limit o Low Band
o High Band Low Voltage Limit High Voltage Limit Auto Inhibit
Non Sequential Reverse Power o Peak Motor Current o Avg. Motor Curent
o Motor Current Duration o Voltage Harmonics o Current Harmonics CBEMA Event 1
CBEMA Event 2 CBEMA Event 3 CBEMA Event 4 VAr Bias Active

o HMI Active o Individual Tap Wear Alarm
Dropout (Edge Sensitive) ( Default Selection)

Force Lower (Runback) Raise Tap Limit Lower Tap Limit o Low Band
o High Band Low Voltage Limit High Voltage Limit Auto Inhibit
o CBEMA Event 1 o CBEMA Event 2 o CBEMA Event 3 o CBEMA Event 4
VAr Bias Active o Sealin Fail Alarm Act. o Sealin Fail Low Blk Act. o Sealin Fail Raise Blk Act.
o Op Count Signal

Figure B‑7 Sequence of Events Setup Record Form (1 of 2)
B–17
Sequence Of Events Setup
AND Gate Setup

Pickup (Level Sensitive)
o Non Sequential o Reverse Power o Peak Motor Current o Avg. Motor Curent
o Motor Current Duration o Voltage Harmonics o Current Harmonics o CBEMA Event 1
o CBEMA Event 2 o CBEMA Event 3 o CBEMA Event 4 o VAr Bias Active
Dropout (Level Sensitive)

o CBEMA Event 1 o CBEMA Event 2 o CBEMA Event 3 o CBEMA Event 4
o VAr Bias Active o Sealin Fail Alarm Act. o Sealin Fail Low Blk Act. o Sealin Fail Raise Blk Act.
o Op Count Signal
SOE Final Gate o OR [OR] o And

Figure B‑7 Sequence of Events Setup Record Form (2 of 2)
B–18
Appendix – B
CBEMA Settings
Normal Voltage 100.0 to 130.0 V [120.0] (______________ )
CBEMA Event 1 o Disable o Enable [Enable]
Sag/Swell/Swell Pickup 50 to 130% [70] (______________ )
Sag/Swell Dropout 71 to 130% [95] (______________ )
Sag/Swell Minimum Duration 1 to 60 Cycles [1] (______________ )
Sag/Swell Pickup 50 to 130% [80] (______________ )

Figure B‑8 CBEMA Setup Record Form
B–19
Comm Settings
RS485/Fiber
Comm Port Type o RS485 [RS485] o Fiber
Protocol o DNP3 [DNP3] o MODBUS®
Baud Rate o 300 o 600

o 1200 o 2400
o 4800 o 9600 [9600]
o 19200 o 38400
o 57600 o 115200
Parity o NONE [NONE] o EVEN o ODD
Stop Bit o 1 [1] o2
Sync Time 1 to 5000 [2] max 5000 ms (______________)
Tx Delay 1 to 50 [10] max 50 ms (______________)
Serial RS232
Protocol o MODBUS [MODBUS] o DNP3
Baud Rate o 300 o 600

o 1200 o 2400
o 4800 o 9600
o 19200 o 38400
o 57600 o 115200 [115200]
Parity o NONE [NONE] o EVEN o ODD
Stop Bit o 1 o 2 [2]
Sync Time 1 to 5000 [50] max 5000 ms (______________)

Figure B‑9 Comm Settings Record Form (page 1 of 3)
B–20
Appendix – B
Comm Settings (Cont'd)
Ethernet
Auto Negotiation o Disable o Enable [Enable]
DHCP Protocol o Disable o Enable [Enable]
IP Address [0.0.0.0] (_________________ )
Net Mask [0.0.0.0] (_________________ )
Gateway [0.0.0.0] (_________________ )
Keepalive Time 1 to 50,000 (Sec) [7200] (_______________ )
Port
MODBUS® Port 0 to 65,535 [502] (_______________ )
DNP3.0 Port 0 to 65,535 [20000] (_______________ )
Network Time Synchronization

SNTP o Disable [Disable] o Enable
SNTP Server Address [X.X.X.X] (_____________________ )
Time Zone [GMT –5 Hr] (_____________________ )
Change Communication Address

Communication Address
Address: 1 to 65519 [1] (_______________ )
Modbus Address: (_______________ )
Substation
Address: 0 to 65519 [0] (_______________ )
Feeder
Address: 0 to 65519 [0] (_______________ )
Communication Access Security

Communication Access and Timeout
Communication Access o Disable [Disable] o Enable
Communication Access Timeout 1 to 50,000 (max 50,000 sec) [60] (____________ )

B–21
Comm Settings (Cont'd)
SCADA Heartbeat Setting

Heartbeat (Failsafe) DNP Option o Disabled [Disabled] o LTC (DNP)
o Regulator(DNP) o Profile Switching (DNP)
o Profile Switching (GOOSE)
Bluetooth®
Protocol o MODBUS® [MODBUS] o DNP3
Friendly Name [M2001D] (_____________________________ )
o Bluetooth Enable [Enable] o Bluetooth Disable
o Enable Authentication o Disable Authentication [disable]
Bluetooth Passkey (_____________________________ )
Bluetooth Device Address (_____________________________ )
Bluetooth Mode o Mode 0 [Mode 0] o Mode 1

B–22
Appendix – C
Appendix C
Utilizing the DNP Configuration Editor
The DNP Configuration Editor includes the following • Class 1 Max Events: If unsolicited
features and functions (Figure C-1): responses are enabled, the parameter
specifies the maximum number of events
Variations – The variation of an object gives a in the corresponding class to be allowed
different representation of the same data point, such before an unsolicited response will be
as the size of the object or whether or not the object generated.
has flag information. Accordingly, the Variations
• Class 2 Max Delay (Sec): If unsolicited
section will configure listed objects with the desired
responses are enabled, this parameter
and supported variations.
specifies the maximum amount of time
Master Address used for Unsolicited after an event in the corresponding
responses and/or Source Address Validation – class is received before an unsolicited
This address will be used as the address to send response will be generated.
unsolicited responses and/or Source Address • Class 2 Max Events: If unsolicited
Validation. responses are enabled, the parameter
specifies the maximum number of events
Modem Unsolicit Setting – Applies to RS-232 in the corresponding class to be allowed
interface connected to an Ethernet Modem. before an unsolicited response will be
TCP/IP and UDP/IP unsolicit settings are used generated.
when DNP is being deployed over an Ethernet
network. The setting elements are described below:
Choosing Points – The Available Points window is
• Allow Unsolicit: Determines whether populated when a DNP source file is opened. The
unsolicited null responses will be sent selection of points from the Binary Inputs, Analog
when session comes online. If enabled, Inputs, Binary/Control Outputs and Analog Outputs
subsequent unsolicited responses will tabs can be accomplished by either individually
be enabled through function code 0x14 selecting, dragging and dropping points in the
(Enable unsolicited responses) and Selected Points window or utilizing the "Copy All"
disabled through function code 0x15 feature. The Copy All feature only copies the points
(Disable unsolicited responses). If "Allow in the open tab to the Selected Points window.
Unsolicit" is disabled, then function
The "Remove All" feature removes all the points
codes 0x14 and 0x15 will be responded
displayed in the Selected Points window for the tab
to with an error.
that is open.
• Class 1 Max Delay (Sec): If unsolicited
responses are enabled, this parameter
specifies the maximum amount of time
after an event in the corresponding
class is received before an unsolicited
response will be generated.
C–1
Figure C-1 DNP Configuration Editor Dialog Screen
C–2
Appendix – C
Ordering Selected Points – Selected points can a SCADA Master if necessary. The "Mask" value
be reordered to match the users SCADA, RTU or defaults to "CLASS ONE" and defines what polling
Master setup by selecting, dragging and dropping class type the point is mapped to. The Mask value
the desired point within the Selected Points window. can also be set to CLASS TWO, CLASS THREE,
CLASS NONE, CLASS ONE NOT CLASS 0,
Adding Dummy Points – The purpose of the CLASS TWO NOT CLASS 0 or CLASS THREE
Dummy Point is to allow the user to match other NOT CLASS 0 by double left clicking on the desired
device DNP maps that contain points that are not point Mask element.
supported in the control. This feature allows the
user to communicate with the M-2001D control Editing Analog Input Points – The Analog Input
when it is connected to an RTU that contains other "Deadband" and "Mask" values can be edited by
brands of controls and eliminates the need to double left clicking on the desired point Deadband
re-configure the RTU or the other controls. or Mask elements. The Deadband can be set to
define when the point will report by exception under
To insert a Dummy point, select "Insert Dummy". the class type in the Mask setting. When the point
The Dummy Point will be inserted at the end of the change exceeds the deadband value, it will initiate
Selected Points list. To move the Dummy Point, a report by exception to the master. The "Mask"
select, drag and drop the point at the desired value defaults to "CLASS TWO" and defines what
location in the Selected Points list. The Dummy point polling class type the point is mapped to. The Mask
will assume the Index Position and the remaining value can also be set to CLASS ONE, CLASS
Selected Points will be modified to accommodate THREE, CLASS NONE, CLASS ONE NOT CLASS
the Dummy Point. 0, CLASS TWO NOT CLASS 0 or CLASS THREE
NOT CLASS 0 by double left clicking on the desired
Insert Offset – This allows an offset to be created point Mask element.
in the DNP map without the point number being
transmitted, thus providing the ability to construct a Editing Binary/Control Output Points – The
DNP profile that has non-consecutive point numbers Binary/Control Output Point "Crob", "Mask" and
within a group. "Inverse" values can be edited by double left
clicking on the desired point Crob, Mask or Inverse
Additional Mask Values – Four new mask elements. The Crob (Control Relay Output Block)
categories have been added. setting is used to define what control method will
be used to operate the point. The possible settings
CLASS_NONE: If a point is defined as CLASS_ for "Crob" are listed below:
NONE, then it will not be sent during any CLASS
polling although the point is present in the DNP map. • Latch On • Latch Off • Latch OnOff
The only mean to access this point is by querying
• Latch OnOff_TC
the point individually.
• Pulse On • Pulse Off • Pulse OnOff
CLASS_ONE_NOTCLASS0: If a point is defined
as CLASS_ONE_NOTCLASS0, it will be present • Pulse OnOff_TC
in a CLASS 1 poll but not an integrity CLASS 0 poll. • Paired Close • Paired Trip • Paired TripClose
CLASS_TWO_NOTCLASS0: If a point is defined
as CLASS_TWO_NOTCLASS0, it will be present The "Mask" value defaults to "CLASS ZERO" and
in a CLASS 2 poll but not an integrity CLASS 0 poll. defines what polling class type the point is mapped
to. The Mask value can also be set to CLASS NONE
CLASS_THREE_NOTCLASS0: If a point is defined by double left clicking on the desired point Mask
as CLASS_THREE_NOTCLASS0, it will be present element.
in a CLASS 3 poll but not an integrity CLASS 0 poll.
Inverse defines whether the command to be sent
Editing Binary Input Points – The Binary Input would be inverted, meaning that when TRUE
"Value" and "Mask" values can be edited by double is selected, sending a Trip, Close, etc will have
left clicking on the desired point Value or Mask the opposite effect. This was implemented due
elements. The default value for Value is TRUE, to variations seen in RTU manufacturer’s
which means that the point will return a High or implementation of direct control with DNP to allow
True when the item being monitored is active in full compatibility the widest possible number of
the control. It can be changed to "FALSE" to match RTU’s.
C–3
The Binary/Control Outputs Tab includes a help  NOTE: Before TapTalk® allows a user to change
selection. When selected TapTalk will launch two the Update key, the user has to enter the
pdf documents (Figures C-6 and C-7) which provide old update key.
an explanation of each individual Binary point with
respect to different CROB.
Editing Analog Output Points – The Analog
Output "Mask" value can be edited by double left
clicking on the desired point Mask element. The
"Mask" value defaults to "CLASS ZERO" and
defines what polling class type the point is mapped
to. The Mask value can also be set to CLASS NONE
by double left clicking on the desired point Mask
element.
Editing Counters – The Counters "Mask" value
can be edited by double left clicking on the desired
point Mask element. The "Mask" value defaults to
"CLASS THREE" and defines what polling class
type the point is mapped to. The Mask value can
also be set to CLASS ONE, CLASS TWO, CLASS
NONE, CLASS ONE NOT CLASS 0, CLASS TWO
NOT CLASS 0 or CLASS THREE NOT CLASS 0
by double left clicking on the desired point Mask
element.
Figure C-2 Configure Update Keys and Critical
 NOTE: For security reason, DNP Security Request Function Codes Dialog Screen
tab will only be active when Taptalk is
connected to a control with an Access HMAC Algorithm and Update Key – The HMAC
Code of Level 2, otherwise it will be algorithm is either SHA1 (4 OCT) or SHA1(10OCT).
grayed out. An Update key is necessary to provide secure
SESSION key negotiation. Once a SESSION
DNP Security – DNP authentication is now key is obtained any subsequent challenge/
available and can be independently enabled in the response session will employ that session key.
DNP security tab for either serial or Ethernet (both The Update key can be up to 32 hex characters
TCP or UDP) interfaces. (0123456789ABCDF) (128 bits).
The concepts of the Hashed Message Authentication Challenge Response Timeout – The range is
Code (HMAC) and challenge-response as defined from 0-100 seconds. This is the response time
in the DNP3 specification for Secure Authenticate within which the control is expecting a response to
Version 2.0 document is employed. a challenge.
When authentication is enabled, the following Duration of Session Key – This duration must be
settings should be selected: configured in minutes (0-100) and in count 0-65535.
This duration represents the maximum time or
the maximum number of challenges a particular
• HMAC Algorithm and Update key
session key is used before key negotiation is again
• Challenge Response timeout performed.
• Duration of session key
• Aggressive Mode
• Critical Request Function Codes
C–4
Appendix – C
Aggressive Mode – Full challenge/response a. Select Send to Control. TapTalk

exchanges increase the number messages in the will display the "Authentication Key
protocol, which affects throughput performance. generated successfully" (Figure C-3).
Therefore, DNP Secure Authentication provides
an aggressive mode in which the data from a
single challenge can be used to authenticate many
subsequent messages. The sender of the critical
message includes the HMAC at the end of the
critical message without having to be challenged.
At least one challenge must occur, however, before
aggressive mode can be used.
Critical Request Function Codes – This represents
Figure C-3 Authentication Key Generated
the function codes that will require authentication
if selected. If none is selected, authentication will Successfully Confirmation Screen
not be performed on any function code although
authentication has been enabled. b. Select OK. TapTalk will display the
"Open File" dialog screen with a *.xml
Example of DNP Confiuration Editor Use – The file extension.
following sequence of steps provides an example c. Select the file to be opened, then select
of utilizing the DNP Configuration Editor. Open. TapTalk will initiate the file transfer
1. From the TapTalk ® S-2001D Main as indicated by the "Send" dialog
Screen (Figure 3-12) select Utility/ screen (Figure C-4), followed by a
DNP Configuration Editor. TapTalk will "DNP Upload" confirmation screen
display the DNP Configuration Editor (Figure C-5).
dialog screen (Figure C-1).
■ NOTE: The M-2001D default file contains points
that are unique to the M-2001 product
line. It should be used if installing the
control in a communications network
where the same RTU is communicating
with both M-2001C and M-6200A
controls.
2. Select Load Template/M-2001D Default Figure C-4 Send Dialog Screen

from the DNP Configurator menu bar.
The Binary Inputs tab is displayed. The
Available Points list for each DNP Points
Group tab will also be populated.
3. Select the Binary Input points you wish
to include in the DNP map by selecting
Copy All or dragging the desired point(s)
to the Selected Points window.
4. Edit the Selected Points for each tab as
necessary to match your SCADA, RTU
or Master setup.
Figure C-5 DNP Upload Confirmation Screen
5. Select Save File from the DNP
Configurator menu bar. TapTalk will
display a Save As dialog screen with a
*.xml file extension.
6. Name the file and then select Save.
7. If TapTalk is connected to the target
control then the Send to Control menu
feature can be used as follows:
C–5
INVERSE CROB
Figure C-6 Inverse CROB
C–6
Appendix – C
NON-INVERSE CROB
Figure C-7 Individual Binary Points and Different CROB
C–7
C–8
Appendix – D
Appendix D
Utilizing the IEC 61850 Configuration Editor
Figure D-1 IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Dialog Screen
The IEC 61850 Configuration Editor includes the UnBuffered Report Control Block – The events
following features and functions: caused by trigger options such as data change,
data update, quality change will generate reports
CID IP Address – The IP Address of the Server immediately on a best effort basis. The reports are
(control). Setting the proper IP Address to match the not guaranteed to be delivered if there is loss of
control IP Address, will enable a CLIENT software connection or if the connection is slow.
to establish a connection to the control.
RptEna (Report Enable/Disable) – Enables or
File Revision – The file revision allows 0-99 Disables the report.
different revisions of the CID file.
RptID (Report Identifier) – The Report Identifier will
Buffered and UnBuffered Control Blocks – The be the client specified report identifier of the buffered
user is able to choose 2 Buffered Report Control report control block or unbuffered control block that
Blocks and 2 UnBuffered Report Control Blocks. caused the generation of the report.
Buffered Report Control Block – The events Having no rptID in the Report Control Block of the
caused by trigger options such as data change, CID file will fail validation in Schema 1.4 (as rptID
data update, quality change will generate reports is required) and passes validation for Schema 3.0.
immediately. Events not transmitted are buffered to
a practical limit for later transmission. Events are
not lost due to loss of connection or transport flow
constraints.
D–1
Figure D-2 IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Reporting Metering Dataset Dialog Screen
D–2
Appendix – D
Figure D-3 IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Reporting Status Dataset Dialog Screen
D–3
Reporting Trigger Options – (for both Unbuffered • Integrity – For the integrity time period, set
and Buffered report control blocks) in seconds, a snapshot of the dataset with
values of the data attributes is reported.
■ NOTE: Schema 1.4 does not support General If the integrity time period is set to zero,
Interrogation. Schema 3.0 does support No integrity reports are generated.
General Interrogation.
• General Interrogation (GI) – As soon as
GI value is set to true, a snapshot of the
dataset with values of the data attributes
is reported and GI is immediately set to
false. Supported in Schema 3.0
BufTm (in Seconds) – Specifies the time in seconds

that cause buffering of events caused by trigger
options such as data change, data update, quality
change. BufTm of 0 is supported.
Figure D-4 Report Trigger Options Dialog Screen
Configuration Revision – Contains the count of the
• Data Change/Data Update – For number of times that the configuration in the dataset
measurements, if the value of the has changed either due to deletion or addition or
data attribute exceeds (either lower or reordering of members in the dataset. The user must
higher) the deadband value the report is keep track of this number.
generated.
For status, if the value of the data attributes ■ NOTE: Buffer Overflow is not supported in
changes, the report is generated. Schema 1.4
• Data Update – is treated the same as Data

Change.
• Quality Change – For any measurement
or status, the source is a PROCESS. The
settings are SUBSTITUTED values.
Supported Quality bits are:
- Good
- Invalid
- Questionable
- Out of Range Figure D-6 Option Fields For Buffered Report
Control Block
- Bad Reference
- Inaccurate
If system error or checksum error is
detected, the validity are questionable
and inaccurate. If self test fails, then
validity is Invalid. Good means there is
no abnormal condition of the acquisition
function or the source. If a value is out of
range outofrange is set. Badreference
is set when ever error 8198 (voltage Figure D-7 Option Fields For Unbuffered
reference error) is detected. Report Control Block
D–4
INTEGRITY and Buffer Time
Integrity report
time
DC2
DC2 DC4
DC5
DC1 DC1 DC5

DC3 DC3
Figure D-5 Integrity and Buffer Time

Report(DC1, DC2) Report(DC2, DC3, DC4, DC5)
time
BufTm BufTm
Integrity time
Complete Report Sent

Complete Report Sent
Integrity Timer Resets Integrity Timer Resets
D–5
Appendix – D
Sequence Number – The Sequence Number is GOOSE Message Retransmission Timing After
included in the report if the "Sequence Number" bit Initial GOOSE Message
is set to true. This value is incremented for every 1. Retransmit after 2 ms with TAL = 2
report generated. The first report generated as
2. Retransmit after 4 ms with TAL = 4
soon as Report Enable is set to true will have the
sequence number as zero. The sequence number 3. Retransmit after 8 ms with TAL = 8
will rollover to zero at its maximum value. 4. Retransmit after 16 ms with TAL = 16
TimeStamp – A Time Stamp is included in the 5. Retransmit after 32 ms with TAL = 32
report if the "TimeStamp" bit is set to true. This 6. Retransmit after 64 ms with TAL = 64
parameter tells the time at which the report was
generated.
And so on until a maximum of 65535/2 ms after
DataSet – Data Set is included in the report if the which it repeats at a fixed interval of 32765 ms.
"DataSet" bit is set to true. The dataset reference
shall be included in the report and derived from the Goose Publisher – The user can configure up
member of the dataset. to 5 generic goose control blocks. All the Goose
publishers should have the different mac addresses.
ReasonCode – A Reason Code is included in The user can select a total of 16 data attributes
the report if the "ReasonCode" bit is set to true. for each dataset referenced in the goose control
The report will contain the trigger option that is block. The Trigger options can be periodic or data
responsible for generation of the report. change or both.
DataReference – Data Reference is included in The user can also select the trigger options for
the report if the "DataReference" bit is set to true. It any member in the dataset. The available periodic
shall contain the Functional Constraint Data (FCD) change for which the goose can be generated is
of the data attribute values included in the report. 250ms -5000000ms.
EntryID – An Entry ID is included in the report if the Goose Subscriber – The user can configure up
"EntryID" bit is set to true. This parameter represents to 2 generic goose control blocks. All the Goose
OCTET string which is used to identify the sequence subscribers should have different mac addresses.
of events in a buffered report control block. The user can select a total of 255 data attributes for
Configuration Revision – It is included in the each dataset referenced in the goose control block.
report if the "Configuration Revision" bit is set to In the 255 attributes one has to be a command. The
true. This parameter shall contain the corresponding list of commands supported include:
attribute ConfRev of the referenced BRCB. • Operation Counter Reset
Buffer Overflow – The Buffer Overflow is included • Drag Hands Reset
in the report if the "Buffer Overflow" bit is set to • Block Auto Via Comm
true. It indicates to the client that a buffer overflow
has occurred. The buffered report control block will • Voltage Reduction 1
set this bit in the first report after the events that • Voltage Reduction 2
occurred after the overflow. The second report will • Voltage Reduction 3
have it set to zero again.
• Tap Position
Goose (Generic Object Oriented Substation • Tap Change
Events)
• Clear Motor Seal-In Alarm
Goose data is directly transmitted on a publisher
- subscriber mechanism bases on multicast MAC • Clear Master Follower LockOut Alarm
addresses. Since it is a connectionless network
layer protocol, in order to guarantee message The user publishing the goose message should
delivery, a retransmission scheme is employed. configure the appropriate command and its
appropriate position in the dataset and configure
the remaining data attributes GsSubscOfs (Offset)
in the dataset referenced in the goose subscription
control block.
D–6
Appendix – D
Goose Parameters (Publisher/Subscriber) AppID – The Application Identifier (APPID) is

used to select ISO/IEC 8802-3 frames containing
DSRef – Contains the object reference of the sampled value messages and to distinguish the
members of the dataset whose members of the application association. Since the M-2001D does
dataset will be transmitted. not publish or subscribe to sample value, the value
CBRef – Contains the reference of the goose of AppID is limited to 0-0x3FFF.
control block. Validation – The configurator validates against
GoID – Contains the identifier of the logical device Schema 1.4 or Schema 3.0. The Schema drop down
in which the goose control block is located. menu (Figure D-8) allows the user to select either
Schema 1.4 and 3.0. Each file saved is validated
CfgRev – Contains the count of the number of times against the appropriate Schema.
that the configuration in the dataset has changed
either due to deletion or addition or reordering of The "Validate" selection on the IEC 61850
members in the dataset. Configuration Editor Dialog Screen (Figure D-1)
will validate any CID file against Schema 1.4 or
Schema 3.0.
Figure D-8 IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Schema Selection Dialog Screen
D–7
Figure D-9 IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Goose Publisher Dialog Screen
D–8
Appendix – D
Figure D-10 IEC 61850 Configuration Editor Goose Subscriber Dialog Screen
D–9
D–10
Appendix – E
E Appendix
Self-Test Error Codes
8100 ERROR_EE_WR_BYTE 8104 ERROR_EE_RD_WORD

This code is displayed when: This code is displayed when:
• Writing to EEPROM takes more than 10 • No ack from eeprom while it’s being
ms accessed
• OS failed to lock eeprom_semaphore
• No ack from eeprom while it’s being 8105 ERROR_EE_RD_LONG
accessed This code is displayed when:
• No ack from eeprom while it’s being
8101 ERROR_EE_WR_WORD accessed
This code is displayed when:
• Writing to EEPROM takes more than 10 8106 ERROR_EE_WR_OUT_OF_MEM
ms Error code indicates that the buffer used for
temporary storage of the eeprom data before it is
actually written is full.
accessed
8107 ERROR_EE_WR_MSG_CREATE
8102 ERROR_EE_WR_LONG
Error code indicates that eeprom write command
message creation has failed (possibly too many
• Writing to EEPROM takes more than 10 writes were done prior to it and buffer got full).
ms
• No ack from eeprom while it’s being 8108 ERROR_EE_WR_PAGE
accessed This code is displayed when:
• Page Writing to EEPROM takes more than
8103 ERROR_EE_RD_BYTE
10 ms
• No ack from eeprom while it’s being accessed
accessed
E–1
8109 ERROR_EE_RD_PAGE 2355 ERROR_SOE_RECSIZE_ERROR

This code is displayed when: Not enough space to store temp SOE events in one
page (error appears immediately during boot up
• No ack from eeprom while it’s being process if code is not properly configured).
accessed
2356 ERROR_SOE_TOTLEN_ERROR
8198 ERROR_VREF
Not enough space to store all the events in the flash
Reference voltage error section allocated for SOE storage (error appears
immediately during boot up process if code is not
2200 ERROR_SDCARD_SPI_TIMEOUT properly configured).
Error code indicates that OS has failed to lock the
spi semaphore. 2401 ERROR_FLASH_WRONG_PG_SIZE
Flash page size in the configuration table is not valid
2300 ERROR_DAT_REC_CURRUPT (error appears immediately during boot up process
Error code indicates that data logging record is if code is not properly configured).
corrupted (this error code appears when data log
records are being retrieved via communication or 2402 ERROR_FLASH_ACCESS_TIMEOUT
being saved to sd card). The response for get flash id command was never
received (error appears immediately during boot up
2301 ERROR_DAT_REC_STORE process if code is not properly configured).
Error code indicates that verification of data log
record stored in flash has failed. 2403 ERROR_FLASH_CFG_MISSING
Flash chip installed on the board is not supported
2302 ERROR_DAT_REC_BUFF_OVERFLOW in configuration table (error appears immediately
Error code indicates that temporary data log buffer during boot up process if code is not properly
allocated in ram is full and no more records can be configured).
saved.
2404 ERROR_FLASH_WRONG_CFG_FLG
2351 ERROR_SOE_REC_STORE Flash configuration flag is not valid (error appears
Error code indicates that verification of SOE record immediately during boot up process if code is not
stored in flash has failed. properly configured).
2352 ERROR_SOE_RECSIZE_UNDEF 2405 ERROR_FLASH_SECTION_MISSING

Error code indicates that number of SOE events per The requested flash section ID is not defined in
flash page is not defined (error appears immediately the configuration table (error appears immediately
during boot up process if code is not properly during boot up process if code is not properly
configured). configured).
2353 ERROR_SOE_TEMPREC_ERROR 2406 ERROR_FLASH_SECTION_RANGE

SOE temp buffer is not big enough (error appears The requested read/write address in particular
immediately during boot up process if code is not section of flash is exceeding the section’s size.
properly configured).
2407 ERROR_FLASH_SECTION_OUT_OF_
2354 ERROR_SOE_REC_PER_PAGE_ MEM
ERROR Not enough space for particular section in the flash
Incorrect number of SOE events per flash page (error configuration table (error appears immediately during
appears immediately during boot up process if code boot up process if code is not properly configured).
is not properly configured).
E–2
Appendix – E
2408 ERROR_FLASH_CONFIG
Error occurs during firmware update if the program
flash is not set to 1024 bytes.
2409 ERROR_FLASH_OUT_OF_MEMORY
Error occurs during firmware update if there is not
enough space in RAM for firmware storage.
2500 ERROR_FFS_OUT_OF_MEM_INIT
There is not enough space in flash file system table
to hold particular file (error appears immediately
during boot up process if code is not properly
configured).
2501 ERROR_RECEIVE_FAILED
Error occurs during firmware update if received
firmware file doesn’t pass certain checks (file length,
crc error).
2502 ERROR_PROGRAM_FLASH
Error occurs during firmware update if verification
of programmed flash fails.
2503 ERROR_ACCESSING_FLASH
Error occurs if during the firmware update flash
memory was accessed by another process.
2600 ERROR_TERM_FLASH_BUFF_ERR
Error occurs in the terminal mode if the allocated
temp ram buffer can’t fit one page of flash memory.
2700 ERROR_XML_SP_OUT_OF_MEM
Error occurs during setpoint file or password file
xml parsing if there is not enough space in ram for
parser.
2710 ERROR_TAP_STAT_SIZE
Tap statistic structure has incorrect size.
2800 ERROR_XML_DNPCFG_OUT_OF_
MEM
Error occurs during dnp config file xml parsing if
there is not enough space in ram for parser.
9020 ERROR_UNAUTH_PROG_FL_ACCESS
9000
Error occurs if unauthorized read/write access
from/to program flash memory is detected (during
normal operation).
E–3
E–4
Appendix – F
F Appendix – Index
A
Abnormal Tap Position, 2-10, 2-35, 2-76, 3-23, 3-45, Additional Communication Port, 7-10
3-47, 5-8, 5-21, 5-48, 5-100, A-22, B-14 Additional TapTalk Settings Screen, 5-5, 5-100
About S-2001D, 3-73 Alarm LED, 2-6
AC-DC Control Power Backup Supply, SP-3, SP-15, Alarm Status, 2-2, 2-24:2-25, 2-27, 2-34, 3-23, A-
SP-18, 1-4, 7-15 11:A-12
Access Codes, SP-2, 1-2, 2-1:2-2, 2-11, 3-19, 3-63, Alarms, 2-2, 2-10:2-11, 2-36, 2-47, 2-75:2-77, 3-24,
3-65, 4-1:4-2, 4-4:4-7, 4-21 3-34, 3-47, 5-8, 5-21, A-22, B-1, B-14
Access Levels, 2-2, 2-11 Analysis Software, SP-3, SP-8, 3-1, 3-52, 3-74,
Accessing 4-13
Harmonic Analysis, 2-3, 2-50 AND Gate Dropout Setup, 4-18
Monitoring, 2-2, 2-24 AND Gate Pickup Setup, 4-18
Motor Current Profile, 2-3, 2-48 AND Gate Setup, 3-55:3-56, 4-17
About, 2-4, 2-71 Applying Power, 4-50, 4-52, 8-4
Demand, 2-3, 2-38, 2-42 Assigning, 2-11, 4-4, 6-2, 6-5
Demand History, 2-3, 2-38 Auto
Energy Metering, 2-3, 2-40 Determination, SP-2, SP-4, 3-36, 6-3, 6-30, 6-33,
Harmonics, 2-3, 2-49 B-3:B-4, B-6:B-7
Motor Current, 2-3, 2-47 Tapchange Inhibit, 7-5
Present Demand, 2-3, 2-37 Automatic Mode Blocking, 4-29
Smart Flash SD Card, 2-3, 2-55 Aux, 2-2, 2-34, 3-24, 3-38, 5-2, 5-25, 5-36, 5-89,
Tap Information, 2-3, 2-51 5-91:5-93, 8-8:8-9, A-23, A-25, B-8:B-9
Utility, 2-4, 2-68 Aux Input Status, 2-2, 2-34, 3-24
Voltage, 2-3, 2-50 Auxiliary
Current Transformer, SP-9, 1-3, 5-3, 5-35:5-36
Accessories, SP-3, SP-18, 1-1, 1-3, 5-94, 5-96
Input A1, 5-65, 5-77:5-78, 7-6
Action of Overvoltage, 6-8
Inputs - A2, 7-6
Activating Initial Local Communications, 2-1, 7-1,
7-18 Output, 7-1, 7-6
Active Harmonics Inputs, 5-5, 5-112, 5-115 Availability, SP-16, 3-1:3-2, 7-12
Active Setpoint Profile, 2-2, 2-20, 3-13, 3-34, 6-4,
6-6
Adapter Panel, SP-1:SP-2, SP-6, 1-1:1-2, 1-6,
2-9:2-10, 2-21:2-22, 2-72, 3-40, 3-61, 4-19, 5-26,
5-36:5-37, 6-8, 7-1, 7-4, 7-7:7-8, 7-12:7-14, 8-1,
8-5, A-26
F–1
B C
B-0920 Control Power Backup Harness, 1-4 Calculations, 2-23, 3-30, 5-88
Backup Pwr Failure, 2-34, 3-23 Calibrating Tap Position, 2-3, 2-52
Backup Relay, 1-4, 6-2, 6-7, 7-9 Calibration, 2-4, 2-11, 2-68:2-71, 3-45, 4-4, 5-89,
Band Status, 1-2, 2-26, 2-33, 3-22, 5-78:5-79, 5-86, 5-94, 5-97, 8-6:8-10, A-34:A-35, B-13
8-6, A-11 Cautions, 3-1, 3-8
Bandcenter, SP-2, SP-4, SP-10, 2-33, 3-22, 3-36, CBEMA
3-42, 4-58, 5-45, 5-53:5-54, 5-58:5-59, 6-3, 6-7, Configuration, 5-1, 5-5, 5-116
6-17, 6-19, 6-25, 6-28, 6-34:6-35, A-15:A-18, A-20,
Events, 2-3, 2-36, 3-24, 3-34, 3-59, 5-116,
A-27:A-28, B-2:B-3, B-5:B-6
5-118:5-119
Bandwidth, SP-2, SP-4, 4-58, 5-39, 5-45, 5-51,
Functionality, 5-1, 5-5, 5-116
5-53, 5-59, 6-3, 6-7, 6-17, 6-19:6-20, 6-25, 6-34:6-
35, A-16:A-18 Setup
Basic Time Delay, 5-106, 6-1, 6-3, 6-25:6-27 Change
Beckwith Electric Shaft Coupled KeepTrack Method, Address, 3-17:3-18, 4-29
5-4, 5-94 Prompt, 2-6
Beckwith Electric-INCON Shaft Coupled KeepTrack User Access Code, 3-61, 3-63, 4-6
Method, 5-4, 5-94
Changing Source Voltage Input, 2-4, 2-69
Bench Test, 8-3:8-4
Check-out Procedure, 8-1, 8-4:8-5
Bias Voltage Status, 8-1, 8-6, A-34
Checksum Error, 2-4, 2-70, D-4
Bias Voltage Testing, 8-6
Circulating Current Polarity, 7-3
Block
Circulating Current Return, 7-3
Auto Control, 2-4, 2-72, 3-61, 5-77, 5-79
Clear
Lower, SP-5, 2-10, 2-26:2-27, 2-33:2-34, 2-72,
3-23:3-24, 3-36, 3-44, 3-47, 4-58, 5-108:5-109, Data Log Records, 2-2, 2-19
6-2, 6-7, 6-11, 6-16, 7-9, 8-4, A-11, A-18:A-19, Oscillograph Records, 2-2, 2-13, A-32
A-22, B-2, B-4:B-5, B-7, B-12, B-14 Sequence of Events Records, 2-2, 2-17
Lower Limit, SP-5, 5-109, 6-2, 6-7, 6-11, 6-16, Low Current Alarm, 2-4, 2-74:2-75
A-19, A-22 Master, 2-4, 2-78:2-79
Raise, SP-5, 2-10, 2-26:2-27, 2-33:2-34, 2-72, Tap Statistics, 2-3, 2-53, A-14
3-23:3-24, 3-36, 3-44, 3-47, 4-58, 5-8, 5-108:5-
109, 6-2, 6-7, 6-9, 6-16, 6-20, 7-9, 8-4, A-11, Clone
A-18:A-19, A-22, B-2, B-4:B-5, B-7, B-12, B-14 Load, SP-10, 2-4, 2-55, 2-61:2-63, A-30
Status, 2-33, 3-22 Save, SP-10, 2-3:2-4, 2-9, 2-55, 2-61:2-62, A-30
Blocking, 4-29, 5-5, 5-20, 5-45, 5-51, 5-106, 6-8, 8-6 Save Without, 2-4, 2-61
Bluetooth Com Port, 2-9, 3-3, 3-5:3-6, 3-15, 4-33, 4-40:4-41,
Communications, 3-1, 3-7 7-18:7-19, A-29
Initialization Overview, 4-3, 4-50 COM1 TX, SP-2, SP-10, 2-9
Mode1 Setup, 4-3, 4-54 Comm
Module Initialization, 4-3, 4-50 Block, 2-26:2-27, 2-33:2-34, 2-72, 3-23, 3-42,
3-47, 3-61, 4-2, 4-29:4-31, 4-59, 5-26, 5-77, 5-79,
Breaker, 2-36, 3-41, 5-62, 5-64:5-66, 5-72:5-73, A-11, A-26, B-10, B-14
5-75:5-78, 5-81:5-82, 5-85, A-21:A-22, B-11
Block Auto, 3-61, 4-2, 4-29:4-30, 5-26, A-26
Button Test, 8-1, 8-10
Port, 3-15, 3-17, 4-44, 4-47, 7-10, B-20
F–2
Appendix – F
Communication Convert Binary Soe File, 3-61, 3-73

Access Security, 3-19, 4-2, 4-21:4-23, B-21 Convert Datalog File, 3-61, 3-73
Cables, 7-1, 7-11 Converting Datalog Files, 2-4, 2-71
Ports, SP-11, 1-3, 4-21, 7-1, 7-3, 7-9, 7-15 Coordination, SP-1, 3-43, 6-2, 6-7
Using Bluetooth Connection, 3-7 Correction Factors, 5-1, 5-3, 5-32:5-33
Using Ethernet Connection, 3-6, 4-34 Count To RTN Active, 2-24, 2-32, 2-51, A-14
Using Fiber Optic Connection, 3-6 Count Towards RTN, 3-22
Using RS-485 Connection, 3-5 Counter Status, 2-3, 2-36, 3-24, 5-119
Using Direct USB Connection, 3-3 Counters, SP-9, 1-2, 2-70, 3-28, 5-1:5-2, 5-14, 5-27,
5-41, 5-116, A-23, A-35, C-4
Compensated Voltage, SP-8, 2-17, 2-21, 2-24:2-25,
2-31, 3-21, 3-49, 3-80, 5-36, 5-110, 6-20, 8-6, A-9, CSV, 2-4, 2-10, 2-54, 2-64, 2-71, 3-28, 3-45, 3-61,
A-24 3-73, 4-19
Compensation, SP-2, SP-4, SP-9:SP-10, 3-36, CSV Format, 2-4, 2-10, 2-71, 3-45, 3-61, 3-73, 4-19
3-43, 5-34, 5-45, 5-54, 5-62:5-63, 5-65, 6-1:6-2, CT, SP-2, SP-4, 1-2, 3-38, 5-1, 5-3, 5-29:5-30,
6-7:6-8, 6-19:6-21, 6-24, 7-3, 7-12, 8-4, A-15:A-17, 5-34:5-36, 5-38, 5-43, 5-62:5-65, 6-19:6-20, 7-7:7-8,
A-27, B-2:B-3, B-5:B-6 7-13, 8-4:8-5, A-25, B-8
Configuration Editor, 1-2, 3-66:3-68, C-1:C-2, C-5, Current
D-1:D-3, D-7:D-9 Block Limit, 6-2, 6-16
Configuration File, 2-4, 2-61:2-63, 2-67, 2-80, 3-49, Harmonics, 2-3, 2-50
3-67, 3-69:3-70, 4-24, 5-110
Loop Interface Modules, SP-15:SP-16, 1-3
Configure Update Keys, C-4
Multipliers, 2-21, 2-31, 2-43, 3-20, 3-27, 5-2,
Configuring, 5-2, 5-17 5-29:5-30, 5-36, A-10
Connect, 1-3, 2-66, 2-80, 3-3:3-7, 3-15, 4-33:4-34, Threshold, 3-51, 5-5, 5-112:5-115, A-24, B-15
4-47:4-50, 4-54, 7-13, 7-19, 8-8
Threshold Delay, 5-5, 5-114
Connected Mode, 3-14
Connecting, 4-3, 4-47:4-48, 5-62, 5-98, 7-3:7-5, D
7-9:7-10, 7-12, 8-3:8-4
Data Entry Screens, 2-5
Contact Input, SP-5, 2-34:2-35, 3-23:3-25, 3-44,
5-4, 5-14, 5-41, 5-89, 5-91:5-92, 5-106, 7-4:7-5, Data Logging Setup
A-19 Datalog Files, 1-3, 2-4, 2-9, 2-71, 3-73
Contact KeepTrack, SP-2, SP-5, SP-9, 3-44, 3-46, Date, SP-1, SP-7, SP-15, 2-6, 2-17, 2-21:2-22,
5-4:5-5, 5-18, 5-22, 5-88:5-89, 5-91:5-92, 5-94, 2-38, 2-40, 2-42:2-43, 2-58:2-59, 2-65, 3-8, 3-27,
5-99:5-100, 5-102:5-103, 7-4:7-5, 7-9, A-19, A-22, 3-50, 3-61, 3-63:3-65, 4-2, 4-4, 4-10:4-12, 5-37, A-
B-9 10:A-11, A-22
Contact KeepTrack Method I, 5-4, 5-89 Date Stamping, 3-8
Contact KeepTrack Method II, 5-4, 5-91:5-92 Daylight Savings
Contents, 1-1, 2-12, 2-15, 3-54, 3-73 Deadband, SP-4, 3-36, 6-2, 6-7, 6-10, 6-12, 6-16,
Control 6-20, 8-4, A-18, B-2, B-4:B-5, B-7, C-3, D-4
Information, 3-61, 3-63, 4-10 Default Message Screen, 2-2, 2-9
Network Map, 5-72:5-73 Delta VAr Methods, 5-4, 5-62
Power Backup Input Connection, 7-1, 7-15
Power Backup Supply - AC Only, SP-3, 1-4, 7-15
Priority, 3-8
F–3
Demand E
History, SP-7, 2-3, 2-22, 2-24, 2-37:2-39, 2-42:2-
43, 3-27, 4-10, 5-3, 5-37, A-1, A-10:A-11 Editing Setpoint Profiles, 6-2, 6-4
History Parameter Values, 2-3, 2-39, 2-42 Electrostatic Discharge Test, SP-14, 7-15
Interval, 2-3, 2-24, 2-37:2-38, 2-42, 3-27, A-10 Enabling Communication Access Security, 4-2,
Present, 2-42, 3-27 4-22:4-23
Enabling Source Address Validation From TapTalk,
Detecting Reverse Power, 6-3, 6-28
4-2, 4-25
Device Discovery, 3-61, 3-65
Energy Metering Parameter Values, 2-3, 2-39, 2-41
DHCP Protocol, 3-6:3-7, 4-3, 4-33:4-36, A-31, B-21
ENT Pushbutton, 2-5:2-6, 2-10
Direct
Equipment List, 8-1
Communication Using USB, 3-3
Ethernet
Connections, 4-2, 4-21
Communications, 3-1, 3-6
USB, 3-1:3-3, 7-18
Keepalive Time Settings, 4-3, 4-39
Disable Input, 5-65, 7-4, 7-6 Port, SP-3, SP-11, 1-3, 3-6, 3-18, 4-3, 4-21, 4-33,
Disable VAr Bias, 5-4, 5-59 4-35:4-36, 4-38, 7-9:7-10, A-31
Disabling Port Configuration, 4-3, 4-33
Remote Voltage Bias, 5-3, 5-46 Event Logic, 4-2, 4-16
Standard Voltage Reduction, 5-4, 5-53 Example of Contact KeepTrack Method I, 5-4, 5-89
Low Current Block, 6-2, 6-15 Example of Contact KeepTrack Method II, 5-4, 5-92
Disabling Voltage Runup, 6-2, 6-13 EXIT Pushbutton, 2-5, 2-10, 2-26:2-27, 2-39, 2-41,
Disconnect, 3-17, 4-33, 5-43, 7-5 2-53, 3-48, 4-19, 8-7
Discovered Devices, 5-4, 5-75 External Connections, 1-1:1-2, 2-1, 3-2, 3-4:3-5,
4-21, 5-53, 6-17, 7-1, 7-3, 7-7:7-9, 8-1:8-2
Display
All Metering, 2-3, 2-46, 3-20, 3-32 F
All Settings Command, 3-34, 3-60
Fast Transient Disturbance Test, SP-14, 7-15
DNP
Fast Voltage Recovery, SP-2, 3-42, 5-1, 5-3, 5-51:5-
Configuration, 1-2, 2-4, 2-61:2-64, 3-65, 3-67:3- 52, 6-7, A-27, B-10
70, 4-24, A-29:A-30, C-1:C-2, C-5
Feeder, SP-3, SP-12, 3-18, 4-2, 4-25:4-26, 4-28:4-
Configuration Editor, 1-2, 3-67:3-68, C-1:C-2, C-5 29, 5-54, 5-59, 5-97, 6-19:6-20, 6-29, A-29, B-21
File Identifier, 3-67, 3-70 Fiber Optic
Port Settings, 4-3, 4-38 Communications, 3-1, 3-5
Drag Hands, SP-2, SP-7, 2-3, 2-10, 2-22, 2-24, Interface, 3-5, 4-33, 7-9
2-32, 2-51:2-52, 3-22, 3-45, 3-64, 4-12, 4-19, 5-37, Port, SP-3, 3-2, 3-5, 3-17, 4-3, 4-21, 4-40:4-41,
7-3, A-13, A-22, D-6 4-43:4-44, 5-53, 6-17
DVAr2, 2-27, 2-34, 3-23, 3-40, 5-70:5-71, A-11, A- Port Setup, 4-3, 4-44
20:A-21, B-11
File
DVAr2 Load Current Limit, 2-34, 3-23
Menu, 3-69:3-70, 3-79
Not Open, 3-14
Open, 3-13:3-14, 3-74
Firmware Update, SP-10, 2-4, 2-55, 2-65, 3-45,
3-61, 3-72, A-31, E-3
F–4
Appendix – F
Follower H
Alarm Messages, 2-35, 3-20, 3-24, 3-31, 5-4,
5-74 Hardware Requirements, 3-1:3-2
Configuration, 2-35, 2-79, 3-24, 3-41, 3-61, 3-71, Harmonic
5-4, 5-72, 5-74:5-80, 5-83, B-11 Analysis, SP-1, SP-3, SP-8, 2-3, 2-49:2-50, 3-20,
Configuration Tool, 2-35, 2-79, 3-24, 3-71, 5-4, 3-30
5-72, 5-74:5-77 Voltage, 5-5, 5-112:5-114, A-24
Control Setup, 5-4, 5-78, 5-83 Setup, 3-34, 3-51, 5-1, 5-5, 5-112:5-115, A-1,
Lockout, 2-4, 2-11, 2-35:2-36, 2-78:2-79, 3-24, A-24, B-1, B-15
3-47, 3-71, 5-4, 5-74:5-75, D-6
HeartBeat Manual Mode, 4-3, 4-59
Lockout Alarm, 2-4, 2-35, 2-78:2-79, 3-24, 3-71,
HeartBeat Option, 3-19, 4-3, 4-60, A-30
D-6
Help Menu, 3-33, 3-81
Paralleling Configuration Settings, 3-41
Highest Tap, 3-44:3-45, 5-5, 5-88, 5-100, 5-104:5-
Paralleling Method, 5-4, 5-72
105, A-19, B-12
Paralleling Settings, 5-72
HMI
Format, 1-3, 2-4, 2-9:2-10, 2-55, 2-71, 3-2, 3-45, Active Mode, 2-33, 3-23
3-49, 3-61, 3-73, 3-80, 4-13, 4-19, 4-49, 5-110
Configuration, 4-3, 4-35:4-36, 6-8
Forward Bias, 6-3, 6-28, A-15
Menu Flow, A-1
Forward Power, 2-33, 3-22, 3-36, 4-58, 5-45, 6-24,
Menu Structure, 1-1, 2-5, 2-8, 4-4
6-28:6-29, 6-35, 6-37, A-15:A-16, B-2, B-4:B-5, B-7
Frequency, SP-7:SP-9, 2-21:2-22, 2-24:2-25, 2-31, I
3-14, 3-21, 3-30, 3-49, 3-57, 3-80, 4-15, 5-3, 5-36:5-
37, 5-48, 5-110, A-9, A-24 In-Service Test, 8-1, 8-5
Front Panel Indicators Overview, 2-1:2-2, 2-5
Controls, SP-10, 1-1, 2-1:2-2, 2-5 Individual Binary Points, C-7
Message, 3-54, B-16 Individual Tap Wear, SP-3, SP-5, SP-8, 2-10, 2-35,
Pushbutton Testing, 8-10 2-54, 3-23, 3-28, 3-45, 3-47, 5-8, A-20, B-13:B-14,
B-16:B-18
G Initializing
Motor Current Values, 2-3, 2-48
General Overview of M-2001D Tapchanger Control,
1-1:1-2 Tap Position When Motor Direct Drive KeepTrack,
5-5, 5-98:5-102
General Unit Setup, 4-1:4-2, 4-4
Tap Position When Regulate, 5-5, 5-94, 5-99:5-
Generic Object Oriented Substation Events, D-6
100, 5-102:5-103
GOA, 5-4, 5-72
Input
GOOSE, SP-5:SP-6, 2-35:2-36, 3-19, 3-24, 3-66,
4-59:4-60, 5-72, 5-74:5-75, A-30, B-22, D-6:D-9 Selection, SP-9, 3-40, 3-45, 5-1:5-2, 5-14:5-18,
5-22, 5-24:5-25, 5-106, 7-4:7-5, A-1, A-22:A-23,
Grounding, 5-62, 5-64, 7-1, 7-12
B-9
Grouping Operation Algorithm, 5-4, 5-72
Status, 2-2, 2-24:2-25, 2-28, 2-34, 3-24, A-12
Test, 8-1, 8-8, 8-10, A-35
Installation, SP-4, 1-1:1-2, 2-1, 3-1:3-3, 3-14, 5-63,
5-94, 5-98, 5-101:5-102, 7-1, 7-13:7-14, 7-18:7-19,
8-4
Installing Modems, 4-3, 4-47
Installing TapTalk, 3-1:3-2, 7-18
F–5
Integrity, 3-49, 5-110, 7-15, C-3, D-4:D-5 Load

Interface, SP-3, SP-5, SP-15:SP-17, 1-1:1-3, 2-5, Current, SP-7:SP-8, 2-17, 2-21, 2-24:2-25, 2-31,
2-76, 3-5:3-6, 3-19, 3-69, 4-1, 4-21, 4-24, 4-33, 5-1, 2-34:2-35, 3-21, 3-23, 3-42, 3-45, 3-49, 3-57,
5-21, 5-94, 5-96, 6-1, 6-8, 7-9:7-10, C-1 3-80, 4-15, 5-35:5-36, 5-48, 5-50, 5-62, 5-64:5-
Internal KeepTrack, 3-44, 5-5, 5-97:5-102, A-19, 65, 5-110, 6-8, 6-19, 6-28:6-29, 7-3, 7-12:7-13,
B-12 8-4, A-9, A-20:A-22, A-26, A-28, A-34, B-10
Intertap Time Delay, SP-2, SP-4, 3-40, 4-58, 5-1, Current Polarity, 7-3
5-5, 5-39, 5-53, 5-62, 5-106:5-107, 6-8, 6-17, 7-4, Current Return, 7-3
7-13 IEC, SP-10, 2-4, 2-9, 2-55, 2-67, A-31
Intertap Timer, SP-7, 2-24, 2-32, 2-51, 3-22, 5-39, Tapchanger, 1-2, 5-4, 5-88
A-13
Voltage, SP-4, SP-7:SP-8, 2-17, 2-22, 2-24:2-25,
Introduction, 1-1, 5-62 2-31, 2-35:2-38, 2-43, 2-45, 2-68, 3-21, 3-24,
Inverse Delay, 6-3, 6-36:6-37 3-27, 3-29, 3-49, 3-80, 5-29, 5-37, 5-45, 5-58,
5-74, 5-110, 5-116, 6-20, 6-29:6-30, A-9:A-10,
K A-34
VT Configuration, 3-38, 5-3, 5-38
KeepTrack, SP-1:SP-2, SP-4:SP-5, SP-9, 1-3, 2-28,
2-32, 2-35, 3-22:3-23, 3-40, 3-44, 3-46, 5-4:5-5, Loading DNP Configuration, 2-4, 2-63
5-18, 5-20, 5-22, 5-63, 5-65, 5-70:5-71, 5-88:5-89, Loading Setpoints, 2-3, 2-57
5-91:5-92, 5-94:5-103, 6-29, 7-4:7-5, 7-9, A-12, A-
Local
19:A-20, A-22, B-9, B-11:B-12
LED, 2-9
L Modem, 4-3, 4-47:4-48
Voltage Reduction Screen, 2-2, 2-9
Lag, SP-5, 2-10, 2-27, 2-35, 3-24, 3-43, 3-47, 5-8,
5-34, 5-58, 5-60:5-61, A-9, A-11, A-22, A-26, A-34, Lockout Condition, 2-35, 3-24, 3-41, 5-4, 5-74:5-75
B-10, B-14 Low Current Alarm, 2-4, 2-74:2-75, 6-8
LCD Screen Contrast, 2-6 Low Current Block, 2-11, 2-26, 2-35, 2-75, 3-23,
LDC, SP-1, SP-4:SP-5, SP-10, 2-10, 2-27, 2-35, 3-42, 3-47, 6-2, 6-8, 6-15, A-22, A-26, B-9
3-23, 3-36:3-37, 3-42:3-43, 3-47, 4-58, 5-8, 5-45, Lower LED, 2-6, 3-22, 8-3
5-53:5-55, 5-62:5-63, 6-2, 6-7, 6-17, 6-19:6-24,
Lower Output Contacts, 3-40, 5-40, 5-77, B-8
6-29, 8-3:8-4, A-9, A-11, A-15:A-17, A-22, A-27, B-
2:B-7, B-9, B-14 Lowest Tap, 3-44:3-45, 5-5, 5-88, 5-100, 5-105,
A-19, B-12
LDC R, SP-4, 3-36, 4-58, 5-54:5-55, 6-2, 6-19,
6-22:6-24, 6-29, A-16:A-17, A-27 LTC, SP-1, SP-6, SP-16, 1-3, 2-22, 3-19, 4-3, 4-58,
4-60:4-61, 5-4, 5-37, 5-62, 5-88:5-89, 5-91, 5-94,
LDC Resistance, 3-36:3-37, 6-2, 6-21:6-22, 8-3,
5-97, 6-20, 7-1, 7-6, 7-9, 7-12:7-13, A-30, B-22
B-2:B-7, B-9
LTC Backup Control, 7-1, 7-9
LDZ, SP-5, 2-10, 2-27, 2-35, 3-23, 3-47, 5-8, A-11,
A-22, B-14 M
LED Scroll Test, 8-1, 8-7, 8-9, A-35
Line Current Limit, SP-5, 2-10, 2-35, 3-23, 3-47, M-2067B Paralleling Scheme, 5-68
5-8, B-14 M-2948 Tap Position Sensor, SP-3, SP-15:SP-17,
Line Drop Compensation, SP-2, SP-4, SP-9, 3-36, 1-4, 5-94
5-34, 5-62:5-63, 6-1:6-2, 6-7:6-8, 6-19:6-21, 6-24, Manual LED, 2-9, 4-59
7-3, 7-12, A-15:A-17, A-27, B-2:B-3, B-5:B-6 Manual Switch Type, SP-5, 2-72:2-73, 3-40, 3-42,
3-61, 4-29:4-32, 5-1:5-2, 5-11, 5-26, 7-5, 7-7, 7-14,
A-26
Markers, 3-77
F–6
Appendix – F
Master Mounting Kit, 1-1:1-2, 7-1, 8-1, 8-5

Control Setup, 5-4, 5-77, 5-79 Multi Level Access Code, 3-61, 3-63, 3-65, 4-7:4-8
Lockout, 2-35, 3-24, 5-4, 5-74 Multi-Step Voltage Reduction, 7-1, 7-9
Reset of ALL Demand History, 2-3, 2-39 Multi-user Password, 2-4, 2-61:2-63
Reset of ALL Energy Metering, 2-3, 2-42 Multiple Control Addressing, 3-18
Message Screens, 2-1:2-2, 2-9:2-10 Multiple Controls, SP-3, 3-1, 3-8
Meter Out Voltage, SP-4, SP-7:SP-8, 2-24:2-25, N
2-30:2-31, 3-21, 3-38, 3-49, 3-57, 5-29, 5-110, A-9,
A-24 Naming Setpoint Profiles, 6-2, 6-5
Metering, SP-1:SP-2, SP-4, SP-6:SP-7, SP- Network Connection, SP-13, 3-8, 3-10, 4-26
10:SP-11, 1-3, 2-2:2-5, 2-9:2-10, 2-21:2-25, 2-29:2-
Network Time Synchronization, 4-3, 4-35, A-32,
31, 2-37:2-44, 2-46:2-47, 2-49, 2-51, 2-54:2-55,
B-21
2-64, 3-7, 3-20:3-21, 3-26:3-28, 3-30, 3-32:3-33,
3-38, 3-47, 3-64, 3-66, 4-12, 4-19, 4-21, 4-49, 5-1, Neutral
5-3, 5-27, 5-29, 5-34:5-37, 5-119, 7-3, A-1, A-9, Counter, SP-7, 1-2, 2-32, 3-44, 5-2, 5-27:5-28,
A-11, A-31, D-2 A-20, B-12
Metering Factors, 5-1, 5-3, 5-36 Counter From TapTalk, 5-2, 5-28
Minimum Current Threshold Setting, 5-5, 5-112:5- Input Operation, 7-4
113, 5-115 Position Detector Inputs, 7-4
MODBUS Port, 3-7, 4-3, 4-34, 4-36, 4-38:4-39, Switch Counter, 2-51, 3-22, 3-44, 5-14, A-14
7-10, A-31, B-21
Tap, SP-9, 2-28, 2-34, 3-24, 3-42, 3-45, 5-91,
Modem, SP-11:SP-12, 3-8, 3-10, 3-15:3-16, 4-3, 5-94, 5-98, 5-100:5-103, A-12, A-19
4-33, 4-47:4-49, 7-11, C-1
Non-Interruptible Power Supply Input, 7-5
Monitoring, SP-1, SP-3, SP-7:SP-8, SP-12, 1-3,
2-2, 2-5, 2-24, 2-47, 2-49, 3-11, 3-14, 3-47, 3-51, Non-Sequential Operation, SP-2:SP-4, SP-8:SP-9,
4-21, 5-3, 5-41, 5-94, 5-99, 7-15 2-28, 2-33:2-34, 3-24, 3-40, 4-58, 5-2, 5-5, 5-24,
5-106, 7-1, 7-3, 7-5:7-6, 7-9, 8-8, A-12, A-23, B-9
Motor
Normalizing Voltage, SP-4, SP-7, 2-31, 3-21, 3-38,
Current Detection Settings, 2-49, 5-3, 5-41:5-42
5-2, 5-29:5-30, A-9, A-25, B-8
Current Profile, 2-3, 2-47:2-49, 3-20, 3-25, 5-41,
Normalizing Voltage Multiplier, SP-4, 3-21, 3-38,
A-12
5-2, 5-29, A-25, B-8
Current Settings, 3-40, 5-1, 5-42, 5-48, B-9
Not Connected Mode, 3-14
Direct Drive KeepTrack, SP-2, SP-4:SP-5, SP-9,
1-3, 5-5, 5-88, 5-97:5-102
Direct Drive KeepTrack Tap Position Knowledge
For Regulators, 5-5, 5-98
Power Input, SP-2, SP-9, 5-98, 7-3, 7-5, 8-4
Seal-In, SP-2, SP-8, SP-10, 2-4, 2-6, 2-11, 2-28,
2-34:2-35, 2-76:2-77, 3-23:3-24, 3-45, 3-47, 5-2,
5-20:5-23, 5-41, 7-3:7-5, 8-8, A-12, A-19, A-22,
B-13, D-6
Seal-In Disconnect Output, 7-5
Seal-in Failure Alarm, 2-4, 2-76:2-77, 3-47, 5-2,
5-21, 5-23
Seal-in Failure Block, 2-6, 2-76, 3-45, 5-2,
5-20:5-21, B-13
F–7
O Outputs, SP-2, SP-4, SP-10, 1-3, 3-67, 4-13:4-14,

5-5, 5-65, 5-89, 5-106, 5-116, 7-15, 8-4:8-5, 8-9,
OK LED, 2-6 A-35, C-1, C-4
Op Count Signal, SP-5, SP-8, 2-2, 2-9:2-10, 2-27, Overcurrent Block Operation, 6-2, 6-8
2-36, 3-24, 3-44, 5-1:5-2, 5-12:5-13, A-11, A-22, Overview of Operation, 3-1, 3-11
B-14 Overvoltage
Op Count Signal Alarm, 2-2, 2-9, 3-44, 5-1:5-2, Block Raise Limit, 6-2, 6-9
5-12:5-13, A-22
Limit, SP-4, 6-2, 6-7, A-18
Open Terminal Window, 3-17
Runback Control, 6-8
Operation
Counter, SP-5, SP-7:SP-8, 2-3, 2-24, 2-32, P
2-34:2-35, 2-51, 2-53, 3-22:3-24, 3-40, 3-44,
3-47, 3-64, 3-80, 4-12, 5-2, 5-13:5-18, 5-22, Parallel Operation, SP-9, 1-3, 5-1, 5-4, 5-62, 5-65
5-27:5-28, 5-98, 5-100, 6-30, 7-4, A-13, A-36, Paralleling
B-12, D-6 Options, 3-40
Counter Inputs, 7-4 Scheme, 3-41, 5-62, 5-67:5-68, 5-72, 5-75:5-77,
Counter Input Configuration, 5-2, 5-14, 5-17:5- 5-79, 5-81, 5-84, 5-87, A-21
18, 5-22 Settings, 5-71:5-72
Counter Input Configuration Motor Seal-In, 5-2,
PC Modem, 4-3, 4-47:4-48
5-22
Peak Motor Current, 2-3, 2-48
Mode, 2-33:2-34, 3-22:3-23, 5-34, 6-3, 6-28:6-29,
6-32:6-33 Pins, 7-3:7-6
Positive Tap Position Knowledge, 5-4, 5-88, 5-94
Operational Test, 8-1, 8-5
Power Direction, 2-26:2-27, 2-33, 3-22, 3-36, 6-3,
Optional
6-28:6-29, 6-32:6-33, A-11, A-15, B-2:B-3, B-5:B-6
Bluetooth, SP-3, SP-6, SP-11, 1-3, 1-5, 3-7,
Power Direction Bias Mode, 6-3, 6-32:6-33
3-15, 3-19, 4-3, 4-49
Power Direction Bias Setpoints, 6-3, 6-28
Communication Ports, 1-3
Power Factor, SP-7:SP-8, 2-21:2-22, 2-24:2-25,
Ethernet Port, SP-3, SP-11, 1-3, 3-6, 4-3, 4-21,
2-31, 2-43, 2-68, 3-21, 3-27, 3-49, 3-79:3-80, 5-34,
4-33, 7-9:7-10
5-36:5-37, 5-110, 8-5, A-9, A-11, A-24, A-34
Master, SP-2, SP-5, 5-4, 5-72
Power Flow Reverse, 6-2, 6-4, 6-22:6-23, 6-36, A-1,
Options, 2-65, 3-19, 3-40, 3-73, 4-21, 4-49:4-50, A-17
4-52, 4-58, 5-82, 5-85, 5-94, 6-28, D-1, D-4, D-6 Power Flow Settings, 6-1, 6-3, 6-24, 6-34
OR Gate Setup, 3-56, 4-17:4-18 Power Off, 3-42:3-43, 4-2, 4-29:4-31, 5-4, 5-26,
Oscillograph 5-56, A-27, B-9:B-10
Record Triggered Screen, 2-2, 2-9 Power Resets, 2-4, 2-70
Recorder, SP-8, 2-2, 2-11, 3-52, 3-54, 4-2, Power Up, 2-6, 3-42, 4-2, 4-29, 4-31:4-32, 4-48,
4-13:4-14, 5-112, 5-119 5-26, 7-10, B-10
Setup, 3-52:3-53, 4-1:4-2, 4-13:4-14, B-1, B-16 Power Up Screens, 2-6
Output Present Demand, SP-7, 2-3, 2-21, 2-24, 2-37:2-38,
5-3, 5-37, A-1, A-10
Pulse, 5-3, 5-39:5-40, 5-106, A-26, A-29
Presettable Operation Counters, 5-2, 5-27
Selection, 3-40, 5-1, 5-3, 5-39:5-40, A-26
Primary
Status, 2-2, 2-24:2-25, 2-29, 2-34, 3-24, 8-6,
A-12 Metering, 2-2, 2-31
Test, 8-1, 8-9, A-35 Power Display Selection, 5-2:5-3, 5-31
Status, 3-20
F–8
Appendix – F
Profile, SP-6, 2-2:2-3, 2-20, 2-24, 2-45, 2-47:2-49, Resettable Operation Counter, SP-2, SP-5, 1-2, 2-3,
3-13:3-14, 3-19:3-20, 3-25, 3-29, 3-34, 3-57, 4-3, 2-11, 2-32, 2-51, 2-53, 3-22, 3-44, 3-57, 3-64, 4-4,
4-48, 4-58:4-60, 4-62, 5-41:5-42, 5-59, 6-2, 6-4:6-6, 4-12, 5-2, 5-14, 5-27, A-22
6-9:6-14, 6-16:6-18, 6-21:6-24, 6-26:6-27, 6-32:6- Resetting
37, A-1, A-12, A-15, A-23, A-30, B-2:B-7, B-22, C-3
ALL Demand History Parameter Values, 2-3, 2-39
Profile Switching, SP-6, 3-19, 4-3, 4-58:4-60, 4-62,
ALL Energy Metering Parameter Values, 2-3,
A-30, B-22
2-41
Programmable Alarm
Bluetooth Module, 4-3, 4-50, 4-53:4-54
Relay, 2-10, 3-47, 5-1:5-2, 5-8, 5-10:5-11, B-14
Bluetooth Passkey, 4-3, 4-56:4-57
Relay Mode, 5-2, 5-10
Individual Demand History Values, 2-3, 2-38
Alarms, 2-75, 3-47
Individual Energy Metering Values, 2-3, 2-41
Protocols, SP-1, SP-3, SP-11:SP-12, 1-3, 2-31, Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm, 2-4, 2-76:2-77
3-18, 3-20, 4-2, 4-21, 4-40, 4-44, 5-45, 5-53, 6-17,
Training Mode, 2-3, 2-48
7-4, 7-10, 7-18, A-29, A-33
Pushbuttons, 2-5:2-6 Resistance, 3-36:3-37, 5-8, 5-96, 6-2, 6-19, 6-21:6-
22, 8-3, A-15:A-17, A-27, B-2:B-7, B-9
Q Resistor Divider KeepTrack, SP-2, 5-5, 5-88, 5-96
Restoring Automatic Operation, 3-61
Quick Capture File Naming Convention, 2-3, 2-55
Retrieve, 2-2, 2-12, 2-15, 2-17, 3-50, 3-54, 3-57,
Quick Index, 2-1, 4-1, 5-1, 6-1
4-7, 5-110
R Retrieve Data Logging Data, 2-2, 2-17
Retrieve Sequence of Events Record, 2-2, 2-15
Raise LED, 2-6, 8-3
Rev Pwr LED, 2-6, 6-29
Ratio Multipliers, 5-1:5-2, 5-29
Reverse Bias, 6-3, 6-28, A-15
Reactance, 3-36:3-37, 5-8, 6-2, 6-19, 6-21:6-22,
Reverse LDC Z Values, 6-2, 6-23
8-3, A-15:A-17, A-27, B-2:B-7, B-9
Reverse
Real Time Voltage Chart, 2-45, 3-29
Power Operation, SP-2, SP-4, 3-36, 5-54, 5-97:5-
Real Time Voltage Plot, 2-3, 2-45, 3-20
99, 5-101:5-103, 6-1, 6-3, 6-28, 6-32:6-33, A-9,
Receive DNP Configuration File, 3-67, 3-70 A-15, B-3:B-4, B-6:B-7
Receive IEC, 2-4, 2-80 Power Operation Mode, 6-3, 6-28, 6-32:6-33
Regulation Limits, 6-1:6-2, 6-7, 6-20 RVB Scale Factor, 3-42, 5-47, A-28, B-10
Regulator
Right-Click Filter Menus, 3-78
Applications, SP-2, 2-23
RJ-45 Interface, 7-10
Type, SP-2, SP-5, 3-40, 5-1, 5-3, 5-43:5-44,
RS-232 Comm Port, 3-17, 4-3, 4-44, 4-47
A-19, A-25
RS-485, SP-3, 1-5, 3-1, 3-4:3-5, 3-17, 4-3, 4-21,
Remote 4-40:4-41, 4-43:4-44, 5-53, 6-17, A-29, B-20
Control, 1-3, 2-4, 2-72:2-73, 3-61:3-63, 5-77:5-79 RS-485 Communications, 3-1, 3-4
Tap Control, 2-4, 2-72 RTN
Voltage Bias, SP-3, SP-10, 2-2, 2-31, 3-20, 3-42, Counter, 2-24, 2-32, 3-22, 3-49, A-14
5-1, 5-3, 5-45:5-47, A-1, A-28, B-10
Fail, SP-5, 2-27, 2-36, 3-24, 3-42, 5-8, A-11,
Voltage Reduction, 2-4, 2-72 A-22, A-28, B-14
Reset Drag Hands Values, 2-3, 2-52 Status, 2-24, 2-32, 2-51, 3-22, A-14
Reset Operation Counter, 2-3, 2-53 Success Counter, 2-32, 2-51, 3-57, 5-49, A-14
F–9
Run Through Neutral, SP-3, SP-10, 2-32, 3-22, Secondary Metering Status, 2-2, 2-31
3-42, 3-47, 5-1, 5-3, 5-48:5-50, A-1, A-14, A-22, Secondary Status, 3-21
A-28, B-10
Selecting
Runback, SP-2, SP-4, 2-33, 3-36, 4-59, 5-45, 6-2,
Line Drop Compensation Type, 6-2, 6-21
6-7:6-8, 6-10, 6-16, 8-6, A-18, B-2, B-4:B-5, B-7
Paralleling Method, 5-4, 5-70:5-71
Runback Deadband, SP-4, 3-36, 6-2, 6-7, 6-10,
6-16, A-18, B-2, B-4:B-5, B-7 Save Voltage Reduction, 5-4, 5-56
Runup Deadband, SP-4, 3-36, 6-2, 6-7, 6-12, 6-16, Tap Position Knowledge From TapTalk, 5-5, 5-99,
A-18, B-2, B-4:B-5, B-7 5-100
RVB Heartbeat Timer, 3-42, 5-47, B-10 Wakeup Screen Parameters, 4-2, 4-19
RVB Scale Factor, 3-42, 5-45, 5-47, A-28, B-10 Self-Test Alarm, SP-2, SP-5, SP-10, 7-5, 7-13:7-14
RX LEDS, 2-9 Send, 2-4, 2-35:2-36, 2-80, 3-14, 3-61, 3-65:3-67,
3-69:3-70, 3-72, 4-7, 4-14, 4-49, 4-55, 5-74:5-75,
S 5-89, 5-92, C-1, C-5
Send DNP Configuration File, 3-69
Save
Send Firmware Update, 3-61, 3-72
Comm Block, 3-42, 4-29:4-31, B-10
Sequence of Events Recorder, SP-3, SP-8, 2-2,
IEC, 2-4, 2-67, A-31 2-14, 2-16, 3-25, 3-55, 3-57, 4-2, 4-15:4-17, 5-5,
Voltage Reduction, 3-43, 5-4, 5-56 5-112, 5-115, 5-119
Saving Sequential, SP-2, SP-4, 2-26, 2-32, 2-34, 3-22:3-24,
3-40, 4-58, 5-5, 5-39, 5-62, 5-106, 7-5
Data Log, 2-3, 2-56, 2-58
Serial, SP-11, 2-6, 2-55, 2-61, 2-65, 2-71, 3-2:3-3,
DNP Configuration, 2-4, 2-64
3-5:3-6, 3-15, 3-45, 3-63, 4-13:4-14, 4-29, 4-33,
Metering Data, 2-4, 2-64 4-47:4-50, 5-43, 5-74:5-75, 7-18:7-19, A-30, A-36,
Oscillograph Record, 2-3, 2-60 B-20, C-4
Sequence of Events, 2-3, 2-59 Set
Setpoints, 2-3, 2-58 Active Setpoint Profile, 2-2, 2-20
SCADA Date, 3-61, 3-64, 4-10:4-12, A-22
Cutout, 2-26, 2-34, 3-24, 3-40, 5-2, 5-24, 7-5, Metering Colors, 2-29, 3-20, 3-33
A-23, B-9 Set-up Procedure, 8-1
Cutout Input, 7-5, A-23, B-9 Setpoint Profile, 2-2, 2-20, 3-13, 3-34, 4-58, 6-2,
HeartBeat, SP-1, SP-6, 3-19, 4-1, 4-3, 4-58:4-61, 6-4:6-6, 6-9:6-14, 6-16:6-18, 6-21:6-24, 6-26:6-27,
B-22 6-32:6-37, A-15
Initiated Manual Raise, 5-3, 5-39 Setpoint Profile Name, 6-2, 6-5
SCAMP Control, 2-4, 2-72, 3-61 Setting
SCAMP Initialize, 3-42, 4-2, 4-31:4-32, 5-26, B-10 Auto, 5-2, 5-26
Screen Blanking, 2-6 Auxiliary Current Transformer Rating, 5-3, 5-35:5-
SD Card Access Code, 2-66, 3-61, 3-66 36
SD Card Quick Capture, 2-3, 2-55:2-56, A-31 Bandcenter, 6-3, 6-34:6-35
Seal-In Failure, 2-4, 2-6, 2-11, 2-26:2-27, 2-33:2-35, Basic Time Delay Timer Characteristic, 6-3,
2-76:2-77, 3-23, 3-45, 3-47, 5-2, 5-20:5-21, 5-23, 6-26:6-27
A-11, A-19, B-13 Block Raise Limit, 6-2, 6-16
Secondary, 2-2, 2-21, 2-23, 2-31, 2-43, 3-20:3-21, Comm Block Auto, 4-2, 4-29:4-30
3-27, 3-30, 3-45, 5-3, 5-32, 5-36, 5-45, 5-62, 6-19, Communication Addresses, 4-2, 4-29
7-8, 7-12, 8-4, A-9:A-10 CT, 5-3, 5-34:5-35
F–10
Appendix – F
Date, 4-2, 4-12 Voltage Reduction Steps, 6-2, 6-17:6-18

Fast Voltage Recovery, 5-3, 5-51 Voltage Reduction Turnoff Timer, 5-4, 5-57
Feeder Address, 4-2, 4-28 Settings Menu, 1-3, 3-45, 3-80, 5-15:5-16, 5-23,
Highest, 5-5, 5-104:5-105 5-27, 5-99, 5-101:5-102, 5-104:5-105, 5-107:5-108,
Highest Tap, 5-5, 5-104 6-17, 6-21:6-24, 6-26, 6-32, 6-34, 6-36, A-20
Intertap Time Delay, 5-5, 5-107 Setup Comm Port, 3-17, 4-44
Level, 4-2, 4-4, 4-6 Setup Oscillograph Recorder, 4-2, 4-14, 5-119
Line Drop Compensation, 6-2, 6-24 Setup Sequence of Events Recorder, 4-2, 4-17
Load, 5-3, 5-32:5-33, 5-38 Shaft Coupled KeepTrack, SP-2, 5-4, 5-88, 5-94:5-
95
Load VT Configuration, 5-3, 5-38
Simplified Schematic of Current Circuit, 5-66
Load VT Correction Factor, 5-3, 5-32
Smart
Lowest Tap, 5-5, 5-105
Flash SD Card Slot, SP-3, SP-10, 2-9:2-10, 2-13,
Masters, 5-4, 5-77, 5-79
2-55, 4-4, 4-9, 4-22, 4-24, 4-27:4-28, 4-35:4-36,
Motor Seal-in Failure Alarm, 5-2, 5-23 4-38:4-39, 4-41, 4-44, 4-50, 4-54, 4-56
Multi Level Access Codes, 4-2, 4-7 Flash SD Card User Access Code, 2-4, 2-66
Op Count Signal Alarm, 5-2, 5-13 Reverse Power, SP-1:SP-2, SP-4, 3-36, 6-3, 6-30
Operation Counter Time Window, 5-2, 5-16 Voltage Reduction, SP-2, 3-43, 5-4, 5-53:5-55,
Operation Counter X Mode Delay, 5-2, 5-15 6-17, A-27, B-9
Output Configuration, 5-3, 5-40 Voltage Reduction From TapTalk, 5-4, 5-55
Power Flow Forward, 6-2, 6-22:6-23 SOE Format, 3-61, 3-73
Primary Power Display Selection, 5-3, 5-31 Source
Programmable Alarm Relay Inputs, 5-2, 5-8, 5-11 Address Validation, 3-67, 3-69, 4-2, 4-24:4-25,
Programmable Alarm Relay Mode, 5-2, 5-10 4-34, 4-36, 4-38, 4-43:4-44, 4-46:4-47, 4-52:4-53,
Regulator Type, 5-3, 5-44 A-29, C-1
Reverse Power Operation, 6-3, 6-32:6-33 Phase Shift Quantities From TapTalk, 5-3, 5-35
Run Through Neutral, 5-3, 5-48, 5-50 Phase Shift Quantities From The HMI, 5-3, 5-34
Save Voltage Reduction, 5-4, 5-56 Voltage, SP-2, SP-5, SP-7:SP-8, 2-4, 2-17, 2-21,
SCADA HeartBeat Option, 4-3, 4-60 2-24:2-25, 2-31, 2-45, 2-69, 3-20:3-21, 3-29,
3-40, 3-49, 3-57, 3-80, 4-15, 5-29, 5-36, 5-43,
SCAMP Initialize, 4-2, 4-31:4-32 5-98, 5-110, 6-29, 7-1, 7-6, A-9, A-24:A-25
Smart Voltage Reduction, 5-4, 5-54 Voltage Input, SP-2, 2-4, 2-69, 7-1, 7-6
Source VT Correction Factor, 5-3, 5-33 VT Correction Factors From TapTalk, 5-3, 5-33
Standard, 5-4, 5-55
Standard Voltage Reduction, 3-43, 5-4, 5-53, 6-17,
Substation Address, 4-2, 4-27 A-26, B-9
Tap Limits From TapTalk, 5-5, 5-108:5-109 Starting TapPlot, 3-74
The Definite, 6-3, 6-36:6-37 Starting TapTalk, 3-2, 7-18
Demand Interval, 2-3, 2-37:2-38 Status Indicators, 2-2, 2-5:2-6
Intertap Delay, 5-5, 5-107 Substation Addressing, 3-18, 4-2, 4-25:4-26
Voltage, 5-2, 5-29:5-30, 5-113, 6-2, 6-10, 6-12 Surge Withstand Capability, SP-14, 7-15
Time, 4-2, 4-10
Timeout, 4-2, 4-23
User Lines, 4-2, 4-9, 4-10
VAr Bias, 5-4, 5-61
F–11
Switch Status, 5-2, 5-17, 5-18 TapPlot, SP-3, SP-8, SP-19, 2-12, 2-15, 3-1, 3-52,
Switch Status Input, SP-2, SP-5, SP-9, 7-4, A-22 3-54, 3-61, 3-74:3-77, 3-79, 3-81, 4-13
System Clock, 3-8, 4-1:4-2, 4-4, 4-10, A-1, A-22 TapTalk
System Setup, 1-1, 2-5, 3-17:3-19, 4-1:4-2, 4-4, Compatibility, 3-8
7-18 Reverse Power Vendor Cross Reference, 6-3,
6-31
T S-2001D Communications Software, SP-11,
1-1:1-3, 2-1, 3-1:3-2, 3-11, 3-52, 4-1, 4-13, 4-21,
Tap
5-1, 6-1, 7-1, 7-18
Calibration, 3-45, 5-89, B-13
S-2001D Communications Software Installation,
Changer Failure, SP-5, 2-10, 2-35, 3-23, 3-47, 2-1, 7-1, 7-18
5-8, A-22, B-14
Test Mode, 8-1, 8-6, A-34
Information, 1-3, 2-2:2-3, 2-5, 2-24, 2-32, 2-51:2-
53, 3-22, 3-44, 5-1, 5-4, 5-18, 5-22, 5-27, 5-88, Testing, 1-1, 5-64, 8-1, 8-6, 8-8:8-10
5-94, 5-97:5-100, 5-104:5-105, 6-8, 6-29, A-1, Three Phase, SP-1:SP-2, SP-7, 2-2, 2-21:2-22,
A-13:A-14, A-19, B-12 2-24, 2-31, 2-43, 3-20, 3-27, 3-38, 5-31, 5-34,
Limits, 3-44, 5-1, 5-5, 5-48, 5-98, 5-105, 5-108:5- 5-36:5-37, B-8
109, 6-8, A-19, B-12 Three Transformers, 5-68
Position, SP-1:SP-5, SP-7:SP-9, SP-15:SP-17, Timeout, 3-17, 3-19, 3-41, 4-2, 4-21:4-23, 5-45,
1-3:1-4, 2-3, 2-10, 2-22, 2-24, 2-26, 2-28, 2-32, 5-74, 5-76:5-78, 5-81, 5-85, A-21, A-30, A-32, B-11,
2-34:2-36, 2-51:2-53, 2-72, 2-76, 3-22:3-24, 3-28, B-21, C-4, E-2
3-36, 3-41, 3-44:3-45, 3-47, 3-49, 3-57, 3-61, Timer, SP-6:SP-7, SP-10, 2-6, 2-24, 2-32:2-33,
3-80, 4-15, 4-19, 5-4:5-5, 5-8, 5-20:5-21, 5-37, 2-35, 2-51, 3-22, 3-36, 3-42:3-44, 3-49, 4-58:4-59,
5-48, 5-63:5-64, 5-72, 5-74:5-79, 5-81, 5-85:5-89, 5-4, 5-14, 5-39, 5-45:5-47, 5-53, 5-57:5-58, 5-74,
5-91:5-92, 5-94:5-103, 5-110, 6-2, 6-8, 6-28:6-29, 5-106, 6-3, 6-7, 6-17, 6-25:6-27, 6-36, 7-6, A-13,
7-4:7-5, 7-9, 8-5, A-11:A-15, A-19, A-21:A-22, A-15, A-28, B-2:B-3, B-5:B-6, B-9:B-10, B-15
A-24, B-9, B-13:B-14, D-6
Toolbar Editor, 3-33
Position Block, 6-2, 6-8
Transformer Applications, SP-2, 1-3, 2-23, 5-64,
Position Knowledge, SP-1:SP-2, SP-4:SP-5, 1-3, 5-88
3-44, 5-4:5-5, 5-88, 5-94, 5-96:5-103, 6-28:6-29,
Transient Protection, 7-15
7-4:7-5, 7-9, B-9
Trigger
Position Knowledge For LTCs, 5-5, 5-96:5-97
Oscillograph Recorder, 2-2, 2-11
Setting, 3-42, 3-44, 5-104:5-105
Sequence of Events Recorder, 2-2, 2-14
Statistics, 2-3, 2-24, 2-51, 2-53:2-54, 3-20, 3-28,
3-45, A-14, B-13 Triggers, 3-30, 3-45, 3-54, 4-15:4-16, 5-5, 5-116
Tapchanger Two Transformers, SP-5, 5-63:5-64, 5-66:5-67
Lower Output, 7-4 Type, 5-2:5-3, 5-26, 5-44, 6-3, 6-26, 6-27
Raise, 2-6, 7-3, A-26 Typical
Status, 2-2, 2-24:2-26, 2-33, 3-22, 5-86, A-11 Connections, 7-13:7-14
Type, 2-19, 2-48, 2-74, 2-76, 2-78, 3-34:3-35, LTC Connection, 7-1, 7-12
4-10, 4-29, 4-31, 5-1:5-2, 5-6, 5-10:5-12, 5-14:5- Regulator Connection, 7-1, 7-12
17, 5-22:5-27, 5-29, 5-31:5-35, 5-38:5-39, 5-42,
5-44, 5-46, 5-48, 5-51, 5-53:5-54, 5-56:5-57,
5-59, 5-70, 5-79, 5-83, 5-99, 5-101:5-102,
5-104:5-105, 5-107:5-108, 5-110, 5-112:5-114,
5-116, A-1, A-19
Type Selections, 5-1:5-2, 5-6
F–12
Appendix – F
U Voltage
Input, SP-1:SP-2, SP-4, SP-6, SP-9, 2-4, 2-69,
UDP Port Settings, 3-67, 3-70 5-29, 7-1, 7-3, 7-6, 8-4:8-5
Undervoltage Block, 5-53, 6-2, 6-7, 6-11, 6-17 Reduction Step, 2-28, 2-72, 3-36, 3-61, 6-17:6-
Undervoltage Block Lower Limit, 6-2, 6-11 18, 7-3:7-5, 7-9, 8-3, A-15, B-2:B-3, B-5:B-6
USB, SP-1:SP-2, SP-11, 1-3, 3-1:3-3, 3-15, 4-21, Regulation With LDC, 6-2, 6-19
4-33, 7-9, 7-18:7-19 Regulation Without LDC, 6-2, 6-19
User Access Codes, SP-2, 4-1:4-2, 4-4:4-6, 4-21 Runback, 2-33, 6-2, 6-7, 6-10
User Lines, 2-5:2-6, 2-9:2-10, 3-48, 3-63, 4-1:4-2, Runback Deadband, 6-2, 6-10
4-4, 4-9:4-10, 4-19, 4-48 Runup, 6-2, 6-7, 6-12:6-13, A-18
User Programmable Alarm Relay, 5-1:5-2, 5-8 Runup Deadband From The HMI, 6-2, 6-12
User-Programmable Alarm, SP-5, 7-5, 7-13:7-14
VR, 2-5:2-6, 2-28, 2-33, 3-23, 3-43, 5-53:5-56, 6-20,
Using Neutral Contact Input, 5-4, 5-91:5-92 A-12, A-26:A-27, B-9
V VR2, SP-5, 5-2, 5-25, 5-89, 5-92, 8-8, A-23, B-9
VT Phase Shift, 5-3, 5-34
VA, SP-7:SP-9, 2-22, 2-24:2-25, 2-31, 2-37, 2-43, VT Ratio Correction, SP-2, SP-5, 2-21, 5-3, 5-32,
3-20, 3-27, 3-49, 3-80, 5-37, 5-110, 7-3, 7-12, A- 5-36, 8-5, A-25
9:A-11, A-24
VAr, SP-1:SP-3, SP-5:SP-9, SP-19, 2-10:2-11, W
2-21:2-22, 2-24, 2-26:2-27, 2-31, 2-33, 2-35, 2-40,
2-43, 3-20, 3-22, 3-24, 3-27, 3-40, 3-43, 3-47, 3-49, Wakeup
3-80, 5-1, 5-4, 5-8, 5-37, 5-54, 5-58:5-70, 5-88, Message Screens, 2-2, 2-10
5-110, 7-4, A-10:A-11, A-22, A-24, A-26, B-10, B-14 Screen Parameter Save, 2-4, 2-68
VAr Bias, SP-1:SP-2, SP-5:SP-6, SP-8, 2-10, 2-27, Screens, 2-10, 2-68, 3-34, 3-48, 4-1:4-2, 4-19,
2-33, 2-35, 3-22, 3-24, 3-43, 3-47, 5-1, 5-4, 5-8, B-1, B-14
5-54, 5-58:5-61, A-11, A-22, A-26, B-10, B-14
Watchdog, 2-4, 2-70, A-35
VAr Bias Effect, 2-33, 2-35, 3-22, 3-24
Watts, SP-7:SP-8, 2-22, 2-24:2-25, 2-31, 2-37, 2-40,
VAr Bias Lead, SP-5, 2-27, 2-35, 3-24, 5-8, A-11,
2-43, 3-20, 3-27, 3-49, 3-80, 5-34, 5-37, 5-110, A-
A-22
9:A-10
VAr Bias Setpoints, 5-4, 5-58
VAR Method, 5-63, 5-66:5-68 X
VAR2, SP-5, 3-40, 5-4, 5-62:5-65, 5-70, 7-4, 7-6
X Mode Delay, 3-44, 5-2, 5-14:5-17, A-20, A-36,
VAR2 Connection, 5-4, 5-64 B-12
VAR2 Paralleling, 5-4, 5-63, 5-65, 7-6 XFMR, 3-44, 5-5, 5-94, 5-96, 5-99:5-100, 5-102:5-
VAR2 Settings, 5-4, 5-70 105, A-19, B-12
Vdc Wetting Voltage, 5-91, 7-3:7-4
Z
View
Menu, 3-79 Z, SP-2, SP-4, 3-36:3-37, 3-43, 5-54:5-55, 6-2,
Sequence of Events, 2-2, 2-16 6-20:6-21, 6-23:6-24, A-15, A-27, B-2:B-3, B-5:B-6
Tap Statistics, 2-3, 2-54
Viewing Specific Tap Statistics, 2-3, 2-53
Volt Red Pushbutton, 2-6
F–13
F–14
Legal Information
Patent Indemnification
The Seller shall not be liable for any property
The units described in this manual are covered by damages whatsoever or for any loss or damage
U.S. Patents, with other patents pending. arising out of, connected with, or resulting from
Buyer shall hold harmless and indemnify the Seller, this contract, or from the performance or breach
its directors, officers, agents, and employees from thereof, or from all services covered by or furnished
any and all costs and expense, damage or loss, under this contract.
resulting from any alleged infringementof United In no event shall the Seller be liable for special,
States Letters Patent or rights accruing thereform or incidental, exemplary, or consequential damages,
trademarks, whether federal, state, or common law, including but not limited to, loss of profits or
arising from the Seller’s compliance with Buyer’s revenue, loss of use of the equipment or any
designs, specifications, or instructions. associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of
purchased power, cost of substitute equipment,
facilities or services, downtime costs, or claims or
Warranty damages of customers or employees of the Buyer

for such damages, regardless of whether said claim
or damages is based on contract, warranty, tort
Seller hereby warrants that the goods which are the including negligence, or otherwise.
subject matter of this contract will be manufactured
Under no circumstances shall the Seller be liable
in a good workmanlike manner and all materials
for any personal injury whatsoever.
used herein will be new and reasonably suitable for
the equipment. Seller warrants that if, during a It is agreed that when the equipment furnished
period of ten years from date of shipment of the hereunder are to be used or performed in connec-
equipment, the equipment rendered shall be found tion with any nuclear installation, facility, or
by the Buyer to be faulty or shall fail to peform in activity, Seller shall have no liability for any
accordance with Seller’s specifications of the nuclear damage, personal injury, property damage,
product, Seller shall at his expense correct the or nuclear contamination to any property located at
same, provided, however, that Buyers shall ship the or near the site of the nuclear facility. Buyer agrees
equipment prepaid to Seller’s facility. The Seller’s to indemnify and hold harmless the Seller against
responsibility hereunder shall be limited to replace- any and all liability associated therewith whatso-
ment value of the equipment furnished under this ever whether based on contract, tort, or otherwise.
contract. Nuclear installation or facility means any nuclear
reactor and includes the site on which any of the
Seller makes no warranties expressed or implied
foregoing is located, all operations conducted on
other than those set out above. Seller specifically
such site, and all premises used for such opera-
excludes the implied warranties of merchantibility
tions.
and fitness for a particular purpose. There are no
warranties which extend beyond the description
contained herein. In no event shall Seller be liable for
consequential, exemplary, or punitive damages of
Notice:
whatever nature. Any illustrations and descriptions by Beckwith
Any equipment returned for repair must be sent Electric Co., Inc. are for the sole purpose of
with transportation charges prepaid. The equipment identification.
must remain the property of the Buyer. The afore- The drawings and/or specifications enclosed herein
mentioned warranties are void if the value of the are the proprietary property of Beckwith Electric
unit is invoiced to the Seller at the time of return. Co., Inc., and are issued in strict confidence;
therefore, shall not be used as a basis of reproduc-
tion of the apparatus described therein without
written permission of Beckwith Electric Co., Inc.
No illustration or description contained herein
shall be construed as an express warranty of
affirmation, promise, description, or sample, and
any and all such express warranties are specifically
excluded nor shall such illustration or description
imply a warranty that the product is merchantable
or fit for a particular purpose. There shall be no
warranties which extend beyond those contained in
the Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. terms of sale.
All rights reserved by Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. No reproduction may be made without prior written approval
of the Company.
BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO., INC.
6190 - 118th Avenue North • Largo, Florida 33773-3724 U.S.A.
PHONE (727) 544-2326 • FAX (727) 546-0121
marketing@beckwithelectric.com
www.beckwithelectric.com
ISO 9001:2008
© 2010 Beckwith Electric Co. All Rights Reserved. 800‑2001D‑IB‑04 10/13

Printed in USA

LTC controller-books-M-2001D-IB PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

LTC controller-books-M-2001D-IB PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Instruction Book

• VAr Bias for downstream coordination with capacitor controls

Features • Operations Counter

• Adjustable Bandcenter • Auto/Off/Manual Switch Status via SCADA

• Adjustable Bandwidth • A or B Regulator Type Selection

• Adjustable VAr Bias • Control Voltage Input

• Line Drop Compensation, R, X and Z • Motor Power Input

Features (Cont.) Optional Features

VT Ratio Correction: VT correction from –15 V to +15 V in 0.1 V increments.

Tap Position Knowledge

Demand History (Drag Hands Operation):

Run Through Neutral

Remote Voltage Bias

Front Panel Controls

Smart Flash SD Card Slot

Voltage Measurement Accuracy

COM 1, RS-485, (2Wire),

Printer WindowsTM based computer Running

Figure 1 Direct Connection

WindowsTM based computer Running

ST Multi-mode 62/125 Optical Fiber

Dymec Model No. 5843 TX

Figure 2 Fiber Optic Connection Loop (optional V-pin connection available)

WindowsTM based computer Running

Model No. 485 LP9TB A

Figure 3 RS‑485 Network Connection

WindowsTM based computer Running

Figure 4 Ethernet Network Connection

Tests and Standards

IEC 60255-5 > 100 Megaohms

Fast Transient Disturbance Test

Surge Withstand Capability

IEEE 2,500 V oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to earth

Radiated Field Immunity

Conducted Field Immunity

IEC 60068-2-1 Cold, –40° C

Recommended Storage Parameters

Patent & Warranty

Specification subject to change without notice.

Sensor Rotation Range Degrees/Tap Taps Neutrals Rotation/Slope

M-2026/M-2027 Control Power Backup Supplies

 NOTE: It must be ordered in the input range needed.

M-2026 AC-DC M-2027 Control

B-1021 Control Backup

B-0920 Control Backup

Figure 6 Typical M-2026/M-2027 Control Power Backup Supply Application

Figure 7 M-2001D Style Selection Chart

Bluetooth is the Registered Trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

DANGER! HIGH VOLTAGE

PERSONNEL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Always Ground the Equipment

Do NOT operate in an explosive environment

Keep away from live circuits

Exercise care during installation, operation, & maintenance procedures

Do not modify equipment

Avoid static charge

Use caution when measuring resistances

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement

Chapter 2 Operation (Cont.'d)

Chapter 2 Operation (Cont.'d)

Chapter 2 Operation (Cont.'d)

Chapter 2 Operation (Cont.'d)

Chapter 2 Operation (Cont.'d)